MGU BTech SYLLABUS

B.TECH.
DEGREE COURSE
SCHEME AND SYLLABI

(2002-03 ADMISSION ONWARDS)
MAHATMA GANDHI UNIVERSITY

KOTTAYAM
KERALA
REGARDS CC
REGULATIONS
(Effective from 2002-03 admission onwards)
1. Conditions for admission
Candidates for admission to the B.Tech. Degree course shall be required to have passed the higher
secondary/+2/XII Std. examination conducted by boards/departments recognized/accepted by the
University, obtaining not less than 50% marks in Mathematics and not less than 50% marks in
Mathematics, Physics and Chemistry put together or the diploma examination in Engineering, Kerala or
any examination accepted by the Government of Kerala as equivalent there to with 50% marks in the
final qualifying examination, subject to the usual concession allowed for backward and other
communities as specified from time to time.
2. Duration of the course
a) The course for the B.Tech. Degree shall extend over a period of four academic years comprising
of 8 semesters. The first and second semester combined and each semester from third semester
onwards shall cover the groups of subjects as given in the scheme of studies and examinations.
b) Each semester shall normally comprise of 16 weeks.
c) The course calendar will be as follows.
Semesters Commencement Closing Examination

After the admissions
I & II Semesters 31st of March 15th April
are over.
IV, VI and VIII
December 1st 31st of March 15th April
Semesters
III, V and VII First working day of 15th October
30th of September
Semesters June
3. Eligibility for the Degree
Candidates for admission to the Degree of B.Tech. shall be required to have undergone the prescribed
course of study in an institution maintained or affiliated to Mahatma Gandhi University for a period of
not less than four academic years and to have passed all examinations specified in the scheme. The first
academic year of study shall be from the date of commencement of admission till the closure of the
academic year. The remaining 6 semester will have to be completed within 3 subsequent academic
years.
4. Subjects of Study
The subjects of study shall be in accordance with the scheme and syllabi given in the Annexure.
5. Electives
All students shall choose electives in VII and VIII semesters, from a prescribed set of elective subjects
offered by the institution, as indicated in the scheme. There should be at least 20% students of the class
for an elective subject to be offered. New electives may be introduced according to the needs of
emerging fields in technology. The name of the elective and its syllabus should be approved by the
university before the course is offered.
6. Sessional work
2
Sessional marks for Theory, Drawing, Workshops, Laboratories and Practical will be awarded by the
teaching faculty based on the day to day performance of the students. The allocation of sessional marks
for the individual subjects shall be on the following basis.
Theory Subjects Practical Subjects

Attendance 20% Attendance 20%
Regular class
Assignments 20% work/Drawing/Workshop Record/Lab 60%
Record and Class Performance
Tests 60% Tests 20%
The sessional marks allotted for attendance shall be awarded in direct proportion to the percentage of
attendance secured by the candidate in the subject. However full sessional marks for attendance shall be
awarded to those who are securing 80% attendance and above.
7. Examination
There shall be University Examinations at the end of the first academic year and at the end of every
semester from third semester onwards in subjects as prescribed in the scheme of examination.
8. Eligibility for appearing examination is subject to the following
a) The student should have successfully completed the course work for the year/semester.
b) The student should have not less than 75% attendance for the particular year in the case of I & II
semesters combined or the particular semester in the case of higher semesters.
However, he is eligible for condonation of attendance (once in case of I & II semesters combined or
twice in the case of higher semesters) subject to the conditions given below in the entire course.
His conduct must be satisfactory.
The shortage shall not be more than 10% of actual working days.
Condonation is given only on medical grounds.
The condonation shall be granted subject to rules and procedures prescribed by the University
from time to time.
It is open to the Vice Chancellor to grant condonation of shortage of attendance on the
recommendation of Principal.
9. Repetition of the course work
a) A student who is not eligible for condonation of shortage of attendance shall repeat the course in
full including the sessional work in the next immediate chance. The sessional marks earned
during repetition of course alone will be counted in such case.
b) A student can repeat the course only once in each semester/year.
c) A student can also repeat the course work for improving sessional marks subject to the following
conditions.
He shall repeat the course work in full (including sessionals) in a particular semester/year
once and that too at the earliest available opportunity.
He shall not combine his course work with regular course work of any other semester.
A candidate who has satisfactorily completed the VIII semester course will not be allowed to
repeat the course work in any semester.
He shall not be allowed to repeat the course work of any semester if he has already passed
that semester examination in full.
3
A candidate who has been registered for the higher semester examination will not be allowed
to repeat the course work, in lower semester.
The sessional marks obtained during the repeated course only shall be considered for all
purposes.
d) For repeating the course in any of the above cases the character and conduct of the student must
be satisfactory as certified by the Head of the Institution.
10. Conduct of Examination
To conduct all the theory examinations, a Chief Superintendent and an Assistant Chief Superintendent
should be appointed by the Principal. An external Chief Superintendent should also be appointed by the
University as an Observer for conducting all theory examinations in Self-financing Engineering
Colleges.
The examination in theory papers will be conducted in accordance with the following schedule as far as
possible.
Fore Noon After Noon
Tues. day 1 1 & 2, 6 4, 8
Wed. day 2 5 3, 7
Thurs. day 3 1 & 2, 6 4, 8
Fri. day 4 5 3, 7
Mon. day 5 1 & 2, 6 4, 8
Tues. day 6 5 3, 7
Wed. day 7 1 & 2, 6 4, 8
Thurs. day 8 5 3, 7
Fri. day 9 1 & 2, 6 4, 8
Mon. day 10 1 & 2, 6 4, 8
Tues. day 11 5 3, 7
Wed. day 12 1&2
Thurs. day 13 5 3, 7
Fri. day 14 1&2
Mon. day 15 1&2
(Main and supplementary examinations will alternate)
Conduct of Practical Examinations
The Principals of the concerned Engineering Colleges with the help of the Chairmen of all branches will
conduct the practical examination for all semesters with the approval from the University and bonafide
laboratory record, workshop record/project record, seminar report are mandatory for appearing
practical/viva voce university examinations.
To conduct each practical examination, an External Examiner and an Internal Examiner should be
appointed by the University. In Self-financing Engineering Colleges, no practical examination should be
conducted without the presence of an External Examiner appointed by the University.
11. Minimum for a pass
A candidate shall be declared to have passed in any individual subject of a semester/year examination if
he secures not less than 40% marks for the subject in University examination and not less than 50% of
the total marks for the subject, i.e., University examination marks and sessional marks in that subject put
together. A candidate who passes in all the subjects of a semester examination shall be declared to have
passed the examination in full.
12. Improvement of marks
4
A candidate shall be allowed to re-appear for any theory examination in order to improve the marks
already obtained subject to the following conditions.
a) The candidate shall be permitted to take the improvement examination only during the chance
immediately after the first appearance.
b) The candidate shall not be allowed to appear for an improvement examination for the subject of
the VIII semester.
c) The improved marks (better of the two) obtained by the candidate for each subject he has
appeared for shall be counted for all purposes.
d) A candidate can apply for improvement in three subjects in combined SI&II provided he/she has
passed all the theory subjects.
e) A candidate can apply improvement in two subjects in combined SI&II if he/she has only one
supplementary theory examination.
f) A candidate can improve one subject in combined SI&II if he/she has only two supplementary
theory examinations.
g) Those candidates who have to write supplementary examination in three or more theory papers in
combined SI&II will not be eligible for improvement of any paper.
h) For higher semesters (SIII to SVII) (i) a candidate can apply for improvement in two subjects if
he/she has passed all theory subjects (ii) a candidate can apply for improvement in one subjects if
he/she has passed five theory subjects (iii) a candidate shall not be eligible for improvement of
any paper if he/she has failed for two or more theory subjects.
i) No candidate shall be permitted to improve the marks for practical examination.
j) A candidate shall be allowed to withdraw from the whole examination of a semester in
accordance with the rules for cancellation of examinations, of the University.
13. Promotion to Higher semesters

A student is eligible to be promoted to the higher semesters subject to the following conditions.
He should have successfully completed the lower semester.
He should have obtained 75% attendance in the lower semester or obtained condonation as per
University rules.
A student shall be permitted to register for any semester examination only if he had registered for
the previous semester examination.
A student can be permitted to register for the V semester University examination only if he has
passed fully the combined I & II semester examination.
A student can be permitted to register for the VII semester examination only if he has passed
fully the III and IV semester examination.
14. Completion of the course
The degree will be awarded to the candidate only if he successfully completes the course work and has
passed all the examinations within a period of 8 years from the time of admission.
15. Classification of Successful candidates
a) A candidate who qualifies for the Degree passing all the semester examinations within five
academic years (10 consecutive semesters) after commencement of his course of study and has
secured not less than 75% of the aggregate of the total marks in all the 8 semesters shall be
declared to have passes B.Tech. Examination in First Class with Distinction.
b) A candidate who qualifies for the Degree passing all the semester examinations within five
academic years (10 consecutive semesters) after the commencement of the course of study and
5
has secured not less than 60% of the aggregate of the total marks in all the 8 semesters shall be
declared to have passes B.Tech. Examination in First Class.
c) All other successful candidates shall be declared to have passed B.Tech. Degree Examination
in Second Class.
d) Successful candidates who complete the examination in four academic years (8 consecutive
semesters and chances) after the commencement of the course of study shall be ranked branch-
wise on the basis of the aggregate of the total marks for all the eight semesters.
16. Industrial visit
It is desirable to conduct Industry/Establishment/Site visits of one day duration as suggested by the
department in 3rd to 8th semesters. Such visits should be limited to 15 numbers during the course and
these days will be counted for attendance.
17. Co-curricular Activities and Extra Murals
a) ‘Students’ Counselling
Students counselling must be undertaken either during Saturdays or after regular working hours
or on other holidays depending upon the convenience of students and faculty members. A team
of 3 faculty members including group tutor of the class is expected to conduct regular
counselling for duration of 5 hours/week in order to help the students in their curricular and
personal problems.
b) Industrial/Field Training & Literature Overview
In order to promote Industry-Institute Interaction and to impart hands-on experience in the field
work/literature overview, 3 hours/week must be set apart for each class in addition to regular
working hours under the supervision of the faculty members.
c) Seminar, Symposium, Group Discussions etc.
Orientation lectures, Seminars etc. will be presented by the faculty and experts from Industries or
other Educational institutions. Also there will be Seminars, Debates and Group Discussions
presented by the students to develop their communication skill. 3 hours/week from 4 P.M. to 5
P.M. is to be apart for this, which is to be, supervised by the faculty members.
d) Project work
For the students in final semester, in addition to 4 hours allotted to regular project work, 5
hours/week must also be added on during Saturdays or other holidays in order to improve the
quality of the projects undertaken. A candidate will not be permitted to appear for the project
work/viva voce examinations unless, he/she submits the project report within the prescribed date
(March 15th).
18. Question Papers
Question papers for Mathematics of all semesters and Engineering Graphics of I & II semesters
combined shall contain two questions from each module of the relevant syllabus, one of which will have
to be answered. All other theory papers will normally have the question papers in the following pattern.
Part A Short answer questions covering the whole syllabus with maximum 40% marks for this part.
All questions are compulsory.
Part B Two questions from each module of the syllabus out of which one is to be answered.
Maximum marks for this part is 60%.
19. Revision of Regulations
6
The University may from time to time revise, amend or change the Regulations, scheme of studies, and
examination and syllabi. The changes, unless specified otherwise, will have effect from the beginning of
the academic year/semester following the Notification from the UNIVERSITY.
7
Scheme – I & II Semesters Combined
e – I & II (Common to all branches)
Course Subject Teaching Period Duration Marks

No. of Uty.
Exam
(hrs)
Lect. Tut. Prac. Session The Prac Total
al ory tical
CME
LRPTA
101 Engineering Mathematics I 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
102 Engineering Physics 1 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
103 Engineering Chemistry 1 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
104 Engineering Mechanics 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
105 Engineering Graphics 1 - 3 3 50 100 - 150
106 Basic Civil Engineering 1 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
107 Basic Mechanical Engineering 1 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
108 Basic Electrical Engineering 1 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
109 Basic Electronics Engineering 1 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
110 Workshop - - 6* - 50x3 - - 150
Total 12 9 9 - 600 900 - 1500
*3 periods will be in Mechanical Engineering Workshop and 3 periods in Civil Engineering Workshop &
Electrical Engineering Workshop alternately.
8
CIVIL ENGINEERING
3 SEMESTER
RD
Duration No. of periods per Marks

Subject of Uty. week (hrs)
Subject
Code Exam Lect. Tut. Prac. Session Theory Practi Total
(hrs.) al cal
CMELP Engineering 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
A301 Mathematics -II
C302 Fluid Mechanics – I 3 3 2 - 50 100 - 150
C303 Mechanics of Solids 3 2 2 - 50 100 - 150
C304 Construction Engineering 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
and Management
C305 Surveying -I 3 3 1 50 100 - 150
C306 Civil Engineering 3 - - 3 50 100 - 150
Drawing - I
C307 Material Testing 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
Laboratory – 1
C308 Surveying practical – 1 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
Total 24 14 7 9 400 600 200 1200
4 SEMESTER
TH

Subject
Code Exam Lect. Tut. Prac. Session Theory Practi Total
(hrs.) al cal
CMELRP Engineering 3 3 1 - 50 100 150
TA401 Mathematics -III
C402 Fluid Mechanics – II 3 2 2 - 50 100 150
C403 Structural Analysis - I 3 2 2 - 50 100 150
C404 Engg. Economics and 3 2 2 - 50 100 150
Construction Management
C405 Surveying – II 3 3 2 - 50 100 150
C406 Civil Engineering 3 - - 3 50 100 150
Drawing –II
C407 Hydraulics Laboratory 3 - - 3 50 100 150
C408 Surveying Practical -II 3 - - 3 50 100 150
Total 24 12 9 9 400 600 200 1200
5 SEMESTER
TH

Subject
Code Exam Lect. Tut. Prac. Session The Prac Total
(hrs.) al ory tical
CMELP Engineering Mathematics -IV 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
A501
C502 Design of concrete structures –I 4 2 2 - 50 100 - 150
C503 Structural Analysis – II 3 2 2 - 50 100 - 150
C504 Computer programming 3 2 2 - 50 100 - 150
C505 Engineering Geology 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
C506 Geo Technical Engineering – I 3 3 1 50 100 - 150
C507 Computing Techniques Lab 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
C508 Geo Technical Engineering Lab 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
Total 25 15 9 6 400 600 200 1200
9
6 SEMESTER
TH

Subject
Code Exam Lect. Tut. Prac. Session The Prac Total
(hrs.) al ory tical
C601 Structural Analysis – III 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
C602 Design of Steel structures 4 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
C603 Transportation Engineering -I 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
C604 Water Resources Engineering - I 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
C605 Geo Technical Engineering – II 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
C606 Quantity surveying 3 2 2 50 100 - 150
C607 Material testing lab - II 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
C608 Computer Aided Design -I 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
Total 25 17 7 6 400 600 200 1200
7 SEMESTER
TH

bject of Uty. week (hrs)
Subject
ode Exam Lect. Tut. Prac. Session The Pract Total
(hrs.) al ory ical
701 Design of Concrete Structures – II 4 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
702 Water Resources Engineering - II 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
703 Transportation Engineering –II 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
704 Architecture and town planning 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
705 Environmental Engineering - I 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
706 Elective –I 3 3 1 50 100 - 150
707 Transportation Engineering Lab. 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
708 Computer Aided Design -II 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
Total 25 18 6 6 400 600 200 1200
8 SEMESTER
TH

bject of Uty. week (hrs)
Subject
ode Exam Lect. Tut. Prac. Session The Prac Total
(hrs.) al ory tical
801 Advanced structural design 4 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
802 Finite Element Analysis 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
803 Building Technology and 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
Management
804 Environmental Engineering II 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
805 Elective –II 3 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
806 Elective –III 3 2 1 50 100 - 150
807 Environmental Engineering 3 - - 3 50 - 100 150
Laboratory
808 Project / Seminar - - - 4 100 - 100
809 Viva - Voce 50 50
Total 25 17 6 7 450 600 150 1200
10
MECHANICAL ENGINEEING
3 SEMESTER
RD
Duration
Teaching Periods Marks
rse of Uty.
Subject
o. Exam.
Lect. Tut. Prac. (Hrs.) Sessional Theory Practical Total
EL Engineering
301 Mathematics - II 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
02 Machine Drawing - I - - 4 3 50 100 - 150
03 Fluid Mechanics 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
Metallurgy & Material
04
Science 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
05 Thermodynamics 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
Strength of Materials and
06
Structural Engg. 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Fluid Mechanics
07
Laboratory - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
08 Strength of Materials
Laboratory - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Total 13 7 10 - 400 600 200 1200
4 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Periods Duration Marks

urse of Uty.
Subject
o. Exam.
Lect. Tut. Prac. Sessional Theory Practical Total
(Hrs.)
EL
Engineering
TA
Mathematics - III
01 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
402 Theory of Machines-1 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
403 Hydraulic Machines 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
404 Machine Tools 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
405 Electrical Technology 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
406 Machine Drawing - II - - 4 4 50 100 - 150
Hydraulic Machines
407
Laboratory - - 4 3 50 - 100 150
Electrical and
408
Electronics Laboratory - - 4 3 50 - 100 150
Total 12 6 12 - 400 600 200 1200
11
5 SEMESTER
TH

ourse of Uty.
Subject
No. Exam.
MEL Engineering
A 501 Mathematics - IV 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Manufacturing
M 502
Processes 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 503 Computer Programming 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 504 Theory of Machines II 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
Mechatronics and
M 505
Control systems 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 506 Thermal Engineering - I 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 507 Computer Laboratory - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Machine Tool
M 508
Laboratory - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Total 14 10 6 - 400 600 200 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH
Duration
ourse of Uty.
Subject
No. Exam.
M 601 Mechanics of Materials 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
Metrology and
M 602
Instrumentation 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 603 Thermal Engineering - II 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 604 Heat and Mass Transfer 2 2 - 3 50 100 - 150
Principles of
M 605 Management and
Engineering Economics 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Computer Aided Design
M 606
and Manufacturing 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 607 Heat Engines Laboratory - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Advanced Machine Tool
M 608
Laboratory - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Total 15 9 6 - 400 600 200 1200
12
7 SEMESTER
TH
Duration
ourse of Uty.
Subject
No. Prac./ Exam.
Lect. Tut. (Hrs.) Sessional Theory Practical Total
Proj.
Gas Dynamics and Jet
M 701
Propulsion 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 702 Industrial Engineering 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Refrigeration and Air
M 703
Conditioning 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 704 Dynamics of Machinery 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Machine Design and
M 705
Drawing - I 2 - 2 3 50 100 - 150
M 706 Elective - I 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Mechanical Engineering
707
Laboratory - - 4 3 50 - 100 150
Heat Transfer
M 708
Laboratory - - 4 3 50 - 100 150
M 709 Project and Seminar - - 2 - - - - -
Total 13 5 12 - 400 600 200 1200
At the beginning of the seventh semester, students must submit a brief out line of the proposed project work.
They must submit an interim report at the end of the semester. They will complete the project in the eighth
semester.
8 SEMESTER
TH
Duration
ourse of Uty.
Subject
No. Prac./ Exam.
Lect. Tut. (Hrs.) Sessional Theory Practical Total
Proj.
M 801 Production Engineering 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Automobile
M 802
Engineering 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Production Planning
M 803
and Control 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Machine Design and
M 804
Drawing - II 2 - 2 3 50 100 - 150
M 805 Elective - II 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
M 806 Elective - III 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Mechanical
M 807 Measurements
Laboratory - - 4 3 50 - 100 150
M 808 Project and Seminar - - 4 - 100 - - 100
M 809 Viva Voce - - - - - - 50 50
Total 15 5 10 - 450 600 150 1200
Sessional marks for seminar will be out of 25. Sessional marks for project will be out of 75, in which 35 marks will be
based on day to day performance assessed by the guide. Balance 40 marks will be awarded based on the presentation
of the project by the students before an evaluation board consisting of a minimum of 3 faculty members including the
guide. Sessional marks for workshops and laboratories will be based on day to day performance assessed by faculty
members. In each semester for workshops and laboratories, 60% of the sessional marks will consists of class
performance, lab record and viva conducted by faculty members day to day. Out of the remaining 40%, 20% will be
for attendance and 20% for final examiniation.
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
13
3 SEMESTER
RD
Teaching Hours Duration of Maximum Marks

Course
Subject Univ.
No.
L T P Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total
MEL
3 1 4 3 50 100 150
A 301 Engineering Mathematics -II
302 Mechanical Technology 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
303 Electric Circuit Theory 2 2 4 3 50 100 150
304 Electromagnetic Theory 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
305 Electical and Electonic Measurements 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
306 Power Generation & Distribution 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
307 Basic Electrical Lab 4 4 3 50 100 150
308 Mechanical Lab* 4 4 3 50 100 150
Total 15 7 8 30 24 400 800 1200
*Mechanical Lab consists of: 1) Hydraulic Machines Lab & 2) Heat Engines Lab. University Exam will be
either in Hydraulic Machines Lab or Heat Engines Lab.
4 SEMESTER
TH

Course
Subject Univ.
No.
MELR
3 1 4 3 50 100 150
A 401 Engineering Mathematics -III
402 Network Analysis & Synthesis 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
403 Electronic Circuits 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
404 Electrical Machines - I 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
405 Computer Programming 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
406 Electrical and Electronic Instruments 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
407 Electrical Measurements Lab 4 4 3 50 100 150
408 Computer Programming Lab 4 4 3 50 100 150
Total 16 6 8 30 24 400 800 1200
14
5 SEMESTER
TH

ourse
Subject Univ.
No.
MELP
3 1 4 3 50 100 150
501 Engineering Mathematics -IV
502 Digital Circuits 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
503 Communication Engineering 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
504 Industrial management and Economics 3 2 5 3 50 100 150
505 Linear Integrated Circuits 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
506 Power Electronics 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
507 Electrical Machines Lab - I 4 4 3 50 100 150
508 Electronic Circuits Lab 4 4 3 50 100 150
Total 15 7 8 30 24 400 800 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH

Course
Subject Univ.
No.
601 Control Systems - I 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
602 Electrical Machines - II 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
603 Electrical Power Transmission 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
604 Digital Signal Processing 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
605 Microprocessors and Applications 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
606 Computer Organisation 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
607 Digital Lab 4 4 3 50 100 150
608 Systems Lab 4 4 3 50 100 150
Total 16 6 8 30 24 400 800 1200
7 SEMESTER
TH
15
ourse
Subject Prac./ Univ.
No.
L T Proj. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total
701 Electrical Machines -III 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
702 Electrical Drives and Control 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
703 Utilisation of Electrical Power 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
704 Control Systems - II 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
705 System Design with Microcontrollers 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
706 Elective - I 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
707 Electrical Drawing 3 3 3 50 100 150
708 Control and Power Electronics Lab 4 4 3 50 100 150
709 Project & Seminar* 2 2
Total 15 6 9 30 24 400 800 1200
*The Project Work will be started in the Seventh Semester. Sessional Marks for Seminar will be out of 25
and that for Project will be out of 75.
8 SEMESTER
TH

ourse
Subject Prac./ Univ.
No.
L T Proj. Total Exam(Hrs.) Sessional University Total
801 Power System Analysis 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
802 Switch Gear and Protection 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
803 Instrumentation 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
804 Electrical System Design 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
805 Elective - II 3 1 4 3 50 100 150
806 Elective - III 2 1 3 3 50 100 150
807 Electrical Machines Lab -II 4 4 3 50 100 150
808 Project and Seminar** 4 4 100 100
809 Viva Voce 50 50
Total 16 6 8 30 21 450 750 1200
**Sessional Marks for Seminar will be out of 25 and that for Project will be out of 75 in which 40 marks
will be based on day to day performance assessed by the Guide. The remaining 35 marks are to be awarded
based on the presentation of the project by the student in the presence of 2 staff members one of which shall
be the Guide.
ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
16
3 SEMESTER
RD
Marks
e Course Subject Teaching Uty.
Sessional Theory Practical Total
e No. periods Exam
L T P duration
(hours)
CMEL Engineering Mathematics 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
PA 301 II
LA302 Network Theory 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA303 Electrical Technology 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA304 Solid state devices 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA305 Electronic circuits –I 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA306 Computer programming 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA307 Electrical lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
L308 Basic Electronics Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
Total 16 6 8 400 600 200 1200
4 SEMESTER
TH
Marks
e Course Subject Teaching Uty.
e No. periods Exam
L T P duration
(hours)
CMELR Engineering Mathematics 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
TPA 401 III
LA402 Digital Electronics and 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Logic Design
LA403 Communication 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Engineering
LA404 Electronic circuits –II 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LTA405 Signals and systems 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA406 Reliability & Humanities 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA407 Electronic circuits Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
LA408 Computer programming 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
Lab
Total 16 6 8 400 600 200 1200
5 SEMESTER
TH
17
Marks
Course Subject Teaching Uty.
No: periods Exam
L T P duration
(hours)
CMEL
PA 501 Engineering Mathematics IV 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA502 Power Electronics 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
L503 Applied Electromagnetic 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Theory
LA504 Computer organization and 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Architecture
LA505 Linear integrated circuits 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
L506 Microprocessors and 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Microcontrollers
LA507 Digital IC lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
L508 Communication–I lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
Total 16 6 8 400 600 200 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH
Marks
Course Subject Teaching Uty. Sessional Theory Practical Total
No: periods Exam
L T P duration
(hours)
LA Industrial Management 3 2 0 3 50 100 - 150
601 and Economics
L602 Digital communication 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Techniques
LTA Digital signal processing 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
603
L604 Radiation and 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Propagation
L605 Electronic 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Instrumentation
L606 Control Systems 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
L607 Linear IC Lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
L608 Mini Project 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
Total 17 7 6 400 600 200 1200
7 SEMESTER
TH
18
Marks
Course Subject Teaching Uty.
No: periods Exam
L T Pra./ duration
Proj. (hours)
LA701 Microcontroller based 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
system design
LA702 VLSI technology 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
L703 Microwave and Radar 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Engineering
L704 Optical fiber 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
communication systems
L705 Information Theory and 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
coding
L706 Elective – I 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA707 Microprocessor and 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
Microcontroller Lab
L708 Communication-II lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
L709 Project design and 0 0 2
seminar
Total 16 6 8 400 600 200 1200
8 SEMESTER
TH
Marks
Uty.
Course Subject Teaching Exam Sessional Theory Practical Total
No: periods duration
L T Prac./ (hours)
Proj.
LA801 Computer Networks 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150

L802 Advanced 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
communication systems
LA803 Advanced 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
microprocessors
L804 Television Engineering 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
L805 Elective –II 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
L806 Elective – III 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
L807 Systems Lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
L808 Project design and 0 0 3 - 100 100
seminar
L809 Viva -voce 0 0 0 - - - 50 50
Total 18 6 6 450 600 150 1200
COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING
19
3 SEMESTER
RD
Teaching Uty. Marks

se Course Subject Exam
No. L T P duration Sessional Theory Practical Total
(hours)
RT301 Engineering 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Mathematics II
R 302 Micro Processor 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Systems
RT 303 Solid State Electronics 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
RT 304 Problem Solving and 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Computer Programming
RT 305 Humanities 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R306 Logic System Design 3 1 - 50 100 - 150
R 307 Solid State Electronics 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Lab
R 308 Programming Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Total 16 6 8 - 400 600 200 1200
4 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Uty.
se Course Periods Exam Marks
No. Subject duration
(hours)
L T P Sessional Theory Practical Total
CMEL Engineering
RPTA Mathematics III 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
401
R 402 Computer 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Organization
R 403 Object Oriented 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Programming
R 404 Integrated Circuits 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 405 Data Structures and 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Programming
Methodologies
R406 Advanced 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Microprocessors and
Peripherals
R 407 Integrated Circuits Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
R 408 Data Structures Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Total 16 6 8 - 400 600 200 1200
5 SEMESTER
TH
20
se Teaching Uty. Marks
de Course Subject Periods Exam
No. L T P duration Sessional Theory Practical Total
(hours)
RT501 Engineering 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Mathematics IV
R 502 Operating Systems 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
RT503 Database 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Management Systems
R 504 File Structures and 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Algorithms
RT505 Language Processors 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
RT506 Data Communication 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 507 Microprocessor Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
R 508 Database Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Total 16 6 8 - 400 600 200 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching Uty. Marks

rse Course Subject Periods Exam
de No. Prac./ duration
L T Sessional Theory Practical Total
Proj. (hours )
R 601 PC & PC based 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Systems
RT602 Software Engineering 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 603 Project Management 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
and Quality Assurance
RT604 Computer Networks 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
RT605 Network Computing 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 606 Algorithm Analysis 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
and Design
R 607 System Software Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
R 608 Mini Project 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Total 16 6 8 - 400 600 200 1200
7 SEMESTER
TH
21
Teaching Uty. Marks
se Course Subject Exam
de No. duration
L T Prac./ Sessional Theory Practical Total
(hours)
RT701 Object Oriented 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150

Modeling and
Design
RT702 Computer Graphics 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 703 Theory of 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Computation
R 704 Advanced Software 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Environments
RT705 Web Technologies 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 706 Elective I 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 707 Computer Hardware 0 0 3 3 50 - 100 150
and Networking Lab
R 708 Network 0 0 3 3 50 - 100 150
Programming Lab
R709 Project & Seminar 0 0 3 - - - - -

Total 15 6 9 - 400 600 200 1200
8 SEMESTER
TH
rse Course Teaching Uty. Marks

de No. Subject Periods Exam
Prac./ duration
Proj. (hours )
RT801 Security in 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Computing
R 802 High Performance 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Computing
R 803 Principles of 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Programming
Languages
RT804 Artificial 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Intelligence
R 805 Elective II 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 806 Elective III 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
R 807 Graphics and 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Multimedia Lab
R 808 Project & Seminar 0 0 4 - 100 - - 100
R809 Viva-Voce - - - - - - 50 50
Total 16 6 8 450 600 150 1200
22
POLYMER ENGINEERING
3 SEMESTER
RD

duration
(hours )
CMEL Engineering 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
301 Mathematics- II
P 302 Humanities 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 303 Computer 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Programming
P 304 Polymer Science- I 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 305 Organic Chemistry 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
MP Strength of Materials 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
306 & Structural
Engineering
P 307 Chemistry lab - 3 3 50 - 100 150
P 308 Computer Lab - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Total 18 6 6 - 400 600 200 1200
4th Semester
duration
(hours )
CMEP Engineering 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
401 Mathematics- III
P 402 Object Oriented 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Programming
LP Electrical 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
403 Technology
P 404 Chemical Engg. – I 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 405 Polymer Physics 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 406 Polymer Science- II 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 407 Polymer Preparation - 3 3 50 - 100 150
& Characterisation
Lab
P 408 Electrical Machines - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Lab
Total 18 6 6 - 400 600 200 1200
23
5 SEMESTER
TH

duration
(hours )
CMEP Engineering 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
501 Mathematics- IV
P 502 Chemical Engg. - II 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 503 Plastics - Science & 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Technology
P 504 Rubber - Science & 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Technology
P 505 Latex Technology 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 506 Polymer Processing- 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
I
P 507 Specification Tests - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Lab
P 508 Polymer Analysis - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Lab
Total 18 6 6 - 400 600 200 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH

duration
(hours )
P 601 Principles of 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Management
P 602 Engg. Statistics & 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Quality Control
P 603 Chemical Engg. - III 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 604 Biomedical & 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Biopolymers
P 605 Polymer Blends & 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Composites
P 606 Polymer Processing- 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
II
P 607 Latex Products Lab - 3 3 50 - 100 150
P 608 Polymer Products - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Lab
Total 18 6 6 - 400 600 200 1200
24
7 SEMESTER
TH

Prac./ duration
(hours )
P 701 Elective- I 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 702 Industrial 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Engineering
P 703 Production 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Engineering
P 704 Chemical Engg. - 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
IV
P 705 Tyre Technology 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 706 Polymer Testing 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 707 Polymer Testing - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Lab
P 708 Chemical - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Engineering Lab
P709 Project/Seminar - - 2 - - - - -
Total 16 6 8 - 400 600 200 1200

At the beginning of the seventh semester, students must submit an abstract of their undergraduate project.
They must submit a preliminary report at the end of the semester. They will complete the project in the
eighth semester.
8 SEMESTER
TH

Prac./ duration
(hours )
P 801 Elective- II 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 802 Computer Aided 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
design &
Manufacturing
P 803 Fibre Technology 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
P 804 Polymers & 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Environment
P 805 Polymer Product 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Design
P 806 Speciality 3 1 - 3 50 100 - 150
Polymers
P 807 Chemical - - 3 3 50 - 100 150
Technology Lab
P 808 Project Work & - - 3 - 100 - - 100
Seminar
P 809 Viva- voce - - - - - - 50 50
Total 18 6 6 - 450 600 150 1200
25
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY
3 SEMESTER
RD

ourse Uty Exams Univ.
No. SUBJECT L T P/D (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total
T 301 Engg. Mathematics II 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T302 Electrical Circuits and Systems 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T303 Solid State Electronics 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T304 Problem Solving & Computer Programming 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T305 Humanities 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T306 Digital Electronics 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T307 C Programming Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
T308 Electronic Circuits Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
TOTAL 16 6 8 400 800 1200
4 SEMESTER
TH

Course Uty Exams Univ.
MELR
Engg. Mathematics III 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
TA401
T402 Data Structures & Algorithms 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T403 Linear Integrated Circuits & Applications 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T404 Computer System Architecture 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
TA405 Signals & Systems 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T406 Object Oriented Programming in C++ 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T407 C++ & DS Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
T408 Integrated Circuits Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
TOTAL 16 6 8 400 800 1200
26
5 SEMESTER
TH

Uty
ourse Exams Univ.
T501 Engg. Mathematics IV 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T502 Operating System Concepts 4 1 0 3 50 100 150
T503 Database Management Systems 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T504 Microprocessors 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T505 Language Processors 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 506 Data Communication 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 507 DBMS Lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
T 508 Microprocessor Lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
TOTAL 18 6 6 400 800 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH

Uty
ourse Prac./ Exams Univ.
No. SUBJECT L T Proj. (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total
T 601 Project Management 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
RT602 Software Engineering 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
TA603 Digital Signal Processing 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 604 Computer Networks 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
RT605 Network Computing 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T606 Personal Computer Hardware 4 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 607 Systems Programming Lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
T608 Mini Project 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
TOTAL 18 6 6 400 800 1200
27
7 SEMESTER
TH

Uty
No. SUBJECT L T Proj (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total
T 701 Object Oriented Modelling and Design 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 702 Computer Graphics 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 703 Modern Communication Systems 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 704 Mutimedia Techniques 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 705 Web Technologies 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T706 Elective I 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 707 Multimedia Lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
T708 Communication Systems Lab 0 0 3 3 50 100 150
T 709 Project & Seminar 0 0 3 _ _ _ _
TOTAL 15 6 9 400 800 1200
8 SEMESTER
TH

Uty
No. SUBJECT L T Proj (Hrs) Sessional Exam Total
T 801 Security in Computing 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 802 Information Systems and Management 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 803 E-Commerce 2 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 804 Artificial Intelligence 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 805 Elective II 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 806 Elective III 3 1 0 3 50 100 150
T 807 Internet Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
T 808 Project & Seminar 0 0 4 _ 100 _ 100
T 809 Viva Voce 0 0 0 _ 0 50 50
TOTAL 16 6 8 450 750 1200
28
APPLIED ELECTRONICS AND INSTRUMENTATION
3 SEMESTER
RD

urse Course Subject Uty Exam
ode No Lect Tut Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total
(Hours)
A CMEL Engineering 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
PA 301 Mathematics-II
B LA302 Network Theory 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
C LA303 Electrical Technology 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
D LA304 Solid State Devices 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
E LA305 Electronic Circuits-I 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
F LA306 Computer 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Programming
G LA307 Electrical Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
H A308 Basic Electronics Lab 0 0 4 3 50 100 150
Total Teaching Hours 16 6 8 400 600 200 1200
4 SEMESTER
TH

Course Course Subject Uty Exam
Code No Lect Tut Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total
(Hours)
A CMELR Engineering 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
PTA 401 Mathematics-III
B Digital Electronics 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA402 and Logic Design
C Communication 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA403 Engineering
D LA404 Electronic Circuits-II 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
E LTA405 Signals and Systems 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
F Reliability and 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
LA406 Humanities
G LA407 Electronics Circuits Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
H LA408 Computer Prog Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Total Teaching Hours 16 6 8 400 600 200 1200
5 SEMESTER
TH
29
Course Course Teaching Periods Marks
Code No Subject Uty Exam
Lect Tut Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total
(Hours)
A CMEL Engineering 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
PA 501 Mathematics IV
B LA502 Power Electronics 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
C A503 Basic Instrumentation 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
D LA504 Computer Organisation 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
And Archetecture
E LA505 Linear Integrated Circuits 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
F A506 Transducers And 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Recording Systems
G LA507 Digital I.C. Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
H A508 Measurement Lab 0 0 4 3 50 - 100 150
Total Teaching Hours 16 6 8 - 400 600 200 1200
6 SEMESTER
TH
Teaching
Course
ourse Periods Marks
No Subject Uty Exam
Code
Lect Tut Prac Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total
(Hours)
A LA601 Industrial Management 3 2 0 3 50 100 - 150
And Ecnomics
B A602 Micro Processors And 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Micro Controllers
C LTA603 Digital Signal 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Processing
D A604 Industrial 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Instrumentation I
E A605 Data Communication 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
F A606 Control Sysrem Theory 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
G A607 Instrumentation Lab 0 0 3 3 50 - 100 150
H A608 Mini Project 0 0 3 3 50 - 100 150
Total Teaching Hours 17 7 6 - 400 600 200 1200
7 SEMESTER
TH
urse Course Subject Teaching Uty Exam

ode No Periods Duration Marks
30
Prac.
Lect Tut / Sessional Theory Practical Total
Proj. (Hours)
A LA 701 Micro Controller based 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
System Design
B LA 702 VLSI Technology 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
C A 703 Industrial Instrumentation II 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
D A 704 Process Dynamics & Control 2 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
E A 705 Bio medical Instrumentation 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
F A 706 Elective I 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
G LA 707 Microprocessor and 0 0 3 3 50 - 100 150
Microcontroller Lab
H A 708 Industrial Electronics Lab - - 3 - 50 - 100 150
I A 709 Project Design And Seminar 0 0 2 - - - - -
Total 16 6 8 400 600 200 1200
8 SEMESTER
TH
urse Course Subject Teaching Periods Uty Exam Marks

ode No Lect Tut Prac./ Duration Sessional Theory Practical Total
Proj. (Hours)
A LA801 Computer Networks 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
B A802 Modern Control Theory 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
C Advanced
LA803 Microprocessors 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
D A804 Computerised 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
Process Control
E A805 Elective - II 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
F A806 Elective - III 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150
G A807 Process Control Lab 0 0 3 3 50 - 100 150
H A808 Project and Seminar 0 0 3 - 100 - 100
I A809 Viva - Voice 0 0 0 - - - 50 50
Total 18 6 6 450 600 150 1200
31
Here is attaching file for page no. 33
32
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS – I
CMELRPTA 101 3+1+0
Module 1 Matrix
Elementary transformation – finding inverse and rank using elementary transformation – solution of
linear equations using elementary transformations – eigenvalues and eigenvectors – application of
Cayley Hamiltion theorem – Diagonalization – Reduction of quadratic form into sum of squares
using orthogonal transformation – nature of quadratic form.
Module 2 Partial Differentiation

Partial differentiation – chair rules – Eulers theorem for homogeneous functions – Taylors series for
function of two variables – maxima and minima of function of two variables (proof of results not
expected.)
Modules 3 Multiple Integrals

Double integrals in cartesian and polar co-ordinates – application in finding area and volume using
double integrals – change of variables using Jacobian – triple integrals in cartesian, cylindrical and
spherical co-ordinates – volume using triple integrals – simple problems.
Module 4 Laplace Transforms

Laplace transforms – Laplace transform of derivatives and integrals – shifting theorem –
differentiation and integration of transforms – inverse transforms – application of convolution
property – solution of linear differential equations with constant coefficients using Laplace transform
– Laplace transform of unit step function, impulse function and periodic function
Module 5 Fourier Series

Dirichelt conditions – Fourier series with period 2* and 21 – Half range sine and cosine series –
simple problems – rms value.
References
1. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig

2. Higher Engg. Mathematics Grawal B.S.
3. Engg. Mathematics N.P.Bali
4. Laplace and Fourier Transforms Goyal and Gupta
5. Advanced Mathematics for Engineers E.S.Sokolinokoff
6. Methods of Applied Mathematics F.B.Hilderbrand
ENGINEERING PHYSICS
CMELRPTA 102 1+1+0
Module 1 Optical Instruments and Applications

Electron microscope – characteristics of laser – spontaneous emission – stimulated emission –
population inversion-pumping pumping mechanisms – typical laser systems like Ruby lase – He-Ne
laser – semi conductor laser – Applications of laser.
Module 2 Super Conductivity
Transition temperature – Meissner effect – Isotope effect – Type I and II super conductors – BCS
theory (qualitative study) – High temperature super conductivity (general idea) – Joseph son effect –
SQUIDS – Applications of Super conductors.
33
Module 3 Crystallography and Lattice Planes
Crystallography – space lattice – unitcell – crystal systems – Co-ordination number packing factor –
lattice planes and Miller Indices – spacing between lattice planes – Bragg’s law and crystal structure
analysis – Bragg’s Xray spectrometer.
Module 4 Magnetic Materials

Dia, Para, Ferro, Antiferro and Ferri magnetic materials – soft and hard magnetic materials –
properties – applications – magnetic permeability – susceptibility – relation between them –
Hysteresis.
Dielectrics: Properties – Dielectric constant – Dielectric strength – Dielectric loss – Polar and non
polar molecule – Dielectric polarization – dielectric susceptibility – types – applications.
Ultra sonics – Production – piczoelectric and magnetostriction method – properties – applications.
Module 5 Fibre Optics and its Application

General ides of optical fibre – NA of fibre – step index and graded index fibre – multi mode and
single mode fibre – applications of optical fibre – fibre optic communication system (block diagram)
– Optical fibre sensors.
References
1. Engg. Physics R.K.Gaur and S.L.Gupta

2. Engg. Physics Dr. M.Arumugam
3. Solid State Physics C.Kittel
4. Engg. Materials Decker
5. Physics for Engineers B.Premlet
ENGINEERING CHEMISTRY
CMELRPTA 103 1+1+0
Module 1 Electro Chemistry

Conductance – Experimental Determination – Galvenic cells – reversible and irreversible cells –
EMF and its measurement – Single electrode potential – types of electrodes – Hydrogen electrode –
Calomel electrode – Electrochemical series – Nernst equation – concentration cells – polarization
and over voltage – decomposition potential – Secondary cells – Lead-Acid accumulator – Fuel cells.
Module 2 Plastics and Elastomers

High Polymers – types of polymerization – addition, condensation and co-polymerism - thermo
plastics and thermo setting plastics – preparation and properties of PVC, PVA, Poly propelene, Poly
vinylidene chloride, Teflon, Terylene, Acrylics, Nylon, Bakelite – Moulding techniques –
Lamination – glass reinforced plastics – Natural Rubber properties – Valcunisation of rubber –
synthetic rubber – industrial uses buna rubbers, butyl rubber, silicon rubber and Thiokol.
Module 3 Corrosion and protective coatings

Chemical and electro chemical corrosion – Factors affecting corrosion – corrosion control – cathodic
protection – inorganic coating – metallic coating – hot dipping – electroplating – metal spraying –
cladding – vacuum metalistion – anodisation – vitreous coating.
Module 4 Domestic water supply
34
Requirements and methods of processing – Industrial water supply: Hard and soft waters – defects of
using water containing dissolved minerals for industrial purposes – Boiler Troubles – methods of
treatment.
Module 5
Fuels: Classification – calorific value and its determination – solid, liquid and gaseous fuels – petrol
knock – octane number – cetane number – synthetic gasoline – natural gas – pollution – causes of
pollution – air pollution due to automobiles – control of air pollution Lubrication and Lubricants:
Mechanism of lubrication – different types of lubricants – manufacture and properties of lubricating
oil – manufacture, properties and uses of semi-solid lubricants – properties and uses of solid
lubricants – synthetic lubricants.
References
1. Engg. Chemistry Jain and Jain

2. Engg. Chemistry O.P.aggarwal
3. Chemistry in Engg. And Tech. (Vol. I & II) J.C.Kuriakose and J.Rajam
4. Environmental Chemistry A.K.De
ENGINEERING MECHANICS
CMELRPTA 104 2+2+0
Module 1
Forces in Plane – Vector addition of concurrent forces in plane – problems involving the
equilibrium of particles – free body diagrams.
Definition of rigid body – moment of a force about an axis – varignon’s theorem of moment – couple
– properties of force couples – resolution of a given force in to force acting at a given point and a
couple – reduction of a system of coplanar forces acting on a rigid body into a single force and a
single couple – equilibrium of a rigid body under coplanar forces – types of supports – reaction at
supports of beams and frames – graphical method.
Module 2
Centre of gravity, centroid of wires, areas, volumes – moment of inertia of lamina and radius of
gyration – parallel axis theorem and its applications – mass moment of inertia of thin circular and
rectangular plates – mass moment of inertia of solid rectangular prisms, cylinders and cones.
Friction-angle of friction and coefficient of friction – laws of dry friction-ladder friction – wedge
friction.
Module 3
Simple trusses – analysis of trusses by methods of joints and sections – graphical- method. Simple
stress and strain – bars of uniform cross section – shear stress – modulus of rigidity – bulk modulus
– Poisson’s ratio – Relation between different modulii.
Module 4
Dynamics: Kinematics (Velocity – acceleration) rectilinear motion of a particle under variable
acceleration
Relative velocity – simple cases only. Circular motion with uniform acceleration – relation between
angular and rectilinear motion – normal and tangential acceleration – motion of rotation and
translation – instantaneous centre of zero velocity (elementary treatment only)
35
Module 5
Kinetics of particles – Newton’s Laws of motion of translation – work, energy and power –
principles of momentum and impulse. Motion of rotation – couple – torque – Newtons laws of
motion of rotation – differential equations of rotation – angular impulse and torque – conservation of
angular momentum – work-done and power by torque and couple.
References
1. Shames I.H., Engineering Mechanics, Prentice hall of India

2. S.Timoshinko, Engineering Mechanics, McGraw Hill
3. Ramachandra, Engineering Mechanics, Standard Publishers and Distributors
4. S. Rajasekararn & G.Sankarasubramanian, Engineering Mechanics, Vikas Publishing Co.
5. Beer F.P. & Johnston E.R., Mechanics for Engineers – Statics and Dynamics, McGrwa Hill
6. Meriam J.L. & Kraige L.G., Engineering Mechanics, John Wiley
ENGINEERING GRAPHICS
CMELRPTA 105 1+0+3
Module 1
Introduction of Engineering Graphics: drawing instruments and their uses – familiarization with
current, Indian standard code of practice for general engineering drawing.
Scales – plain scale – vernier scal – diagonal scale.
Conic sections – construction of ellipse, parabola, hyoperbola and rectangular hyperbola.
Construction of cycloids, involute, archimedian spiral and logarithmic spiral – drawing tangents and
normals to these curves.
Module 2
Introduction to orthographic projections: planes of projection – projection of points in different
quadrants. Orthographic projection of straight lines parallel to one plane and inclined to the other
plane – straight lines inclined to both the planes – true length and inclination of lines with reference
planes – traces of lines – projection of planes.
Module 3
Projection of polyhedra and solids of revolution – cubes, prisms, cones, cylinders, pyramids,
tetrahedron, octahedron and sphere – frustums.
Projection of solids with axis parallel to one plane and parallel, perpendicular of inclined to the other
plane - projection of solids on auxiliary planes.
Sections of solids by planes inclined to horizontal or vertical planes.
Module 4
Development of surfaces of cubes, prisms, cylinders, pyramids and cones – development of funnels
and pipe elbows.
Introduction to isometric projection – isometric scale – isometric views – isometric projections of
prism, pyramids, cylinders, cones and spheres.
Module 5
Introduction to prespective projections: prespective views of prisms.
36
Intersection of surfaces – methods of determining lines of intersection – intersection of prism,
cylinder in cylinder.
References
1. Elementary Engineering Drawing – N.D.Bhatt.

2. Geometrical Drawing – P.S.Gill.
3. Geometrical Drawing – V.Lakshmi Narayanan & M.C.Marhur
4. Engineering Graphics – P.I.Varghese & K.C.John
BASIC CIVIL ENGINEERING

CMELRPTA 106 1+1+0
Module 1
Materials: Cement – Types of Portland cement – grades of cement and its uses – Steel – types of
steel for reinforcement bars – steel structural sections. Aggregates: sources, types & sizes –
requirements of good aggregates. Mortar preparation – Concrete – grades of concrete as per IS Code
– water cement ratio, workability, batching, mixing, compaction and curing.
Module 2
Timber – Varieties found in Kerala – effects, seasoning, decay preservation – specification for use
in construction.
Bricks: varieties and strength – tests on bricks.
Roofing: Steel truss. A. C. and GI sheets roofing for industrial buildings – sketches only –
reinforced concrete roofs. (Design details not required)
Module 3
Building Components: Foundation: Bearing capacity and settlement - definitions - Isolated footing
- combined footing - rafts, piles and well foundation - machine foundation - special situations where
those foundations are suitable. (Brief description only).
Superstructure: Walls - brick masonry - English bond - Flemish bond - Stone masonry-Random
Rubble masonry.
Module 4
Surveying: Classifications - based on object of survey - based on instruments used. Chain
Surveying: Instruments - field work - field book - procedure and booking. Compass Surveying:
Prismatic compass – Basic principles - Bearing of survey lines & local attraction.
Leveling: field work - reduction of levels - Height of instrument method.
Module 5
Site plan preparation for buildings (Sketch only) – Kerala Municipal Building Rules – 1999-general
provisions regarding site and building requirements – Exterior and interior open air spaces –
coverage and floor area ratio – provisions of the size, height and ventilation of rooms (residential
buildings) disposal of domestic waste water through septic tank and soak pit. Classification of roads
and components of roads – basics of traffic engineering – Road marking – Traffic Islands, signaling
– (brief description only)
References
37
1. Jha and Sinha, Construction and foundation Engineering, Khanna Publishers
2. Punmia B. C., Surveying Vol –I, Laxmi Publications
3. Rangwala, Building Materials, Charotar Book stall
4. K. Khanna & C. E. G. Justo, Highway Engineering, Khanna Publishers
5. Nevile, Properties of Concrete, Mc Graw Hill
6. Kerala Municipal Rules – 1999
BASIC MECHANICAL ENGINEERING

CMELRPTA 107 1-1-0
Module 1
Thermodynamics: Basic concepts and definitions, Gas laws, specificheat – Universal gas constant –
Isothermal, adiabatic and polytropic processes, work done and heat transferred: Carnot, Otto &
Diesel Cycles – air standard efficientcy.
Module 2
I.C. Engines: Working of two stroke and four stroke engines – petrol and diesel engines – fuel
systems, injector and carburetor – ignition system – lubrication and cooling systems.
Refrigeration and air-conditioning: methods of refrigeration – vapour compression and vapour

absorption systems – block diagrams and general descriptions – winter and summer air conditioning
systems – general description.
Module 3
Power transmission: Methods of transmission – belt, rope, chain and gear drives. Fields of
application, calculation of length of belt – expression for ratio of belt tension. Velocity ratio and slip
– simple problems – velocity ratio and choice of gear wheels – simple problems.
Module 4
Power plants: General layout of hydraulic, diesel, thermal and nuclear power plants,
nonconventional energy sources, general description only.
Types of hydraulic turbines – selection of turbines depending upon head, discharge and specific
speed – steam turbines – reaction and impulse turbines – compounding methods.
Module 5
Simple description of general purpose machines like lathe, shaping machines, drilling machine,
milling machine and grinding machine.
Manufacturing process: moulding and casting, forging, rolling, welding – arc welding – gas welding
(simple descriptions only)
References
1. Elements of Hear Engines R.C.Patel

2. Thermal Engineering P.L.Bellany
3. Elements of Mechanical Engineering S.Domkundwar
4. Power Plant Engineering Nagpal
38
BASIC ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING
CMELRPTA 108 1+1
Module 1
S I unit of Current, Voltage, Power and Energy, Ohm’s Law – Temperature Coefficient of
Resistance – Kirchhoff’s Laws – Solution of Series-Parallel D.C. circuits – star Delta
Transformation – Magnetic Circuits – Flux-Flux density – m m f – Magnetising Force – Reluctance
–Permeability –Comparison of Electric and Magnetic Circuits-Force experienced by a current
carrying conductor in Magnetic Field – Electromagnetic Induction – Farady’s Laws – Lenz’s Law –
Statically Induced e m f – dynamically induced e.m.f. – Self and mutual Induction – Coefficient of
coupling.
Module 2
Alternating Quantity – Generation of Sinusoidal Voltage – Frequency – R.M.S. and Average Value
– Form Factor – Peak Factor – Phasor Representation – Phase and Phase Difference – Solution of
Series R L C circuits – Power and p.f. – Operator ‘j’ – Admittance – solution of series and parallel R
L C circuits.
Module 3
Resonance – Series and Parallel – Q factor – Selectivity and Bandwidth – Three phase system –
Representation – Star and Delta Systems – Phase sequence – Balanced Delta connected System –
Balanced Star Connected system – Phasor representations – Simple Problems.
Module 4
D.C. Machine – Principle of Operations of a D.C. generator – Constructional Details – e.m.f.
equation – Types of Generators.
D.C. Motor – Principle of Operations – Back e.m.f. and its Significance – Necessity of Starters –
Types of motors and Applications.
Transformer – Principle of Operations – e.m.f. equation – Ideal Transformer – Constructional
Details – Losses and Efficiency – Use of Power, Distribution and Instrument Transformers.
Induction Motor – Principle of Operation of 3 phase Induction Motor – Cage and Slip ring – Slip –
Applications – types of Single Phase Induction Motors – Applications.
Alternator – Principle of Operations – Types
Module 5
Requirements of Good Lighting System – Working Principle of Incandescent – Fluorescent and
Mercury Vapour Lamps – Estimate the quantity of Materials required and Draw the wiring layout of
(a) Residential Building with One or Two rooms. (b) Workshop with one Induction Motor.
Generation – Types of Generation – Hydroelectric, Thermal, Nuclear and Non Conventional –
Transmission – Need for high Voltage Transmission – Transmission Voltages in Kerala –
Distribution – Underground Versus Overhead – Feeder – Distributor – Service Mains – Conductor
materials – One line Diagram of a typical Power System.
References
1. Electrical Technology H.Cotton

2. Electrical Technology Hughese
3. Electrical Circuits Edminister J.A.
4. Electrical Design, Estimating & Costing S.K.Bhattacharya, K.B.Raina
5. A Course in Electrical Power M.L.Soni & P.V.Gupta
39
BASIC ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING
CMELRPTA109 1+1+0
Module 1
Basic circuit components
Passive components: Resistors - Types of resistors - Fixed Resistors - Variable resistors, resistor
tolerance, colour coding, power rating of resistors.
Capacitors: Types of capacitors: Fixed capacitors, Mica, Paper, Ceramic and Electrolytic capacitors,
Variable capacitors, voltage rating of capacitors.
Inductors: Fixed and Variable inductors.
Semiconductor Components: Definition of insulators, semiconductors and conductors types:
Intrinsic and extrinsic, p and n type materials, pn junction, Classifications: Germanium, Silicon,
Zener, LEDs (working principle only).
Transistors: npn, pnp, working principle.
Integrated circuits: Advantages, classification, Linear and Digital ICs.
Module 2
Basic electronic circuits
Diode circuits: Forward and reverse characteristics, Rectifiers: Half wave, full wave, Bridge
circuits, DC Power supply: Capacitor filter, Zener regulator, eliminator circuit.
Transistor circuits: CB, CE, CC characteristics, concept of α and β , Amplifiers, common emitter
RC coupled amplifier, Frequency response, Bandwidth.
Module 3
Basic communication engineering
Communication: Frequency bands: RF, VHF, UHF. Modulation – need for modulation, basic
principles of amplitude, frequency, phase and pulse modulation.
Radio engineering: block schematic of AM radio receiver and transmitter - function of each block.
Television Engineering: Basic principles of TV – CRT - scanning - simplified block schematic of a
monochrome TV receiver.
Wireless communication: mobile, microwave and satellite (basic principles and block schematic
only).
Module 4
Basic instrumentation and Digital electronics
Electronic instrumentation: Transducers: Basic principles of Strain guage, LVDT, Thermistor,
Photodiode, microphones, Loud speaker.
Measurements: Multimeter and X-Y recorder.
Digital electronics: number systems - binary, octal and hexadecimal - conversion - representation of
negative numbers using 1’s compliment and 2’s compliment method. Logic gates – truth table.
Module 5
40
Basic Computer engineering
Digital computer: Block schematic, function of each block: CPU, Memory, I/O devices.
Memory: RAM, ROM, Magnetic Tape, Floppy Discs, Hard Discs and CD.
Programming: Machine language, Assembly language, High level language, System Software,
Operating systems, Compilers and Assemblers.
References
1. Basic Electronics: Bernad Grob, Mc Graw Hill Publication

2. Electronic Devices: Floyd, Pearson Education
3. Electronic Devices & Circuits Theory: Boyelstad & Naschelsky, Prentice Hall.
4. Electronic Principles: Malvino, Mc Graw Hill Publication
5. Digital Principles: Malvino & Leach, Mc Graw Hill Publication
6. Integrated Electronics: Millman & Halkias, Mc Graw Hill Publication
7. Electronic Instrumentation: H.S Kalsi, Mc Graw Hill Publication
8. Systems Programming: J.J. Donavan, Mc Graw Hill Publication
WORKSHOP
A-MECHANICAL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP

CMELRPTA 110 0+0+6
Carpentry Planing – cutting – chiseling, marking – sawing – cross and tee joints – dovetail joints –
Engineering Application, Seasoning, Preservation – Plywood and plyboards.
Fitting Practice in chipping – filing – cutting – male and female joints
Smithy Forging of square and hexagonal prisms, hexagonal bolt – Forging Principles, materials and
different operations.
Foundry Preparation of Simple sand moulds – moulding sand characteristics, materials, gate, runner,
riser, core, chaplets and casting defects. Demonstration & study of machine tool - lathe,
drilling, boring, soltting shaping and milling machines, grinding, CNC and machining
centers.
B-CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKSHOP

CMELRPTA 110
Masonry English bond – flemish bond –wall –junction – one brick – one and a half brick - two brick two
and a half brick—Arch setting.
41
Plumbing Study of water supply and sanitary fittings—water supply pipe fitting –tap connections -
sanitary fittings - urinal, wash basin—closet (European and Indian), manholes.
Surveying Study of surveying instruments – chain – compass – plane table – leveling – theodolite—minor
instruments.
C – ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING WORKSHOP

CMELRPTA 110
1. Wiring of one lamp and one plug, control of two lamps in series and in parallel.
2. Stair case Wiring.
3. Godown Wiring.
4. Hospital Wiring.
5. Wiring of fluorescent, C F L and mercury vapour lamp.
6. Wiring of Distribution Board including Power Plug using Isolator, M C B and E L C B.
7. Insulation megger – earth megger, measurement of Insulation resistance and earth resistance.
8. Identification of electronic components and soldering practice.

9. Soldering and testing of a H W and FW rectifier with capacitor filter in a P C B.
10. Soldering of typical I C circuit.
3 periods will be in Mechanical Engineering Workshop and 3 periods in Civil Engineering Workshop &
Electrical Engineering Workshop alternately.
42
B.TECH. DEGREE COURSE
SYLLABUS
43
CIVIL ENGINEERING
BRANCH
44
THIRD SEMESTER
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - II
CMELPA 301 3+1
Module 1 Vector Differential Calculus

Differentiation of vector functions - scalar and vector fields – gradient, divergence and curl of a
vector function – their physical meaning – directional derivative – scalar potential, conservative
fields – identities – simple problems.
Module 2 Vector Integral Calculus

Line, surface and volume Integrals – work done by a force along a path – Application of Green’s
theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem.
Module 3 Function of Complex Variable

Definition of analytic functions and singular points – derivation of C.R. equations in Cartesian co-
ordinates – harmonic and orthogonal properties – construction of analytic function given real or
imaginary parts – complex potential – conformal transformation of function like zn, ez, 1/z, sin z,
z+k2/z – bilinear transformation – cross ratio – invariant property – simple problems.
45
Module 4 Finite Differences
Meaning of ∆ , ∇ , E, µ , δ - interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula – central
differences – problems using Stirling’s formula, Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided difference formula
for unequal intervals.
Module 5 Difference Calculus

Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences – Numerical integration – Newton
– Cote’s formula – trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule – simple problems. Difference
equations – Solution of difference equations.
References
1. Erwin Kreyszig, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Wiley Eastern Ltd.

2. Grawal B.S., Higher Engg. Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
3. M.K.Venkataraman, Numerical Methods in science & Engg., National Publishing Co.
4. S.Balachandra Rao and G.K.Shantha, Numerical Methods, University press.
5. Michael D.Greenberg, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Prentice-Hall.
6. M. R. Spiegel, Theory and Problems of Vector analysis, McGraw – Hill.
FLUID MECHANICS - I
C302 3+2
Module 1
Properties of fluids: Definition and Units, Mass density, specific weight, surface tension,
capillarity, Viscosity – Classification of fluids – Ideal and real fluids, Newtonian and non –
Newtonian fluids.
Fluid pressure – Atmospheric, Absolute, gauge and Vaccum Pressure, Measurement of Pressure –
Piezometer, manometer, Bourden Gauge.
Total pressure and centre of pressure on a submerged lamina. Pressure on a submerged curved
surface – pressure on lock gates, Pressure on gravity dams.
Module 2
Buoyancy – Centre of buoyancy – Metacentre – Stability of floating bodies – Determination of
metacentric height – Analytical & experimental methods.
Types of flow – Streamline, Path line and Streak line, Velocity Potential, Stream Function,
Circulation and Vorticity, Laplace’s Differential equation in rectangular co-ordinates for two
dimensional irrotational flow.
Flow Net – Orthogonality of stream lines and equipotential lines.
Stream tube – continuity equation for one dimensional flow.
Module 3
Forces influencing motion – Energy of fluids, Euler’s equation, statement and derivation of
Bernoulli’s equation and assumptions made.
Applications of Bernoulli’s equation – Venturi meter, Orifice meter, Pitot tube
Orifices and Mouth Pieces – Coefficients of Contraction, Velocity and Discharge, External and
internal mouthpiece.
46
Notches and weirs – Rectangular, triangular, trapezoidal notches, Cippoletti weir, submerged weir,
broad crested weir.
Module 4
Flow through pipes: Laminar and Turbulent flow – Reynold’s experiment, loss of head due to
friction, Darcy – Weishbach Equation, Other energy losses in pipes.
Hydraulic Gradient and Total Energy Lines: Flow through long pipes – Pipes in series and
parallel, Siphon, Transmission of power through pipes –nozzle diameter for maximum power
transmission.
Laminar Flow in circular pipes: Hagen poiseuille Equation, Laminar flow through porous media,
Stoke’s law.
Turbulent flow through pipes: Hydro-dynamically smooth and rough boundary, Velocity
distribution for turbulent flow.
Drag and lift for immersed bodies.
Module 5
Dimensional Analysis and Model studies: Units and dimensions of physical quantities,
Dimensional Homogeneity of formulae and it’s application to common fluid flow problems,
Dimensional Analysis-Rayleigh’s method, Buckingham’s method. Derivations of dimensionless
parameters, Froude’s, Reynold’s, Webber, Mach numbers.
Hydraulic Models: Need, Hydraulic Similitude, geometric, Kinematic, Dynamic Similarity, Scale
ratios of various physical quantities for Froude’s and Reynold’s model laws – problems, Selection of
scale of models – Distorted models, Moving Bed models, Scale effects in models, Spillway models
and Ship models.
References
1. Streeter V. L., Fluid Mechanics, Mc Graw Hill, International Students Edition.

2. Dr. P. N. Modi & Dr. S. M. Seth, Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House Delhi.
3. Jagdishlal, Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulics, Metropolitan Book Co., Delhi.
4. R. J. Garde and A. G. Mirajoaker, Engineering Fluid Mechanics, Nem Chand & Bross., RoorKee.
MECHANICS OF SOLIDS
C303 2+2
Module 1
Stress-strain: Bars of varying cross section-Composite section-temperature stresses.
Strain energy: Gradually applied and suddenly applied load.
Compound stresses: Two dimensional problems-principal stresses and principal planes-maximum
shear stress-planes of maximum shear- Graphical method.
Module 2
Bending moment and shear force: Shear force and Bending moment diagrams for various types of
statically determinate beams with various loading combinations- relation between load, shear force
and bending moment.
47
Module 3
Stresses in beams: Theory of simple bending- stresses in symmetrical sections- bending stress
distribution- modulus of section- shear stress distribution in beams- stress in various sections- built
up sections – composite sections- beams of uniform strength.
Module 4
Stresses due to torsion: Torsion of solid and hollow circular shafts- power transmitted-stresses due to
axial thrust-bending and torsion.
Springs: Close coiled and open coiled- carriage springs.
Pressure vessels: Thin and thick cylinders-Lame’s equation-stresses in thick cylinders due to internal
and external pressures.
Module 5
Columns and struts: Short and long columns-elastic instability-Euler’s formula for long columns
with different end conditions- slenderness ratio- Rankine’s formula-Empirical formula-Buit up
members-columns subjected to eccentric loading and initial curvature.
Combined bending and direct stresses: Core of different sections- wind pressure on structures.
Unsymmetrical bending: Product of inertia-principal axes-stresses due to unsymmetrical bending.
Shear centre: Shear centre of sections having two axes of symmetry.
References
1. Timoshenko.S.P, Strength of Materials, Part-1, D.Van Nostrand company, Inc.Newyork.

2. Popov E.P., Engineering Mechanics of solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Deihi.
3. Punmia B.C, Strength of Materials and Mechanics of structures, Vol.1, Lakshmi Publications,
New Delhi.
4. Vazirani V.N., Ratwani N. M., Analysis of Structures, Vol.1, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
5. Kazimi S.M.A., Solid Mechanics, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
6. William A Nash, Strength of Materials, Mc Graw Hill.
7. Ryder G.H., Strength of Materials, ELBS.
8. Arthur Morley, Strength of Materials, ELBS, Longman’s Green& Company.
CONSTRUCTION ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT

C 304 3+1
Module 1
Admixtures in Concrete – light weight concrete – heavy weight concrete – mass concrete – ready
mix concrete – polymer concrete – vacuum concrete – shortcrete – pre-packed concrete – pumped
concrete.
Joints – Construction joints – expansion joints – contraction joints – sliding joints – joints in water
retaining structures etc.
Scaffolding and Formwork (elementary concepts only).
Module 2
Flooring – different types – Mosaic – marble – granite – roofing – pitched and flat roofs – domes
and folded plate roofs – doors, windows and ventilators – types – construction details of
paneled&glazed– I. S. specifications.
Damp prevention – Causes – Material used – Damp proofing of floors – walls – roofs.
48
Finished works – plastering, painting – white washing – distempering – application of Snowcem –
Concrete repairs-construction and constructed facilities.
Module 3
Functional planning of buildings – general principles of site plan – principles of functional
planning – orientation of buildings – shading principles.
Modern construction materials – Intelligent buildings – building automation.
Module 4
Construction management – Mechanisation in construction – earth moving, handling, pneumatic
and hoisting equipment – pile driving equipment – Earth work computation – mass diagram – soil
compaction & stabilization – owning and operating works of construction equipment.
Module 5
Departmental organizational structure – staff pattern – powers and functions of officers in
planning, organising, directing and controlling construction –PWD code.
PWD system of account – classification of transactions –heads of accounts – cash – precautions in
keeping accounts – construction accounts.
Stores – Safe custody of stores – classification – works – administrative sanction, technical sanction
– categories of works.
References
1. M. S. Shetty, Concrete technology, S.Chand & Co.

2. S. P.Arora, Building construction, Dhanpat Rai & Sons, New Delhi.
3. Dr.Mahesh Varma, Construction Equipment and its Planning and Application, Metropolitan Book
Company.
4. R.L.Peurifoy, W.B.Ledbetter, Construction Planning, Equipment, and methods, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
5. B.L.Gupta, Amit Gupta, Construction Management and Accounts, Standard publishers and
Distributors.
SURVEYING - I
C305 3+1
Module 1
Introduction – Principles – classifications – Chain surveying: Ranging and chaining. Reciprocal
ranging – over-coming obstacles –setting perpendicular and gradients – traversing – plotting – errors
in chaining and their corrections.
Compass surveying – Prismatic compass – surveyor’s compass – bearings – systems and conversions
– local attraction – Magnetic declination – dip – traversing – plotting – adjustment of error by
graphical and analytical method (Bowditch’s). Plane table surveying – Different methods –
Traversing.
Module 2
Levelling: levels and staves – spirit level – sensitiveness – bench marks – temporary and permanent
adjustments –booking - methods of reduction of levels – arithmetic checks-differential, fly, check
49
and profile levelling cross sectioning – curvature and refraction – reciprocal levelling – errors in
levelling – contouring – characteristics and uses of contours – Locating contours- plotting.
Module 3
Theodolite traversing: Transit theodolite – vernier, micrometer and micro-optic theodolites –
description and uses – fundamental lines of a transit theodolite – temporary and permanenet
adjustments – horizontal angle – reiteration and repetition methods– booking. Vertical angle
measurements. Methods of traversing – conditions of closure – closing error and distribution – Gales
traverse table – plotting by co-ordinates – omitted measurements.
Tacheometric surveying: - general principles Stadia method – distance and elevation formulae for
staff held vertical – Instruments constants – analytic lens – tangential method – use of subtense bar –
electromagnetic distance measurement – principles
Module 4
Areas and volumes Areas – by latitude and departure - meridian distance method – double meridian
distance method – co-ordinate method – trapezoidal and Simpson’s method – area by planimeter.
Volume – trapezoidal and prismoidal rule. Volume from contours. - Capacity of reservoirs – Mass
haul curve.
Module 5
Curves: Elements of a simple curve – setting out simple curve by chain and tape methods –
Rankine’s method – two theodolite method – compound and reverse curve (parallel tangents only) –
transition curves – different kinds – functions and requirements – setting out the combined curve by
theodolite – elements of vertical curve.
References
1. Dr. B. C. Punmia, Surveying Vol. I & II, Laxmi Publications (P) LTD, New Delhi.
2. T.P. Kanetkar & Kulkarni, Surveying and leveling Vol. I&II A.V.G.Publications, Pune.
3. Dr. K. R. Arora, Surveying Vol. I, Standard Book House New Delhi.
4. C. Venkatramaiah, Text Book of Surveying, Universities Press (India) LTD. Hyderabad.
5. S.K.Roy, Fundamental of Surveying, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
6. S.K. Hussain & M.S. Nagaraj, Surveying, S.Chand & Company Limited.
7. B.N.Basak – Surveying.
8. Alak De, Plane Surveying, S.Chand &Co.
CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING - I

C306 0+3
PART A
Detailed drawings of paneled doors, glazed doors, glazed windows and ventilators with wooden frames. (2
sheets).
Reinforced concrete staircase (1 sheet).
Roof truss in standard steel sections (1 sheet).
Roof lines (1 sheet).
Roof detailing for M. P. tiles (1 Sheet).
PART B
Working drawings – plan, section and elevation of single storied buildings with RC and tiled roofs (only
residential buildings) (8 sheets).
(Preparation of plan from line sketches only)
50
Marks distribution
Part A 40 marks
Part B 60 marks
References
1. Balagopal & T. S. Prabhu, Building drawing & detailing, Spades Publishers and distributors,
Calicut.
2. Shah & Kale, Building Drawing, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi.
3. B.P.Varma, Civil Engineering drawing and House Planning, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
4. Gurucharan Singh, Subhash Chander Sharma, Civil Engineering drawing, Standard
Publishers distributors, Delhi.
MATERIAL TESTING LABORATORY - I

C 307 0+3
1. Tests on springs (open and close coiled)

2. Bending Test on Wooden Beams using U. T. M. '
3. Verification of Clerk. Maxwell's Law of reciprocal deflection and determination of E for steel.
4. Torsion Pendulum (M.S. wires. Aluminum wires and brass wires)
5. Torsion test using U. T. M. on M. S. Rod, torsteel and High Tensile steel.
6. Torsion Test on M. S, Road
7. Shear Test on M.S. Rod.
8. Fatigue Test
9. Impact Test (Izod and Charpy)
10. Hardness Test (Brinell, Vicker's and Rebound)
11. Strut Test.
Note
All tests should be done as per relevant BIS.
SURVEY PRACTICAL - I
C308 0+3
1. Running a closed compass traverse – plotting and adjustments.

2. Plane table surveying.
i. Traversing.
ii. Three point problem
iii. Two point problem.
3. Levelling.
i. Study of leveling instruments
ii. Reduction of levels by H I method
iii. Reduction of levels by rise and fall method
iv. Longitudinal sectioning and cross sectioning.
v. Contouring.
51
4. Theodolite Surveying
i. Study of transit theodolite.
ii. Measurements of horizontal angles by the method of repetition.
iii. Measurement of horizontal angles by the method of reiteration.
5. Study of minor instruments.
52
FOURTH SEMESTER
53
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - III
CMELRPTA401 3+1+0
Module 1
Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficents - Finding
P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations - Linear Simultaneous eqns-
simple applications in engineering problems.
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitrary
Functions - solution of Lagrange Linear Equations – Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous
linear partial differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave
equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one
dimensional wave equation.
Module 3
Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine
& Cosine transforms - inverse transforms - transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no
proof) – Parsevals Identity - simple problems.
Module 4
Probability and statistics: Binomial law of probability - The binomial distribution, its mean and
variance - Poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution - its mean and variance -
fitting of binomial & Poisson distributions - normal distribution - properties of normal curve -
standard normal curve - simple problems in binomial, Poisson and normal distributions.
Module 5
Population & Samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) –Sampling distribution of
variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance - Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of
hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – Test of significance for single proportion,
difference of proportions, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected).
References
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.

2. M.K. Venkataraman, Engineering Mathematics Vol. II -3rd year Part A & B, National Publishing
Company.
3. Ian N.Sneddon, Elements of Partial Differential Equations,Mc Graw Hill International Edn.
4. Richard A Johnson, Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers, Pearson Education
Asia / PHI.
5. Bali and Iyengar, A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II), Laxmi Publications Ltd.
7. Hogg and Tanis, Probability and statistical inferences, Pearson Education Asia.
FLUID MECHANICS - II
C402 2+2
Module 1
Flow in open Channel – Uniform and non uniform flow, equations for uniform flow – Chezy’s and
Manning’s formula, Most economical cross sections – Velocity distribution in open channels,
Conveyance of a canal section, Normal depth, computation of uniform flow, Energy in open channel
54
flow, specific energy, specific force diagrams, critical velocity, critical states of flow, Froude
number, measurement of discharge in channels.
Module 2
Gradually varied flow – Dynamic Equation for gradually varied flow, Different forms of the
dynamic equation, Characteristics of surface profiles in prismatic channels, backwater computation
by direct step method.
Module 3
Rapidly varied flow, hydraulic jump – initial and sequent depths, non-dimensional equation,
Practical application of hydraulic jump, Types of jump in horizontal floor, Basic characteristics of the
jump, Energy loss, efficiency, height of jump, jump as energy dissipater, stilling basins, Location of
hydraulic jump.
Module 4
Hydraulic Machines – Impact of jet, Force of jet on stationary and moving plates – turbines –
Classification, velocity triangle for Pelton, Francis, Kaplan turbines, Specific speed, selection of
turbines, draft tube – types, Penstock, surge tank – types, tail race.
Module 5
Centrifugal Pumps – Types, Velocity triangle for pumps, Head of pump, Losses and efficiency,
Minimum starting speed, Specific speed, Multistage pump, Pumps in parallel. Positive displacement
pumps – working principle, types of reciprocating pumps, work done, effect of acceleration and
frictional resistance, slip and coefficient of discharge. Indicator diagram, separation in suction and
delivery pipes. Air vessel – rate of flow into and from air vessel.
References
1. Ven Te Chow, Open Channel Hydraulics, Mc Graw Hill Ltd.

2. K. Subrahmanya, Flow in open channel vol.1, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi
3. Dr. P. N. Modi & Dr. S. M. Seth, Hydraulics & Fluid Mechanics, Standard Book House, Delhi.
4. Jagadheesh Lal, Hydraulic Machines, Metropolitian Book Co., New Delhi.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS - I
C403 2+2
Module 1
Deflection of determinate beams: Differential equation of the elastic curve- slope and deflection of
beams by method of successive integration-Macaulay’s method- moment area method-conjugate
beam method-deflection due to shear.
Module 2
Energy Theorems: Strain energy due to axial load-bending-shear and torsion-principle of super
position-principle of virtual work-Castigliano’s first theorem-Betti’s theorem-Maxwell’s law of
55
reciprocal deflection-unit load method and strain energy method for determination of deflection of
statically determinate beams-pin jointed frames-effect of temperature-lack of fit.
Module 3
Moving loads and influence lines: effect of moving loads-influence lines for reaction, shear force
and bending moment for determinate beams-load position-absolute maximum bending moment.
Module 4
Arches: Theoretical arch-Eddy’s theorem-analysis of three hinged arches – moving loads on arches-
settlement and temperature effect.
Module 5
Cables and suspension bridges: General cable theorem-analysis of cables under concentrated and
uniformly distributed loads-shape and stresses due to self weight-anchor cables-temperature effect-
suspension bridges with three hinged and two hinged stiffening girders-influence lines for bending
moment and shear force-temperature stresses in stiffening girder.
References
1. Reddy C.S., Basic Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.1996.
2. Smith J.C. Structural Analysis, Macmillian Pub.Co.1985.
3. Rajesekharan &Sankarasubramanian,G., Computational Structural Mechanics,
Prentice Hall of India, 2001.
4. Wang C.K.& Solomon C.G., Introductory Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill.1968.
5. Sadhu Sindh, Strength of Materials, Khanna Publishers, 1988.
6. Seeli F.B.& Smith J.P., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley &Sons, 1993.
7. Norris & Wilbur, Elementary Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill.
8. Junarker S.R., Mechanics of Structures, Vol. II, Charorbar Book Stall.
9. Timoshenko S.P, Young D.H., Theory of structures, McGraw Hill
10. Thadani B.N, Desai J.P, Structural mechanics, Weinall Book Corporation.
11. Punmia B.C., Strength of materials and theory of structures, Vol.II, Laxmi publications.
ENGG. ECONOMICS AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGEMENT

C 404 2+2
Part A
Engineering Economics
Module 1
Indian Industries: Industrial pattern-Industrial growth-Inadequacies of the program of
industrialisation-Role of the public sector-problems and prospects of privatization-multinational
corporations and their impacts on the Indian economy-inflation-demand pull and cost push-effects of
price increases.
Module 2
Accountancy: Objectives of accounting – management accounting and financial accounting –
journal – ledger – the trial balance – balance sheet – profit and loss account.
56
Module 3
Financial management: The Indian financial system – types of banks and their functions – long
term financing – the stock market – functions and problems faced by the stock market – Industrial
finance – loans and return of loans – cost benefit analysis – methods of appraising profitability – pay
back method – average rate of return – internal rate of return – net present value.
Part B
Construction Management
Module 4
Introduction to job planning and Management: Bar charts and mile stone charts - work
breakdown structure - C P M and PERT networks - Network and time estimates - Earliest expected
time - Forward pass and backward pass - Time estimates - related problems.
Module 5
Project costs analysis: Cost Vs Time curve - optimum duration- related problems - updating,
resource allocation - resource smoothing – resource leveling - Network compression - Compression
limited by crashing - float- parallel critical paths - crashed critical paths – most economical solution.
Module 6
Industrial Relations: Payment of wages Act - Minimum wages Act - Employees State Insurance
Act –Workers participation in management – labour welfare and social security – Industrial safety
and welfare provision – role of state in labour welfare – role of labour welfare officers social security
principles and practice.
References
1. A.N.Agarwal, Indian economy, Wishwa prakashan.

2. Prasanna Chandra, Fundamentals of financial management, Tata McGraw Hill.
3. Ruddar Datt, K.P.M. Sundaram, Indian economy, S.Chand &Co.
4. James.D.Steevens, Techniques for Construction Network Sheduling, McGraw Hill.
5. S.C.Sharma, Management of Systems, Khanna Publishers.
6. T.R.Banga, S.C.Sharma, Industrial Organisation and Engineering Economics, Khanna Publishers.
7. L. S. Srinath, PERT and CPM Principles and Applications, East – West Press.
SURVEYING - II
C405 3+2
Module 1
Triangulation: triangulation figures – classification of triangulation systems – selection of
triangulation stations – intervisibility and heights of stations – station marks – signals and towers –
base line – choice – instrument and accessories – measurement of base lines – corrections – satellite
stations – need, reduction to centre – extension of base.
Module 2
Theory of errors and triangulation Adjustments: Kinds of error – laws of weights – principles of
least squares – determination of most probable value of quantities – probable error – distribution of
error to the field measurements – normal equation – Method of corrections – Adjustment of simple
triangulation figures.
57
Module 3
Hydrographic surveying – Equipment – Methods of locating soundings – reduction and plotting of
soundings – use of sextants and station pointer. Geodesy – shape of earth – effects of curvature –
spherical excess – convergence of meridians.
Module 4
Terrestrial photogrammetry – General principles – photo theodolite – horizontal position of a
point from photogrammetric measurements – elevation of a point – determination of focal length of
lens. Aerial photogrammentry – aerial camera – scale of vertical photograph – relief displacement
on a vertical photograph – principle of parallax – stereoscopic pairs – flight planning – radial line
method – flying height and overlaps – remote sensing – concepts of remote sensing – ideal remote
sensing system.
Module 5
Field Astronomy: - Definitions – celestial sphere – co-ordinate systems – astronomical triangle –
sidereal, apparent and mean solar time – corrections to astronomical observations – determination of
azimuth, latitude and longitude – different methods.
References
1. T. P. Kanetkar and Kulkarni, Surveying and leveling Vol. II, A.V.G. Publications, Pune.
2. B. C. Punmia, Surveying and leveling Vol. II, Laxmi Publications (P) LTD, New Delhi.
3. Thoms M.Lillerand, Remote sensing and image interpretation, John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York.
4. Dr. K.R. Arora, Surveying Vol. II, Standard Book House, New Delhi.
CIVIL ENGINEERING DRAWING - II

C406 0+3
Preparation of design, sketches and working drawings as per area and functional requirements.
Working drawings for
1. Residential buildings: Flat and pitched roof – cottages, bungalows and flats (single storied
and double storied) (4 sheets)
2. Public buildings – schools, offices, libraries, restaurants, commercial complexes
(3sheets)
3. Preparation of site plan and plan as per building rules. (2 sheets)
4. Plumbing: water supply and sanitary drawings for residential buildings. (1 sheet)
The student is expected to know local building rules and national building code provisions. The student is
expected to prepare sketch design for clients and submission drawings for approval
References
1. Balagopal & T. S. Prabhu, Building drawing & detailing, Spades Publishers and distributors, Calicut.
2. Shah & Kale, Building Drawing, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi.
3. B.P.Varma, Civil Engineering drawing and House Planning, Khanna Publishers, Delhi.
4. Gurucharan Singh, Subhash Chander Sharma, Civil Engineering drawing, Standard Publishers
distributors, Delhi.
58
5. National Building code, Kerala building byelaws.
HYDRAULICS LABORATORY
C407 0+3
PART A -FLOW
1. Study of taps, valves, pipe fittings, gauges, pitot tubes, watermeters and current meters.
2. Determination of metacentric height and radius of gyration of floating bodies.
3. Hydraulic coefficients of orifices and mouth pieces under constant head method and time of
emptying method.
4. Calibration of venturimeter, orifice meter and water meter.
5. Calibration of rectangular and triangular notches.
6. Determination of Darcy’s and Chezy’s constant for pipe flow.
7. Determination of Chezy’s constant and Mannings number for open channel flow.
8. Determination of discharge coefficient for Plug-Sluices.
PART B - MACHINERY
1. Study of centrifugal, self priming and reciprocating pumps; impulse and reaction turbines
2. Performance characteristics of centrifugal pump.
3. Performance characteristics of reciprocating pump.
4. Performance characteristics of self priming pump.
5. Performance characteristics of Pelton wheel .
6. Performance characteristics of Francis turbine.
7. Performance characteristics of Kaplan turbine.
SURVEYING PRACTICAL - II
C408 0+3
1. Measurement of vertical angles using theodolite.

2. Solution to problems on heights distances by observations using a theodolite.
3. Traversing using a theodolite – distribution of errors using gale’s traverse table.
4. Determination of constants of the transit theodolite.
5. Heights and distances – using the stadia Tacheometer Principles.
6. Heights and distances – using tangential tachometry.
7. Setting out a simple circular curve by offsets from long chord.
8. Setting out a circular curve by Rankine’s method.
9. Setting out a building – Foundation marking.
10. Study of total station.
59
FIFTH SEMESTER
60
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS - IV
CMELPA501 3+1+0
Module 1
Complex Integration: Line Integral –Cauchy’s integral theorem- Cauchy’s integral formula-
Taylor’s series-Laurent’s series- zeros and singularities- Residues- residue theorem-Evaluation of
real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semicircle.
Module 2
Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection method-
Regula falsi method - Newton –Raphson method – solution of system of linear equations by Jacobi’s
iteration method and Gauss-Siedel method.
Module 3
Numerical solution of ordinary differential equation: Taylor’s series method- Euler’s method –
Modified Eulers method - Runge – Kutta method (IV order)-Milne’s predictor corrector method.
Module 4
Z – Transforms: Definition of Z transform- properties –Z transform of polynomial functions –
trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property- inverse transform – solution of 1st &
2nd order difference equations with constant coefficients using Z transforms.
Module 5
Linear programming: graphical solution – solution using simplex method (non – degenerate case
only) – Big-M method,two phase method- Duality in L.P.P.- Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation
method – Modi method.
References
1. Ervin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley Eastern limited.

2. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Numerical methods in Engineering & Science, Kanna Publishers.
3. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Kanna Publishers.
4. Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, Numerical methods in Science & Engineering, National Publishing
Company.
5. P.C.Tulsian & Vishal Pandey, Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems, Pearson Education
Asia.
6. Churchill and Brown, Complex variables and applications, McGraw-Hill.
7. Panneer Selvam, Operations research, PHI.
8. S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac & A Somasundaram, Engineering Mathematics Vol. III, Scitech
publications
9. T.K.M.Pillai, G.Ramanaigh & S.Narayanan, Advanced Mathematics for Engg. Students Vol. III-
S.Vishwananthan printers & publishers.
DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES - I

C502 2+2
61
Module 1
Working stress method: Introduction- permissible stresses-factor of safety –behaviour of R.C.C
beams –assumptions-under reinforced –over reinforced and balanced sections. Theory of singly and
doubly reinforced beams.
Module 2
Limit state method: Concepts-assumptions –characteristic strength and load- partial safety factors-
limit states-limit state of collapse –limit state of serviceability. Theory of singly and doubly
reinforced rectangular sections in flexure-design of simply supported and flanged beams.
Module 3
Behaviour and design of one way and two way slabs-Continuous slabs-analysis using method
recommended by BIS -arrangements of reinforcement in slabs. Design of flat slab.
Module 4
Design of columns: Limit state method- I S specifications-design of columns with lateral and helical
reinforcement-members subjected to combined axial load and bending.
Module 5
Design of footings-Isolated footing with axial and eccentric loading-combined footing. Stair cases-
introduction to different types-design of simply supported flights-cantilever steps.
References
1. Relevant IS codes. (I.S 456, I.S 875,SP 16)

2. Park R and Pauloy T, Reinforced concrete structures, John Wiely & sons Inc.
3. Purushothaman P, Reinforced concrete structural elements-Behaviour, Analysis and Design, Tata
McGraw Hill publishing company Ltd.
4. Unnikrishna Pillai S. & D.Menon, Reinforced concrete design, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing
company Ltd.
5. Mallick S.K., Reinforced concrete, Oxford & IBH Publishing company.
6. Varghese P.C., Limit state design of Reinforced concrete, Printice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.
7. Ashok .K. Jain, Reinforced concrete- Limit state design, New Chand & Bose.
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS - II
C503 2+2
Module 1
Statically indeterminate structures-degree of indeterminacy-force and displacement methods of
structural analysis. Force method of analysis of indeterminate structures - Method of consistent
deformation-analysis of fixed beams and continuous beams. Clapyron’s theorem of three moments-
62
analysis of fixed and continuous beams Minimum strain energy-Castigliano’s second theorem-
analysis of indeterminate beams, portal frames and trusses.
Module 2
Displacement method of analysis of statically indeterminate structures: Slope deflection
method-fundamental equations-analysis of continuous beams & portal frames (with sway and
without sway) - Moment distribution method-analysis of continuous beams & portal frames (with
sway and without sway).
Module 3
Theories of Elastic Failure: Maximum principal stress theory- maximum shear stress theory -
maximum principal strain theory – Mohr’s theory. Influence line diagrams for statically
indeterminate structures: Muller Breslau’s principle- Influence lines for reactions-shear force-
bending moment-propped cantilever-continuous beams and fixed beams
Module 4
Matrix methods: Classification of structures-static& kinematic indeterminacy Stiffness method-
coordinate systems-element stiffness matrix - Direct stiffness method - structure stiffness matrix-
assembly of structure stiffness matrix from element stiffness matrix-equivalent joint load –
incorporation of boundary conditions –analysis of beams and frames (rigid & pinjointed).
Module 5
Flexibility method: Flexibility influence coefficients - flexibility matrix-analysis of beams &
frames (rigid and pinjointed).
References
1. Weaver &Gere, Matrix Analysis of Structures, East West Press.

2. Moshe F. Rubinstein – Matrix Computer Analysis of Structures- Prentice Hall, 1969.
3. Meek J.L., Matrix Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill,1971.
4. Reddy C.S., Basic Structural Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Co.1996.
5. Smith J.C. Structural Analysis, Macmillian Pub.Co.1985.
6. Rajesekharan & Sankarasubramanian,G., Computational Structural Mechanics, Prentice Hall of
India, 2001.
7. Mukhopadhyay M., Matrix Finite Element Computer and Structural Analysis, Oxford & IBH,1984.
8. Wang C.K.& Solomon C.G., Introductory Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill.1968.
9. Pezemieniecki, J.S, Theory of Matrix Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill Co., 1984
11. Seeli F.B.&Smith J.P., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley &Sons, 1993.
12. Norris & Wilbur, Elementary Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill.
13. Junarker S.R., Mechanics of Structures, Vol. II, Charorbar Book Stall.
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING
C 504 2+2
Module 1
Basic concepts of operation of a computer: Operating system - drives,
directories and files - types of files -COM, EXE, BAT - booting - operating
system commands - creating, editing, listing and copying files - different levels
63
of programming languages - high level languages - compilers and interpreters -
compiling, linking and running - structured programming - program
planning - algorithms, flowcharts - simple examples.
Module 2
Introduction to C language: Character set -operators - constants and variables - data types - use of
control statements - if, for, while, do-while, switch - conditional assignment - use of built in l/O
functions - writing small programs.
Module 3
Functions: Declaration - passing parameters by value and by reference - writing trigonometric,
algebraic and string handling functions - recursion – scope rules - storage classes - macros.
Module 4
Arrays: Declaration and handling - sorting - pointers and arrays - pointers as parameters to functions
- structures and unions - array of structures - sorting of strings - linked lists.
Module 5
Data files: Reading, writing and appending data files - binary files - transfer of data in blocks -
command line arguments - operation on files at command line.
References
1. Balaguruswamy, Programming in C, Tata Mc Graw Hill.

2. Kern Ingham & Ritchie, The C programming language, Prentice Hall.
3. Byron S Gottfried, Programming with C, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4. Y. Kenetker, Let us C, BPB Publications.
5. V. Rajaraman, Programming with C.
6. Y. Kenetker, Exploring C, BPB Publications.
ENGINEERING GEOLOGY
C 505 3+1
Module 1
Introduction: Various branches of geology - Relevance of Geology in Engineering. Geologic time
scale.
Physical Geology: Geomorphic processes-Rock weathering-Formation of soils-soil profiles-soils of
India – Geologic work and engineering significance of rivers and oceans.
Module 2
Dynamic Geology: Interior constitution of the earth-Various methods to study the interior-crust,
mantle, core-lithosphere-asthenosphere-major discontinuities-Moho, Guttenberg, Lehmann-
composition of different layers-sima & sial.
Plate tectonics: Lithospheric plates-diverging, converging and transform boundaries-their
characteristic features-midoceanic ridge, benioff zone and transform faults-significance of plate
tectonic concept.
64
Earthquake: Elastic rebound theory-types of seismic waves-cause of earthquake-intensity and
magnitude of earthquake-Locating epicentre and hypocenter-effect of earthquake-distribution of
earthquake-earthquake resistant structures.
Module 3
Mineralogy: Definition and classification-important physical properties of minerals-colour, streak,
lusture, transperancy, cleavage, fracture, hardness, form, specific gravity and magnetism. Study of
the diagnostic physical properties and chemical composition of the following rock forming
minerals: 1.Quartz, 2.Feldspar, 3.Hypersthene, 4.Auguite, 5. Hornblende, 6. Biotite, 7.Muscovite,
8.Olivine, 9.Garnet, 10.Fluorite, 11.Tourmaline, 12.Calcite, 13.Kyanite, 14. Kaolin, 15. Serpentine.
Petrology: Definition and classification-important structures and textures of igneous sedimentary
and metamorphic rocks-diagnostic texture, mineralogy, engineering properties and uses of following
rocks:
Igneous rocks: 1. Granite, 2. Syenite, 3. Diorite, 4. Gabbro, 5. Peridotite, 6.Dolerite, 7.Basalt
8.Pegmatite.
Sedimentary rocks: 1. Conglomerate, 2. Breccia, 3. Sandstone, 4. Limestone, 5. shale.Metamorphic
rocks: 1. Gneiss, 2. Schist, 3. Slate, 4. Marble, 5. Quartzite, 6. Mylonite, 7. Pseudotachyllite.
Special Indian rock types: 1. Charnockite, 2. Khondalite, 3. Laterite.
Module 4
Structural Geology: Definition-outcrop-stratification-dip and strike. Folds-definition- parts of fold-
classification-recognition of folds in the field- Faults-definition-parts of a fault-classification-
recognition in the field-effects of faulting and subsequent erosion on outcrops. Joints-definition-
classification. Unconformites-definition-classification recognition in the field. Effects of all the
above described structures in the major engineering projects like reservoirs, dams, tunnels and other
important structures.
Module 5
Engineering Geology: Mass movement of earth materials-Landslides-definition, classification,
causes of land slides and their corrections-Geological considerations in the selection of sites for
reservoirs and dams. Geological considerations in Tunnel constructions and mountain roads-rocks as
building materials.
Hydrogeology: Groundwater table-abundance and advantages-aquifer-acquiclude-acquifuge-artesian
conditions and artesian wells-cone of depression–perched water table.
Recommended field work: Field trip to quarries or geologically significant places to learn - in site
character of rocks in quarries/outcrops-measuring strike and dip of a formation-tracing of outcrops.
References
1. Arthur Holmes, Physical geology, Thomas Nelson.

2. Parbin Singh, Engineering & general geology, K.Katria & sons, New Delhi.
3. HH.Read, Rutleys elements of mineralogy, George Allen & Unwin Ltd, London.
4. G.W.Tyrell, Principles of petrology, B.I. Publications, Bombay.
5. M.P.Billings, Strucutural geology, Aisa publishing house, New Delhi.
6. Krynine&Judd, Engineering geology & geotechniques, Tata McGraw hill, New Delhi.
7. David Keith Todd, Groundwater hydrology, John Wiley & sons, New York.
65
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING - I
C506 3+1
Module 1
Soil formation and soil types: Residual soil and transported soil-Soil structure-Basic structural units
of clay minerals. Simple soil properties: three phase systems - void ratio - porosity - degree of
saturation - moisture content - specific gravity - unit weight relationships.
Laboratory and field identification of soils: Determination of water content, specific gravity,
determination of field density by core cutter and sand replacement method, grain size analysis by
sieve, hydrometer and pipette analysis - Atterberg limits and indices - field identification of soils.
Classification of soils: Principles of classification - I. S. classification - plasticity chart - Sensitivity
and thixotropy.
Module 2
Permeability of soils: Darcy's law - factors affecting - constant head
and falling head test - permeability of stratified deposits. soil- water system - classification of soil
water - capillarity of soils - principles of effective stress.
Seepage of soils: seepage pressure, critical hydraulic gradient - quick
sand condition - flownet diagram for isotropic and anisotropic soils - phreatic
line in earth dams - exit gradient- protective filters.
Module 3
Shear strength: Shear strength parameters - Mohr's circle – Mohr Coulomb strength theory -direct,
triaxial, unconfined and vane shear tests- Drainage conditions - UU, CD and CD tests - choice of test
conditions for field problems - measurement of pore pressure-critical void ratio and liquefaction.
Module 4
Compaction: Objects of compaction - proctor test and modified proctor test - concept of OMC and
Max. dry density - Zero air void line - factors affecting compaction - effect of compaction on soil
properties - field methods-.of compaction - control of compaction.
Stability of slopes: types of failures of soil slopes - Swedish circle method - (φ) = 0 analysis and C -
(φ ) analysis. Friction circle method -Taylor's stability number and stability charts.
Module 5
Compressibility and consolidation of soils: void ratio - pressure relationship - concept of
coefficient of compressibility - coefficient of volume change and compression index - normally
loaded and pre loaded deposits - determination of preconsolidation pressure - Terzaghi's theory of
one dimensional consolidation - time rate of consolidation - time factor - degree of consolidation -
square root time and log time - fitting methods - coefficient of consolidation - calculation of void
ratio - height of solids methods and change in void ratio method - settlement analysis.
References
1. Murthy V. N.S, Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Nai Sarak, Delhi.
2. Jumkis A .R., Soil Mechanics, Calgotia Book Source Publishers.
3. Gopal Ranjan and A .S .R .Rao, Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, New Age International
Publishers.
4. Punmia B. C., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Laxshmi Publications, New Delhi.
66
5. Arora K. R., Soil Mechanics and Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers, Distributors.
6. V. Narasimha Rao and Venkatramaiah, Numerical Problems, Examples and Objective Questions in
Geotechnical Engineering, Orient LongMan Publishers.
7. Lambe & Whitman, Soil Mechanics, John Wiely Publications.
COMPUTING TECHNIQUES LAB (C)

C 507 0+3
1. Familiarisation with the computer system - PCs - LAN Peripherals.

2. Fundamentals of operating system like DOS, WINDOWS etc.,(Use of files, directories, internal
commands, external commands,editors and compilers.
3. Familiarisation with packages like Wordstar, dbase, lotus, MS Office.
4. Familiarisation with data processing packages like FOXPRO etc,.
5. Familiarisation of application softwares - like Grapher, Surfur, Hardward Graphics - 3.
6. Familiarisation of drawing Softwares - AUTOCAD, Auto Architect, 3D Studio.
7. Programming with C as per syllabus of computer programming.
GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

C508 0+3
1. Determination of specific gravity, water content and particle size distribution by hydrometer
method / pipette method.
2. Determination of field density of soil by sand replacement method and core cutter method.
3. Determination of Atterberg limits.
4. Proctor's compaction tests (light and heavy).
5. Permeability tests for cohesive and cohesionless soil.
6. Direct shear test.
7. Triaxial shear test.
8. Unconfined Compression test.
9. Vane shear Test.
10. Consolidation test.
11. Study on Collection and Field Identification of Soil and Sampling Techniques.
67
SIXTH SEMESTER
68
STRUCTURAL ANALYSIS - III
C601 2+2
Module 1
Approximate methods of frame analysis: Frames under lateral loading-portal method – cantilever
method. Frames under vertical loading –substitute frame method. Space frames – tension
coefficients-tension coefficient method applied to space frames
Module 2
Kani’s method-continuous beams & frames (with and without sway). Beams curved in plan- analysis
of cantilever beam curved in plan -analysis of curved balcony beams- analysis of circular beams over
simple supports.
Module 3
Elementary theory of elasticity: State of stress at a point- stress tensor- equilibrium equations-
stresses on arbitrary plane- transformation of stresses- principal stresses-strain components – strain
tensor- compatibility equations-boundary condition equations- octahedral stresses.
Module 4
Two dimensional problems- plane stresses - plane strain – compatibility equations in two
dimensional cases- Airy’s stress functions- biharmonic equations- equilibrium equations in polar
coordinates – compatibility equation and stress functions in polar coordinates- bending of cantilever
loaded at ends.
Module 5
Plastic theory – ductility of steel- plastic bending of beams- evaluation of fully plastic moment –
plastic hinge – load factor – method of limit analysis- basic theorems- collapse load for beams and
portal frames.
References
1. Timoshenko S.P., Theory of Elasticity, McGraw Hill.

2. Sreenath, Advanced Mechanics of Solids
4. Seeli F.B.&Smith J.P., Advanced Mechanics of Materials, John Wiley & Sons, 1993.
5. Vazirani & Ratwani, Analysis of Structures, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
6. B.C. Punmia, Theory of Structures, Vol. II, Laxmi Publishers, New Delhi.
7. P.S.David, Analysis of continuous beams and rigid frames
8. Coats, Coutie, & Kong, Structural Analysis, ELBS & Nelson, 1980.
9. Kinney J.S., Indeterminate Structural Analysis, McGraw Hill, 1957.
10. Prakash Rao D.S., Structural Analysis, Universal Press Ltd, Hyderabad, 1997.
69
DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES
C602 2+2
Module 1
Loading standards - I.S structural sections - I.S specifications - design of tension members - riveted
and welded connections - design of simple and compound beams - laterally supported and
unsupported.
Module 2
Compression members - design of columns - short and long columns - axial and eccentric loading -
built up columns-moment resisting connections - lacing and battening - column base - slab base -
gusseted base - grillage foundation.
Module 3
Water tanks - rectangular, circular and pressed steel tanks – connections - analysis and design of
supporting towers.
Module 4
Light gauge steel structures - introduction - type of sections - local buckling -stiffened and multiple
stiffened elements - beams with and with out lateral supports.
Module 5
Chimneys- types - self supporting & guyed – stresses in chimneys – design of chimney stack, breech
opening, base plate, connections and foundations.
References
1. Relevant I.S Codes. (I.S 800, I .S 875, Steel Tables)

2. Ramamrutham S, Design of steel and timber structures, Dhanpat Rai & sons, Delhi.
3. Ramchandra, Design of steel structures Vol. I & II, Standard book house, Delhi.
4. Gaylord & Gaylord, Design of steel structures, Tata McGraw-Hill.
5. Graham W. Owens& Peter .R. Knowles, Steel Designers Manual, Blackwell scientific
publications.
6. B.C.Punmia, Design of steel structures, Laxmi publications.
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING - I
C603 3+1
Module 1
Introduction: Comparison of highway and railway. Modern developments - Surface elevated and
tube railways.
Design of railway track: Component parts of a railway track - their requirements and functions -
Typical cross section - conning of wheels - wear and creep of rails - rail fastenings - Train resistances
and evaluation of loading capacity.
Geometric design of railway track: Horizontal curves, radius – super elevation - cant deficiency -
transition curves - gradients - different types - Compensation of gradients.
Module 2
Railway operation and control: Points and Crossings – Design features of a turn out - Types of
railway track - Functions - Details of station yards and marshalling yards - Signaling and
70
interlocking - Principles of track circuiting - Control of train movements by absolute block system -
automatic block system - centralised traffic control systems.
Module 3
Tunnel Engineering: Tunnel sections - types, size and shapes - tun-
nel surveying - alignment, transfering centre, grade into tunnel - tunnel
driving procedure - tunnelling through soft soil (Fore Poling Method) and tunneling through hardsoil
(Cantilever Car Dump Method) Tunnel lining,
ventilation - lighting and drainage of tunnels.
Module 4
Harbour Engineering: Classification of harbours and the effect of tides,
winds and waves in the location and design of harbours; Break waters -
necessity and functions - different types - forces acting on break water -
design principles— construction of break waters - general study of pier
heads - quays, landing stages - wharves, jetties, transit sheds and
warehouses - channel demarcation - signal characteristics (Beacons, buoys,
channel lighting - light houses).
Module 5
Dock Engineering: Functions and types of docks, dry docks, floating docks, slip ways, dock gates
and caissons. Dredging - mechanical and hydraulic dredgers - general study of bucket ladder -
dredger, grab dredger and dipper dredgers.
References
1. S.C. Rangawala, Railway Engineering, Chartor Publishing House

2. Saxena, Arora., Railway Engineering, Dhanpat rai & Sons
3. Subhash C. Saxena, Railway Engineering, Dhanpat rai & Sons
4. R. Srinivasan, Harbour, Dock & Tunnel Engineering, Chartor Publishing House
5. S.P.Bindra, Acourse in docks and Harbour Engineering, Dhanpat rai & Sons
WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING - I

C604 3+1
Module 1
Irrigation: Definition-necessity of irrigation - environmental effects of irrigation - sources of water
- planning concepts of irrigation schemes- irrigation systems- lift and flow irrigation – modes of
irrigation - layout of irrigation schemes - historical development and irrigation in India through ages.
Soil-water-plant relation – classes and availability of soil water- water requirement for crop -
optimum moisture for crop growth - depth of water and frequency of irrigation - crop seasons and
important crops in India. Crop period and base period - duty, delta and their relationship - factors
affecting duty - commanded areas and intensity of irrigation. Consumptive use of water -
evapotranspiration - determination of consumptive use - irrigation efficiencies.
Module 2
Basic concepts of hydrology: Hydrological cycle and its components - rainfall - rain gauge- mean
precipitation over a catchment area - run off - factors affecting runoff - hydrograph - direct run off
and base flow - unit hydrograph - S. hydrograph – applications of unit hydrograph.
71
Estimation of runoff: Empirical formula, infiltration method, rational method - flood estimation -
flood frequency, unit hydrograph method and empirical formula.
Module 3
Flow irrigation: canal system - classification of canals and their alignment - requirements of a good
distribution system-balancing depth - section of canal. Design of canals in alluvial soils - silt theories
- non silting and non scouring velocity. Kennedy's theory -Lacey's theory - design of unlined canal
using the two theories in alluvial soils - bed load and suspended load - canal outlets - requirements
of good canal outlets - non modular - semi modular - modular outlets.
Module 4
Ground water: Definitions- porosity - specific yield - specific retention - storage coefficient-
coefficient of permeability and transmissibility. Ground water velocity- Darcy's equation - flow
towards wells - Dupit's theory of aquifers. Wells-shallow wells - deep wells - yield of an open well -
constant level pumping test and recuperation test - tube wells - strainer, cavity and slotted tube
wells- factors governing the selection of site and type of tube wells. Springs, Infiltration galleries
and wells.
Module 5
Reservoir planning: Investigation - selection of site - storage zones in a reservoir - mass inflow
curve - demand curve - calculation of reservoir capacity and safe yield from mass inflow curve -
reservoir sedimentation - reservoir sediment control - single purpose reservoirs - multi purpose
reservoirs - useful life of a reservoir. River training works: guide banks, groynes and marginal bunds
– flood control - causes - methods of flood control - principles of flood routing. Soil conservation:
water logging and its control - reclamation of salt affected land.
References
1. P.M.Modi, Irrigation-water recourses and water power, Standard book house, Delhi.
2. S.K Garge, Irrigation and hydraulic structures, Khanna Publishers, Delhi
3. R.K.Linsley, M.A.Kholar&J.L.H.Paulhur, Hydrology for Engineers, Mc Grawhill book co., New York.
4. Bharat Singer, Fundamentals of Irrigation Engineering.
5. V.B.Priyani, Irrigation and Waterpower Engg, Charota Book stall Anand.
6. Dr.B.C.Punmia&Dr.Pande.B.B.Lal, Irrigation & Water Power Engineering, Laxmi Publications.
72
GEO TECHNICAL ENGINEERING - II
C 605 3+1
Module 1
Site investigation and Soil exploration: Objectives - planning - reconnaissance methods of
subsurface exploration-test pits, auger borings - rotary drilling - depth and spacing of borings - bore
log - soil profile - location of water table-sampling - disturbed and undisturbed samples. Standard
Penetration test - Static and dynamic cone penetration test - field vane shear test - Geophysical
methods.
Stress Distribution: Boussinesque's and Westergaard's equations for vertical pressure due to point
loads and u.d.l. - assumptions and limitations - pressure bulb - Newmark charts and their use.
Module 2
Earth Pressure: General & local State of plastic equilibrium. Earth pressure at rest - active and
passive. Rankine's and Coulomb's theories of cohesionless and cohesive soils - influence of
surcharge and water table.
Rehban's and Culman's graphical methods: Sheeting and bracings in shallow and deep
excavations.
Sheet Piles: Common Types of Sheet Piles – Uses of Sheet pile walls
Module 3
Bearing capacity: Definitions - ultimate and allowable - plate load test - factors affecting -
Terzaghi's and Skempton's analysis - bearing capacity factors and charts - effect of watertable -
bearing capacity from building codes andSPT values - Methods of improving bearing capacity -
vibroflotation and sand drains.
Settlement analysis: Distribution of contact pressure estimation of immediate and consolidation
settlement - causes of settlement - permissible, total and differential settlement - methods of reducing
differential settlement.
Module 4
Foundation: General consideration - Functions of foundation - shallow and deep foundation -
different types of foundation -Selection of type of foundation-steps involved.
Footings: Design of individual, continuous and combined footings - footings subjected to eccentric
loading - proportioning footings for equal settlement.
Module 5
Raft foundation: Bearing capacity equations - design procedure - floating foundation.
Pile foundation: Uses of piles - Classification of piles - Determination of load carrying capacity of
axially loaded single vertical pile (static & dynamic formulae) pile load tests - negative skin friction -
group action & pile spacings - settlement of pile group.
Caissons: Open, box, and pneumatic caissons, construction details of well foundation - problems of
well sinking.
Note
Structural design of foundations is not contemplated in this course.
References
Arora K. R, Soil Mechanics & Foundation Engineering, Standard Publishers , Distributors.

1. Joseph E.Bowles, Foundation Analysis and Design, McGraw Hills Publishing Company.
73
2. Ninan P. Kurian, Modern Foundations, Tata McGraw Hills Publishing Company.
3. Peck, Hansen & Thornburn, Foundation Engineering.
4. W.C. Teng, Foundation Design.
5. Hans. F. Winterkorn & Hsai Yang Fang, Foundation Engineering Hand Book, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Company.
QUANTITY SURVEYING VALUATION AND SPECIFICATIONS

C606 2+2
Module 1 & 2 (24 hrs.)

Purpose of estimates- different methods-Preparation of detailed estimates and abstracts for RCC
Single storey buildings - R C. Footings, Columns – T- Beams. Preparation of bar bending schedule
for R. C. works such as beams and slabs.
Module 3 (8 hrs.)
Preparation of specification for common materials of construction and its items of works with
reference to IS specifications. Cost of materials at source - different types of conveyance and rates -
head loads - preparation of conveyance statement - cost of materials at site.
Module 4 (8 hours)
Analysis of rates for earth works, mortars, RCC Works, plastering, brick works, stone works, laterite
work, Pointing, form work, flooring - different types, wood works - reinforcement works.
Module 5 (6 hours)
Valuation - explanation of terms - material value, rate, years purchase - freehold and lease hold
purchase - depreciation - methods of calculating depreciation - straight line method - constant
percentage method, sinking fund method - and quantity survey method. Methods of valuation of land
- comparative method - abstractive method. Methods of valuation of property - rental method - direct
comparison with capital cost - valuation based on profit - valuation based on cost - development
method - depreciation method.
References
1. Schedule of rates, KPWD

2. PWD Data Book
3. Dutta, Estimating and costing,S Dutta & Company, Lucknow
4. Rangawala S.C., Estimating & costing, Charator Anand, Delhi
5. I.S: 1200- 1968 - Methods of measurements of building and civil engineering.
74
MATERIAL TESTINGB LABORATORY - II
C607 0+3
1. Tests on cement.
a) Standard consistency, initial and final setting time.
b) Compressive strength of mortar cubes.
c) Specific gravity.
d) Soundness.
e) Fineness.
2. Tests on fresh concrete.
a) Compaction factor test.
b) Slump test.
c) Vee-Bee test.
d) Flow table test.
e) Ball penetration test.
3. Tests on hardened concrete.
a) Compressive strength of concrete cubes.
b) Compressive strength of concrete cylinder.
c) Splitting tensile strength.
d) Modulus of elasticity.
e) Flexural strength.
4. Tests on RC beam
5. Tests on aggregates.
a) Aggregate crushing value for coarse aggregate.
b) Specific gravity of coarse and fine aggregate.
c) Bulking of fine aggregate.
d) Bulk density and percentage voids of coarse aggregate.
e) Grain size analysis of coarse and fine aggregate.
6. Tests on bricks.
a) Compressive strength. b) Water absorption. c) Efflorescence.
7. Tests on roofing tiles.
a) Transverse strength. b) Water absorption.
8. Tests on flooring tiles.
a) Transverse strength. b) Water absorption. c) Abration tests.
9. Compression tests on Laterite blocks
10. Study of
a) Strain measurements using electrical resistance- strain gauges.
b) Nondestructive test on concrete.
Note
All tests should be done as per relevant BIS.
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN - I

C608 0+3
Module 1
History and overview of CAD- popular CAD packages – advantages of CAD over manual drafting
and design – hardware requirements – Configuration and installation of the CAD package.
75
Module 2
Creation of 2D drawings: Menu structures- Menu bars, Screen menu, Pull down menu and
Toolbars. Setting up units, limits, snap, grid, ortho mode etc. Controlling the drawing and drawing
display – zoom, pan, regeneration, redraw. Drawing aids and tools - Osnap settings, point filters,
inquiry commands, concept of UCS Modify tools – Erase, undo, redo, copy, move, rotate, offset,
fillet, chamfer, array, scale, extend, break, explode, stretch, properties. Creation of blocks and
symbols, using layers, color, linetype, ltscale etc. Dimensioning – Styles – Dim variables, scaling,
formatting, annotation, QDIM adding text to drawing – multiline text, text styles, editing text.
Working with multiple drawings, printing and plotting.
Module 3
Creation of 3D drawings: Concept of 3D Drawings, working with views in 3D using view point,
Real-time 3D rotation, concept of UCS in 3D, multiple active work planes. 3D modeling techniques-
wire modeling, surface modeling, surface revolution, tabsurf, rulesurf, edgesurf, and 3D face, region
modeling, solid modeling, fillets and chamfer, editing faces of 3D solid & shelling. Calculating mass
properties and interference Creating perspective and sectional perspective views of 3D models.
Shading and rendering - assigning material, landscapes, mapping, lights and scenes etc.
Module 4
AutoLISP: Introduction of AutoLISP- Data types, signs and symbol conventions, user defined
functions, variables and functions. Writing your own commands.
Module 5
1. Planning and designing of residential buildings (2D only)
2. Planning and designing of public buildings (2D only)
3. Term project – To prepare sketch design for Client and submission drawings for approval (Using
National Building code provisions and Local Building rules)
References
1. Reference Manual of the package.

2. National building code of India.
3. Shah & Kale, Building Drawing, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Balgopal T.S. Prabhu, Building Drawing and Detailing, SPADES, Calicut.
5. Sham Tickoo, Understanding AutoCAD 2002, Tata McGraw Hill.
6. Sham Tickoo, AutoCAD 2002 with Applications, Tata McGraw Hill.
76
SEVENTH SEMESTER
77
DESIGN OF CONCRETE STRUCTURES - II
C701 2+2+0
Module 1
Prestressed concrete: I. S. Specifications - general principles - methods and systems of prestressing
- losses of prestress - design of simply supported rectangular beams.
Module 2
Retaining walls: Types-Earth pressure diagrams- modes of failure- design of cantilever and counter
fort retaining walls ("L” not included)
Module 3
Design of continuous beam: using coefficients given in IS: 456 - design of circular beams
-uniformly loaded and supported on symmetrically placed columns.
Module 4
Domes: membrane stresses in spherical and conical domes –design of domes with uniformly
distributed and concentrated loads - openings - ring beams.
Module 5
Water tanks: Types - design of ground supported and overhead water tanks-rectangular and circular
with flat bottom-flexible and rigid joints – design of staging- columns and bracings - IS code
method.
References
1. Relevant IS codes.(I.S 456, I.S 875,SP 16)

2. Park R and Pauloy T, Reinforced concrete structures, John Wiely & sons Inc.
3. Purushothaman P, Reinforced concrete structural elements-Behaviour, Analysis and Design, Tata
Mc Graw Hill Publishing company Ltd.
4. Unnikrishna Pillai .S & D.Menon, Reinforced concrete design, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing
Company Ltd.
5. Mallick S.K, Reinforced concrete, Oxford & IBH Publishing Company.
6. Varghese P.C, Limit state design of Reinforced concrete, Printice Hall of India Pvt Ltd.
7. Ashok .K. Jain, Reinforced concrete- Limit state design, New Chand & Bose.
8. Krishna Raju, Prestressed Concrete, Oxford and I B H Publishing companyLtd.
9. Ramamruthum S., Design of Reinforced concrete structures, Dhanpat Rai Publishing co.
10. Punmia B.C, Reinforced concrete structures Vol II, Lakshmi Publications
78
WATER RESOURCES ENGINEERING - II
C702 3+1+0
Module 1
Dams: definitions - classifications - factors governing the selection of the type of dam and site of
the dam- investigation for a dam site. Gravity dam: forces acting - combination of forces for design -
modes of failure and stability requirements - elementary profile and practical profile - principal and
shear stress - base width of elementary profile by stress and stability criteria-stresses developed in
the elementary profile - low dam and high dam - methods-of design of gravity darn (introduction
only) - joints - keys water stops – opening and galleries and shaft - foundation treatment - brief
description on type of spill ways.
Module 2
Arch dams: types of arch dams - forces acting -design of arch dams on thin cylinder theory -
introduction of other methods of design - thick cylinder theory - trial load analysis and elastic
theory. Buttress dam - types - advantages and disadvantages. Earthen dam - types of earth dams -
design criteria - selection of a dam - phreatic line - stability analysis - different dam sections to suit
available materials and foundation - rock fill dams materials of construction - impervious membrane
type and earth core type (brief description only)
Module 3
Diversion head works: function and component parts of diversion head works - effect of construction
of weir on the regime of river- causes of failure of weirs on permeable foundation. Bligh's creep
theory and its limitations - Lane's weighted creep theory - Khosla's theory and design of impermeable
foundation - design of vertical drop weir - silt control devices - silt excluder, silt ejector.
Module 4
Design and drawings emphasizing the hydraulic aspects of the following structures: (1) Regulators-
design of head regulator and cross regulator. (2) Canal falls- trapezoidal notch fall- vertical drop fall
sarda type and glacis fall. (3) Cross drainage works –aqueduct and syphon aqueduct.
Module 5
Water power engineering: Classification of hydel plants- runoff river plants, storage plants and
pumped storage plants - low, medium and high head schemes - investigation and planning - fore bay
– intakes - surge tanks - penstocks - powerhouse – selection of turbine-Scroll casing - draft tube -
tailrace definition of gross head - operating head - effective head - firm power –secondary power-
load factor, capacity factor and utilization factor.
References
1. P. M. Modi, Irrigation-water resourses and water power, Standard book house.

2. S. K.Garg, Irrigation and hydraulic structures, S. K.Garg, Khanna publishers
3. R. K. Linsley, M. A. Kholer, L. H. Paulhur, Hydrology for Engineerers, Tata Mc Graw Hill
4. Bharat Singer, Fundamentals of Irrigation Engineering
5. V. B. Priyani, Irrigation and water power Engg. , Charotar Book stall.
6. B C Punmia, Pande B B Lal, Irrigation and water power engineering, Laxmi Publications.
7. R.S.Varshney, S.C.Guptha, R.L.Guptha, Theory and design of irrigation
8. Structures, Vol II, Nemchand &brothers, Roorkee.
79
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING - II
C703 2+1+0
Module 1
Classification, alignment and surveys -classification of highways - historical development of road
construction, typical cross section of roads in urban and rural areas - definitions of various cross
sectional elements - requirements and factors controlling alignment of roads, engineering surveys for
highway location.
Geometric design of highways: pavement surface characteristics, camber and width requirements,
sight distances - over taking zone requirements and related problems. Design of horizontal alignment
- speed - radius – super elevation - extra widening - transition curves, methods of attainment of super
elevation - related problems.Design of vertical alignment - gradient and grade compensation - sight
distance requirements on summit and valley curves -simple problems on design of vertical
alignment.
Module 2
Traffic Engineering: traffic characteristics-various traffic studies and their applications . Traffic
control devices- Traffic signs, markings, traffic signals and traffic islands. Types of road intersection
- kerb parking - principles of highway lighting - (Design of traffic signals not expected).
Module 3
Highway materials: Road aggregates - their desirable properties and tests.
Bituminous materials - properties and tests - sub grade soil - desirable properties.
Highway construction and maintenance: Bituminous surface dressing and pavement construction -
cement concrete construction and joints in concrete pavements - types and causes of failures in
flexible and rigid pavements, highway drainage.
Pavement design: Basic difference between flexible and rigid pavements -factors affecting their
design - designof flexible pavements-CBR, GI & IRC methods.
Module 4
Aircraft characteristics- regional planning, selection of site for airport - factors to be considered.
Imaginary surfaces - approach zone and turning zone, obstructions and zoning laws. Runway
orientation and layout of runways: use of wind rose diagrams, basic runway length and corrections
required. Methods of classification of airports. Stopway, clearway and taxiway design requirements.
Module 5
Aprons: loading aprons - factors controlling size and number of gate positions - aircraft parking
systems - holding apron. Facilities required in the terminal building - facilities for movement of
baggage and passengers. Use of blast fences, typical airport layout - airport markings - marking of
runways, taxiways etc. Airport lighting: lighting of runways approaches, taxiways and aprons. Air
traffic control -airways, navigational aids and landing aids.
References
1. S. K.Khanna, C. E. G. Justo, Highway engineering, Nem Chand Publications.

2. L .R. Khadiyali, Traffic Engineering and Transport Planning, Khanna Publishers.
3. S.K. Khanna, M. G. Arora, S.S. Jain, Airport Planning & Design, Nem Chand
Publishers
4. S. C. Rangwala, Airport Engg., Charotar Publishing Co.
5. Horenjeft, Robert & Francise Mc Keivy, Planning and design of airports,
80
Mc Graw Hill
6. G V Rao, Principles of transportation and High way Engineering, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi.
7. Robert. G. Hennes, Martin Ekse, Fundamentals of Transportation engineering, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
8. Theodore M Matson, Wilbur.S.Smith, Frederick.W.Hurd, Traffic Engineering, Mc Graw Hill.
ARCHITECTURE AND TOWN PLANNING

C704 2+1+0
Module 1
Principles of architectural Design:
Definition of architecture: factors influencing architectural development- characteristic features of a
style-historical examples. Creative principles: function/strength, aesthetics - deciding the space and
form - detailed analysis of factors influencing the space - activity space, circulation space and
tolerance space - Factors influencing form- form perception - form expressive of function-form
related with material and Structural system. Design principles - elements of composition - point, line,
plane, texture, colour etc. - mass and scale, proportion, rhythm, balance and unity - iconic, canonic
and analogic design -consideration of comfort factors such as acoustics, lighting, ventilation and
thermal aspects.
Module 2
Functional planning of buildings: Occupancy classification of buildings'-general requirements of site
and building - building codes and rules - licencing of building works. Functional planning of
building such as residential, institutional, public, commercial, industrial buildings - the process of
identifying activity areas and linkages - drawing built diagrams - checking for circulation,
ventilation, structural requirements and other constraints preparing sketch plan and working
drawings - site plans.
Kerala Municipal acts – planning regulations of corporations and developmental authorities – Kerala
building bye laws.
Module 3
Building services: Vertical Transportation: stairs - layout and details of different types of timber -
masonry, steel and concrete stairs - pre-cast concrete stairs, elevators - types - traction, hydraulic
operation - passenger, service goods elevators - design considerations of passenger elevators -
handling capacity - arrangement of lifts - positioning, escalators, features- operation arrangement -
ramps. Ventilation and air conditioning - ventilation requirements -natural and mechanical
ventilation - air movement - cross ventilation - effect of orientation - radiation - evaporation,
calculation of air conditioning load - summer and winter air conditioning. Plumbing services: typical
details of water supply and sewage disposal arrangements for residence, hospitals and hostel
buildings - standard requirements.
Module 4
Town planning theory: Evolution of towns: problems of urban growth - beginning of planning acts -
ideal town - garden city movement - concept of new towns and conservative theory - comprehensive
planning of towns- Survey and analysis of town: fare maps - land use classification - transportation
network - housing demographic arid social surveys - economic studies - environmental aspects.
Theories of land use planning, transportation planning and housing development.
Urban area lineation: urban influence zone - urban region concept of regional planning.
Module 5
81
Planning Process: Concept of master plan: structural plan, detailed town planning scheme and act.
Estimating future needs: planning standards for different land use allocation for commerce,
industries, public amenities, open areas etc. planning standard for density distributions-density zone,
planning standards for traffic networks - standards of roads and paths - provision for urban growth-
growth models. Plan implementation: town planning legislation and municipal acts - planning
control development schemes - urban financing - land aquisitions - slum clearance schemes -
pollution control aspects.
References
1. Banister Fletcher, History of World Architecture, Taraporevalas.

2. Broadbent, Theory of Architecture Design, John Wiley Sons
3. Gallien, Urban Pattern, D.Van Nostrand CD. Inc.
4. Nelson P. Low's, Planning to Modern City
5. Rangwala, Town Planning, Charotar Publishing House.
6. S.C Agarwala, Architecture and Town Planning, Dhanpatrai &sons.
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING - I
C705 3+1+0
Module 1
Scope of Environmental Engg. population trends resource use - effect on the balance of ecosystem
and natural resources. Water supply Engineering: Rural and Urban water supply systems - water
requirements - consumption for various purposes, percapita demand, factors affecting percapita
demand, variations in the rate of consumption, fire demand, design period, forecasting population.
Quality of water: impurities in water and their importance - water borne diseases - sampling of water
for tests - analysis of water - physical, chemical and bacteriological tests - MPN total coliforms, fecal
coliforms by A-1 medium. WHO and Indian standards for drinking water.
Module 2
Collection of water: intakes - location, types, principles of design and construction. Transmission of
water: free flow and pressure conduits - pipe materials - hydraulics-of flow - design of pipes - Indian
standards for pipes.
Pumps: Classification - rotary, reciprocating, centrifugal pumps, hand pumps submersible pumps -
selection of pumps - location of pumping stations.
Distribution of water: pumping system, gravity system, pumping and storage system distribution
reservoirs -storage capacity of balancing reservoir, pipe grids, methods of analysis of network.
Appurtenances in the distribution system - meters, valves, fire hydrants etc. pipe laying, testing &
disinfections of mains. Detection and prevention of leaks in distribution system-cleaning and
maintenance of distribution system, pipe corrosion and its control.
Water supply of buildings: house connections - overhead tanks.
Module 3
Introduction: Sanitation, sewage, sewer, and sewerage systems, sewage treatment and disposal.
Sanitary Plumbing - Sanitary Fixtures, traps, soil pipe, anti- siphonage pipes, systems of plumbing.
House drainage: Principles-inspection chamber, ventilation, testing of drain, connection of house
drain to street sewer. Sewerage systems – separate, combined and partially combined systems,
situation for adoption, collection pattern.
82
Quantity of sewage: sanitary sewage - sources, factors affecting. Fluctuations in sewage flow, peak
factor.
Characteristics of sewage: physical, chemical and biological characteristics and analysis, sampling,
population equivalent relative stability-cycles of decay.
Storm sewage: Factors affecting, intensity of rainfall, rational and empirical formula, time of
concentration, intensity - duration curve and formula.
Design of sewers: Flow formula, minimum and maximum velocity of flow, effect of variation of
discharge on velocity, use of partial flow diagrams, design of circular sewers, longitudinal and cross
section of sewer lines.
Module 4
Construction of sewers: Materials of sewers, crown corrosion, sewer joints, planning, preparation
of layout and construction of sewers and testing of sewers, cleaning and maintenance, ventilation of
sewers. Sewer appurtenances: inlets, catch basins, clean outs, manholes, drop manholes, lamp
holes/flushing tanks, grease and oil traps, inverted siphons, storm regulators. Sewage pumping:
pumping stations - types of pumps - capacity of pumps - design of pumps.
Natural methods of wastewater disposal: land disposal -. Sewage farming - disposal by dilution - self
purification of streams - oxygen sag curve - dilution into sea, comparison of disposal methods.
Module 5
Air pollution: Types of pollutants, sources, health effects, Monitoring.
Noise pollution: Sources, effects. Solid waste management: Type and source of solid waste,
characteristics, collection, transportation and processing- Disposal-composting, sanitary land fill,
incineration
References
1. Peavy, Rowe, Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, Mc Graw Hill International Editions.
2. M.N. Rao & H.V.N. Rao, Air Pollution, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi.
3. S. K. Garg, Environmental Engineering Vol. l & ll, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
4. B.C. Punmia, Water supply Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur.
5. B.C. Punmia, Waste water Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur.
OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE - I)

CMELRTA 706-1 3+1+0
Module1: Classical optimization techniques

Single variable optimization – Multivariable optimization with no constraints – Hessian matrix –
Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method -
Multivariable optimization with inequality constraints – Kuhn-Tucker conditions.
Module 2: One-dimensional unconstrained minimization

Elimination methods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods –
Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods.
83
Module 3: Unconstrained minimization
Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke
and Jeeve’s method.
Module 4: Integer – Linear programming problem

Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomory’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed
integer programming problems.
Module 5: Network Techniques

Shortest path model – Dijkstra`s Algorithm – Floyd`s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem
– PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm.
References
1. S.S. Rao, Optimization theory and application, New Age International P. Ltd.
2. A.D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla, Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering,
Pearson Education Asia.
3. F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena, Richard D, Principles of Operations Research for
Management, Irwin, INC.
4. H. A. Taha, Operation Research an introduction, Eastern Economy Edition.
5. R. Panneerselvam, Operations Research, PHI.
THEORY OF PLATES (ELECTIVE - I)
C706-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Plates- Introduction- classification of plates- thin plates and thick plates – small deflection theory and
large deflection theory – basic concepts of two imensional theory of elasticity – fourth order
differential equation for generalized bending problems (derivation in next module)
Module 2
Pure bending of plates – slope and curvature of slightly bent plates – relation between bending
moment and curvature in pure bending – stresses – variation– plates subjected to lateral loadings
-small deflection theory of thin plates – Love- Kirchhoff’s theory – assumptions– derivation of
fourth order differential equation
Module 3
Solution techniques for fourth order differential equation – boundary conditions – simply supported,
built- in and free edge – Navier’s solution for simply supported rectangular plates – uniformly
distributed and concentrated load.
Module 4
Strain energy – pure bending of plate – bending of plates by lateral loads – Mindlin’s theory –
assumptions - equilibrium equations – stress variations – comparative study with Love- Kirchhoff’s
equations.
Module 5
Circular plates – polar coordinates – differential equation of symmetrical bending of laterally loaded
circular plates- uniformly loaded circular plates – circular plates loaded at the centre
References
84
1. Lloyd Hamilton Donnell, Beams, plates and shells, Mc Graw Hill, NewYork.
2. Timoshenko, W Krieger, Theory of plates and shells, Mc Graw Hill.
3. Owen F Hughes, Ship structural design, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1983.
4. William Muckle, Strength of ship structures, Edqward Arnold Ltd, London, 1967.
PRESTRESSED CONCRETE (ELECTIVE - I)

C706-3 3+1
Module 1
Introduction: Basic concept of prestressing - Advantages of prestressed concrete over reinforced
concrete - materials for prestressed concrete and their characteristics. Uniform prestress distribution
in prestressed concrete - nonuniform prestress distribution - moments of resistance.
Module 2
Systems and methods of prestressing- pre-tensioning systems - post tensioning systems - Thermo
elastic prestressing - chemical prestressing.Behavior of prestressed concrete beams in flexure : load -
deflection curves for prestressed concrete beams - Interpreting bending tests - Microcracks and
visible cracks - Failure.
Module 3
Losses in prestress: purpose of assessing losses - counteracting elastic loss-loss of prestress in case
of nonuniform prestress - creep, shrinkage, relaxation and achorage losses - friction loss in prestress
-graphical solution of friction losses - overcoming friction losses.
Module 4
Elastic design of sections for flexure: design of a simply supported beam with symmetrical sections
of post tensioned and pretensioned type- tension members.
Module 5
Bearing and anchorage zone- statically indeterminate structure-continuous beams- primary moment
–secondary moment- resultant moment – Concordant cable profile-Gyons theorem.
References
1. N. Krishna Raju, Prestressed Concrete, Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co. Ltd, New Dehi.
2. S K Mallick, A P Gupta, Prestressed concrete, Oxford and IBI Series.
3. R. H. Evans, Bennet E W, Prestressed concrete theory and design, Chapman and Hall, London.
4. T. Y. Lin, Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, Asia Publishing House.
GROUND IMPROVEMENT TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE - I)

C706-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Necessity of soil improvement-selection of improvement method- mechanical stabilization-effect on
engineering properties-dewatering-well-point system-electro osmosis-pre-loading- sand drains-
methods of installation-vibro-flotation-stone columns.
Module 2
85
Chemical stabilization- cement stabilization- factors affecting soil cement mixing-admixtures- lime
stabilization-effect of lime on soil properties-construction of lime stabilized bases-bituminous
stabilization- thermal stabilization- electrical stabilization.
Module 3
Introduction to grouts and grouting- basic functions – groutability ratio –classification of grouts-
properties of grouts- fluidity, bleeding potential, rigidity and thixotropy, strength and permeance-
grouting applications-seepage control in soil under dams and for cut off walls- seepage control in rock
under dams-stabilization grouting for under pinning.
Module 4
Earth Reinforcement- mechanism and concept- stress strain relationship of reinforced soil-design
theories and stability analysis of retaining wall-tie back analysis-coherent gravity analysis- application
areas of earth reinforcement
Module 5
Geotextiles: Soil reinforcement with geotextiles- classification- concepts- geotextiles as separators,
filters, and drainage media-damage and durability of geotextiles
References
1. M.J.Tholinson - Foundation design and construction Robert M.Koerner - Construction and

Geotechnical methods in Foundation Engineering
2. C.J.F.P.Jones - Earth Reinforcement and Soil structures
3. R.A.Jewell - Soil Reinforcement with Geotextiles
4. Donald P.Coduto - Geotechnical Engineering, Principles and Practices Prentice Hall India
CONCRETE TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - I)

C706-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Concrete materials: cement manufacture - chemical composition hydration - types of cement- tests
for cement - setting and hardening - Aggregates - Classification - requirements - size - shape -
texture - Tests for aggregates - Alkali aggregate reaction - grading of aggregate - sieve analysis -
Flakiness index - Elongation Index Impact value-abrasion value -Water - general requirements -
quality of water.
Module 2
Fresh Concrete: Workability - factors affecting - measurement of workability - different tests for
workability - segregation - bleeding - process of manufacture of concrete - Batching - mixing -
transportation - compaction - curing of concrete - curing methods - admixtures in concrete - air
entraining agents - Accelerators – Retarders -workability agents - Damp proofing agents -
Miscellaneous admixtures - quality control.
Module 3
Elastic properties of Concrete - factors affecting modulus of elasticity - Strength of concrete: w/c
ratio - gel/space ratio - Gain of strength with age. - accelerated curing tests - maturity concept of
concrete - effect of maximum size of aggregate on strength - relation between compressive and
tensile strength - revibration - high speed slurry mixing - creep - shrinkage - factors affecting.
86
Module 4
Durability of concrete: - sulphate attack - methods of controlling sulphate attack. Durability of
concrete in sea water - action of organic acids, mineral oils, sugar etc. on hard concrete - thermal
properties of concrete - Fire resistance cracks in concrete–Remedies, Testing of Hardened concrete,
flexural strength - comparison of cuube test and cylinder test - Indirect tension test methods
-concrete mix design - IS methods - ACI methods - mean strength - characteristic compressive
strength - Non distructive testing of concrete.
Module 5
Special aggregates: light weight - artificial - natural - special concrete - no - fine concrete- high
density concrete - Sulphur infilterated concrete - fibre reinforced concrete - polymer concrete
polymer impregnated concrete - polymer cement concrete - properties of polymer concrete -
special concreting methods - cold Weather concreting, hot weather concreting - Ferrocement.
References
1. Krishna Raju N, Concrete Technology

2. A.M. Neville, Properties of concrete
3. M.S. Shetty, Concrete Technology
TRAFFIC ENGINEERING AND MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE-I)

C706-6 3+1+0
Module 1
Traffic management - scope of traffic management measures - restrictions to turning movements -
one way streets - tidal flow operation - regulation of traffic - Need and scope of traffic regulations-
Motor Vechicle Act - Speed limit at different locations- regualtion of the vechicle - regulations
concerning the driver rules of the road enforcement.
Module 2
Highway capacity: Its importance in transportation studies - basic, possible and practical capacity -
determination of theoretical maximum capacity -passenger car units - level of service - concept in
HC manual - factors affecting level of service.
Module 3
Design of Intersection: Design of at grade & grade seperated intersection - rotary intersection -
capacity of rotary intersection - traffic signals - design of fixed timesignal - pretimed signalised
intersection - performance - Websters approach for the design.
Module 4
Traffic Safety: causes of road accidents - collection of accident data - influence of road, the
vehicle .the driver, the weather and other factors on road accident - preventive measures.
Module 5
Traffic Flow: theory of traffic flow - scope - definition and basic diagrams of traffic flow- basic
concepts of light hill - Whitham's theory - Car 'following theory and queuing
87
References
1. Khadiyali L.R. Traffic Engineering and Transport planning, Khanna Tech Publishers
2. Khanna O.P and Jesto C.G; Highway Engineering, Nem Chand Publishers
3. Martin, Whol, Traffic system Analysis for Engineers
4. Donald Drew, Traffic Flow Theory
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING (ELECTIVE - I)

C706-7 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to OOP: Basic concepts objects-classes-data abstraction-inheritance-polymorphism-
dynamic binding-virtual functions-advantages of OPP over procedure oriented programming-object
oriented languages. Introduction to C++ - C++ character set - C++ tokens-data types constants and
variables - declaration of variables - operators, expression, and statements-type compatibility - type
casting- l/O operators <<and >>) cascading of 1/0 operators.
Module 2
Control flow and iterative statements standard input-output streams arrays: one dimension array-
multidimensional array- array Initialization. Structures: definition-referencing structure elements.
Function prototypes-argument data types-returning values and their types – scope - rules of functions
and variables – built - in functions.
Module 3
Classes and Objects: Class declaration - data member functions private and public members class
function definition member function definition - private and public member functions methods -
creating objects - accessing class data members-accessing member functions - constructors and
destructors – declaration, definition and use.
Module 4
Advanced features: Dynamic memory allocation-pointers –new and delete operators-pointer
variables- pointers to objects-accessing member functions-classes with pointers to objects- accessing
member functions - classes with pointers-copy constructor-static members-friend classes-friend
functions-operator overloading File handling in C++: File pointers F-stream classes open (), close ()
read (), write () functions-detecting end of file.
Module 5
Polymorphism and Inheritance: Function overloading-base class derived class-class conversion-
visibility modes-private, public and protected members-single inheritance -privately derived and
publicly derived - making protected member inheritable - access control-virtual functions-dynamic
binding- abstract classes-concept of multiple inheritance.
References
1. Stanely, Lipman, C++ primer

2. Balaguruswammy, Object Oriented Programming with C++, Tata Mc Graw Hill
3. Robert Lafore, Turbo C++
4. Gordenkeith, Data Abstraction and OOP in C++
88
5. Strostraup, C++ Programming Language
6. David Parsons, Object Oriented Programming with C++, B P B Publications
7. Y.Kanetkar, Let Us C++, BPB Publications.
OPEN CHANNEL AND COASTAL HYDRAULICS (ELECTIVE - 1)

C706-8 3+1+0
Module 1
Parameters of open channel flow - uniform and non uniform flow normal depth - conveyance -
friction formula - specific energy - specific force - diagram - critical depth - application to problems.
Critical flow computation - section factor - hydraulic exponent for critical flow computation and its
use for trapezoidal channel.
Module 2
Hydraulic jump - sequent depths - dimensionless equation of the jump - loss of head - the jump at the
feet of a spillway - criteria for the formation of a jump - use of jump as an energy disspiator. Control
of jump by sills - stilling basins.
Module 3
Non-uniform flow - friction slope - differential equation of non-uniform flow - the 12 type of surface
profiles - the point of control - computation by Bresse's method and the simplified step method.
Module 4
Water waves - classification into periodic progressive, periodic oscillatory, oscillatory and stationary
waves - ocean waves - wave period - wave length and celerity. General expression for the celerity of
deep Water - gravity wave and shallow water gravity wave - determination of the wave length and
celerity for any water depth given the deep water wave amount as wave energy (no proof). Wave
deformation - transformation of waves on a slope (description only) reflection of waves at a vertical
sea wall. Clapotis - wave refraction - breaking of waves (description only).
Module 5
Wind generated waves - wave forecasting - significant wave height - breakwaters - different types.
Coastal erosion with special reference to the Kerala Coast - shore protection measures - sea walls -
tetrapods. groynes and'beach nourishment.
References
1. 1.S.M.Woodword, C.J.Posey, Hydraulic of Steady Flow in Open Channels

2. F. N. Henderson, Open Channel Flow
3. A. I. Ippen, Estuary and Coast line Hydrodynamics
4. K. E. R. I. Peechi, Coastal Engineering Publications
5. V. T. Chow, Open Channel hydraulics, Mc Graw Hill
6. Robert .M. Sorensen, Basic coastal engineering, John Willy & Sons
AIR POLLUTION CONTROL (ELECTIVE - 1)

C 706-9 3+1+0
Module 1
89
Introduction - Significance of air pollution studies, factors that contribute to air pollution -
possibilities to air pollution abatemant - air pollution legislation - Techno - administrative aspects of
air pollution - Emission and noise standards of Kerala State Pollution Control board.
Module 2
Gaseous pollutants-source, chemistry, adverse effects on plants, animals and human beings,
properties - tolerance levels - carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide, aldehydes, hydrocarbons -
compounds of sulphur, compounds of Nitrogen, Oxidants, Hydrogen fluoride - Control of gaseous
pollutants - Automobile pollution control.
Module 3
Particulates in the air - source, nature and adverse effects - control of particulates - settling, filtration,
collection in fluids, electrostatic precipitation, conversion to harmless and useful products.
Meteorology related to atmosphere - pressure, temperature, lapse rates - humidity - condensation -
wind direction and velocity. Effects of meteorological parameters on transport and diffussion.
Atmospheric Electricity.
Module 4
Optics of the atmosphere - Effects of air pollutants on atmospheric visibility - methods of
measurement of visibility - Introduction to noise pollution. Photochemical reactions of the
atmosphere.
Module 5
Purpose and principles of measurement of (1) High volume sampler (2) Exhaust gas analyser (petrol
and diesel) (3) Stack sampler (4) Sound level meter - industrial hygiene and in plant safety to
workers.
References
1. Henry C Perkins, Air pollution, Mc Graw Hill Pvt Ltd, NewDelhi.

Arthur C Stern, Air pollution, Vol I, II, III, IV, V, Academic Press, NewYork.
3. Noel De Nevers, Air pollution control Engineering, Mc Graw Hill International Edition, Mc
Graw Hill Inc, New Delhi.
4. M. N. Rao, H V N Rao, Air pollution, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pvt Ltd, NewDelhi.
90
REMOTE SENSING AND ITS APPLICATIONS (ELECTIVE - I)
C706-10 3+1+0
Module 1
Principles and concepts: Introduction and definition of remote sensing terminology- principles and
methods of remote sensing- electro-magnetic radiation and spectrum- radiation sources-interference-
atmospheric effects on remote sensing- atmospheric window –energy interaction with surface
features- different types of platforms- sensors and their characteristics-orbital parameters of a
satellite- multi concepts in remote sensing.
Module 2
Aerial photogrammetry: Definition- types of photographs- geometry of photographs – parallax -
pair of photographs- height determination- flight planning stereoscopy.
Module 3
Interpretation of images: Aerial photo interpretation – basic elements- techniques of photo
interpretation- application of aerial photo interpretation- photographs versus maps- interpretation of
satellite images- ground truth collection and interpretation and verification- advantages of multi date
and multi band images.
Module 4
Imagery: Landsat imagery- thermal infrared imagery- Radar imagery- digital image processing-
comparison with image types- applications of satellite imagery- merits- limitations-comparison with
aerial photographs.
Module 5
Applications: Applications in water resources management- land use mapping and monitoring- soil
sciences- geology- agriculture- forestry - oceanography.
References
1. Thomas M. Lillesand & Raiph W. Kiefer, “Remote sensing and image interpretation”, John Wiley
Sons.
2. Floyd F. Sabins, “Remote sensing principles and interpretation”, Freeman and company.
3. Campbell J. B, “Introduction to remote sensing”, The Guilford press, London.
4. Curran P.J., “Principles of remote sensing”, Longman, London.
5. Engmen E.T and Gurnay R. J.,”Remote sensing in hydrology”, Chapman and Hall.
6. Wolf P.R., “Elements of photogrammetry”, McGraw Hills.
TRANSPORTATION ENGINEERING LAB

C707 0+0+3
TEST ON SOIL
1.Califormia bearing ratio method.
91
TEST ON BITUMEN
2. Softeningpoint of Bitumen
3. Ductility test on Bitumen
4. Specific gravity of Bitumen
5. Flash and fire point test
6. Stripping value test
7. Viscosity using Viscometer
TESTS ON ROAD AGGREGATES
8. Aggregate crushing value test
9. Impact value test
10. Specific gravity test
11. Shape tests - Flakiness index and elongation index
12. Los angles abrasion test
13. Bulk density, specific gravity, void ratio and porosity of coarse aggregate, water absorbtion.
TESTS ON MIXES
14. Marshell stability value
15. Determination of bitumen content by bitumen extractor.
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN II

C708 0+0+3
Module I and II
• INTRODUCTION
Overview and the Environment of STAAD-III Package.
• GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Type of structure, Unit systems, structure geometry and Co-ordinate
systems, global co- ordinate system, Local co-ordinate systems
• STAAD III Commands- Using Edit Input-Command Formats-Text Input.
• STAAD PRE- Graphical Input Generation-“Concurrent” Verifications-
Library- Geometry Generation – Dimensioning.
• STAAD POST – Graphical Post Processing – Animation – Icons –
Isometric View – Zooming-Results of Analysis & Design – Query
reports.
• LOAD – Member Load, Element Load, Joint Load, Floor Load, Self
weight Command, Load case no, Load Combination .Load Generation for
Wind Load, Seismic Load and Moving Load
• FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS & Dynamic Analysis.
• DESIGN for Concrete and Steel Structures using IS: 456 and IS 800
respectively.
• STAAD INTDES – Interactive Design Series for slabs, retaining walls and
footings.
Note
The student has to practice the above topics by working out problems in
1. Analysis and design of steel trusses, Steel and RCC framed structures.
2. Analysis and design of multi-storied framed structures.
3. Analysis and design of RCC and steel water tanks.
92
Module III & IV
Project management using CPM/PERT Software
(Microsoft Project /PRIMAVERA software)
1. Practice on the GUI of the software and Input of Date

2. Practice on Creating Bar Charts/Ghant charts
3. Practice on creating CPM/PERT charts and finding out critical path.
4. Practice on resource allocation and leveling of resources.
5. Practice on Project Monitoring (Cost &Time)
6. Plotting and printing of various charts and project
Note
The student has to practice the above topics by doing Project Management for Turn key projects
related to Civil Engineering applications.
References
1. STAAD III Reference Manual

2. MS Project/PRIMAVERA Reference Manual
93
EIGHTH SEMESTER
94
ADVANCED STRUCTURAL DESIGN
C801 2+2+0
Module 1
Road bridges: I. R. C. Specifications - slab bridges -T-Beam bridges - box culvert - bearings.
Module 2
Shell structures: General principles for membrane theory for symmetrical uniformly distributed load
- design of a simply supported single barrel cylindrical shell for membrane stresses - beam method.
Folded plates: general principles - structural behaviour of plates (design not required)
Module 3
Industrial buildings: roof loads - analysis and design of trusses - design of purlins - design of bracing
– supporting system.
Module 4
Design of plate girders and gantry girders - riveted and welded compound sections.
Module 5
Steel bridges: - I. S. Specifications - design of highway and railway bridges of plate girder type.
References
I. R. C. Bridge code, Indian Railway Bridge code, I. S. 456, I. S

Victor J.D., Design of Concrete Bridges, Oxford& I B H Publishing Company, New Delhi.
Krishna Raju, Advanced Design of Concrete Structures, Oxford& I B H Publishing Company, New
Delhi.
Ramchandra, Design of Steel Structures. Vol II, Standard Book House, Delhi.
Ramaswamy G.S., Design and Construction of Concrete Shell Roofs, Mc Graw Hills
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS

C802 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to FEM-Historical development-Idealization of actual structures-Mathematical model-
General procedure of FEA-Displacement approach. Solution techniques- Gauss Elimination –
Frontal solver (concepts only)
Module 2
Finite element analysis- -Energy principles- Principle of Stationary Potential Energy-
Complementary Energy - Variational approach -Stable- Unstable- Neutral equilibrium-Virtual work-
Principle of virtual forces – Principle of virtual displacements.
Module 3
Shape functions-Lagrangian and Hermition Interpolation – Polynomials – General coordinates-Area
coordinates-Compatibility –C0 and C1 elements-convergence criteria- conforming & nonconforming
elements – Patch test
95
Module 4
Stiffness matrix-Bar element-Beam element-Triangular elements - Constant Strain Triangle-Linear
Strain Triangle- Isoparametric elements-Numerical Integration - Gauss Quadrature.
Module 5
General plate bending elements- Plate bending theory – Kirchhoff’s theory – Mindlin’s theory –
Introduction to locking problems- preventive measures – reduced integration – selective integration.
Axysymmetric elements- Introduction to shell elements
References
1. O C Zienkiewicz,.Finite Element Method, fourth Edition,McGraw Hill,

2. R.D.Cook, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, John Wiley &Sons.
3. Stephen P.Timoshenko& Krieger, S.W., Theory of Plates and Shells, McGraw Hill.
4. C.S.Krishnamoorthy, Finite Element Analysis, Tata McGraw Hill .New Delhi, 1987.
5. S.Rajasekharan, Finite Element Analysis, Wheeler Publishing Co., &Sons.1993.
6. T.Kant, Finite Element Methods in Computational Mechanics, Pergamons Press.
7. K.J.Bathe, Finite Element Procedures in Engineering Analysis, Prentice Hall,
8. Mukhopadhyay M., Matrix Finite Element Computer and Structural Analysis, Oxford &IBH, 1984.
9. Irving H.Shames, Energy &Finite Element Methods in Structural Mechanics.
10. Desai C.S.&Abel J.F., Introduction to Finite Element Methods, East West Press.
BUILDING TECHNOLOGY AND MANAGEMENT

C803 3+1+0
Module 1
Concrete Mix Design: General concepts. BIS method of mix design, American standards of mix
design, IS-method of mix design, Durability concepts in mix design - Requirements and tests of
materials required for mix design.-Fibre reinforced concrete- High performance concrete.
Form work. General arrangements – general requirements – common faults – materials for form
work – form work arrangements – form work design – loads on forms – design procedure – form
work vibration for compaction of concrete – stripping time and shoring.
Module 2
Prefabricated construction: Advantages, foundation units, wall panels, frames for opening, walls–
units for roofs and floors – low cost roof systems. Hollow concrete blocks, Ferro cement – use and
application – modular co-ordination – method of production – flow line method – station method –
manufacturing process for structural units.
Codification and Standerdisation- Value analysis: Various methods and techniques.
Module 3
Construction company organization: Different types of organizational set up – construction team
– objectives of civil engineering management – duties and responsibilities of a civil engineer –
functions of construction management. Technical planning.
Site organization: Organization of labour, resources, materials, method of execution of the project –
inspection and quality control- safety in construction.
96
Module 4
Materials Management: Functions of materials management – inventory control techniques.
Construction contracts: Item rate contract – Lump-sum contract –Labour contract – Negotiated
contract – Global contract – Percentage contract – Cost plus percentage contract- Cost plus fixed fee
contract- Cost plus fluctuating fee contract – Target contract – All in contract.
Module 5
Claims manual for a construction organization: Law of contract - Extra work and deviation order
– claims – owner’s claim – sub contractor’s claim – disputes and arbitration – consequences of
mistake in contracts – terms and conditions of contract – contract documents – earnest money –
security deposit – warranty period – contract signed under coercion – contract signed by minors,
insane or drunken persons – authority to agree and find, validity of an oral agreement – conditions
and warranties – express terms and implied terms – voidable contracts and their performance –
illegal and voidable contracts – liability for tort in contract- litigation – breach of contract and
remedies – discharge of contract – equity, privity of contract – transfer of contractual rights and
obligations.
References
1. M .S Shetty, concrete technology, S. Chand & Co.

2. S. P Arora, Building constructions, Dhanpat Rai & sons, New Delhi.
3. B. L Gupta, Amit Gupta, Construction Management and accounts, standard publishers and
Distributions.
4. Construction Management and accounts – V .N Vazirani.
5. National Building code of India – Indian standards.
6. Construction Engineering & Management, S. Seetharaman, Umesh
7. Publications, Delhi.
97
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING - II
C804 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Storage of water - effect of storage on quality of water, general layout of treatment
plant - surface water and ground water. Aeration, purpose of aeration. Sedimentation - plain
sedimentation, theory of sedimentation, continuous flow sedimentation tanks. Chemically aided
sedimentation - necessity, theory of coagulation and flocculation - generally used coagulants, dosage,
feeding, mixing devices, clariflocculators, design of flash mixers clarifiers and clarifloculators.
Module 2
Filtration - Theory of filtration, filter media - sand for filtration. Classification of filters - design,
construction, control, operation and maintenance of rapid sand filters and slow sand filters. pressure
filters, dual media & multimedia filters.Disinfection: requirements of a good disinfectant,
chlorination - action, application, and dosage chlorine demand, pre chlorination, post chlorination,
double chlorination, super chlorination, breakpoint chlorination, chloramination. Other disinfectants.
Miscellaneous treatment methods: color, odour and taste removal, iron and manganese removal,
deflouridation, removal of hardness, desalination.
Module 3
Introduction: Objectives of waste water treatment - Effluent standards, KSPCB Standards, BIS
Standards. Layout of conventional treatment plant - preliminary, primary, secondary and tertiary
treatments in general. Preliminary process: screens - types of screens, design, disposal of' screenings;
comminutors, grit chamber - function, design, construction and operation, disposal of grit , detritus
tank, skimming tank -function, design and operation, disposal of skimmings Sedimentation: Theory
of sewage sedimentation - design, construction and operation, rectangular and circular tanks,
disposal of sludge.
Module 4
Biological process: principle and theory of biological treatment. Sewage filtration: Trickling filters -
design, construction and operation. Activated sludge process: Design, construction and operation of
conventional and extended aeration, aeration methods. Miscellaneous methods- Stabilization ponds,
Oxidation ditch, Aerated lagoons, rotating biological contactors; disinfection of sewage effluents.
Module 5
Sludge treatment and disposal: quantity of sludge, characteristics of sludge, sludge thickening,
digestion, conditioning and disposal, design of sludge digesters only. Septic Tanks: Design (as per
Ministry of urban development) construction, disposal of effluents, cleaning of tanks, Imhoff tanks.
Sewage treatment by high rate anaerobic methods: Anaerobic digestion, suspended growth, contact
process, UASB, attached growth, filters, expanded bed - only basics (Ref. Wastewater Engineering
by Metcalf and Eddy - 3rd Edn.)
References
1. Peavy, Rowe, Tchobanoglous, Environmental Engineering, Mc Graw Hill International Editions.

2. S. K. Garg, Environmental Engineering Vol. l & ll, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
3. B.C. Punmia, Water supply Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur.
4. B.C. Punmia, Waste water Engineering, Arihant Publications, Jodpur.
98
5. Metcalf & Eddy, Waste water Engg. 3rd Edn., Mc Graw Hill International Editions.
6. Mark J Hammer, Water and waste water technology, John Wiley and sons, Inc.
ADVANCED MATHEMATICS (ELECTIVE - II)

CMELRT 805-1 3+1+0
Module 1 Green’s Function

Heavisides, unit step function – Derivative of unit step function – Dirac delta function – properties of
delta function – Derivatives of delta function – testing functions – symbolic function – symbolic
derivatives – inverse of differential operator – Green’s function – initial value problems – boundary
value problems – simple cases only
Module 2 Integral Equations

Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations – conversion of a linear differential equation
into an integral equation – conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using
Green’s function – solution of Fredhlom integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral
equations of convolution type – Neumann series solution.
Module 3 Gamma, Beta functions

Gamma function, Beta function – Relation between them – their transformations – use of them in the
evaluation certain integrals – Dirichlet’s integral – Liouville’s extension of Dirichlet’s theorem –
Elliptic integral – Error function.
Module 4 Power Series solution of differential equation

The power series method – Legendre’s Equation – Legendre’s polynomial – Rodrigues formula –
generating function – Bessel’s equation – Bessel’s function of the first kind – Orthogonality of
Legendre’s Polynomials and Bessel’s functions.
Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations.

Classification of second order equations- Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives –
solution of Laplace and Poisson’s equations by finite difference method – solution of one
dimensional heat equation by Crank – Nicolson method – solution one dimensional wave equation.
References
1. Ram P.Kanwal, Linear Integral Equation, Academic Press, New York.

2. Allen C.Pipkin, Springer, A Course on Integral Equations, Verlag.
3. H.K.Dass, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, S.Chand.
4. Michael D.Greenberge, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Pearson Edn. Asia.
5. B.S.Grewal, Numrical methods in Engg.&science, Khanna Publishers.
6. R.F. Hoskins, Generalized functions, John Wiley and Sons.
7. Bernard Friedman, Principles and Techniques of Applied Mathematics, John Wiley and sons
8. James P.Keener, Principles of Applied Mathematics, Addison Wesley.
9. P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy Numerical methods, S.Chand & co.
THEORY OF SHELLS (ELECTIVE - II)

C805-2 3+1+0
99
Module 1
Structural behaviour of shells-classification of shells-translational and rotational shells-ruled
surfaces-methods of generating the surface of different shells-hyperbolic paraboloid-elliptic
paraboloid-conoid-Gaussian curvature-synclastic and anticlastic surfaces.
Module 2
Classical theories of shells-thin shell-thick shell-small deflection theory-stress resultants and
deformations of shells without bending.
Module 3
Cylindrical shells-membrane theory of cylindrical shells-free body diagram of a cylindrical shell
element-formulation of equilibrium equation.
Module 4
Bending theory of cylindrical shells-stresses and deformation of circular cylindrical shells-pressure
vessels-cylindrical shells with uniform internal pressure-free body diagram of a differential
cylindrical shell element- formulation of equilibrium equation.
Module 5
Finite element application on cylindrical shells-introduction to shell elements-flat elements-
axisymmetric elements- degenerated elements-general shell element.
References
1. Timoshenko, W Krieger, Theory of plates and shells, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Gol’oenveizen, Theory of elastic thin shells, Pergaman Press, 1961.
3. J Ramachandran, Thin shells theory and problems, Universities press.
4. Novoshilov V V,Theory of thin elastic shells, P Noordoff, Groningen,1959.
5. Baker E H, Kovalesky and Flrish, Structural analysis of shells, Mc Graw Hill, New York.
6. Kraus H, Thin elastic shells, Wiley, New York, 1967.
7. Ramaswamy G S, Design and construction of concrete shell roofs, Mc Graw Hill, New York.
8. Wilhelm Flugge, Stresses in shells, Springs, Verlog, Berlin.
100
ADVANCED STEEL STRUCTURES (ELECTIVE - II)
C805-3 3+1+0
Module 1
Microwave and Transmission Towers: Introduction - Loads - Analysis of Microwave &
Transmission towers - Design of members - Design of foundation - Design of Connections -
Application using STAAD, SAP.
Module 2
Pre-Engineered Metal Buildings: Introduction - Loads - Metal cladding - Design of cold formed
secondary framing - Optimization design of main frames - Wind bracing - Frame connections
(haunch, ridge) - Column base connections (fixed, pinned) - Application using STAAD, STRAP.
Module 3
Multi-storey Buildings: Introduction - Anatomy of structure - Loads - Design of columns - Design
of composite beams - Design of composite floor - Bracings – Connections - Application using
STAAD, STRAP.
Module 4
Space Frames: Introduction - Structural types - Loads - Design of single layer barrel vault - Design
of single layer dome - Design of double layer flat - Design of node connectors - Application using
STAAD, SAP.
Module 5
Construction: Tolerances: Fabrication tolerances - Erection tolerances, Fabrication: Economy -
Shop activities - Quality management, Erection: Method statement - programme – Machineries, Fire
Protection: Regulations - Structural performance - Methods of protection, Corrosion Resistance:
Corrosion process - Effect of environment - Protection methods.
References
1. Ram Chandra, Design of Steel Structures, Vol. II, Standard Book House, New Delhi.
2. Alexander Newman, Metal Building Systems: Design and Specifications,
3. Graham W. Owens, Peter R. Knowles, Steel Designers Manual, Blackwell Scientific Publications,
Oxford, ISBN 0-632-03881-0.
4. Ramamrutham S., Design of Steel Structures, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Co., New Delhi, 2001,
ISBN 81-87433-36-1.
5. Ramaswamy G. S., Suresh G. R., Analysis, Design and Construction of Steel Space frames, Thomas
Telford Ltd., 2002, ISBN 0-7277-30142.
6. Edwin H. Gaylord, Jr., Charles N. Gaylord, Design of Steel Structures, McGraw- Hill, Inc.,
Singapore, ISBN 0-07-112623-6.
7. IS: 800 - 1984, Use of Structural Steel in General Building Construction, BIS, New Delhi.
8. IS: 802, Use of Structural Steel in Overhead Transmission Line Towers, BIS, New Delhi.
9. IS: 875 - 1987, Code of practice for Design Loads (Parts I, II & III), BIS, New Delhi.
10. IS: 806, Code of practice for use of Steel Tubes in General Building Construction, BIS, New Delhi.
11. IS: 1161, Specification for Steel Tubes for Structural Purposes, BIS, New Delhi.
HIGHWAY AND AIRFIELD PAVEMENTS (ELECTIVE - II)

C805-4 3+1+0
101
Module 1
Pavement types: stress distribution in pavements - theoretical subgrade conditions and traffic
loadings Basic difference between flexible and rigid pavements - design factors - wheel load -
equivalent single wheel load - repetition of loads - elastic modulii - climatic variations.
Module 2
Design of flexible pavements: group index method - CBR method - IRC recommendations - Me
Load method - Burmister's layer theory.
Module 3
Design of rigid pavements: radius of relative stiffness - critical load positions - Westergaard's stress
equation - Bradley's stress coefficients - design charts.
Module 4
Temperature stresses in concrete pavements: Westergaard's concept - wrapping stress - functional
stress - combination of stresses.
Design of joints in concrete pavements: expansion joints - construction joints - design of dowel bars -
tie bars - IRC recommendation.
Module 5
Evaluation of pavement condition: pavement instrumentation - types of pavement distress -
roughness and skid resistance. Environmental influence and effects- pavements maintenance and
overlays.
References
1. Bindra B.S, Highway Engineering, Danpat Rai and Sons.

2. H.J.Yoder, Principles of Pavement Design, John wiley and sons
3. Khanna O.P, Justo C.G., Highway Engineering, Nem Chand Publishers
4. IRC Standard specifications for Construction of Flexible and rigid pavements
ADVANCED FOUNDATION DESIGN (ELECTIVE - II)

C805-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Machine foundations: basic theory of vibrations-free and forced vibration of single degree of
freedom with and without damping-two degrees of freedom with and without damping-dynamic soil
properties-mass spring model and constants- elastic half space approach-determination of dynamic
soil constants in laboratory and field based on IS code provisions. Modes of vibration of block
foundation –natural frequency of foundation of soil system by Barkan’s approach-methods of
analysis-Barkan’s method. Vertical translations, sliding, rocking, yawing (IS code method)
Module 2
Design of machine foundations: Static and dynamic design criteria-permissible amplitude of
vibrations for different types of machines. Foundations for reciprocating machines- design criteria-
calculation of induced forces and moments- multi cylinder engines-Foundations subjected to impact
type of forces (hammer)-design data-design criteria-vibration isolation.
102
Module 3
Sheet Pile walls and Cofferdams: types and uses of sheet piles-design of cantilever sheet pile walls in
granular and cohesive soils-anchored bulkhead-free earth support and fixed earth support method-
coffer dams-uses- braced and cellular cofferdams.
Module 4
Special Foundations: Foundation for special structures such as water tanks, silos, cooling towers,
guyed structures, ground storage tanks, chimneys, telecommunication towers, transmission line
towers-foundation for under ground conduits- foundation for coastal and offshore structures-pre-
stressed foundations. Shell Foundations-structural form and efficiency-different types.
Module 5
Foundations in Special soils: Foundation in expansive soil, soft and compressible soils, problems
associated with foundation installation- ground water lowering and drainage- shoring and
underpinning-different methods-damage and vibrations due to constructional operations
References
1. Bowles.J.E, Foundation Analysis and DesignMc Graw Hill Publishing Company.

2. N.P.Kurian, Modern foundations Tata Mc Graw Hill Publishing company
3. Srinivasulu P, Vaidyanathan C.V Handbook of Machine foundations
4. IS 2974-part I toV.
5. IS 5249
INDUSTRIAL WASTE ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE - II)

C805-6 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Environmental pollution - Magnitude of the industrial waste problem in India - damage
caused by industrial waste pollution. Effect of industrial wastes on streams and sewerage systems:
Computation of organic waste loads on streams - Streeter phelps, Churchill and Thomas methods.
Module 2
Stream sampling: stream protection measures - effluent and stream standards.
Characteristics of industrial wastes: physical, chemical and biological. retreatment of industrial
wastes: waste volume reduction, waste strength reduction - neutralization, equalization and
proportioning.
Module 3
Theories of treatments processes: removal of suspended solids by sedimentation and flotation,
removal of colloidal solids by coagulation - removal of inorganic solids by evaporation & ion
exchange. Removal of organic solids: lagooning, activated sludge treatment - extended aeration, step
aeration, trickling filters. High rate anaerobic treatment - up flow and down flow filters; up flow
anaerobic sludge blanket reactor - Disposal of sludge solids. Joint treatment of treated and untreated
wastes with domestic sewage - discharge of raw and treated wastes to streams.
103
Module 4
Major industrial Wastes and their treatment: pulp and paper industry - oil refinery - textile industry -
tannery.
Module 5
Treatment of industrial waste: canning - dairy - sugar - distillery.
References
1. M Narayana Rao, Waste water treatment, Rational methods of design and Industrial practice, Oxford
& IBH Publishing Co. Pvt. Ltd, Bombay.
2. Nelson Leonard Nemerow, Theories and practices of industrial waste treatment, Addison-Wesley
Publishing Co., Inc.
3. C Fred Gurnham, Principles of industrial waste treatment, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York.
4. W Wesley Eckenfelder Jr., Industrial water pollution control, International Edition, Mc Graw Hill
Inc, New Delhi.
5. Hardam Singh, Industrial Waste water management Hand Book, Mc Graw Hill, NewDelhi.
ADVANCED HYDROLOGY (ELECTIVE - II)

C805-7 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Hydrologic cycle-history of hydrology - application in engineering: water resources in
the world - water resources in India. Weather and hydrology: Thermal circulation - effects of earth's
rotation - effect of' land and water distribution - migratory systems - fronts - measurement of
temperatures - Lapse rate of temperatures - geographic distribution of temperatures - time variations
of temperatures - properties of water vapour- Measurement of humidity - geographic distributions of
humidity - time variations in humidity-geographic variations of wind - time variations of wind -
scanning and predicting weather.
Module 2
Precipitation: types of precipitation - measurement of precipitation recording gauges - automatic
gauges radars -estimation of missing data and adjustment of records - mean areal depth of
precipitation -rain gauge network- design principles-depth area duration curves - Hectograph and
mass curve of rainfall - analysis of rainfall data - moving average curves - design storms - probable
maximum precipitation curves snowfall and measurement. Determination of snowmelt. Water
Losses:.Evaporation-evaporation pans – evapometre, control of' reservoir evaporation - soil
evaporation - transpiration - estimation of evapo transpiration - infiltration - infiltration curves -
determination of infiltration- irifiltration indices - water shed leakage - water balance.
Module 3
Runoff: Catchment characteristics - classification of streams - factors affecting-run off, run off
estimation by empirical formulae, curves infiltration method, rational method, overland flow
hydrograph and unit hydrograph, method. Hydrographs: Separation of stream, flow components -
hydrograph separation - unit hydrograph - assumption - derivations of unit hydrograph - unit
hydrograph of complex storms - instantaneous unit hydrograph - synthetic unit hydrograph.
.
104
Module 4
Floods: Definition of standard project flood - maximum probable flood - probable maximum
precipitation and design flood - estimation of peak flood-flood control. Measures - flood forecasting
techniques- flood routing - analytical and graphical methods of flood routing. Sedimentation: The
erosion process - factors controlling erosion - suspended load, bed load - estimation of sediment load
(basic principles and statement of important.equations only) measurement of sediment load -
reservoir sedimentation - control of reservoir sedimentation.
Module 5
Probability analysis of hydrological data: mean, median, mode, mean-deviation, standard deviation,
variances and skewness of data normal, gamma, poisons, log normal and pears and type III
distributions - flood, frequency by fuller's, Gumbel's, Powel and Ven Te chow methods.
Mathematical models in hydrology: definition of stochastic models, deterministic models-conceptual
models and empirical models- optimisation of models and efficiency of models - method of
determining 1UH by the s-curve hydrograph, convolution integral and conceptual models - synthetic
stream flow - flow at ungauged sites - by multiple regression - reservoir mass curve - flood
forecasting.
References
1. H. M.Reghunath, Hydrology, Wiley Easten Ltd., New Delhi.

2. Santhosh Kumar Garg, Hydrology and flood control engineering, Khanna Publishers
3. R.K. Linsley, M. A. Kholar, Hydrology for engineers, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
APPLIED GEOLOGY (ELECTIVE - II)

C805-8 3+1+0
Module 1
Plate tectonics: Plate tectonics and drift of continents-Pangaea and drift of Indian plate-formation
of Himalayas-Tectonic frame work of South India -Tectonic movements-their significance-methods
of detecting tectonic movements - radar interferometry & global positioning system.
Earthquake: Earthquakes in relation to plate tectonics-global seismic belts -seismic zones of Inida-
seismicity of South India-earthquakes in Kerala -earthquake resistant structures-prediction of
earthquake-defusing earthquake-Reservoir induced seismicity.
Module 2
Structural geology: Clinometer & Brunton compass-Measuring of strike and dip using
clinometer/Brunton compass-Basic idea of toposheets-Lineaments-definition-singificance-techniques
of identifying lineaments-major lineaments in South India and Kerala.
Remote sensing: Basic concepts-electromagnetic radiation, spectral windows, spectral signatures,
sensors, false colour images, geocoded images. Remotesensing satellites-Landsat.
Aerial photography: Basic concepts-stereopairs, stereoscopic vision, stereoscope-Limitations of
aerial photography.
Applications: Interpretation of imageries (brief description only). Application of satellite imageries
and aerial photographs in geological and hydrogeological studies.
Module 3
105
Hydrogeology - General: Groundwater-importance and availability-Aquifers-confined and
unconfined-Artesian wells-Geologic formations as aquifer-laterite-sandy layers-weathered rock-
fractured crystalline rock- their distribution in Kerala-Structures used for tapping groundwater-Open
well, Bore well, Tube well & Filterpoint well (construction techniques not expected). Saline water
intrusion.
Module 4
Hydrolgeology - Groundwater exploration techniques: Hydrogeological, geophysical &
geobotanical methods-Geophysical method-resistivity survey-Wenner and Schlumberger
configurations-interpretation of resistivity curve-curve matching technique.
Groundwater recharge: Natural & artificial. Structures used for artificial recharge-checkdams,
subsurface dams, open well & bore well. Selection of site for subsurface dams-salient features.
Module 5
Practical Work: Identification of important rock forming minerals: 1.Quartz, 2.Feldspar,
3.Hypersthene, 4.Auguite, 5. Hornblende, 6. Biotite, 7.Muscovite, 8.Olivine, 9.Garnet, 10.Fluorite,
11.Tourmaline, 12.Calcite, 13.Kyanite, 14. Kaolin, 15. Serpentine. Identification of common
rock types: Igneous rocks: 1. Granite, 2. Syenite, 3. Diorite, 4. Gabbro, 5. Peridotite,
6.Dolerite, 7.Basalt, 8.Pegmatite.Sedimentary rocks: 1.Conglomerate, 2.Breccia, 3.Sandstone,
4.Limestone, 5.shale.Metamorphic rocks: 1. Gneiss, 2. Schist, 3. Slate, 4. Marble, 5. Quartzite, 6.
Augen gneiss, 8. Mylonite, 9. Pseudotachyllite.
Special Indian rock types: 1. Charnockite, 2. Khondalite, 3. Laterite.
Recommended Field work: Field trips to learn identification of faults/lineaments in the field and
groundwater exploration techniques.
References
1. Arthur Holmes, Physical geology, Thomas Nelson.

2. Arthur D. Howard, Geology in environmental planning, McGraw Hills, New Delhi.
3. M.P.Billings, Strucutural geology, Asia Publishing house, New Delhi.
4. N.W. Gokhale, A manual of problems in structural geology, CBS Publishers & distributors, New
Delhi.
5. Thomas M. Lillesand & Raiph W. Kiefer, Remotesensing and image interpretation, John Wiley
Sons, New York.
6. K.K.Rampal, Text book of photogrametry, Oxford & IBH Publishing company, New Delhi.
7. David Keith Todd, Groundwater hydrology, John Wiley & sons, New York.
8. H.M. Regunath, Groundwater, Willey Eeastern Ltd.
9. HH.Read, Rutleys elements of mineralogy, George Allen & Unwin Ltd, London.
10. G.W.Tyrell, Principles of petrology, B.I. Publications, Bombay.
11. E.G. Ehler & H. Blatt, Petrology-igneous, sedimentary & metamorphic, CBS Publishers &
distributors, Delhi.
STRUCTURAL DYNAMICS AND STABILITY ANALYSIS (ELECTIVE - III)
C806-1 2+1+0
106
Module 1
Introduction-problems in nature-steady state problem-dynamic problem-stability problem (Eigen
value problem)-introduction to dynamic loading-D’Alembert’s equation of equilibrium-inertia force-
effect of damping-Hamilton’s principle.
Module 2
Single degree of freedom system-idealisation-free vibration-natural frequency-resonance-forced
vibration-lumped mass-consistent mass.
solution techniques-determinant search procedure-Householders method
Module 3
Introduction to stability analysis-energy principles-stable, unstable and neutral equilibrium-fourth
order differential equation for generalized bending problems-elastic instability of columns-Euler’s
theory-assumptions-limitations. General treatment of column stability problem as an Eigen value
problem-various modes of failure for various end conditions- both ends hinged-both ends fixed-one
end fixed other end free- one end fixed other end hinged
Module 4
Beam column-beam column equation-solution of differential equation for various lateral loads-udl
and concentrated loads-solutions for various end conditions-both ends hinged-both ends fixed-one
end fixed other end free- one end fixed other end hinged.
Module 5
Finite element application to dynamics-element stiffness matrix and mass matrix of a beam element.
Finite element application to stability analysis- finite element stability analysis-element stiffness
matrix –geometric stiffness matrix-derivation of element stiffness matrix and geometric stiffness
matrix for a beam element.
References
1. Ray W Clough, Joseph Penzien, Dynamics of structures, Mc Graw Hill, Kogabusha Ltd.
2. Ziegler H, Principles of structural stability, Blarsdell, Wallham, Mass, 1963.
3. Thompson J M, G W Hunt, General stability of elastic stability, Wiley, New York.
4. Timoshenko, Gere, Theory of elastic stability, Mc Graw Hill, New York.
5. Don O Brush, B O O Almorth, Buckling of Bars, plates and shells,
6. Cox H L, The buckling of plates and shells, Macmillam, New York, 1963.
7. O C Zienkiewicz ,.Finite Element Method ,fourth Edition,McGraw Hill,
8. R.D.Cook, Concepts and Applications of Finite Element Analysis, John Wiley &Sons.
INTERNET PROGRAMMING AND JAVA (ELECTIVE - III)

C806-2 2+1+0
Module 1
Internet: Definition-principles of internet working-protocols TCP/IP.
E-mail- architecture and services. World wide web- definition- linking of documents in www-URL-
DNS. Major categories of websites over Internet. HTML-Tags and writing pages.
107
Module 2
Importance of Java – advantages - method of byte codes - object oriented programming concepts in
Java-data types – variables – arrays – operators - control statements.
Classes: Overloading – inheritance - packages and interfaces - exception handling-built in
exceptions.
Module 3
Threads: Multi threading-string handling-an overview of important packages and interfaces used in
Java-Java.util, Java.io.
Module 4
Applet: applet class-event handling-overview of event classes.
AWT: working with windows-graphics-text-AWT controls-layout managers-menu-images.
Module 5
Databases-JDBC connectivity- introduction to swing, RMI, servlets, COM, CORBA, Java Beams.
References
1. MK Goel, Internet,
2. Herbert Schildt, Java the complete reference, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
3. Steven Holzner, Java 2 Black book, Wiley Dreamtech
4. Joseph L Weber, Using Java, Prentice Hall India New Delhi.
5. James Gosling, Java Programming.
TRAFFIC AND TRANSPORTATION PLANNING (ELECTIVE - III)

C806-3 2+1+0
Module 1
Statistical methods for Traffic Engineering: definition and probability - probability distribution –
Poisson, Binomial and normal distribution. Applications in traffic engineering: sampling theory and
significance testing - linear regression and correlation - simple problems.
Module 2
Systems approach to transport planning: stages in transport planning - trip generation - introduction
and definitions – factors affecting trip generations and attraction - Multiple linear regression analysis
- category analysis - Modal split analysis.
Module 3
Trip Distribution: growth factor methods - synthetic methods. Trip Assignment: purpose, general
principle - assignment techniques.
Module 4
Parking: Parking problems - desirable parking space standards for different land use -common
methods of on- street parking, off-street parking facilities, parking surveys.
Street illumination: Definition of common terms - types and location of lanterns on straight roads
and junctions avoiding glare.
Module 5
108
Transportation Economics: Road user cost-Motor Vehicle operation cost - fixed and variable costs -
road user benefits - principles of economics - analysis through annual cost - rate of return and benefit
cost ratio methods - worked out problems.
References
1. Khadiyali L.R. Traffic Engineering and Transport planning, Khanna Tech Publishers
2. Hutchinson “Principles of Urban transport systems Planning
3. Martin & Whol Traffic system Analysis for Engineers
4. Donald Drew Traffic Flow Theory
ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTECHNICS (ELECTIVE - III)
C806-4 2+1+0
Module 1
Clay mineralogy and soil structure: Gravitational and surface forces-inter sheet and inter layer
bonding in the clay minerals- Basic structural units of clay minerals- isomorphous substitution –
kaolinite mineral- montmorillonite mineral- illite mineral- electric charges on clay minerals – base
exchange capacity- diffused double layer- adsorbed water- soil structure- methods for the
identification of minerals (introduction only).
Module 2
Effect of environment on Geotechnical properties of soils: Effect of drying on Atterberg limits.-
Volume change behaviour- factors controlling resistance to volume change- general relationship
between soil type, pressure and void ratio.- importance of mineralogical composition in soil
expansion. Activity- sensitivity-causes of sensitivity-influence of exchangeable cations, pH and
organic matter on properties of soils. Permeability of soils- hydraulic conductivity of different types
of soils – Darcy’s law and its validity- factors affecting permeability
Module 3
Wastes and Contaminants (introduction only): sources of wastes-types of wastes- composition of
different wastes- characteristics and classification of hazardous wastes- generation rates- ground
water contamination- sources of ground water contamination- transport mechanisms-potential
problems in soils due to contaminants.
Module 4
Disposal and containment technics: Criteria for selection of sites for waste disposal- hydrological
aspects of selection of waste disposal sites- disposal facilities- subsurface disposal technics-disposal
systems for typical wastes (sketches only)
Module 5
Containment control systems- liners and covers for waste disposal- rigid liners- flexible liners.
Ground modification technics in waste management – waste modification- ground modification-
mechanical modification-hydraulic modification- chemical modification.
References
1. Mitchell, J (1976), “ Fundamentals of soil behaviour”, John Wiley and sons, New York
2. Lambe, T. W & Whitman, R. V (1979), “ Soil Mechanics “, John Wiley and Sons, New York.
3. Gopal Ranjan & A.S.R Rao (1991), “ Basic and Applied Soil Mechanics, Wiley Eastern Ltd., New
Delhi.
109
4. Wilson, M. J (1987), “ A Hand book of Determinative methods in Clay Mineralogy”, Chapman and
Hall, New York.
5. Robert M. Koerner (1984), “Construction and Geotechnical methods in Foundation Engineering”,
McGraw Hill Book Co., New York.
6. Yong R. N. (1992), “ Principles of contaminant Transport in Soils, “Elsevier, New York.
7. Ramanatha Iyer T. S (2000), “Soil Engineering Related to Environment”, LBS centre.
SOIL STABILITY ANALYSIS (ELECTIVE - III)

C806-5 2+1+0
Module 1
Ground water seepage- Laplace’s equations for two dimensional flow- quick sand condition-
construction of flownets- confined and unconfined flow-seepage in anisotropic soil conditions-
piping-design of filters.
Module 2
Stability of earth slopes-modes of slope stability- analysis of slope stability problems- Swedish circle
method- Friction circle method- Taylor’s stability chart-Bishop’s method- stabilization measures-
instrumentation.
Module 3
Landslides: Introduction- movements associated with landslides-causes of landslides-consequences,
classification and analysis of landslides-investigation of landslides-instrumentation-methods of
preventing landslides.
Module 4
Earthquake effects on soil foundation system: earth quakes- ground shaking-liquefaction- ground
deformations-seismic provisions in building codes
Module 5
Underpinning: Introduction-reasons-pit underpinning-pile underpinning-driven underpinning piles-
shoring-special underpinning methods-moving structures
References
1. Hans.F.Winterkorn and Hsai Yang Fang Foundation Engineering handbook - Van Nostrand
Reinhold Company
2. Bowles E.J. Foundation analysis and Design. Mc Graw Hill Publishing Co.
3. Gopal Ranjan and A.S.R.Rao Basic and applied Soil mechanics New Age International Publishing
Company
4. Donald.P.Coduto Geotechnical Engineering –Principlesand practices, Prentice Hall India
ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ANALYSIS

C806-6 2+1+0
Module 1
Concepts of environmental impact analysis-Environmental protections, legislations, laws and Acts-
air quality legislation-energy legislation-fish and wild life resources legislation-historical
preservation legislation-factors for consideration in assessing environmental impact concept-short
term vs. long term effects.
110
Module 2
Socio impact analysis-physical, social, aesthetic and economic environment-examples of types of
socio impact analysis.
Module 3
Air quality impact analysis-air pollutants-sources-atmospheric interactions-environmental impact-
assessment methodology, case studies. Noise impact analysis-effects of noise on people-estimating
transportation noise impact-examples
Module 4
Water quality impact analysis-water quality criteria and standards-modelling-water quality impact by
projects like High ways, power plants, agriculture and irrigation, forest management, vegetation and
wild life impact analysis.
Module 5
Assessment methodologies-impact on biota-summerisation of environmental impact-checklist
method.
References
1. John G Rau, David C Wooten, Environmental impact Analysis Handbook, Mc Graw Hill Book
Company, New Delhi, 1980.
ENVIRONMENTAL ENGINEERING LAB

C807 0+0+3
1. Determination of (a) solids - total, suspended, dissolved, fixed, volatile, settleable SVI.
2. pH Value.
3. Conductivity.
4. Chemical oxygen demand.
5. D. 0. and Biochemical Oxygen Demand.
6. Jar test and Turbidity.
7. Chlorine demand and residual chlorine.
8. Determination of iron.
9. Determination of sulphates.
10. Acidity and Alkalinity.
11. Hardness.
12. Nitrogen - various forms.
13. M. P. N. Fecal coliforms using A-l medium.
14. Measurment of smoke density for diesel vehicles.
15. Measurment of H C and CO of exhaust from petrol driven vehicles.
16. Measurment of suspended particulate matter in ambient air.
PROJECT / SEMINAR
C 808 0+0+4
111
Each student is required to present a technical paper on a subject approved by the department. The
paper should in general reflect the state of the art. He/she shall submit a report of the paper presented
to the department. In addition to the seminar he/she shall undertake a project work (as a team or
individually) in the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide(s). On completion of the project
work, he/she shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the
project work done to the department.
VIVA -VOCE
C809
A comprehensive Viva-voce examination will be conducted to assess the student's overall knowledge
in the specified field of engineering. At the time of viva-voce, certified reports of seminar and project
work are to be presented for evaluation.
112
SYLLABUS
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
BRANCH
113
THIRD SEMESTER
114
CMELPA 301 3+1+0




differences – problems using stirlings formula – Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided
difference formula for unequal intervals.

References
1. Advanced Engg. Mathematics - Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd.

2. Higher Engg. Mathematics - Grawal B.S., Khanna Publishers
3. Numerical Methods in science & Engg. -M.K.Venkataraman, National Publishing Co
4. Numerical Methods - S.Balachandra Rao and G.K.Shantha, Uty. press
5. Advanced Engg. Mathematics - Michael D.Greenberg, Prentice-Hall
6. Theory and Problems of Vector analysis - M.R.Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series, McGraw – Hill
MACHINE DRAWING - I
M 302 0+0+4
115
Conversion of pictorial views into orthographic views-dimensioning techniques- preparation of
drawing- screw threads-different forms-conventional representation-sketching-orthographic views of
hexagonal bolts and nuts-dimensional drawing-squareheaded bolts and nuts-sketching of different
types of lock nuts and locking devices and foundation bolts.
Forms of rivet heads-rivetted joints-lap and butt joints with single and multiple riveting in chain and
zig-zag arrangements-dimensional drawing. Sketching of conventional representation of welded
joints.
Fully dimensioned and sectional drawings of the following: -

Joints-cottered joints (spigot and socket, sleeve and cotter, gib and cotter) - knuckle joint. Shaft
couplings - types of keys - plain and protected types of flanged couplings - bushed pin type flexible
coupling - Oldhams coupling.
Pipe joints-spigot &socket joint - flanged joint - union joint –Amstrong (hydraulic) joint.
Shaft bearings and supports - journal bearing, plummer block - footstep bearing-wall bracket - ball
bearings.
Steam engine parts - stuffing box - cross head - connecting rod - eccentric.
I.C.Engine parts-piston, connecting rod.
ferences
1. Machine Drawing - N.D.Bhatt

2. Machine Drawing - P.I.Varghese
3. Machine Drawing - P.S.Gill
FLUID MECHANICS
M 303 2+2+0
Module 1
Introduction-Proprties of fluids- pressure, force, density, specific weight, compressibility, capillarity,
surface tension, dynamic and kinematic viscosity-Pascal’s law-Newtonian and non-Newtonian
fluids-fluid statics-measurement of pressure-variation of pressure-manometry-hydrostatic pressure
on plane and curved surfaces-centre of pressure-buoyancy-floation-stability of submerged and
floating bodies-metacentric height-period of oscillation.
Module 2
Kinematics of fluid motion-Eulerian and Lagrangian approach-classification and representation of
fluid flow- path line, stream line and streak line. Basic hydrodynamics-equation for acceleration-
continuity equation-rotational and irrotational flow-velocity potential and stream function-circulation
and vorticity-vortex flow-energy variation across stream lines-basic field flow such as uniform flow,
spiral flow, source, sink, doublet, vortex pair, flow past a cylinder with a circulation, Magnus effect-
Joukowski theorem-coefficient of lift.
Module 3
Euler’s momentum equation-Bernoulli’s equation and its limitations-momentum and energy
correction factors-pressure variation across uniform conduit and uniform bend-pressure distribution
in irrotational flow and in curved boundaries-flow through orifices and mouthpieces, notches and
116
weirs-time of emptying a tank-application of Bernoulli’s theorem-orifice meter, ventury meter, pitot
tube, rotameter.
Module 4
Navier-Stoke’s equation-body force-Hagen-Poiseullie equation-boundary layer flow theory-velocity
variation- methods of controlling-applications-diffuser-boundary layer separation –wakes, drag
force, coefficient of drag, skin friction, pressure, profile and total drag-stream lined body, bluff body-
drag force on a rectangular plate-drag coefficient for flow around a cylinder-lift and drag force on an
aerofoil-applications of aerofoil- characteristics-work done-aerofoil flow recorder-polar diagram-
simple problems.
Module 5
Flow of a real fluid-effect of viscosity on fluid flow-laminar and turbulent flow-boundary layer
thickness-displacement, momentum and energy thickness-flow through pipes-laminar and turbulent
flow in pipes-critical Reynolds number-Darcy-Weisback equation-hydraulic radius-Moody;s chart-
pipes in series and parallel-siphon losses in pipes-power transmission through pipes-water hammer-
equivalent pipe-open channel flow-Chezy’s equation-most economical cross section-hydraulic jump.
References
Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics - Lewitt

1. Fluid Mechanics - I.H.Shames
2. Fluid Mechanics - B.S.Massey
3. Fluid Mechanics - K.L.Kumar
4. Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics - R.K.Bhansal
5. Hydraulics and Fluid Mechanics - Mody and Seth
METALLURGY AND MATERIAL SCIENCE

M 304 3+1+0
Module 1
Crystallography: Crystal structural determination, crystallographic directions and planes, miller
indices, packing of atoms in solids, atomic packing factor, coordination number- Amorphous
structure, glass transition temperature -- Effects of crystalline and amorphous structure on
mechanical and optical properties -- Mechanism of crystallization: Homogeneous and heterogeneous
nuclei formation, dendritic growth and grain boundary irregularity, grain size effects on mechanical
& optical properties - Changes within solid materials: Structural imperfections: Point defects - line
defect: edge, screw dislocation, burgers vector, forest of dislocations, role of dislocation in the
deformation of metals - Surface imperfections: role of surface defect on crack propagation etc –
Mode of plastic deformation: mechanism of slip & twinning, dislocation climb & cross slip,
dislocation sources, frank-read source – Diffusion in solids, fick’s laws, applications.
Module 2
Cold working, strain hardening, recovery, re-crystallization, grain growth, grain size and its effects
on mechanical properties-- Hot working, super plasticity – Reasons for alloying, phase
transformation phase rules, single phase, multi phase equilibrium diagrams, solid solutions, inter
metallic compounds – Equilibrium diagram reactions: monotectic, eutectic, eutectoid, peritectic,
peritectoid -- Polymorphism – Detailed discussion of Iron-Carbon diagram with microstructure
changes in ferrite, austenite, cementite, graphite, pearlite, martensite, bainite.
117
Module 3
Definition and aims of heat treatment- Annealing, spheroidizing, normalizing, hardening, tempering,
austermpering, martempering with microstructure changes -- Surface treatment: Diffusion methods:
carburizing, nitriding, cyaniding -- Thermal methods: flame hardening, induction hardening –
Deposition methods: hot dipping and coating, impregnation, metal spraying, metal cladding –
Various strengthen mechanisms in metals: work hardening, grain boundary hardening, grain size
reduction, solid solution hardening, dispersion hardening.
Module 4
Alloy steels: Effects of alloying elements on: dislocation movement, polymorphic transformation
temperature, formation and stability of carbides, grain growth, displacement of the eutectoid point,
retardation of the transformation rates, improvement in corrosion resistance, mechanical properties --
Nickel steels, chromium steels, etc – Effects on steels, containing molybdenum, vanadium, tungsten,
cobalt, silicon, copper and lead – high speed steels - - Cast irons: classifications, gray, white,
malleable and spheroidal graphite cast iron, composition, microstructure, properties and applications
- Principal non ferrous alloys like aluminum, beryllium, copper, magnesium, nickel, study of
composition, microstructure, properties and applications- Reference shall be made to the phase
diagrams whenever necessary.
Module 5
Fracture: Bonding forces and energies, cohesive strength of metals - Griffith theory –- Crack
initiation, growth and crack arrest – Effect of plastic deformation on crack propagation – Factors
leading to crack propagation - Cleavage, intercrystalline, brittle, ductile fracture -- Influence of slip
on fracture – Effect of impact loading on ductile material and its application in forging etc.--
Fatigue: stress cycles – Effects of stress concentration, size effect, surface texture on fatigue –
Corrosion and thermal fatigue – Mechanism of fatigue failure -- Creep: Creep curves – Structural
change – Mechanism of creep deformation.
References
1. Avner S.H. – Introduction to Physical Metallurgy – McGraw Hill.

2. Callister William. D. – Material Science and Engineering. – John Wiley.
3. Guy A.G. – Essentials of material science. – McGraw Hill.
4. Dieter George E. – Mechanical Metallurgy. – McGraw Hill.
5. Higgins R.A. – Engineering Metallurgy part-I. – ELBS.
6. Mans Chandra – Science of Engineering Materials Vol. 1, 2, 3. – Macmillan.
7. Reed Hill E. Robert – Physical Metallurgy Principles. – East West Press.
8. Richards C.W. – Engineering Material Science.
9. Van Vlack – Elements of material Science. Addison – Wesley.
10. www. msm. com. ac. uk / online teaching.
THERMO DYNAMICS
M 305 2+2+0
118
Module 1
Fundamental concepts-Scope and limitations of thermo dynamics- Thermo dynamic systems –
different types of systems-macroscopic and microscopic analysis-continuum-Properties-State-
Processes- -Thermo dynamic equilibrium-Equation of state of an ideal gas-PVT system-Real gas-
Real gas relations-Compressibility factor-Law of corresponding states.
Module 2
Laws of thermo dynamics-Zeroth law of thermo dynamics-Thermal equilibrium-Concept of
temperature –Temperature scales-Thermometry-Perfect gas temperature scales. Work and Heat-First
law of thermo dynamics-concept of energy-first law for closed and open systems-specific heats-
internal energy and enthalpy- Steady flow energy equation- Joule Thompson effect.
Module 3
Second law of thermo dynamics-Various statements and their equivalence-Reversible process and
reversible cycles – Carnot cycle-Corollaries of the second law-Thermo dynamic temperature scale-
Clausius inequality-Concept of entropy-Calculation of change in entropy in various thermo dynamic
processes-Reversibility and irreversibility-Available and unavailable energy – Third law of thermo
dynamics.
Module 4
Thermo dynamics relations-Combind first and second law equations-Helmholtz and Gibbs functions
– Maxwell relations- equations for specific heats, internal energy, enthalpy and entropy – Clausius-
Clapeyron equation – applications of thermo dynamic relations.
Module 5
Properties of pure substances – PVT, PT and TS diagrams,Mollier diagrams- Mixture of gases and
vapours-mixture of ideal gases-Dalton’s law-Gibbs law –Thermo dynamic properties of mixture-
mixtures of ideal gases and vapours-Psychrometic principles-Psychrometic chart-Applications.
References
1. Engineering Thermodynamics - P.K.Nag

2. Thermodynamics - J.F.Lee and F.W.Sears.
3. Engineering Thermodynamics - Spalding and Cole
4. Engineering Thermodynamics - M.Achuthan
5. Thermodynamics - Keenan
6. Thermodynamics - Obert
7. Thermodynamics - Holman
8. Heat and Thermodynamics - M.N.Zemansky
9. Thermodynamics - Rogers, Pearson
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

M306 3+1+0
Module 1
I Stress and strain - Bars of varying cross - sections – composite sections - temperature stresses.
Principal stresses and planes-Mohr's circle representation of plane stress.
Module 2
119
Shear force and bending moments -Cantilever-simply supported and overhanging beams-
concentrated and U. D. loadings analytical method. Relation between load. SF and BM. Theory of
simple bending- bending and shear stress distribution rectangular, circular and 1-sections.
Module 3
Slope and deflection of simply supported beams and cantilevers- Double integration- Macaulay's
Method-moment area method- conjugate beam method.
Module 4
Torsion of circular shafts-solid and hollow shafts- power transmitted by shafts. Close-coiled and
open coiled spring- leaf spring. Thin cyliders and jhick cylinders subjected to internal and external
pressures- compound pipes -wire wound pipes-strain energy-axial loads, gradually and suddenly
applied load-impact loads.
Module 5
Columns and sturts- short and long columns-Euler's theory-Ran kine's theory - Eccentrically Loaded
columns-column with initial curvature. General description only of simple and compound steel,
beams, columns and column foundation-principle of reinforced concrete. Reinforcements detailing
in R. C. Slabs, beams, columns & footings (No problem expected)
References
1. Timoshenko.S.P, Strength of Materials, Part 1,D.Van Nostrand company, Inc.Newyork.

2. Popov E.P., Engineering Mechanics of solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Delhi.
3. Punmia B.C, Strength of Materials and Mechanics of structures, Vol 1,Lakshmi Publications,
New Delhi.
4. Vazirani V.N., Ratwani N. M, Analysis of Structures, Vol 1, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
FLUID MECHANICS LABORATORY

M 307 0+0+3
1. Study of plumbing tools and pipe fittings

2. Study of taps, valves, gauges, pitot tubes, watermeters and current meters
3. Determination of metacentric height and radius of gyration of floating bodies.
4. Hydraulic coefficients of orifices and mouthpieces under constant head method and time of emptying
method.
5. Calibration of venturimeter, orifice meter and water meter
6. Calibration of rectangular and triangular notches
7. Determination of Darcy’s and Chezy’s constant for pipe flow
8. Determination of critical velocity in pipe flow.
9. Determination of minor losses in pipe flow
10. Experimental verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
11. Determination of Chezy’s constant and Mannings number for open channel flow.
12. Determination of discharge coefficient for Plug-Sluices
120
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS LABORTAORY
M308 0+0+3
1. Tests on springs (open and close coiled)

2. Bending Test on Wooden Beams using U. T. M. '
3. Verification of Clerk. Maxwell's Law of reciprocal deflection and determination of E for steel.
4. Torsion Pendulum (M.S. wires. Aluminum wires and brass wires)
5. Torsion test using U. T. M. on M. S. Rod, torsteel and High Tensile steel.
6. Torsion Test on M. S, Road
7. Shear Test on M.S. Rod.
8. Fatigue Test
9. Impact Test (Izod and Charpy)
10. Hardness Test (Brinell, Vicker's and Rebound)
11. Strut Test.
Note
All tests should be done as per relevant BIS
121
FOURTH SEMESTER
122
CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0
Module 1
P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations- Linear Simultaneous eqns-
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitary Functions -
solution of Lagrange Linear Equations –Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial
differential equation with constant coefficients – solution of one dimensional wave equation and heat
equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one dimensional wave
equation.
Module 3
Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine &
Cosine transforms - inverse transforms - transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no
Module 4
Probability and statistics: Fundamentals of probability, Bayes theorem - Binomial law of probability
- The binomial distribution, its mean and variance - poisson distribution as a limiting case of
binomial distribution - its mean and variance - fitting of binomial & poisson distributions - normal
distribution - properties of normal curve - standard normal curve - simple problems in binomial,
poisson and normal distributions.
Module 5
difference of proportions, single mean and difference of means (proof of theorems not expected)
References
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics - B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers
2. Engineering Mathematics Vol. II -3rd year Part A & B - M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing
Company
3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations - Ian N.Sneddon, McGrawhill International Edn.
4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson Education
Asia / PHI
5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications Ltd.
6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia
THEORY OF MACHINES - I
M 402 2+1+0
Module 1
Kinematics: Links, pairs, chain, mechanisms, machines, inversion of single and double slider crank,
quadric cycle chains-kinematic diagram-expression for degree of freedom- equivalent curves-
coupler curves-spatial mechanisms-manipulations- velocity analysis by instantaneous center method-
123
Kennedy’s theorem- velocity and acceleration of various mechanisms by analytical and graphical
method-Coriolis component of acceleration-analytical treatment of slider crank and four bar chain-
Klein’s construction-locating instantaneous center-velocity and acceleration image.
Module 2
Linkage Synthesis: Precision points-graphical synthesis of slider crank mechanisms, rocker
mechanisms, four bar linkage-overlay method-number synthesis-basic features of mechanical
synthesis-graphic and analytical methods of dimensional synthesis-kinematic synthesis-approximate
and exact synthesis.
Module 3
Mechanisms: Pantograph, approximate straight line, straightline mechanisms- engine indicator
mechanisms-steering gear-Davis and Ackerman type-quick return- Whitworth, slider crank
mechanism-Hooke’s joint, Scott-Russel, Watt and grasshopper mechanisms.
Module 4
Brakes and clutches: Shoe, double block, long shoe, internally expanding shoe, band, band &
block, hydraulic, mechanical, air and powerbrakes-braking of avehicle-cone, single plate, multiple,
centrifugal clutches.
Dynamometers: Pony brake. rope brake, epicyclic train, belt transmission and torsion
dynamometers-effort and power.
Module 5
Gears: Condition for constant velocity ratio-law of gearing-conjugate teeth action-tooth forms-
standard modules and tooth proportions-contact ratio-interference-spur, helical, bevel, spiral, and
hypoid gears- gear forces.
References
1. Theory of Machines - Thomas Bevan

2. Mechanisms and Machine Theory - Ambedkar
3. Theory of Mechanisms and Machines - A.Ghosh & A.K.Mallick
4. Theory of Machines - V.P.Singh, Pearson
5. Theory of Machines - P.L.Bellaney
6. Theory of Machines and Mechanisms - J.E.Shigley & J.J.Uicker
HYDRAULIC MACHINES
M 403 2+2+0
Module 1
Dynamic Action of Fluid: Momentum and angular momentum equation applied to control volume –
impact of jet – flow of an incompressible fluid over fixed and moving vanes – workdone and
efficiency – reaction principle – propulsion of ships. Dimensional analysis – Rayleigh’ s method –
Buckingham’s Pi theorem – nondiamesional parameters in fluid mechanics and fluid machinery –
principle of similitude, geometric and dynamic similarity – model studies.
124
Module 2
Euler`s turbine equation: velocity triangles – impulse and reaction turbines – Pelton wheel, Francis
turbine Kaplan turbine – construction features and performance characteristics – non dimensional
parameters for comparative study of turbine performance – unit speed, unit power, unit quantity, run
away speed, geometric similarity – model laws – effect of specific speed on speed, runner size, flow
type etc. – theory of draft tube – speed regulation of turbines – selection, type and speed of turbines.
Module 3
Pumping machinery: General classification –Dynamic pumps - working of centrifugal pumps,
priming, vapour pressure, wear rings, hydraulic balancing, Classification of impellers, impeller
shapes – types of casings – materials for pumps & medical use – principle of operation Euler`s head
equation – velocity diagrams – losses in pumps – circulatory flow – pre rotation – efficiency – non
dimensional parameters – specific speed – effect of change of diameters & speed - performance
pump characteristics: main, operating, ISO efficiency characteristics curves – surging – NPSH –
selection of pumps from performance curves, suction & delivery pipe sizing, motor rating -
equivalent length of pipe, simple head loss calculation in pipe lines & fittings – Principle of
similitude – axial trust – multistage pumps – propeller pumps – pump in parallel & series operation.
Module 4
Theory, efficiency, performance curves & application of self-priming pump, jet pump, airlift pump,
slurry pump & hydraulic ram - Positive displacement pumps: reciprocating pump, effect of vapour
pressure on lifting of liquid – indicator diagram – acceleration head – effect of friction – use of air
vessels – work saved – Slip - efficiency – pump characteristics – applications. Condition monitoring
of pumps: temperature on bearing, vibration in equipmets, noises – vibration measurement and fault
diagnosis. Cavitation in fluid machines – installations susceptible to cavitation – collapse of bubble
theory – Thoma`s prameter – factors affecting cavitation in pumps and turbines – Abrasive wear of
pumps - prevention of cavitation damage.
Module 5
Positive displacement Rotary pumps: Gear, screw, vane, root pumps – rotary axial & rotary radial
piston pumps - theory, efficiency, performance curves, effect of surface texture & materials of
construction on performance – applications. Hydraulic accumulator, intensifier & lift – principle of
operation- Hydraulic symbols, hydraulic cranes, hydraulic capstan, hydraulic press.
References
Abdulla Sheriff - Hydraulic machines, standard publishers.

1. Govinda Rao N. S. - Fluid flows machines, TMH.
2. Jagadishlal. - Hydraulic machines, metropolitan publishers.
3. Pippinger. - Industrial hydraulics.
4. Centrifugal and axial flow pumps - Wiley & sons. – Stepanoff John A. J.
5. Lewitt E. H. - Hydraulic & Fluid Mechanics
MACHINE TOOLS
M 404 2+1+0
Module 1
Types and classification of lathes: Specifications-method of holding work and tool, accessories,
attachments-operations and types of tools for each operation-tool room lathe- duplicating lathe-
125
Capstan and Turret lathe-horizontal and vertical automatics-single spindle and multi-spindle screw
machines-manufacture of cylindrical bolts, stepped bolts, shafts-profile turning. Drilling and boring
machines:- types and specifications-description of tool and work holding devices-boring tools and
reamers-drilling of holes, countersinking and counterboring operations-boring of cross holes-
manufacture of bushes.
Module 2
Shaping, planing and slotting machines: Types and specifications-quick return motion-hydraulic
feed and its advantages-automatic feed-speed, feed and depth of cut-work holding devices-types of
operation and examples of work done-shaping of V-blocks, planing of guide gibs, slotting of
keyways. Broaching machines:-types-cutter-processes-internal and external broaching-broaching of
spline-bores. Milling machines: - types, specifications, operations and milling cutters-Indexing head
and its use-method of indexing-dividing head-milling of plane surface, keyways, slides and
hexagons.
Module 3
Grinding, Horning and Lapping: Types and methods of operations-tool and cutter specifications-
surface finish obtainable-method of evaluation of surface finish-roughness-super finishing-
burnishing-ultrasonic impact grinding-grinding of shafts and bores-methods of gear cutting-form
cutters-gear generating machines-gear hobbing -straight, spiral, worm, helical, and bevel gear
cutting-gear finishing and gear shaping operations-gear errors.
Module 4
Numerical Control (NC) machine tools: Elements, classification (basics only)-NC tooling-design
of NC/CNC tooling-automated chip less process.
Automatic machines: Semiautomatic multi tool central lathes-automatic cutting of machines- Swiss
type automatic screw machines, multi spindle automatic special purpose machine tools- program
controlled machine tools-copying machines.
Module 5
Computers in production technology: CIM-computer simulation of manufacturing process and
systems-cellular manufacturing-FMS - just in time production-management of toolroom-machining
centers-automatic tool changing-manufacture of ICs, PCBs, Ceramic circuit boards, and advanced
PCBs-expert systems in manufacturing-unmanned machining- trends in automated factory.
References
1. Production Technology - R.K.Jain

2. All about Machine tools - Gerling
3. Workshop Technology: Vol. 1,2 and 3 - W.A.J.Chapman
4. Production Technology - H.M.T.
5. Machine Tools: Vol. 1, 2, 3 and 4 -Acherkan
6. Manufacturing Science & Technology, Vol. 2 -Suresh Daleela
7. Manufacturing Engineering &Technology -S.Kalpakjian, S.A.Schmidt
ELECTRICAL TECHNOLOGY
M 405 3+1+0
Module 1
126
Transformer - emf equation: No load current - equivalent circuit - regulation - efficiency.
Determination of regulation and efficiency from O.C. and S.C. tests - cooling of transformers.
D.C. motors: Back emf - speed and torque equation - starting and speed control - testing of D.C.
motors - brake test - swinburn's test.
Module 2
Alternators - construction details: Type - emf equation (winding factor need not be derived) -
synchronous impedance - regulation by emf and mmf method. Synchronous Motors: Principle of
operation - method of starting.
Three phase induction motor: Production of rotating magnetic field equivalent circuit-torque
equation - torque slip characteristics - no load and blocked rotor tests - starting and speed control.
Single phase motor: Double revolving theory - capacitor start capacitor run induction motors –
applications.
Module 3
Industrial drives - electric drives - advantages - individual drive and group drive - factors affecting
choice of motor - mechanical characteristics of A.C. and D.C. motors - motors for particular
applications like textile mill, steel mill, paper mill, mine, hoists, crane etc. - size and rating of motor
– motor Selection for intermittent loads. Electric traction - Different systems of traction - comparison
– track electrification - different systems - traction motor characteristics - electric braking - plugging
-Dynamic and regenerative braking.
Module 4
Basic principle of transistor amplifier - R.C. coupled amplifier- F.B. amplifier - Basic principle.
Oscillators - basic principle - typical R.C. and L.C. oscillator circuits (no analysis) –Astable
multivibratior Pulse circuits - wave shaping circuits like simple clipping, clamping R.C.
differentiating, integrating circuits - simple sweep generator. CRO - basic principle of cathode ray
tube - deflection methods – block schematic of CRO - measurement of current, voltage and
frequency.
Module 5
Power semiconductor devices: Power diodes - SCR's - Principle of operation of SCR's - two
transistor analogy of SCR - characteristics - SCR rating (basic principle only). High frequency
heating - induction and dielectric heating – resistance heating Resistance welding - block schematic
of resistance welding scheme
References
1. Perfomance and design of D C machines – Clayton

2. Perfomance and design of A C machines – M G Say
3. Electrical Traction – Dover A T
4. Industrial and Power electronics – Harish C Rai
5. Electronic principles S K Sahdev
MACHINE DRAWING - II
M 406 0+0+4
Assembly and working drawings of the following: -
127
1. Valves: - Feed checkvalve, stop valve, spring loaded safety valve, Ramsbottom safety valve, lever
safety valve, deadweight safety valve, blow off cock.
2. Pulleys: - Fast and loose pulleys, speed cone or stepped pulley.
3. Clutches: - Single plate clutch, cone friction clutch.
4. Machine elements: - lathe spindle, screw jack, machine vice, lathe tool post.
References
1. Machine Drawing - N.D.Bhatt

2. Machine Drawing - P.I.Varghese
3. Machine Drawing - P.S.Gill
HYDRAULIC MACHINES LABORATORY

M 407 0+0+4
Study of hydraulic turbines – Pelton wheel, Francis & Kaplan turbines – force due to impact or jet
on vanes – velocity triangles – specific speed – types of casings – governing – cavitation – draft
tubes - performance characteristics – applications.
Study of dynamic pumps: Centrifugal pump - velocity triangles – priming - vapour pressure, wear
rings, hydraulic balancing - casings – impellers – specific speed – cavitation - selection of pumps
from performance curves, suction & delivery pipe sizing, motor rating, equivalent length of pipe,
crane co. table, simple head loss calculation in pipe lines - applications. Theory, efficiency,
performance curves & application of self-priming pump, jet pump, airlift pumps slurry pump &
hydraulic ram.
Condition monitoring of pumps: temperature on bearing, vibration in equipmets, noises – vibration

measurement and fault diagnosis. Study of positive displacement pumps – Reciprocating pumps –
single & multi cylinder – Air vessel – indicator diagram - - performance characteristics –
applications. Positive displacement Rotary pumps: Gear, screw, vane, root pumps – rotary axial &
rotary radial piston pumps - theory, efficiency, performance curves, effect of surface texture &
materials of construction on performance - applications.
Experiments
Performance characteristic tests on Pelton wheel (Load test & best speed).
Performance characteristic tests on Francis turbine (Load test & best gate opening).
Performance characteristic tests on Kaplan turbine (Load test & best gate, vane angle opening).
Performance characteristic tests on single stage, multi stage centrifugal pumps at constant speed & at
variable speed. Actual & predicted curves.
Performance characteristic tests on self-priming pump, Jet pump, Airlift pump and deep well pump
Performance characteristic tests on axial flow pump.
Performance characteristic tests on Hydraulic ram.
Vibration measurement and computer aided fault diagnosis of a centrifugal / self-priming / Gear /
Reciprocating pump.
Performance characteristic tests on reciprocating pump at constant speed.
Performance characteristic tests on Gear pump.
Performance characteristic tests on Screw pump.
128
References
1. Abdulla Sheriff. - Hydraulic machines, standard publishers.

2. Govinda Rao. N. S - Fluid flows machines, TMH.
3. Jagadishlal - Hydraulic machines, metropolitan publishers.
4. Pippinger - Industrial hydraulics.
5. Stepanoff john A.J. -Centrifugal and axial flow pumps, Wiley & sons.
ELECTRICAL & ELECTRONICS LABORATORY
M408 0+0+4
ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB
1. Efficiency and regulation of single phase transformer by direct loading.

2. Equivalent circuit of transformer from open and short circuit test-calculation of efficiency and
regulation at various loads and power factors.
3. Regulation of alternator by emf and mmf methods.
4. Starting of cage induction motor using star-delta switch - performance characteristics.
5. No load and blocked rotor test on slip ring induction motor - equivalent circuit - torque-slip
characteristics.
6. a) O.C.C. of D. C. shunt generator - critical resistance.-critical speed.
b) External and internal characteristics of D C shunt generator.
7. Load test on D. C. series motor.
8. Swinbume's test -Pre determination of efficiency.
9. Study of single phase induction motor, determination of performance characteristics.
ELECTRONICS LAB
1. Diode characteristics
2. Transistor characteristics- C.B, C.E configurations
3. Pulse circuits
4. Rectifier circuits
5. Sweep generator
6. R C Coupled amplifier
7. R C Oscillator, L C Oscillator
8. Astable multivibrator
129
FIFTH SEMESTER
130
CMELPA501 3+1+0
Module 1
Complex Integration: Line Integral –Cauchy’s integral theorem- Cauchy’s integral formula-Taylor’s
series-Laurent’s series- zeros and singularities- Residues- residue theorem-Evaluation of real
integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semicircle.
Module 2
Numerical solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection method-Regula
falsi method - Newton –Raphson method – solution of system of linear equations by Jacobi’s
Module 3
Modified Euler’s method - Runge – Kutta method (IV order)-Milne’s predictor corrector method.
Module 4
trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property- inverse transform – solution of 1st
& 2nd order difference equations with constant coefficients using Z transforms.
Module 5
only) – Big-M method, two phase method- Duality in L.P.P.- Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation
References
1. Advanced Engineering Mathematics – Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern limited.

2. Numerical methods in Engineering & Science – Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers.
3. Higher Engineering Mathematics – Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers.
4. Numerical methods in Science & Engineering – Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, National Publishing
Company.
5. Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems – P.C.Tulsian, Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education Asia.
6. Complex variables and applications – Churchill and Brown, McGraw-Hill.
7. Operations research – Panneer Selvam, PHI
8. Engineering Mathematics vol III – S.Arumugam, A.T.Isaac, Somasundaram, Scitech
publications
9. Advanced Mathematics for Engg.students vol III –S.Narayanan, T.K.M.Pillay, G.Ramanaigh,
131
MANUFACTURING PROCESSES
M 502 3+1+0
Module 1
Patterns: - pattern allowances and materials-moulding-core and core prints-types of cores- pattern
construction-layout and colour coding-tools-processes-moulding sand constituents, types and testing-
moulding machines-moulding procedure-sand conditioning-gating system-cupola operation-pouring
and cleaning of castings-defects in castings-inspection and quality control-casting machines-design
of dies-centrifugal, continuous, investment, squeeze casting and shell- mould casting- -comparison of
casting with other production processes.( include necessary figures)
Module 2
Welding: - definition-metallurgy of welding-applications – classification -mechanism-processes-gas
welding - details, equipment, fluxes and filler rods -design effect of weld parameters on weld
quality-flame cutting-ISI specification for welding. Arc welding applications-equipment –polarity-
governing factor in fusion welding-electrodes and types-ISI specification for electrodes –Welding
design-butt joint-TIG-GMA-CO2 process. Submerged arc, electroslag plasma arc and flux cored arc
welding-resistance, thermit solid state, electron beam and laser welding.Brazing: soldering-explosive
welding-inspection and defects in welding-welding of plastics.(include necessary figures )
Module 3
Rolling: - principles-types of rolls and rolling mills-semifinished and rolled products- rolling of
tubes, wheels, axles, I-beam-thread and gear rolling-friction and lubrication in metal forming-hot and
cold rolling-rolling machines-heating and cooling in rolling-strip velocity and roll velocity-roll and
roll pass design -Theories of rolling and effect of parameters-load calculation-High velocity forming
- energysources - material behaviour - pneumatic, mechanical, electrohydraulic, electromagnetic, and
explosive forming.
Module 4
Press working: - types of presses and pressworking operations involving shearing, bending, drawing,
squeezing-Extrusion: - methods, machines-analysis of rod extrusion-Wire and wire drawing
operations-analysis-die angles-simple, progressive and compound dies-plastic and rubber
processing-Calendering-transfer, injection and compression moulding.
Module 5
Forging: -classification-process-equipments-drawing, deep drawing, punching, blanking- tube
piercing-spinning and coining-elastic and plastic deformation-hot forging, die forging- machinery
for forging-operation-heating in forging-manufacture of drop forging dies, presses-design of
forgings and dies-upsetting-forging defects-forging analysis-quality assurance for forging-non
destructive testing.
References
1. Workshop Technology - Raghuvanshi

2. Manufacturing Engineering & Technology - S.Kalpakjian and S.A.Schmidt
3. Manufacturing Processes - Begeman
4. Manufacturing Science & Technology; Vol. I - Suresh Daleela
132
5. Processes and Materials of Manufacture - Roy A.Lindberg
M503 2+2+0
Module 1
Introduction to C language – character set – operators – constants and variables – data types – use of
built in I/O functions - use of control statements if, if – else, for, while, do-while and switch – use of
logical AND, OR and NOT – pre-processor directive - writing summation of various mathematical
series like ex, sin(x), cos(x) etc.
Module 2
Arrays – declaration of one dimensional array and its handling – bubble sorting – quick sorting –
searching – string handling functions – multidimensional arrays and its handling – structure and
union – array of structures – sorting of strings – programs
Module 3
Functions – declaration – global and local variables - call by value method – writing different string
handling functions – storage classes – passing an array to a function – passing a structure to a
function – recursion - macros – programs
Module 4
Declaration and use of pointers – call by reference method – pointer to an array – pointer to a
structure – array of pointers – pointer to an array – self-referential structure – dynamic memory
allocation – linked lists – programs
Module 5
Different types of files – reading writing and appending of text and binary files – other various file
handling functions - transfer of data in blocks - command line arguments – use of bit-wise AND, OR
and NOT.
References
1. Programming with C – Schaum’s series

2. Programming in C – Balaguruswamy
3. The C Programming Language – Kerningham & Ritchie
4. Let us C – Yaswant Kanetkar
5. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C – Kamthane, Pearson
THEORY OF MACHINES - II
M 504 2+2+0
Module 1
Static force analysis: - force couples-condititons for equilibrium-free body diagram- analysis of four
bar chain-force analysis of slider-crank mechanism-Coulomb friction.
Dynamic force analysis: - D’Alemberts principle-inertia forces-dynamic force analysis of four bar
chain, and slider crank mechanism.
133
Module 2
Governors: - terminology; Watt, Porter, Proel, Hartnell, Hartung, Wilson-Hartnell, and Pickering
governors-spring controlled governors of gravity type-effort and power-controlling force diagram-
quality of governors-effect of friction-insensitiveness-stability-inertia governors- governor speed,
torque characteristics of an engine-governor and flywheel.
Module 3
Turning moment diagram and Flywheel: - coefficient of fluctuation of energy and speed- energy
saved in a flywheel-punching press-dynamically equivalent two mass system-centre of percussion-
kinetic equivalence-reversed effective force analysis-piston effort-crankpin effort- crank effort-
turning moment diagrams for steam and I.C. engines.
Module 4
Gyroscope: - principle-angular acceleration-effect of gyroscopic couple on bearings, airplanes, and
ships-stability of automobile and two wheel vehicles-gyroscopic stabilization of sea vessels and
grinding mills.
Gear trains: -simple, compound-epicyclic trains with coaxial shafts.
Module 5
Cams and Followers: - types-follower motion-SHM-uniform velocity and acceleration- cycloidal -
displacement, velocity and acceleration curves-cam profile-reciprocating and oscillating followers-
tangent cams-convex and concave cams with footed followers.
References
1. Mechanism and Machine Theory - Ambedkar

2. Theory of Mechanism and Machines - A.Ghosh & A.K.Mallick
3. Theory of Machines - V.P.Singh
4. Theory of Machines - P.L.Ballaney
5. Theory of Mechanism and Machines - Joseph Shigley
6. Dynamics of Machinery - Holovanco
MECHATRONICS AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

M 505 2+2+0
Module 1
Introduction: - Scope of Mechatronics-systems-microprocessor based controllers-mechatronic
approach-sensors – transducers - force-velocity – displacement - temperature-inputting data by
switches-signal coditioning - operational amplifiers-filtering-multiplexers-data acquisition-
modulation. Data presentation systems: - displays-measurement systems-calibration-pneumatic and
hydraulic systems-control valves-actuators-mechanical and electrical actyation systems-relays and
solenoid switches and proximity pickups.
Module 2
134
Input/Output systems: - ports, interface requirements-adaptors-programmable logic controllers-data-
handling- digital communications-system, networks, protocols, interfaces, fault finding-design and
mechatronics-design solutions.
Electromechanical systems: CD, DVD ROMs, OCR, Printers-Medical devices: Artificial internal
organs-Diagnostic and Therapeutic EMDs.
Module 3
Introduction to Control systems Engineering:- concept of automatic control-open loop and closed
loop systems-servomechanisms-block diagrams-transfer functions. Representation of control
components and systems-Translational and rotational mechanical components-series and parallel
combinations-comparators, integrating devices, hydraulic servomotors, temperature control systems,
and speed control systems.
Module 4
System response: - First and Second order system response to step, pulse, ramp, and sinusoidal
input-systems with distance, velocity lag. Control system analysis: - Transient response of simple
control systems-Stability of control systems-Routh stability criteria- error analysis.
Module 5
Frequency response analysis: - polar, rectangular and logarithmic plots-experimental determination
of frequency response-Bode, and Nyquist stability criteria-Gain and phase margin. Root locus of
simple transfer functions-transient response from root locus.
References
1. Mechatronics - W.Bolton, Pearson

2. Understanding Electromechanical Engineering - Lawrence J.Kamm
3. Mechatronics - Dan S. Necsuleseu, Pearson
4. Control System Engineering - T.J.Nagrath and M.Gopal
5. Automatic Control Theory - Ravan
6. Modern Control Engineering - Katsuhiko Ogata
7. Control Systems - A.Nagoor Kani
8. Modern Control Engineering - Dorf, Pearson
THERMAL ENGINEERING - I
M 506 2+2+0
Module 1
Steam Engineering: Properties of steam - wet, dry and superheated steam - dryness fraction -
enthalpy and internal energy - entropy of steam - temperature entropy diagram - process - Mollier
chart - Rankine cycle for wet, dry and superheated steam. Steam Generators - classification - modern
steam generators - boiler mountings and accessories.
Module 2
Steam nozzles - Mass flow rate - throat pressure for maximum discharge - throat area - effect of
friction - super saturated flow.
Steam turbines: velocity triangles, work done, governing, and efficiencies.
Module 3
135
Gas turbine Plants - Open and closed cycles - thermodynamics cycles - regeneration, re heating -
inter cooling - efficiency and performance of gas turbines. Rotary Compressors - Analysis of rotary
compressors - centrifugal and axial compressors. Combustion - combustion chambers of gas turbines
- cylindrical, annular and industrial type combustion chamber - combustion intensity - combustion
chambers efficiency - pressure loss combustion process and stability loop.
Module 4
Introduction to solar energy - solar collectors - Liquid flat plate collectors - principle - thermal losses
and efficiency - characteristics - overall loss coefficient - thermal analysis - useful heat gained by
fluid - mean plate temperature - performance - focussing type solar collectors - solar concentrators
and receivers - sun tracking system - characteristics - optical losses - thermal performance - solar
pond - solar water heating - solar thermal power generation (Description Only)
Module 5
Thermal power plants: layout and operation of steam and diesel power plants - coal burners -
stockers - cooling ponds & towers - chimneys - draught - dust collectors - precipitators - feed water
heaters - evaporators - steam condensers - coal handling - ash handling.
References
1. Power plant technology - E. L. Wahid

2. Thermodynamic and heat power engineering - Mathur and Mehta
3. Thermal Engineering - P. L. Ballaney
4. Gas Turbine Theory - Cohen & Rogers
5. Solar Energy Utilization - G. D. Rai
6. Thermal engineering - R.K. Rajput.
COMPUTER LABORATORY
M 507 0+0+3
a) Familiarization of operating systems. Use of file directories, editors, compilers and file managers etc.
b) Familiarization of Word processing packages – editing, formatting and printing
c) Familiarization with spread sheet packages for graphical representation of data
d) Introduction to computer aided drafting – drawing simple objects
e) Programming experiments in C to cover control structures functions, arrays, structures, pointers and
files
Examples: -
i. Counting characters, lines and words

ii. Checking leap year
iii. Finding sum of digits and reversing a number
iv. Generating Prime numbers, Fibonacci numbers and Angstrom numbers
v. Sine and Cosine series
vi. Sorting of numbers, strings and records
vii. Matrix addition and multiplication
136
viii. Implementation of dynamic memory allocation
ix. Implementation of linked lists
x. File handling
xi. Problems using Command line arguments
MACHINE TOOL LABORATORY

M 508 0+0+3
Study of Centre Lathe: Origin of the name lath and lathe- specification of lathe- head stock, tail
stock, carriage, cross slide, compound rest, guide ways, feed gar box, apron box, micro structural
requirement of bed material. Accessories: Chuck, two and three jaws, and faceplate, follow rest, tool
post grinder, and centres.
Study of Machining technology: Study of metal cutting – tool terminology as per ASA, ISO, DIN
standards –merchant’s circle, Lee & Shaffer theory, thick & thin zone models - tool materials, coated
HSS, ceramic, CBN, diamond etc, inserts, chip breakers -- Tool wear mechanisms, VB
determination - Use of Taylor’s equation at shop floor - Machineabilty index - Role of specific heat
in cutting fluids. – Cutter types and selection – Abrasive machining (Ra values) – Diamond turning
of parts (Ra values) - Production of axi – symmetric parts – Production of prismatic components –
Hole machining – Gear machining.
Study of Basic measurement and devices: accuracy, precision, sensitivity, and standards of
measurements, metrology lab; standard and calibration, linear measurements, limit gauges (types and
design), Taylor’s principle, comparators (optical, mechanical, electrical, pneumatic), slip gauges,
optical projector with digital measuring. – Geometrical measurements: angular measurements,
vernier and optical protractors, sine bar. - Measurement of light wave interference, flatness and
parallelism and round measurement, checking the dimensional accuracy of slip gauges with
interference microscope. - Surface characterization: measurement of surface finishes RMS and
CLA values, waviness, cut off, skid, instruments for measurement of roughens of a sand cast surface,
slip gauge surface, ground bore of an engine cylinder, importance of surface finish on crack
initiation. – Screw thread terminology, best wire size, two and three wire methods pitch
measurement – Gear metrology (spur gear): run out checking, composite errors, base pitch
measurement, profile measurement, checking backlash, alignment errors. – Advanced measuring
devices: CMM, machine vision, toolmakers microscope, limitations, SEM, & TEM, laser measuring
instruments, laser micrometer and alignment test using laser interferometry.
Experiments
Measurement of cutting forces in machine tools using dynamometers –process capability study of
Machines –grinding of tool angle using tool and cutter grinding machine in a tool room –Turning &
taper turning, turning & thread cutting, - Indexing & Gear cutting, pocket milling–– Study of tool
and machine monitoring systems.- Angular measurements use of sine bar and slip gauges,
measurement of angle using clinometer, bevel protractor – calibration of plug and snap gauges using
slip gauges – Roundness measurement : cylindricity, concentricity, perpendicularity using dial stand
and measuring bench – Surface finish measurement.- Optical profile projector: study of profile of
gear tooth, screw threads, other tools – Tool makers microscope: to study tool geometry, screw
threads, measurement of turning tool wear of VB & KT values –Flatness measurement of surface
table using auto collimator – Lathe alignment test using laser interferometer – gear concentricity
tester, gear roll tester and gear tooth measurement.
137
Student’s assessment, continuous evaluation, awarding of sessional marks, record bonafides, oral
examination etc and university examination shall be done by Faculty members.
References
1. Acharkan. N. -Machine Tool Design Vol. 1 to 4, MIR Publication.
2. HMT- Production Technology, TMH.
138
SIXTH SEMESTER
139
MECHANICS OF MATERIALS
M 601 2+2+0
Module 1
Definition of stress and strain – components of stress and strain – Hook’s law – Plane stress and
strain – stress at a point – measurement of strain – strain rosette – Mohr’s circle of strains –
differential equations of equilibrium – boundary conditions – compatibility equations – stress
functions – 2D problems in rectangular co-ordinates – solutions by polynomials of various degrees
and effects – Saint Venant’s principle – determination of displacements.
Module 2
3D stress and strain – principal stresses – strain ellipsoid and director surfaces – stress invarients –
determination of maximum and minimum shearing stress – homogeneous deformation – strain at a
point – principal axes of strain – principal strain and invarients of strain – differential equations of
equilibrium – boundary conditions – conditions of compatibility – determination of displacements –
strain energy – uniqueness of solutions.
Module 3
2D problems in polar co-ordinates – general equations in polar co-ordinates – stress distribution
symmetrical about an axis – pure bending of curved bars – strain components in polar co-ordinates –
displacements for symmetrical stress distributions – rotating disk with and without central hole –
disk of uniform strength.
Module 4
Thick cylinders – spherical shells – compound cylinders –rotating rims and cylinders – long
cylinders.
Module 5
Curved beams – bending by eccentric loading – crane hooks – c clamp – chain link – columns of
machine tools. Photo elastic techniques of study of stress – description only.
References
1. Theory of Elasticity - Timoshenko & Goodyear

2. Advanced Mechanics of Materials - Seelv & Smith
3. Advanced mechanics of Solids - L.S.Srinath
4. Mechanics of Solids - Lardner & Archer
5. Introduction to Mechanics of Solids - Ezer P.Popov
6. Mechanics of solids - Mubeen, Pearson
140
METROLOGY AND INSTRUMENTATION
M 602 3+1+0
Module 1
General measurements concepts: Principles for achieving accuracy; Methods for estimating accuracy
and precision, precision Vs accuracy, systematic and constant errors; progressive, random, erratic,
drunken errors; statical concepts in metrology, statcial analysis of measurement data, control chart
techniques – comparators – General principle of measurements: line & end measurements,
standards; linear measurements, basic units, and quantities for displacement, mass, time, temperature
& optics; systems of limits and fits; selecting & assigning of fits, tolerances for linear dimensions.
Module 2
Gauges: classification, design of gauges, gauge maker’s tolerances, wear allowance, gauges
materials & gauge manufactures. Form measurements: straightness, flatness, squreness, circularity &
cylindricity – Measurement of angles & tapers: sine bars, angle gauges: auto collimator, clinometer
& spirit level; taper gauges, bevel protractors.
Module 3
Measurement of surface finish: surface structure, integrity, texture, roughens, waviness, lay, cut off,
RMS & CLA values, roughness values produced by machining processes, instruments for different
surface finish measurements, concept of apparent to real area of contact of mating surfaces,
applications in clutch plate surface, brake liner, inner race of a bearing, cylinder liner, machine tool
guide way, surface to be painted etc & importance of surface finish on crack initiation. Optical
measuring instruments: interferometry, optical flats, optimeters, and optical projectors, tool maker’s
microscope, limitations, SEM & TEM.
Module 4
Advanced measuring devices: Laser interferometry, applications – computer controlled co-ordinate
measuring machine; machine vision & non contact CMM - Gauging and measurements of screw
threads: Gauging methods for manufacturing, screw thread terminology, standard specification, and
formulae, tolerance, thread gauge measurement, measuring equipment, application of thread gauges
– Measuring of gears: Measuring methods for runouts, pitch profile, lead, backlash, tooth thickness,
composite elements, inspection equipment.
Module 5
Generalized measurement system: measurement terminology, input, out put configurations, static
characteristics, errors in measurement, drift, noise, accuracy, precision static sensitivity and
resolution, loading effects on instruments- Detector transducer elements: principles of calibration,
applications in measurement of strain, types of strain gauges, application in measurement of load &
torque, measurement of force and torque, hydraulic, pneumatic & train gauge type load cells,
hydraulic & electric dynamometers, measurement of vibration, vibrometers & accelerometers, theory
of seismic instruments - Temperature measurement: Use of Bi metals, pressure thermometer
thermocouple, optical & radiation pyrometer – magnetic flow meter – thermal conductivity gauges.
References
ASME - Hand book of industrial Metrology

Beckwith - Mechanical measurements, 5/e, Pearson
1. Doeblin - Measurement systems, 4/e, McGraw- Hill
2. Hume - Metrology, McDonald
3. Sharpe - Metrology, ELBS
141
Taher - Metrology, ELBS
THERMAL ENGINEERING - II
M 603 ` 2+2+0
Module 1
Working of two stroke & four stroke - Petrol and Diesel Engines (Review Only) - valve timing
diagrams - Fuels - Chemical structure - qualities, ratings of fuels - Alternative fuels, Alcohol,
vegetable oils, biogas.
Types of Engines - Wankel E/n, Stirling E/n, Stratified charge e/n, VCR E/n, free piston E/n. Fuel air
cycle (actual) for petrol and diesel engines - variation of specific heats - heat losses - Dissociation
Module 2
Carburation - Air fuel mixture requirements - stoichiometry and excess air calculations - types of
carburetors - Fuel injection systems - classifications - fuel injection pump - nozzle - direct and
indirect injection - Injection in S. I. Engine - M. P. F. I. System - Ignition system - Battery &
Magneto type - firing order - Ignition timing and spark advance - Lubrication systems - types -
properties of lubricants - additives for lubricants - Heat rejection and cooling - Theory of engine heat
transfer - types of cooling system - Air and liquid system - Super charging & turbo charging.
Module 3
Combustion in S. I. E/n - Ignition limits - stages of combustion - combustion quality - Ignition lag -
Flame propagation - Abnormal combustion - detonation - effects - Theory, chemistry and control -
flash point, fire point & viscosity index - combustion chamber design considerations.
Module 4
Combustion in C. I. Engines - Air Fuel ratio in C. I. Engines - Ignition Lag - diesel knock -
Controlling Methods - Various stages of combustion - vaporization of fuel droplets and spray
formation - Air motion - Swirl - combustion chamber - design considerations.
Module 5
Pollutant formation and control in S. I. And C. I. Engine, Nox, CO, Unburned hydro Carbon and
particulate - Exhaust gas treatment - catalytic converter - Thermal reaction - Particulate Trap.
Engine operating characteristics - Testing of I. C. Engines - Indicated power - Brake power -
Volumetric Efficiency - Heat balance Test - Morse Test - Measurement of exhaust smoke and
exhaust emission.
References
1. Internal Combustion Engine Fundamentals - John B. Heywood

2. Internal Combustion Engine and Air Pollution - Obert E. F.
3. Internal Combustion Engine - Lichty L. C.
4. Internal Combustion Engine - V. Genesan
5. A course in internal combustion Engine - Mathur and Sharma.
HEAT AND MASS TRANSFER

M 604 2+2+0
Module 1
142
Introduction to basic modes of heat transfer - Scope and application of heat transfer principles in
engineering practice. Conduction Fourier law - thermal conductivity of solids, liquids and gases -
factors affecting thermal conductivity. Thermal heat, conducting equation in Cartesian, cylindrical
and spherical co-ordinates - one dimensional steady state conduction with and without heat
generation - unsteady state conduction. Conduction through homogenous and composite surfaces
plane wall cylindrical and spherical - variable thermal conductivity shape factors - heat flow through
corners and edges.
Module 2
Convection - Newton's law - concept of boundary layer - significance of Prandtil number - boundary
layer equation - flat - plate heat transfer equations by integral method Laminar and turbulent flow of
heat transfer in tubes - Forced convection in turbulent flow - Reynolds analogy. Application of
dimensional analysis in forced and natural convection. empirical relations, Combined effect of
convection and conduction. Over all heat transfer coefficient - critical radius of insulation.
Module 3
Heat Exchangers type of heat exchangers. Log mean temperature difference. Design of shell and
tube exchangers - NTU method of evaluation of heat exchangers - heat exchange - effectiveness -
application of straight rectangular and triangular fins effectiveness of fins.
Module 4
Radiation - Nature of thermal radiation - Definitions and concept - Monochromatic and total
emissive power - Absorptivity - Reflectivity transmissivity, Black Grey and Real surfaces. Concept
of Black body Planks distribution law - Kirchoffs law Wein's displacement law-Geometric factors of
simple configuration. Heat exchange by radiation between black surfaces - Large parallel black plate
- equal parallel and opposite black squares, discs, black rectangles perpendicular to each other
having a common edge-heat exchange by radiation between large parallel planes of different
emissivity (no derivations - simple problems with the use of chart and equations)
Module 5
Mass transfer - introduction to mass transfer - Pick's law of diffusion in gases. Diffusion coefficient.
Analogy between the phenomena of heat transfer and mass transfer. Elementary problems.
Condensation and boiling - film Drop-wise condensation-film boiling and pool boiling. Bubble
growth and collapse- empirical relations for heat transfer with change of phase (description only)
Numerical methods in conduction (finite difference and finite element methods description only).
References
1. Elements of Heat Transfer - Jacob Hawkins

2. Principles of Heat Transfer - Krieth
3. Heat and Mass Transfer - Fckert & Drake
4. Heat transfer - Holmann
5. Engineering Heat & Mass Transfer - R.K. Rajput.
6. Engineering Thermodynamics and Heat Transfer - Gupta and Rajendra Prasad
143
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT AND ENGINEERING ECONOMICS
M605 3+1+0
Part A – Principles of Management
Module 1
Functions of management: planning, organizing, staffing, directing, motivating, communicating,
controlling and coordinating – Organizational structure-line, staff and functional relationship-span of
control and delegation.
Module 2
Ogranisational behaviour: stress, meaning, causes, effects, strategies for coping with stress-
motivation-types of motives, theories of work motivation-group dynamics-nature of work group,
group cohesiveness, group performance, group norms. Marketing management: identification of
products, pricing, promotion and distribution channels.
Module 3
Formation of companies: proprietary and partnership-joint stock, private limited, public limited
companies-private sector, public sector, joint sector and co-operative sector.
Wages and incentives: Time and piece rate system, bonus, incentives-monetary and non-monetary
Total quality management-re-engineering-management by objectives
Part B – Engineering Economics

Module 4
Basic concepts: Theory of demand and supply-price mechanism-factors of production-land, labour,
capital and organization-national income-difficulties in estimation-taxation-direct and indirect-
progressive and regressive-black money-inflation-demand pull and cost push-effects of price
increases.
Module 5
Indian financial system: Reserve bank of India-commercial bank system-public sector banks-
development financial institutions-IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, IRBI-investment institutions-UTI-insurance
companies-stock market-functions-problems faced by the stock markets-role of the public sector-
privatisation-multinational corporations and their impact on the Indian economy.
References
1. Benga & Sharma – Industrial Organisation and Management

2. Fred Lufthans – Organisational Behaviour
3. Keith Davis – Human Behaviour at Work
4. Philip Kotler – Marketing Management
5. K.K.Dewett – Modern Economic Theory
6. A.N.Agarwal – Indian Economy
7. Kargaweski – Operation management, Pearson
8. Mazda – Engineering management, Pearson
9. O.P.Khanna - Industrial Engineering & Management
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN AND MANUFACTURING

M 606 3+1+0
144
Module 1
Evolution of CAD/CAM and CIM segments of generic CIM, computers and workstation, elements
of interactive graphics, input/ out put display, storage devices in CAD - an overview of CIM
software - 2D Graphics: line drawing algorithms, DDA line algorithm – circle drawing, bressnham`s
circle drawing algorithm– 2D translation, rotation, scaling – clipping -3D Graphics (basic only).
Design process – CAD process: wireframe, surface, solid modeling; Engineering analysis; design
review & evaluation, automated drafting – CAD hard ware, software, data presentation, CAD
software packages
Module 2
Numerical control: Need - advantages & disadvantages – classifications – Point to point, straight cut
& contouring positioning - incremental & absolute systems – open loop & closed loop systems –
DDA integrator & Interpolators – resolution – CNC & DNC.
Programmable logic controllers (PLC): need – relays- logic ladder program – timers - Simple
exercises only.
Devices in N.C. systems: Driving devices - feed back devices: encoders, moire fringes, digitizer,
resolver, inductosyn, tachometer.
Module 3
NC part programming: part programming fundamentals - manual programming – NC co-ordinate
systems and axes – tape format – sequence number, preparatory functions, dimension words, speed
word, feed world, tool world, miscellaneous functions – programming exercises.
Computer aided part programming: concept & need of CAP – CNC languages – APT language
structure: geometry commands, motion commands, postprocessor commands, compilation control
commands – programming exercises – programming with interactive graphics.
Module 4
Automated process planning: Process planning, general methodology of group technology, code
structures of variant & generative process planning methods, AI in process planning, process
planning software.
Module 5
Robotics: Industrial robots and their applications for transformational and handling activities,
configuration & motion, actuators, sensors and end effectors, feature like work envelop, precision of
movement, weight carrying capacity, robot programming languages.
Vision systems: introduction to intelligent robots.
References
1. Craig john - Introduction to Robotics

2. Groover M.P. - CAD/CAM, PHI.
3. Hearn & Baker - Computer graphics (in C version), Prentice Hall.
4. New man & Sproull - Principles of interactive Graphics, McGraw – Hill.
5. Petruzella Frank.D. - Programmable logic controllers.
6. Yoram koren - Numerical control of machine tools, McGraw-Hill
7. Jonn Craig - Introduction to Robotics
HEAT ENGINES LABORATORY

M 607 0+0+ 3
145
Study of systems and components of IC Engines and automobiles - study of dynamometers used in
engine testing - study of IC Engine repairs and maintenance. Study of boilers, boiler mountings and
accessories - study of steam engine parts and systems.
Testing of IC engines • Performance analysis of IC engine using computerized test rig-Load test on
petrol and diesel engines- determination of indicated and brake thermal efficiencies - mechanical
efficiency - relative efficiency - volumetric efficiency - air-fuel ratio and compression ratio - valve
timing diagram - retardation test - Morse test - heat balance - effect of varying the rate of cooling
water and varying the speed on the performance characteristics of engines. Testing of steam boiler -
boiler trial - steam calorimeters and steam nozzles - performance test on steam engines -
performance test on steam turbines.
Testing of fuels and lubricants - determination of flash and fire points of petroleum products -
determination of kinematics and absolute viscosity of lubricating oils - determination of calorific
146
ADVANCED MACHINE TOOL LABORATORY
M 608 0+0+3
Study of Vibration: two and multi degree freedom systems, signature analysis and preventive
maintenance, noise control. Study of Automated process planning: process planning, general
methodology of group technology, code structures variant generative process planning methods, AI
in process planning.
Study of Quality circle concepts – ISO 9000, ISO 4000 series, QS 9000 – quality system standards,
TQM, - SQC, control charts for inspection, charts for variables, R charts, six sigma concepts –
Taguchi methods.
Study of Fundamentals of Numerical control: principles of NC - incremental & absolute positioning,
PTP, straight & contouring machining, open & closed loop system - DDA integrator & different
interpolators - feed back devices - lead screw - stepper motor - advantages & disadvantages - NC,
CNC and DNC - punched tapes – manual part programming, preparatory function, G codes, speed
word, feed word, M codes, tool word etc, computer aided part programming, APT languages –
tooling for CNC, tooling systems, automatic tool changing tool magazines etc - principles, need of
machining centers. Study of Programmable logic controllers (PLC): need – relays- logic ladder
program – timers; on & off delay timers, cascading & retentive timers – counters; cascading
counters. Study of Tolerance charting techniques: operational sequences for typical shaft type
components, preparation of process drawing for different operation, tolerance worksheets and
centrality analysis. Study of Design of jigs and fixtures: degree of freedom - principles of location
and clamping - principles of jig design – fool proofing - elements of jigs - design of jigs for drilling,
reaming – principles of fixture design, locators and different types of clamps – elements of fixture –
provision for tool setting – design of fixture for milling, turning, boring, and grinding operations,
inspection of assembly fixtures – modular fixturing – concepts and applications – use of software for
building fixture – tool design for forging, drop forging dies and auxiliary tools – upset or forging
machine dies. Study of Design of sheet metal blanking and piercing dies: Die design – power press
types – die clearances – cutting forces – punch and die mountings – types of construction – fine
blanking – die design fundamentals – materials for dies & allied elements – multiplexing of tools.
147
Experiments
Key way slotting, side & face milling of a rod to make square head – 5mm material removal by
Shaping – Drill 10.5 mm. CBR 16 mm, 10 mm deep – Surface grinding, cylindrical grinding and tool
grinding - Vibration study of machine tools with an analyser. Preparation of process plans using
CAPP software –Planning of experiments for process improvement using software – simulation of
factory layout - facilities layout analysis – line balancing – materials requirement planning –
inventory analysis – quality assurance using control charts – preparation of process sheet for
manufacturing of spindle like & housing type component – preparation of process plan & cost
estimation for the manufacture of typical product like submersible pump, three phase motor etc.
Preparation of CNC programs for drilling, grooving, parting, linear interpolation, circular
interpolation, etc. – Simulate and produce a component has valley shaped undercuts along its lenth,
etc. PLC operated solenoid valves. Design of a jig and a fixture for drilling & milling operation -
Design of assembly, inspection, fixtures - Design of sheet metal working dies: feed strip layout
design, force calculations, press tool design (forming & cutting), assembly & dismantling of simple
die casting dies - Design & fabrication of simple bending dies – Design of forging dies: product
requirement & design of forging dies – study of analysis software for mould flow, melt flow, metal
forming.
Student’s assessment, continuous evaluation, awarding of sessional marks, record bonafides,
oral examination etc and university examination shall be done by Faculty members.
References
1. Acharkan. N. - Machine Tool Design Vol.1 to 4, MIR
Publication.
2. HMT - Production Technology, TMH.
3. Petruzella Frank. D - Programmable logic controllers.
4. Yoram Koren - NC machines tools, McGraw Hill.
148
SEVENTH SEMESTER
149
GAS DYNAMICS AND JET PROPULSION
M 701 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to gas dynamics: control volume and system approaches acoustic waves and sonic
velocity - Mach number - classification of fluid flow based on mach number - mach cone-
compressibility factor - General features of one dimensional flow of a compressible fluid - continuity
and momentum equations for a control volume.
Module 2
Isentropic flow of an ideal gas: basic equation - stagnation enthalpy, temperature, pressure and
density-stagnation, acoustic speed - critical speed of sound- dimensionless velocity-governing
equations for isentropic flow of a perfect gas - critical flow area - stream thrust and impulse function.
Steady one dimensional isentropic flow with area change-effect of area change on flow parameters-
chocking- convergent nozzle - performance of a nozzle under decreasing back pressure -De lavel
nozzle - optimum area ratio effect of back pressure - nozzle discharge coefficients - nozzle
efficiencies.
Module 3
Simple frictional flow: adiabatic flow with friction in a constant area duct-governing equations -
fanno line limiting conditions - effect of wall friction on flow properties in an Isothermal flow with
friction in a constant area duct-governing equations - limiting conditions. Steady one dimensional
flow with heat transfer in constant area ducts- governing equations - Rayleigh line entropy change
caused by heat transfer - conditions of maximum enthalpy and entropy
Module 4
Effect of heat transfer on flow parameters: Intersection of Fanno and Rayleigh lines. Shock waves in
perfect gas- properties of flow across a normal shock - governing equations - Rankine Hugoniat
equations - Prandtl's velocity relationship - converging diverging nozzle flow with shock thickness -
shock strength.
Module 5
Propulsion: Air craft propulsion: - types of jet engines - energy flow through jet engines, thrust,
thrust power and propulsive efficiency turbojet components-diffuser, compressor, combustion
chamber, turbines, exhaust systems. Performance of turbo propeller engines, ramjet and pulsejet,
scramjet engines. Rocket propulsion - rocket engines, Basic theory of equations - thrust equation -
effective jet velocity - specific impulse - rocket engine performance - solid and liquid propellant
rockets - comparison of various propulsion systems.
References
1. Compressible fluid flow - A. H. Shapiro

2. Fundamentals of compressible flow with aircraft and rocket propulsion - S. M. Yahya
3. Elements of gas dynamics - Liepman & Roshko
4. Aircraft & Missile propulsion - Zucrow
5. Gas dynamics - M.J. Zucrow & Joe D.Holfman
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
150
M 702 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Evolution of Industrial Engineering- Fields of application of Industrial Engineering
-Functions of Industrial Engineer-Organisational structure of Industrial Engineering Department.
Production and Productivity: Types of production-continuous production-intermittent production.
Productivity-productivity index-factors affecting productivity-techniques for productivity
improvement.
Value Engineering: Historical perspective-reasons for poor values-types of values-the different
phases of value analysis-applications of value analysis.
Module 2
Plant design: Plant location-factors influencing plant location. Plant layout-types of plant layout-
introduction to layouts based on group technology, just in time and cellular manufacturing systems.
Material handling: Principles of material handling-selection of material handling devices-types of
material handling equipments.
Maintenance and replacement of equipments: Types of maintenance. Depreciation-methods of
calculating depreciation. Selection of equipments-methods for replacement studies.
Module 3
Methods Engineering: Process charts and flow diagrams-Micro motion study-Work measurement
techniques.
Job evaluation and merit rating: Objectives of job evaluation-Methods of job evaluation.
Objectives and uses of merit rating-Merit rating plans.
Module 4
Industrial relations: Fatigue-Communication in industry-Industrial disputes-Trade unions-Quality
circles-BIS-ISO-Labour welfare-Industrial safety-Statutory provisions in labour legislations.
Ergonomics: Objectives and applications.
Module 5
Inventory control: Determination of Economic order quantity and reorder level.
Quality control: Destructive and nondestructive testing methods. Statistical quality control-process
control charts-acceptance sampling.
Cost accounting and control: Elements of cost- Selling price of a product-Types of cost-Allocation
of overheads.
References
1. Production system - Riggs

2. Production control - Hiejet
3. Human factors in Engg design - Mc Cormic E.J.
4. Industrial Engg & Management - O.P.Khanna
5. Industrial Organisation & Management - Banga & Sarma
6. Industrial Engg - A.P.Verma
7. Value Engg - Mudge
8. Manufacturing organization & Management - Amrine
9. Time & Motion Study - Lowry
151
10. Quality Control - Hansen
REFRIGERATION AND AIR CONDITIONING

M 703 2+1+0
Module 1
Principles of refrigeration: Thermodynamics of refrigeration - Carnot cycle, reversed carnot cycle,
heat pump, and refrigerating machine- coefficient of performance - unit of refrigeration -
refrigeration methods- conventional refrigeration systems. Air refrigeration system- Bell Coleman
cycle - C.O.P. capacity work and refrigerant flow requirements in Bell - Coleman cycle.
Module 2
Vapour compression system: simple cycle -comparison with Carnot cycle - theoretical, actual and
reactive - COP effect of operating parameters on COP - wet, dry and superheated compression -
under cooling - actual cycle representation on TS and PH diagrams simple problems. Advanced
vapour compression systems - multistage vapour compression systems - flash chamber multiple
compression and evaporation systems cascading - simple problems.
Module 3
Vapour absorption systems: simple, cycles - actual cycle - ammonia water and lithium bromide
water systems - COP - electrolux system. Refrigerant and their properties: Nomenclature - suitability
of refrigerants for various applications - unconventional refrigeration methods- Vortex tube, steam-
jet, magnetic (cryogenics) refrigeration and thermoelectric refrigeration - applied refrigeration house
hold refrigerators - unit air conditioners and water coolers - ice plant cold storage.
Module 4
Refrigeration system components: condensers - water and air cooled condensers - evaporative
condensers - expansion devises - capillary tube- constant pressure expansion valve - thermostatic
expansion valve - float valve and solenoid valve - evaporators - natural convection coils - flooded
evaporators - direct expansion coils. Reciprocating compressors: single stage and multistage
compressors - work done optimum pressure ratio- effect of interfolding - volumetric efficiency
-effect of clearance - isothermal and adiabatic efficiency - compressed air motors. Rotodynamic
compressors: Screw and vane type compressors - principle of operation - hermetic, semihermetic and
open type refrigeration compressors.
Module 5
Principles of air conditioning: Psychrometry and psychrometric chart thermodynamics of human
comfort - effective temperature - comfort chart applied psychrometry - sensible heat factor -
psychometric process-problems. Winter air conditioning: heating load calculations humidifiers and
humidistat. Summer air conditioning: cooling load calculations - year round air conditioning -
unitary and central systems - principles of air distribution - design of air duct systems.
References
1. Refrigeration and air conditioning - Ballaney P. L.

2. Refrigeration and air conditioning - Stocker W. F.
3. Refrigeration and air conditioning - Jordan and Protester
4. Principles of Refrigeration - Roy J. Dossat
152
DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY
M 704 2+1+0
Module 1
Balancing: - Balancing of rotating masses, static balancing and dynamic balancing, Balancing of
several masses rotating in same plane, Balancing of several masses rotating in several planes,
Balancing machines.
Balancing of reciprocating masses: - The effect of inertia force of the reciprocating mass on the
engine. Partial primary balance. Partial balancing of locomotive, Hammer blow, Variation of
tractive effort, Swaying couple. Coupled locomotives, Balancing of multi cylinder inline engines, v-
engines, Radial engines, Direct and Reverse cranks
Module 2
Vibrations: - Definitions, simple harmonic motion.
Single degree freedom systems: -
Undamped free vibrations: - Equations of motion Natural frequency, Energy method, Equilibrium
methods, Rayleigh’s methods, Equivalent stiffness of spring combinations.
Damped free vibrations: - Viscous damping, Free vibrations with viscous damping, over-damped
system, critically damped system, under-damped system, Logarithmic decrement, viscous dampers,
coulomb damping.
Forced Vibrations: - Forced harmonic excitation Rotating unbalance, Reciprocating unbalance.
Energy dissipated by damping, vibration isolation and Transmissibility. Vibration measuring
instruments.
Module 3
Two degree freedom systems: - Principal modes of vibration, Rectilinear and angular modes,
systems with damping, vibration absorbers, centrifugal pendulum damper, dry friction damper,
untuned viscous damper.
Multi-degree of freedom system: - Free vibrations, equations of motion, Influence coefficients
method, lumped mass and distributed mass systems, Stodola method, Dunkerly’s method, Holzer’s
method, Matrix iteration method.
Torsional Vibrations: - Torsionally equivalent shaft, torsional vibration of two-rotor, three-rotor,
and geared systems.
Module 4
Critical speeds of shafts: - Critical speed of a light shaft having a single disc without damping.
Critical speeds of a light cantilever shaft with a large heavy disc at its end.
Transient vibration: - Laplace transformation, response to an impulsive input, response to a step
input, response to a pulse input, phase plane method, shock spectrum.
Non-linear vibrations: - Phase plane, undamped free vibration with non-linear spring forces, hard
spring, soft spring, Perturbation method, Forced vibration with nonlinear forces, Duffings equation,
self excited vibrations.
Module 5
Noise control: - Sound propagation, decibels, acceptance noise levels, Air columns, Doppler effect,
acousticl measurements, microphones and loud speakers, Recording and reproduction of sound,
fourier’s theorem and musical scale, Acoustics of buildings, Acoustic impedence filters and human
ear.
153
References
1. Theory of Machines - Thomas Bevan

2. Theory of Machines - P.L. Ballaney
3. Mechanical Vibrations, V edition - G.K. Groover
4. Theory of Vibrations with applications, III Edn - W.T. Thomson
5. Mechanical Vibrations - S. Graham Kelly, Schaum’s outlines
6. Fundamentals of Vibrations - Leonard Meirovitch, Mac Graw Hill
7. A text book of sound - L.P. Sharma & H.C. Saxena
8. Engineering Noise Control - D.A. Bies & C.H. Hausen.
9. Noise & Vibration Control - Leo N. Beraneck
MACHINE DESIGN AND DRAWING - I

M 705 2+0+2
Module 1
Definitions - Design principles – common engineering materials – selection and their properties –
general steps in design – design criteria – types of failures - types of cyclic loading.
Stresses in Machine parts – tension, compression and shear –elastic constants-working stress-factor
of safety-bending and torsion-combined stresses-stress concentration-fatigue-endurance limit-fatigue
diagram-fatigue factors-theories of failure-Goodman and Soderberg lines
Detachable joints-socket and spigot cotter joint, knuckle joint – pins, keys, splines -set screws,
threaded fasteners and power screws – Shaft coupling – sleeve coupling – split muff coupling –
flange coupling – protected type flange coupling – thick and thin cylinders
Riveted joints: Lap joint – Butt joint – failures of riveted joint – strength of riveted joint – efficiency
of riveted joint – design of longitudinal butt joint for boiler – design of circumferential lap joint for
boiler – joints of uniform strength – Lozange joint – eccentrically loaded riveted joint.
Module 2
Springs – Classification and uses of springs – design of helical springs – effect of end turns – energy
absorbed – deflection – design for fluctuating loads – vibration in springs – buckling of spring
materials
Shafts – Torsion and bending of shafts – hollow shafts – design of shafts for strength an deflection –
effect of keyways – transverse vibration and critical speed of shafts
Design of IC engine parts – connecting rod – piston – flywheel –
Welded joints: Lap joint – Butt joint – weld symbols parallel and transverse fillet welds – strength of
welded joints – axially loaded welded joints – eccentrically loaded welded joints.
References
1. Mechanical Engg. Design – Joseph Shigley

2. Machine Design – Mubeen
3. Machine Design – Black
4. Machine Design – R. K. Jain
5. Machine Design an integral approach – Norton, Pearson
6. Machine Design data hand book – Lingayah Vol I.
7. Elements of Machine Design – Pandya & Shah
154
Note
For the University Examination 100% choice may be given. i.e. two questions from each module
with full choice.

CMELRTA 706-1 3+1+0
Module 1: Classical optimization techniques


Module 3: Unconstrained minimization

Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke and
Jeeve’s method.
Module 4: Integer – Linear programming problem
Module 5: Network Techniques

References
1. Optimization theory and application - S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd.
2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering - A.D.Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla,
3. Principles of Operations Researc for Management - F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena,
Richard D. Irwin, INC.
4. Operation Research an introduction - H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition.
5. Operations Research - R. Panneerselvam, PHI
PLANT ENGINEERING AND MAINTENANCE (ELECTIVE-I)

M 706-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Wear and Lubrication: -wear-classification-theories of wear-analytical treatment of wear- stages of
wear-effect of moisture, gas and liquid on wear-effects of temperature-corrosive wear- fretting-
fatigue-calculation of working life-design considerations.
Module 2
155
Lubricants: -solid, fluid and semifluid-synthetic lubricant-general properties and uses-tests and
classification-aniline point-cloud, pour and flash point-carbon residue-flash and fire points- sulphur
content-lubricant additives-lubricant systems-lubrication equipments and components.
Module 3
Maintenance: -Breakdown and preventive maintenance-deterioration and failure analysis- planning,
scheduling, and controlling of maintenance work-organisation for maintenance.
Replacement: - causes of deterioration and obsolescence-sudden and gradual obsolescence and
deterioration-economic analysis-MAPI method. Evolution of maintenance management-SWOT
analysis-subjective methods of evaluation-objective criteria of evaluation.
Module 4
Reliability: -concept and definition-chance of failure-wear and failure application of stochastic
model for reliability studies-reliability of series, parallel and stand by systems-estimation of
parameters of failure distribution-maintainability and availability-problems.
Module 5
Non destructive testing and diagnostic instruments: - inventory control of spare parts-simple
problems.
Safety management: - accident prevention program-designing of safe operation-fire protection –legal
provisions for safety in industry.
References
1. Standard Handbook of Plant Engineering - Robert C.Rosder

2. Reliability&Maintainability Management - Balbir S.Shillon
3. Industrial Maintainence Management - Sushilkumar, Srivasthava
4. Handbook of Tribology - Bharat Bhooshan, B.K.Guptha
5. Inspection, Quality control and Reliability - S.C.Sharma
6. Maintenance and Spare parts management - P.Gopalakrishnan, A.K.Banergy.
WELDING TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - I)

M 706-3 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: - Welding as a fabrication process- advantages and limitations – principal types of
welding process and their characteristics.
Soldering & Brazing: -Soldering – principles of soldering, Tin-Lead binary diagram- different types
of solders – need of fluxes for soldering and different fluxes used – method of soldering – silver
soldering and aluminium soldering – advantages and limitations.
Brazing: - Principle of Brazing – brazing alloys & fluxes- methods of brazing – aluminium brazing –
advantages & limitations.
Pressure Welding Process: - Forge welding- spot welding – seam welding – projection welding- butt
welding – flash butt welding – welding of tubes & percussion welding.
Module 2
Fusion Welding: Oxy-acetylene welding – chemistry of oxy-acetylene welding flame – type of
flames & adjustments – welding set up & arrangements – preparation & storing of acetylene as well
156
as oxygen gases- rightward & leftward welding techniques – filler metals & fluxes used for gas
welding – weld movements – welding of: cast iron, stainless steel, aluminium, copper, nickel &
magnesium- safety rules in oxy-acetylene welding.
Module 3
Electric arc welding: Electric properties of the arc – arc column theories: ion theory & electron
theory- heat distribution in an electric arc – arc welding power sources – their specific characteristics
advantages & limitations – arrangements for straight & reverse polarities – striking of an arc – types
of weld movements – welding positions – welding symbols – Electrodes – needs & types of
electrodes covering – classification of arc welding electrodes.
Arc welding Processes: Carbon arc welding – single & twin carbon arcs – flux shielded metal arc
welding – submerged arc welding – TIG & MIG welding and atomic hydrogen welding.
Module 4
Special or Unique welding processes: Various welding processes – their specific applications – neat
sketches- advantages & limitations: Electroslag welding – Plasma arc welding – Ultrasonic welding
– Electron beam welding – Laser beam welding – friction welding – explosive welding & cold
welding processes.
Module 5
Basic metallurgy of welding: Three prominent zones: weld metal zone – heat affected zone & the
unaffected zone.
Welding Stresses: causes of development of residual stresses – methods of relieving or controlling of
residual stresses in weldments.
Defects: commonly found defects in welded joints.
Inspection & testing of weldments: - Needs of inspection & testing of weldments – the various
testing methods – destructive tests such as tensile, bend, impact, neck break & hardness tests – Non
destructive tests such as Magnetic particle, Ultrasonic, Dye-penetratant, radiographic & eddy current
methods.
References
1. Welding Engineering -Rossi

2. Welding & welding Technology -Little.
3. Metallurgy of welding -Bruckner
4. The Electric Welder -Tse Golsky
5. Welding Engineer’s Hand Book Vol 1,2 & 3 (ASME)
6. Welding for Engineers -Udin & Funk
7. A text book of Welding Technology -O.P Khanna
8. Welding Engineering -R.L Agarwal
9. Welding engineering & Technology -R. S. Parmer
10. Welding (10th Edition) -A. C. Davis, Cambridge University Press.
FOUNDRY TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - I)

M 706-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Patterns: Different types of patterns – colour codes of patterns.
157
Moulding sands: Natural and synthetic sand- ingredients of moulding sands- special sand additives
sand mixing- general properties of moulding sand – testing of moulding sand - effect of ingredients
and Additives on properties of moulding sand- reusability of moulding sands- sand conditioning.
Core and core making: Purpose of cores - core prints – types of cores – core sand ingredients –
requirements of core sand- core sand mixing – binding materials – core boxes, core making, baking,
coating, reinforcing and venting.
Module 2
Gating and risering: Mechanism of solidification – nucleation and growth – rate of solidification –
progressive and directional solidification.
Gates and gating system – functions and types of gates – design of gating system – gating ratios
for ferrous and nonferrous castings – risering- functions and requirements of riser – types of risers -
theoretical considerations – Chvorinov s rule – riser shape and directional solidification – use of
chills, insulators and exothermic compounds
Module 3
Ferrous foundry metallurgy: Gray cast iron – composition – effect of composition in properties –
types of graphite in gray cast iron – foundry characteristics of grey cast iron – effect of inoculation
and inoculants – low alloy and high alloy cast iron –malleable iron – white heart and black heart
malleable iron – malleablisation – S.G. iron – compositon and properties
Module 4
Non-ferrous foundry metallurgy: Foundry characteristics of copper and aluminium base alloys –
degassing and melt treatment.
Melting and pouring: Types of furnaces used for C.I., steel and non-ferrous metals – details and
charge calculation in cupola charging
Module 5
Cleaning and inspection: Knock out and fettling – destructive and non-destructive testing- salvaging.
Mechanisation in foundry: Elementary ideas of mechanisation in sand conditioning and supply,
moulding, core making, knock out and fettling.
References
1. Principles of Metal Casting - Hine and Rosenthal

2. Foundry Technology - P.R.Beeley
3. Manufacturing Science - Amitabha Ghosh and Ashok Kumar Mallick
4. Manufacturing Engineering and Technology - Kalapakjian and Schmid
ADVANCED OPERATIONS RESEARCH (ELECTIVE - I)

M 706-5 3-1-0
Goals: The course is designed to develop an understanding of operation research with particular attention to
linear programming, dynamic programming, and integer programming.
Module 1
• Linear Programming
1. Problem Formulation
2. Graphical Solution
158
3. Simplex Method
4. Revised Simplex Method
5. Duality Theory
6. Sensitivity Analysis
Module 2
• Transportation Model
1. North-west corner method
2. Least cost method
3. VAM
4. Test of optimality
Module 3
• Integer Programming
1. Introduction, basic concepts and simple problems
2. Gomory’s all integral cutting plane method
• Goal Programming
1. Application of goal programming
2. Introduction basic concepts and simple problems
Module 4
• Dynamic Programming
1. Shortest path models
2. Characteristic of Dynamic Programming
3. Discrete Dynamic Programming models
Module 5
• Simulation
1. Basic Concepts
Binomial distribution
Poisson distribution
Normal distribution
2. Monti-cralo simulation
3. Generation of random numbers
4. Simulation software
Course Outcomes
1. Students will have a working knowledge of operation research techniques such as linear
programming, Integer Programming, Goal Programming and Dynamic Programming.
2. Students will have the ability to analyze and perform sensitivity analysis on different optimum
solutions generated.
3. Students will have the ability to tackle real life optimization problems.
References
159
1. Hamda & Taha, Operations Research - 7th edn; Pearson
2. Ravindran and Philips Operations Research – Principles and Practice.
3. Ronald L.Rardin, Optimisation in Operation Research, Pearson Education
4. Verma A.P., Operation Research, S.K.Katharia & Sons
MARKETING AND SALES MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE - I)

M 706-6 3+1+0
Module 1
Marketing: Definition- Marketing concepts- Market segmentation- Market demand- Product- Value
and satisfaction- Exchange and transactions- Marketing channels- Competition- Marketing
environment- Marketing mix.
Marketing Management: Functions-Sales forecasting-Pricing-Distribution- Advertising- Sales
promotion- Marketing research.
Module 2
Strategic Planning: Strategic business unit (SBU)- Business strategic planning-SWOT analysis.
Marketing decision support system.
Module 3
Product life cycle: Marketing strategies in the different stages of product life cycle.
New product development: Idea generation- Concept development and testing- conjoint analysis.
Introduction to Relationship marketing, International marketing and on line marketing.
Module 4
Consumer behaviour: Major factors affecting consumer buying behaviour- Consumer decision
making process.
Organisational buying behaviour: Buying situations- the buying center- Purchasing process.
Module 5
Sales management: Evolution of Sales management- Objectives of Sales management- Personal
selling situations- Theories of selling- Basic selling styles-Recruitment, selection and training of
sales personnel-Sales territory-Sales quotas.
References
1. Marketing Management - Philip Khotler

2. Sales Management - Richard, Edward & Norman
3. Industrial Engg & Management - O.P.Khanna
4. Industrial Organisation & Management - Banga & Sarma
5. Organisational Behaviour - Fred Luthans
6. Consumer Behaviour - Schifman & Kanuk
7. Basic marketing - Gundiff
8. Marketing Management for small units - Jain
9. Sales Engg - Lester
10. Salesmanship concept - Thomson
160
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS (ELECTIVE - I)
M 706 -7 3+1+0
Module 1
Basic concepts: -conservation principles-mass, momentum energy-conservation of scalar quantities-
dimensionless form of equations-simple mathematical models for incompressible, inviscid, potential
and creeping flows-approximations of hyperbolic, parabolic, elliptic, and mixed flows- introduction
to numerical methods, advantages and limitations-components of numerical solution methods and
properties.
Module 2
Finite difference methods: - concept-approximation of first derivative, second derivative and mixed
derivative-boundary conditions, errors, spectral methods, examples-finite volume method,
approximation of surface and volume integrals, boundary conditions-examples.
Module 3
Solutions of Linear Equations: - direct methods-Gauss elimination method-LV decomposition-
tridiagonal system-cyclic reduction-iterative methods-conyergence-conjugate gradient- multigrid
methods-non linear equations-deferred correction approaches, methods for unsteady problems, two
level Runge Kutta predictor corrector methods-explicit, implicit methods.
Module 4
Solutions of Navier Stokes equations: -choice of variable arrangement on grid-calculation of
pressure-other methods-solution methods for Navier Stokes equations.
Module 5
Turbulent flows: - direct numerical solution-large eddy simulation, RANS models, Reynolds stress
models- compressible flows (introduction only)-pressure correction models-simple examples.
References
1. Computational methods for Fluid Dynamics -Joel H.Ferziger & Miloven Peric. (Springer
Werlag Publishers)
2. Computational Fluid Dynamics (The basics with applications) -John D.Anderson (Mc Graw Hill
Pub.)
3. Numerical methods for Scientific& Engineering Computations - M.K.Jain & R.K.Iyengar
(WileyEastern)
4. Introduction to Numerical Analysis - F.B.Hilderbrand. (Tata Mc GrawHill)
161
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LABORTAORY
M 707 0+0+4
Tests on reciprocating air compressor

Tests on blowers and rotary compressors
Vibration of springs – free and forced vibrations.
Whirling of shafts.
Balancing of reciprocating and revolving masses – balancing machines.
Tests on universal governor apparatus.
Tests on gyroscope.
Friction in hydrodynamic bearings – bearing testing machines.
Metallurgical analysis of specimens using metallurgical microscope.
Testing of foundry sands for strength, moisture content, permeability etc.
Determination of minimum fluidizing velocity in a conventional fluidized bed.
HEAT TRANSFER LABORTAORY

M 708 0+0+4
Tests on refrigeration equipment.

Tests on air conditioning units.
Determination of thermal conductivity of conducting and insulating materials.
Determination of emissivity of surfaces
Heat flow through lagged pipes.
Heat flow through composite walls.
Determination of overall heat transfer co-efficient of a heat exchanger.
Free and forced convection.
162
EIGHTH SEMESTER
163
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
M 801 2+1+ 0
Module 1
Theory of metal cutting: Historical back ground –Classification of manufacturing process –
Deformation of metals (review only) – Performance & process parameters - Oblique & orthogonal
cutting – Mechanism of chip formation, types, chip curl, chip control – Tool geometry: American,
British, DIN, ISO systems – Mechanism of orthogonal cutting: Thin zone model, Merchant’s
analysis, Oxley thin shear zone analysis – Thick zone models, Palmer & Oxley analysis – shear angle
relationship, Lee & Shaffer`s; relation ship etc. – Friction process in metal cutting: nature of sliding
friction, effect of increasing normal load on apparent to real area of contact , columb`s law, yield
stress at asperities, adhesion theory, ploughing, sublayer flow – Effect of rake angle,cutting angle,
nose radius etc. on cutting force and surface finish – Empirical determination of force component.
Module 2
Thermal aspects of machining: Source of heat; temperature distribution in chip, shear plane &
work piece; effect of speed, feed & depth of cut – Tool materials: carbon steel, HSS, coated HSS,
ceramics, diamond etc.- Cutting fluids: effect of specific heat, etc on selection of liquids;
effectiveness at tool chip interface; classification of fluids – Tool wear: flank & crater [KT] wear –
Tool wear mechanisms: adhesion, abrasion, diffusion & fatigue; Taylor’s equation, application at
shop floor; speed, tool material & micro structure on tool life; allowable wear land [VB] ; rapid,
steady & catatospheric wear on rough & finishing operations – Economics of machining –
Machineability index.
Module 3
Power metallurgy: Preparation metal powers – Power characteristics: properties of fine power, size,
size distribution, shape, compressibility, purity etc.- Mixing – Compaction techniques – Mechanism
of sintering of single & multi phase materials - Sintering atmosphere – Finishing operations: heat
treatment, surface treatment, impregnation treatment etc. – Impregnated bearings – Sintered oil-
retaining bearing – Economics of p/m.
Advanced materials: Super alloys - Titanium & titanium alloys – shape memory alloys –smart
materials – microstructure, properties, applications.
Module 4
Polymers: Polymerization – Structural features: Linear & net work molecular structure – Molecular
wt, degree of polymerization, branching, cross linking – co polymers & ter polymers – Molecular
architecture – effect of crystallinity – Glass transition temp: - Thrmo polymers – Thermoset
polymers – Additives – Polymer matrix composites: properties & applications. - Elastamers: Kinked
structure - Mechanical, physical & chemical properties – Vulcanization of rubber – conductive
polymers, applications. – Ceramics: Structure – Mechanical, physical properties & applications. –
Glasses: Types, glass ceramics – Types, properties and application of MMC and CMC – Honey
comb structure.
Module 5
Advanced production methods: Rapid prototyping: background & definitions – Process methods:
Stereolithography, selective laser sintering, fused deposition modeling, laminated object
manufacturing, laser engineered net shaping, 3D welding – Information processing – Indirect
fabrication of metals & ceramics. – Non traditional machining: EDM, ECM, USM – principle, types,
process parameters, control, MRR, surface finish, application etc. – Electro chemical grinding,
164
lapping, honing; process principle & Ra only, applications – EBM, LBM, IBM, AJM, Abrasive
water jet machining, LIGA process.
References
1. Armarego & Brown, The Machining of Metals, Prentice - Hall

2. Beaman, Barlow & Bourell, Solid Free Foam Fabrication: A new direction in mafg., Kluwer
Academic Publishers
3. Brophy, Rose & Wulf, The Structure & Properties of Metals Vol.2, Wiley Eastern
4. Dixon & Clayton, Powder Metallurgy for Engineers, Machinery publishing co. London
5. HMT, Production Technology, Tata McGraw Hill
6. Kalpakjian, Manufacturing Engineering & Technology, Addison – Wesley, 4nd edn.
7. Lal G.K., Introduction to Machining Science, New Age publishers
8. Metcut research, Machinablity Data Center Vol.1 & 2, Metcut research associates, Cincinnati
9. Paul. H. Black, Theory of Metal Cutting, McGraw Hill
AUTOMOBILE ENGINEERING
M 802 3+1+0
Module 1
Engines: Types of engines in automobiles-classifications-engine components-working of various
systems-CNGengines-R&D works-present and future vehicles-frame, body and engine construction-
structure and mechanism forming components- carburetors, diesel fuel pumps, injector, single point
and multi point fuel injection-combustion chambers-lubricating oil pumps-cooling systems-Vehicle
performance-resistance to the motion of vehicle-air, rolling, and radiant resistance-power
requirement-acceleration and gradeability-selection of gear ratios.
Module 2
Transmission: prime movers-clutch-principle-friction-helical spring and conical spring clutches –
centrifugal clutches and fluid couplings-Gear box-principle and necessity of manual gear box-
constant mesh, sliding mesh and synchromesh gear boxes-epicyclic gearbox-overdrives-hydraulic
torque converters-semi and automatic transmission-Final drive-front wheel, rear wheel and four
wheel drives-transfer case-Hotchkiss and torque tube drives-universal joints-constant velocity
universal joint-differential-non-slip differential-rear axles-types of rear axles.
Module 3
Steering and Suspension: Different steering mechanisms-steering gear boxes-power steering –
types-suspension systems-front axle, rigid axle and independent suspensions-anti-roll bar-coil spring
and leaf spring-torsion bar-Macpherson strut-sliding pillar-wish bone-trailing arm suspensions-front
axle types-front wheel geometry-castor, camber, king pin inclination, toe-in toe-out. Shock
absorbers-hydraulic and gas charged shock absorbers-air suspensions.
Module 4
Chassis and Body: Types of chassis and body constructions-crumble zones, air bags and impact
beams-automotive air conditioning-braking mechanism and convectional brakes- booster, hydraulic
and power brakes, components and attachments-mechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic brakes-anti-
lock braking systems-Wheels and Tyres:tube-less tyres-ply ratings- radial tyres-hybrid vehicles-
165
vintage cars-racing cars-automated roads-coach works-materials- safety provisions- motor vehicle
act.
Module 5
Electrical systems Battery, charging and ignition systems-electronic ignition-dynamos and
alternators-voltage regulators-light and horn relays-circuit diagrams-starting motor-bendix and
follow through drives-power windows-electronic engine control unit for fuel injection- automotive
lighting, accessories and dashboard instruments-Preventive and breakdown maintenance-engine
testing, servicing-overhaul- engine tuning- wheel balancing-trouble shooting-garage tools and
equipments-noise, vibration, and performance tests.
References
1. Automobile Engineering (Vol. 1 & 2) - K.M.Guptha

2. Automotive Mechanics - Joseph Heitner
3. Automobile Engineering - Harbans Singh Reyd
4. Automotive Mechanics - William H. Course
PRODUCTION PLANNING AND CONTROL

M 803 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to PPC: need for PPC, effect, advantages, functions and problems of PPC.
Forecasting: methods of sales forecasting-forecasting for new products-forecasting for established
products-time series analysis for sale forecasting – long term forecasting – methods of estimating
Sales trend- problems- correlation analysis.
Module 2
Production planning: objectives-characteristics-process planning. Capacity planning- factors
affecting-Master production scheduling-material requirement planning – BOM and product
structure.
Production control: objectives- production control systems- principle and procedure of production
Control.
Routing: objectives- procedure – route sheets.
Module 3
Sequencing assumptions: solution of sequencing problems-processing n jobs through two machines
Processing n jobs through three machines – processing n jobs through m machines – processing two
Jobs through m machines-problems
Module 4
Materials management: Components of integrated material management Purchasing management-
stores management. Supply chain management – ERP-Role of I.T.
Module 5
Loading and scheduling: aim- reasons for scheduling- master scheduling or aggregate scheduling
Estimating shop loads- short term scheduling – mathematical loading and scheduling- problems-
Scheduling through PERT / CPM problems.
Despatching- duties- procedure- rules.
166
Follow up and reporting- types-report preparation and presentation.
References
1. Modern Production Management - E.S.Buffa

2. Principles of Production Management - J.Apple
3. Production management principles - Mcycss
4. Production Planning and Control - K.C.jani& L.N.Aggarwal
5. Manufacturing Planning &Control - Volfman, Berry, Whybark systems
6. Production and operations management - R.Paneerselvam
7. Modeling the supply chain - Jeremy F Shapiro
MACHINE DESIGN AND DRAWING - II

M 804 2+0+2
Module 1
Gears: Types of gears –spur gear, helical gear, bevel gear, worm and worm wheel- strength of gear
teeth – gear forces and their effects – formative number of teeth – lead – lead angle-basic geometry
and nomenclature of meshed spur gear set-dynamic load – endurance load-wear loads – AGMA
standards – Lewis equation for strength design and Lewis form factor – design for wear – design of
gears such as spur gear, helical gear, bevel gear, worm and worm wheel.
Module 2
Bearings: Bearing materials – introduction to lubrication – minimum film thickness – hydrodynamic
theory of lubrication – viscosity of oil – oil seals – selection of lubricants – viscosity index –
measurement of viscosity – effect of temperature on viscosity – clearance ratio – summer feld
number – specifications and selection of bearing – anti friction bearing – bearing life – rating life –
dynamic load capacity – equivalent dynamic load – design of journal bearing – design of rolling
contact bearing such as ball and roller bearing.
Pumps: Design of centrifugal pump (Simple problems)
References
1. Mechanical Engineering Design – Joseph Shigley

2. Machine Design – Mubeen
3. Machine Design – Black
4. Principles of Lubrication – Cameron A.
5. Mechanical Seals – Mayer E.
6. Design of Machine Elements – Bhandari V. B.
7. Machine Design – Pandya and Shah
Note
Question Paper pattern same as Machine Design - I

CMELRTM 805-1 3+1+0
167




References
1. Linear Integral Equation - Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York

2. A Course on Integral Equations - Allen C.Pipkin, Springer – Verlag
3. Advanced Engg. Mathematics - H.K.Dass, S.Chand
4. Advanced Engg. Mathematics - Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia
5. Numerical methods in Engg. &Science - B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers
6. Generalized functions - R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons.
7. Principles and Techniques of Applied Mathematics - Bernard Friedman, John Wiley and
sons
8. Principles of Applied Mathematics - James P.Keener, Addison Wesley.
9. Numerical methods - P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy, Chand & co
EXPERT SYSTEMS IN MANUFACTURING (ELECTIVE - II)

M 805-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Artificial Intelligence - expert / knowledge based systems - definition - expert system architecture:
software components, knowledge base, inference engine, inference sub systems.
Module 2
168
Hard ware requirements - knowledge acquisition, knowledge base, knowledge representation -
semantic netwoks, objects, nods; links, attributes, values - semantic net work structures: nodes,
object, links, attributes, values.
Module 3
Knowledge representation: rule based system - heuristic rules - frame based knowledge
representation - inference engine components - inferences strategies; modus ponens, backward &
forward chaining, monotonic & non monotonic reasoning, search strategies - expert system building
tools: languages, shells.
Module 4
Commercial software for manufacturing applications in CAD, CAPP, MRP - 11, adaptive control of
devices, robotics, process control, fault diagnosis, failure analysis etc; linking expert systems to other
software such as DBMS, MIS, MDB, process control and office automation.
Module 5
Case studies and programming of typical applications in process planning, tool selection, Grinding
wheel selection, part classification, inventory control, facilities planning etc.
References
1. Peter Jackson - Introduction to Expert systems, 3/e, by; Addison Wesley Longman, 1999.
2. Prentice - hall hand book of expert systems
AEROSPACE ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE - II)

M 805-3 3+1+0
Module 1
The atmosphere: Characteristics of Troposphere, Stratosphere, Mesosphere and Ionosphere -
International Standard Atmosphere – Pressure, Temperature and Density variations in the
International Standard Atmosphere – Review of basic fluid dynamics – continuity, momentum and
energy for incompressible and compressible flows – static, dynamic and stagnation pressures –
phenomena in supersonic flows
Module 2
Application of dimensional analysis to 2D viscous flow over bodies – Reynolds number – Mach
number similarity – Aerofoil characteristics – Pressure distribution – Centre of Pressure and
Aerodynamic Center – Horse shoe vortex
Module 3
Momentum and Blade Element Theories – Propeller co-efficients and charts – Aircraft engines –
Turbo jet, Turbo fan and Ram Jet engines – Bypass and After Burners
Module 4
Straight and Level Flight – Stalling Speed – Minimum Drag and Minimum Power conditions –
Performance Curves – Gliding – Gliding angle and speed of flattest glide – Climbing – Rate of
Climb – Service and Absolute Ceilings – Take off and Landing Performance – Length of Runway
Required – Circling Flight – Banked Flight – High Lift Devices – Range and Endurance of Air
planes.
169
Module 5
Air speed indicators – Calculation of True Air Speed – Altimeters – Rate of Climb meter – Gyro
Compass – Principles of Wind Tunnel Testing – Open and Closed type Wind Tunnels – Pressure and
Velocity Measurements – Supersonic Wind Tunnels (description only) – Rocket Motors – Solid and
Liquid Propellant Rockets – Calculation of Earth Orbiting and Escape Velocities Ignoring Air
Resistance and assuming Circular Orbit.
References
1. Mechanics of Flight - Kermode A. C.

2. Aerodynamics for Engineering Students - Houghton and Brock
3. Airplane Aerodynamic - Dommasch
COMBUSTION (ELECTIVE - II)

M 805-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Thermodynamics of reactive mixtures: Bond energy-Heat of formation-Heat of reaction-adiabatic
flames temperatures-entropy changes for reacting mixtures-chemical equilibrium – equilibrium
criteria –evaluation of equilibrium constant and equilibrium composition –simple numerical
solutions.
Module 2
Elements of chemical kinetics: law of mass action-order and molecularity of reaction – rate
equation- Arrheniuss law – activation energy – collision theory of reaction rates- Transition state
theory-collision theory of reaction rates- Transition state theory –General theory of chain reactions-
combustion of carbon monoxide and hydrogen.
Module 3
Ignition and flammability: methods of ignition –self ignition – thermal theory of ignition – limits of
flammability –factors affecting flammability limits- flame quenching- flame propagation- flame
velocity- measurement of flame velocity – factors affecting flame speed- premixed and diffusion
flames – physical structures and comparison – characteristics of laminar and turbulent flames- theory
of laminar flame propagation.
Module 4
Flame stabilization: Stability diagrams for open flames- mechanisms of flame stabilization –critical
boundary-velocity gradient –stabilization by eddies bluff body stabilization – effects of variables on
stability limits.
Module 5
Combustion in solid an liquid propellant: Reactant motors – Classification and types of propellants –
desirable properties of grain shapes – burning rates and combustion model of solid propellants-
injection of liquid propellants-ignition and ignitors. Miscellaneous topics – droplet combustion –
fluidized bed combustion - classification of coal – air pollution.
References
170
1. Fuels and combustion – Sharma S.P
2. Some fundamentals of combustion – Spalding D.B
3. Fundamentals of combustion – Strehlow . R.A
4. Elementary reaction Kinetics – Lathan J.L
5. Flames – Gaydan and wolfhard.
PROJECT MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE - II)

M 805-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Project feasibility Analysis- Marketing, Technical, and financial feasibilities- report preparation-
case studies.
Module 2
Project Management- nature and scope- PERT and CPM techniques, Estimates-time, cost,
resources (man, material, tool).
Module 3
Forecasting Methods-Time series analysis-method pf least square, moving average, curvilinear,
correlation analysis.
Module 4
Risk Analysis-risk in economic analysis-measuring risk in investment; risk profiles, decision trees,
formulation of discounted decision trees, simulation.
Module 5
MS Project: (Software Practice) Creation of task, sequencing of task, assignment of resources,
finding critical path, ABC activities (discuss), breaking the activities, colouring techniques, resource
balancing, allocating overtime, using different calendars (Like 8 or 12 hours shift, Friday/Sunday
holiday, Special public holidays etc), cost estimates, assignment of blank fields, creation of different
views on screen.
Reports: Daily reports for completed activity, lagging activities, overall progress review,
Management high-level reports, individual Departmental reports.
References
1. Corter, Mastering MS Project 2000, BPB Publishers.

2. Harvey Maylor, Project Management, Pearson Education.
3. PrasannaChandra, Project Management, Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Prasanna Chandra, Projects, Tata McGraw Hill.
PROGRAMMING IN C++ AND VISUAL C++ (ELECTIVE - II)

M805-6 3+1+0
171
Module 1
Introduction to C++ - Object Oriented Approach – I/O instructions – Data types – Type Conversions
– Arithmetic Operators – Relational Operators – Loops – Precedence – Conditional Operator –
Logical Operators – Structures and its manipulations – Functions – Arrays.
Module 2
Classes and Objects – Specifying the Class – The private and public key words – Defining Member
Functions – Defining Objects – Calling Member Functions – Constructors – Destructors –
Overloaded Constructors – Objects as Arguments – Returning Objects from Functions – Array of
Objects.
Module 3
Operator Overloading – Operator Arguments – Operator Return Values – Postfix Notation –
Overloading Binary Operators – Arithmetic Assignment Operators – Data Conversion – Inheritance
– Derived Class and Base Class – Specifying The Derived Class – Accessing Base Class Members –
The protected Members – Derived Class Constructors – Overriding Member Functions – Scope
Resolution with Overridden Functions – Public and Private Inheritance – Levels of Inheritance –
Multiple Inheritance.
Module 4
Pointers – Memory Management – The new and delete Operators – Pointers to Objects – Self
Containing Classes – Virtual Functions – Accessing Normal and Virtual Member Functions with
Pointers – Pure Virtual Functions – Friend Functions – The ‘this’ Pointer – Accessing Member Data
with ‘this’.
Module 5
Introduction to Windows Programming – Basic Windows Program Structure – Different Windows
Messages like WM_PAINT, WM_TIMER etc. – Introduction to MFC – MFC Hierarchy - Use of
Simple Foundation Classes like CTime, CString, CFile etc. – Exception Handling.
References
1. Object Oriented Programming in Microsoft C++ - Robert Lafore

2. Windows Programming Primer Plus - Jim Conger
3. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C - Kamthane. Pearson
SILICATES - STRUCTURE, PARTICLE ANALYSES AND SPRAY COATING (ELECTIVE - II)

M 805-7 3+1+0
Module 1
Silicate Mineralogy in General - Minerals-Definition, Classification-Silicates and non-silicates.
Physical properties of minerals-Colour, lusture, transperancy, cleavage, hardness, fracture, form,
specific gravity, fusibility & tenacity.
Module 2
Identification of Silicate Minerals - Physical properties, chemical composition and uses of the
important silicate minerals-1. Quartz, 2. Feldspars, 3.Pyroxenes, 4.Amphiboles, 5.Micas,
172
6.Aluminium silicates-andalusite, sillimanite & kyanite, 7.Olivine, 8.Garnets, 9.Chlorites 10.
Natrolite, 11.Clay minerals, 12.Asbestose, 13.Talc 14.Tourmaline 15. Staurolite
Module 3
Silicate Mineral Structures - Detailed study of the silicate structures with examples- 1.
Nesosilicate, 2.Sorosilicate, 3.Cyclosilicate, 4.Inosilicate, 5.Phyllosilicate & 6. Tectosilicate.
Ceramics and silicates.
Module 4
Particle Analyses – Coarse and powder materials- Coarse material-Size distribution- Grain size
parameters, coefficient of angularity, specific surface area (actual and theoretical) by sieve analysis.
Powder material-Size and area determination by various methods- Blane’s methods, air jet sieve,
Bacho dust classifier and BET methods.
Module 5
Spray Coating – Basic concepts and general discussion of spray coating. Binders- Ethyl
orthosilicate (ETS-40), properties and hydrolysis. Slurries – Binder and different ceramic powders,
consistency and determination, drying. Heat source – Plasma arc-transferred and non-transferred
arcs, arrangement of spray coating.
References
1. Rutley’s elements of mineralogy, H.H.Read, Thomas Murby&Co, London.

2. A text book of mineralogy, E.S. Dana, Wiley Eastern Ltd, New Delhi.
3. Mineralogy, Dier, Howie & Zussman, CBS Publishers, New Delhi.
4. Materials-Their nature, properties and fabrication, Seghal & Linderburg.
5. Material science and manufacturing process, Dhaunedrakumar, S.K.Jain & A.K.Bhargava, Vikas
publishing house, New Delhi.
6. Welding and welding technology, Little, Tata McGraw hill publishing Co., New Delhi.
7. Investment casting, H.T. Bidwell, The machinery publishing Co., Ltd, UK.
8. Non-ferrous foundry metallurgy, A.J. Murphy, Pergamon Press Ltd.
9. Welding engineering and technology, R.S. Parman, Khanna publishers, New Delhi.
10. Manufacturing science, Amitabha Ghosh & Asok kumar Mallik, EWP, East West Press Pvt Ltd,
New Delhi.
MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - III)

M 806-1 3+1+0
Goals
To learn Management Information System (MIS), implementation requirements and process
standardisation.
Module 1
Elements of a MIS – Levels of Management – Types of Management information – Technical
dimensions of Information – System elements – Characteristics of MIS – Case Study.
173
Module 2
Building Business Model – Data Base – Report generation and time sharing – Case study.
Module 3
Communication and distributed Data processing.
Module 4
Managing and controlling the MIS function. Application Development Cycle.
Module 5
Future of MIS – Architecture – reliability – Security – Intelligent Buildings.
Outcomes
Student will learn elements of MIS & steps in implementing MIS. Students will also learn hardware
and software selection for MIS.
References
1. Mudric and Rose - Information System and Management.

2. Jerome Kauter - Management Information Systems, Prentice
Hall India.
3. R. S. Daver - The Management Process.
4. Mudric, Rose & Callgget - Information System for Modern
Management, Prentice Hall India.
5. James Obrein - Management Information Systems
CRYOGENICS (ELECTIVE - III)

M 806-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Historical development- present areas involving cryogenic engineering. Basic
thermodynamics applied to liquefaction and refrigeration process - isothermal, adiabatic and Joule
Thomson expansion process - adiabatic demagnetization – efficiency to liquefaction and coefficient
of performances irreversibility and losses.
Module 2
Low temperature properties of engineering materials: mechanical properties - thermal properties -
electrical and magnetic properties. Properties of cryogenic fluids - materials of constructions for
cryogenic applications.
Module 3
Gas liquefaction systems: production of low temperatures - general liquefaction systems -
liquefaction systems for neon, hydrogen, nitrogen and helium.
Module 4
Cryogenic refrigeration systems: ideal refrigeration systems- refrigerators using liquids and gases as
refrigerants - refrigerators using solids as working media.
Module 5
174
Cryogenic storage and transfer systems - Cryogenic fluid storage vessels cryogenic fluid transfer
systems. Application of cryogenics - cryo pumping - superconductivity and super fluidity -
cryogenics in space technology - cryogenics in biology and medicine.
References
1. Cryogenic Systems - Barron R. F

2. Cryogenic Engineering - Scot R. W.
3. Cryogenic Engineering - Bell J.H.
NUCLEAR ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE - III)

M 806-3 3+1+0
Module 1
Review of elementary Nuclear Physics: Atomic structure – Nuclear energy and nuclear forces –
Nuclear fission
Nuclear reactions and radiations: Principle of radioactive decay – Interaction of α and β rays with
matter – Neutron cross section and reactions – The fission process – Chain reaction – Basic
principles of controlled fusion.
Module 2
Nuclear reaction principles – Reactor classifications – Critical Size – Basic diffusion theory –
Slowing down of neutrons – Neutron flux and power – Four factor formula – Criticality condition –
Basic features of reactor control
Module 3
Boiling water reactor: Description of reactor system – Main components – control and safety
measures Materials of Reactor: Construction – Fuel – Moderator coolant – Structural materials –
Cladding – Radiation damage.
Module 4
Nuclear fuels: Metallurgy of Uranium – General principles of solvent extraction – Reprocessing of
irradicated fuel – Separation process – Fuel enrichment.
Module 5
Reaction heat removal: Basic equations of heat transfer as applied to reactor cooling – Reactor heat
transfer systems – Heat removal in fast reactors
Radiation Safety: Reactors shielding - Radiation dozes – Standards of radiation protections –
Nuclear waste disposal.
References
1. Nuclear Engineering - Glasstone & Sesoske

2. Sources book on Atomic Energy - Glasstone S.
INDUSTRIAL HYDRAULICS (ELECTIVE - III)

M 806-4 3+1+0
175
Module 1
Introduction to hydraulic / pneumatic devices – their application and characteristics – comparison
of electric, hydraulic and pneumatic devices.
Module 2
Pumps and motors: Principle of working – range of displacement and pressures- fixed and variable
discharge pumps-gear, screw, vane, piston pumps – axial piston pump-swash pump-bent axis pump.
Types of hydraulic motors – their characteristics. Accessories-Hydraulic accumulators – intensifiers-
filters-heater-cooler.
Module 3
Hydraulic valves: Stop valve- non return valve-relief valve-sequence valve-counter balance valve-
pressure reducing valve – flow control valve –irection control valves-their principle of operation-
and application-JIC symbols of hydraulic- pneumatic components.
Module 4
Properties of commonly used hydraulic fluids-Typical hydraulic circuits like those used in machine
tools –Rivetter- pneumatic Hammer, hydraulic press, and power steering.
Module 5
Fluidics: Introduction of fluidics devices –Principles of working of common fluidics devices like
wall attachment devices – proportional amplifiers-turbulent amplifiers- fluidic logic devices –
examples of applications of fluidics devices like edge control of steel plate in rolling mills tension
control.
References
1. Daniel Bonteille -Fluid Logic and Industrial automation.

2. John Pippenger & Tyler Hicks - Industrial Hydraulics
MACHINE VISION AND APPLICATION (ELECTIVE - III)

M 806-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to machine vision – basics of picture processing, Binary and grey scale images.
Preprocessing concepts – Digital image, Geometrical correction, Grey scale modification,
Sharpening and smoothing images.
Module 2
Edge detection and line finding – Spatial differentiation, extraction of line descriptions.
Types of cameras for Machine vision and their principles.
Module 3
Software for measurement and pattern recognition applications with examples – two and three-
dimensional measurements. Fourier transformation for pattern recognition applications.
Module 4
Image operation studies, interfacing a robot with a vision system. Basics of hardware for vision
system
176
Module 5
Machine vision applications in engineering – dimension measurement, flaw detection, identification,
verification, sorting - co ordinate measuring machines, non-contact type – case studies.
Reference
1. Sonaka M, Hlavac V & Boyle. R. - Image processing, analysis & machine vision
FINITE ELEMENT ANALYSIS (ELECTIVE - III)

M 806-6 3+1+0
Goals:
This course is designed to acquaint students with the basic principles of the finite element method, to
provide experience with its use in engineering analysis and design, and to provide an opportunity to
work with finite element programs used in industry. Computer programming may be involved.
Module 1
Introduction: Structural analysis objectives, static, dynamic and kinematic analysis, skeletal and
continuum structures, modeling of infinite d.o.f system into infinite d.o.f system, basic steps in finite
element problem formulation, general applicability of the method.
Element types and characteristics: Discretization of the domain, basic element shapes, aspect
ratio, shape functions, ganeralised co-ordinates and nodal shape functions, 1D spar and beam
elements, 2D rectangular and triangular elements, axisymmetric elements.
Module 2
Assembly of elements and matrices: Concept of element assembly, global and local co-ordinate
systems, band width and its effects, banded and skyline assembly, boundary conditions, solution of
simultaneous equations, Gaussian elimination and Cholesky decomposition methods, numerical
integration, one and 2D applications.
Module 3
High order and isoparametric elements :One dimensional quadratic and cubic elements, use of
natural co-ordinate system, area co-ordinate system, continuity and convergence requirements, 2D
rectangular and triangular elements.
Module 4
Static analysis: Analysis of trusses and frames, analysis of machine subassemblies, use of
commercial software packages, advantages and limitations.
Module 5
Dynamic analysis: Hamilton`s principle, derivation of equations of equilibrium, consistent and
lumped mass matrices, derivation of mass matrices for 1D elements, determination of natural
frequencies and mode shapes, use of commercial software packages.
Course Outcomes:
1. The students will understand the fundamental principles of finite element theory and applications.
2. The students will be able to built finite element models correctly for various engineering problems
and solve the model using existing finite element codes
177
Text Book
Rao S.S., “The Finite Element Method in Engineering”, 2nd edition, Pergamon Press, Oxford, 1989.
References
1. Robert D. Cook, David S. Malkins and Michael E. Plesha, “Concepts and Application of Finite
Element Analysis”, 3rd edition, John Wiley and Sons, 1989.
2. Chandrupatla T.R. and Belegundu, A. D.,” Introduction to Finite Elements in Engineering”, Pearrson
Pvt. Ltd., 3rd edition 2002.
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE - III)

M 806-7 3+1+0
Goal
To give the detailed information on TQM Tools and Techniques for TQM will be known.
Module 1
Introduction – Leadership Concepts – Customer Satisfaction – employee involvement
Module 2
Continuous Process Improvement – Kaizen, Reengineering, PDSA cycle, Juran Trilogy – Supplier
Partnerships – Quality Cost
Module 3
Statistical Process Control (SPC) – Pareto Diagram, Cause – and – Effect diagram, check sheet,
histogram.
Benchmarking – Quality Function Development – Failure mode and Effect Analysis (FMEA)
Module 4
Total Quality Control (TQC) – Quality Circles – Poka – Yoke- Just–in-Time (JIT)- KANBAN - ‘5-
5’
Module 5
Implementing procedure of TQM - case studies
Learning Objective
1. Student will clear principles and practices of TQM

2. Student will learn tools and Techniques used in TQM.
3. Students will learn the procedure of implementation of TQM
References
1. Besterfield, Total quality Management, Person Education

2. Besterfield, Quality Control, Prentice - Hall
3. Arora K.C, TQM & 1S0 14000, S K Kataria & Sons
4. Jain & Chitale, Quality assurance and Total quality management, Khanna Publishers.
5. Mitra, Quality control & improvement, Person Education
178
MECHANICAL MEASUREMENTS LABORTAORY
M 807 0+0+4
1. Study of use of laser interferometer for calibration of linear measurements

2. Measurement of temperature:
Calibration of thermometers and pyrometers
Preparation and calibration of thermocouple and resistance temperature detectors (TTD &
RTD)
3. Measurement of pressure:
Calibration and use of pressure measuring instruments-Pressure Gauge, Micro manometer, Pressure
Transducers, Dead weight pressure gauge calibrator
4. Measurement of speed:
Calibration and use of tachometers & stroboscope
5. Measurement of linear and angular dimensions:
Micrometer, Vernier caliper, dial gauge feeler gauge, comparator, interferometer, angle gauge, sine
bar, plug gauge and wire gauge
6. Measurement of Flow: Rotameter, watermeter, Anemometer; calibration and use
7. Measurement of surface roughness using subtonic tester
8. Measurement of gear and screw thread profiles- gear tooth calipers, screw thread calipers
9. Measurement of strain and force – calibration of strain gauges and load cells
10. Measurement of vibration – use of vibration pick ups, accelerometer and vibration indicator
11. Acoustic measurements-sound level meter – preparation of noise contours
12. Measurement of PH value
13. Measurement of psychometric properties of air
14. Analysis of Automobile Exhaust gas and Flue gas -Use of instruments like oxygen analyser. Orsat
gas analyzer, Gas chromatography.
PROJECT & SEMINAR

M808 0+0+4
At the beginning of the seventh semester, students must submit an abstract of their undergraduate
project. They must submit a preliminary report at the end of the semester. They will complete the
project in the eighth semester.
Sessional marks for seminar will be out of 25. Sessional marks for project will be out of 75, in which
35 marks will be based on day to day performance assessed by the guide. Balance 40 marks will be
awarded based on the presentation of the project by the students before an evaluation board consists
of a minimum of 3 faculty members including the guide.
VIVA -VOCE
M809
A comprehensive Viva-voce examination will be conducted to assess the student's overall knowledge
in the specified field of engineering. At the time of viva-voce, certified reports of seminar and project
work are to be presented for evaluation.
179
180
SYLLABUS
ELECTRICAL
&
ELECTRONICS
ENGINEERING BRANCH
181
THIRD SEMESTER
182
CMELPA 301 3+1+0
Module 1
Vector Differential Calculus: Differentiation of vector functions – scalar and vector fields –
gradient, divergence and curl of a vector function – their physical meaning – directional derivative –
scalar potential, conservative field – identities – simple problems.
Module 2
Vector Integral Calculus: Line, Surface and Volume Integrals, work done by a force along a path –
Application of Greens theorem, Stokes theorem and Gauss divergence theorem.
Module 3
Function of Complex Variable: Definition of Analytic functions and singular points – Derivation
of C. R equations in Cartesian co-ordinates – harmonic and orthogonal properties – construction of
analytic function given real or imaginary parts – complex potential – conformal transformation of
function like zn, ez, 1/z, Sin z, z + k2/z – bilinear transformation. Cross ratio – invariant property –
simple problems.
Module 4
Finite Differences: Meaning of ∆ , ∇ , E, µ , δ - interpolation using Newton’s forward and
backward formula – central differences – problems using Stirlings formula – Lagrange’s formula and
Newton’s divided difference formula for unequal intervals.
Module 5
Difference Calculus: Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences –
Numerical integration – Newton-Cote’s formula – trapezoidal rule – Simpson’s 1/3 rd and 3/8th rule –
simple problems. Difference eqns. – solutions of difference equations.
References
1. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern.

2. Higher Engg. Mathematics: Grawal B. S, Khanna Publ.
3. Numerical Methods in Science and Engg: M. K Venkataraman, National Publishing Co.
4. Numerical Methods: S. Balachandra Rao and G.K Shantha, University Press.
5. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D. Greenberg, Prentice – Hall
6. Numerical mathematical Analysis: James B. Scarborough, Oxford IBH Publishing Co.
7. Theory and Problems of Vector Analysis: Murray R. Spiegel, Schaum’s outline series – McGraw
Hill.
8. Finite Differences and Numerical Analysis: H.C Saxena, S. Chand & Co.Ltd.
MECHANICAL TECHNOLOGY
E 302 3+1+ 0
Module 1
Properties of Fluids: Pressure, density, bulk modulus, dynamic and kinematic viscosity, surface
tension, capillary – fluid at rest, Pascal’s law, applications, pressure head, vapor pressure, pressure
183
measurement, manometers, gauges and pressure switch – pressure on immersed surfaces – floating
body.
Module 2
Fluid in Motion: Euler’s equation in one dimension. One dimensional incompressible Bernoulli’s
equation, interpretation of Bernoulli’s equation as a energy equation. Flow through Orifices –
measurement of fluid velocity, pitot tube – discharge measurement, venturimeter, orifice meter, Rota
meter and notches.
Flow of compressible fluids through pipes – types of flow – critical Reynolds number – friction
factors for laminar and turbulent flow – hydraulic gradient – minor losses – transmission of power
through pipes.
Module 3
Hydraulic Turbines: Evolution of present day hydraulic turbines from the water wheel –
classification – degree of action – Pelton wheel, Francis and Kaplan Turbines – constructional details
and characteristics only (no problems based on velocity triangles) – governing of turbines – draft
tube – specific speed – cavitation effects.
Module 4
Pumping Machinery: General classification – Dynamic pumps – working of centrifugal pumps,
priming, vapour pressure, wear rings, hydraulic balancing, Classification of impellers, single and
double suction impellers – types of casings – effect of vapour pressure on lifting of liquid – specific
speed – performance pump characteristics: main, operating, ISO efficiency characteristics curves –
NPSH _ multistage pumps – propeller pumps – pump in parallel & series operation – Theory,
efficiency, performance curves & application of self-priming pump, jet pump, airlift pump, slurry
pump & hydraulic ram (description only).
Module 5
Positive Displacement Pumps: reciprocating pumps, effect of vapour pressure on lifting of liquid –
indicator diagram – acceleration head – effect of friction – use of air vessels – work saved – slip –
efficiency – pump characteristics – applications – Cavitation in fluid machines – Rotary pumps:
Gear, Screw, vane, root pumps – rotary axial & rotary radial piston pumps – thory, efficiency,
performance curves – applications (Description only).
References
1. Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines: Abdulla Sheriff, Standard Publ.
2. Fluid Flows Machines: Govinda Rao N.S, TMH.
3. Fluid Mechanics & Hydraulic Machines: Jagadishlal, Metropolitan publ.
4. Fluid Mechanics: Massey B. S, ELBS
5. Centrifugal and Axial Flow Pumps: Stepanoff John A. J, Wiley & Sons.
ELECTRIC CIRCUIT THEORY
E 303 2+2+0
Module 1
Circuit Analysis: Concept of Linearity, Unilateral and Bilateral Systems – Passive and Active
networks – Vector and Phasor – Sources of Energy – Independent and Dependent voltage and
current Sources – Standard input signals – Source transformations - Mesh and Node Analysis –
Driving point Impedance and Transfer Impedance – Driving point Admittance and Transfer
Admittance.
184
Module 2
Coupled Circuits: Self-inductance and Mutual inductance – Coefficient of coupling – dot
convention – Ideal Transformer – Analysis of multi-winding coupled circuits – Analysis of single
tuned and double tuned coupled circuits.
Module 3
Network Theorems: Star-Delta transformations – Super position, Reciprocity, Substitution,
Compensation, Thevinin, Norton, Millman, Tellegen and Maximum power transfer theorems.
Module 4
Three Phase Circuits: Generation of three phase voltages – Phase sequence – Line and Phase
quantities – Analysis of unbalanced loads – Neutral shift – Symmetrical components – Analysis of
unbalanced system – power in terms of symmetrical components.
Module 5
Graph theory: Introduction – Linear graph of a network – Tie-set and cut-set schedule – incidence
matrix – Analysis of resistive network using cut-set and tie-set – Dual of a network.
Introduction to MATLAB and pSPICE – Simulation/Analysis of simple Electric Circuits using
MATLAB and pSPICE.
References
1. Network Analysis: M.E Van Valkanburg

2. Circuits and Networks-Analysis and Synthesis: A. Sudhakar, S.P Shyam Mohan
3. Networks and Systems: D. Roy Choudhary, New Age Intl’.
4. Theory and Problems in Circuit Analysis: T.S.K.V Iyer, TMH
5. Electric Circuits: Edminister J, Schaum’s Outline series
6. Engineering Circuit Analysis: W.H Hayt and J.E. Kemmerly – Mc Graw Hill.
7. Electric ciruit theory: Rajeswaran – Pearson Education
ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY
E 304 3+1+0
Module 1
Review of Vector Analysis – Cartesian coordinate system – The Vector field – dot cross products –
introduction to cylindrical and spherical coordinate systems.
Static Electric Field: Coulomb’s law – electric field intensity – field intensity due to point charge,
line charge, surface charge and volume charge distributions – electric flux – electric flux density –
Gauss’s law and its applications – divergence – Maxwell’s first equation – the Del operator –
Divergence theorem.
Module 2
185
Energy and Potential – Energy expended in moving a point charge in an electric field – Electric
Potential between two points – potential at a point charge – potential at any point – due to discrete as
well as distributed charges – Electric field lines and equipotential contours – electric dipoles –
potential gradient – conservative nature of a field – Laplace and Poisson equations (Derivation only
and not solution).
Module 3
Conductors, Dielectrics and Capacitance – current and current density – continuity equation – point
form of Ohm’s Law – conductor properties – polarisation – dielectric boundary conditions –
capacitance – parallel plate capacitor – capacitance of isolated sphere, spherical shell, coaxial and
cylinders and parallel wires – effect of earth on capacitance - method of images – energy stored in
electrostatic field – dielectric strength and break down.
Module 4
The steady Magnetic Field – Biot-Savart’s law – Ampere’s circuital law - Curl – Stoke’s theorem –
magnetic flux and flux density – the scalar and vector magnetic potentials – magnetic force on a
moving charge – force on a moving charge – force on a current element – force between current
carrying wires – torque on closed circuits – magnetic boundary conditions – self and mutual
inductances – energy stored in a magnetic field – skin effect – inductance of solenoids, torroids and
two-wire transmission lines.
Module 5
Time varying fields – Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction – Motional emf concept of
displacement current – Maxwell’s equations in point form and integral form – wave equation in free
space – applications in transmission lines – Poynting vector and power flow – Poynting theorem –
interpretations –instantaneous, average and complex pointing vector – power loss in conductors.
References
1. Engineering Electromagnetics: William H. Hayt Jr., McGraw Hill
2. Electromagnetics: John D. Karus and Carver K.R, McGraw Hill
3. Field Theory: Gangadhar K. A
4. Theory and Problems of Electromagnetics: Joseph Edminister, schaum’s outline series
5. EMT with applications: B. Premlet
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENTS

E 305 2+1+0
Module 1
Units and Dimensions: SI Units – Dimensions of Electrical quantities – dimensional equations.
Magnetic Measurements: Theory of Ballistic galvanometer – Flux meter – Lloyd Fischer Square.
Module 2
Measurement of Voltage: Potentiometers – slide-wire, Precision slide-wire, Vernier potentiometer
– Calibration of Ammeter, Voltmeter and Wattmeter using potentiometer- AC potentiometer.
Measurement of Resistance: Low, medium, high – Wheatstone bridge- Kelvin’s double bridge –
Insulation Megger – Earth Megger.
Module 3
186
AC Bridges: Maxwell’s bridge – Hay’s bridge, Wien’s bridge, Anderson Bridge, High voltage
Schering Bridge. (Analysis and Phasor diagram required)
Module 4
Instrument Transformers: Principle of Current and Potential transformers – Phasor diagram –
nominal ratio – phase angle error, Ratio error – Constructional features and applications.
Error Analysis in Measurements: Source of error – Instruments errors – Human errors –
Environmental errors – Combination of errors – Mean and variance – Standard deviation – Limits of
error.
Module 5
Illumination measurements: Units of illumination – laws of illumination – polar curves –
Determination of MSCP and MHCP – Integrating meters – Lumer Brodhern type.
Temperature measurement: Thermoelectric effects, laws of thermoelectric circuits – common
thermocouples.
References
1. Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments – Golding E.W, Wheeler and Co., 1991.
2. Electrical and Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements – Sawhney A.K, Dhanpat Rai and
Co., 1992.
3. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and measurement Technique – Albert D. Helfrick and
William D. Cooper, PHI, 1992.
187
POWER GENERATION AND DISTRIBUTION
E 306 2+1+0
Module 1
Economic Aspects: Load Curve- Load duration curve-Maximum demand-Average demand- Load
factor- Diversity factor-Plant use factor.
Cost of Generation: Fixed and Running Charges- depreciation- straight line and sinking fund
method Tariffs- Different types and comparison.
Module 2
Distribution Systems: Feeder- Distributor - Service mains- Radial and Ring mains- AC and DC
Distributors- Calculations of voltage drop due to concentrated loads fed at one or more points-LT
Lines- LT Capacitors – Installation- Size – Connections- Distribution system maintenance
Module 3
Design of Feeder- Kelvin’s law- Limitations- Related ‘Indian Electricity Act’ Rules regarding
generation and supply of electrical energy
Power factor improvement- necessity – methods – economics – capacity of phase advancing plant
Module 4
Underground Cables: Single core and three core cables – Insulation Resistance – Stress and
capacitance of single core cables – Grading – Extra high voltage cables – Localisation of cable faults.
Module 5
High Voltage Generation:
D.C: Rectifier circuits - Voltage multiplier-Cascade circuits-Electrostatic machines
A.C.: Cascade transformers – series resonance circuits
Impulse Voltage: Single stages and cascade circuits
References
1. A Course in Electric Power: Soni M.L., P.V.Gupta

2. A Course in Electric Power: Uppal
3. Electric Power Distribution System: A.S. Pabla
4. Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy: Cotton H
5. High Voltage Engineering: M. S. Naidu, V. Kamaraju
BASIC ELECTRICAL LAB

E 307 0+0+4
1. Study of AC and DC supply systems in Electrical Laboratory

2. Study of PMMC / MI voltmeters, ammeters, electro-dynamometer type watt meters, induction type
energy meters, various loads like resistive, capacitive and inductive.
3. Testing of insulating oils and H.V testing on insulating materials.
4. Determination of voltage-current characteristics of linear resistance and a nonlinear resistance (e.g.
incandescent lamp).
5. Verification of Kirchhoff’s laws using resistive network.
6. Verification of superposition theorem in a resistive circuit with two given DC sources.
7. Verification of Thevinin’s theorem in a DC circuit.
188
8. Verification of generalised reciprocity theorem in a DC circuit.
9. Verification of Maximum Power transfer theorem in a DC circuit
10. Three phase star and delta connection – measurement of line and phase values.
11. Measurement of three phase power at different power factors for balanced and unbalanced loads.
12. Study and measurement of symmetrical components for unbalanced system.
13. Determination of BH characteristics of a magnetic specimen.
14. RLC series and parallel circuit: measurement of current in various branches and verification by
calculation – drawing of phasor diagram.
15. Determination of locus diagram RL and RC circuit.
16. Study of frequency – current relations of given series RLC circuit and condition for series resonance.
17. Measurement of single phase power – (a) Three ammeter method (b) three voltmeter method
18. Measurement of single phase power and energy using wattmeter and energy meter – calculation of
error.
19. Determination of Power and Power factor of a given single phase circuit using watt meter and power
factor meter – power factor improvement of the above circuit.
20. Determination of fusing time versus current characteristics for two specimens – fusing factor – study
of various types of fuses.
21. Measurement of Neutral shift voltage for an unbalanced star connected system.
MECHANICAL LAB
E 308 0+0+4
HYDRAULICS LAB
1. Study of centrifugal pump and components

2. Study of reciprocating pump and components – single cylinder and multi cylinder
3. Study of impulse and reaction turbines
4. Performance characteristics of centrifugal pump
5. Performance characteristics of reciprocating pump
6. Performance characteristics of Pelton Wheel
7. Performance characteristics of Francis turbine
8. Performance characteristics of Kaplan turbine
HEAT ENGINES LAB
1. Load Test (Constant speed test) on petrol engine

2. Load Test (Constant speed test) on diesel engine
3. Variable speed test on petrol engine
4. Variable speed test on diesel engine
5. Cooling curve of I.C engine
6. Performance test on air compressors and blowers
7. Performance test on refrigeration unit
8. Performance test on air-conditioning unit
189
190
FOURTH SEMESTER
191
CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0
Module 1
Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential Equations with constant coefficients –
Finding P.I by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchy’s equations – Linear Simultaneous
equations – simple applications in engineering problems.
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitrary
functions – solution of Lagrange’s Linear equations – Charpit’s method – solution of homogeneous
linear partial differential equation – equation with constant coefficients - solution of one dimensional
wave equation and heat equation using method of separation of variables – Fourier solution of one
dimensional wave equation.
Module 3
Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier transforms – Fourier sine
and cosine transforms – inverse transforms – transforms of derivatives – Convolution Theorem (no
proof) – Parseval’s identity – simple problems.
Module 4
Probability and Statistics: Binomial law of probability – The binomial distribution, its mean and
variance – Poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution – its mean and variance –
fitting of binomial and Poisson distributions – normal distribution – properties of normal curve –
standard normal curve – simple problems in binomial, Poisson and normal distributions.
Module 5
Population and samples: Sampling distribution of mean (σ known) – sampling distribution of
variance, F and Chi square test – Level of significance – Type 1 and Type 2 errors – Test of
hypothesis – Test of significance for large samples – test of significance for single proportion,
difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected).
References

2. Engineering Mathematics Vol.2: M. K Venkataraman, National Publishing Co.
3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations: Ian N. Sneddon, Mc Graw Hill Intl’
4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and Statistics for Engineers: Richard A. Johnson, Pearson education/
PHI.
5. A Text Book of Engg. Mathematics, Vol.2: Bali and Iyengar, Lakshmi Publ. Ltd.
7. Probability and Statistical Inferences: Hogg and Tam’s, Pearson Education Asia.
NETWORK ANAYSIS AND SYNTHESIS

E 402 2+1+0
Module 1
192
Laplace transforms: Properties of Laplace Transforms – basic theorems – Laplace transform of
gate function, impulse function and periodic functions – convolution integral – inverse Laplace
transform – application of Laplace transforms to solution of Network problems.
Module 2
Fourier series: Evaluation of Fourier coefficients – wave form symmetries as related to Fourier
coefficients – exponential form of Fourier series – steady state response to periodic signals.
Fourier Integral: Spectrum envelop for a recurring pulse – the Fourier Integral and Transforms –
Application in Network analysis.
Module 3
Network Functions: Network functions for two port – poles and zeroes of network functions –
restrictions on poles and zeroes for driving point functions and transfer functions. Two port
parameters – short circuit admittance parameter – open circuit impedance parameters – Transmission
parameters – Image parameters and Hybrid parameters. Ideal two port devices – ideal transformer –
Gyrator – negative impedance converter.
Module 4
Filters: Classification of filters – Characteristics of ideal filters – Image impedance – Constant K
low-pass, high-pass, and band-pass filters – m-derived low-pass, high-pass and band-pass filters.
Module 5
Network Synthesis: Realizability concept – Hurwitz property – positive realness – properties of
positive real functions – Synthesis of R-L, R-C and L-C driving point functions – Foster and Cauer
forms.
References
1. Network Analysis: M.E Van Valkenburg

2. Circuits and Networks – Analysis and Synthesis: A. Sudhakar and S.P Shyam Mohan
3. Networks and Systems: D. Roy Choudhary
4. Network Analysis and Synthesis: Franklin F. Kuo – John Wiley & Sons
5. Engineering Circuit Analysis: W.H. Hayt and J.E. Kemmerly – Mc-Graw Hill.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS
E 403 3+1+0
Module 1
Transistor Characteristics: CE, CB, CC Configurations – Biasing – Operating Point – Operating
point instability – thermal runaway – bias stability – Stability factor – stabilization techniques –
Fixed bias – Collector to Base bias – Emitter bias – Voltage divider bias – Stability against variation
in ICO.
FET: Principle of operation and characteristics – biasing FETs – self bias – FET amplifier.
193
UJT: Principle of operation and characteristics.
Module 2
Small Signal Analysis: h-parameter equivalent circuit of a BJT – comparison of CB, CE, and CC
configurations – Determination of h – parameters from static characteristics – current and voltage
gains, input impedance of a basic amplifier in h-parameters.
Multi-stage Amplifiers: RC coupling – Frequency response characteristics – bandwidth – cascading
of amplifiers – gain and bandwidth.
Module 3
Feedback amplifiers: Positive and Negative feedback – types of negative feedback – Typical
circuits –effect of negative feedback in amplifier performance.
Oscillators: Barkhausen criterion – classification of oscillators – Principle of operation of RC phase-
shift, Hartley and crystal oscillators (analysis not required).
Module 4
Multi-vibrators: Principle of Operation and design of astable multi-vibrators – principle of bi-stable
and mono-stable multi-vibrators – circuits.
Sweep generators: Principle of Sweep generation – basic transistor sweep circuit – Equation for
sweep amplitude. Sweep generation using UJT relaxation oscillator circuit.
Wave shaping: Clipping and Clamping circuits using diodes – RC differentiating and Integrating
Circuits.
Module 5
Power Amplifiers: Class A, B, AB and C operation – Efficiency of Class A and B – Push-pull
amplifier – Complimentary Symmetry amplifiers.
References
1. Integrated Electronics: Millman and Halkias, TMH

2. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory: Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Pearson
Education Asia, LPE.
3. Electronic Principles: Albert Paul Malvino, TMH
4. Electronic Devices and Circuits, An Introduction: Allen Mottershead, PHI
ELECTRICAL MACHINES - I
E 404 3+1+0
Module 1
D.C Machines: Generation of D.C – Action of Commutator – constructional details of D.C machine
– magnetic circuit of D.C machines – D.C Armature windings – Induced emf – emf equation –
torque developed in a D.C machine – generator and motor action – back emf – Armature mmf –
magnitude and direction – Air-gap flux distribution curve on load – effect of saturation –
Demagnetising and cross – magnetising armature mmf – variation with brush position –
compensating winding – Commutation – time of commutation – emf in coil undergoing
commutation – reactance emf – effect of brush shift – inter-poles.
194
Module 2
D.C Generator: Types of excitation – separately excited – self excited shunt, series and compound
machines. OCC – Condition for self excitation – field critical resistance – critical speed – Load
characteristics of generators – Load critical resistance – parallel operation of shunt, series and
compound generators – equalizer connection – Losses – power flow diagram – efficiency -
condition for maximum efficiency – applications – special machines – welding generator – Boosters.
Module 3
D.C Motors: Performance characteristics of shunt, series and compound wound motors – starting –
3-point and 4-point starters – Calculation of resistance elements for shunt motor starters – methods
of speed control of shunt, series and compound wound motors – effect of an open field circuit –
power flow diagram – efficiency – testing D.C machine – Swineburne’s test – Hopkinson’s test –
Field’s test – Retardation test.
Module 4
Transformers: Single phase transformer – Constructional details – Core – windings – Insulation –
principle of operation – Inrush of switching currents – emf equation – magnetising current and core
losses – no-load and load operation – Phasor diagram – equivalent circuit – losses and efficiency –
condition for maximum efficiency – voltage regulation – approximate expression for voltage
regulation – harmonics in single phase transformers - Magnetising current wave form – OC and SC
tests – Sumpner’s test.
Module 5
Three phase Transformer: Constructional features of three phase transformers – three phase
connection of single phase transformers – oscillating neutral – tertiary winding – Scott connection –
open delta connection – three phase to six phase connection – equal and unequal turns ratio – load
sharing – distribution transformers – all day efficiency. Autotransformers – saving of copper –
applications - tap-changing transformers - cooling of transformers.
References
1. The performance and Design of Direct Current Machines: A. E. Clayton and N. N Hannock
2. AC Machines: M.G. Say
3. Theory of Alternating Current Machinery: Alexander Langsdorf, TMH
4. Electrical Machines: R.K Rajput
E 405 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to C: The C character set – identifiers and keywords – data types – user defined data
types – constants and variables – declarations – operators – expressions – statements – library input-
output functions
Control statements: if, if-else, switch, goto statements – conditional and comma operators.
Module 2
195
Iterative statements: ‘while’, ‘do-while’, ‘for’ statements – nested loops, break and continue
statements.
Functions: Declarations, definition and access – passing arguments to a function – pass by value and
pass by reference – recursion.
Storage classes: automatic variables – external variables – register variables – scope and life time of
variables.
Module 3
Arrays: single dimensional arrays – multidimensional arrays – definition – initializing arrays-
passing arrays to a function – matrix operations – addition, transpose and multiplication.
Strings: Definition – string handling functions – comparison, concatenation and sorting of strings.
Module 4
Pointers: Introduction – pointer declaration – operations on pointers.
Files: File pointers – data files: opening and closing – reading and writing.
Module 5
Structures and union: definition – initialization – accessing structure members – array of structures
– passing structure to a function – sorting of structures – binary files – reading and writing of data
blocks – union.
Dynamic memory allocation – self referential structures – basic concepts of linked lists – adding and
deleting nodes – command line arguments – macros – C preprocessor.
References
1. Theory and Problems of Programming with C: B.S. Gotterfield, TMH

2. Programming in ANSI C: Balaguruswamy, TMH
3. Programming with ANSI & Turbo C: Ashok Kamthane, Pearson Education Asia
4. The Spirit of C, An Introduction to modern programming: Mullish & Cooper, Jaico Publishing
Co.
5. Programming in C: Stephen G. Kochan, CBS Publ.
6. Computer Programming in C: V. Rajaraman, PHI EEE
7. The Official Borland Turbo C Survival Guide: Miller & Quilci, Wiley Eastern
8. Programming Techniques through C: M. G Venkateshmurthy, Pearson Education
9. Let us C: Yashwant Kanetkar, BPB publ.
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTS

E 406 2+1+0
Module 1
Principle of measuring instruments: Classification – indicating, recording and integrating
instruments – Torque acting on the moving system – deflecting torque – methods of production –
controlling torque – spring and gravity control – damping torque – electromagnetic and air friction
damping.
Constructional features of instruments – torque to weight ratio of the moving system – basic theory
of instruments – characteristics – damping coefficient – under damped – over damped and critically
damped and critically damped instruments.
Module 2
196
Permanent magnet moving coil instruments: – Ammeters and Voltmeters – Torque relationship –
Milliammeters and voltmeters – shunt and multipliers – sensitivity – multimeters.
Moving iron instruments: Attraction and Repulsion types – constructional features – Ammeters and
Voltmeters – Errors and Compensation.
Module 3
Electrodynamometer instruments: Ammeters, Voltmeters and Watt meters – Sensitivity – Torque
to weight ratio – methods of connection of current and potential coils- Errors and compensation –
low power factor wattmeters – single phase wattmeters.
Induction type instruments: Wattmeters and energy meters – single phase and three phase –
constructional features – Theory of operation – Errors and compensation – creep – maximum
demand meters – Trivector meters.
Module 4
Rectifier Instruments: Principle of operation – Electrostatic instruments – voltmeters –
characteristics, applications.
Electronic voltmeters – basic DC voltmeters – basic AC voltmeter using rectifier – basic electronic
multi meter – function generator – RLC meter.
Cathode ray Oscilloscope: Principle – Application – Measurement of Voltage, current, phase and
frequency. Multi-channel oscilloscopes – principle of operation and uses.
Module 5
Instruments for phase, frequency, speed, stroboscopic methods – Resonance frequency meters –
Power factor meters – Synchroscope – phase sequence indicators.
Symbols for instruments – Indian standards specifications Grading of Instruments – Classification.
References
1. Electrical Measurements and Measuring Instruments – Golding E.W, Wheeler and Co., 1991.
2. Electrical and Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements – Sawhney A.K, Dhanpat Rai and
Co., 1992.
3. Modern Electronic Instrumentation and measurement Technique – Albert D. Helfrick and
William D. Cooper, PHI, 1992.
ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS LAB

E 407 0+0+4
1. Extension of instrument range by using

a. Shunt and multipliers
b. Instrument transformers
2. Measurement of 3-phase power using
a. Single watt meter
b. Two watt meters
c. Three-phase watt meter
3. Calibration of flux meter using
a. Standard solenoid
b. Hibbertz magnetic standard
197
4. Determination of BH characteristics
5. Hysterisis loop using CRO
6. Separation of core losses in a given magnetic specimen
7. (a) Study of Multi meter
(b) Measurement of R, L, C using LCR Bridge
8. Measurement of resistance using
a. Wheatstone Bridge
b. Kelvin’s Double bridge
c. Voltmeter and Ammeter – calculation of error due to voltmeter resistance
9. Calibration of ammeter, voltmeter and wattmeter and measurement of resistance using
a. Simple slide-wire potentiometer
b. Vernier Potentiometer
c. Precision slide-wire potentiometer
10. Calibration of ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter and measurement of impedance using A.C
Potentiometer
11. Measurement of self inductance, mutual inductance and coupling coefficient.
12. Calibration of single-phase Energy meter by
a. Direct loading
b. Phantom loading with and without using phase shifting transformer
13. Calibration of three-phase Energy meter by
a. Direct loading
b. Phantom loading
14. Efficiency measurement of Lamps using Lux meter
15. Measurement of displacement using LVDT
16. Measurement of different parameters using Trivectormeter
COMPUTER PROGRAMMING LAB

E 408 0+0+4
Part A
Familiarisation
1. Study of Operating systems like DOS, Windows, Linux etc; Commands for use of files and directories,
internal commands, external commands etc.
2. Familiarisation with word processing packages like MS Word, PageMaker etc.
3. Familiarisation with spread sheet packages like MS Excel.
Part B
Programming Experiments in C
Programming experience in C to cover control structures, functions, arrays, structures, pointers and files in
accordance with syllabus of E 405.
1. Summation of series
2. Preparation of Conversion tables
3. Solution of quadratic equations
4. Array manipulation
5. Functions
6. Recursive functions
7. String manipulation – compare, copy, reverse operations
198
8. Matrix operations
9. Stack operations and simple programs using linked lists
10. Tabulation of marks and declaration of results – input and output using files
11. Creation of numeric and text files, merging and appending of files.
Part C
Application of numerical methods
1. Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: bisections, Newton- Raphson method.

2. Numerical Integration – Simpson’s 1/3rd rule.
199
FIFTH SEMESTER
200
CMELPA 501 3+1+ 0
Module 1
Complex Integration: Line integral – Cauchy’s integral theorem – Cauchy’s integral formula –
Taylor’s series – Laurent’s series – Zeroes and singularities – residues – residue theorem –
evaluation of real integrals using contour integration involving unit circle and semi circle.
Module 2
Numerical Solution of algebraic and transcendental equations: Successive bisection method –
Regula – Falsi method – Newton – Raphson method – solution of system of linear equation by
Jacobi’s iteration method and Gauss – Sidel method.
Module 3
Numerical solution of Ordinary Differential Equations: Taylor’s series method – Euler’s method
– Modified Euler’s method – Runga – Kutta method (IV order) Milne’s predictor-corrector method.
Module 4
z - Transforms: Definition of z – transforms – properties – z-transform of polynomial functions –
trigonometric functions, shifting property, convolution property – inverse transform – solution of
first and second order difference equations with constant coefficients using z-transforms.
Module 5
Linear Programming: Graphical solution – solution using simplex method (non-degenerative only)
– duality in LPT – balanced TP – Vogel’s approximation method – Modi method.
References

2. Numerical Methods in Engg. and Science : Grawal B. S, Khanna Publ.
4. Numerical Methods in Science and Engg.: M. K Venkataraman, National Publishing Co.
5. Quantitative techniques: Theory and Problems: P.C Tulsian and Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education
Asia
6. Complex Variable and Applications: Churchill and Brown, McGrawHill
7. Engineering Mathematics Vol.3: S.Arumugam, A.T Issac and A.Somasundaram, Scitech Publ.
8. Advanced Mathematics for Engineering students Vol-3: S. Narayanan, T.K.M Pillai & G.
Ramanaiah, S.Viswanathan Printers & Publ.
9. Operations Research: Paneer Selvam, PHI
DIGITAL CIRCUITS
E 502 3+1+0
Module 1
Number Systems and Codes: Arithmetic using signed and unsigned numbers- Floating point
representation- Normalized floating point representation-Gray Codes, ASCII and EBCDIC code.
201
Logic gates: Elements of Boolean algebra- Logic operations- AND, OR, NOT, NAND, NOR, XOR
gates- De Morgan’s Theorem- Realisation of combinational circuits using SOP and POS forms - K-
map up to 4 variables- Half adder, full adder circuits. Half subtraction and Full subtraction circuits.
Module 2
Logic Families: DTL, TTL and CMOS families- comparison of characteristics- TTL NAND gate
internal circuit- TTL characteristics- sinking and sourcing- fan-in and fan-out – CMOS
characteristics – CMOS NAND and NOR gates.
Decoders: BCD to decimal, BCD to 7 Segment decoders- Encoders- Multiplexer- Demultiplexer.
Module 3
Sequential Circuits: JK Flip-flops- SR JK, T and D flip-flops- buffers- Tri-state buffers- racing- JK
master-slave FF. Truth table and excitation table- conversion of flip-flops from one type to another.
Asynchronous counters: Ripple counter- disadvantages-Decoding errors-maximum frequency of
the counter – modulo N ripple counter using CLEAR and PRESET inputs. Asynchronous UP-
DOWN counters.
Module 4
Synchronous Counters: Methods to improve counter speed- synchronous serial and parallel
counters – synchronous counter design – modulo N counter design for completely specific count
sequence – lockout, design without lockout – Synchronous UP/DOWN counters. Counter IC 7490.
Module 5
Shift Registers: SISO, PIPO, PISO, PIPO types – Universal shift registers.
Counters using Shift Registers: Ring counter – twisted ring counter- Design for self starting ring
counter.
References
1. Digital Principles and Applications: Malvino & Leach, TMH

2. Digital Fundamentals: Thomas L. Floyd
3. Digital Integrated Electronics: Taub & Schilling, McGraw Hill Intl.
4. Digital Electronics and Microcomputers: R.K. Gaur, Dhanpat Rai & sons
5. Engineering Approach to Digital Design: Fletcher – EEE Edition
COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING
E 503 2+1+0
Module 1
Modulation: Need for modulation, Amplitude modulation–Definition- Mathematical representation
- Frequency spectrum - Power relations. Principle of single side band transmission – Advantages -
Disadvantages. Frequency modulation – Definition – Mathematical representation - Frequency
spectrum, Comparison between FM and AM.
Module 2
202
Transmitter: AM transmitter – high level and low-level systems - functional description of each
block. FM transmitter – FET & BJT modulator.
Receiver: AM receiver – TRF receiver – Limitations. Superhetrodyne receiver – block schematic,
choice of IF, image signal rejection.
Module 3
Television: Composite video signal – synchronizing pulse – blanking pulse-equalizing pulse, Video
BW, Positive and negative modulation, Vestigial side band transmission, Television standards, Block
schematic of monochrome TV transmitter and receiver.
Colour Television: Compatibility, characteristics of colour transmission and reception, luminance,
hue & saturation, colour difference signal, I & Q signals, frequency interleaving, colour sub carrier.
Module 4
Radar: Basic radar system, radar range equation – performance factors, Pulsed radar, Continuous
wave radar – advantages-limitations-applications, CW radar, MTI radar system. Radio navigational
aids – ILS – GCA.
Module 5
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION: Geo-synchronous satellites – advantages and disadvantages,
uplink & downlink, multiple access techniques – Basic principles of FDMA, TDMA, DA-FDMA,
DA-TDMA.
References
1. Electronic Communication Systems: George Kennedy, TMH

2. Electronic Communication Systems: Wayne Tomasi, Pearson Education, LPE
3. Monochrome and Colour Television: R.R Gulati, Wiley Eastern
4. Introduction to Radar Systems: Skoluik, McGraw Hill Intl.
5. Satellite Communications: D.C Agarwal, Khanna
6. Radio Engineering: Mithal, Khanna
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT AND ENGINEERING ECONOMICS

E 504 3+2+0
PART A: INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Module 1
Modern Concepts of Management: Scientific management – functions of management – planning
– organizing – staffing – directing – motivating – communicating – coordinating – controlling –
Organisational structures – line, line and staff, and functional relationships – Span of control –
delegation – Management by objectives.
Module 2
Personnel Management: Objectives and functions of personnel management – recruitment –
selection and training of workers – labour welfare – industrial fatigue – Industrial disputes – Trade
unions – Quality circles.
203
Formation of Companies: Proprietary – Partnership – joint stock companies – public sector – joint
sector and cooperative sector.
Module 3
Marketing Management: Pricing – Promotion – Channels of distribution – Market research –
Advertising.
Production Management: Batch and mass production – inventory control – EOQ – Project
planning by PERT /CPM – Construction of network (Basic Ideas only)
References
1. Industrial Management: O.P. Khanna

2. Industrial Management: K.K Ahuja
3. Marketing Management: Philip Kotler
PART B: ENGINEERING ECONOMICS

Module 4
Theory of demand and supply – price mechanisms – factors of production – land, labour, capital and
organisation – National income – Difficulties in estimation – Taxation – Direct and indirect taxes –
Progressive and regressive – black money – inflation – Causes and consequences.
Module 5
Indian Financial System – Reserve bank of India – Functions – Commercial banking system –
Development financial institutions – IDBI –ICICI – SIDBI – IRBI- NABARD – Investment
institutions – UTI – Insurance companies – Indian capital market – Stock market – Functions – Role
of the public sector – Privatisation – Multinational corporations and their impact on the Indian
economy.
References
1. Indian Economy: A.N Agarwal

2. Modern Economic Theory: K.K. Dewett
3. Principles of Economics: K.P.M. Sundharam & M.C Vaish.
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
E 505 2+1+0
Module 1
Operational Amplifiers: Differential amplifier – block diagram of a typical op amp –
characteristics of an ideal op-amp – definitions of CMRR – slew rate – input offset voltage –
differential input resistance – input voltage range – SVRR – large signal voltage gain – output
voltage swing – output resistance – open-loop configurations – disadvantages – closed-loop
configurations – non inverting amplifier – voltage follower – inverting amplifier – summing and
scaling amplifier – integrator – differentiator – logarithmic amplifier.
Module 2
Basic Comparator: Astable and mono stable multivibrators - Schmitt trigger – zero crossing detector
– precision rectifier – peak detector – sample and hold circuit – function generator (no analysis).
Module 3
204
Active filters: First order low pass filter, high pass filter, band pass filter, band reject filter (twin T
notch filter). D/A converter – binary weighted resistor type – ladder type – A/D converter –
simultaneous A/D converter – counter type – successive approximation converter – dual-slope
converter – Digital voltmeter.
Module 4
Phase-locked-loop: Basic principles of PLL – block diagram – transfer characteristics –
applications of PLL as FM demodulator, AM demodulator and frequency multiplier.
Module 5
Timer: The 555 timer – functional block diagram – astable and mono-stable operation of 555 timers.
Regulated Power Supplies: Zener voltage regulator – series voltage regulator using transistors
(analysis not required) – Series op-amp regulator – IC voltage regulator – 723/317 general purpose
switching regulator.
References
1. Op-amp and Linear Integrated Circuits: Ramakant Gayakwad, Pearson Education Asia, 4/e, LPE
2. Integrated Electronics: Millman and Halkias
3. Integrated Circuits: Botkar K.R
4. Linear IC: Roy Choudhary
5. Op-amp and Linear IC: Robert F. Coughlin
6. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory: Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky
POWER ELECTRONICS
E 506 2+1+ 0
Module 1
Power Semiconductor Devices: Power diodes, Power Transistors, Power MOSFET, IGBTs, Diac,
Triac, GTOs – static characteristics and principle of operation.
SCRs: Static and dynamic characteristics – two transistor analogy – gate characteristics
Module 2
SCR ratings and specifications - Device protection – heat sink selection – series and parallel
operation of SCRs.
SCR Triggering circuits – R, RC, UJT triggering circuits – diac triggering circuit – single pulse,
continuous pulse carrier frequency triggering – pulse transformer – amplification and isolation of
SCR gate pulses.
Module 3
Phase control: single phase half wave controlled rectifier circuit – single phase full wave controlled
rectifier circuit – R, RL Loads – free wheeling – half controlled and fully controlled bridge with
continuous and steady current – Expression for output voltage – wave forms – active and reactive
power – effect of source inductance – line commutated inverter – 3-phase half wave and full wave
controlled rectifier – expression for output voltage.
205
Module 4
Commutation of SCRs – classification of commutation schemes
Inverters: series and parallel inverters – single phase and three phase bridge inverters (schematic
diagrams and wave forms only) – Mc Murray Inverter – Basic Principle of PWM.
Module 5
Choppers: Basic principle – Classification – Type A, B, C, D and E. (Analysis not required)
Basic Principle of Cycloconverters.
Control Circuits: Generation of control pulses – block schematic of firing circuits – linear and
cosine comparison – Digital firing scheme.
References
1. Power Electronics – Circuits, Devices and Applications, M.H. Rashid, PHI/Pearson Edn.
2. Power Electronic Systems – Theory and Design, Jai P. Agarwal, Pearson Education Asia, LPE
3. Power Electronics, P.S Bhimbhra, Khanna publ., New Delhi
4. A Text Book of Power Electronics, S.N Singh, Dhanpat Rai & Co, 2000
5. Power Electronics – Converters, Applications and Design, Mohan N, Undeland T.M and Robbins
W.P, John Wiley -1989
6. Power Electronics, Harish C. Rai, Galgotia Publ.
206
ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB - I
E 507 0+0+4
D.C. Machines
1. Study of 3-point and 4-point starters for D.C machines – mode of connection – protective arrangements
2. OCC of self and separately excited D.C machines – critical resistances of various speeds. Voltage built-
up with a given field circuit resistance. Critical speed for a given field circuit resistance
3. Load test on shunt and compound generator – deduce external, internal and armature reaction
characteristics. Find load critical resistance.
4. Characteristics of D.C series machine as motor and generator.
5. Swineburne’s and retardation test on D.C machines.
6. Brake test on D.C shunt, compound motors and determination o characteristics.
7. Hopkinson’s test on a pair of D.C machines.
8. Separation of losses in a D.C machine.
9. Field’s test on D.C machine.
Transformers
10. Polarity, transformation ratio, tests of single phase units and star-delta combination for 3-phase
operation.
11. O.C and S.C tests on single phase transformers – calculation of performance using equivalent circuit –
efficiency, regulation at unity, lagging and leading power factors. Verification by direct loading.
12. Sumpner’s test on single phase transformers.
13. O.C and S.C tests on three-phase transformers.
14. Scott connection – check for 2 phase – predetermination of primary current for balanced and
unbalanced secondary currents – verification by actual loading.
15. Parallel operation and load sharing of two single phase dissimilar transformers.
16. Separation of losses of single phase transformer into Hysterisis and eddy current losses.
17. Paralleling of Three-phase transformers and load sharing.
18. Auto transformer – equivalent circuit.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS LAB

E 508 0+0+4
1. Design and testing of clipping, clamping, RC integrator and differentiator circuits – Display of
Transfer characteristics on CRO.
2. Design and testing of rectifier circuits – Half wave – Full wave (centre – tapped and bridge) circuits.
Filter circuits.
3. Zener regulator design and testing.
4. BJT, FET and UJT characteristics.
5. Design and testing of CE amplifier – frequency response.
6. Design and testing of RC coupled and feedback amplifiers.
7. FET amplifier.
8. Sweep circuits – UJT and BJT based sweep generators – sweep circuit using constant current source
(BJT).
9. Design and Testing of RC phase-shift Oscillator and LC Oscillator.
10. Design and Testing of Astable and Bi-stable Multi-vibrators.
11. Relay driving circuit using transistors.
207
12. Study of IC power amplifiers.
Optional
Simulation of the above circuits using EDA tools like pSPICE.
(Any experiment relevant to E 403 may be added)
References
1. Electronic Principles: A.P. Malvino – TMH

2. Electronic Devices: Floyd – Pearson Education, LPE
3. Electronic Devices and Circuit Theory: Robert L. Boylestad and Louis Nashelsky, Pearson
Education Asia, LPE.
208
SIXTH SEMESTER
209
CONTROL SYSTEMS - I
E 601 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Concept of a system – control system – open-loop system – levels of sophistication in
a control system – mathematical model of physical systems – plant representation – transfer
functions – block diagrams – signal flow graphs – effects of feedback on parameter variations,
system dynamics and disturbance signals.
Module 2
Time response analysis: Type and order of a system – time domain analysis of systems – typical
test input signals – response of first order systems to unit step, unit ramp, and unit impulse signals –
step response of second order systems – performance characteristics of feed back control systems –
time domain behaviour from pole-zero plot
Steady state errors and error constants – generalized error constants – improvement of performance
by derivative control, integral control, PID control.
Module 3
Concepts of Stability: BIBO stability – asymptotic stability – Routh Hurwitz stability criterion –
relative stability – root locus technique – construction of root loci – root contours – systems with
transportation lag.
Module 4
Frequency response analysis: Correlation between time and frequency response – polar plots –
bode plots – relative stability – phase margin and gain margin – minimum and non-minimum phase
systems.
Module 5
Stability in Frequency domain: Nyquist stability criterion – relative stability.
Control System Components: synchros – resolvers – rotating amplifiers – magnetic amplifier –
Amplidyne – Tachogenerators – DC and AC servo motors – Gyroscopes – stepper motor.
References
1. Modern Control Engineering: Katsuhiko Ogatta, Pearson Education Asia

2. Analog and Digital Control System Design: Chi Tsong Chen, Oxford University Press
3. Modern Control Systems: Dorf and Bishop, Addison Wesley, LPE, 9th Ed.
4. Control System Design & Principles: M. Gopal, TMH
ELECTRICAL MACHINES - II
E 602 3+1+0
Module 1
210
Synchronous Machines: Types – selection of alternators – constructional features of cylindrical and
salient pole machines.
Armature windings: different types – phase grouping – single and double layer, integral and
fractional slot winding – emf equation – distribution factor – coil span factor – tooth harmonic
ripples – skewed slots – harmonics, elimination of harmonics – revolving magnetic field.
Module 2
Armature Reaction – Synchronous reactance – circuit model of synchronous machine.
Regulation – predetermination – emf, mmf and potier methods, saturated synchronous reactance –
Phasor diagrams – short circuit ratio – two-reaction theory – Phasor diagram – slip test –
measurement of Xd, Xq, losses and efficiency of synchronous machines.
Module 3
Parallel operation of alternators – load sharing – synchronising power and torque – governor
characteristics – method of synchronising – synchroscope.
Synchronous Motor: Principles of operation – torque and power relationships – Phasor diagram –
hunting in synchronous machines – damper winding – starting of synchronous motors.
Module 4
Synchronous machines connected to infinite bus – power angle characteristics of cylindrical rotor
and salient pole machines – reluctance power – steady state stability limit – V-curves – inverted V-
curves – O-curves – synchronous condenser – symmetrical short circuit of unloaded alternators –
steady state, transient and sub-transient reactance – current variation during short circuit.
Module 5
Generalised Machine Theory: Dynamic representation of generalised machines – formation of emf
equation – expression of power and torque – representation of DC machines – synchronous machine
and Induction motor.
Excitation systems: different types – comparison – exciter ceiling voltage – excitation limits –
exciter response – methods of increasing the response of an exciter.
Brushless Alternators: Principle of operation constructional features – excitation methods – voltage
regulation.
References
1. The performance and Design of AC Machines: M.G. Say
2. Theory of Alternating Current Machinery: Alexander Langsdorf
3. A course in Electrical Engg. Vol.2: C.L Dawes
4. Power System Stability – Vol. 3: E.W Kimbark
5. Electrical Machines: P.S Bhimbra
6. Generalised Theory of Electrical machines: P. S Bhimbra
7. Theory and performance Electrical Machines: J.B Gupta
ELECTRICAL POWER TRANSMISSION

E 603 3+1+0
Module 1
Transmission Line Constants: Resistance – skin effect – proximity effect.
Inductance of single phase line – inductance of three phase line with symmetrical and unsymmetrical
spacing – transposed line.
211
Capacitance of single phase line – capacitance of three phase line with symmetrical and
unsymmetrical spacing – transposed lines – effect of earth on line capacitance – geometric mean
distance – geometric mean radius
Module 2
Overhead Lines: Mechanical characteristics - Conductor – bundled conductors – line supports –
spacing between conductors – sag and tension calculations – effect of ice and wind - sag at the time
of erection – vibration and dampers
Line insulators: Different types – pin type – suspension type – strain type – potential distribution of
a string of suspension insulator – string efficiency – equalization of potential – testing of insulators
Module 3
Performance of Transmission Lines: Classification of transmission lines – analysis of short lines-
medium line by nominal pi and T methods – rigorous solution of long lines – A, B, C, D constants –
Ferranti effect – losses in an open circuited line – power flow through transmission lines
Voltage Control: Different methods – static capacitor – tap changing transformer – booster
transformer – phase modifier – power circle diagram – calculation
Module 4
Corona: Critical disruptive voltage – visual critical voltage – power loss – factors affecting –
methods to reduce corona – radio interference effect
Substations: Types - general layout - neutral grounding – resistance earthing – reactance earthing –
arc suppression coil earthing – grounding transformer - Power system earthing - measurement of
earthing resistance
Module 5
Extra High Voltage Transmission: Need for EHV transmission – limitations of EHV AC
transmission – requirements of EHV lines - reactive compensation in EHV systems – EHV systems
in India.
HVDC Transmission - Advantages and disadvantages – Graetz circuit – inversion – kinds of d.c.
links – economic distance of DC transmission
References
1. Modern Power System Analysis: Nagrath and Kothari, TMH
2. Electrical Power Systems: C. L. Wadhwa, New Age Int’l
3. Electrical Power: Uppal
4. A Course in Electrical Power Systems: Soni, Gupta, Bhatnagar
5. HVDC Power Transmission System: K. R. Padiyar
6. Power System Analysis: Bergen, Pearson, 2/e
DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING

E 604 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Elements of a Digital Processing System - Advantages of Digital over Analog Signal
Processing. Applications of DSP.
Discrete-Time Signals and Systems: Elementary Discrete-Time Signals- Classification of Discrete-
Time Systems - LTIV systems- -Causality, Stability.
212
Frequency Domain representation of discrete-time signals: Fourier transform of a sequence -
properties of Fourier Transforms.
Module 2
Discrete Fourier Transform: Properties of DFT-Linearity-shifting property, symmetry property,
Convolution of a sequence. Fast Fourier Transform Decimation-in time radix- two FFT- decimation
in frequency radix-two FFT.
Module 3
Review of z transforms: inverse z-transform - properties of z- transforms.
Realisation of digital filters: Direct and cascaded structures for FIR filters - direct and cascade and
parallel structures for IIR filters.
Module 4
FIR filters: characteristics of practical frequency selective filters-characteristics of FIR filters with
linear phase - design of linear phase FIR filters using windows- rectangular, Hamming, Hanning and
Kaiser windows, FIR filter design using frequency sampling.
Module 5
IIR filters: Properties of IIR filters-design of IIR digital filters from analog filters-Butterworth
design-Chebyshev design - impulses invariant transformation-Bilinear transformation.
DSP chips: TMS 320C family - features and block schematic of simplified architecture.
References
1. Digital Signal Processing – Alan V. Oppenheim and Ronald W. Schafer, Pearson Education
Asia, LPE
2. Digital Signal Processing - John G. Proakis and Dimitris G. Manolakis
3. Digital Signal Processing: A Practical Approach – Emmanuel C. Ifeachor and Barrie W. Jervis,
Pearson Education Asia, LPE
4. An Introduction to Digital Signal Processing: Johny R. Johnson
MICROPROCESSORS AND APPLICATIONS

E 605 3+1+ 0
Module 1
Evolution of Processors – single chip microcomputer – Intel 8085 Microprocessor – signals –
architecture of 8085 – ALU – register organisation – timing and control unit – microprocessor
operations – instruction cycle – fetch, decode and execute operation – T-state, machine cycle and
instruction cycle – timing diagram of opcode fetch, memory read, I/O read, memory write and I/O
write cycles – wait state.
Module 2
Instruction set of 8085: Classification of instructions – different addressing modes – writing
assembly language programs – typical examples like 8 bit and 16 bit arithmetic operations, finding
213
the sum of a data array, finding the largest and smallest number in a data array, arranging a data
array in ascending and descending order, finding square from look-up table. Counters and time
delays – delay using one register, two registers and register pair.
Module 3
Stack and Subroutines: Stack pointer – stack operations – call-return sequence – examples
Interrupts of 8085: restart instructions – interrupt structure of 8085 – vectored locations – SIM and
RIM instructions – software and hardware polling.
Module 4
Memory interfacing - ROM and RAM – interfacing I/O devices – address space partitioning –
memory mapped I/O and I/O mapped I/O schemes – interfacing I/Os using decoders – the 8212 I/O
device – interfacing LED and matrix keyboard – programmable peripheral devices – 8155 and 8255,
block diagram, programming simple input and output ports.
Module 5
Different data transfer schemes: synchronous and asynchronous data transfer – programmed and
interrupt driven data transfer.
Applications of microprocessor in system design: interfacing ADC 0808 – interfacing DAC 0800.
DMA controller 8257-Interfacing of stepper motor – interfacing of 8279 keyboard /display
controller- 8275 CRT controller.
Architecture and operation of 8086.
References
1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications: R.S. Gaonkar, Penram Intl’

2. Fundamentals of Microprocessors and Microcomputers: B. Ram, Dhanpat Rai and Sons
3. 0000 to 8085: Introduction to Microprocessors and Engineers: P.K Ghosh, PHI
4. Microprocessors and Digital Systems: Douglas V. Hall, McGraw Hill
5. Introduction to Microprocessors: A.P Mathur, TMH
6. Digital Electronics and Microprocessors: Malvino, TMH
214
COMPUTER ORGANISATION
E 606 2+0+ 0
Module 1
Introduction: Functional block diagram of digital computer – processor organization – typical
operation cycle: fetch, decode and execute – microprogrammed Vs hardwired control (basic
concepts only) – bus structures.
Module 2
Arithmetic and Logic unit: Adders- serial and parallel adders- fast adders- carry look ahead adder-
2’s complement adder/subtractor- multiplication and division operations (description using block
schematic diagrams only)-design of Logic unit-one stage ALU.
Module 3
Memory System: memory parameters – main memory – cache memory – auxiliary memory –
semiconductor RAM – Static RAM –Dynamic RAM – ROM – PROM – EPROM – E2PROM –
Flash Memory.
Programmable Logic Devices: PAL, PLA, FPLA, Applications.
Module 4
Memory Organisation: Internal Organisation of memory chips – cache memory – mapping
functions – direct mapping – associative mapping – set associative mapping – memory interleaving –
Hit and miss – virtual memory – organization – Address translation.
Module 5
Input/Output Organisation: access to I/O Devices – Interrupts – Enabling and Disabling of
Interrupts – Handling multiple devices –Buses – Synchronous and Asynchronous buses.
Data Communication interfaces and standards: parallel and serial ports – RS232, RS423 serial
bus standards –GPIB IEEE488 Instrumentation bus standard- PCI, SCSI, USB (basic ideas only).
References
1. Computer Organisation: V. Hamacher – Mc Graw Hill

2. Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals: M. Morris Mano
3. 2/e Pearson Computer Organisation and Design: P. Pal Chaudhari – PHI
4. Digital Computer Fundamentals: Thomas Bastee
DIGITAL LAB
E 607 0+0+4
1. Study of TTL gates

2. Characteristics of TTL gates
3. Realisation of sequential circuits
4. Study of SR. JK, D, T and JK Master-Slave Flip Flops
5. Study of seven segment display
6. Testing of different shift registers
7. Design and Testing of decoders and encoders
8. Design and testing of astable and mono-stable multivibrator using 555
9. Design and testing asynchronous and synchronous counters and modulo N counter
215
10. Design and testing of counters using shift registers
11. Realisation of ADC and DAC
12. Testing of arithmetic circuits using op-amps
13. Design and testing of square wave generation using op-amps
14. Study of IC Regulator Power supplies
SYSTEMS LAB
E 608 0+0+4
1. 8085 assembly language programming experiments

a. 8-bit and 16 bit arithmetic operations
b. Arranging a data array in descending and ascending order
c. BCD to binary and binary to BCD conversion
d. Finding square root of a number
e. Finding out square root of a number using look-up table
f. Setting up time delay and square wave generation
g. Interfacing of LEDs, 7 segment displays
h. Traffic control signals
i. Interfacing of stepper motor
j. Interfacing of ADC
k. Interfacing of DAC
l. Generation of firing pulses for SCR.
m. Interfacing of Power devices
n. Interfacing LCD displays
2. VCO circuits using IC 566, 4046B etc.
3. PLL systems using IC 565, 4046B etc.
4. Multiplexed Displays
216
SEVENTH SEMESTER
217
ELECTRICAL MACHINES - III
E 701 3+1+ 0
Module 1
Three phase Induction Motor: Construction – squirrel cage and slip-ring motor – principle of
operation – slip and frequency of rotor current – mechanical power and developed torque – Phasor
diagram – torque slip curve – pull out torque – losses and efficiency.
No load and locked rotor tests – equivalent circuit – performance calculation from equivalent circuit
– circle diagram – operating characteristics from circle diagram – cogging and crawling and methods
of elimination
Module 2
Starting of three phase squirrel cage induction motor – direct online starting – auto transformer –
star-delta starting – starting of slip-ring motor – design of rotor rheostat – variation of starting torque
with rotor resistance.
Speed control – pole changing – rotor resistance control – frequency control – static frequency
conversion – Applications of Induction machines – single phasing – analysis using symmetrical
components.
Module 3
Induction Generator: Theory – Phasor diagram – equivalent circuit - Synchronous Induction
motor: – construction – rotor winding connections – circle diagram – pulling into step.
Single phase Induction motor: revolving field theory – equivalent circuit – torque slip curve –
starting methods – split phase, capacitor start-capacitor run and shaded pole motors.
Module 4
Single phase Series Motor: Theory – Phasor diagram – circle diagram – compensation and interpole
winding – Universal motor
Repulsion Motor: torque production – Phasor diagram – compensated type of motors – repulsion
start and repulsion run induction motor – applications
Reluctance motor – Hysterisis motor
Module 5
Deep bar and double cage induction motor – equivalent circuit – torque slip curve – Commutator
motors – principle and theory – emf induced in a commutator winding - - Poly-phase commutator
motors – three phase series and shunt type – Schrage motor – characteristics – applications – use of
commutator machines as frequency converters, phase advancers – expedor type and susceptor type –
Walker and Scherbius advancers – Linear Induction motor – operation and application
References
1. Performance and Design of AC machines – M.G Say

2. Theory of Alternating Current machines - Alexander Lagnsdorf
3. A.C Commutator motor – Openshaw Taylor
4. Alternating Current machines – Puchstein & Lloyd
218
ELECTRICAL DRIVES AND CONTROL
E 702 2+1+0
Module 1
DC motors: Methods of Speed control – single phase rectifiers with motor load- single phase fully
controlled bridge rectifier drives – half controlled bridge rectifier drives – freewheeling with
regeneration – speed torque characteristics – power in load and source circuits
Module 2
3 Phase fully controlled bridge rectifier drives – free wheeling, freewheeling with regeneration –
Dual converter fed DC motor drives – chopper fed drives – single, two and four quadrant chopper
drives
Module 3
(Qualitative treatment only)
Speed control of 3 Phase induction motors – stator voltage control – principle – controller
configurations – operation and applications
Slip power recovery scheme – principle – static Kramer’s drive – static Scherbius’ drive –
applications
V/f control – constant torque and constant power control
Module 4
Voltage Source Inverter – Application to induction motor drives – v/f, e/f, flux weakening schemes
of control – applications
PWM inverter drive
Current Source Inverter – application to induction motor drives – operation under fixed frequency –
operation under variable frequency – applications
Module 5
Speed control of synchronous motors – adjustable frequency operation of synchronous motors –
principles of synchronous motor control – Voltage Source Inverter Drive with open loop control –
self controlled synchronous motor with electronic commutation – self controlled synchronous motor
drive using load commutated thyristor inverter.
Principle of Vector control
References
1. Power Electronic Control of AC motors – J.M.D Murphy and F.G Turnbill, Pergumon Press
1988
2. Power Semiconductor controlled Drives – G.K Dubey, Prentice hall, 1989
3. Modern Power Electronics and AC Drives – Bose B.K, Pearson Education Asia -2002
4. Electric Drives – N.K De and P.K Sen, PHI New Delhi 2001
5. Power Electronics – M.D Singh and K.B Khanchandani, TMH, 1998
6. Mohammad A and E.L Sharkaw – Fundamentals of Electric Drives – Thomson Learning
7. Power Semiconductor Drives – Vedam Subramaniam, TMH
219
UTILISATION OF ELECTRICAL POWER
E 703 2+1+0
Module 1
Electric Drives: Advantages of Electric drives – factors affecting choice of motors – mechanical
characteristic of DC and AC motors – motors for particular applications llike textile mill, steel mill,
paper mill, mine, hoists, cranes – size and rating of motors.
Electrical Braking – plugging – dynamic and regenerative braking – energy returned to the mains
Module 2
Electric Traction: Advantages and disadvantage - speed time curves – analysis using trapezoidal
speed time curve - mechanics of train movement – tractive effort – specific energy consumption –
factors affecting specific energy consumption - train resistance – adhesive weight – coefficient of
adhesion - traction motor & characteristics
Series-parallel control of D.C. series motor – shunt and bridge transition - energy saving by series
parallel control.
Module 3
Electric Heating and Welding: Electric heating – resistance types – design of heating element –
induction heating – types of high frequency heating – dielectric heating – methods of high frequency
generation – direct and indirect arc furnaces – power supply and control for different types of arc
furnaces – application.
Electric welding – resistance welding – arc welding – electronic welding control
Module 4
Illumination: Review of definitions and laws of illumination – requirements of good lighting -polar
curves – Rousseau’s construction - lighting calculation – design of interior and exterior lighting
system - factory lighting – flood lighting – street lighting.
Refrigeration and Air Conditioning: Types of refrigeration and air conditioning systems –
refrigerants – no frost refrigeration – trouble shooting – working of electrical systems – protection of
motors.
Module 5
Energy Management: Necessity for Energy Management – Energy Saving – adopting non-
conventional sources – Energy Management techniques (case study) applied to 1) Residential
Buildings, 2) Industries/Organisations – Energy auditing
References
1. Utilisation of Electrical Energy: Openshaw Taylor

2. A Course in Electrical Power: Soni Gupta
3. Generation, Distribution & Utilization: C.L Wadhwa
4. Utilisation of Electric Power: N.V Suryanarayana, New Age Int’l.
5. Energy Conservation Handbook: Utility publication
220
CONTROL SYSTEMS - II
E 704 3+1+0
Module 1
Compensation and design of Control Systems: cascade compensation – lag, lead and lag-lead
compensators – frequency domain methods – Bode plot method – Root-locus methods
Module 2
Digital Control Systems: the process of sampling – sample and hold circuits – Review of z
transforms and its properties – solving difference equation by z transform methods – inverse z
transform – the pulse transfer function – response between sampling instants – system characteristic
equation – Jury’s stability test.
Module 3
Non-Linear Control Systems: Common physical non linearities – the phase plane method – basic
concepts – describing functions of saturation, dead zone non linearities – stability analysis using
describing functions.
Module 4
State Variable Approach: state space representation – block diagram representation of linear
system in state variable form – non uniqueness of the set of state variables – Eigen values of an n X n
matrix – eigen vectors – transfer function – solution of homogeneous state equation – state transition
matrix.
Module 5
State equations from transfer function – decomposition of transfer function – controllability and
observability - pole placement compensation – state variable approach to discrete data system –
vector matrix difference equation – solution of the general linear time invariant systems – vector
matrix difference equation
References
1. Modern Control Engineering – Katsuhiko Ogatta, Pearson Education Asia/PHI

2. Modern Control Systems –Dorf and Bishop, Pearson Education Asia
3. Analog and digital Control System Design – Chi Tsong Chen, Oxford University Press
4. Discrete Time Control of Dynamic Systems – Katsuhiko Ogatta, Pearson Education Asia
5. Digital Control of Dynamic Systems – G.F Franklin, J. David Powell and Michael Workman,
Pearson Education Asia
SYSTEM DESIGN WITH MICROCONTROLLERS

E 705 2+1+0
221
Module 1
Microcontrollers and Microprocessors - Comparison.
Intel 8051: Architecture–Block diagram-Oscillator and Clock-Internal Registers-Program Counter-
PSW-Register Banks-Input and Output ports-Internal and External memory, Counters and Timers,
Serial data I/O- Interrupts-SFRs.
Module 2
Programming of 8051: Instruction syntax-Types of instructions–Moving data-Arithmetic
Instructions-Jump and Call Instructions-Logical Instructions-Single Bit Instructions.
Arithmetic programs. Timing subroutines –Software time delay- Software polled timer- Addressing
Modes
Module 3
I/O Programming: Timer/Counter Programming-Interrupts Programming- Timer and external
Interrupts- Serial Communication- Different character transmission techniques using time delay,
polling and interrupt driven-Receiving serial data – polling for received data, interrupt driven data
reception.
Module 4
Microcontroller system design: External memory and Memory Address Decoding for EPROM and
RAM. Interfacing keyboard. 7 segment display and LCD display. Interfacing of ADC (0808) and
DAC (808) to 8051.
Module 5
Designing a stand alone Microcontroller system: Typical system design examples (Block-
Diagram level only) - Data acquisition system- Measurement of frequency - Temperature control
Introduction to PLCs: Basic configuration of PLCs
Text Books
1. The 8051 Microcontroller and Embedded Systems – Muhammad Ali Mazidi and Janice Gillispie
Mazidi, Pearson Education Asia.
2. The 8051 Microcontroller – Architecture, Programming and Applications – Kenneth J. Ayala,
Penram International Publishing (India), Second Ed.
Reference
1. Intel Data Book on MCS 51 family
Web Reference
1. www.intel.com
ELECTIVE - I
E 706 3+1+0
List of Electives
222
E 706.1 CMELR Optimisation Techniques (Common to all branches)
E 706.2 HVDC Engineering
E 706.3 Neural Networks
E 706.4 Object Oriented Programming
E 706.5 Biomedical Instrumentation
Note
New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields of technology. The name of
the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the University before the course is offered.
OPTIMIZATION TECHNIQUES
CMLRTA 706-1
Module l
Classical optimization techniques: Single variable optimization - Multivariable optimization with
no constraints - Hessian matrix - Multivariable saddle point - Optimization with equality constraints -
Lagrange multiplier method.
Module 2
Constrained multivariable optimization: Multivariable optimization with inequality constraints -
Kuhn-Tucker conditions - Convex programming problem - Quadratic programming.
Module 3
One-dimensional unconstrained minimization: Elimination methods - unrestricted search method -
Fibonacci method -Interpolation methods - Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation methods.
Module 4
Unconstrained minimization: Gradient of a function - Steepest descent method - Newton's method
-Powells method - Hooke and Jeeve's method.
Module 5
Integer - Linear programming problem: Gomory's cutting plane method - Gomory's method for all
integer programming problems, mixed integer programming problems.
References
2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering - A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla,
3. Principles of Operations Research for Management - F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena,
4. Operation Research an introduction - H. A Taha, Eastern Economy Edition.
HVDC ENGINEERING
E 706-2
Module 1
Introduction: Comparison of AC, DC transmission – Description of DC transmission systems –
modern trends in thyristor valves – Pulse number of converters – choice of converter configuration –
Review of Graetz circuit – Valve rating – Transformer rating – Simplified analysis of Graetz circuit
without overlap only.
223
Module 2
HVDC System Control: principles of DC link control – converter control characteristics – system
control hierarchy – firing angle control – individual phase control and equidistant phase control –
comparison – advantages and disadvantages – current and extinction angle control – starting and
stopping of DC link – power control
Module 3
Converter faults and protection: types of faults – commutation failure –arc through and misfire –
protection against over currents – over voltages – surge arresters – protection against over voltages
Module 4
Harmonics and filters: Sources of harmonics in HVDC systems - Smoothing reactors – Corona and
radio interference effects – harmonic distortion factor (derivation not required) – types of AC filters
– DC filters (design not required)
Module 5
Multi-terminal DC systems: applications of MTDC systems – types – comparison.
Reactive power control: sources of reactive power – static VAR systems – TCR configuration
(analysis not required) – Typical control system (block diagram only) for a TCR – operation of
Thyristor switched capacitor
Text Book
1. HVDC Power Transmission Systems-Technology and System Interactions: K.R Padiyar, New
Age Int’l.
Reference
1. Direct Current Transmission Vol 1: E.W Kimbark, Wiley
NEURAL NETWORKS
E 706-3
Module 1
Introduction: Principles -Artificial neuron - activation functions -Sing|e layer and Multilayer networks -
Training artificial neural networks - Perception - Representation - Linear Separability - Learning -
Training algorithms.
Module2
Back propogation: Taining Algorithim - Application - Network Configurations - Network
Paralysis - Local Minima - Temporal instability.
Module 3
224
Counter Propogation Networks: Kebenone layer - Training the cohenen layer - Pre initialising the
weight vectors - statistical properties Training the Grosbery layer - Full counter propagation network -
Application.
Module 4
Statistical Methods: Boltzmann's Training - Cauchy training - Artificial specific heat methods -
applications to general non-linear optimization problems
Module 5
Hopfield nets: Recurrent networks - stability - Associative memory-applications - Thermo dynamic
systems - Statistical Hopfield networks -Bidirectional associative memories - Continuous BAM -
Adaptive resonance theory - Architeture classification - implimentation.
Text Book
1. Neural Computing & Practice - Philip D. Wasserman,
References
1. Adaptive pattern Recognition & Neural Networks - Pay Y.H.

2. An Introduction to neural computing - Chaoman & Hall
3. Artificial Neural Networks - Kishan Mehrota and Etal
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING

E 706-4
Module 1
OOP concepts: Objects-classes-data abstraction-data encapsulation-inheritance-polymorphism-
dynamic binding-comparison of OOP and Procedure oriented programming-object oriented languages.
OOP using C++: Classes and objects-class declaration-data members and member functions-private and
public members-member function definition-inline functions-creating objects-accessing class
members.
Module 2
Arrays of objects-objects as function arguments-pass by value-reference variables/aliases-pass by
reference-function returning objects-static class members.
Constructors and destructors -declaration, definition and use-default, parameterized and copy
constructors-constructor overloading.
Module 3
Polymorphism: function overloading-declaration and definition-calling overloaded functions. Friend
classes-friend functions-operator overloading-overloading unary - overloading binary operators- use of
friend functions
Module 4
Inheritance: different forms of inheritance-base class-derived class-visibility modes-single inheritance-
characteristics of derived class-abstract class
225
File handling in C++: file stream classes-file pointers-open (), close (), read (), write () functions-
detecting end of file.
Module 5
Dynamic memory allocation: pointer variables-pointers to objects-new and delete operators-accessing
member functions using object pointers-'this' pointer. Run time polymorphism: pointers to base class-
pointers to derived class-virtual functions-dynamic binding.
References
1. Object Oriented Programming with C++ - Balagurusamy, McGraw Hill

2. Object Oriented Programming in Turbo C++ - Robert Lafore ,Galgotia Publications
3. C++Programming Language - Bjame Stroustrup, Addison Wesley
4. C++ primer -Stanely B.Lippman, PearsonEducation,Asia
5. Data Abstraction and OOP in C++ - Gordenkeith
6. Object Oriented Analysis & Design - Grady Booch, Addison Wesley
BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
E706-5
Module 1
Physiology and generation of bio electric potential Cell Potentials stimulation and thresholds-
Action potentials-propagation of action potentials-sodium pump-electro physiology of cardio
pulmonary systems - Respiration and circulation - Cardio vascular system - Heart electro cardiogram
- Measurement and analysis of EGG waveform-ECG recorder principles-block schematic of ECG
recorder.
Module 2
Blood pressure-Characteristics of blood flow-Heart sounds Measurement of blood pressure-
Direct and indirect methods-Pacemakers defibrillators- PH of blood- ESR and GSR- Temperature
measurement of various parts.
Module 3
Respiratory system-measurement of respiration rate-Measurement of CO2 and O2 of exhaled air-
Respiratory therapy equipment-inhalators, ventilators and respirators.
Module 4
Central Nervous systems-Anatomy of Nervous system-neuronal communication-Organisation of
brain-Neuronal receptors-somatic nervous systems and spinal reflexes-EEG measurement
and characteristic of sleep.
Module 5
Modern imaging systems – X ray machine – computer tomography – magnetic resonance imaging
system – NMR components – ultrasonic imaging systems – Therapeutic equipments – dialysers –
surgical diathermy machines – laser applications – physiotherapy and electro therapy equipments
226
References
1. Handbook of Biomedical instrumentation – R.S Khandpur

2. Medical and Clinical Engg. – Brtil Jacobson and John G
3. Biomedical Instrumentation and Measurements – Leslic Cromwell, F.J Weibel
ELECTRICAL DRAWING
E 707 0+0+3
PART A
DC Winding
1. Lap winding with equalizer rings.
2. Wave winding, dummy coils.
DC Machines
1. Dimensioned sketches of (a) front and end views of armature (b) commutator (c) brush holders (d)
slot details.
2. Dimensioned sketches of yoke and pole assembly.
3. Dimensioned sketches of front and side views of an assembled medium size D.C machine.
Transformers
1. Sections of core type transformer limbs.
2. Dimensioned sketch (external view) of a distribution transformer with all accessories.
3. (a) Dimensioned sketch of sections of transformer limb.
(b) Assembled sectional view of Power transformer.
PART B
AC Winding
Three – phase AC winding
1. Integral slot lap winding
2. Short chorded winding
3. Fractional slot winding
4. Mush winding
AC machines
Dimensioned sketches of parts and assembled views of
1. Salient pole alternator
2. Cylindrical rotor alternator
3. Dimensioned sketches of parts and assembled views of
4. Squirrel cage induction motor
5. Slip ring Induction motor
References
1. Electrical Engineering Drawing - S. K Bhattacharya

2. Electrical Engineering Drawing – K.L. Narang
227
3. Electrical Machine Design – A.K Sawhney
(University Examination Pattern: 3 questions from Part A, of which any two must be answered, and 3
questions from part B of which any two must be answered. All questions carry 25 marks each).
CONTROL AND POWER ELECTRONICS LAB

E 708 0+0+4
Part A: Control Systems Lab
1. Transfer Function of Separately excited DC generator

2. Transfer Function of Field-Controlled DC motor
3. Transfer Function of Armature-Controlled DC motor
4. Amplidyne characteristics and transfer function
5. Voltage regulation of DC generator using Amplidyne
6. Synchro characteristics, error detection and data transmission, differential Synchro
7. AC servo motor – speed transfer characteristics
8. Step and sinusoidal response of RLC circuits
9. Study of PID controller – design and experimental determination of frequency response of lag
and lead networks
10. D.C servo motor position control system
11. Use of MATLAB for simulating transfer functions, closed-loop systems etc.
Part B: Power Electronics Lab
1. Study of V-I characteristic of SCRS triac.

2. Study of BJT, IGBT, GTO & MOSFET.
3. R, RC and UJT firing circuits for the control of SCRS.
4. Design and implementation of Ramp-Comparator and digital firing scheme for simple SCR
circuits.
5. Automatic lighting control with SCRs and optoelectronic components.
6. AC phase control using SCR and Triac.
7. Speed control of DC motor using choppers and converters.
8. Generation and study the PWM control signal for Single phase dc to ac inverter.
9. Study and use of the single phase half controlled & fully controlled AC to DC Converter and
effect of firing angle control on load voltage & wave Forms.
10. Study and use of back to back connected SCR/ triac Controlled AC Voltage controller and its
wave forms with Variation of firing angle.
11. Study & use chopper circuit for the control of DC Voltage using (1) Pulse width control (2)
Frequency Control.
12. Study of Single Phase inverter and its wave form.
13. Study of Three Phase firing circuit with synchronisation, and testing with three phase AC to DC
bridge converter. Testing of wave forms of digital firing modules.
14. Study and Testing of a Three Phase bridge inverter with different types of loads.
15. Simulation of gating circuits and simple converter circuits.
PROJECT AND SEMINAR

E 709/E808
228
paper should be in general reflecting the state-of-the-art. He/she shall submit a report of the paper
presented to the department.
In addition to the seminar he/she shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7 th
semester itself in consultation with the Guides. On completion of the project work, he/she shall
present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work, and
submit a report of the project work done to the department.
229
EIGHTH SEMESTER
230
POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS
E 801 3+1+0
Module 1
Power System Model: Representation – Single Line Diagram – per unit system – per unit
impedance diagram – network model formulation – bus admittance matrix – formation of Y bus and
Z bus using singular transformation – symmetrical components – sequence impedance and networks
Module 2
Power Flow Studies: Load flow problem – Gauss Siedal method – Newton Raphson method –
algorithm for load flow solution – handling of voltage controlled buses, off nominal transformer
ratios and phase shifting transformers
Module 3
Economic Load Dispatch: System constraints – Economic dispatch neglecting losses – optimal load
dispatch including transmission losses – physical interpretation of co ordination equations – exact
transmission loss formulae – modified co ordination equation – automatic load dispatching
Module 4
Symmetrical and unsymmetrical short circuit analysis: Different types of faults in power systems
– symmetrical fault analysis – selection of circuit breakers – use of reactors
Unsymmetrical faults – analysis of single line to ground, line to line and double line to ground faults
in power system – analysis of unsymmetrical fault using Z bus.
Module 5
Stability Analysis: Swing equation – power angle equation and power angle curve – inertia constant
– steady state stability - transient stability – equal area criterion – application – numerical solution of
swing equation – critical clearing time and angle – effect of clearing time on stability –methods of
improving system stability – modified Euler’s method – Rangakutta method – application to the
solution of swing equation and computational algorithms
References
1. Power System Engineering: Nagrath and Kothari, TMH

3. Power System Analysis: Bergen, Pearson Education Asia, LPE
4. Elements of Power System Analysis: William D. Stevenson
5. Power System Stability Vol. I: Kimbark E. W.
SWITCHGEAR AND PROTECTION

E 802 3+1+0
Module 1
231
Switchgear: Circuit breaker – basic principle of operation – arc phenomenon – initiation and
maintenance of arc - arc interruption methods – arc voltage and current waveform in AC circuit
breaking – re-striking and recovery voltage – current chopping – DC breakers – rating of circuit
breakers - breaking capacity – making capacity – short time rating – working principle and important
features of oil CB, minimum oil CB, air blast CB, vacuum CB and SF6 CB – auto high speed re-
closing.
Module 2
Protective relaying: Main and back up protection – basic requirements of protective relaying –
classification of relays – induction type – principle - inverse time characteristics – directional over-
current and power relays – distance relays – definite distance and distance time relays – differential
relays - negative phase sequence relay – static relays – basic static relay – block diagram of static
over-current, static directional, static distance and static differential relays.
Module 3
Generator Protection: External and internal faults – differential protection – biased circulating
current protection – self balance system – over-current and earth fault protection – protection against
failure of excitation
Transformer protection: Differential protection – self-balance system of protection – over-current
and earth fault protection – buchholz’ s relay and its operation.
Module 4
Feeder protection: Protection of radial feeders – protection of parallel feeders – protection of ring
mains – differential pilot protection for feeders – Merz Price voltage balance system – transley
system
Transmission Line Protection: Definite distance and time distance protection – phase and earth
fault protection – carrier current protection
Module 5
Surge Over-voltages: Causes – lightning and switching surges – protection against over-voltages –
surge diverters thyrite and horn gap types – use of ground wires – insulation coordination.
Wave propagation:
Wave propagation on OH lines and UG cables – transmitted and reflected waves – surge impedance
– velocity of propagation
References
1. Power System Protection and Switchgear: Ravindranath and Chander
3. A Course in Electrical Power Systems: Sony, Gupta, Bhatnagar
4. Elements of Power System Analysis: William D. Stevenson
5. Traveling Waves on Transmission Systems: Bewsley L. V.
6. Power System Protection: M. A Date, B. Oza and N.C Nair,
INSTRUMENTATION
E 803 2+1+0
Module 1
Transducers: Classification – characteristics – static and dynamic characteristics – Instrumentation
System – Functional description – input / output configuration – interfering and modifying inputs –
Methods of correction – Loafing effect – Instrumentation amplifiers – Isolation amplifier – charge
amplifier.
232
Module 2
Displacement Transducers: Resistance potentiometer – linearity and sensitivity – types – Resistance
strain gauges – working principle – gauge factor – strain gauge circuitry – temperature effect and its
compensation – load cells – LVDT – working principle – equivalent circuit – LVDT circuitry –
Capacitive transducers – different types – piezoelectric transducers – working principle –
piezoelectric crystal equivalent circuit.
Module 3
Temperature Measurement: Thermo electric effects – Laws – thermocouples – thermo electric
circuits – Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) – Bridge circuits – Thermistors – characteristics –
pyrometer – radiation and optical pyrometers.
Module 4
Absolute acceleration – null type and servo type – strain gauge Accelerrometer – piezo electric
accelerometer – Electromagnetic flow meter – ultrasonic flow meter – transit type and Doppler flow
meter – Ultrasonic flaw detector – Optical transducers.
Module 5
PH measurement – Low Pressure measurement – McLaud gauge – Pirani gauge – ionisation gauge –
thermal conductivity gauge – spatial encoder for angular measurement – wave analyser and spectrum
analyser (block schematic) – scintillation counter – Hygrometer.
References
1. Measurement Systems – Application and Design: E.O Doeblin, TMH

2. Principles of Industrial Instruments: D. Patranabi, TMH
3. Industrial Instruments Fundamentals: E. Fribance, TMH
4. Electronic Instruments: H.S Kalsi
5. Instrumentation Devices and Systems: V. Rangan, G.R Sharma and V.S.V Mani
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DESIGN

E 804 3+1+0
Module 1
Design of D.C Machines: Design specifications – output equation – output coefficient – specific
loadings – choice of speed and number of poles – calculation of D and L – Armature design – choice
of type of winding – number of sots – number of conductors per slot – current density – cross
sectional area – slot insulation – length of air gap – field winding design – field ampere turns –
excitation voltage per coil – conductor cross section – height of pole – design of ventilating ducts –
design of commutator and brushes – Carter’s coefficient – real and apparent flux density.
Module 2
233
Transformers: Design – single phase and three phase – output equation – specific magnetic loading
– core design – single, stepped core - windings – number of turns – current density – area of cross
section of conductors – types of coils – insulation – window area – window space factor – overall
dimensions – cooling – design of cooling tank with tubes – design of distribution and power
transformers – design of small transformers like 230V/6-0-6V.
Heating, cooling and temperature rise calculation – Continuous, short time and intermittent rating.
Module 3
Design of Synchronous Machines: Specific loading – output equation – output coefficient – main
dimensions – types of winding – design of field system – turbo alternator – main dimensions – stator
design – rotor design – damper winding design – comparison of water wheel and turbo alternators,
cooling of turbo alternator.
Design of three phase Induction motors: output equation – output coefficient – main dimensions –
rotor bar currents.
Module 4
Estimate the quantity of materials required and draw the electrical wiring layout of (a) residential
building (b) Multi-storied building using rising mains (c) factory with one number of small and high
rating motor at LT ot HT supply and many number of connected loads with suitable starters/switches
and control panels (d) Cinema hall
Module 5
a. Design, layout and estimation of power supply arrangement for (1). A bulk Industrial consumer (2)
An under ground power supply (3) An Over head line to a rural consumer.
b. Estimate and draw the layout of (1) indoor (2) outdoor 11KV transformer station with all accessories
– single line diagram and physical layout
c. Design and draw the typical earthing installation like (1) pipe earthing (2) Plate earthing (3) earth
mat / grid
d. Study the electrical wiring diagram of a typical automobile clearly showing all connected loads/
sources with specifications.
References
1. Electrical Machine Design: A.K Sawhney

2. Performance and Design of D.C Machine: Clayton
3. Performance and Design of A.C Machines: M.G Say
4. Design of Electrical Machines: V. N Mittal
5. Electrical Design Estimating and Costing: Raina & Bhattacharya
ELECTIVE - II
E 805 3+1+0
List of Electives:
E 805.01 CMELR Advanced Mathematics

E 805.02 Computer Aided Design of Induction Machines
E 805.03 Robotics
E 805.04 Advanced Power Systems
E 805.05 Advanced Microprocessors
E 805.06 System Software
234
E 805.07 Advanced Power Electronic Systems
Note
ADVANCED MATHEMATICS
CMELRT 805-1
Module 1
Green's Function
Heavisides, unit step function - Derivative of unit step function - Dirac delta function -properties of
delta function - Derivatives of delta function - testing functions - symbolic function - symbolic
derivatives - inverse of differential operator - Green's function -initial value problems - boundary
value problems - simple cases only.
Module 2
Integral Equations
Definition of Volterra and Fredholm Integral equations - conversion of a linear differential equation into
an integral equation - conversion of boundary value problem into an integral equation using Green's
function - solution of Fredhlom integral equation with separable Kernels - Integral equations of
convolution type - Neumann series solution.
Module 3
Gamma, Beta functions
Gamma function, Beta function - Relation between them - their transformations - use of them in the
evaluation certain integrals - Dirichlet's integral - Liouville's extension, of Dirichlet's theorem - Elliptic
integral - Error function.
Module 4
Power Series solution of differential equation
The power series method - Legendre's Equation - Legendre's polynomial - Rodrigues formula -
generating function - Bessel's equation - Bessel's function of the first kind -Orthogonality of Legendre's
Polynomials and Bessel's functions.
Module 5
Numerical solution of partial differential equations.
Classification of second order equations- Finite difference approximations to partial derivatives - solution
of Laplace and Poisson's equations by finite difference method -solution of one dimensional heat
equation by Crank - Nicolson method - solution one dimensional wave equation.
References
1. Linear Integral Equation: Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York

2. A Course on Integral Equations: Allen C.Pipkin, Springer - Verlag
235
3. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: H.K.Dass, S.Chand
4. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia
5. Numrical methods in Engg. &Science: B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers
6. Generalized functions: R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons.
7. Principles and Techniques of Bernard Friedman: John Wiley and sons Applied Mathematics
8. Principles of Applied Mathematics: James P.Keener, Addison Wesley.
9. Numerical methods: P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN OF INDUCTION MACHINES

E 805-2
Module 1
CAD Orientation of Engineering design problems to computers. Design by analysis and synthesis
approach – simulation of non-linearity – stator windings for 3 phase and single phase induction
motors
Module 2
Main dimensions of three phase induction motors – standard specification – constructional features –
specific electric and magnetic loading – output coefficient – main dimensions – computer
programmes
Module 3
Core design – leakage reactances – rotor winding design – equivalent resistances – computer
programmes
Module 4
Calculations from design data – Carters coefficient – no load current – equivalent circuit parameters
– torque – efficiency and temperature rise – computer programmes
Module 5
Main dimensions of single phase induction motors – auxiliary winding and capacitor design –
equivalent circuit parameters - torque – efficiency and temperature calculations using design data –
computer programmes
References
1. Computer Aided Design of Electrical Equipments – Ramamoorthy M, Affiliated East-West press

pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
2. Performance and Design of A.C Machines – M.G Say
3. Computer Aided Design of Electric Machinery – Venott C. G, MIT Press, London
ROBOTICS
E 805-3
Module 1
Introduction: Historical development-classification of robots-applications-robots kinematics- joints and
links-degree of freedom-description of position, orientation, frames-mapping from one frame to
another-compound transformations-inverse of transform matrix-transform equations-kinematics of three
236
degree of freedom manipulators-Description of links-intermediate links in chain-First and last links in
chain -Link parameters-affixing frames to links-derivation of link transformation matrix-Description of
an industrial robot.
Module 2
Inverse manipulator kinematics - Workspace-solvability-multiple solutions-Algebraic solution.
Drive and control systems for robots: hydraulic systems and DC servomotors
Position control for robots-simple position control system-position control along a trajectory
Module 3
Robot end- effectors: Classification of end-effectors-drive System for grippers-mechanical grippers
magnetic grippers-vacuum grippers-gripper force analysis and gripper design.
Module 4
Sensors and intelligent robots: need for sensing systems- sensing devices-piezoelectric sensors-
linear position and displacement sensing absolute optical encoding-incremental optical encoder-
position and direction measurement-velocity measurement—force and torque sensors-proximity
sensors-range sensors-robot vision systems
Module 5
Trajectory planning for Robots: Joint space schemes-cubic polynomials with via points-Blending
schemes - interfacing to microprocessors and computers.
References
1. Robotics and Image Processing - PA Janakiraman

2. Robotic Technology and flexible Automation - S R Deb
3. Robotics for engineers - Yoram Koren
4. Introduction to Robotics- Analysis, Systems and Applications: Saeed B. Nikku, Pearson Education
Asia, LPE
ADVANCED POWER SYSTEMS

E 805-4
Module 1
Automatic generation and voltage control - load frequency Control (single area case) -turbine speed
governing system - model of Speed system - Turbine model- generator load model - steady state
analysis- dynamic response - control area concept.
Module 2
Unit commitment - constraints in unit commitment-spinning spinning reserve - thermal unit
constraints - other constraints - unit commitment solution methods - priority - list methods -
dynamic programming solution.
Module 3
Hydrothermal co-ordination - long range and short range hydro scheduling- hydro electric plant models
- scheduling problems - the short term hydrothermal scheduling problem - short - term hydro—
237
scheduling: a gradient approach - hydro units in series-dynamic programming solution to the
hydrothermal scheduling problem.
Module 4
Interchange evaluation and power pools - economy interchange economy interchange evaluation -
interchange evaluation with unit commitment multiple interchange controls -after - the fact production
costing - other types of interchange - power pools - the energy broker system - centralized economic
despatch of a power pool - allocating pool savings.
Module 5
Power system security - factors affecting power system security-contingency analysis: Detection
network problem - network sensitivity methods - calculation of network sensitivity factors -
correcting the generation despatch - sensitivity methods - linear programming.
References
1. Power System Engineering - I.J.Nagrath, D.P.Kothari

2. Power generation, operation and control - Allen J.Wood, Bruce Wollenberg, John Wiley & Sons
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
E 805-5
Module 1
Intel 8086 - Pin out signals and functions - Internal architecture - Registers and flags - bus
buffering and latching bus timing – Pipelining
Operating modes - minimum mode and maximum mode.
Module 2
Introduction to 8086 assembly language programming - addressing modes – instruction set
classification - Writing simple programs eg. Arithmetic operations, reading data from input port etc.
8086 memory interface – memory bank – separate bank decoders and signals
Module 3
8087 internal block diagram and interfacing (Programming not required).
Intel 80186 Architecture - block diagrams - different integrated peripherals
Intel 286 - Block diagram - Hardware features - Additional instructions (Programming not required)
Module 4
Intel 8038 - memory system - I/O system - Protected mode – mmu - Descriptors and selectors - TSS,
Memory paging mechanism.
Intel 80486 - Internal Architecture - memory management and cache memory.
Module 5
Introduction to Pentium - processors – memory system – I/O system - special Pentium registers -
Pentium memory management.
238
Pentium II - Introduction - software changes Pentium III - Introduction - chip set, Bus
Pentium IV - Memory interface, Hyper pipelined technology (elementary treatment only).
Concept of RISC – comparison of CISC and RISC
References
1. The 80x86 Family - John Uffenbeck - Pearson

2. Microprocessor and Interfacing - Douglas V. Hall - McGraw Hill
3. The Intel Microprocessors - Barry B. Brey (6th edition) – Pearson LPE
4. Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals – A.K Ray and M. Bruchandy – TMH
5. An Introduction to the Intel family of Microprocessors – James L. Antonokos, Pearson LPE
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
E 805-6
Module 1
Introduction: Concept of system software - Classification of system software-Relationship of
system software with the machine and the user. Assemblers: overview of the assembly process-
single pass and two pass assemblers. Elementary ideas of macros -Macro definition- macro call
macro expansion - macro processors.
Module 2
Linkers and Loaders: translated, linked and load time addresses- relocation and linking concepts-
object module- loader- absolute loader, relocating loader- linking loaders -(elementary ideas only).
Compilers: Overview of compilation process - phases of a compiler - analysis phase -synthesis
phase - lexical analysis - parsing - static and dynamic storage allocation-intermediate code
generation - code generation (basic ideas only).
Module 3
Operating systems: Definition of operating system -functions of operating system - types of
services-Types of operating systems- batch processing multiprogramming, multitasking -
timesharing, real-time, distributed systems (brief descriptions only).
Process management- process concept- process states- scheduling - FCFS, Shortest Job first, round
robin scheduling policies.
Module 4
Memory management- contiguous memory allocation - static and dynamic partitioning -swapping -
non-contiguous allocation- fragmentation- concept of virtual memory- paging-page tables - page
replacement- FIFO and LRU page replacement policies - segmentation -caching of secondary
storage information.
File system - directory structures - file system implementation - sharing and security. Device
management - basic principles of I/O device controllers - I/O scheduling policies.
Module 5
Introduction to distributed operating system: characteristics of distributed systems -advantages
-client server model - remote procedure call.
Real time operating systems - Basic requirements - hard and soft real time systems - issues in real
time systems- basic ideas of real time scheduling - reentrancy- real time embedded systems (basic
ideas only).
References
1. Introduction to System Software - Dhamdhere D.M., Tata McGraw Hill
2. Systems Programming - Donovan J.I, McGraw Hill
3. Systems Programming - Dhamdhere D.M., Tata McGraw Hill & Operating Systems
4. Principles of compiler design - Aho & Ullman, Narosa Publishing
5. Operating System- Milenkovic, McGraw Hill
239
6. Operating System concepts - Peterson & Silberschatz, Addison Wesley
7. Real time systems & programming languages- Burns, Wellings, Addison Wesley
8. Introduction to RTS - Martin
9. Real time embedded Systems - Mathai Joseph, CERN
ADVANCED POWER ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS

E 805-7
Module 1
DC-DC converter topologies: Buck and boost converters - continuous and discontinuous current
modes - buck-boost, C’uk converter - operation – control of dc-dc converters –PWM method - Full-
bridge with bipolar and unipolar switching – output voltage equations.
Module 2
SMPS topologies: Basic block schematic of SMPS – isolated dc-dc topologies – forward and
flyback – principles – (circuit and operation only). Push-pull topology – half bridge
Basics of SMPS control methods – voltage-mode and current-mode control (block diagrams and
description only).
Module 3
Resonant Converters: Advantages of resonant converters over PWM converters – Classification -
series and parallel resonant converters – half-bridge operation – discontinuous and continuous
current modes (basic modes only, no analysis required) Principles of Zero voltage and Zero current
switching (ZVS and ZCS switches only – no analysis required)
Module 4
PWM Inverters: Need for PWM techniques – various PWM techniques – principle of sinusoidal
PWM – bipolar and unipolar PWM - modulation index – application to single phase bridges -
disadvantages of SPWM – brief introduction to other PWM methods – current-mode control
schemes (tolerance band control and fixed frequency control – description with block diagram only)
Module 5
Applications: Power factor correction – Actual power factor – Displacement factor and distortion
factor – principles of input line current shaping using boost rectifiers. UPS – Different topologies –
block schematics.
Electronic ballast – block schematics.
References
1. Power Electronics: Converters, Applications and Design – Mohan, Undeland and Robbins, John
Wiley and Sons, 2nd ed.
2. Power Electronic Systems: Theory and Design – Jai P. Agrawal , Pearson Education Asia, LPE
3. Modern Power Electronics – P.C Sen, Wheeler Publ.
240
ELECTIVE - III
E 806 2+1+0
List of Electives:
E 806.01 Digital Protection of Power Systems

E 806.02 Insulation Technology
E 806.03 Computer Networks
E 806.04 Artificial Intelligence and Expert Systems
E 806.05 Opto-Electronics and Communication
E 806.06 VLSI Technology
Note
DIGITAL PROTECTION OF POWER SYSTEMS

E 806-1
Module 1
Need for protection-nature and causes of fault -zones of protection-classification of protective relays
based on technology and function-instrument transformers used in protection circuit.
A/D converters- analog multiplexers-sample and hold circuits.
Module 2
Computer applications to protective relaying - simulation of power system disturbances-simulation
of current and voltage transformers-simulation of distance relays during transient conditions.
Module 3
Offline application of computers-on line application of computers –Relay co-ordination
programmes.
Module 4
Microprocessor based protective relays - multistage frequency relay -measurement of power system
signals through phase locked loop interface -protection of alternators against loss of excitation.
Module 5
Microprocessor based over current relays-impedance relays- directional relay-reactance relay - distance
relay - measurement of R and X - mho relay -quadrilateral relay - generalized interface for distance
relays.
References
1. Madhava Rao T.S, "Power System Protection-Static relays"

241
2. Bddri Ram, "Power System Protection and Switchgear"
3. Singh L.P, "Digital Protection-Protective Relaying from electromechanical to microprocessors"
4. Arun G. Phadke, James S. Thorp, "Computer Relaying for Power systems"
INSULATION TECHNOLOGY
E 806-2
Module 1
Insulating materials - classification, brief study of preparation and properties of ceramics, mica, paper,
PVC, PE Epoxy resin, teflon, SF6 transformer oil, polychlorobiphenyls (PCB) vacuum purification
of transformer oil- drying and degassing. Impregnation of paper and cotton insulation.
Module 2
Dielectric properties - permittivity, complex permittivity, dielectric loss factors influencing
permittivity, permittivity of mixtures, factors influencing tan delta, Measurement of resistivities,
dielectric loss and constant, testing for tracking partial discharge measurements.
Module 3
Polarisation - internal fields, Clausins - Mossotd relation limitations, different types of polarisaiton.
Electric fields in homogeneous dielectrics, mechanical force under electric fields, absorption currents.
Insulation problems in high voltage transformers, surge phenomena, insulation design to withstand
surges in transformers, Elementary de-sign of insulating system of capacitors.
Module 4
Breakdown phenomena in gases - ionization processes, de-ionization processes, breakdown
mechanisms, T ownrend's theory. Steramer theory, Paschen's law, breakdown in electronegative gases,
uniform fields, non-uniform fields penning effect.
Module 5
Breakdown mechanisms in vacuum-breakdown in liquid dielectrics pure liquids and commercial
liquids, breakdown in solid dielectrics - different types - intrinsic, electronic, thermal,
electromechanical, tracing and tracking, partial discharges, partial discharges.
References
1. High Voltage Engineering: Naidu and Kamaraju

2. Ionisation, Conductivity and Breakdown in Liquids: Adam Czawski
3. High Voltage Engineering: Kuffel and Zeamgl
4. SF6 and Vacuum Insulation for High Voltage Applications: Naidu and Maller
COMPUTER NETWORKS
E 806-3
Module 1
Introduction: Goals and applications of networks - Network Topologies - Broadcast - Point to point
- bus, star, ring, tree - Types of networks - LAN, MAN, WAN OSI reference model - TCP/IP
reference model - Client server computing Physical layer - Packet switching -Transmission media -
Fibre optic networks – ISDN
Module 2
242
Data link layer: Services - Data framing - Error handling - Data link protocols – Elementary
protocols - Sliding window protocol( basic concepts only) - data link layer in the Internet-
SL1P/PPP.
Module 3
Medium access sub layer: Channel allocation - static vs dynamic channel allocation - CSMA
protocol - collision detection - wireless LANs - IEEE 802 standards - Ethernet - Token bus -Token
ring - Bridges – FDDI
Module 4
Network layer: services - Routing - congestion control - internetworking - Principles - Gateways -
Host - backbone network - Network layer in the Internet - IP protocol - IP address - Internet control
protocols. Transport layer: Services - Internet Transport protocols - TCP and UDP.
Module 5
Application layer: services - Network security - Cryptography - DNS - DNS Namespace -Name
servers - Network Management concepts. Internet services: E-mail - USENET - FTP -TELNET -
gopher - WWW - WAIS – Archie
References
1. Computer Networks (3r edition) - Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia

2. Data and computer communications - William Stalling, Pearson Education Asia
3. Data Communication, Computer networks - F. Halsall, Addison Wesley and open systems
4. Computer Networks, A system approach - Peterson & Davie, Harcourt Asia
5. The Internet Book- Douglas E. Comer, Pearson Education Asia
6. Internet Complete Reference - Harley Harn Osborne
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE & EXPERT SYSTEMS

E 806-4
Module 1
Introduction to AI and problem solving concepts: Definition- pattern recognition-production
systems - problem and production system characteristics - two-pail problem-analysis of AI techniques
- criteria for success
Module 2
Knowledge representation - formal and non-formal logic: Representation evaluation criteria -level
of representation -formal logic schemes -resolutions -predicate and prepositional logic -conversion
to clause form -semantic networks-frames-scripts-production system
243
Module 3
Problem solving strategies dealing with uncertainty: Defining the problem - control strategies -
exhaustive search - generate and test-space transformation models- forward versus backward
reasoning -matching - weak methods - hill climbing -breadth and depth first searches - search
algorithms.
Module 4
Expert system development process and knowledge acquisition: Definition - analysis of expert
system problem solving - role and analysis of knowledge - architecture of the expert system -
problem selection - formalization -implementation –evaluation.
Module 5
Knowledge acquisition techniques- cognitive behavior - knowledge representation development.
Expert system tools: Expert system shells -narrow tools -large hybrid expert system tools -PC based
expert system tools knowledge acquisition tools.
References
1. Introduction to AI & Expert System - D. W. Patterson, Prentice hall of India

2. Principles of Artificial Intelligence& Expert Systems Development - David W.Rolston, Tata McGraw
Hill
3. Artificial Intelligence - Elaine Rich, McGraw Hill
4. Principles of Artificial Intelligence - Nils J. Nilsson, Springer Verlag
5. Introduction to Artificial Intelligence - Charnaik & McDermott, Addison Wesley
OPTOELECTRONICS AND COMMUNICATION

E 806-5
Module 1
Review of P-N jn-characteristics - semiconductor-hetero junction-LEDs (-spontaneous emission-LED
structure-surface emitting-Edge emitting-Injection efficiency- recombination efficiency-LED
characteristics-spectral response-modulation-Band width.
Module 2
Laser diodes-Basic principle-condition for gain-Laser action-population inversion-stimulated emission-
Injection faster diode-structure-temperature effects-modulation-comparison between LED and ILDs.
Module 3
Optical detectors-optical detector principle-absorption coefficient-detector characteristics-Quantum
efficiency-responsivity- response time-bias voltage-Noise in detectors P-N junction-photo diode-
(characteristics-P-I-N-photo diode-response-Avalanche photo diode (APD) multiplication process-B. W-
Noise-photo transistor.
Module 4
Optical Fibre-structure-advantages-Types-propagation-wave equation-phase and group velocity-
transmission characteristics-attenuation-absorption-scattering losses-dispersion-fibre bend losses-source
coupling, splices and connectors-wave length division multiplexing.
244
Module 5
Optical fibre system-system design consideration-fibre -optic link-optical transmitter circuit-source
limitations-LED drive circuit-Laser drive circuit-pre-amplifier-equalization-Fibre-optic link analysis-
typical lira design.
References
1. Semiconductor Opto electronics Devices-Pallab Bhattacharya (Pearson Education)

2. Optical fibre Communication Systems-Principles and practice- John M Senior (PHI)
3. Optical communication Systems-John Gower (PHI)
4. Optical fibre Communication- Gerd keiser (PHI)
VLSI TECHNOLOGY
E 806-6
Module 1
Process steps in 1C fabrication: Crystal growth and wafer preparation- Czochralski process-
apparatus- silicon shaping, slicing and polishing- Diffusion of impurities-physical mechanism- Pick's
I and II law of diffusion- Diffusion profiles- complementary (erfc) error function- Gaussian profile-
Ion implantation- Annealing process- Oxidation process- Lithography- Photolithography, Fine line
lithography, electron beam and x-ray lithography- Chemical vapour deposition (CVD)- epitaxial
growth- reactors-metallisation- patterning- wire bonding and packaging.
Module 2
Monolithic components: Isolation of components- junction isolation and dielectric isolation-
Transistor fabrication- buried layer- impurity profile- parasitic effects-monolithic diodes- schottky
diodes and transistors- FET structures- JFET- MOSFET-PMOS and NMOS, control of threshold
voltage (Vth)- silicon gate technology-Monolithic resistors- sheet resistance and resistor design-
resistors in diffused regions-MOS resistors- monolithic capacitors- junction and MOS structures- 1C
crossovers and vias.
Module 3
CMOS technology: Metal gate and silicon gate- oxide isolation- Twin well process- Latch up-
BiCMOS technology- fabrication steps- circuit design process- stick diagrams- design rules-
Capacitance of layers- Delay- Driving large capacitance loads- Wiring capacitance- Basic circuit
concepts- scaling of MOS structures- scaling factors- effects of miniaturization.
Module 4
Subsystem design and layout- Simple logic circuits- inverter, NAND gates, BiCMOS circuit, NOR
gates, CMOS logic systems - bus lines- arrangements- power dissipation-power supply rail
distribution- subsystem design process- design of a 4 bit shifter.
Module 5
Gallium Arsenide Technology: Sub-micro CMOS technology- Crystal structure- Doping process-
Channeling effect- MESFET- GaAs fabrication- Device modeling.
245
References
1. VLSI technology. S M Sze, Me Graw Hill pub,

2. Basic VLSI design: Douglas Pucknell, PHI
3. Principles of CMOS VLSI Design: H E Weste, Pearson Edn.
4. Integrated Circuits: K R Botkar, Khanna Pub.
5. CMOS circuit design layout and simulation: Barter, IEEE press.
6. Introduction to VLSI: Conway, Addison weslay.
ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB II

E 807 0+0+4
1. Alternator regulation by synchronous impedance and mmf methods

2. Alternator regulation by Potier method
3. Alternator regulation by Blondel’s method and verification by direct loading
4. Alternator V – curves for constant input/output
5. Synchronous motor V – curves and compounding curves
6. Alternator regulation by feeding back power to mains – use of synchroscope
7. Study of starters and load tests on double cage and single phase induction motors
8. Characteristics of cage / slip ring motors by circle diagram
9. Characteristics of induction generator and rotor hysterisis by Link’s method
10. Synchronous Induction motor – predetermination of excitation current and verification
11. Characteristics of pole changing motor
12. Characteristics of Schrage motor – torque variation with load, predetermination of speed variation
with brush shift and verification
13. Characteristics of cascade induction motor set
14. Experimental determination of torque slip curve of induction motor in unstable region upto about
40% slip
15. Experimental determination of variation of starting torque with rotor resistance in slip-ring induction
motor
16. Predetermination of line current. Torque, power of a 3-phase induction motor under single phasing -
verification
17. No load and blocked rotor tests on single phase induction motor and determination of equivalent
circuit parameters
18. Determination of
a. Continuous rating for specified temperature rise
b. One hour rating by heat run test of a machine
PROJECT AND SEMINAR

E 709/E808
paper should be in general reflecting the state-of-the-art. He/she shall submit a report of the paper presented
to the department.
In addition to the seminar he/she shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in the 7 th
semester itself in consultation with the Guides. On completion of the project work, he/she shall present the
work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work, and submit a report of
the project work done to the department.
246
247
SYLLABUS
ELECTRONICS
&
COMMUNICATION
ENGINEERING BRANCH
248
THIRD SEMESTER
249
CMELPA 301 3+1+0
Module 1
Vector differential calculus: Differentiation of vector functions- scalar and vector fields- gradient -
divergence and curl of a vector function - their physical meaning - directional derivative - scalar
potential- conservative field – identities - simple problems.
Module2
Vector integral calculus: Line- surface and volume integrals- work done by a force along a path-
application of Green’s theorem- Stoke’s theorem and Gauss divergence theorem.
Module 3
Function of complex variable: Definition of analytic function and singular points- derivation of
C.R. equations in Cartesian co-ordinates- harmonic and orthogonal properties- construction of
analytic function given real or imaginary parts- complex potential- conformal transformation of
functions like Zn, ez, 1/z, Sin z, z + k2/z - bilinear transformation- cross ratio- invariant property-
simple problems.
Module 4
Finite differences: meaning of ∆, , E, μ, δ - interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward
formula- central differences- problems using Stirlings formula- Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s
divided difference formula for unequal intervals.
Module 5
Difference Calculus: Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences. Numerical
integration- Newton-Cote’s formula- trapezoidal rule- Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule- simple
problems- difference equations - solutions of difference equations.
References
1. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyzing- Wiley Eastern. Pub.

2. Higher Engg. Mathematics: B. S. Grewal- Khanna publishers.
3. Numerical methods in Science and Engineering: M K Venkataraman- National Pub.
4. Numerical methods: S Balachandra Rao- University Press.
5. Advanced Engineering Mathematics: Michael D Greenberg- PHI.
6. Theory and Problems of Vector analysis: Murray Spiegel- Schaum’s- Mc Graw Hill.
NETWORK THEORY
LA 302 2+1+0
Module 1
Source transformation- Mesh and Node voltage Analysis – Coupled circuits – Dot conventions –
Analysis of coupled circuits.
250
Module 2
Network theorems-Super position theorem- Reciprocity theorem - Thevenin’s theorem- Norton's
theorem- Millman's theorem- Maximum power transfer theorem- Tellegen’s theorem- Graph of a
network -Trees- co-trees -Incident matrix- cut- set matrix-tie-set matrix- Analysis of networks-
equilibrium equations.
Module 3
Fourier Analysis and Laplace transform - Fourier analysis of periodic signals-Trignometric and
exponential forms- Non periodic signals and Fourier transforms- Frequency spectrum of periodic
waveforms - Laplace Transform- Review of theorems-Laplace transform of important signal
waveforms - Periodic functions- Initial value and final value Theorems- DC&AC transients-
Solution of network problems using Laplace transform.
Module 4
Two-port Networks and Filters - Voltage and Current ratios of two - port networks -Admittance-
impedance- hybrid and transmission parameters of two port networks. Passive filters as two port
networks- Characteristics of ideal filters-Image impedance- Constant K low pass- High pass and
Band pass filters-m-derived filters-Composite filters.
Module 5
Network Synthesis – Realizability concept – Hurwitz property – positive realness – properties of
positive real function – Synthesis of R, L, RC and LC driving point functions – Foster and Cauer
forms.
References
1. Network analysis -M.E Van Valkenburg, PHI

2. Circuits and Networks – analysis & synthesis – A. Sudhakar & S P ShyamMohan
3. Network and Systems -D Roy Chaudhary
4. Network analysis and synthesis-Franklin F Kuo – John Wiley & Sons
5. Engineering Circuit Analysis-W H Hayt & Jack Kennerly – Mc-Graw Hill
LA 303 2+1+0
Module 1
D.C.Generator – O.C.C. – Condition for self excitation – field critical resistance – critical speed –
Load characteristics of generators – Losses – power flow diagram – efficiency – Condition for
maximum efficiency – Applications.
Module 2
D C motor – starter – 3 point and 4 point starters – torque equation – speed equation – speed torque
– characteristics of shunt, series and compound motors – Losses – efficiency – Brake test –
251
Swinburne’s test – speed control – field control – armature control – series parallel control –
applications.
Module3
Transformers: transformer on no-load and load operation – phasor diagram – equivalent circuit –
regulation – losses and efficiency – o.c. and s.c. test – applications – Design of step down
transformers like 230/6-0-6V, – Basic principles of 3 phase tranformer – autotransformer –
applications.
Module 4
A.C Machines: 3 phase induction motors – rotating magnetic field – torque equation – slip – torque-
slip characteristics – operating characteristics – starting of 3 phase induction motors – starters –
single phase induction motors – constructional features – types – working and characteristics only
(no analysis) – constructional features of synchronous machines – principle of operation of alternator
– emf equation – regulation by emf and mmf method – principle of operation of synchronous motor
– starting of synchronous motor.
Module 5
Special Machines: A C and D C servo motors – synchros – constructional features – working of a
tachogenerator – stepper motors – construction, working, applications and specifications of stepper
motors – universal motors - constructional features – typical applications – criteria for selection of
motors – electromagnetic relays – contactors.
References
1. Electrical & Electronic Technology: Hughes, Pearson Education

2. Electrical Technology: H. Cotton
3. Electrical Machines: R.K.Rajput
4. Electrical Design Estimating & Costing: K.B.Raina & Bhattacharya
5. Electrical Machines & Power systems: Vincent Del Toro
SOLID STATE DEVICES

LA304 3+1+0
Module 1
Energy bands and charge carriers in semiconductors: energy bands- metals- semiconductors and
insulators- direct and indirect semiconductors- charge carriers in semiconductors: electrons and
holes- intrinsic and extrinsic material- n-material and p-material- carrier concentration: fermi level-
EHPs- temperature dependance- conductivity and mobility- drift and resistance- effect of
temperature and doping on mobility- hall effect.
Module 2
Diffusion of carriers- derivation of diffusion constant D- Einstein relation- continuity equation- p-n
junctions: contact potential- equilibrium fermi levels- space charge at junctions- current components
252
at a junction: majority and minority carrier currents- zener and avalanche breakdown- capacitance of
p-n junctions.
Module 3
p-n junction diodes: volt-ampere characteristics- switching time- rectifier action- Zener diodes: volt-
ampere characteristics- Tunnel diodes: tunneling phenomena- volt-ampere characteristics- Varactor
diodes- Photo diodes: detection principle- light emitting diodes.
Module 4
Bipolar junction transistors: npn and pnp transistor action- open circuited transistor- biasing in active
region- majority and minority carrier distribution- terminal currents- amplification and switching- α
and β gain factors- emitter efficiency γ- schottky transistors- photo transistors.
Module 5
Field effect transistors: operation- pinch off and saturation- pinch off voltage- gate control- volt-
ampere characteristics- MOSFETS: n MOS and p MOS: comparison- enhancement and depletion
types- control of threshold voltage- MOS capacitance.
References
1. Solid state electronic devices - Ben G Streetman- Pearson Education

2. Microelectronic Devices: Nagchaudhari, Pearson Education
3. Integrated electronics – Millman and Halkias- Mc Graw Hill.
4. Physics of semiconductor devices - S M Sze- Mc Graw Hill.
5. Semiconductor devices – Nagchoudhary- Tata Mc Graw Hill.
6. Physics of semiconductor devices: Shur- PHI.
7. Theory of Semiconductor devices: Karl Hess- PHI.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - I
LA 305 3+1+0
Module 1
Rectifiers and Power supplies: Half wave- full wave and bridge rectifiers- working- analysis and
design- C filter analysis- regulated power supplies: series and shunt- design of regulated power
supplies for specified output conditions- current limiting- short circuit protection- IC regulated
power supplies.
Module 2
Transistor as an amplifier: Transistor at low frequencies- h parameter model analysis- expression of
voltage and current gain- input and output impedance- CE- CB and CC configurations- comparison-
transistor parameters from static characteristics- FET: operation- characteristics- small signal model.
Module 3
253
Transistor Biasing: operating point- DC and AC load lines- Q point selection- bias stability-
definition of stability factors- derivation of stability factor for ICO variation- fixed bias- collector to
base bias- self bias circuits- bias compensation- compensation for ICO and VBE.
Module 4
RC Coupled amplifier: working- analysis and design- phase and frequency response- FET amplifier:
biasing- analysis and design.
Module 5
Wave shaping circuits: clipping- clamping- RC integration- differentiation- transistor as a switch-
astable multivibrator- working and design- UJT- working and applications- simple sweep circuit.
References
1. Electronic devices and circuits: Boylsted & Nashelsky- Pearson Edn.

2. Integrated Electronics: Millman & Halkias- Mc Graw Hill.
3. Electronic Principles: Malvino- Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4. Electronic devices and circuits: Bogart- UBS.
5. Electronic devices and circuits: Allen Mottershed- PHI.
6. Electronic devices: Floyd- Pearson Edn.
7. Electronic devices and applications: B Somanathan Nair- PHI.
8. Electronic devices and circuits: J B Gupta- S K Kataria & Sons Pub.
LA 306 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to C: C fundamentals - The character set - identifiers and keywords - Data types -
constants - variables and arrays - declarations - expressions - statements - symbolic constants-
arithmetic operators - Relational and Logical operators - The conditional operator - Library functions
- Data input and output - getchar – putchar, scanf, printf - gets and puts functions - interactive
programming.
Module 2
Control Statements: While - do while - for - nested loops -if else switch- break - continue - The
comma operator - go to statement, Functions - a brief overview - defining a function - accesing a
function - passing arguments to a function - specifying argument - data types - function prototypes -
Recursion.
Module 3
254
Program structure: storage classes - Automatic variables - external variables - multi file programs.
Arrays: defining an array - processing an array - passing arrays in a function – multi dimensional
arrays - array and strings. Structures and unions: defining a structure - processing a structure - user
defined data types - passing structure to a function – self referential structures - unions.
Module 4
Pointers: Fundamentals - pointer declaration - passing pointers to a function - pointers and one
dimensional arrays - operations on pointers - pointers and multi dimensional arrays – passing
functions to other functions.
Module 5
Data files: Opening and closing of a data file - creating a data file - processing a data file, low level
programming - register variables – bit wise operation - bit fields - enumeration - command line
parameters - macros - the C pre-processor.
Text Book
1. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C: Ashok N Kanthane, Pearson Edn.
References
1. Theory and problems of programming with C- Gottfried, Schaum’s series.

2. The C programming language: Kernighan & Ritche, PHI.
3. Programming Techniqes through C: Venkateshmurthy, Pearson Edn.
4. Programming in C: Balaguruswamy, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
5. Programming Ansi C: Ram Kumar.
6. Computer Programming: Rajaraman, PHI.
ELECTRICAL LAB
LA 307 0+0+4
1. Measurement of Electric power (single phase and three phase) and energy using wattmeter
and energy meter.
2. Study of star-delta connections.
3. O.C.C. and Load characteristics of D.C. generators.
4. Swinburne’s test.
5. Load characteristics of D.C. shunt, series and compound motors
6. O.C and S.C test on single-phase transformer.
7. Load test on step-up/step-down transformer; calculation of efficiency and regulation at
different power factors.
8. Study of starting of three phase induction motors and load test on squirrel cage induction
motor.
9. Load test on slipring induction motor.
10. Study of stepper and servomotors.
11. Load test on single phase induction motor.
12. Pre-determination of regulation of the alternator by emf and mmf method.
255
BASIC ELECTRONICS LAB
L 308 0+0+4
1. Familiarization of CRO, DVM, AF generator etc and soldering practice.

2. Characteristics - Diode, Transistor, FET, UJT. Determination of parameters.
3. Design and testing of DC power supplies for specified output.
4. Design of Single stage RC coupled amplifier. Determination of Band width.
5. Design of FET amplifier. Determination of Band width.
6. Wave shaping. Design of clipping, clamping, RC differentiator & Integrator.
7. Design of Astable multi-vibrator for specified time period - sharpening of edges.
8. Simple sweep circuit.
9. Familiarization of data sheets of components – OA79, 1N4001, SZ6.8, BC107, BC547, BC557,
BFW10, 2N2646.
10. Simulation of simple circuits using Spice.
Note
New experiments may be added in the above list concerned to the relevant theory paper (LA 305).
256
FOURTH SEMESTER
257
CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0
Module 1
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations - formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitrary Functions -
equation.
Module 3
Fourier Transforms: - Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine
Module 4
variance - poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution - its mean and variance -
fitting of binomial & poisson distributions - normal distribution - properties of normal curve -
standard normal curve - simple problems in binomial, poisson and normal distributions.
Module 5
difference of proportions, single mean and difference of means (proof of theorems not expected).
References
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics - B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers.
2. Engineering Mathematics Vol.II -3rd year Part A & B - M.K. Venkataraman, National
Publishing Company
3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations - Ian N.Sneddon.,McGraw Hill.
4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson
Education Asia / PHI.
5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications
Ltd.
7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia.
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN

LA 402 3+1+0
Module 1
Gates –Inverter - OR gates - AND gates - NOR Gates - De Morgan’s Theorems - NAND Gates -
EXCLUSIVE-OR Gates - Tristate Inverter - TTL Circuits - Digital Integrated Circuits - 7400
258
Devices - TTL Characteristics - TTL Overview - AND -OR- NOT Gates - Open-Collector Gates –
CMOS gates.
Module 2
Boolean Algebra and Karnaugh Maps - Boolean Relations - Sum-of-Products method - Algebraic
Simplification - Karnaugh maps – Pairs – Quads - and Octets - Karnaugh Simplifications - Don’t-
Care Conditions. Multiplexers - de-multiplexers - decoder and encoder.
Module 3
Arithmetic-Logic Units - Binary Addition - Binary Subtraction - Half Adders - Full Adders - Binary
Adders - signed Binary Numbers - 2’s Complement - 2’s-Complement Adder-Subtractor.
Module 4
Flip Flops - RS Latches - Level Clocking - D Latches - Edge-Triggered D & T Flip-Flops - Edge-
Triggered JK Master-slave Flip-Flop.
Module 5
Registers and Counters - Buffer Registers - Shift Registers - Controlled Shift Registers - Ripple
Counters - Synchronous Counters - Ring counters - Modulo counters - Three-State Register. ROMs
– PROMs and EPROMs - RAMs. A small TTL Memory.
References
1. Digital Fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Edn.

2. Digital Design: Wakerly, Pearson Education.
3. Fundamentals of digital circuits: A Anand Kumar, PHI
4. Digital Integrated Electronics: Taub and Shilling, McGraw Hill,
5. Digital electronics: D C Green, Pearson Edn.
6. Digital Logic and state machine design: Comer, Oxford.
7. Digital electronic principles and applications: A K Maini, Khanna Pub.
8. Digital electronic principles: Malvino and Leach, Mc Graw Hill.
9. Logic and computer design fundamentals: M Morris Mano, Pearson Edn.
LA 403 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: communication systems – Modulation - need for modulation- bandwidth- Amplitude
modulation - theory- mathematical representation- frequency spectrum - USB & LSB- power
relation- Frequency modulation - theory- mathematical representation- frequency spectrum- Phase
modulation- comparison of AM- FM- PM.
259
Module 2
Radio transmitters: AM transmitter - block diagram - Solid state modulators - circuit explanation-
FM transmitter - reactance modulator- varactor diode modulator- Amstrong modulator.
Module 3
Radio receivers: Tuned radio frequency receiver- superheterodyne receiver - block schematic-
selectivity- sensitivity- importance of IF - image frequency rejection - AM receivers - schematic
explanation - RF amplifiers - circuit explanation - Mixer circuits - IF amplifiers - circuit explanation-
simple diode detector - Automatic gain control circuit - simple and delayed AGC - FM receivers -
block schematic explanation - amplitude limiting - FM demodulators: slope detectors- phase
discriminator- ratio detectors.
Module 4
Side band communication: Single side band transmission - suppression of carrier - balanced
modulator - filtering of unwanted sideband - SSB receivers - block schematic explanation - pilot
carrier receiver - suppressed carrier receiver - Vestigial side band transmission - transmitter and
receiver responses - advantages of VSB in television.
Module 5
Telephone Systems - Telephone subscribers loop circuit - subscribers line interface circuit - Pulse
and tone signaling - Frequency assignments - Electronic telephone - block schematic of a telephone
set- block schematic of single line analog SLIC board - two wire repeaters - Electronic private
automatic branching exchange - basic block schematic- Power line communication: block schematic
explanation- Facsimile - FAX transmitter and receiver.
References
1. Electronic communication Systems: Wayne Tomasi- Pearson Edn.

2. Electronic communication: Roody and Coolen- PHI.
3. Electronic Communication systems: George Kennedy- Mc Graw Hill.
4. Electronic and radio engineering: A P Mathur.
5. Telephony and Carrier current engineering: P N Das.
6. Modern communication Systems: Couch- PHI.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - II
LA 404 3+1+0
Module 1
High frequency equivalent circuit of a transistor. Hybrid pi model - explanation of components -r
parameters in terms of h parameters -Tuned amplifiers -principle - single tuned and double tuned
amplifiers -frequency response -applications (no analysis) -multistage amplifiers -frequency
response.
Module 2
Feedback -different types -positive, negative, voltage, current, series and shunt feedback -Feedback
in amplifiers -its effect on amplifier performance -typical feedback arrangements -emitter follower
-darlington emitter follower -cascade amplifier (principles only) -difference amplifier.
260
Module 3
Oscillators -conditions for oscillation -analysis and design of RC phase shift oscillator, general form
of oscillator circuit -working of Hartley, Colpitt's, Crystal, tuned collector and Wien Bridge
oscillators.
Module 4
Mono-stable multi vibrator -analysis -design -applications -triggering -Bistable multi-vibrator
-analysis and design -different methods of triggering -commutating capacitor -Schmitt trigger
-working -design.
Module 5
Large signal amplifier -harmonic distortion -analysis of class A, class B, class C and class D
amplifiers -complimentary and symmetry stage -sweep generators -voltage and current sweeps -time
base generators -linearisation -miller and bootstrap sweeps - applications.
References
1. Electronic devices and circuits -Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Edn.

2. Integrated electronics -Millman & Halkias , Mc Graw Hill
3. Electronic principles -Malvino
4. Electronic devices and circuits -Bugart
5. Microelectronics Digital and Analogue -Botkar.
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

LTA 405 2+1+0
Module 1
Dynamic Representation of Systems - Systems Attributes- Causality - linearity- Stability- time-
invariance. Special Signals- Complex exponentials- Singularity functions (impulse and step
functions). Linear Time-Invariant Systems: Differential equation representation- convolution
Integral. Discrete form of special functions. Discrete convolution and its properties. Realization of
LTI system (differential and difference equations).
Module 2
Fourier Analysis of Continuous Time Signals and Systems - Fourier Series- Fourier Transform and
properties- Parseval’s theorem- Frequency response of LTI systems. Sampling Theorem.
261
Module 3
Fourier Analysis of Discrete Time Signals & Systems - Discrete-Time Fourier series- Discrete-Time
Fourier Transform (including DFT) and properties. Frequency response of discrete time LTI systems.
Module 4
Laplace Transform - Laplace Transform and its inverse: Definition- existence conditions- Region of
Convergence and properties- Application of Laplace transform for the analysis of continuous time
LTI system (stability etc.) Significance of poles & zeros- Z-Transform - Z-Transform and its inverse:
Definition- existence- Region of convergence and properties- Application of Z-Transform for the
analysis of Discrete time LTI systems- Significance of poles and zeros.
Module 5
Random Signals - Introduction to probability. Bayes Theorem- concept of random variable-
probability density and distribution functions- function of a random variable. Moments-
Independence of a random variable. Introduction to random process. Auto and cross correlation.
wide-sense stationarity- power spectral density White noise- Random processes through LTI
systems.
References
1. Signals and Systems: Oppenheim Alan- V- Willsky Alan. S- Pearson Edn.

2. Communication Systems: Haykin Simon- John Wiley.
3. Signals and Systems: I J Nagrarth- Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4. Signals and Systems: Farooq Husain- Umesh pub.
5. Adaptive signal processing: W Bernad- Pearson Edn.
RELIABILITY AND HUMANITIES

LA 406 2+1+0
Module 1
Concepts of reliability: Definition of reliability- failure- classification of failures- measures of
reliability- failure rate- mean time between failures (MTBF)- mean time to failure (MTTF).
Module 2
Failure pattern and fitting curves: Graphical plots- Bath tub curves- Hazard models- Constant hazard
models- Linearly increasing hazard model- Weibull model.
Module 3
Manufacture for Quality and reliability: The need for prototype tests- the quality standard- planning
to achieve required quality- basic concepts of sequencing.
Module 4
Control charts in statistical quality control: statistical quality control advantages- types of control
charts- X and R chart- P chart- C chart- Re-engineering- Zero defects.
Module 5
262
Human relations: Human Behavior- Scope of Industrial psychology-Theories of Motivation-
Handling of workers grievances-Workers participation in management-Industrial discipline-
Industrial disputes-Industrial fatigue-Wages and incentives.
References
1. Reliability Engineering: L S Sreenath.

2. Reliability Engineering: A K Govil.
3. Industrial Engineering & Management: Banga and Sharma.

LA 407 0+0+4
List of experiments
1. Power amplifiers: Design of class A and class AB push pull stage – verification of power output.
2. IC power amplifier.
3. Oscillators: Design of RC phase shift, Hartley & Colpitts oscillators.
4. Design of Mono-stable and bi-stable multi-vibrators.
5. Design of bootstrap sweep generator.
6. Schmitt trigger.
7. SCR, Triac firing circuits.
8. Feedback amplifier, design of two stage RC coupled amplifier.
9. Tuned amplifiers.
10. Design and testing of DC regulated power supplies (Fixed and variable).
11. Simulation of above circuits using PSPICE.
Note
New experiments may be added in accordance with subject LA 404
COMPUTER PRORAMMING LAB

LA 408 0+0+4
Part 1
1. Computer hardware familiarization.

2. Familiarization of MS-DOS commands, Microsoft Windows.
3. Familiarization of Microsoft Word, Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Part 2
Programming Experiments in C/C++: Programming experiments in C/C++ to cover control

structures, functions, arrays, structures, pointers and files, classes, operator & function overloading,
inheritance, polymorphism.
263
FIFTH SEMESTER
264
ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS -IV
CMELPA501 3+1+0
Module 1
Module 2
Module 3
Module 4
Module 5
only) – Big-M method,two phase method- Duality in L.P.P.- Balanced T.P. – Vogels approximation
References

3. Higher Engineering Mathematics - Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers.
4. Numerical methods in Science & Engineering - Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, National Publishing
company.
5. Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems - P.C.Tulsian, Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education
Asia.
6. Complex variables and applications - Churchill and Brown, McGraw-Hill.
7. Operations research - Panneer Selvam, PHI.
8. Engineering Mathematics Vol. III -S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac, A.Somasundaram, Scitech
publications
9. Advanced Mathematics for Engg.students Vol. III- S.Narayanan, T.K.M.Pillay, G.Ramanaigh,
POWER ELECTRONICS
LA 502 2+1+0
Module 1
265
Power semiconductor Devices - History of development of Power Electronic devices- Constructional
features- Characteristics- rating and specification- gate/base drive circuits-protection including
cooling and application consideration of diodes- SCRS, GTO, BJTS, MCT, MOSFET and IGBT.
Series and parallel operations of SCR- Electromagnetic interference.
Module 2
AC to DC Converters - Operation and analysis of Single phase and multi-phase uncontrolled and
controlled rectifiers with R, RL and back EMF load- effect of source inductance- free wheeling
effect- power factor improvement methods for phase Controlled rectifiers- filters. PWM chips:
SG3524 and TL 494- Block schematic.
Module 3
AC to AC Voltage Converter - Operation and analysis of single phase integral cycle and phase
controlled converters- Configuration of three phase controllers.
Module 4
DC to DC Converters - Chopper classification- Step down- step up and four quadrant converters
operation- analysis and control with R, RL and EMF load- current and voltage Commutation circuits.
Module 5
DC to AC Converters - Single phase and three phase bridge inverters- VSI and CSI- voltage control
- PWM & Square wave operation- Harmonics and their reduction techniques.
References
1. Power Electronics: Rashid Muhammad, Pearson Edn.

2. Power Electronics: Harish C Ray, Galgotia Pub.
3. Thyristors and Applications: Ramamoorthy.
4. Power Electronics: Converter, Applications and Design, Mohan Ned, John Wiley,
5. Power Semiconductor Circuits: Dewan, S.B. and Satrughan A, John Wiley & Sons, 1975.
6. Thyristorised Power Controllers: Dubey, G.K., Doradlla, S. R., Wiley Eastern, 1987.
APPLIED ELECTROMAGNETIC THEORY

L 503 3+1+0
Module 1
Review of vector analysis: Cartesian, Cylindrical and Spherical co-ordinates systems- Co-ordinate
transformations. Static electric field: Coulomb’s Law of point charges- Electric flux-Gauss’s Law-
Electrical scalar potential- different types of potential distribution- Potential gradient- Boundary
conditions Capacitance: Capacitance of isolated sphere- capacitance between two concentric sphere
shells- capacitance between coaxial cylinders- capacitance between parallel wires. Vector fields:
Divergence and curl- Divergence theorem- Stokes theorem.
266
Module 2
Magnetic field: Steady current and current density in a conductor- Biot-Savarts Law- Ampere’s
Law- Helmholtz theorems- Faraday’s law of electromagnetic induction- Solenoid, toroid, inductance
of transmission line- Mutual inductance energy stored in magnetic fields- Magnetic dipole- Electric
and Magnetic boundary conditions- vector magnetic potential.
Module 3
Maxwell’s equations and travelling waves: conduction current and displacement current-
Maxwell’s equations- Plane waves- Poynting theorem and Poynting vector- Plane electromagnetic
waves- Solution for free space condition- Uniform plane wave-wave equation for conducting
medium- Wave polarization- Poisson’s and Laplace equations.
Module 4
Guided waves between parallel planes- transverse electric and transverse magnetic waves and its
characteristics- Rectangular wave guides- modes of propagation.
Module 5
Transmission lines -Transmission line equations- transmission line parameters- Skin effect- VSWR-
Characteristic impedance- Stub matching- Smith chart - Phase velocity and group velocity.
References
1. Engineering Electromagnetics: W. H. Hayt, Mc Graw Hill Publications.

2. Electromagnetics: J. D. Kraus, Mc Graw Hill Publications.
3. Engineering electromagnetics: E. C. Jordan.
4. Field & Wave Electromagnetic: Cheng, Pearson Education.
5. Electromagnetics: Edminister, Schaum series, 2 Edn.
6. Electromagnetic Theory: B. Premlet.
7. Electromagnetic Theory: Sadiku, Oxford University Press.
COMPUTER ORGANISATION AND ARCHITECTURE

LA 504 2+1+0
Module 1
Basic structure of computer hardware and software- addressing methods and machine programming
sequencing- different addressing modes- instruction sets- computer arithmetic logic design- fast
adders- multiplication- Booth’s algorithm- fast multiplication- integer division- floating point
numbers.
Module 2
Control unit- instruction execution cycle- sequencing of control signals- hardwired control- PLAs-
micro programmed controls- control signals- micro instructions - Micro program sequencing- branch
address modification- pre fetching of micro instructions.
Module 3
Memory organization- semi conductor RAM memories- internal organization- bipolar and MOS
devices- dynamic memories- multiple memory modules and interleaving- cache memories -mapping
267
functions - replacement algorithms- virtual memories- address translation-page tables - memory
management units- secondary memories- disk drives- standards.
Module 4
Input-Output organization- accessing I/O devices- direct memory access (DMA)- interrupts and
interrupt handling- handling multiple devices- device identification- vectored interrupts- interrupt
nesting- daisy chaining- I/O interfaces- serial and parallel standards- buses-scheduling- bus
arbitrations- printers- plotters- VDUs.
Module 5
Introduction to parallel processing and architecture- classification- array processors- pipeline
architecture- interconnection- networks- multistage networks- message passing architecture.
References
1. Computer organization – Hamacher C V, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Computer Systems and Architecture – Vincent P Heuring, H F Jordan, Pearson Edn.
3. Computer organization and Design – Pal Choudhary
4. Computer organization and Architecture – Hayes J P
5. Computer Org. & Architecture: Stallings, Pearson Education.

LA 505 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to operational amplifiers – Basic differential amplifier - dual input balanced output and
unbalanced output- Internal block schematic of op amp - Pin identification- power supply
requirements - typical data sheet - Op-amp parameters - ideal op amp - transfer curve - equivalent
circuit- open loop configurations - frequency response of op amps - compensating networks - slew
rate and its effect.
Module 2
Op amp in closed loop configuration: Different feed back configurations- Voltage series feedback
and voltage shunt feedback - concept of virtual ground- voltage follower - V/I converters and its
applications - Differential amplifiers with one op amp and 3 op amps- Use of offset minimizing
resistor (ROM) and its design.
Module 3
Op amp applications- Summer- Subtractor- Log amplifier- Antilog amplifier- Comparators: zero
crossing- using voltage reference- regenerative (Schmitt trigger) comparators- Astable and
monostable multivibrators- Triangular and sawtooth wave generators- Integrator and differentiator-
RC phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators-Sample and hold circuit- Peak detector circuit.
268
Module 4
Filters and timers: LPF- HPF- BPF- Notch and all pass filters- I order and II order filters- Switched
capacitor filter- Switched capacitor integrator. 555 timers – Functional block diagram- Astable
multivibrator, monostable multivibrator and its applications.
Module 5
Specialized ICs and applications: Voltage regulator ICs – 78XX and 79XX series- 317 variable
regulators- 1723 switching regulators- 566 VCO chip- Phase locked loop(PLL) - capture and lock
range- 565 PLL - PLL applications: Frequency multiplication and division- AM demodulation- FM
detection- FSK demodulation - LM 380 power amplifier - intercom using LM 380- 8038 Function
generator chip - applications.
References
1. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ramakand Gaykwad- PHI publications.

2. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: R F Coughlin- Pearson Education.
3. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ravi Raj Dudeja- Umesh Publications.
4. Linear Integrated circuits: Roy Choudhary & Jain- Wiely Eastern Publications.
5. Integrated circuits: K R Botkar
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

L506 3+1+0
Module1
Introduction to microprocessors and microcomputers: Function of microprocessors- architecture of
8085- pin configuration and functions – tristate bus concept - generation of control signals - bus
timings – de-multiplexing AD0-AD7 – flags - memory decoding - interfacing of RAM and EPROM -
I/O addressing - I/O mapped I/O - and memory mapped I/O schemes - instruction execution -
fetch/execute cycle - instruction timings and operation status.
Module 2
Atmel AT89C51 microcontroller – features - pin configurations - internal block schematic - pin
descriptions - PORT0, PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, idle & power down mode - power control register -
program protection modes - flash programming & verification.
Module 3
Memory organization - program memory - data memory - direct & indirect addressing area - Program
status word - register banks - addressing modes - instruction set – arithmetic - logical and data
transfer instructions - Boolean instructions - program branching instructions - Programming
examples.
Module 4
269
Machine cycles – interrupts - interrupt sources - interrupt enable register - interrupt priority -
interrupt control system - interrupt handling - single step operation - port bit latches and buffers -
port structures and operation - accessing external memory – programming examples.
Module 5
Timer0 & Timer1 - TMOD SFR - mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3 - TCON SFR - serial interface -
SCON SFR - mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3- block schematics- baud rates- power on reset circuit-
ONCE mode- on chip oscillator- external program & data memory timing diagrams- I/O port timings
– programming examples.
References
1. The 8051 Microcontroller: Muhammad Ali Mazidi, Pearson Education.

2. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International
3. Microprocessors and Architecture: Ramesh S Goankar
4. Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI
5. Web site of Atmel - www.atmel.com
DIGITAL IC LAB
LA 507 0+0+4
List of experiments
1. TTL & CMOS characteristics (7400, CD4001)

2. Interfacing of TTL & electromagnetic relay using transistor, opto coupler (4N33) & Darlington
arrays (ULN2803).
3. Logic family interconnection (TTL to CMOS & CMOS to TTL)
4. Design of half adder & full adder using gates.
5. Design and testing of ripple & synchronous counters using JK flip flops (7473, 7476)
6. Counters using shift registers (Ring counter & Johnson counter).
7. Study of counter ICs (7490, 74190).
8. Design of astable & mono-stable multi-vibrators using gates.
9. Design of mono-shots using dedicated ICs (74123).
10. Logic design using multiplexers (74150).
11. Logic design using decoders (74138).
12. Adders, Subtractors, multipliers.
13. Design of 7 segment display circuits-static/dynamic (7447, FND542).
14. PRBS generator.
15. Digital circuit simulation using electronic work bench/ similar working tools.
Note
Any experiment related to LA402 may be added to the above list.
COMMUNICATION - I LAB
270
L 508 0+0+4
List of experiments
1. Passive filters – constant K and M derived.

2. Amplitude modulation.
3. Frequency modulation.
4. PWM using SG3525.
5. 555 Applications
6. 566 Applications
7. Study of 565 and its applications
8. Crystal oscillator
9. Oscillators using OP-AMP
10. Colpitts & Hartley oscillator.
11. Multiplexing using analog multiplexer IC’s.
Note
Any other experiments may be added to the above list related to LA403.
SIXTH SEMESTER
271
272
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & ECONOMICS
LA 601 3+2+0
PART A: INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT
Module 1
Modern concept of Management: Scientific management-Functions of management-Planning-
Organising- Staffing-Directing- Motivating- Communicating- Co-ordinating- Controlling-
Organisational structures- Line, Line and staff and Functional relationships- Span of control-
Delegation- Management by Objectives.
Module 2
Personnel management: Objectives and functions of personnel management- Recruitment-Selection
and training of workers- Labour Welfare- Industrial Fatigue- Industrial disputes-Trade Unions-
Quality circles. Formation of companies: Proprietory-Partnership-Joint stock companies- Public
sector- Joint sector and Co-operative sector.
Module 3
Marketing Management: Pricing- Promotion- Channels of distribution- Market research-Advertising.
Production Management: Batch and mass production- Inventory control- EOQ-Project planning by
PERT/CPM- Construction of Network (Basic ideas only).
PART B: ECONOMICS
Module 4
Theory of demand and supply- Price mechanism- Factors of production- Land, labour, capital and
organization- National income- Difficulties in estimation- Taxation- Direct and indirect taxes-
Progressive and regressive- Black money- Inflation-Causes and consequences.
Module 5
Indian financial system- Reserve bank of India: Functions- Commercial banking system-
Development financial institutions- IDBI- ICICI- SIDBI- IRBI- NABARD- Investment institutions-
UTI- Insurance companies- Indian capital market- Stock market- Functions- Role of the public
sector- Privatisation- Multinational corporations and their impact on the Indian economy.
References
1. Industrial Management - O P Khanna, Dhanpat Rai Pub.

2. Industrial Management - K.K. Ahuja, Khanna Pub.
3. Marketing Management - Philip Kotler, PHI
4. Indian economy - A.N. Agarwal, Wishwa Prakashan
5. Modern economic theory - K.K Dewett, Shyam Lal charitable trust.
DIGITAL COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUES

L 602 3+1+0
Module 1
273
Random Signal Theory: Review of discrete and continuous random variables-Gaussian probability
function- properties- error function- complementary error function. Base band data transmission: -
Base band binary data transmission system- Inter symbol interference- Nyquist pulse shaping
criteria- Optimum transmitting- Receiving filters.
Module 2
Correlative coding: -Duobinary Base band PAM system- Use of controlled ISI- M-ary signaling
scheme (no analysis)- Binary versus M-ary signaling schemes- pre coding- Bipolar coding-
Manchester coding- HDB coding- Equalization- Adaptive equalization- Eye pattern- Scrambler-
Unscrambler.
Module 3
Digital transmission: - BPSK- DPSK- M-ary PSK- QPSK- BFSK- M-ary FSK- MSK- comparison.
Module 4
Digital transmission of Analog signals: - Sampling - Quantizing uniform non-uniform quantization
-Companding- A law μ law PCM system- DPCM delta modulation system- slope over loading-
ADM- CVSD- Quantization noise.
Module 5
Noise in communication system: - Noise types- SNR- Probability of error- Effective Noise
temperature- Noise figure- Detection of binary signals in Gaussian noise: -Maximum likelihood
Receiver structure- Matched filter-Correlation realization of matched filter- optimizing error
performance- error probability performance of binary transmission system.
References
1. Digital Communications: Sklar,Pearson Education

2. Digital and Analog Communication System: K Sam Shanmugam.
3. Principles of Communication System: Taub & Shilling, TMH.
4. Digital Communication- Siman Haykin.
5. Communication Systems Engineering: Proakis, Pearson Education.
6. Digital & Analog Communication System- Leon W Couch, Pearson Education.

LTA 603 3+1+0
Module1
Review of signals and systems: Introduction - advantages and limitations of Digital Signal
Processing. Infinite Impulse Response (IIR) Filters - Signal Flowgraph- Basic Network structure for
IIR filter- Direct- Cascade- Parallel Forms. Design of IIR Digital filters from analog filters-
274
Butterworth design- Chebyshev design- design based on numerical solutions of differential
equations- Impulse Invariant Transformation.
Module 2
Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters: Linear phase FIR filters- Frequency response of linear
phase FIR filters - Location of the zeros of linear phase FIR filters. Realization of FIR- cascade -
lattice design-Fourier Series method- using windows-rectangular- triangular or Barlett windows-
Hanning- Hamming- Blackman- Kaiser windows.
Module 3
Discrete fourier Transform: Properties-Circular convolution- Linear Convolution using DFT-
relation between Z- Transform and DFT- Fast Fourier Transform; decimation – in time and
Frequency - FFT algorithms – General Computation using Radix 2 algorithm.
Module 4
Finite word length effects in digital filters: Introduction- Number Representation - Fixed Point-
Sign-Magnitude - One’s-complement- Two’s - complement forms -Addition of two fixed point
numbers- Multiplication in Fixed Point arithmetic - Floating point numbers- Block floating point
numbers- quantization - truncation- rounding - effects due to truncation and rounding- Input
quantization error - Product quantization error - Co-efficient quantization error- zero-input limit
cycle Oscillations - Overflow limit cycle Oscillations - Scaling- Quantization in Floating Point
realization IIR digital filters - Finite Word Length Effects in FIR Digital Filters- Quantization effects
in the Computation of the DFT- quantization errors in FFT algorithms.
Module 5
Applications of digital signal processing: Speech Processing- speech analysis- speech coding- sub
band coding- channel vecoder- homomorphic vecoder- digital processing of audio signals- Radar
signal processing- DSP based measurements systems. Equi ripple FIR design- PCM DSP chips- a
general study.
References
1. Digital signal processing: Ifechor- Pearson edn.

2. Desecrate time signal processing: Oppenhiem- Pearson edn.
3. Digital signal processing: Oppenhiem and Sheffer- PHI
4. Introduction to Digital signal processing: Johny R Johnson
5. Digital signal processing: Proakis and Manolakis.
6. Digital signal processing: P Ramesh Babu- Scitech Pub.
RADIATION & PROPAGATION
L 604 2+1+0
Module1
Retarded potentials: Radiation from an A.C current element monopoles and dipoles-power radiated
from a dipole isotropic radiators- radiation pattern-radiation intensity-directive gain-power antenna
efficiency-effective area-effective length and aperture-Reciprocity theorem-radiation resistance-
antenna beam width.
Module 2
275
Antenna array: Classifications-Broad-side, End-fire arrays, Array of n- point, two point sources,
multiplication of patterns -binomial array-stacked array folded dipole- reflector-Basic principles of
antenna-parabolic reflector different methods- Chebyshev arrays- super directive arrays.
Module 3
VLF and LF transmitting antennas-effects of ground on antenna-performance-grounded antennas-
effects of antenna height and effective height of antenna-medium frequency antennas-dipole
antennas-V and inverted V antennas-Rhombic antenna-traveling wave antennas-folded dipole, Yagi-
Uda antenna-Basic principles of radio direction finding-loop antennas, Microstrip antennas.
Module 4
Factors involved in the propagation of radio waves: the ground wave-Reflection of radio waves
by the surface of the earth-space wave propagation-considerations in space wave propagation-
atmospheric effects in space wave propagation-ionosphere and its effects on radio waves
-mechanism of ionosphere propagation-refraction and reflection of sky waves by ionosphere-ray
paths-skip distance-maximum usable frequency-vertical and oblique incidence-fading of signals -
selective fading-diversity reception, Duct Propagation.
Module 5
Antenna measurements: Input impedance- SWR method- radiation pattern measurements- beam
width measurements-gain measurements-measurements of radiation resistance -radiation efficiency.
References
1. Antennas and wave propagation - K. D. Prasad

2. Antennas - John Krauss, Mc Graw Hill
3. Antenna theory and design- A. Ballanis
4. Radio Engg - F E Terman, Mc Graw Hill.
ELECTRONIC INSTRUMENTATION
L 605 3+1+0
Module 1
Objectives of engineering measurement-Basic measuring system-block diagram and description-
Performance characteristics of instruments-static and dynamic. Types of data-static-dynamic-
transient-rise time, response time & settling time. Analog and digital information-comparison. Error
-classification of measurement errors--sources of measurement errors.
Module 2
Transducers-parameters of electrical transducers-types-active and passive-analogue and digital types
of transducers. Electromechanical type-potentiometric, inductive (self generating and non self
generating type), capacitive, piezo electric, strain gauge, ionization and mechano electronic type.
Opto electrical type-photo emissive, photo conductive and photo voltaic type. Frequency generating
type-digital encoders-selection criteria for transducers.
276
Module 3
Intermediate elements-instrumentation amplifier, isolation amplifier. Data transmission elements-
block diagram of telemetering system-classification of telemetering systern-Electrical telemetering
system--voltage, current and position type-RF telemetery-pulse telemetery (analog and digital)-pulse
amplitude, pulse frequency, pulse duration and pulse position modulation.
Module 4
Bridge measurements - Wheatstone bridge - guarded Wheatstone bridge. AC bridges - Owen's
bridge - Shering Bridge - Wein Bridge - Wagner ground connection. Recording techniques-strip
chart recorders-basic principles of digital recording. Basic principles of Signal Analyzers-Distortion
analyzer wave analyzer, spectrum analyzer.
Module 5
Basic measurements - Strain measurement - Pressure measurement - Flow measurement -
Temperature measurement - Force & torque measurement. Multiplexing - D/A multiplexing and A/D
multiplexing.
References
1. Measurement Systems - Doeblin, MGH.

2. Instrumentation-devices and systems - Rangan, Sarma & Mani, TMH.
3. Principles of Measurement & Instrumentation – Morris, PHI.
4. Transducers & Instrumentation – D.U. S Murthy, PHI.
CONTROL SYSTEMS
L 606 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to control system – Basic idea of control systems and their classifications – transfer
function – transfer function of electrical, mechanical and electromechanical system – block diagram
– signal flow graph – Mason’s gain formula.
Module 2
Time domain Analysis – Type and order of a system – typical test signals for the time response of
control system – impulse and step response of first and second order systems – steady state error –
static and dynamic error coefficients – concepts of stability – Routh Hurwitz criterion – basic ideas
of proportional, derivative and integral controllers.
Module 3
Frequency domain analysis – frequency response – frequency domain specifications – Bode Plot –
Nicol’s chart – Nyquist stability criterion – relative stability – gain margin – phase margin.
Module 4
277
Root Locus technique – basic theory and properties of root loci – procedure for construction of root
loci – error detectors – servo motor – tacho generator – magnetic amplifier.
Module 5
State variable analysis and compensation techniques – introduction to state variable concepts – state
variable description of linear dynamic systems – state equations – state transition matrix –
representaion of state equations – lag compensator – lead compensator – lag lead compensator
(design of compensators is not needed).
References
1. Modern control engineering – Katsuhiko Ogata, Pearson Edn

2. Control systems principles and design: M. Gopal, TMH.
3. Automatic control system – B.C. Kuo, PHI.
4. Control system design: Graham C Goodwin, PHI.
5. Modern Control Systems: Dorf, Pearson Education.
LINEAR IC LAB
L 607 0+0+3
List of Experiments
1. Measurement of op amp parameters.

2. Active filters: LPF, HPF, BPF, All pass & notch filters.
3. Square wave, Triangular, Saw tooth generation using op amp.
4. Logarithmic amplifiers.
5. Precision rectifiers.
6. Switched capacitor filter.
7. Sample and hold circuit.
8. 8038 function generators.
9. Analog to digital converters.
10. Digital to analog converters.
Note
Any experiment related to L505 may be added to the above list.
MINI PROJECT
L 608 0+0+3
The mini project will involve the design, construction, and debugging of an electronic system
approved by the department. There will be several projects such as intercom, SMPS, burglar alarm,
UPS, inverter, voting machine etc. The schematic and PCB design should be done using any of the
standard schematic capture & PCB design software. Each student may choose to buy, for his
convenience, his own components and accessories. Each student must keep a project notebook. The
notebooks will be checked periodically throughout the semester, as part of the project grade.
In addition to this, the following laboratory experiments should also be done in the lab.
1. Astable and mono stable multi-vibrators using 555
278
2. Light activated alarm circuit
3. Speed control of electric fan using triac
4. Illumination control circuits
5. Touch control circuits
6. Sound operated circuits.
7. Schematic capture software (OrCAD or similar) familiarization.
8. PCB design software (OrCAD Layout or similar) familiarization.
A demonstration and oral examination on the mini project also should be done at the end of the
semester. The university examination will consist of two parts. One of the lab experiments will be
given for examination to be completed within 60 to 90 minutes with a maximum of 30% marks. 70%
marks will be allotted for the demonstration and viva voce on the mini project.
279
SEVENTH SEMESTER
280
MICRO-CONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN
LA701 2+1+0
Module 1
Various logic families - features – comparison – PLA – PAL- GAL -comparison – combinational
PAL – PAL with flip-flops – study of 16L8, 22V10 GAL – dual port RAM – FIFO - FPGA - gate
arrays.
Module 2
Embedded C compiler – advantages – memory models – interrupt functions – code optimization -
89C2051 micro-controller- architecture-comparison with 89C51- design of a simple trainer circuit
using 89C51/89C2051 µC – interfacing of DIP switch, LED, 7 segment display, alphanumeric LCD
– relay interface – design of a traffic light control system - interfacing programs using C and
assembly language.
Module 3
Analog to digital converters- single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, sigma delta, flash –
comparison - typical ICs - A/D interface – digital to analog converters – different types – D/A
interface - optically isolated triac interface- design of a temperature control system- interfacing
programs using C and assembly language.
Module 4
Serial bus standards - I2C bus, SPI bus – operation – timing diagrams – 2 wire serial EEPROM –
24C04 – 3wire serial EEPROM – 93C46 - interfacing - serial communication standards - RS232,
RS422, RS485 – comparison – MAX232 line driver/ receiver - interfacing – interfacing programs
using C and assembly language - low voltage differential signaling – PC printer port – registers –
interfacing - universal serial bus – PCI bus.
Module 5
Matrix key board interface - AT keyboard – commands – keyboard response codes - watch dog
timers - DS1232 watch dog timer – real time clocks – DS1302 RTC – interfacing - measurement of
frequency - phase angle - power factor – stepper motor interface - dc motor speed control – L293
motor driver - design of a position control system - interfacing programs using C and assembly
language.
References

2. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International.
3. Digital fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Education.
4. Programming and customizing the 8051 µC: Myke Predko, TMH
5. Programming with ANSI C and turbo C: Kamthane, Pearson Education.
6. Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI.
7. Web site of Atmel semiconductors - www.atmel.com
VLSI TECHNOLOGY
LA 702 3+1+0
281
Module 1
Process steps in IC fabrication: Crystal growth and wafer preparation- Czochralski process-
apparatus- silicon shaping, slicing and polishing- Diffusion of impurities- physical mechanism-
Fick’s I and II law of diffusion- Diffusion profiles- complementary (erfc) error function- Gaussian
profile- Ion implantation- Annealing process- Oxidation process- Lithography- Photolithography,
Fine line lithography, electron beam and x-ray lithography- Chemical vapour deposition (CVD)-
epitaxial growth- reactors- metallisation- patterning- wire bonding and packaging.
Module 2
Transistor fabrication- buried layer- impurity profile- parasitic effects- monolithic diodes- schottky
diodes and transistors- FET structures- JFET- MOSFET- PMOS and NMOS, control of threshold
voltage (Vth)- silicon gate technology- Monolithic resistors- sheet resistance and resistor design-
resistors in diffused regions- MOS resistors- monolithic capacitors- junction and MOS structures- IC
Module 3
Module 4
gates, CMOS logic systems – bus lines- arrangements- power dissipation- power supply rail
Module 5
References
1. Modern VLSI design: Wolf, Pearson Education.

2. VLSI technology: S M Sze, Mc Graw Hill pub.
3. Basic VLSI design: Douglas Pucknell, PHI.
MICROWAVE AND RADAR ENGINEERING

L703 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Microwaves- Characteristic features- advantages and applications- Wave guides-
basic concepts and properties. Scattering matrix- Concept of N port scattering matrix representation-
Properties of S matrix- S matrix formulation of two-port junction. Passive microwave devices- T
junctions- H plane, E plane and EH plane Tee junctions, its S matrix and properties- Applications of
282
Hybrid junction. Directional coupler-Termination- Gyrator- Isolator- Circulator- Phase changer-
Attenuator.
Module 2
Microwave measurements- frequency- power- VSWR- impedance. Microwave tubes- High
frequency limitations- Magnetron- Multicavity Klystron- Reflex Klystron- Traveling Wave Tube-
principle of operation. Microwave Communication: Basic Principles of Microwave Links –
Microwave relay Systems – block schematic of terminal transmitters and receivers – repeaters –
basic principles of design of a microwave links.
Module 3
Microwave semiconductor devices- Principle of operation of Transistors and FETs. Transferred
Electron Devices- Gunn diode- Gunn diode as an Oscillator and an amplifier- InP diode- Tunnel
diode- principle of operation. Avalanche Transit time devices- IMPATT and TRAPATT devices-
principle of operation.
Module 4
Radar range equation- Block schematic of pulse radar- Radar frequencies- Applications of radar-
CW radar- applications of CW radar- CW radar with nonzero IF- FM CW radar-FM CW altimeter-
MTI and Pulse Doppler radar.
Module 5
Direction finders- Instrument Landing System- Radio ranges. Navigation- Hyperbolic navigation-
LORAN. Satellite navigation- Doppler navigation - Global positioning system- Different types of
microwave antennas-basic principles.
References
1. Microwave devices and circuit: Samuel Liao, PHI.

2. Microwave and radar — A K Maini, Khanna Publishers.
3. Microwave and Radar Engg. — M Kulkarni.
4. Introduction to radar systems — Merrill I Skolnik, McGraw Hill.
5. Radar systems and radio aids to navigation — A K Sen & A B Bhattacharya.
OPTICAL FIBRE COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

L704 2+1+0
Module 1
Recollection of basic principles of optics: ray theory- reflections at boundary- critical angle- total
internal reflection - Optical wave guides - Propagation in fibre- expression for acceptance angle-
acceptance cone – numerical aperture- V number - Index profile-effect of index profile on
propagation.
Module 2
283
SI fibre and GI fibre - Brief description of modes in SI fibre and GI fibre- Pulse dispersion and
Band Width limitation- Mode coupling – Attenuation in single mode and multimode fibres- Optic
fibre cables- characteristics of cables- Optic fibre couplers: types of coupling – fibre to fibre joints-
splicing techniques- optical fibre connectors.
Module 3
Optical sources- LEDs, LASER diodes- operating characteristics- photo-detectors-principles of
photo detection – PIN diode – APD – operating principles – photo-multiplier tubes- source to fibre
power launching – lensing schemes- modulation circuits.
Module 4
Basic optical communication systems- point-to-point link- rise time budget- protection techniques-
WDM – transceiver requirements-TDM- optical amplifiers- SOAs – EDFAs- optical receivers-
Introduction to optical fibre networks.
Module 5
OTDR - Measurements- numerical aperture- dispersion measurements- refractive index profile
measurements- band width measurements- fibre attenuation measurements- cutoff wave length
measurements- applications of fibre optic systems- future developments
References
1. Fibre optic communication technology: Djafer K Mynbaev, Pearson Education.
2. Electronic communication: Dennis Roddy & John coolen, PHI.
3. Optic fibre communication: John M senior, PHI.
4. Telecommunication principle circuits Systems and experiments: S.Ramabhadran, Khanna.
5. Optical communication system: John Gower, PHI
6. Fibre optics in telecommunication: Sharma, Mc Graw Hill
7. Optical fibre and fibre optic communication: Subir Kumar Sarkar, S Chand & co. Ltd
8. Optical communication: M Mukund Rao , Universities press.
9. Fiber Optic Communication: Palais, Pearson Education.
10. Digital Communication system with Satellites & Fibre Optics Applications: Kolimbris, Pearson
Education.
11. Optical Networks - 3rd Generation Transport systems: Black, Pearson Education.
INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING

L705 3+1+0
Module 1
Information theory: - Concept of amount of information -units, Entropy -marginal, conditional and
joint entropies -relation among entropies Mutual information, information rate, channel capacity,
redundancy and efficiency of channels.
Module 2
Discrete channels: - Symmetric channels, Binary Symmetric Channel, Binary Erasure Channel,
Cascaded channels, repetition of symbols, Binary unsymmetric channel, Shannon theorem.
Continuous channels: - Capacity of band limited Gaussian channels, Shannon-Hartley theorem,
Trade off between band width and signal to noise ratio, Capacity of a channel with infinite band
width, Optimum modulation system.
Module 3
284
Source coding: - Encoding techniques, Purpose of encoding, Instantaneous codes, Construction of
instantaneous codes, Kraft's inequality, Coding efficiency and redundancy, Noiseless coding
theorem. Construction of basic source codes: - Shannon-Fano algorithm, Huffman coding,
Arithmetic coding, ZIP coding.
Module 4
Codes for error detection and correction: - Parity check coding, Linear block codes, Error detecting
and correcting capabilities, Generator and Parity check matrices, Standard array and Syndrome
decoding, Hamming codes, Encoding and decoding of systematic and unsystematic codes. Cyclic
codes: - Generator polynomial, Generator and Parity check matrices, Encoding of cyclic codes,
Syndrome computation and error detection, Decoding of cyclic codes, BCH codes, RS codes, Burst
error correction.
Module 5
Convolutional codes: - Encoding- State, Tree and Trellis diagrams, Maximum likelihood decoding
of convolutional codes -Viterby algorithm, Sequential decoding -Stack algorithm. Interleaving
techniques: - Block and convolutional interleaving, Coding and interleaving applied to CD digital
audio system -CIRC encoding and decoding, interpolation and muting. ARQ: - Types of ARQ,
Performance of ARQ, Probability of error and throughput.
References
1. Communication Systems: Simon Haykin, John Wiley & Sons. Pvt. Ltd.
2. Principles of Communication Systems: Taub & Schilling, Tata McGraw-Hill
3. Principles of Digital Communication: Das, Mullick & Chatterjee, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
4. Error Control Coding Fundamentals and Applications: Shu Lin & Daniel J. Costello Jr., Prentice
Hall Inc.
5. Digital Communications Fundamentals and Applications: Bernard Sklar, Person Education Asia
CMELRTA 706.1 3+1+0
Module1 Classical optimization techniques

Module 2 One-dimensional unconstrained minimization

Module 3 Unconstrained minimization

Module 4 Integer – Linear programming problem

Module 5 Network Techniques

285
References
1. Optimization theory and application: S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd.
2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering: A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla,
3. Principles of Operations Research for Management: F. S. Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena,
4. Operation Research an introduction: H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition.
5. Operations Research: R. Panneerselvam, PHI
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++ (ELECTIVE - I)

LA706-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to loops: Evolution of object oriented languages - Support for experiments and
structure - process of language translation – Need of objects - Definition of Object - Oriented
Language.
Module 2
Encapsulation & Inheritance: Building classes - Declaring objects Member functions -
constructors and destructors members access control.
Module 3
POLYMORPHISM - Virtual functions - Defining virtual functions – Usage of virtual functions -
Abstract classes - simulation using abstract classes.
Module 4
OVERLOADING: Overloading functions - Overloading operators to provide new meaning -
Selecting Friend or Member Functions for Operator Overloading.
Module 5
DYNAMIC OBJECTS: Dynamic object allocation - Using references with dynamic memory
allocation - Inline functions outside class definitions - Friend functions, Applications - Object
oriented databases case study – some language (Simula, Smalltalk, C++, Ada) features.
References
1. Data abstraction & OOP in C++: Gordenkeeth, Wiley Eastern.

2. Object oriented programming usig C++: Pohl, Pearson Education.
3. Object oriented programming with C++: E. Balaguruswamy, TMH.
4. C++ Programming language: Strostroup, Pearson Education.
5. Object Oriented Programming in C++: Nabajyoti Bjarne.
NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE - I)

L706-3 3+1+0
Module 1
286
Introduction - Principles - artificial neuron - activation functions - Single layer & multi-layer
networks - Training artificial neural networks - Perception - Representation - Linear separability -
Learning - Training algorithms.
Module 2
Back Propagation - Training algorithm - Applications - network configurations - Network paralysis -
Local minima - temporal instability.
Module 3
Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer - Training the cohenen layer - Pre initializing the
wright vectors - statistical properties - Training the Grosbery layer - Full counter propagation
network - Application.
Module 4
Statistical methods- Boltzmann’s Training - Cauche training - Artificial specific heat methods -
Applications to general non-linear optimization problems.
Module 5
Hopfield nets - Recurrent networks - stability - Associative memory - applications - Thermo dynamic
systems - Statistical Hopfield networks – Bi-directional associative memories - Continuous BAM -
Adaptive resonance theory - Architecture classification - Implementation.
Text Book
Neural Computing Theory & Practice - Philip D. Wasserman.
References
1. Neural Networks - Simon Haykins, Pearson Education.

2. Adaptive Pattern Recognition & Neural Networks - Pay Y.H.
3. An Introduction to neural computing - Chapman & Hall
4. Artificial Neural Networks - Robert J. Schalkoff, McGraw Hill
5. Artificial Neural Networks - B.Yegnanarayana, PHI
BIOMEDICAL ENGINEERING (ELECTIVE - I)

L 706-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Biometrics- Biomedical instruments- parameters- Man-instrument system- components-
physiological systems of human body- cardiovascular system- The heart- Respiratory system- blood
purification- The Kidney- Nervous system- Bioelectric potentials- Resting and Action potentials-
propagation- bio-potential electrodes- Transducers- ECG-EEG-EMG.
Module 2
Biomedical measurements: ECG measurement- electrodes and leads- ECG recorder- different
recorders. Blood pressure measurements- indirect measurement- sphygmomanometer- direct
measurement techniques. Respiratory measurements- Lung volume and capacities- Spirometer- Gas
287
exchange measurements. Clinical measurements: Blood cells- tests on blood cells- chemical tests-
colorimeter- spectro photometer- continuous flow analyzer.
Module 3
Ultrasonic measurements: Characteristics of Ultrasound- Attenuation- Doppler effect- basic modes
of transmission- pulsed, continuous, pulsed Doppler- Ultrasonic imaging- Block schematic of A
mode, B mode, M mode instruments- Electronic scanners: Linear and Phased array- Applications of
Ultrasound: Gynecology and obstetrics- blood flow measurements- cardiac imaging-
echocardiography- echoencephalography.
Module 4
X ray imaging and measurements: x ray generation- x ray machine- C arm machine- image
intensifiers- x ray films- photographic imaging- Fluoroscopy- computed tomography- CAT scan:
block schematic- Gantry- detectors.
Module 5
Bio-telemetry: components in telemetry system- transmitter-receiver- pulse modulators- implantable
units- applications. Intensive care unit: Planning and location of different instruments- Bedside
monitors- Prosthetic instruments- artificial heart- pump oxygenators- hemodialysis- artificial kidney-
different dialysers. Electrical safety: Physiological effects of electric current- let go current- shock
hazards- need of grounding- isolation of patients- isolated power distribution system.
References
1. Introduction to biomedical technology: Joseph J Carr, Pearson Edn.

2. Biomedical Instrumentation & Measurements: Leslie Cromwell, PHI.
3. Biomedical Instrumentation: John G Webster, Houghton Mifflin Company.
4. A handbook to biomedical instrumentation: R S Khandpur, Tata Mc Graw Hill Pub.
PRINCIPLES OF REAL TIME SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - I)

LA 706-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Real Time Systems – Structure of real time systems, real time computer, task classes
– Periodic, Aperiodic, critical, Non-critical, definition of real time systems – real time systems,
embedded systems - Hard real time systems, soft real time systems, real time design issues.
Module 2
Real time kernel – polled loop systems, co-routines, interrupt driven systems – sporadic, fixed rate
systems, hybrid systems, task control block - task status, scheduling – uni-processor scheduling –
traditional rate monotonic, rate monotonic deferred server, EDF, IRIS tasks – multiprocessor
scheduling – utilization balancing algorithm, next-fit, bin- packing algorithm, myopic offline, buddy
strategy (no need of proofs) fault tolerant scheduling.
Module 3
Communication – Communication Media and message sending topologies, network architecture
issues, protocols – contention – based, token - based, stop and go multi-loop, polled bus, hierarchal,
round robin, fault tolerant routing – clocks and synchronization – fault tolerant synchronization in
hardware, synchronization in software.
288
Module 4
Fault tolerance – definition, cause of failure, fault types, fault detection and containment, redundancy
– hardware, software, time, information, integrated failure handling – reliability – parameter values –
series – parallel systems, NMR clusters, combinational model, master chain model, fault latency,
transient faults, software error models.
Module 5
Programming Languages – Desired language characteristics, Real time databases, characteristics,
main memory databases, Transaction, Disk schedule algorithms, Databases for hard real time
systems, maintaining serialization constituency.
Text Book
Real Time Systems - C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (McGraw Hill)
References
1. Real Time Systems, Design & Analysis - Philip Laplante (IEEE)

2. Real Time Systems - Krishna, Tata McGraw Hill
MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB

LA707 0+0+3
1. Familiarization of 8085 trainer kit, manual code entry, simple examples.

2. Design and construction of a simple flash programmer for 89C51/89C2051 µC.
3. Study of Intel Hex file format.
4. Computer aided assembly language program development for 89C51/89C2051.
5. Use of assembler, linker and simulator for 89C51/89C2051.
6. Programming examples. Sorting, arithmetic operations (Using assembler, simulator).
7. Programming examples using Embedded ‘C’ compiler for 89C51/89C2051.
8. Programming examples using timer, external interrupts.
9. Design and construction of the following interfacing modules.
a) A/D converter.
b) D/A converter.
c) Alphanumeric LCD display.
d) Matrix keyboard interface.
e) Seven segment display.
f) Extending I/O port using shift registers(74HC595, 74HC165).
g) Stepper motor.
h) Infra red transmission and reception.
i) Opto isolated I/P and O/P.
j) Serial EEPROM.
k) Real time clock.
l) Interfacing using RS 232 and printer port.
Note
289
Any other embedded processor with similar or better capability may be used instead of
89C51/89C2051.
COMMUNICATION II LAB
L708 0+0+3
1. Microwave measurements - VSWR, wavelength, Attenuation, Impedance.

2. Antenna Measurements - Gain, Directivity, Radiation Pattern of various types antennae.
3. Characteristics of Klystron.
4. Wave-guide Measurements.
5. Study of optical fibers and optical communication systems.
6. Delta modulation, PCM, PAM, PPM, PWM, ASK, PSK.
7. Experiments of Satellite communication system.
8. Display systems.
9. Study of PLC's.
10. Familiarization of Digital modulation and demodulation Trainer Kit.
290
EIGHTH SEMESTER
291
COMPUTER NETWORKS
LA 801 3+1+0
Module 1
Network goals -topologies- configurations-concept of internet- ISO-OSI 7 Layer Standard -peer
processes-Functions of each layer-TCP/IP reference model - Transmission media -description and
characteristics - base band and broad band transmission-synchronous and asynchronous -full duplex,
half duplex links- Concepts of WAP technology.
Module 2
MODEMS-serial communication standards - X-21 digital interface- Need for data link layer-stop
and wait and sliding window protocol-HDLC-terminal handling- polling-multiplexing-
concentration-virtual circuit and data-grams - routing -congestion control.
Module 3
LAN- base band and broad band Lan’s - carrier sense networks-CSMA/CD -ring network- shared
memory -IEEE802 standards-introduction to X-25. Transport layer- design issues- establishing and
releasing connection - flow control – buffering - crash recovery - a simple transport protocol on X-
25.
Module 4
Session layer- design issues -data exchange - dialogue management - synchronization- remote
procedure call-client server model - Presentation layer-data presentation-compression- network
security-privacy- cryptography- presentation layer in ARPANET.
Module 5
Application layer - virtual terminal - file transfer protocol-E-mail-introduction to distributed system -
ATM-protocol architecture -ATM logical connections -ATM cells -cell transmission- ATM
adaptation layer -AAL protocols -basic principles of SDH and SONET.
References
1. Computer Networks: Andrew S Tannenbaum, Pearson Education.

2. An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking: Keshav, Pearson Education.
3. Computer Networking: A Top Down Approach: Kurose Pearson Education.
4. Computer Network & Internet: Comer, Pearson Education.
5. Data communication: Hausly
6. Computer Networks, protocols standards & interfaces, Uyless Balack
7. Local Area Networks: William Stallings, Pearson Education.
8. Understanding Data Communication and networks- 2nd ed-William A Shay (Vikas Thomson
Learning)
ADVANCED COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

L802 3+1+0
Module1
292
Satellite Communication - Satellite orbits – Geo synchronous orbit –orbital velocity – Round trip
time delay - Antenna look angles - Satellite classifications - spacing - frequency allocation- System
parameters analysis - link equations- Link Budget - Spacecraft subsystem (block schematic).
Tracking and telecommand - Earth stations – Antenna systems – receiver subsystems (block) -
functioning LNA – LNB - down converter - channel filters - demodulators-
INTELSAT/INMARSAT –Overview of INSAT.
Module 2
Types of satellite communication system-FSS, DSS-Direct broadcasting and community broadcast -
Multiple Access Techniques– Introduction- FDM-FM-FDMA, PSK-TDMA, SSMA, CDMA -
Switching techniques – circuit – message - packet switching- Packet satellite network-domestic
satellite system.
Module 3
The cellular concept – Introduction - Frequency reuse –channel assignment – Hand off strategies –
prioritizing handoff –practical handoff – Co-channel interface and system capacity – channel
planning – adjacent channel interference –Cell splitting – sectoring – repeaters – micro-cell concept-
Blue tooth technology- Fundamentals and Applications.
Module 4
Wireless communication system-paging-cordless & cellular system –comparison-Second generation
cellular networks-third generation cellular networks - Global System for Mobile – services and
features – Architecture – Radio subsystem – channel types – frame structure - Global positioning
Systems - basic concepts- system block - positioning – Applications.
Module 5
Spread spectrum Techniques and remote sensing- Pseudo noise sequences –time hopping-frequency
Hopping – Robustness – Fast and Slow hopping – Hybrid & Chirp spread spectrum-
Synchronization – acquisition – Tracking - Concepts of Jamming -Analysis of DS/SS – Analysis of
avoidance-generation of signals-detection –Applications.
References
1. Electronic communication system fundamentals: Wayne Tomasi, Pearson Education.

2. Wireless communication principles and practice: T S Rappaport, Pearson Education.
3. Satellite communication: Gagliardi.
4. Digital Communication Fundamentals and Applications: B Sklar, Pearson Education.
5. Digital communication: Simon Haykin, John Wiley&Sons.
6. Space communication System: Filipowasky, McGrawHill.
ADVANCED MICROPROCESORS
LA803 3+1+0
Module 1
Intel 8086 Microprocessor - Internal architecture – Block diagram – Minimum and maximum mode
operation – Interrupt and Interrupt applications – DMA data transfer – 8087 math coprocessor. 8086
memory organization – even and odd memory banks – segment registers – logical and physical
address – advantages and disadvantages of physical memory.
Module 2
293
Addressing modes used in 80x86 family - Data addressing mode – register addressing, immediate
addressing, direct addressing, register indirect addressing, base plus index addressing, register
relative addressing, base relative plus index addressing, scaled addressing. Program memory
addressing modes - direct program memory addressing, relative program memory addressing. Stack
memory addressing mode.
Module 3
Intel 80286 Microprocessor - 80286 Architecture, system connection – Real address mode operation
– Protected mode operation
Module 4
Intel 80386 Microprocessor - 80386 Architecture and system connection – Real operating mode –
386 protected mode operation – segmentation and virtual memory – segment privilege levels and
protection – call gates – I/O privilege levels – Interrupts and exception handling – task switching –
paging mode – 80386 virtual 86 mode operation.
Module 5
Advanced Intel Microprocessors - 80486 – Processor model – Reduced Instruction cycle – five stage
instruction pipe line – Integrated coprocessor – On board cache – Burst Bus mode. Pentium – super
scalar architecture – u-v pipe line – branch prediction logic – cache structure – BIST (built in self
test) – Introduction to MMX technology.
References
1. The Microprocessors 6th Edition Barry B. Brey Pearson Edu.

2. Microprocessor and Interfacing 2nd Edition Douglous V. Hall TMH
3. The 80x86 family John Uffenbeck
TELEVISION ENGINEERING
L 804 3+1+0
Module 1
Elements of Television system: Basic block schematic of television transmitter and receiver,
Analysis of Television pictures, Scanning, human factor consideration, flicker, interlaced scanning,
number of scanning lines, Horizontal and vertical resolution, maximum video frequency, Colour
resolution and bandwidth, Composite video signal, video signal dimensions, vertical and horizontal
synchronization signal dimensions, channel bandwidth, vestigial side band transmission, channel
bandwidth and allocations for colour transmission.
Module 2
Television camera and transmitters: Photoelectric effects, Working principle of image orthicon,
vidicon, plumbicon, CCD, structure of CCD and its working, Monochrome and Colour television
294
camera: block schematic explanation, TV transmitters: Positive and negative modulation and its
comparison, high level and low level modulation and its comparison. Colour TV picture tubes:
purity and convergence, Delta gun, PIL, Trinitron tubes, LCD screens.
Module 3
Monochrome and colour reception, Monochrome receiver: Detailed block schematic, Yagi
antenna, BALUN transformers, RF tuner, electronic tuning, SAW filters, IF conversion, VSB
reception and correction, video detector, AGC: delayed AGC and Keyed AGC, video amplifier,
cathode and grid modulation, sync separation, horizontal and vertical deflection circuits and wave
forms, sound separation. Power supplies: SMPS and block schematic explanation, EHT generation
and its wave form description, Typical ICs in different stages.
Module 4
Colour Television: Compatibility consideration, Colour response of human eye, Three colour
theory, additive mixing of colours, chromaticity diagram, Luminance and chrominance, colour
difference signal and its generation, Polarity of colour difference signal, Frequency interleaving and
Colour burst signal, delay lines, Basic colour television systems: PAL and NTSC, Block schematic
explanation.
Module 5
Television applications: CCTV and its functional block schematic, Cable television: converters,
cable connections, Satellite television: Dish antenna, LNB, Down converters, Video discs: VCD and
DVD, Digital recording, LASER source, High definition television.
References
1. Monochrome and colour television: R R Gulati, Wiley Eastern.

2. Colour Television, Theory and Practice: S P Bali, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
3. Television engineering: A M Dhake, Tata Mc Graw Hill
4. Basic Television Engineering: Bernad Grob, Mc Graw Hill.

CMELRT 805-1 3+1+0



295

References
1. Linear Integral Equation: Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York

2. A Course on Integral Equations: Allen C.Pipkin, Springer, Verlag
3. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: H.K.Dass, S.Chand
4. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia
5. Numrical methods in Engg.&science: B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers
6. Generalized functions: R.F. Hoskins, John Wiley and Sons.
7. Principles and Techniques of: Bernard Friedman, John Wiley and sons Applied Mathematics
8. Principles of Applied Mathematics: James P.Keener, Addison Wesley.
9. Numerical methods: P.Kandasamy,K.Thilagavathy,K.Gunavathy, S.Chand & co
VHDL (ELECTIVE - II)

LA805-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Hardware Abstraction- Basic Terminology- Entity Declaration- Architecture Body-
Configuration Declaration- Package Declaration- Package Body- Model Analysis- Simulation- Basic
Language Elements –Identifiers- Data Objects- Data Types- Operators.
Module 2
Behavioural Modelling: Entity Declaration- Architecture Body-Process Statement- Variable
Assignment Statement- Signal Assignment Statement- Wait Statement- If Statement - Case
Statement- Null Statement- Loop Statement- Exit Statement- Next Statement- Assertion Statement-
Report Statement- Other Sequential Statements- Multiple Processes- Postponed Processes -
Dataflow Modelling: Concurrent Signal Assignment Statement- Concurrent versus Sequential Signal
Assignment- Delta Delay Revisited- Multiple Drivers- Conditional Signal Assignment Statement-
Selected Signal Assignment Statement- the UNAFFECTED Value- Block Statement- Concurrent
Assertion Statement- Value of a Signal
Module 3
Structural Modelling: Component Declaration- Component Instantiation- Resolving Signal Values
- Generics and Configurations: Generics- Configurations- Configuration Specification-
Configuration Declaration- Default Rules - Conversion Functions - Direct Instantiation- Incremental
Binding.
Module 4
296
Subprograms and Overloading: Subprograms- Subprogram Overloading- Operator Overloading-
Signatures- Default Values for Parameters - Packages and Libraries: Package Declaration- Package
Body-Design File- Design Libraries-Order of Analysis- Implicit Visibility- Explicit Visibility.
Module 5
Advanced Features: Entity Statements- Generate Statements- Aliases- Qualified Expressions- Type
Conversions- Guarded Signals- Attributes- Aggregate Targets- Shared Variables- Groups - Model
Simulation: Simulation- Writing a Test Bench- Converting Real and Integer to Time- Dumping
Results into a Text Fi1e- Reading Vectors from a Text File- A Test Bench Example- Initialising a
Memory- Variable File Names- Hardware Modelling Examples: Modelling Entity interfaces-
Modelling Simple Elements- - Different Styles of Modelling- Modelling Regular Structures-
Modelling Delays- Modelling Conditional Operations- Modelling Synchronous Logic- State
Machine Modelling- Interacting State Machines- Modelling a Moore FSM- Modelling a Mealy
FSM- A Generic Priority Encoder- A Simplified Blackjack Program- A Clock Divider- A Generic
Binary Multiplier- A Pulse Counter- A Barrel Shifter- Hierarchy in Design.
Text Book
VHDL Primer Third editions: J. Bhasker, Pearson Education Asia.

References
1. Introducing VHDL from simulation to synthesis: Sudhakar Yalamanchilli, Pearson Education

Asia
MEDICAL ELECTRONICS (ELECTIVE - II)

L 805-3 3+1+0
Module 1
Bioelectric potentials Human cell – action potential – ECG waveform – relation with heart action-
bio-potentials from brain- excitation and inhibition potentials- Electroencephalogram- muscle action-
EMG- muscular servo mechanism. Bio-potential electrodes: Half cell potential- equivalent circuit
between electrodes and skin – electrodes types- stimulating electrodes- biomedical transducers-
classification- selection.
Module 2
Biomedical amplifiers – op amps- differential amplifiers- OPA 111: FET input op amp- data sheet-
high impedance 50 Hz reject filter with gain- instrumentation amplifier – INA 101- pH probe
amplifiers- pH probe electrometer- Bridge amplifiers- input protection- isolation amplifiers- basic
design- carrier type isolation amplifier- synchronous demodulator- opto isolators- optical coupling-
Transformer coupled isolation amplifiers- ISO212- Fiber optic isolation amplifier- chopper
stabilized amplifier- differential chopper amplifier- input guarding- shield driver.
Module 3
ECG wave form- The standard lead system- Einthoven triangle- ECG preamplifier- Right leg drive
circuit- shield drive- Typical ECG amplifier circuit- QRS complex detection- ECG digitization-
improvement in resolution- ECG machine- mechanism- patient cables- ECG machine maintenance.
Blood pressure measurements- Pressure transducers- Amplifiers- dc amplifiers- isolated dc
amplifier- pulsed excitation amplifier- ac carrier amplifier- systolic, diastolic and mean detector
circuit plethysmography- blood flow measurements- electromagnetic flow meter.
297
Module 4
EEG- Instrumentation requirements- Neuron membrane potential- EEG electrodes- Frequency
bands- multi-channel EEG recording systems- preamplifiers- circuits- EEG telemetry systems. ICU
monitoring system- intensive care equipments- cardio tachometers- lead fault indicator- central
monitoring consoles- telemetry system.
Module 5
Medical Imaging: Computed tomography- basic principle - data accumulation- scanning motions – x
ray tubes- collimators- detectors- image reconstruction- algorithms- display – resolution. Nuclear
Magnetic Resonance- nuclear structure and angular momentum- magnetic dipole moment-
alignment- Larmor frequency- RF magnetic field- Free Induction decay- Instrumentation- Imaging
system.
References
1. Introduction to Biomedical equipment technology: J J Carr, Pearson Education.
2. Biomedical Instrumentation: John G Webster, Mifflin Hougton Co.
3. Medical Electronics: C Raja Rao, University Press.
4. Biomedical Instrumentation: R S Khandpur, TMH
ADVANCED MICRO-CONTROLLERS (ELECTIVE - II)

LA805-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Low pin count controllers – Atmel AVR family – ATTiny15L controller - architecture – pin
descriptions – features – addressing modes – I/O space – reset and interrupt handling – reset sources
- Tunable internal oscillator.
Module 2
Timers – Watch dog timer – EEPROM – preventing data corruption – Analog comparator – A/D
converter – conversion timing – ADC noise reduction – PortB – alternate functions – memory
programming – fuse bits – high voltage serial programming – algorithm.
Module 3
National semiconductor COP8 family - COP8CBR9 processor – features – electrical characteristics
– pin descriptions – memory organization –EEPROM - security – brownout reset – in system
programming – boot ROM. Idle timer – Timer1, Timer2, Timer3 -operating modes – PWM mode –
event capture mode
Module 4
Power saving modes – Dual clock operation – Multi input wake up – USART – framing formats –
baud rate generation – A/D conversion – operating modes – prescaler – Interrupts – interrupt vector
table – Watch dog – service window – Micro-wire interface – waveforms.
Module 5
Microchip PIC16 family – PIC16F873 processor – features – architecture – memory organization -
register file map – I/O ports – PORTA - PORTB – PORTC – Data EEPROM and flash program
memory – Asynchronous serial port – SPI mode – I2C mode.
298
References
1. Design with PIC micro-controllers: John B Peatman, Pearson Education.

2. DS101374: National Semiconductor reference manual.
3. National semiconductor web site – www.national.com
4. 1187D: Atmel semiconductor reference manual.
5. Atmel semiconductor web site – www.atmel.com
6. DS30292B: Microchip reference manual.
7. Microchip semiconductor web site – www.microchip.com
E-COMMERCE (ELECTIVE - II)

LA805-5 3+1+0
Module1
Introduction to Electronic Commerce - E-Commerce Framework- Anatomy of E-Commerce
Applications - E-Commerce Consumer & Organization Applications- E- Commerce and World
Wide Web - Internet Service Providers - Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce -
WWW as the Architecture- Hypertext publishing.
Module 2
Network Security - Client-Server Network Security - CS Security Threats – Firewalls - Data &
Message Security - Encrypted Documents - Security on the Web.
Module 3
Electronic Payment Systems - Types of Electronic Payment Systems - Digital Token Based
Electronic Payment System - Smart Cards - Credit Cards - Risk in Electronic Payment Systems -
Designing Electronic Payment Systems.
Module 4
Electronic Data Interchange - EDI Application in Business- EDI-Legal - Security and Privacy Issues
- EDI standardization - EDI Envelope for Message Transport - Internet based EDI - Internal
Information System- Work-flow Automation and Coordination- Supply Chain Management-
Document Library- Types of Digital Documents- Corporate Data Warehouses.
Module 5
Recent Trends in E-Commerce - Multimedia in E-Commerce- Video Conferencing with Digital
Videos- Broad Band Telecommunication- Frame & Cell Relays- Switched Multimegabit Data
Service (SMDS)- Asynchronous Transfer Mode- Mobile Computing and Wireless Computing.
Text Book
Frontiers of Electronic Commerce: Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston, Pearson Education.
References
1. Global Electronic Commerce: J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark.

2. E- Commerce The cutting edge of Business: Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag.
3. E-Commerce: Strategy Technologies and Applications, TMH.
299
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ELECTIVE - III)
LA806-1 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing – Sample rate reduction - decimation by integer
factors- sampling rate increase – interpolation by integer facto - Design of practical sampling rate
converters: Filter Specification- filter requirement for individual stages - Determining the number of
stages and decimation factors - Sampling rate conversion using poly-phase filter structure – poly-
phase implementation of interpolators.
Module 2
Adaptive Signal Processing – Adaptive filters – Concepts- Adaptive filter as a Noise Canceller -
Other configurations of the adaptive filter - Main components of the adaptive filter – Basic Wiener
filter theory – The basic LMS adaptive algorithm – Practical limitations of the basic LMS algorithm -
Recursive Least Square Algorithm – Limitations - Factorization Algorithm.
Module 3
Introduction to two dimensional signal and systems - 2D – DFT Transforms - Properties and
applications - Discrete Hilbert Transform and Discrete Cosine Transform – Properties and
Applications - Short term Fourier Transform - Gabor Transform - Properties and Applications.
Module 4
Wavelets – Wavelet Analysis – The Continuous Wavelet Transform - scaling - shifting - scale and
frequency - The Discrete Wavelet Transform - One Stage filtering - Approximation and Details -
Filter bank analysis – Multilevel Decomposition – Number of levels – Wavelet reconstruction –
Reconstruction filter- Reconstructing Approximations and details- Multilevel Reconstruction -
Wavelet packet synthesis- Typical Applications.
Module 5
General and special purpose DSP Processors - Computer Architecture for signal processing – Havard
Architecture - Pipelining - Hardware Multiply and Accumulate – Special Instructions - Replication -
On-chip Memory Cache - Extended Parallelism - SIMD – VLIW and static super-scalar Processing
- Brief study of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106 processors.
References
1. Digital Signal Processing: Emmanuel C Ifeachor, Barrie W Jrevis, Pearson Education.

2. Theory and Applications of DSP: L.R Rabiner and B gold
3. Electronic filter Desig Hand Book: A .B Williams and FT Taylor, McGraw Hill
4. Wavelets and Subband Coding: Valterli & Kovaceric, PHI.
5. Analog Devices & Texas Instruments Users Manuel of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106x.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - III)
300
LA806-2 3+1+0
Module 1
INTRODUCTION: Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and
software environments - Media Types - Analog and digital video, digital audio, music and animation
- Analog & Digital video - Memory storage - Basic tools - Authoring tools.
Module 2
BUILDING BLOCKS: Text - Hyper text - Sound - Sound cards - Standards - Image - Image types -
Image compression, RLE, JPEG, MPEG - Fractal and Wavelet Compressions - Image file types -
Animation - Capture and Playback techniques. (basic ideas only)
Module 3
MULTIMEDIA ENVIRONMENTS: The Compact Disc family, CD-interactive, Digital Video
Interactive, QuickTime, Multimedia PC and Microsoft Multimedia Extensions.
Module 4
MULTIMEDIA PROGRAMMING: Framework: Overview, Media classes, Transform classes,
Format classes and Component classes - Problems related to programming - Composition,
Synchronisation, Interaction, Database integration.
Module 5
ADVANCED MULTIMEDIA: Moving pictures - Techniques realistic image synthesis, Virtual
Reality - Full motion digital video - Video capture techniques - multimedia networks - Desktop
video conferencing - Future multimedia.
References
1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework - Simon J. Gibbs, Dionysios C.

Tsischritziz (Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.)
2. Multimedia- Making it work - Tay Van Ghan – Osborne Tata Mcgraw Hill
3. Authoring Interactive multimedia - Arch C Luther
4. Optimizing your Multimedia PC - L.J. Skibbe, Susan Lafe Meister - Comdex
5. Multimedia Bible - Winn L. Rosch, Sams
6. Multimedia Producers Bible- Ron Goldberg, Comdex
7. Multimedia Power Tools - Peter Jellam, Random house Electronic Pub.
8. Multimedia Computing - Mathew E. Hodger & Russel M. Sasnett, Addison wesley
9. Integrated Multimedia Systems - Palikom, The communication Wall Overview
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (ELECTIVE - III)

LA806-3 3+1+0
Module1
301
Introduction: Concept of system software, classification of system s/w. Assemblers: over view of
assembly process, elementary ideas of macros & macro processors. Compilers: Overview of
compilation process, Parsing- top down & bottom-up parsing, storage allocation. Interpreters: basic
ideas only.
Module2
Operating Systems: types of OS, batch processing, multiprogramming, timesharing, real time OS.
OS services UNIX OS –shells, Bourne Shell, C shell- visual editor.
Module3
Information Management: File system- directory structure, basic file system calls, file protection,
allocation methods disk blocks and inodes in UNIX. Device management.
Module4
Processor Management: CPU scheduling - scheduling algorithms, Multiprocessor scheduling,
Process management in UNIX, concurrent process- critical section, semaphores, synchronization,
concurrent languages.
Module5
Memory Management: swapping, partitions,, paging, segmentation, virtual memory concepts, page
replacement, dynamic linking, caching of secondary storage, memory management in UNIX,
Deadlocks: cause, detection, prevention, avoidance, recovery, combined approach to deadlock
handling.
References
1. System programming and Operating Systems – D M Dhamdhere

2. System Software – an introduction to system Programming – Leland L Beck, 3ed.
3. Operating System – Peterson & Silberschatz, Addison Wesley
4. Operating Systems – Dietal H M
5. Design of UNIX Operating System – Maurice J Bach
6. UNIX System Programming – Stevens.
EMBEDDED SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - III)

LA806-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Overview of Embedded System: -Embedded System, Categories of Embedded System,
Requirements of Embedded Systems, Challenges and Issues in Embedded Software Development,
302
Applications of Embedded Systems in Consumer Electronics, Control System, Biomedical Systems,
Handheld computers, Communication devices.
Module 2
Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment: - Hardware Architecture, Micro-
Controller Architecture, Communication Interface Standards, Embedded System Development
Process, Embedded Operating systems, Types of Embedded Operating systems.
Module 3
Embedded Communication System: Serial Communication, PC-to-PC Communication, Serial
Communication with the 8051 Family of Micro-controllers, Protocol Converter, Voice-over-IP,
Embedded Applications over Mobile Network example MP3 Sound Player.
Module 4
Real Time & Database Applications: - Real-Time Embedded Software Development, Sending a
Message over a Serial Link, Simulation of a Process Control System, Controlling an Appliance from
the RTLinux System, Embedded Database Applications using examples like Salary Survey, Energy
Meter Readings.
Module 5
Java Applications & Future Trends in Embedded Systems: Networked Java-Enabled Information
Appliances, Embedded Process Control System, Mobile Java Applications, Appliance Control using
Jini, System on a Chip (SOC), Smart Cards and the Cashless Society, Security in Embedded Systems.
Text Book
Programming for Embedded Systems- Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech
Reference
1. Fundamentals of Embedded Software where C and Assembly Meet – Daniel W Lewis.
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING (ELECTIVE - III)

LA806-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Image representation and modeling - Characteristics of a digital image - Elements of digital image
processing systems - Image digitizers & scanners - Elements of visual perception - Brightness &
contrast - Image sampling & Quantisation - Two dimensional Sampling theorem - Reconstruction of
image from its samples - Aliasing.
Module 2
303
Image Transforms - Two dimensional orthogonal & unitary transforms - Properties of unitary
transforms - Two dimensional DFT & its properties – Cosine – Hadamard – Haar – Sine - KL
Transforms & their properties.
Module 3
Image Enhancement - Point processing - Histogram modeling & Equalization - Spatial Filtering -
Filtering in the frequency domain - color Image processing.
Module 4
Image Restoration - Degradation model - Inverse filtering - Wiener Filter - Interactive restoration -
Image analysis & vision -basic principles only.
Module 5
Image Coding & Compression- basic principles - run length coding - variable length coding - bit
plane coding - loss-less predictive coding - lossy predictive coding - Transform coding - Image
compression standards.
References
1. Digital image Processing: I.Gonzalez Rafel C, Pearson Education.

2. Fundamentals of digital image processing: Jain Anil K, PHI.
3. Digital Image Processing: Pratt William K, John Wiley.
SYSTEMS LAB
L807 0+0+3
1. Experiments based on Matlab.

a. To test linearity, causality & stability of LTI system.
b. To find DFT of a given sequence using DIT & DIF FFT algorithms.
c. To find IFFT of a given sequence using DIT & DIF FFT algorithms.
d. Program to design IIR filter using Bilinear transformation impulse invariant methods.
e. Control system simulation experiments.
f. Programs to design filters using window techniques.
2. Digital signal processing based on DSP processors.
3. Familiarization of PAL assembler.
4. Realization of combinational and sequential circuits using PAL.
5. Realization of simple digital circuits using VHDL.
6. Familiarization of FPGA trainer kits.
7. Realization of digital circuits using FPGA.
Note
Any other experiments may be added in accordance with the electives offered.
L 709 / 808 PROJECT DESIGN AND SEMINAR 0+0+2
Each student is required to present a technical paper on a subject approved by the dept. The paper
should in general reflect the state of the art. He / she shall submit a report on the paper presented to
304
the department. In addition to the seminar he / she shall undertake a project work (as a team or
individually) in the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide (s), panel of staff members, and
submit a report of the project work done to the department.
VIVA – VOCE
L809
A comprehensive Viva - voce examination will be conducted to assess the student's overall
knowledge in the specified field of engineering. At the time of viva - voce, certified reports of
seminar and project work are to be presented for evaluation.
305
SYLLABUS
COMPUTER
SCIENCE
&
ENGINEERING
BRANCH
306
THIRD SEMESTER
307
RT301 3+1+0
Module1
Mathematical Logic - Statements, connectives - Well formed formulas – Tautologoies - Equivalance
of formulas - Duality law Tautological implications - Normal forms - the theory of inference for the
statement - Calculus - validity, Consistency, Theorem proving - the predicate calculus - Inference
Theory of the predicate calculus.
Module 2
Number Theory: Prime and Relatively prime numbers – Modular arithmetic – Fermat’s and Euler’s
Theorems – Testing for Primability – Euclids Algorithm – Discrete Logarithms
Relations & Functions - Properties of binary relations - Equivalance relations and partitions -
Functions and pigeon hole principle.
Module 3
Algebraic systems - general properties - Lattices as a partially ordered set - some properties of
lattices - lattices as algebraic systems - sub lattices - direct product - homomorphism - some special
lattices.
Module 4
Discrete Numeric Functions & generating Functions, Recurrence relations - Manipulations of
Numeric functions - generating functions - Recurrence relations - Linear recurrence relations with
constant coefficients - Homogeneous solutions - Particular solutions - Total solutions - solutions by
the method of generating functions.
Module 5
Graph Theory: Basic concept of graphs, subgraphs, connected graphs, Paths, Cycles, Multigraph and
Weighted graph - Trees - spanning trees.
References
1. Elements of Discrete Mathematics - C.L.Lieu, McGraw Hill.

2. Discrete mathematical structures with applications to Computer Science - J.P. Trembly, R.
Manohar, McGraw Hill.
3. Discrete Mathematics - Richard Johnsonbaugh, Pearson Education Asia
4. Discrete Mathematical Structures - Bernard Kolman, Robert C. Bushy, Sharon Cutler Ross, PHI
5. A first look at Graph Theory - John Clark & Derek Allan Holton, Allied Publishers
6. Cryptography and network security principles and practice - William Stallings, Pearson
Education Asia
MICROPROCESSOR SYSTEMS
R302 3+1+0
Module 1
308
CPU, I/P unit, O/P unit, Memory, Bus organizations, ALU, Control Unit, Registers, Execution of an
instruction, Main memory, Addressing, Memory Address Register - Memory Data Register –
Memory systems - Architecture of 8085- Pin Diagram - Registers.
Module 2
Instruction set of 8085 - Instruction Types – Arithmetic – Logic data transfer, Branch, Stack, I/O and
Machine Control instructions - Addressing Modes - Direct and Indirect Addressing - Immediate
Addressing - Implicit Addressing.
Module 3
Subroutines - Stack Operations - Call Return sequence- Programming Examples.
CPU of a microcomputer – timing and control unit – The fetch operation – Machine cycle and T-
State instruction and data flow.
Module 4
Interrupts of 8085 - Hardware & Software Interrupts – Enabling, Disabling and masking of
interrupts – Polling – HALT & HOLD states – Programmable interrupt controller – 8259
Module 5
Interfacing Memory and I/O devices - Address space partitioning - Memory mapped I/O - I/O
mapped I/O - Memory interfacing - interfacing EPROM & RAM to 8085 – Data transfer schemes -
Programmed data transfer - synchronous and asynchronous transfer - interrupt driven data transfer –
DMA data transfer – DMA controller – 8257 – I/O channels.
References
1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085 - Gaonkar, New Age
International
2. Microprocessors, interfacing and Applications - Renu Singh, B. P. Singh, New Age International
3. Microprocessors - B. Ram
4. Introduction to Microprocessors Systems - Adithya P. Mathur, PHI
5. Microprocessors Peripherals and Applications - Gilmore
SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS

RT303 2+1+0
Module 1
Transistor – Biasing - Stability - Thermal runaway. Transistor As an amplifier - RC coupled
amplifier, Frequency Response, Gain Bandwidth relation - Cascading of transistors - cascade
Darlington pair - emitter follower
309
Module 2
FET, FET amplifier – MOSFET, depletion and enhancement type - source drain characteristics and
transfer characteristics.
Module 3
Oscillators - Concept of feed back - Transistorised phase shift oscillator - wien bridge Oscillator –
Hartley Oscillator - Colpits Oscillator (Operation and Expression for frequency)
Module 4
Clipping, Clamping, Integration, Differentiation - Astable, Bistable and Monostable Multivibrators -
Sweep generators, Simple Bootstrap sweep generators.
Module 5
Power supplies & Special semi conductor devices - Regulator power supplies – IC regulated Power
supplies, 7805, 7905, LM317 – LED, LCD, Photodiode, Photo transistor, opto coupler. Seven
segment display, SCR, UJT (basic concepts only), DIAC, TRIAC.
References
1. Integrated Electronics - Millman and Halkias, McGraw Hill

2. Pulse Digital and Switching wave forms - Millman and Taub, McGraw Hill
3. Electronics Devices & Circuits - Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Education
PROBLEM SOLVING AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

RT 304 3+1+0
Module 1
Problem solving with digital Computer - Steps in Computer programming - Features of a good
program - Modular Programming - Structured - Object Oriented - Top down and bottom up
approaches - Algorithms - Flowchart - Pseudocode, examples
Module2
C fundamentals: Identifiers, keywords, data types, operators, expressions, data Input and Output
statements, simple programming in C.
Module 3
Control statements & Functions: If - else, for, while, do - while, switch, break & continue
statements, nested loops. Functions - parameter passing - void functions Recursion – Macros.
Module 4
Structured data types: Single dimensional arrays - multidimensional arrays, strings, structures &
unions - Program for bubble sort.
Module 5
Pointers & files - Declaration, passing pointers to a functions- Accessing array elements using
pointers - Operations on pointers - Opening & Closing a file - Creating & Processing a file,
Command line arguments.
310
Text Book
1. Programming with C - Byron S. Gottfried, Tata McGraw Hill
References
1. Computer Programming in C - Kerninghan & Ritchie, PHI

2. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C - Ashok N. Kamthan, Pearson Eduacation
3. Let us - Yeaswanth Khanetkar, BPB
4. Programming in C - Stephen C. Kochan, CBS publishers
5. Using C in Program Design - Ronald Leach, Prism Books Pvt. Ltd, Bangalore
6. Mastering Turbo C - Bootle, BPB Publications
7. Programming and Problem Solving with PASCAL - Micheal Schneider, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
8. Pointers in C - Yeaswanth Khanetkar, PBP
9. C Programming - A Modern Approach - K.N. Iling W.W. Norton & Company Newyork
10. Structured and Object Oriented Problem Solving using C++ - Andrew C Staugaard Jr., PHI
HUMANITIES
RT305 2+1+0
PART A: PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Module 1
Scientific Management – Evolution of management theory – Contributions of Taylor, Gilbreth, Gantt,
Emerson – Definition and functions of management – Authority, Responsibility, Delegation and Span of
control – Types of structures of Organisation – Types of Business firms – Job evaluation and merit rating –
Wages – Types of incentives.
Module 2
Procedure for ISO and ISI certification – Design, Development and implementation of re-engineering –
Inspection – SQC control charts – quality assurance – TQM – Zero defects.
Module 3
The Indian financial system – Reserve bank of India – functions – commercial banking system –
profitability of public sector banks – development financial institutions – IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, IRBI –
Investment institutions – UTI, Insurance companies– The stock market – functions – Recent trends.
Module 4
Indian Industries – Industrial pattern – structural transformation – industrial growth – inadequacies
of the programme of industrialization – Large and small scale industries – industrial sickness and
government policy – industrial labour – influence of trade unions.
Module 5
The tax framework – Direct and Indirect taxes – Impact and incidence – Progressive and regressive –
functions of the tax system – Black money – magnitude and consequences – Public debt – Debt
311
position of the central and state governments – Deficit financing – revenue deficit and fiscal deficit –
Problems associated with deficit financing.
References
1. Management- Stoner, Freeman and Gilbert, PHI

2. Engineering Management- Mazda, Pearson Education
3. Indian Economy - Ruddar Datt, S Chand and Company Ltd.
4. Indian Economy – Problems of Development and Planning - A. N. Agarwal, Wishwa Prakashan.
LOGIC SYSTEM DESIGN

R306 3+1+0
Module 1
Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication & division of binary nos, BCD nos, excess-3 code, gray code,
alphanumeric codes, error detection using parity bits - error correcting codes, haming code.
Module 2
Postulates of boolean algebra - basic theorems - Logic functions - truth tables - canonical forms -
SOP, POS - methods of minimization of logic functions - K maps & quine mcclaskey method -
realization using logic gates - NAND NOR gates - universal gates - don’t care combinations -
formation of switching function - from word statements.
Module3
Sequential logic - flip flops - SR, JK, T & D flip flops - master slave JK flip flop, Counters -
asynchronous, binary decade, and up/down counters - synchronous binary decade, and up/down
counters.
Module4
Adders - design - Half adder, Full adder, Half subtractor & Full subtractor - Carry look ahead adder,
carry save adder, carry propagation adder.
Module 5
Registers - serial in & parallel in shift registers - left & right shift registers - static shift registers -
typical IC’s - counters using shift registers - ring counter, Johnson counter.
References
1. An introduction to digital computer design - Rajaraman & Radhakrishnan, PHI

2. Logic and Computer Design – M. Moris Mano, Charles R. Kime Pearson Education
3. Switching & finite automata theory - Zvi Kohavi, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Digital computer fundamentals - Thomas C. Bartee, Tata McGraw Hill.
5. Digital Computer Design - Malvino, Tata McGraw Hill.
6. Digital Design - Morris Mano, Pearson Education
7. Digital Design Principles & Practice – John F. Wakerly, Pearson Education
SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS LAB

R307 0+0+4
312
1. Characteristics of Silicon, Germanium, Zener diodes.
2. Characterisctics of CE, CB configurations of transistors; Characteristics of FET.
3. Clipping and clamping Circuits - RC differentiating and Integrating Circuits.
4. Half wave and full wave an Bridge rectifiers.
5. Single stage RC coupled amplifiers - Frequency response
6. Astable multivibrators using BJT.
7. Sweep Generator (Simple sweep)
8. Oscillators - Rc phase shift oscillator.
PROGRAMMING LAB
R308 0+0+4
1. Familiarisation with computer system microprocessor - peripherals - memory card etc.

2. Familiarisation of operating system - DOS Windows etc. (use of files, directories, internal
commands, external commands, compilers, file manager, program manager, control panel etc.)
3. Familiarisation with word processing packages like wordstar and Msword
4. Progrmming experiments in C to cover control structures - functions - arrays - Structures -
pointers and files.
5. Familiarisation of C++ and Visual tools.
Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT304 problem solving and Computer Programming can be
included.
FOURTH SEMESTER
313
CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0
Module 1
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations - formation by eliminating arbitary constants and arbitary Functions -
solution of Lagrange Linear Equations – Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial
equation.
Module 3
Module 4
314
Module 5
difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected)
References
2. Engineering Mathematics Vol. II -3rd year Part A & B - M.K. Venkataraman, National
Publishing Company
3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations - Ian N.Sneddon.,McGrawhill International Edn.
4. Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers – Richard A Johnson, Pearson
Education Asia / PHI
5. A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II) – Bali and Iyengar, Laxmi Publications
Ltd.
6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics - Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia
COMPUTER ORGANIZATION
R 402 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Organization and Architecture – Review of basic operational concepts – CPU- single
bus and two bus organization, Execution of a complete instruction – interconnection structures –
layered view of a computer system.
Module 2
CPU - Arithmetic: Signed addition and subtraction – serial and parallel adder – BCD adder – Carry
look ahead adder, Multiplication – Array multiplier – Booth’s Algorithm, Division – Restoring and
non-restoring division, floating point arithmetic - ALU Design.
Module 3
Control Unit Organization: Processor Logic Design – Processor Organization – Control Logic
Design – Control Organization – Hardwared control – Microprogram control – PLA control –
Microprogram sequencer, Horizontal and vertical micro instructions – Nano instructions.
Module 4
Memory: Memory hierarchy – RAM and ROM – Memory system considerations – Associative
memory, Virtual memory – Cache memory – Memory interleaving.
Module 5
Input – Output: Printers, Plotters, Displays, Keyboard, Mouse, OMR and OCR, Device interface –
I/O processor – Standard I/O interfaces – RS 232 C, IEEE 488.2 (GPIB).
References
1. Computer Organization - Hamacher, Vranesic and Zaky, Mc Graw Hill

2. Digital Logic and Computer Design - Morris Mano, PHI
3. Computer Organization and Architecture -William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia.
4. Computer Organization and Design - Pal Chaudhuri, PHI
315
5. Computer Organization and Architecture -M Morris Mano, PHI
6. Computer Architecture and Organization - John P Hayes, Mc Graw Hill

R403 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to OOP - Evolution of object oriented languages - Need of Objects - Definition of
Object-Oriented Language – Classes and Objects – Creating and Using Classes and objects –
Member functions and variables – Constructors and Destructors.
Module 2
Inheritance and Access Control - Member access control in classes – Friend functions and classes –
Extending classes - Public Private and Protected Inheritance – Classification of Inheritance – Single
– Multiple – Multilevel – Hierarchical – Hybrid.
Module 3
Polymorphism – Runtime and compile time polymorphism – overloading functions and operators –
selecting friend member function for operator overloading - Virtual methods – pure virtual methods
– Abstract classes - Defining and using of virtual methods, pure virtual methods and abstract classes
– applications of abstract classes.
Module 4
Advanced Concepts- Virtual Destructors – Virtual Base Classes - Template classes – Creating and
using templates – Namespaces
Module 5
Dynamic Objects - Dynamic object allocation - Inline functions.
Other Object oriented languages – Java – Object oriented features in Java – Comparison with C++
References
1. Object Oriented Programming in C ++ - Robert Lafore, Galgotia Pub.

2. Object Oriented Programming in C++ - Nabajyoti Barkakati, PHI
3. Structured and Object Oriented Problem Solving using C++ - Andrew C Staugaard Jr., PHI
4. Object oriented Programming with C++ - E. Balaguruswamy, TMH
5. Java 2 Complete Reference - Herbert, Schildt, TMH
6. The Java Programming Language 3rd Edition - Arnold, Gosling, Holmes, Pearson Education
Asia
7. Object-oriented programming using C++ - Ira Pohl, Pearson Education Asia
8. C++ How to program - Dietel & Dietel, Pearson Education Asia
9. An Introduction to Object-oriented programming – Timothy Budd
10. Problem Solving with C++ - Walter Savitch, Pearson Education Asia
11. C++ Primer - Stanley B Lippman, Josee Zajoie, Pearson Education Asia
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
R404 3+1+0
316
Module 1
Logic Families - DTL - TTL - ECL - I2L & CMOS. Comparison of circuits. Tristate logic -
Propagation delay - power dissipation - Noise margin window profile - comparison - Fan in - Fan
out.
Module 2
Storage elements - Flip flops - Latches - Registers, Decoders, Multiplexers- Buffers - Memory
systems - ROM types - RAM - BJT RAM cells - MOS RAMs, RAM organization - flash memories -
PLA - PAL - PGA - FPGA - PLD - CPLD - CDROM - Magneto optic storage.
Module 3
D/A Converters - Binary weighted resistor type - Ladder type A/D converters – counting type -
Successive approximation type - Parallel comparator type dual slope type.
Module 4
Opamps: Characteristics - Basic principles - definitions - parameters - Input, Offset, Voltage, Input
bias current, CMRR, slew rate - Ideal Opamp - inverting and non inverting opamps.
Module 5
Opamp Applications: Summing, Comparator, Differentiator - Integrator - Square wave generator -
Triangular wave generator using opamps.
References
1. Digital Integrated Electronics - Taub & Shilling, McGraw Hill

2. Pulse Digital & Switching Wave forms - Millman & Taub. , McGraw Hill
3. Digital design with standard MSI & LSI by T.R. Blakesley & John Willey.
4. Integrated Circuits - Botkar, Khanna Publishers
DATA STRUCTURES & PROGRAMMING METHODOLOGIES

R 405 3+1+0
Module 1
Principles of programming – System Life Cycle - Algorithm Specification-Recursive Algorithms-
Documentation- Performance Analysis and Measurements- Time and Space complexity-Complexity
calculation of simple algorithms.
Module 2
Study of basic data structures – Arrays- Structures-Sparse matrix – Stacks – Queues- Circular
queues- Priority queues - Dqueues. Evaluation of expressions – Polynomial representation using
arrays.
Module 3
Linked Lists - Linked stacks and queues - Doubly linked lists - Polynomial representation using
linked lists, Strings – Data representation – Pattern matching.
Module 4
317
Trees - Binary Trees – Tree Traversal – Inorder - Preorder and Postorder, Graphs – Depth first and
breadth first search.
Module 5
Sorting methods: Selection sort, Bubble sort, Insertion sort, Merge sort, Quick sort, Heap sort, Radix
sort, External sorting methods (basic idea only).
References
1. Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++: Horowitz, Sahni & Mehta, Galgottia Pub.
2. Classic Data Structures: Samanta, PHI
3. Data Structures and program design in C: Robert Kruse, Pearson Education Asia
4. Data Structures using C & C++: Langsam, Augenstein & Tanenbaum
5. Fundamental Algorithms: Knuth.
6. Algorithms + Data Structures = Programs: N.Wirth, PHI
7. An introduction to Data Structures with applications: Trembley & Sorenson, McGraw Hill
8. Data structures in Java: Thomas Standish, Pearson Education Asia
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS & PERIPHERALS

R 406 3+1+0
Module1
Study of Interfacing ICs - 8255, 8252, 8251, 8279 (functions and internal block diagram only)
Module 2
Interfacing with 8085 - Interfacing keyboard – Hardware and Software approach – Interfacing seven
segment displays - Interfacing D/A and A/D converters - Micro controllers (brief idea only)
Module 3
8086/88 Architecture, Block diagram – Addressing modes – memory addressing modes – Program
memory addressing modes – stack memory addressing modes.
Module 4
Instructions format of 8086 – data transfer- arithmetic –branch – loop- flag manipulation- shift &
rotate – string- REP instruction – writing simple program in 8086 – Additional features of 80286 –
protected mode memory addressing.
Module 5
Additional features of 80386 – Paging mechanism – Interfacing coprocessors in 80386 – Additional
features of Pentium Processors. Brief study of latest processors of Intel & AMD (Architecture not
required) – Introduction to RISC processors
References
1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming and Applications with the 8085 - Gaonkar, New Age
International
2. The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium and Pentium
Pro processors. Architecture, Programming and Interfacing – Barry B Bray, Pearson Education
Asia
3. The 80X86 family - John Uffenbeck, PHI
318
4. Introduction to the Intel Family of Microprocessors - James L.Antonakos, Pearson Education
Asia
5. Intel Microprocessors - A.K.Ray
6. Microprocessors and Interfacing - Douglas V. Hall, TMH
7. Advanced Microprocessors and Peripherals - A. K. Ray and K. M.Bhurchandi, TMH
8. The Intel 8086/88 Microprocessor Architecture, Programming Design and Interfacing –
Bhupendra Singh Chhabra, Dhanpat Rai Publishing Company (P) Ltd
9. IBM PC and Clones - Govindarajalu, TMH
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB

R407 0+0+4
1. OP-amp Characteristics
2. Inverting and Non-inverting amplifier using Op-amp - frequency response.
3. Differentiating and Integrating Circuits - frequency response.
4. Astable multivibrator using Op-amp.
5. A/D Converter.
6. D/A Converter.
7. Transfer Characteristics and specifications of TTL and MOS gates.
8. Study of flip flops
9. Synchronous and Asynchronous Counters
10. Astable and Monostable multivibrators using gates.
11. Study of shift registers and their applications.
12. Study of decoders and Multiplexers.
DATA STRUCTURES LAB

R408 0+0+4
Experiments based on the following:
1. Array and Linked list implementation of Stacks, Queues, Dqueues, Graphs, Binary Trees,
Polynomials, Sparse matrix.
2. Infix, Postfix and Prefix conversions.
3. Sorting and Searching methods.
4. String representation and pattern matching
Any experiment according to the syllabus of R405 can be substituted.
319
FIFTH SEMESTER
320
RT 501 3+1+0
Module 1
QUEUEING THEORY: General Concepts - Arrival pattern - service pattern - Queue disciplines -
The Markovian model M/M/1/$, M/M/1/N - steady state solutions – Little’s formula.
Module 2
NUMERICAL METHODS: Introduction - solution of algebraic and transcendental equations -
Bisection method - Method of false position - Newton’s method - Approximate solution of equations
– Horner’s method solutions of linear simultaneous equations - Iterative methods of solution-
Jacobi’s method - Gauss Seidal method.
Module 3
FINITE DIFFERENCES: Meaning of operators – Δ, , μ ,δ ,E - interpolation using Newton’s
forward and backward formula - Langrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolation formula
- numerical differenciation - first and second order derivatives using forward and backward formula
- numerical integration - trapizoidal rule - Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rules.
Module 4
LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM : graphical solution of LPP- general problem - solution of
LPP using simplex method - Big M method – duality in LPP.
Module 5
TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEM: Balanced transportation problem - initial
basic feasible solution -Vogel’s approximation method - optimum solution by Modi method -
Assignment problem - Hungerian techniques
References
1. Operations Research - P.K. Gupta & D.S. Hira, S.Chand & Co. Ltd
2. Advanced Engg Mathematics - Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
3. Higher Engg. Mathematics - Dr. B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers.
4. Operations research - Richard Bronson, Schaum’s Outline Series
5. Operations research - Panneer Selvam,PHI
6. Numerical Methods in Science & Engg - M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing Co.
OPERATING SYSTEMS
R502 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction
OS Concepts – Evolution of OS, OS Structures- Kernel, Shell, General Structure of MSDOS,
Windows 2000, Linux.
321
Module 2 Process Management
Process & Threads – Process States - Process Control Block – Process Scheduling – Operations on
Processes, Threads, CPU Scheduler – Preemptive and Non-Preemptive; Dispatcher, Scheduling
Criteria, Scheduling Algorithms – Process Management in UNIX.
Module 3 Process Synchronization & Interprocess Communication

Concurrent Processes, Co-operating Processes, Precedence Graph, Hierarchy of Processes, Critical
Section Problem – Two process solution, Synchronization Hardware, Semaphores – Deadlock-
detection, handling, prevention, avoidance, recovery, Starvation, Critical Regions, Monitors,
Interprocess communication.
Module 4 Memory Management

Objectives and functions, Simple Resident Monitor Program (No design), Overlays – Swapping;
Schemes – Paging – Simple, Multi-level Paging; Internal and External Fragmentation; Virtual
Memory Concept, Demand Paging - Page Interrupt Fault, Page Replacement Algorithms;
Segmentation – Simple, Multi-level, Segmentation with Paging, Memory Management in UNIX.
Module 5 Information Management

Files and Directories – Directory Structure –Directory Implementation – Linear List - Hash Table.
Device Management: Dedicated, Shared and Virtual Devices - Serial Access Devices, Direct Access
Devices, Direct Access Storage Devices - Channels and Control Units – Disk Scheduling methods.
Text Book
1. Operating Systems Concepts – Silberschatz, Galvin, Wiley Publications
References
Operating Systems – William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia

1. Operating Systems: Design & implementation - Andrew S. Tenenbaum, PHI
2. Modern Operating Systems - Andrew S. Tenenbaum, Pearson Education Asia / PHI
3. Operating Systems - Nutt, Pearson Education Asia
4. Operating Systems - Deitel & Deitel, Pearson Education Asia
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

RT503 3+1+0
Module 1
Basic Concepts - Purpose of database systems-Components of DBMS – DBMS Architecture and
Data Independence- Data modeling - Entity Relationship Model,
Relational – Network- Hierarchical and object oriented models-Data Modeling using the Entity
Relationship Model.
Module 2
322
Structure of relational databases – relational databases – relational algebra- tuple relational calculus.
Data definition with SQL, insert, delete and update statements in SQL – views – data manipulation
with SQL
Module 3
Introduction to Transaction Processing- Transaction and System Concepts- Desirable properties of
Transactions- Schedules and Recoverability- Serializability of Schedules-Query processing and
Optimization- Concurrency Control- -assertions – triggers.
Oracle case study: The basic structure of the oracle system – database structure and its manipulation
in oracle- storage organization in oracle - Programming in PL/SQL- Cursor in PL/SQL
Module 4
Database Design– Design guidelines– Relational database design – Integrity Constraints – Domain
Constraints- Referential integrity – Functional Dependency- Normalization using Functional
Dependencies, Normal forms based on primary keys- general definitions of Second and Third
Normal Forms. Boyce Codd Normal Form– Multivalued Dependencies and Forth Normal Form –
Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form – Pitfalls in Relational Database Design.
Module 5
Distributed databases: Distributed Database Concepts- Data Fragmentation, Replication and
Allocation Techniques- Different Types- Query Processing – semijoin -Concurrency Control and
Recovery.
Text Book
1. Fundamentals of Database System Elmasri and Navathe (3rd Edition), Pearson Education Asia
References
1. Database System Concepts - Henry F Korth, Abraham Silbershatz, Mc Graw Hill 2nd
edition.
2. An Introduction to Database Systems - C.J.Date (7th Edition) Pearson Education Asia
3. Database Principles, Programming and Performance – Patrick O’Neil, Elizabeth O’Neil
4. An Introduction to Database Systems - Bibin C. Desai
FILE STRUCTURES AND ALGORITHMS
R504 2+1+0
Module1
File Organization: - Operations on Files – Heap Files - Sequential Files – Indexed sequential files –
Direct files – Secondary key retrieval.
Module 2
Index Structures for Files: - Single level Ordered Index-Multilevel Indexes-Indexes on multiple
Keys. Searching - Sequential search, Binary search, Interpolation search.
Module 3
Hashing: - Static Hashing-Hash Tables-Different Hash Functions-Mid Square-Division-Folding-
Digit Analysis, Dynamic Hashing. Collision-Collision Resolution Techniques-Extendible Hashing.
Module 4
323
Search trees: -AVL Trees, height balanced trees, weight balanced trees, Threaded Binary Trees,
Multiway search Trees- B Trees-B+ Trees.
Module 5
Storage management: - Dynamic storage management- storage allocation & liberation – First fit,
best fit – Buddy system- Garbage Collection & Compaction.
References
1. Fundamentals of Data Structures in C++: Horowitz, Sahni & Mehta, Galgotia publications
2. Fundamentals of Database Systems: Elmasri & Navathe, Pearson Education Asia
3. File Structures an Object-Oriented Approach with C++: Folk, Zoellick, Riccardi, Pearson
Education Asia.
4. Data Structures using C & C++: Langsam,Augenstein & Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia
5. Data Structures, Algorithms and Applications in C++: Sahni Galgotia publications
6. Data structures & Program design in C: Robert Kruse Pearson Education Asia
LANGUAGE PROCESSORS
RT 505 3+1+0
Module 1 Assembler
Overview of the assembly process - Design of two pass assembler- Single pass assembler- Macros –
Macro definition and usage- schematics for Macro expansion – Design of a Macro pre-processor -
Macro Assembler.
Module 2 Introduction to Compilers

Compilers and Translators – Structure of a compiler – lexical analysis – syntax analysis – context
free grammars – basic parsing techniques- top down and bottom up parsing (brief idea only)-
Recursive Decent parser – Shift reduce parser.
Module 3 Storage allocation

Data descriptors- Static and Dynamic storage allocation – Storage allocation and access in block
structured programming languages – Array allocation and access- Compilation of expressions –
Handling operator priorities – Intermediate code forms for expressions –code generator.
Module 4 Compilation of Control Structures

Control transfer- Conditional and Iterative constructs- Procedure calls – Code optimization –
Optimization transformations – Local optimization and global optimization – Compiler writing tools
– Incremental Compilers
Module 5 Loaders and Linkers

Loading – Program relocatability – linking – various loading schemes – linkage editing – Design of
linkage editor – dynamic loading – overlays – dynamic linking.
Text Book
1. System Programming and Operating Systems - Dhamdhere Mc Graw Hill

2. Principles of Compiler Design - Aho A.V., Ullman Narosa Publications.
324
References
1. Systems programming - Donovan, Mc. Graw Hill.

2. System Software - An Introduction to Systems Programming- Leland L. Beck, Addison Wesley.
3. Compilers Principles Techniques And Tools Aho, Sethi, Ullman, Pearson Education Asia
DATA COMMUNICATION
RT 506 2+1+0
Module 1
Communication concepts – Analog modulation – Various schemes – AM, PM, FM –Sampling
theorem - Analog pulse modulation – PAM, PWM, PPM – Generation of various modulated waves
(Block diagram only) –Digital Pulse modulation (PCM).
Module 2
Multiplexing - Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) – Time Division Multiplexing (TDM),
Synchronous Time Division Multiplexing –Statistical time Division multiplexing – Key Techniques
- ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK - Channel capacity - Shannon`s Theorem.
Module 3
Digital data transmission – Serial, Parallel, Synchronous, Asynchronous and Isochronous
transmission. Transmission mode- Simplex - Half duplex – Full duplex, Noise- different types of
noise – Basic Principles of Switching (circuit, packet, message switching)
Module 4
Error detection and Correcting codes: Hamming code – Block codes and convolution codes – ARQ
techniques – Transmission codes – Baudot – EBCDIC and ASCII codes – Barcodes.
Module 5
Terminal handling – Point to point, Multidrop lines. Components of computer communication –
Concentrators - Front end Processor – Transmission media – Guided media – Twisted pair cable,
coaxial cable, fibre optic cable. GSM service and GSM system architecture.
References
1. Electronic communication system - Kennedy, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Principles of Communication System - Taub & Schilling Mc Graw Hill.
3. Introduction to Data Communications & Networking - Behurouz & Forozan Mc Graw Hill.
4. Data Communication, Computer Networks & Open Systems - Fred Halsall Pearson Education
Asia
5. Principles & Application of GSM. - Vijay K. Garg Pearson Education Asia
6. Modern Digital & Analog Communication Systems – B.P Lathi Prism Books Pvt. Ltd.
7. Computer Networks - A.S. Tanenbaum, PHI
8. Data and Computer Communication - William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia
9. Communication Engineering - A. Kumar, Umesh Publications
325
MICROPROCESSOR LAB
R507 0+0+4
1. Familiarization of training kits.

2. Simple programs for Arithmetic and Data Transfer.
3. Study of MASM Programming.
4. Programming Peripheral Controllers.
5. Interfacing the Trainer Kit.
6. Any experiment according to the syllabus R302 can be substituted
DATABASE LAB
R508 0+0+4
Experiments for performing the following:
1. Creation, insertion, updation, deletion of tables, indexes, views

2. Simple queries, nested queries, use of arithmetic and string functions.
3. Simple PL/SQL programs, use of exceptions, savepoints, cursor, procedure, function, trigger,
sequence generator.
4. Importing and Exporting data.
5. Database Administration
6. ODBC/JDBC Interface.
7. Implementation of File Structures
Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT503 can be substituted.
326
SIXTH SEMESTER
327
PC & PC BASED SYSTEMS
R601 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to PC
Hardware components – study of motherboards ––Different types of ports, slots and connectors-
Add-on cards-Power supply– SMPS- function & operations.
Module 2 Storage Devices

Floppy – Floppy Disk Controller - Disk Physical specification & operations – Disk magnetic
properties – Cylinders – Clusters – Hard disks – Hard disk drive operation – Magnetic data storage -
Sectors – Disk formatting – partitioning - Hard disk features – Hard disk data transfer modes –
Programmed I/O – Direct memory access – Ultra DMA – Data addressing – Standard CHS
addressing – Extended CHS addressing – Logical Block Addressing.
Module 3 Optical Storage

CD ROM, CD Technology, Sector layout, CD-R, CD-RW, CDROM, drive specifications- data
transfer rate – Access time – Constant linear velocity – constant angular velocity - Buffers –
Interface – Magneto optical drives – WORM devices –DVD- RAID – Holographic storage.
Module 4 Memory Management in PC

Parity – ECC – Static & Dynamic RAM – Memory Addressing – Segmented addressing - 64 KB
Limits – 640 KB barrier – Logical, segmented, virtual, linear and physical memory addresses –
Extended and Expanded memory – Cache memory – Video memory – HMA - Flat memory model –
Advanced memory technologies.
Module 5 Bus Structures

ISA, PCI, PCMCIA, AGP, USB, Hard Disk Interfaces – IDE, EIDE, ATA – Communication ports –
Serial – Parallel port – Keyboard / Mouse Interface connectors.
References
1. PC Hardware Complete Reference - Craig Zacker & John Rourke, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Inside the PC (8th Edition) - Peter Norton,BPB
3. The Indispensable PC Hardware Book - Messmer, Pearson Education
4. Troubleshooting and Repairing Your PC - Corey Candler, Wiley
5. Upgrading and repairing PC’s (4th edition) - Scott Mueller, Pearson Education
6. IBM PC Assembly Language Programming - Abel, PHI
7. PC Upgrading Maintenance & Trouble shooting guide - Dr. S. K. Chauhan, Kataria
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
RT 602 2+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to Software engineering
328
Introduction – Software and software Engg.- Phases in software development-Software development
process models-Role of Management in software development –Role of Matrics and measurement
–Software requirement specification(SRS) - Problem Analysis - validation .
Module 2 Project Planning

Cost Estimation – Uncertainties – models – COCOMO model – Project scheduling – average
duration estimation – Project scheduling and milestones – staffing and personal plan – Rayleigh
curve – personnel plan – team structure – software configuration – management plans – quality
assurance plans – verification and validation – inspections and reviews - project monitoring plans -
time sheets – reviews – cost schedule – milestone graph – risk management.
Module 3 System Design

Design Principles – Problem partitioning and hierarchy – abstraction – modularity – top down and
bottom_up – strategies – module level concepts - coupling - cohesion – structured design
methodology - verification - matrics.
Module 4 Coding
Top-down and Bottom-up - Structured Programming - Information Hiding - Programming style -
Internal Documentation – Verification - Code Reading - Static Analysis - Symbolic execution -
Proving Correctness - Code inspections – Unit testing.
Module 5 Testing
Testing fundamentals - Functional and Structured Testing - Testing Process - Comparison of
Verification and Validation Techniques - Reliability assessment - Programmer Productivity - Error
removal efficiency.
Text Book
1. An integrated approach to Software Engineering - Pankaj Jalote, Narosa Publication
References
1. Software Engineering - Roger S. Pressman, Tata McGraw Hill

2. Software Engineering - Ian Sommervilla, Pearson Education
3. Software Engineering Theory and Practice - Shari Lawrence, Pearson Education Asia
4. Fundamentals of Software Engineering –Rajib Mall, PHI
5. Fundamentals of Software Engineering – Carlo Ghezzi, Mehdi Jazayeri, PHI
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND QUALITY ASSURANCE

R603 2+1+0
Module 1 PROJECT PLANNING

Overview – Capital expenditure - Phases of capital budgeting – Project development cycle – 7-s of
project management – Requirements of a project manager – Forms of project organization.
Module 2 PROJECT ANALYSIS
329
Market Analysis – Technical Analysis - Financial Analysis – Risk Analysis – Social cost Benefit
Analysis.
Module 3 CONTROL OF PROJECT

Control Systems – Control of major constraints – Project management software & information
systems.
REVIEW: Performance of Evaluation – Abaudonment Analysis – Behavioral issues in Project
Management
Module 4 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Quality systems – ISO 9000 series – ISI – Benchmarking – Quality Function development (QFD) –
Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) – ISO 14000.
Module 5 CONCEPTS IN SAMPLING

Sampling designs and schemes – Errors in sampling – Simple random sample – stratified random
sample – Cluster sample.
Sample size destination – Estimating population mean – Estimating population proportion.
References
1. Projects preparation, Apprisal, Budgeting & Implementation – Prasanna Chandra – Tata McGraw
Hill
2. Projects – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation & Review - Prasanna Chandra – Tata
McGraw Hill
3. Project Management - Harvey Maylor - Pearson Education
4. Total Quality Management – Dale H. Besterfield – Pearson Education
5. Quality control and Improvement – Amitava Mitra – Pearson Education
6. Quality assurance and TQM – Jain & Chitale – Khanna Publishers
COMPUTER NETWORKS
RT 604 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: ISO-OSI Reference Model – TCP/IP Reference Model – Comparison Network
hardware-Repeaters, Routers, Bridges, Gateways, Hub, Cable Modem.
Physical Layer: Transmission Media– ISDN system Architecture – Communication Satellites –
geostationary satellites - Medium Earth Orbit Satellites- Low earth orbit satellites– Satellite v/s
Fiber
Module 2
Data Link Layer: Design issues-Error Detection and correction – Elementary Data link protocols-
Sliding window protocols. .
LAN Protocols: Static & Dynamic channel allocation in LAN’s and WAN’s, Multiple access
protocols – ALOHA – Pure ALOHA – Slotted ALOHA – Carrier Sense Multiple Access protocols –
persistent and non-persistent CSMA – CSMA with collision detection – IEEE 802.3 standards for
LAN
Module 3
Network layer: Virtual Circuits, Datagrams, Routing Algorithm – Optimality principle - Flooding -
Flow Based Routing - Link state routing – Distance vector routing – Multicasting – Link state
330
multicasting – Distance vector multicasting - Congestion Control Algorithms – General principles –
Packet discarding – Choke packets - Congestion prevention policies – Traffic shaping – Leaky
bucket algorithm – Flow specifications – jitter control
Module 4
Transport Layer: - Transport Service - Elements of transport protocols – Internet Transfer
Protocols UDP and TCP – ATM – Principle characteristics.
Module 5
Application Layer: Domain name system – DNS name space – Resource records – Name servers –
operation of DNS - Electronic Mail – MIME
Mobile networks: Mobile telephone systems, Bluetooth - Components – Error correction –
Network topology – Piconet and scatternet – L2CAP layers – Communication in Bluetooth networks
References
1. Computer Networks (Fourth Edition): Andrew S.Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI
2. An Introduction to computer networking: Kenneth C. Mansfield Jr., James L. Antonakos,
Prentice-Hall India
3. Communication Network: Leon, Garcia, Widjaja Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Computer Networks (Second Edition): Larry L Peterson & Bruce S Davie, (Harcourt India)
5. Computer Networking: James F Kurose & Keith W Ross, Pearson Education
6. Introduction to Data Communications and Networking: Behrouz, Forouzan, McGraw Hill
NETWORK COMPUTING
RT 605 3+1+0
Module 1
HTML Documents Basic Tags for Font & Paragraph Formatting Lists, Tables, Frames, image Maps
Cascading Style Sheets Style Element, Inline style sheets, Embedded style sheets, External Style
sheets, CLASS Attribute, Absolute and relative positioning of elements, DIV & SPAN Tags.
Module 2
Dynamic HTML Pages Client side scripting - Java Script – variables, Arithmetic operations –
message boxes, Arrays, control statements, functions, event handling, document object model.
Dynamic updating of pages with JAVA Script.
Embedding ActiveX controls - using the structured graphics – ActiveX Control.
Module 3
Java programming – Features of Java, Creating & using classes in Java – Static classes – Inheritance
– Final methods, variables and classes – Interfaces - Nested classes – Inner classes – Anonymous
Inner classes – Exception handling – Creating & using exceptions, Multithreaded programs and
thread synchronization, creating and using packages. Creating GUI with AWT and Swing – -JDK1.1
event model
331
Module 4
Network Programming with Java - Features of Java – Applets & Application – Life cycle of applets
- Security features for applets - Inter applet communication – Threads & Thread synchronization –
TCP/IP Programming with Java – Iterative & Concurrent servers. Datagrams, IP multicasting, RMI
(Structure and Working of a simple RMI Program only)
Module 5
HTTP Protocol working – HTTP methods, GET, PUT, DELETE, POST, HEAD
Server side scripting – HTML Forms & CGI – GET & POST, Basic working of a CGI supported
web server – Simple CGI program in C to validate user name & Password. Email: Working of
SMTP and POP protocols (Overview only).
References
Module 1,2,5
1. Internet and World Wide Web How to program - Deitel,Deitel & Nieto, Pearson Education Asia
2. HTML, DHTML, Java Script, Perl, CGI - Evan Bayross, BPB
Module 3,4,5
3. Java 2 Complete reference - Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill
4. Java 2, AWT, Swing, XML and JavaBeans Programming Black Book – Steven Holzner,
Wiley Dreamtech
Asia
6. Using Java 2 Platform - Joseph Weber, PHI
7. Computer Networks - Tenanbaum, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia
Additional References
Unix Network Programming - Stevens W Richard, PHI

8. TCP/IP Protocol suite, 2/e -Behrouz A. Forouzan, TMH
ALGORITHM ANALYSIS AND DESIGN

R606 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction and Complexity

What is an algorithm – Properties of an Algorithm, Difference between Algorithm, Computational
Procedure and Program, Study of Algorithms; Pseudo-code Conventions; Recursive Algorithms –
Space and Time Complexity –Asymptotic Notations – ‘Oh’, ‘Omega’, ‘Theta’, Common
Complexity Functions; Recurrence Relations and Recurrence Trees for Complexity Calculations;
Profiling. –Deterministic and non - deterministic algorithms.
Module 2 Divide and Conquer

Control Abstraction, Finding Maximum and Minimum, Binary Search, Divide and Conquer Matrix
Multiplication, Stressen’s Matrix Multiplication, Merge Sort, Quick Sort.
Module 3 Greedy Strategy
332
Control Abstraction, General Knapsack Problem, Optimal Storage on Tapes, Minimum Cost
Spanning Trees – Prim’s Algorithm, Kruskal’s Algorithm – Job sequencing with deadlines.
Module 4 Dynamic Programming

Principle of Optimality, Multi-stage Graph, All-Pairs Shortest Paths, Travelling Salesman Problem.
Lower Bound Theory - Comparison Trees for Searching and Sorting, Oracles and Adversary
Arguments – Merging, Insertion & Selection Sort; Selection of ‘k’th Smallest Element.
Module 5 Backtracking
Control Abstraction - Bounding Functions, Control Abstraction, N-Queens Problem, Sum of
Subsets, Knapsack problem.
Branch and Bound Techniques – FIFO, LIFO, and LC Control Abstractions, 15-puzzle, Travelling
Salesman Problem.
Text Book
1. Fundamentals of Computer Algorithms - Horowitz and Sahni, Galgotia
References
1. Computer Algorithms – Introduction to Design and Analysis - Sara Baase & Allen Van Gelder,
Pearson Education
2. Data Structures algorithms and applications - Sahni, Tata McGrHill
3. Foundations of Algorithms - Richard Neapolitan, Kumarss N., DC Hearth & Company
4. Introduction to algorithm- Thomas Coremen, Charles, Ronald Rivest -PHI
SYSTEM SOFTWARE LAB

R607 0+0+4
1. Symbol table construction

2. Single pass and two pass assembler.
3. Macro processor module binder (with limited Instruction set)
4. Lexical analyzer.
5. Bottom Up and Top Down Parser.
6. Code generation.
7. Generation of code for linkers & loaders. Working of device drivers, process scheduling methods.
Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT505 can be substituted.
MINI PROJECT
R608 0+0+4
The aim of the mini project is to prepare the students for the final year project. The topic for the mini
project should be simple as compared to the main project, but should cover all the aspects of a
complete project.
333
SEVENTH SEMESTER
334
335
OBJECT ORIENTED MODELING AND DESIGN
RT 701 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: object oriented development-modeling concepts – object oriented methodology –
models – object oriented themes-Object Modeling– links and associations – advanced links and
association concepts – generalization and inheritance - grouping constructs – a sample object model
Advanced Object Modeling: aggregation – abstract classes – generalization as extension and
restriction – multiple inheritance – metadata – candidate keys – constraints.
Module 2
Dynamic modeling: Events and states – Operations – Nested state diagrams – Concurrency –
Advanced dynamic modeling concepts – A sample dynamic model – Relationship of Object and
Dynamic models.
Functional modeling: Functional models – Data Flow Diagrams - Specifying operations –
Constraints – A sample functional model – Relation of functional to Object and Dynamic models.
Module 3
Analysis: Analysis in object modeling, dynamic modeling and functional modeling, Adding
operations- Iterating the analysis
System Design: Breaking system into subsystems - Identifying concurrency-allocating subsystems to
processors and tasks, managing of data stores. Handling of global resources- handling boundary
conditions-Common Architectural Frameworks
Module 4
Object Design: Overview of Object design – Combining the three models – Designing algorithms –
Design optimization – Implementation of control – Adjustment of inheritance - Design of association
– Object representation – Physical packaging – Documenting design decisions-Comparison of
methodologies
Module 5
Other Models: Booch’s Methodology- Notations, models, concepts. Jacobson Methodology-
architecture, actors and use-cases, requirement model, Analysis Model, Design model,
Implementation model and Test Model-Unified Modeling Language (UML).
Text Book
1. Object Oriented Modeling and Design -JamesRumbaugh, Prentice Hall India

2. Object Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications - Grady Booch, Pearson Education Asia
References
1. Object Oriented Software Engineering - Ivan Jacobson, Pearson Education Asia

2. Object Oriented Software Engineering - Berno Bruegge, Allen H. Dutoit, Pearson Education
Asia
3. Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML - H. Srimathi, H. Sriram, A. Krishnamoorthy
336
4. Succeeding with the Booch OMT Methods -A practical approach - Lockheed Martin, Addison
Wesley
5. UML and C++ practical guide to Object Oriented development - Richard C.Lee & William,
Prentice Hall India
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
RT 702 3+1+0
Module1
Introduction to Computer Graphics: Basic concepts in Computer Graphics – Applications of
Computer Graphics, Interactive Graphics system – Raster scan and Random scan systems –
Generating a raster image, Application of raster scan graphics. Video Display Devices, Display
processors – Display files – graphical input & output devices.
Module 2
2D Graphics: Line drawing algorithms – DDA, Bresenham’s – Bresenham’s Circle drawing
algorithm - 2D Transformations, Clipping – Line clipping – Polygon Clipping, Windowing.
Module 3
3D Graphics: 3D display methods, 3D Object Representation – Polygon Surfaces – Quadratic
surfaces – Spline Representations – Bezier Curves and Surfaces – B-Spline Curves and Surfaces, 3D
Transformations.
Module 4
3D Rendering: Three-Dimensional Viewing - Projections, Clipping, Visible Surface Detection –
Classification of Visible surface detection algorithms – Back-face Detection, Depth- Buffer Method,
Scan-line Method.
Surface Rendering Methods-Basic illumination Models – Polygon–rendering Methods, Gouraud
Shading, Ray-Tracing Methods.
Module 5
Advanced Technologies: Fractals – Classification of Fractals – Self-Squaring Fractals, Animation-
Raster Animation, Morphing.
Text Book
1. Computer Graphics (C version) - Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Pearson Education Asia)
References
1. Computer Graphics - Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Prentice Hall of India)
2. Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics – William .N. Newman, Robert .F. Sproull (second
edition), McGraw Hill edition
3. Computer Graphics Principles & Practice -Foley, VanDam, Feiner, Hughes (second edition in C),
Addison Wesley
4. Fundamentals of Computer graphics & multimedia- D. P. Mukherjee, Prentice Hall of India
5. Java 2 complete reference - Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill
6. Computer Graphics - Roy A Plastack & Gordon Kally (Schanmi Series McGraw Hill edition)
337
THEORY OF COMPUTATION
R703 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to the theory of computation – Set theory – Definition of sets – Properties –
Countability – Uncountability – Equinumerous sets – Functions – Primitive recursive and partial
recursive functions – Computable and non computable functions – Diagonalization principle –
Formal representation of languages – Chomsky Classification.
Module 2
Introduction to Automata theory – Definition of Automation – Finite Automata – Formal definition –
Language acceptability by Finite Automata – Transition Diagrams and Transition systems -
Deterministic and Nondeterministic finite automation – Finite Automation with - Transitions –
Eliminating -Transitions - Conversion of NFA to DFA – Regular operations – Regular
Expressions – Pumping lemma for regular languages – Applications of finite state automata –
Lexical analysers – Text search.
Module 3
Pushdown Automata – Formal definition – Language acceptability by PDA – Deterministic and
nondeterministic PDA – Context free grammar - Applications of PDA – Parsing.
Module 4
Turing Machines – Formal definition – Language acceptability – Universal Turing Machines –
Halting Problem of Turing Machines – Church’s Thesis - Godelization.
Module 5
Algorithmic complexity – Tractable and intractable problems – Complexity classes – Class P – Class
NP – NP Complete and NP Hard problems.
References
1. Introduction to the Theory of Computation- Michael Sipser, Brooks/Cole (Thomson Learning)

2. Theory of Computer Science – K.L.P. Mishra, N. Chandrashekharan, Prentice Hall of India
3. Elements of the theory of computation -Harry R Lewis, Christos H Papadimitriou Prentice Hall
of India / Pearson Education Asia
4. The Theory of Computation - Bernard M Morct (Pearson Edn)
5. Introduction to Automata Theory, Languages & Computation John Hopcroft, Rajeev Motwani &
Jeffry Ullman (Pearson Edn)
ADVANCED SOFTWARE ENVIORNMENTS

R704 2+1+0
Module 1
Windows Programming – Components of Windows API- Distinction with ordinary programs –
Event Driven Programming – WinMain Function – Creating Windows – Message loop – Window
procedures - Menus & Buttons – Drawing on Windows.
Module 2
338
MFC Features & Advantages – MFC Classes – Life cycle of an MFC application – The CWinApp
Classes – Creating windows – Message maps and event handling – Menus & Buttons - Drawing on
MFC windows – Handling mouse & Keyboard events.
Module 3
CORBA – Introduction – Features – Fundamental concepts in Distributed objects – CORBA IDL –
stub & Skeleton - implementing a simple CORBA server and CORBA client with C++.
Module 4
CORBA object reference – Managing references at server – CORBA factories – CORBA object
creation in C++ & JAVA – CORBA Exceptions – Destroying CORBA objects - comparison of
CORBA & DCOM Architectures.
Module 5
X-Windows – Clients & Servers - Basic Architecture of X-Windows systems – Layers in
XWindows Architecture – XWindows Programming – Simple Hello World Application in X.
Command line options and resources – connecting to X-Display – creating windows and graphics
context – Handling events – creating child windows.
References
Module1, 2
1. Visual C++ Programming - Yashwanth Kanetkar (BPB)
2. Programming Windows Fifth Edition – Charles Petzold Microsoft Press
3. Visual C++ Programming Bible – Leinecker & Archer IDG Books
4. Visual C++ Handbook - Osborne, TMH
Module 3, 4
5. COM & CORBA side by side – Janson Pritchard, Pearson Education Asia
Module 5
6. X-Windows system programming – Nabajyoti Barkakati (2nd Edition), Prentice Hall of India
WEB TECHNOLOGIES
RT 705 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to SGML – features - XML, XML as a subset of SGML – XML Vs HTML – Views of
an XML document – simple XML documents – Starting & Ending of Tags – Attributes of Tags –
Entity References – Comments - CDATA section
Module 2
Document Type declarations – Creating XML DTDs – Element type declaration – Attribute List
Declaration – Attribute types – Attribute defaults – Displaying XML Data in HTML browser as
HTML tables – Storing XML data in HTML document – Converting XML to HTML with XSL
minimalist XSL style sheets – XML applications
Module 3
339
Java Beans: Features – Designing Java Beans – Creating and using properties – Induced - bound and
constrained properties - using and creating events – Introspection – creating & using Beanlnfo
clauses – customization – providing custom property editors and GUI interfaces.
Module 4
JSPs - Creating simple JSP Pages – templating – Request time expression – Request & Response
objects – Reading parameter values – Using Javabeans in JSPs - Reading & setting Properties of
JavaBeans – Connecting forms & bean properties – Serialized beans – declaring variables &
methods in pages – scriptlets – conditionals, loops & execution handling in JSPs with scriptlets –
Accessing beans via scriptlets.
Module 5
EJB – Basics of EJB – Types of Beans – Development of Session Beans – Steps – Creating &
Implementing Interfaces – Writing Deployment descriptors – Packaging and deploying bean - using
the bean from a client – Development of stateful session bean. Entity beans – Features (Basics of
developing and using entity beans)
References
Module1, 2
1. XML by Example: Building Ecommerce applications - Sean McGrath,Pearson Education Asia
Module3
2. Using JAVA 2 Platform Special Edition Java 2, AWT, Swing, XML and Java Beans - Joseph
L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India
3. Programming Black Book - Steven Holzner, Wiley Dreamtech
Module4
4. Java Server pages - Larne Pekowsky – Pearson Education Asia
5. JSP: Java server pages - Barry Burd, IDG Books India
Module 5
6. Mastering Enterprise Java Beans and the Java 2 Platforms, Enterprise Edition – EdRoman
(WILEY computer publishing)
7. EJB Design Patterns - Floyd Marinescu
Additional Reference
8. Internet & Web Technologies - Raj Kamal, TMH
ELECTIVE - I
R706 3+1+0
List of electives
1. Optimization Techniques
2. Operating System Kernal Design
3. Principles of Real Time Systems
4. Windows Programming
5. Mobile Computing
6. Software Architecture
340
7. Lan Technology
Note
New Electives may be added according to the needs of emerging fields in technology. The name of
the elective and its syllabus should be submitted to the university before the course is offered.

CMELRTA 706-1 3+1+0
Module1: Classical optimization techniques

Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method-
Multivariable optimization with inequality constrains – Kuhn-Tucker conditions.

Elimination metods – unrestricted search method – Fibonacci method – Interpolation methods –
Quadratic interpolation and cubic interpolation metods.
Module 3 Unsonstrained minimization

Gradient of function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hooke and
Jeeve’s method.
Module 4 Interger – Linear programming problem
Gomory’s cutting plane method – Gomery’s method for all integer programming problems, mixed
integer programming problems
Module 5 Network Technique

Shortest path model - Dijkstra’s Algorithm Floyd’s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem –
PRIM algorithm – Maximal Flow Problem algorithm
References
5. Operation Research – R. Pannerselvam, PHI
OPERATING SYSTEM KERNEL DESIGN (ELECTIVE - I)

R706-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Operating system – Basic Structure - Kernel – monolithic and microkernel architectures – Overview
of UNIX kernels – Process kernel Model - reentrant kernels -Signals –Interrupts – Timer interrupts -
System calls – Implementation of simple system calls – Booting procedure.
Module 2
341
Processes and Tasks – Process relationship – process creation – Process Scheduling – Scheduling
algorithm – SMP Scheduler
Synchronization in kernel – Synchronization techniques - Interprocess communication using
semaphores, messages and shared memory
Module 3
Memory Management – The architecture independent memory model in Linux – memory pages –
Virtual address space and linear address calculation – Virtual address space for a process – User
segment – Virtual memory areas – Kernel Segment – Memory allocation in kernel segment – Block
device caching mechanisms in Linux – paging – Page cache and management – handling page faults.
Module 4
Linux File systems: Basic principles – kernel representation of file systems – layered file system
architecture – Virtual file system – filesystem registration – mounting.
The ext2 File system – Directories in ext2 – block allocation and addressing - extensions in ext2 file
system
Module 5
Device drivers – Character and block devices – polling – interrupt sharing – implementing a device
driver for PC speaker
References
1. Linux Kernel Internals 2nd edition – Beck (Pearson Education Asia)

2. Understanding the Linux Kernel - Daniel P Bovet and Marco Cesati (O’Reilly)
3. Linux Device Drivers – Rubini A. (O’Reilly)
4. Operating System Concepts - Silbershatz and Galvin (John Wiley)
5. Linux Kernel Online Book– David A Rusling (http://www.linuxdoc.org/LDP/tlk/tlk.html)
6. Linux Kernel Book – Card R, E Dumas, F Mevel (John Wiley)
7. Unix Internals Then New Frontiers – Vahalia U (PHI)
8. Red Hat Linux 7.1 Bible – Christofer Negus (IDG Books)

RT706-3 3+1+0
Module 1
Module 2
systems, hybrid systems, task control block - task status, scheduling – uniprocessor scheduling –
Module 3
342
issues, protocols – contention – based, token - based, stop and go multiloop, polled bus, hierarchal,
Module 4
Module 5
Text Book
1. Real Time Systems - C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (Tata McGraw Hill)
References

2. Real Time Systems- Krishna, Tata McGraw Hill
WINDOWS PROGRAMMING (ELECTIVE - I)

RT706-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction - Concepts of Windows Programming - Event Driven Programming – Languages that
support Windows Programming – Visual Basic – Java – Visual C++
Visual Basic Programming: Basic Language features – Variables, data types, constants, control
statements – Forms – Creating and Using basic Controls – text boxes, labels, buttons - Event
handling procedures – Properties Window – Common properties for Controls. Message boxes
Module 2
Visual Basic Programming (Contd) Standard Controls – List boxes, Comboboxes, Image box,
picture box, Shape controls, Timer, Scrollbars, Frames, Checkboxes, Option Boxes – Frames - File,
Drive and Directory List boxes.- MDI and SDI interfaces – Menus
Module 3
ActiveX controls - RichTextBox, Tree View Control, List view Control, Progessbar, Flexgrid
Control, Common dialog Controls – Font, File, Print Dialogs – Creating Custom activex controls –
Creating Events and properties for ActiveX controls.
Module 4
Graphics and Multimedia – Drawing Graphics in Windows - setting colors - Drawing text, lines,
ellipses, arcs, circles – plotting points –Filling figures with colors and patterns – Using clipboards to
transfer images between applications Printing graphics and text – Creating animations with Picture
343
clip control - applying image effects – stretching, flipping, embossing, egraving, blurring, sweeping
– Using the Multimedia Control – Handling multimedia Errors
Module 5
Database Access – Using DAO, RDO and ADO for accessing databases – Creating tables, inserting,
deleting and updating records – Using the Data Control – Using the ADO Data Control
Using Windows API: Using DLL Procedures in Visual Basic – Declare statement – Handling C++
and Windows Data types – Playing sound with API funtions – Capturing Images from the screen –
Handling mouse outside Applications window – Making an ‘always on top’ window.
References
1. Visual Basic 6 Programming Black Book – Steven Holzner (Dreamtech Press)

2. Programming Windows fifth Edition - Charles Petzlod (Microsoft Press)
3. Visual Basic - Ivan Petrosaus (BPB)
4. Visual Basic - Garry Cornell (BPB)
5. Using Visual Basic - Resselman (PHI)
MOBILE COMPUTING (ELECTIVE - I)

RT706-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: - Short History, Mobile telephone systems
Simplified Reference model. Multi carrier modulation. Cellular systems.
Module 2
Wireless Communication Systems: -Telecommunication Systems-GSM & DECT-Architecture and
Protocols.Satellite Systems-GEO, LEO, MEO.
Broadcast Systems-Broadcast transmission, Digital Audio Broadcasting-Multimedia Object Transfer
Protocol. Digital Video Broadcasting.
Module 3
Wireless LAN and ATM: - Infra red and Radio Transmission, Infrastructure and ad hoc networks,
802.11- Bluetooth- Architecture, Applications and Protocol, Layers, Frame structure, comparison
between 802.11 and 802.16.
Wireless ATM- Services, Reference Model, Functions, Radio Access Layer. Handover- Reference
Model, Requirements, Types, handover scenarios.
Location Management, Addressing, Access Point Control Protocol (APCP).
Module 4
Mobile Network and Transport Layers:- Mobile IP- Goals, Requirements, IP packet delivery,
Advertisement and discovery. Registration, Tunneling and Encapsulation, Optimization, Reverse
Tunneling, IPv6, Dynamic Host configuring protocol, Ad hoc networks – Routing, DSDV, Dynamic
source routing. Hierarchical Algorithms.
Traditional TCP, Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Transmission.
344
Module 5
Wireless Application Protocol & World Wide Web
WAP- Architecture, Protocols-Datagram, Transaction, Session -Wireless Application Environment-
WML- Features, Script- Wireless Telephony Application.
WWW- HTTP, Usage of HTML, WWW system architecture.
Text Book
1. Mobile Communications – Jochen Schiller, Preason Education Asia
References
1. Computer Networks – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, PHI

2. Communication Networks -Fundamental Concepts and Key Architectures Leon-Garcia & Indra
Widjaja, Tata McGraw Hill
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE (ELECTIVE - I)

RT706-6 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Software architecture – Architectural styles – pipes and filters –data abstraction and
object oriented organization – Event based, Implicit invocation, Layered systems – Repositories –
Interpreters – Process control – Heterogeneous Architectures.
Module 2
Shared Information Systems – Integration in software Development Environment – Integration in the
design of Buildings – Architectural structures for shared information systems
Module 3
Guidance for user interface architecture Quantified design space – Formal models and
specifications-The value of architectural formalism – Formalizing the architecture of a specific
system – Formalizing the architectural style – Formalizing an architectural design space
Module 4
Linguistic issues - Requirements for architecture – Description languages – first class connectors –
Adding implicit invocation to factorial processing languages.
Module 5
Tools for architectural design – Unicon – Exploiting style in architectural design environments –
Architectural interconnection
Reference
1. Software Architecture – perspectives on an emerging discipline - Mary Shaw, David Garlan, PHI
LAN TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - I)
R706-7 3+1+0
345
Module 1
Classification of LAN - Life cycle of LAN- Models for Communication - Topology - LAN standards
- IEEE 802.2 LLC, IEEE 802.x MAC, FDDI.
Module 2
Protocols: LAN protocols, protocol evaluation factors – CSMA – CSMA/CD, CSMA/CA – polling –
Token passing – Ethernet – ACRNETs – IBM/PC network – IBM token ring.
Module 3
Traditional interconnection components – Repeater, Bridges, Routers, Network interface cards,
Types of switch, port switching & segment switching – combined speed – Hubs.
Module 4
LAN Operating System – Peer – to –peer network – Function & responsibility – Print
spooler – Current Network Operating Systems.
Module 5
Management & security – security levels – printing environment – opportunities, driver, printing
queue – LAN security – physical security – logical security.
Text Book
1. Local area networks: Management, Design & security- Arne Mikalsen Per Borgesen – WILEY-
dreamtech
2. Local Area Network - S. K. Basandra, S. Jaiswal
References
1. Local Area Networks - John E McNamara

2. Understanding Local Area Network- Stan Schutt – PHI
3. Handbook of LAN Technology - Paul J. Fortier – McGraw Hill
4. Networking Technologies - Jaisal – Galgotia Publications
5. Networking and Connectivity - Gary R. McClain – Academic Press
6. Wireless LANs - Raymond P. Wenig – Academic Press
7. TCP/IP Networking – A Guide to the IBM Environment - David M. Peterson – McGraw Hill
8. Introduction to Local Area Networks- Robert M. Thomas – BPB
9. LAN- Peter Hodson – BPB
10. LAN- Gerd E. Kerser – McGraw Hill
11. The Business Guide to Local Area Networks - William Stallings
COMPUTER HARDWARE AND NETWORKING LAB

R707 0+0+3
Familiarisation with PC Components
346
1. Diagnostic S/Ws, Cards, Design & Programming of add-on cards familiarisation with device
drivers, Micro controllers etc.
2. Experiments for communication with peripheral devices using C and MASM.
3. Experiments for serial and parallel port communication using C and MASM.
4. Faimiliarisation with network configuration (routing, DNS, File Servers etc…)
5. Lan trouble shooting, Network problems and recovery, Network diagnostics softwares.
References
1. Upgrading & Repairing PC’s - Scott Muller (PHI)
2. Red hat Linux Bible- Cristofer Negas (IDG Books)
3. TCP/IP Bible –Rob Scringer (IDG Books)
NETWORK PROGRAMMING LAB

R708 0+0+3
Experiments using interprocess communication and Network communication, synchronisation & IPC using
semaphore, pipe & messages.
Programs for FTP and socket based chat.

Implementation of File Transfer - Communication through serial port - Communication through TCP/IP port
Efficient error checking algorithms (Eg: CRC)
Remote Procedure Call, Remote Method Invocation.
Programs with HTML, DHTML, Applets, Java Script, Java, XML, Java Beans, JSP and EJB.
Any experiments according to the syllabus of RT604 Computer Networks, RT605 Network Computing and
RT705 Web Technologies may be substituted
References
1. UNIX Network programming - Stevens. (PHI)

2. Using Java2 Platform – Weber (AWL)
PROJECT & SEMINAR

R709/ R808 0+0+3
Each student is required to present a technical paper on subject approved by the department. The
paper should in general reflect the state of the art. He/ She submits a report of the paper to the
department.
347
In addition to the seminar He/She shall undertake a project work in the 7 th semester itself in
consultation with the guide(s). On completion of the project work, He/She shall present the work
done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work done to the
department.
348
EIGHTH SEMESTER
349
SECURITY IN COMPUTING
RT 801 2+1+0
Module1
Introduction: Security basics – Aspects of network security – Attacks – Different types – Hackers –
Crackers – Common intrusion techniques –Trojan Horse, Virus, Worm – Security services and
mechanisms.
Module 2
OS Security – Protection Mechanisms –Authentication & Access control – Discretionary and
Mandatory access control – Authentication mechanisms – Official levels of computer security (DoD)
- Security breaches – Concept of a hole - Types of a holes – Study of the security features for
authentication, access control and remote execution in UNIX, WINDOWS 2000
Module 3
Cryptography: Basic Encryption & Decryption – Transposition & substitution ciphers – Caesar
substitution – Polyalphabetic substitutions – Crypt analysis – Symmetric key algorithms – Fiestel
Networks – Confusion – Diffusion – DES Algorithm – Strength of DES – Comparison & important
features of modern symmetric key algorithms – Public key cryptosystems – The RSA Algorithm –
Diffice Hellman key exchange – comparison of RSA & DES – Message Authentication & Hash
functions – Digital signature
Module 4
Network & Application Security: Kerberos – X509 Authentication service – IP security Architecture
– Secure socket layer – Electronic mail security – Pretty Good privacy – S/MIME – secure
Electronic Transactions – Firewalls - Security mechanisms in JAVA platform – Applet security –
Security policy and Security Manager.
Module 5
Database Security: - Security issues – SQL security DAC based on granting & revoking privileges –
MAC for multilevel security – Statistical database security.
Text Books
1. Module1, 4 Network Security Essentials Applications & Standards, William S., Pearson
Education Asia
2. Module2 Modern operating System, Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia
3. Using JAVA 2 platform, Joseph L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India
4. Module3 Cryptography and network security principles and practice, William Stallings, Pearson
Education Asia
5. Information theory coding and cryptography, Ranjan Bose, TMH
6. Module 4,5 Designing security Architecture Solutions, Jay Ramachandran, Wiley Dreamtech
7. Module5 Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network, Sead Muftic, John wiles
References
1. Security in Computing - Charles P. Pfleeger IEEE Computer Science Press

2. Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network- Sead Muftic, John wiles
3. Designing Security Architecture Solutions – Jay Ramachandran, Wiley dreamtech
4. Firewalls Complete - Marcus Gonsalvus, TMH
350
5. Networking Technologies - Jaisal, Galgotia Publication
6. Security in Computer Operating System - G.O.Shea, NCC Blackwell Manchester Oxford
7. Mastering JAVA security: Cryptography, Algorithms and Architecture - Rich Helton, Wiley
Dreamtech
8. Implementing IPv6- Mark A. Miller P.E, IDG Books
HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING

R802 2+1+0
Module1
Introduction to parallel processing - Trends towards parallel processing - Parallelism in uniprocessor
- Parallel computer structures-Architecture classification schemes - Indian contribution to parallel
processing.
Module 2
Principles of pipelining and vector processing - Linear pipelining - Classification of pipeline
processors - General pipelines - Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines –Design of Pipilined instruction
unit-Prinnciples of Designing Pipeline Processors- Instruction prefetch and branch handling-
Dynamic pipelines - Architecture of Cray-1.
Module 3
Array processors - SIMD array processors - Interconnection networks - Static vs dynamic networks -
mesh connected networks - Cube interconnection networks - Parallel algorithms for array processors
- SIMD matrix multiplication-Parallel sorting on array processors - Associative array processing -
Memory organization.
Module 4
Multiprocessor architectures and Programming - Loosely coupled and Tightly coupled
multiprocessors - Interconnection networks - Language features to exploit parallelism - Process
synchronisation mechanisms.
Module5
Dataflow computers - Data driven computing and Languages - Data flow computers architectures -
Static data flow computer -Dynamic data flow computer -Data flow design alternatives.
Text Book
1. Computer Architecture & Parallel Processing - Kai Hwang & FayeA.Briggs, McGraw Hill
References
1. Elements of Parallel computing - V. Rajaraman - PHI

2. Super Computers - V. Rajaraman - Wiely arstern
3. Parellel Processing for Super Computers & AI - Kai Hwange & Douglas Degneot
4. Mc Graw Hill
5. Highly parallel computing - George S. Almasi, Allan Gottlieb - Benjamin Cumings Publishers.
6. HIgh Performance Computer Architecture - Harold S. Stone, Addison Wesley.
7. Advanced Computing - Vijay P.Bhatkar, Asok V.Joshi, Arirban Basu, Asok K.Sharma.
351
PRINCIPLES OF PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES
R803 3+1+0
Module1
Introduction – Role of programming languages - Effects of Environments on languages - Language
Design issues - Virtual computers and binding times, Language Paradigms.
Module2
Data types - Specification of data types, implementation of elementary data types, Declarations, type
checking and type conversion - Assignment and Initialisation - Structured data types - Specification
of data structure types, Implementation of data structure type - Declarations and type checking for
data structures.
Module 3
Abstract data types, Encapsulation by subprogram - Type definition, storage management - Sequence
Control - Implicit and Explicit sequence control, sequencing with arithmetic expressions, sequence
control between statements.
Module 4
Subprogram control - Subprogram sequence control, attributes of data control, Shared data in
subprograms - Abstract data types revisited, Inheritance, Polymorphism.
Module 5
Advances in Language design - Variations of subprogram control, Parallel programming,
Introduction to exception handling - Exception handling in JAVA, Hardware developments,
software architecture.
Text Book
1. Programming Languages, Design & Implementation - Terrence W. Pratt, Marvin V. Zelkowitz.,

Pearson Education Asia / Prentice Hall of India
Reference
1. Programming Languages - Robert W Sebesta, Pearson EducationAsia

ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
RT 804 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction – Definitions – AI application areas – Example problems- Problems and problem
spaces - Problem characteristics – Problem solving by searching, Searching strategies – Breadth first
search, Uniform cost search, DFS, Depth – Limited search, Bi-directional search – Constraint
satisfaction search.
Module 2
Informed search, A* algorithm, Heuristic functions – Inventing Heuristic functions - Heuristic for
constraint satisfaction problem – Iterative deepening – Hill climbing – Simulated Annealing.
Module3
352
Game playing and knowledge structures – Games as search problem – Imperfect decisions –
Evaluation functions – Alpha – Beta pruning – state of art game programs, Introduction to frames
and semantic nets.
Module 4
Knowledge and Reasoning – Review of representation and reasoning with Logic – Inference in first
order logic, Inference rules involving quantifiers, modus ponens, Unification, forward and backward
chaining – Resolution.
Module 5
Introduction to Prolog – Representing facts – Recursive search – Abstract data types – Alternative
search strategies – Meta predicates, Matching and evaluation, meta interpreters – semantic nets &
frames in prolog.
Text Books
Module 1,2,3,4
1. Artificial Intelligence – A modern approach, Stuact Russell – Peter Narang, Pearson Education Asia
2. Artificial Intelligence Rich E. - McGraw Hill Booq Company
Module 5
3. Artificial Intelligence, George F Luger, Pearson Education Asia
References
1. An Introduction to Artificial Intelligence – Eugene Charniak & Drew McDermot, Pearson

Education Asia
ELECTIVE - II
R805 3+1+0
List of electives
1. Advanced Mathematics
2. Client-Server Computing
3. E-Commerce
4. Analysis and Modeling of Digital Systems
5. Distributed Computing
6. User Interface Design
Note
353
ADVANCED MATHEMATICS (ELECTIVE - I)
CMELR 805-1 3+1+0


Green’s function – integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral equations of convolution type
– Neumann series solution.



References
1. Linear Integral Equation- Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York

4. Advanced Engg. Mathematics- Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia
5. Numrical methods in Engg. & Science - B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers
7. Principles and Techniques of Bernard Friedman - John Wiley and sons Applied Mathematics
8. Principles of Applied Mathematics- James P.Keener, Addison Wesley.
9. Numerical methods - P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy, S.Chand & co
CLIENT SERVER COMPUTING (ELECTIVE - II)

RT 805-2 3+1+0
354
History - uses - Client Server Computing & Hetrogenous Computing - Cross Platform Computing
Distributed Computing - The costs of Client Server Computing - Advantages and Disadvantages -
Client Server Databases.
Module 2 Design
Fundamentals of client server design - Managing the interaction of client and server -
Communications Techniques protocols & Client server interaction protocols - Preparing applications
for client server - Optimizing applications for client server - Example client server implementations -
Request acceptance dispatching - Execution of requests - Client server interaction using message.
Module 3 Multitasking
Multi programming vs multitasking - Processor - Advantages and draw backs of multiple processor -
Child and parent processor - Case study Novell Netware and Windows NT - Developing server
applications - Threads - Server communication model.
Module 4 Synchronization
Scheduling implementations - processing queues - context switching pre emptive systems - critical
sections - mutual exclusion - semaphores - semaphore implementations in NT & Netware.
Module 5 Communications
Network communication - Inter process communication - Building portable client server
applications.
References
1. Novell's Guide to Client-Server Application & Architecture- Jeffrey D.Schqnk, Novell Press.
2. Client Server Computing - Dawna Travis Dewire, McGraw Hill.
3. Developing Client Server Applications - W.H.Inman, BPB.
4. Guide to Client Server Databases - Joe Salemi, BPB.
5. Client Server Strategies- David Vaskevitch, Galgotia.

R805-3 3+1+0
Module1 Introduction to Electronic Commerce

E-Commerce Framework, Anatomy of E-Commerce Applications, E-Commerce Consumer &
Organization Applications. E- Commerce and World Wide Web – Internet Service Providers,
Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce, WWW as the Architecture, Hypertext
publishing.
Module 2 Network Security

Client-Server Network Security, CS Security Threats, Firewalls, Data & Message Security,
Encrypted Documents, Security on the Web.
Module 3 Electronic Payment Systems
355
Types of Electronic Payment Systems, Digital Token Based Electronic Payment System, Smart
Cards, Credit Cards, Risk in Electronic Payment Systems, Designing Electronic Payment Systems.
Module 4 Electronic Data Interchange

EDI Application in Business, EDI-Legal, Security and Privacy Issues, EDI standardization, EDI
Envelope for Message Transport, Internet based EDI, Internal Information System, Work-flow
Automation and Coordination, Supply Chain Management, Document Library, Types of Digital
Documents, Corporate Data Warehouses
Module 5 Recent Trends in E-Commerce

Multimedia in E-Commerce, Video Conferencing with Digital Videos, Broad Band
Telecommunication, Frame & Cell Relays, Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS),
Asynchronous Transfer Mode, Mobile Computing and Wireless Computing.
Text Book
1. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce - Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston, Pearson Education
Asia
References
1. Global Electronic Commerce – J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark

2. E- Commerce The cutting edge of Business - Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag
3. E-Commerce - Strategy, Technologies and Applications, TMH
ANALYSIS AND MODELING OF DIGITAL SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - II)

RT805-4 3+1+0
Module1
Introduction to VHDL: Digital system design - Role of hardware description language- Modeling
digital systems – events, propagation delays and concurrency – waveforms and timing – signal
values – shared signals – simulation model – synthesis model – Field Programmable Gate Arrays.
Module 2
Basic language concepts simulation: signals – Entity architecture – concurrent statements –
Constructing VHDL models using CSAs – delays.
Synthesis: Interface from declarations, simple CSA statements, conditional signal assignment
statements, and selected signal assignment statements.
Module3
Modeling behavior Simulation: The process construct – programming constructs – the wait
statement – attributes – generating clocks and periodic waveforms – using signals – modeling state
machines – constructing VHDL models – programming errors.
Synthesis: language directed view – inference from within process – issues – signals vs. variables –
latch vs. flip flop – the wait statement – state machine.
Module 4
356
Modeling structure: Describing structure – structural VHDL model – hierarchy, abstraction and
accuracy – generics – component instantiation and synthesis – the generate statement subprograms:
functions – procedures – sub program and operator overloading – packages and libraries.
Module 5
Basic I/O operations – the package TEXTIO – ASSERT statement – terminology and directory
structure – simulation mechanics – synthesis mechanics – identifiers – data objects – data types –
operators.
Text Book
1. Introductory VHDL - Sudhakar Yalamanchili, Pearson Education Asia.
References
1. VHDL primer - J Bhaskar, Pearson Education Asia

2. Analysis and modeling of digital systems - Zainalabedin Navabi, McGraw Hill.
DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING (ELECTIVE - II)

RT805-5 3+1+0
Module I Introduction
Introduction to Distributed Systems, evolution, characteristics, design issues, user requirements,
Network technologies and protocols – overview, MACH, AMOBEA- overview.
Module 2 Distributed file system

File service components, design issues, interfaces, implementation techniques, Sun Network File
System – architecture and implementation, other distributed file systems – AFS, CODA. Name
services – SNS name service model.
Module 3 Communication in distributed systems

Client server communication, Group communication, Message passing – features, synchronizations,
RPC – model, implementation, stub generation, messages, marshalling, Server management.
Distributed shared memory – Architecture, design issues, structure of shared memory space,
replacement strategy, thrashing. Synchronization – clock synchronization, event ordering, mutual
exclusion
Module 4 Resource and Process management

Features of scheduling algorithms, Task assignment approach, load balancing, load sharing, Process
migration mechanisms, Threads – scheduling.
Module 5 Consistency maintenance

Transaction recovery – methods- intention lists, Fault tolerance – failures, Byzantine failures.
Deadlocks in distributed systems – detection and prevention, centralized and distributed approaches.
References
357
1. Distributed Systems – Concepts and designing - George Coulouris, Jean Dellimore, Tim
Kindberg - Pearson Education Asia
2. Distributed Operating Systems - Andrew S. Tenenbaum Pearson Education Asia
3. Distributed Operating Systems - Concepts and design - Pradeep. K, Sinha, PHI
USER INTERFACE DESIGN (ELECTIVE - II)

RT805-6 3+1+0
Importance of user interface – definition, importance of good design, brief history – Graphical User
Interface – Web User Interface – Principles of User interface design.
Module 2 Design Process

Human Interaction with computers, Importance of Human Characteristics, Human consideration,
Human Interaction speeds – Understanding Business function
Module 3 Screen Designing

Design goals - screen meaning and purpose, organizing screen elements- ordering of screen data and
content – screen navigation and flow – visually pleasing composition – amount of information –
focus and emphasis – presenting information simply and meaningfully – information retrieval on
web – Statistical graphics – Technological considerations in Interface Design.
Module 4 Windows and components

Menus and navigation schemes, selection of windows, Selection of device based and screen based
controls - text and messages – icons and images – Multimedia – colours- uses, problems, choosing
colours.
Module 5 Software tools

Specification methods, interface building tools
Interaction devices: keyboard and function keys - pointing devices- speech recognition, digitization
and generation – image and video displays – printers.
Text Book
1. The Essential Guide to User Interface Design 2nd Edn. – Wilbert O. Galitz, Wiley Dreamtech
2. Designing the User Interface 3rd Edn. – Ben Shneiderman, Pearson Education Asia
References
1. Human Computer Interaction – John M. Carroll, Pearson Education Asia

2. The Essentials of User Interface Design - Alan Cooper, Wiley Dreamtech
ELECTIVE - III
R806 3+1+0
List of electives
358
1. Multimedia Systems
2. Embedded Systems
3. Neural Networks
4. Genetic Algorithms and Applications
5. Advanced Networking Trends
6. Data Processing and Analysis Techniques
7. Biometrics
Note

R806-1 3+1+0
Module 1 1ntroduction
Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and software environments -
Media Types - Analog and digital video, digital audio, music and animation - Analog & Digital
video - Memory storage - Basic tools - Authoring tools.
Module 2 Building Blocks

Text - Hyper text - Sound - Sound cards - Standards - Image - Image types - Image compression,
RLE, JPEG, MPEG - Fractal and Wavelet Compressions - Image file types - Animation - Capture
and Playback techniques. (basic ideas only)
Module 3 Multimedia Environments

The Compact Disc family, CD-interactive, Digital Video Interactive, QuickTime, Multimedia PC
and Microsoft Multimedia Extensions.
Module 4 Multimedia Programming

Framework: Overview, Media classes, Transform classes, Format classes and Component classes -
Problems related to programming - Composition, Synchronisation, Interaction, Database integration.
Module 5 Advanced Multimedia

Moving pictures - Techniques realistic image synthesis, Virtual Reality - Full motion digital video -
Video capture techniques - multimedia networks - Desktop video conferencing - Future multimedia.
References
1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework - Simon J. Gibbs, Dionysios C.

2. Multimedia - Making it work - Tay Van Ghan – Osborne - Tata Mcgraw Hill
6. Multimedia Producers Bible - Ron Goldberg, Comdex
359
9. Integrated Multimedia Systems Overview - Palikom, The communication Wall

RT806-2 3+1+0
Module1 Overview of Embedded System

Embedded System, Categories of Embedded System, Requirements of Embedded Systems,
Challenges and Issues in Embedded Software Development, Applications of Embedded Systems in
Consumer Electronics, Control System, Biomedical Systems, Handheld computers, Communication
devices.
Module 2 Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment

Hardware Architecture, Micro-Controller Architecture, Communication Interface Standards,
Embedded System Development Process, Embedded Operating systems, Types of Embedded
Operating systems.
Module 3 Embedded Communication System

Serial Communication, PC-to-PC Communication, Serial Communication with the 8051 Family of
Micro-controllers, Protocol Converter, Voice-over-IP, Embedded Applications over Mobile Network
example MP3 Sound Player.
Module 4 Real Time & Database Applications

Real-Time Embedded Software Development, Sending a Message over a Serial Link, Simulation of
a Process Control System, Controlling an Appliance from the RTLinux System, Embedded Database
Applications using examples like Salary Survey, Energy Meter Readings.
Module 5 Java Applications & Future Trends in Embedded Systems

Networked Java-Enabled Information Appliances, Embedded Process Control System, Mobile Java
Applications, Appliance Control using Jini, System on a Chip (SOC), Smart Cards and the Cashless
Society, Security in Embedded Systems.
Text Book
1. Programming for Embedded Systems- Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech
Reference
NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE - III)

RT806-3 3+1+0
360
Module 1
Introduction - Principles - artificial neuron - activation functions - Single layer & multilayer
Module 2
Module 3
Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer - Training the cohenen layer - Pre initialising the
Module 4
Statistical methods - Boltzmann’s Training - Cauche training - Artificial specific heat methods -
Module 5
Hopfield nets - Recurrent networks - stability - Associative memory - applications - Thermo
dynamic systems - Statistical Hopfield networks - Bidirectional associative memories - Continous
BAM - Adaptive resonance theory - Architecture classification - Implimentation.
Text Book
1. Neural Computing Theory & Practice - Philip D. Wasserman.
References
1. Neural Networks - Simon Haykins

GENETIC ALGORITHMS AND APPLICATIONS (ELECTIVE - III)

RT806-4 3+1+0
Module 1 Architecture-Altering Operations

Introduction, Previous Methods of Determining the Architecture of a Multi-Part Program - On the
origin of new function- Architecture-Altering operations for Subroutines -Automatically Defined
Iterations, Loops, Recursion, Storage. Self-Organization of Hierarchies and Program Architecture -
Rotating the Tires on an Automobile – Boolean Parity Problem- Time-Optimal Robot Control
Problem -Multi-Agent Problem - Using Architecture Altering Operations for Subroutines.
Transmembrane Segment Identification Problem using Architecture-Altering Operations for
Iterations-Fibonacci Sequence- Cart Centering.
Module 2 Genetic Programming Problem Solver (GPPS)
361
Elements of GPPS 1.0-Problems Illustrating GPPS 1.0 - Elements of GPPS 2.0 - Problems
Illustrating GPPS 2.0 - Previous Work on Automated Analog Circuit Synthesis.
Module 3 Automated synthesis of analog electrical circuits

Synthesis of a Low-pass Filter and High-pass Filter The Role of Crossover in Genetic Programming.
Module 4 Evolvable Hardware

Evolvable Hardware and Rapidly Re-configurable Field-Programmable Gate Arrays
Discovery of cellular Automata Rules: Discovery of a Cellular Automata Rule for the Majority
Classification Problem.
Module 5 Programmatic Motifs for molecular Biology

Automatic Discovery of Protein Motifs –Programmatic Motifs and the Cellular Location Problem.
Parallelization and Implementation Issues: Computer Time- Parallelisation of Genetic
Programming –Implementation Issues.
Text Book
1. Johin R. Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre, Martin A. Kean, “ Genetic Programming III:
Darwinian Invention and Problem Solving”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1999
Reference
1. Genetic Algorithms for VLSI Design, Layout and test Automation - Pinaki Mazumder, Elizabeth M
Rudnick (Pearson Education Asia)
ADVANCED NETWORKING TRENDS (ELECTIVE - III)

RT806-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Ethernet Technology – Frame format – Interface Gap – CSMA/CD – 10 mbps Ethernet, Fast
Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Wireless Ethernet – SONET – Sonet multiplexing, Sonet frame structure
Module 2
ISDN - Definition - Protocol architecture - System architecture - Transmission channels - ISDN
interface, B-ISDN.
Module 3
ATM – ATM Principles – BISDN reference model – ATM layers – ATM adaption Layer – AAL1,
AAL2, AAL3/4, AAL5 – ATM addressing – UNI Signaling – PNNI Signalling
Module 4
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION: Satellite communication principles - Geo stationary satellites -
block schematic of satellite earth station - VSAT - VSAT networks - applications in personnel
communication. (basic ideas only)
Module 5
Wireless Lan – Infrared Vs Radio transmission – Infrastructure & ad hoc n/w – IEEE 802.11 – Hiper
Law – Bluetooth – Physical Layer – MAC layer – Networking – Security
362
References
Module 1
1. An introduction to Computer Networking - Kenneth C Mansfield, Jr., James L. Antonakos, PHI
Module 1,2,3
1. Communication Networks Fundamental Concepts & Key Architecture - Leon-Garcia – Widjaja, Tata
McGraw Hill
2. Mobile Communication - Jochen Schiller, Pearson Education Asia
DATA PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE - III)

RT806-6 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to COBOL programming -elements of COBOL divisions, sections and paragraphs
-Table writing - complete program in COBOL using various options verbs, statements- conditional
statements.
Module 2
Table Handling – Occur clause – PERFORM verb – SET verb, SEARCH verb – Occurs depending
clause – Sorting a Table.
Module 3
Processing of various file structures in COBOL Language – File description – Fixed Length Record
– Statements – Sequential File with variable length record – Sorting and merging of files – Direct
access files.
Module 4
Data warehousing – Definition – Multidimentional datamodel – OLAP operation – Data warehouse
architecture – Warehouse Server – Metadata – OLAP Engine.
Module 5
Data mining – Definitions, KDD Vs Data mining, DBMS Vs DM – DM Techniques, Issues and
Challenges in DM – DM application areas.
References
1. COBOL programming - M K Roy & D Ghosh Dastidar, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Data mining Techniques - Arun K Pujari (Universal Press)
3. Data mining Concepts and Techniques - Jawei Han & Micheline Kamber (Morgan Kunfmann Pub.)
4. Data Mining - Pieter Adriaans, Dolf Zantinge, Person Education Asia
5. Structured COBOL Programming - E. Rajasekar & S.Selvi (Anuradha Agencies)
6. Structured COBOL- A. S. Philippakis & Leonard, J. Kazmier (Tata McGraw Hill)
BIOMETRICS (ELECTIVE -III)
RT806-7 3+1+0
Module 1
363
Introduction – Benefits of biometric security – verification and identification – basic working of
biometric matching – accuracy – false match rate – false nonmatch rate – failure to enroll rate –
derived metrics – layered biometric solutions
Module 2
Finger scan – features – components – operation (steps) – competing finger scan technologies –
strength and weakness
Facial scan - features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies –
Module 3
Iris scan - features – components – operation (steps) – competing iris scan technologies – strength
and weakness
Voice scan - features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies –
Module 4
Other physiological biometrics-Handscan-retina scan- AFIS (automatic fingerprint Identification
systems)-Behavieral Biometrics-Signature scan-Key stroke Scan.
Module 5
Biometrics Application – Biometric Solution Matrix-Bioprivacy-Comparison of privacy factor in
different biometrics technologies-Designing privacy sympathetie biometric systems-Biometric
standards- (BioAPI, BAPI)-Biometric middleware.
Reference
1. Biometrics -Identify Verification in a Networked World - Samir Nanavati, Michael Thieme, Raj
Nanavati- WILEY-dreamtech
GRAPHICS AND MULTIMEDIA LAB

R807 0+0+4
Point plotting, line and circle drawing, Line and Polygon clipping, transformations, hidden line elimination,
curves, polygon hatching, Multimedia programming, Visual programming, Animation
Any experiment according to the syllabus of R702 Computer Graphics may be substituted
PROJECT & SEMINAR

R709/ R808 0+0+4
paper should in general reflect the state of the art. He/ She submits a report of the paper to the
department.
364
In addition to the seminar He/She shall undertake a project work in the 7 th semester itself in
consultation with the guide(s). On completion of the project work, He/She shall present the work
done before a panel of staff members, and submit a report of the project work done to the
department.
VIVA -VOCE
R809
A comprehensive Viva-voce examination will be conducted to assess the students overall knowledge
in the specified field of engineering. At the time of Viva-voce, certified report of seminar, mini
project and project work are to be presented for evaluation.
365
SYLLABUS
POLYMER ENGINEERING
BRANCH
366
THIRD SEMESTER
367
MATHEMATICS – II
ENGINEERING
CMELPA 301 3+1




differences – problems using Stirling’s formula, Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s divided
difference formula for unequal intervals.

References

2. Grawal B.S., Higher Engg. Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.
3. M.K.Venkataraman, Numerical Methods in science & Engg., National Publishing Co.
4. S.Balachandra Rao and G.K.Shantha, Numerical Methods, University press.
5. Michael D.Greenberg, Advanced Engg. Mathematics, Prentice-Hall.
6. M.R.Spiegel, Theory and Problems of Vector analysis, McGraw – Hill.
368
HUMANITIES
P302 3+1
Part A: HISTORY OF SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY
Module 1
Early Developments and Middle Period:Contributions of Indian, Chinese, Greek and Roman
Civilizations to science and technology. The dark ages of science in Europe. Technology transfer
from east to west, the role of Arabs.
Module 2
Renaissance and the Early Modern Period:Flowering of Europian Technology, the fall of the
Aristotelian universe and the beginning of modern science. Industrial revolution and its impact on
Science, the historical development of prime movers, progress in steel making, the birth and growth
of different branches of Engineering. The characteristic trends in 20th century science, comparison
with the 19-th century approach. Theories of life and universe, science and religion.
Module 3
Modern Trends in Technology:Developments in communication, transport and power engineering.
Science in agriculture, the computer and space exploration. Integration of Science, technology and
society, Science as agent of social change, Resource depletion and pollution. The urban problem
and the social cost of progress, Limits to growth. Science and Technology in developing countries,
Problems of technology transfer, Role of small scale and village industries, Gandhian approach to
technology, Concept of appropriate technology.
Part B: ECONOMICS
Module 4
The basic economic problem, definitions, nature of economics and its laws. Economic Systems,
Capitalism, Socialism and Mixed Economy. Theory of demand and supply, marginal utility theory,
law of demand, elasticity, factors of production, cost of production, supply curves.
Module 5
Theory of value, value and price, determination of market price and output under perfect competition
and monopoly. Distribution, marginal productivity, theory of distribution, rent, wages, interest and
profit. Money and banking, Classification of money, inflation, types of banks, their functions, credit
creation. Public economics, Revenue, Taxation, Expenditure. National income, macro economic
approach, GNP, MNP, NI, DI, PI, methods of calculation of national income.
References
1. History of Science and Technology : R.V.G.Menon

2. A History of Technology : C.Singar
3. Science in Technology : J.D.Bernal
4. Science and Human Values : J.Brownoskyi
5. Elements of Economics : Paul A.V.
6. A Text Book of Modern Economics : Abuja K.I.H.L.
7. Principles of Economics : Sundaram and Waish
P 303 3+1
Module 1
369
Computer fundamentals, classification, mainframe, mini and microcomputers, block schematic of
personal computers. Concept of software and hardware. Introduction to PC operating systems, DOS
and WINDOWS, Programming languages, classification, machine language, assembly language and
high level language. Program development. Flow charts and algorithms. Compilers, assemblers.
Module 2
C Programming, Introduction to C programming language, compilation of C programs. Structure of
a C program, syntax of C language, input, output statements. Fundamental data types, variables,
identifiers, keywords, operator precedence and associativity, arithmetic expressions. Simple
exercise, Loop statements-for, while, do-while. Decision statements-if, nested if, switch statements,
break and continue statements.
Module 3
Arrays & Structures, single and multidimensional arrays, character arrays and its initializations.
String and its initializations, Functions-concept, function declaration and calling. Arguments and
local variables, parameter passing methods in C function, concept of recursive functions. Declaration
and initialisation of structure variables. Array of structures and nested structures. Example programs
using structures, unions.
Module 4
Pointers, concept of pointers in C, declaration of pointer variables, use of pointers in arrays,
functions and structures. Example programs using pointers, files-sequential and random files, file
type specification, creating a data file, file operators.
References
1. Programming in C : E Balaguruswamy
2. Let us C : Y.P.Kannetkar
3. Pointers in C : Y.P.Kannetkar
4. Programming with C : Bryan.S.Gottfried,Tata McGrawHill
POLYMER SCIENCE - I
P304 3+1
Module 1
Importance in everyday life, classification, examples for natural, synthetic, homo polymer,
copolymer, inorganic and biopolymers, structure of linear, branched, ladder, crosslinked and
network polymers, homochain and hetero-atomic chain polymers, nomenclature, functionality of
monomers, Bi-functional systems, poly functional systems, polymerisability
Module 2
Number average, weight average, viscosity average, z- average molecular weights, molecular weight
distribution, polydispersity index, simple numerical problems to illustrate average molecular weight,
basic principles of the following methods: end group analysis, colligative property measurements,
osmometry, vapour phase osmometry, light scattering, ultracentrifugation, viscometry and gel
permeation chromatography, Staudinger Index
Module 3
Addition polymerization, mechanism and kinetics of free radical, cationic & anionic polymerization,
free radical initiators, chain length and degree of polymerisation, control of molecular weight,
370
inhibition, autoacceleration, chain transfer, coordination polymerisation, mechanism, kinetics,
Ziegler- Natta catalysts, ring opening polymerization, diene polymerization.
Module 4
Basics of condensation polymerisation, Carother’s equation, gelation, Copolymerization, different
types of copolymers, monomer reactivity ratio, copolymer equation. Polymerisation techniques, bulk,
solution, suspension, emulsion and interfacial polymerisation
References
1. F.W. Billmeyer, Textbook of Polymer Science, Wiley international publishers, 1984.

2. Joel R. Fried, Polymer science and Technology, Prentice Hall, NJ, 1995
3. J.M.G. Cowie, Polymers: Chemistry and Physics of Modern Materials, Blackie, London, 1991.
4. R.J. Young and P.Lovell, Introduction to Polymers, 2nd Ed., Chapman & Hall, 1991.
5. Premamoy Ghosh, Polymer Science and Technology of Plastics and Rubbers, Tata McGraw - Hill,
New Delhi, 1990.
6. H.R. Allcock and F.W. Lampe, “ Contemporary Polymer Chemistry”, Prentice Hall 1981.
7. F.W.Billmeyer, “ Text Book of Polymer Science”, Wiley Interscience, 1971.
8. F.Rodrigues, “ Principles of Polymer systems”, Mc Graw Hill, 1970
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY
P 305 3+1
Module 1
Chemical bonding and molecular structure, electronic effects in organic molecules, inductive,
mesomeric and hyperconjugation effects, acids and bases, reactive intermediates in organic
chemistry- carbocations, carbanions, free radicals, carbenes and nitrenes.
Module 2
Organic reaction mechanisms, introduction. Substitution and Elimination reactions: detailed study of
SN1, SN2, SNi, SN1’, SN2’ and borderline mechanisms. Nucleophilicity and basicity, leaving group
effects, solvent effects, neighboring group participation. Detailed study of elimination reactions (E 1,
E2, and E1cb mechanisms), substitution vs. elimination. Rearrangement Reactions: common
rearrangements in organic chemistry, rearrangement of carbocations, non-classical carbocations.
Catalysis by acid & bases, Lewis acid catalysis, Phase transfer catalysis and applications of crown
ethers. Methods of determination of organic reaction mechanisms.
Module 3
Isomerism of organic compounds: isomerism, definition and classification, molecular representation,
stereo isomerism, conformation, configuration, chirality and optical activity, stereocentre,
racemisation and methods of resolution, chiral synthesis, optical purity and enantiomeric excess,
configurational nomenclature, D, L, R and S, determination of configuration, geometrical isomerism,
E/Z notation, interconversion of geometrical isomers, conformational analysis of acyclic and cyclic
molecules, rotation about bonds, concepts of dihedral angle, torsional strain, optical rotatory
dispersion and circular dichroism.
Module 4
371
Organic Spectroscopy: principles and applications of UV, IR, NMR, ESR spectroscopic techniques
for the structure elucidation of organic compounds, problem solving approach. Recent advances in
NMR techniques, 13C–NMR, 2 dimensional NMR spectroscopy.
References
1. Morrison & Boyd, Organic Chemistry, Prentice Hall. New Delhi, 6th edition,1992
2. B.S.Bahl and Arun Bhal, Advanced Organic Chemistry, S. Chand & Co. Ltd., New Delhi, 15th
edition, 1998
3. I.L.Finar, Textbook of Organic Chemistry, ELBS, 5th edition, 1996,
4. Jerry March, Advanced Organic Chemistry, John Wiley & Sons, New york, 1992
STRENGTH OF MATERIALS AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING

MP306 3+1
Module 1
Stress and strain - Bars of varying cross - sections – composite sections - temperature stresses.
Principal stresses and planes-Mohr's circle representation of plane stress.
Module 2
Shear force and bending moments -Cantilever-simply supported and overhanging beams-
concentrated and U. D. loadings analytical method. Relation between load. SF and BM. Theory of
simple bending- bending and shear stress distribution rectangular, circular and 1-sections.
Module 3
Slope and deflection of simply supported beams and cantilevers- Double integration- Macaulay's
Method-moment area method- conjugate beam method.
Module 4
Torsion of circular shafts-solid and hollow shafts- power transmitted by shafts. Close-coiled and
open coiled spring- leaf spring. Thin cyliders and jhick cylinders subjected to internal and external
pressures- compound pipes -wire wound pipes-strain energy-axial loads, gradually and suddenly
applied load-impact loads.
Module 5
Columns and sturts- short and long columns-Euler's theory-Ran kine's theory - Eccentrically Loaded
columns-column with initial curvature. General description only of simple and compound steel,
beams, columns and column foundation-principle of reinforced concrete. Reinforcements detailing
in R. C. Slabs, beams, columns & footings (No problem expected)
References
1. Timoshenko.S.P, Strength of Materials, Part 1,D.Van Nostrand company, Inc.Newyork.

2. Popov E.P., Engineering Mechanics of solids, Prentice Hall of India, New Deihi.
3. Punmia B.C, Strength of Materials and Mechanics of structures, Vol 1,Lakshmi Publications,
New Delhi.
4. Vazirani V.N., Ratwani N. M, Analysis of Structures, Vol 1, Khanna Publishers, New Delhi.
372
CHEMISTRY LAB
P 307 0+3
A. Organic synthesis
1. Synthesis of ethyl n- butyl acetoacetate by the acetoacetatic ester condensation

2. Synthesis of 3-nitrobenzoic acid from benzoic acid
3. Nitration of aromatic hydrocarbons.
4. Side chain oxidation of aromatic hydrocarbons.
5. Benzoylation of phenols.
6. Preparation of solid esters.
7. Bromination of amines.
B. Purification and characterization of organic compounds
1. Purification (fractional crystallization, fractional distillation, chromatography) and separation

of the components of a binary organic mixture (liquid-liquid, liquid-solid and solid-solid) using
chemical analysis and IIR and NMR spectral data.
2. Identify the components of the given binary mixture.
3. Checking the purity of the separated components on TLC plates.
373
COMPUTER LAB
P 308 0+3
1. Familiarisation of DOS commands and WINDOWS.

2. Simple C programs with control statements and loops.
3. Programs handling one-dimensional array.
4. Programs handling multidimensional array
5. Programs using a simple function.
6. Functions having arguments.
7. Recursive functions.
8. Programs handling structures.
9. Programs using pointers.
10. Programs involving files.
11. A simple graphic program.
374
FOURTH SEMESTER
375
MATHEMATICS – III
ENGINEERING
CMELRPTA 401 3+1
Module 1
P.I. by the method of variation of parameters – Cauchys equations - Linear Simultaneous eqns-
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations: Formation by eliminating arbitary constants and arbitary Functions
- solution of Lagrange Linear Equations – Charpits Method – solution of homogeneous linear partial
equation.
Module 3
Fourier Transforms: Statement of Fourier Integral Theorems – Fourier Transforms – Fourier Sine
Module 4
variance - Poisson distribution as a limiting case of binomial distribution - its mean and variance -
fitting of binomial & Poisson distributions - normal distribution - properties of normal curve -
standard normal curve - simple problems in binomial, Poisson and normal distributions.
Module 5
difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected).
References
1. B.S. Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Khanna Publishers.

2. M.K. Venkataraman, Engineering Mathematics Vol. II -3rd year Part A & B, National Publishing
Company.
3. Ian N.Sneddon, Elements of Partial Differential Equations,Mc Graw Hill International Edn.
4. Richard A Johnson, Miller and Fread’s Probability and statistics for engineers, Pearson Education
Asia / PHI.
5. Bali and Iyengar, A text book of Engineering Mathematics (Volume II), Laxmi Publications Ltd.
7. Hogg and Tanis, Probability and statistical inferences, Pearson Education Asia.
376
P 402 3+1
Module 1
Introduction, concepts of classes and objects, encapsulation and inheritance, building classes,
declaring objects, member functions, constructors and destructors, member access control-private,
public, protected. Inheritance and access control, extending classes, multiple inheritance
Module 2
Polymorphism, virtual methods, definition, usage of virtual methods, abstract classes, simulation
using abstract classes, overloading methods, operator overloading, selecting friend or member
functions for operator overloading
Module 3
Dynamic objects, dynamic object allocation, using references with dynamic memory allocations, in-
line functions outside class definitions. Case study-C++.
Module 4
Concepts of Windows programming, GUI, visual programming concepts, active X concepts,
fundamentals of MFC, concepts of DLL, DAO and ODBC.
References
1. Data abstraction and OOP in C++ - Gordenkeeth Wiley Eastern

2. Object Oriented Programming with C++ - E. Balaguruswamy, Tata Mc.
Graw Hill
3. C++ - Strostroup
4. Object Oriented Programming with C++ - Nabajyothy Bjarne
5. Programming Windows 95 - Charles Petzold, Microsoft
Press
6. Visual C++ Programming - Yashwanth Kaneethkar, BPB
7. Visual Basic from the group UP - Cary Cornessl, Tata Mc.
Graw Hill
LP 403 3+1
Module 1
Basic Principles of Electric Machines- concept of motoring and generating action, DC generator,
characteristics, working, load test, DC motor, characteristics,, load test, speed control, field control,
armature control, basic principles, applications.
Module 2
Transformers: Transformer action, EMF equation, step up and step down transformer, load test,
calculation of efficiency, design of typical step down transformers like 280/6-0-6V, 230/9-0-9 V,
280/12-0-12 V for inverters and rectifiers. Auto and three phase transformers, basic principles of
current transformers (no analysis) basic principles of servo stabilizer.
377
Module 3
A C Machines; Basic principles of operation of synchronous and induction motor characteristics (no
analysis), starting of induction motors, starters, single phase induction motor, constructional features,
types, working and characteristics only (no analysis).
Module 4
Special Machines AC&DC servo motors, synchros constructional features, working of tacho
generators, stepper motor, construction working, applications& specifications of stepper motors,
universal motors, constructional features, typical applications, criteria for selection of motors,
electromagnetic relays, AC&DC contactors.
Module 5
Batteries: Dry cells, secondary cells, lead acid cells, charging and discharging characteristics,
Ampere hour rating of batteries, construction of button cells, lithium batteries, specifications
chargeable batteries, battery charging circuits, Maintenance of batteries, characteristics of nickel
cadmium, nickel metal hydride, and lithium ion batteries, used for pagers and cellular phones,
concept of UPS, block schematic of UPS, fields of applications.
References
1. Electrical Technology - B.L.Thereja

2. Electrical Machines - R.K. Rajput
3. Electrical Design Estimating And Costing - K.B. Raina & Bhattacharya
4. Electrical machines and Power systems - Vincent Del Toro
5. Electric Engineers Hand Book - Donald G. Fink
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING - I
P 404 3+1
Module 1
Fluids-nature of fluids, ideal fluid, real fluid, physical properties of fluids, density, specific weight,
compressibility, surface tension, viscosity, capillarity, pressure, Pascal’s law, measurement of fluid
pressure, piezometer, bourden pressure gauge, simple manometer, differential manometer.
Module 2
Fluid flow phenomena-classification of flow, steady and unsteady state flow, uniform and non
uniform flow, laminar and turbulent flow, isothermal and adiabatic flow, rotational and irrotational
flow, critical velocity, Reynolds number, Bernoulli’s theorem, measurement of fluid flow, pitot tube,
orificemeter, venturimeter, rotameter.
Module 3
Centrifugal pumps-types of casings, piping system, work done, efficiency, discharge, velocity
diagrams, characteristic curves, NPSH, cavitation, priming. Reciprocating pumps, discharge, slip,
power required, indicator diagram.
Module 4
Thermodynamics- fundamental concepts and definitions, types of thermodynamic systems and
properties, closed, open and isolated systems, intensive and extensive properties, path functions and
state functions, zeroth law of thermodynamics, first law applied to non flow process, formulation of
first law, enthalpy, heat capacity, specific heat, second law of thermodynamics, Kelvin-Plank
378
statement, Clausius statement, third law of thermodynamics, entropy changes and irreversibility,
Gibb’s free energy, work function, Maxwell’s equations, Clapyeron equation, Gibbs-Duhem
equation, fugacity and activity of pure fluids.
References
1. Engineering Thermodynamics, Nag

2. Introduction to chemical engineering thermodynamics, J.M Smith, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing
company, New Delhi
3. Fluid Mechanics, Jagadish Lal
4. Hydraulics and Fluid mechanics, P.N Modi
5. Fluid Mechanics, S.K Modi
POLYMER PHYSICS
P405 3+1
Module 1
Stress, engineering stress, true stress, strain, engineering strain, true strain, Poisson’s ratio, elastic
solid, Hooke’s Law, viscous fluid, Newton’s law, viscoelastic materials, difference in the response
of elastic solid, viscous fluid and viscoelastic materials under static and dynamic conditions,
modulus, Young’s modulus, compression modulus, bulk modulus, compliance, factors affecting
viscoelasticity, short- term and long- term properties, stress- strain curves, hysteresis, tangent
modulus, secant modulus, proportionality limit
Module 2
Mechanical models, spring, dashpot, Maxwell, Voigt, Maxwell-Weichert, Burger, generalised
equations for these models, equations for creep and stress relaxation, Deborah number, time-
temperature equivalence principle, Boltzmann superposition principle, simple numerical problems
based on these principles, dynamic mechanical properties, storage modulus, loss modulus, tan δ ,
damping.
Module 3
Rubber elasticity, molecular requirements of rubber-like elasticity, energy driven and entropy driven
elasticity, thermoelastic experiment, Gough-Joule effect, thermodynamic treatment of rubbers,
statistical mechanical theory.
Module 4
Newtonian fluids and non-Newtonian fluids, Power law, shear rate dependent fluids,
psuedoplasticity, dilatancy, time dependent fluids, thixotropy, rheopexy, rheological measurements,
plasticity, plasticity retention index, curing characteristics, scorch time, induction time, cure time,
oscillating disc rheometers. capillary rheometer, entrance and exit effects, Rabinowitsch correction,
cone and plate viscometer, Mooney viscometer, melt flow index, elastic effects in polymer melt
flow, die swell, elastic turbulence, melt fracture, shark skin, draw down.
References
1. David J. Williams, Polymer Science and Engineering, Maclaren and Sons, Newyork1978
2. H.F. Haufman and J.J. Falcetta, Introduction to Polymer science and Technology, S P E Text Book,
John Wiley & Sons NewYork 1997
379
3. J. D. Ferry, Viscoelastic Properties of Polymers, John Wiley & Sons NewYork 1971
4. A.V. Tobolsky, Properties & structure of polymers, John Wiley & Sons NewYork 1960.
5. R.J.Samuels, Structured Polymer Properties, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 1974.
6. J. A. Brydson, Flow Properties of Polymer Melts
POLYMER SCIENCE - II
P 406 3+1
Module 1
Amorphous state, molecular motion, first order and second order transitions, Tg, Tm, factors affecting
Tg, secondary transitions, free volume, kinetic, and thermodynamic views of glass transition, factors
influencing glass transition temperature, crystalline state, crystal systems, unit cells, primitive cell,
Bravais lattices, polymorphism, polymer single crystals, lamellae, spherulites, supermolecular
structures, fringed micelle model, degree of crystallinity, factors affecting crystallinity, X-ray
diffraction, copolymers, linear and cyclic arrangement.
Module 2
Polymer solutions, terms and definitions, types of solutions, Hildebrand approach, Flory Huggins
theory, thermodynamic view of miscibility, upper critical solution temperature (UCST), lower
critical solution temperature (LCST), concentration regimes in polymer solutions, theta conditions.
Module 3
Chemical reactivity of linear and crosslinked polymers, hydrolysis, acidolysis, aminolysis,
hydrogenation, addition and substitution reactions, cross linking reactions, reactivity of functional
groups, polymer analogous reactions, polymer bound reagents, chain end and random degradation,
degradation by oxygen, ozone, heat, UV light, micro-organism, crazing, weathering, stabilisation to
prevent degradation.
Module 4
Effect of polymer structure on dielectric constant, capacitance, dielectric loss, power factor,
dissipation factor and loss factor, prediction of molar polarization and effective dipole moment, effect
of additives on electrical properties of polymers, effect of polymer structure on optical properties,
clarity, transparency, haze, transmittance, reflectance, gloss, prediction of refractive indices of
polymers by group contributions.
References
1. Paul C. Painter and Michael M. Coleman, Fundamentals of Polymer Science, Technomic Publishing
Co. Inc., Lancaster, USA, 1994.
2. Ulf W. Gedde, Polymer Physics, Chapman & Hall, 1995.
3. D.W. Van Krevelen And P.J. Hoftyzen, “Properties Of Polymer, 3rd Edition Elsevier Scientific
Publishing Company Amsterdam – Oxford – Newyork. 1990.
4. J.E. Mark Ed.AIP, Physical Properties Of Polymers Hand Book, Williston, Vt, 1996.
5. D.A.Seanor, ed., Electrical properties of polymers, Acadamic press, Newyork, 1982.
6. Jozef.Bicerano, Prediction Of Polymer Properties, Second Edition, Marcel Dekker Inc. Newyork,
1995.
7. I.M.Ward & D.W.Hadley, An Introduction to the Mechanical Properties of Solid Polymers, John
Wiley & Sons, Chichester, England, 1993.
380
POLYMER PREPARATION AND CHARACTERISATION LAB
P407 0+3
1. Synthesis of the following Polymers: Polymethyl methacrylate, Polyacrylamide, Regenerated

Cellulose, Phenol-Formaldehyde Resin (Novolak and Resol), Polystyrene, Polyurethanes and glyptal
Resins, Urea-Formaldehyde and Melamine-Formaldehyde.
2. Quantitative estimation of the following monomers: Aniline, Phenol, Acetone, Ethyl Acetate,
Formaldehyde, Acrylonitrile, Urea, Glycol, Methyl methacrylate
3. Determination of molecular weight by viscosity method.
ELECTRICAL MACHINES LAB

P 408 0+3
A total of 8 experiments (4 from Group A and 4 from Group B) out of 16 suggested below may be done in
the laboratory.
GROUP A
1. O.C.C and Load test on DC generator.
2. Load test on DC shunt motor.
3. Load test on Single phase induction motor.
4. Load test on 3-phase cage induction motor.
5. Load test on 3-phase slip ring induction motor.
6. Load test on single phase transformer.
7. Load test on 3-phase alternator – regulation at different power factor –
8. Demonstration of terminal voltage control.
GROUP B
1. Characteristics of diode and Zener diode.

2. Half-wave and full-wave rectifier – study of wave forms and regulations.
3. Transistor biasing – assemble CE amplifier – study input and output
4. Waveforms.
5. Assemble RC phase shift oscillator – study waveforms.
6. Study of SCR – assemble single phase controlled rectifier – study phase control.
7. Operational amplifier circuit – adder, integrator.
8. Study of logic gates – AND, OR, INVERTER, NAND, NOR, Half adder and full adder using
NAND gates.
381
FIFTH SEMESTER
382
MATHEMATICS – IV
ENGINEERING
CMELPA 501 3+1
Module 1
Module 2
Module 3
Module 4
Module 5
only) – Big-M method, two phase method - Duality in L.P.P.- Balanced T.P. – Vogels
approximation method – Modi method.
References
1. Ervin Kreyszig, Advanced Engineering Mathematics, Wiley Eastern limited.

2. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Numerical methods in Engineering & Science, Kanna Publishers.
3. Dr. B.S.Grewal, Higher Engineering Mathematics, Kanna Publishers.
4. Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, Numerical methods in Science & Engineering, National Publishing
Company.
5. P.C.Tulsian & Vishal Pandey, Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems, Pearson
Education Asia.
6. Churchill and Brown, Complex variables and applications, McGraw-Hill.
7. Panneer Selvam, Operations research, PHI.
8. S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac & A Somasundaram, Engineering Mathematics Vol. III, Scitech
publications
9. T.K.M.Pillai, G.Ramanaigh & S.Narayanan, Advanced Mathematics for Engg. Students Vol.
III- S.Vishwananthan printers & publishers.
383
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING - II
P502 3+1
Module 1
Modes of heat transfer-conduction and Fourier law, thermal conductivity, steady state conduction
through single resistance and compound resistances in series, heat flow through a cylinder, unsteady
state heat conduction, equation for one dimensional conduction.
Module 2
Convection-natural and forced convection, individual and overall heat transfer coefficients, factors
influencing heat transfer coefficients, evaluation of heat transfer coefficients, calculation of overall
coefficients from individual coefficients, resistance form of overall coefficients, co-current and
counter current flows, logarithmic mean temperature difference, evaluation of heat transfer
coefficients, fouling factors, analogy between heat and momentum transfer, significance of Prandtl
number, Reynolds’s and Colburn analogies. Regimes of heat transfer in fluids, Graetz number,
Peclet number, Nusselt number, Sieder Tate equation, Coulburn equation.
Module 3
Heat exchange equipments-double pipe heat exchangers, shell and tube heat exchangers, parallel and
counter flow heat exchanger, single pass 1-1 exchanger, 1-2 exchanger, 2-4 exchanger, enthalpy
balances in heat exchangers, temperature pattern in multipass exchangers, heat transfer coefficients
in shell and tube heat exchangers, correction of LMTD for crossflow, plate type exchangers,
condensers, shell and tube condensers, kettle type boilers, extended surface equipment.
Module 4
Evaporation-Types of evaporators, single effect evaporators, performance of evaporators, capacity,
economy, boiling point elevation, Diirhring’s rule, enthalpy balances for single effect evaporators,
calculation of heat transfer area, multiple effect evaporators, methods of feeding.
References
1. Introduction to chemical engineering, Tata McGraw-Hill publishing company, New Delhi, Badger
2. Unit operations in chemical engineering, Tata McGraw - Hill publishing company, New Delhi, Mc
Cabe & Smith
3. Heat transmission, Mc Dams, Tata McGraw- Hill publishing company, New Delhi,
384
PLASTICS - SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY
P 503 3+1
Module 1
Advantages and disadvantages of plastics, monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and
application of LDPE, HDPE, cross linked and chlorinated PE, PP and PS
Module 2
Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PVC, polyvinilidine chloride,
PVA, polyvinylacetate, PMMA and PAN
Module 3
Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of PU, PTFE, PVF, ABS, PC,
polyacetal, polyester, SAN, epoxies, PF, novolac, resol, MF and UF
Module 4
Monomer preparation, polymerisation, properties and application of nylon-5, 6, 66, 612 and
polyacrylamide
References
1. K.J. Saunders, “Organic Polymer Chemistry, Chapman and Hall “, London.1973.

2. J.A. Brydson, “ Plastic materials”, Newnes Butterworths.
3. Encyclopaedia of Polymer Science and Technology.
RUBBERS - SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY

P 504 3+1
Module 1
Natural rubber, source, chemical formula, molecular weight distribution, crystallisation, structure
property relationship, chemical reactivity, electrical and oxidation properties, anti degradants,
strength of rubbers. Various forms of natural rubber, crumb, sheet, crepe, SP rubber, DPNR, LNR,
liquid rubber, classes of liquid elastomers, telechilic polymers, powdered rubber.
Module 2
Vulcanisation, chemical and physical aspects, curing characteristics such as scorch time, induction
time, cure time, mechanism of crosslinking by different crosslinking agents, sulphur, sulphur
monochloride, nitrosourethane, diazo esters, phenolic resins, metal oxide, diamines, peroxides,
oximes, batch and continuous vulcanisation. Different curing systems, EV, semi EV, conventional
and sulphur less cure, assessment of state of cure, vulcanisation techniques, press cure, autoclave, hot
air, cold and hot water, fluidised bed, molten salt bath, drum curing, radiation, microwave curing.
Module 3
IR, BR, IIR, SBR, NBR-synthesis of monomers, polymerisation, structure, chemical properties,
crosslinking by different methods, oxidation and ageing, different types of CR, halogenation of IIR,
characterisation, crosslinking, compare the oxidation properties of saturated and unsaturated rubbers,
antioxidants, antiozonant.
Module 4
385
Monomers, preparation, synthesis of polymers, structure, properties and application of the following
rubbers. Ethylene based rubbers, chlorosulphonated polymers, fluorine containing rubbers,
nitrosofluoro elastomers, phosphonitrillic elastomers, poly(thiocarbonyl fluoride) and related
elastomers. Acrylic rubbers, oil resistant rubbers, polyvinylether elastomers, polysulphide rubber,
silicone rubbers, polyalkenamers, polynorbornene, polyurethane, thermoplastic rubbers,
polycarbonate rubbers.
References
1. J.A. Brydson, Rubber Chemistry, allied Science publishers, London, 1978.

2. M.Morton, Rubber Technology, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1987.
3. J.A. Brydson, Rubber Materials and Their Compounds Elsevier, 1988.
4. A.Whelan and K.S. Lee, Developments in Rubber Technology (Vol. I-IV) Applied Science
Publishers.
LATEX TECHNOLOGY
P 505 3+1
Module 1
Natural latex, preservation, synthetic lattices and their blends, principles of latex compounding,
deammoniation of latex, vulcanising agents, accelerators, antioxidants, fillers, dispersing and
emulsifying agents, stabilisers, thickening agents, and other miscellaneous additives, special
ingredients, preparation of dispersions and emulsions, latex compounding.
Module 2
Fundamental latex characteristics, particle size and distribution, stability and destabilisation,
coacervation, viscosity-concentration relationship, surface free energy and wetting behaviour, zeta
potential, electrical properties of colloidal system, thermal movement of molecules, Brownian
motion. Latex concentration methods, concentrated latex, significance of specification limits, test
methods, total solids, dry rubber content, total alkalinity, coagulum content, sludge content, pH,
KOH number, mechanical stability time, VFA number, surface tension, redox potential changes,
degradation leading to acid formation, zinc oxide stability, stability tests, volatile fatty acids.
Module 3
Manufacture of rubber goods from lattices and from solid elastomers, a comparison, impregnation,
spreading, fabric proofing and coating. Rubber textile composite products, latex bonded fibrous
structures, coir foam, latex treated rugs and carpet backing, latex application to paper. Dipping
Methods, straight dipping, dipping with porous formers, coagulant dipping, heated formers, drying,
surface treatments, extraction of surface soluble materials, vulcanisation, compounding of latex,
manufacture of dipped goods like rubber band, surgeons gloves, household gloves, dipped fabric
gloves, balloon, nipples, prophylactics.
Module 4
Latex foam processing methods, ammonia content of latex, compounding, mechanical frothing by
beating, vulcanisation, washing, and drying, gelling, gelling systems, merits and demerits of gelling
systems. Continuous foam production, typical latex compounds for foam production. Latex casting,
principles, production of hollow articles, solid articles, use of porous moulds in casting, manufacture
of rubber thread, latex cement and adhesives, latex paints, protective coatings, chewing gum, use of
latex in roads rubberisation.
References
386
1. D. C. Blackley, High Polymer Latices, Vol I&II, Maclaren & Sons, London
2. Madge, Latex Foam Rubber, Maclaren & Sons Ltd; 1982
3. Mausser, Vanderblit Latex Handbook, 3rd edition, Pub.R.T.Vanderbilt Co. Inc., U.S.A. 1987
4. Dipped goods, J. of Rubber Developments, V 25, pp.12-14-1972
POLYMER PROCESSING - I
P 506 3+1
Module 1
Compounding ingredients, plasticisers, extenders, factice, stabilizers, fillers, antioxidants,
antiozonants, UV absorbers, flame retardants, mould release agents, colorants, and other special
additives, vulcanizing agents, activators, accelerators, peptiser, retarders, tackifying agents, blowing
agents, bonding agents, fragrances, antistatic agents.
Module 2
Compound development, factors to be considered for compound development, formulation of a mix,
compounding for specific applications, ozone resistance, heat resistance, weather, resistance, oil
resistance, radiation resistance, ermeability, medical, liquid resistance, low temperature resistance,
electrical applications and opticalapplications.
Module 3
Compounding, different methods, principles of mixing, dispersive and distributive mixing,
mastication, two-roll mill mixing, internal mixers, comparison between open mill and internal mixer,
Banbury mixing, Brabender plasticorder, continuous mixing, master batching.
Module 4
Plastics processing techniques, compression moulding, types-flash, positive and semipositive,
compression moulding cycle, troubleshooting, equipment for moulding of thermoplastics, moulding
of thermosets and rubber, automatic compression moulding. Transfer moulding, transfer moulding
cycle, advantages, limitations, theoretical and design consideration, general mould design
consideration, troubleshooting.
References
1. D.V. Rosato Kluwer, Injection moulding hand book. - Academic Publishers Boston 2nd edtion 1995.
2. Richard C. Progelhof James. L. Throne, Polymer Engg. Principles, Hanser Publisher Munich 1993
3. N.P. Charemisinoff & P.N. Chere, Hand book of applied Polymer Processing Tech, Marcel Dekker,
inc, NY 1996.
4. Herbert Recs, Understanding of Injection moulding Tech., Hanser Pub., Munich 1994.
SPECIFICATION TESTS LAB

P 507 0+3
1. Specification tests for field latex

Viscosity, density, pH
2. Specification tests for preserved latex
387
Ammonia content, Magnesium content, Copper and manganese content, Dry rubber content, Total
solid content, KOH number, Volatile fatty acid number, Sludge content, Coagulum content,
Mechanical stability time, Heat stability time, ZnO stability.
3. Specification tests for dry rubber
Volatile matter, Ash content, Dirt content, nitrogen content, Estimation of Cu,
Estimation of Fe, Estimation of Mn, P0, PRI.
POLYMER ANALYSIS LAB

P 508 0+3
1. Identification of Rubbers: NR, SBR, BR, IR, IIR, EPDM, CR, NBR, Hypalon, Thiokol, Silicone.
2. Identification of Plastics: PE, PP, PS, PVC, PVA, PF, UF, MF, Polyester.
3. Identification of Thermoplastic Elastomers: SIS, SBS, SEBS, Hytrel.
4. Estimation of Polymers: Acrylonitrile content of NBR, Chlorine content of CR, Rubber hydrocarbon
content of NR.
5. Analysis of Polymer Compounds: Iodine value of rubber compounds, Carbon black content, Free
sulphur content, Total inorganic content, Silica content.
388
SIXTH SEMESTER
389
PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
P 601 3+1
Module 1
Evolution of scientific management, functions of management, planning, organising, staffing,
directing, motivating, communicating, controlling and coordinating. Organisational structure line,
staff and functional relationship, organisational structure of various departments, authority and
responsibility, span of control delegation. Formation of companies, proprietary, partnership, joint
stock, private limited and public limited companies, private sector, public sector and co-operative
sector, raising of capital shares, types of shares and debentures.
Module 2
Personnel management and Industrial relations, objectives and functions of personnel management,
recruitment, selection and training of workers, psychological attitude to work and working
conditions, fatigue, methods of eliminating fatigue cause, effect of industrial disputes, methods of
settlement, collective bargaining, trade unions, workers participation in management, labour welfare
and social security, industrial psychology, scope and objective. Job evaluation and merit rating,
objectives and principles of job evaluation, systems of job evaluation, merit rating plans. Wages and
incentives, primary wage systems, time rate and piece rate systems of wage payment, incentive
plans, profit sharing, co-partnership, non-money incentives.
Module 3
Production Management, product, planning and control, batch and mass production, determination
of economic lot size in batch production, function of production control, routing, scheduling,
despatching and follow up, production control in mass production.
Module 4
Marketing Management, importance, marketing Vs selling, marketing planning, competitive
marketing strategy, product life cycle strategy, new product development cycle strategy, marketing
channels inventory controls, determination of economic order quantity and recorder level, locating
store, store room layout, store techniques, store room registers and records. Application of patents,
sale of patent rights, trade mark and copy rights.
References
1. Koontzand O’ Dennel- ‘Essentials of Management’ (TMH)

2. F.Luffthans ‘Organisational Behavior’ (TMH)
3. P.Hersey and Ken Blanchard ‘Management of Organisational Behavior’ (PHI)
4. E.S.Buffa ’Modern Production Management’
5. E.S.Buffa ’Operations Management’
6. O.B.Choudhary ’Marketing Management’
7. A.K.Sinha & R.Sinha ’Project Engg. & Management’
390
ENGINEERING STATISTICS & QUALITY CONTROL
P 602 3+1
Module 1
Population and sampling, large and small samples, random sampling, estimating the mean value and
variance, confidence intervals, choice of sample size for estimation. Testing of hypotheses for large
samples, means, proportions, difference between means and standard deviations. Testing of
hypothesis for small samples, t-distribution, test of hypothesis for mean, difference between means,
test for paired data, F-distribution, f-tests and properties, contingency table, X2 distribution,
goodness of fit and independence.
Module 2
Concepts of inspection, quality control, quality assurance, quality circles, zero defect, total quality
control, quality costs, computer aided inspection, economics of quality, quality vs. cost of production,
Organisation of a Q.C. department, Q.C. Education, Training aids. Process control: control charts, 3
control limits, types of control charts for variables and attributes, r-chart, Q-chart, P-chart, NP- chart,
U-chart, determination of revised control limits, use and significance of control charts, quality rating
system.
Module 3
Acceptance sample, types of acceptance, sampling plans, determination of probability of acceptance
by these sampling plans, sampling risks, design of sampling for stipulated producers risk and
consumers risk. Concepts of AQL, LTPD, AOQL in sampling, QC curves, construction, standard
sampling plans, MIL, STD, LOSD, plan, dodge roming plans, continuous and sequential sampling
plans.
Module 4
Definition of reliability, maintainability, failure rate, mean time between failures, factors
contributing to reliability of products, failure cycle of products, bathtub curve, reliability tests,
operating characteristics, curves for acceptance.
References
1. I.W.Burr, Engineering Statics and Quality Control, Mc-Graw Hill, 1975

2. A.J.Duncon, Quality Control and Industrial Statistics, Richard. Irwin, Inc., 1975
3. R.C.Gupta, Engineering Manufacture and Statical Quality Control, Khanna Publishers, Delhi, 1982
4. Granth L. Engene, Statistical quality Control, Mc Graw Hill, Inc, New York, 1952
5. Sigmund Halpern, An Introduction to Quality Control and Reliability,
6. Quality Control Handbook (TMH)
7. E.L. Grant,” Statistical Quality Control”
8. Gupta And Kapoor, Fundamentals of Mathematical Statistics.
9. Gupta and Kapoor, Applied statistics
391
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING - III
P 603 3+1
Module 1
Distillation, vapour liquid equilibrium, Dalton’s law, Raoult’s law and Henry’s law, relative
volatility, boiling-point diagrams, equilibrium diagrams, rectification, construction of fractionating
column, calculation of the number of theoretical plates by Mc-Cabe Thiele method, feed quality and
feed line, feed plate location, total reflux, minimum reflux, optimum reflux, plate efficiency.
Module 2
Molecular diffusion, molecular diffusion in gases and liquids, Fick’s law, mass transfer coefficient,
steady state diffusion of A through stagnant B and equimolar counter diffusion in binary gases and
liquids, diffusivity of liquids and gases. Applications of molecular diffusion, mass, heat and
momentum transfer analogies.
Module 3
Drying, principles of drying, heat transfer in drying, mass transfer in drying, equilibrium moisture
content, bound, unbound and free water, critical moisture content, batch drying, rate of batch drying,
constant drying rate period, factors affecting the constant drying rate period, falling rate period, time
of drying, rate of drying curve, material and enthalpy balances in drying, equipments for drying,
batch dryers, rotary dryers, tunnel dryers.
Module 4
Gas absorption, absorption equipment, tray towers, continuous contact equipment, packed columns,
properties of tower packing, types of tower packing, tower construction, solubility of gas in liquid,
two component systems, multicomponent systems, ideal liquid solutions, non ideal liquid solutions,
choice of solvent, material balance in absorption, counter current flow, minimum liquid-gas ratio,
absorption factor, number of plates by graphical construction.
References
1. Unit operations in chemical engineering, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Company limited, New Delhi, Mc Cabe
& Smith.
2. Introduction to Chemical Engineering, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Company limited, New Delhi, Badger
3. Mass transfer Operations, Tata Mc Graw-Hill Company limited, New Delhi, Treyball
392
BIO MEDICAL & BIO POLYMERS
P 604 3+1
Module 1
Biomaterials, biocompatibility, stabilisation, inflammation and wound healing, blood clotting
system, kinn system, biological responses to implants, implant design and applications, silicone
polymer implants.
Module 2
Biomedical applications of polymers, permanent implants for function, orthopaedics, cardio
vascular, respiratory patches and tubes, digestive system, genitourinary system, nervous system,
orbital (corneal and lens prosthesis) permanent implant for cosmoses, other applications of
engineered material in clinical practices, silicone implants, polymer membranes, polymer skin,
polymeric blood, poly (vinyl pyrollidone)
Module 3
Contact lenses, hard lenses, gas permeable lenses, flexible lenses, soft lenses, hydrogels, equilibrium
swelling, absorption and desorption, oxygen permeability, types of soft lenses, manufacture,
cleaning and disinfection, dental applications, denture base, denture reliners, crown and bridge
resins, plastic teeth, mouth protectors, maxillofacial prosthetic materials, restorative materials,
polyelectrolyte based restorative sealants, adhesives, dental impression and duplicating materials,
agar, algmater elastomers.
Module 4
Chemistry of peptides, polypeptides and proteins, synthetic approach to polypeptides and proteins,
structural organisation in proteins. nucleic acids, RNA, DNA, structure, chemistry of
polysaccharides, starch and cellulose, chemical modifications of cellulose, regenerated cellulose,
viscose rayon and cuprammonium rayon
References
1. R.H. Yocum and E.B. Nyquist, Eds., Functional Monomers, Volume 1,Marcel Dekker
Inc.,NewYork,1973,Chapter 3,PP 299-487
2. M.A.Galin and M.Ruben, Ed, Soft contact lenses:Clinical and Applied Technology,John Wiley and
sons,Inc.,NewYork,1978.
3. Lehninger, “Principles of Biochemistry, Shulz and Bhirmer ,”Principles of protein structure
“,Academic Press.
4. H.F. Mark (Ed), Encyclopedia of polymer science and engineering, John Wiley and Sons New York,
1989.
5. Galin and M. Ruben Ed., Soft compact Lenses clinical and applied Technology.
6. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York, 1978. Comprehensive Polymer Science Vol.7
7. (Ed) David Byrom, “Bio-Material” Macmillan Publishers Ltd. and ICI Biological products Business,
1991.
8. Wilfred Lynch, Hand book of Silicone rubber fabrication, Van Nostrand Reinhold Company, 450
west 33 rd Street, New York 1000.
393
POLYMER BLENDS & COMPOSITES
P605 3+1
Module 1
Introduction, preparation of polymer blends, thermodynamic criteria for polymer miscibility, specific
interactions, copolymer effect, phase separation, spinoidal decomposition, nucleation and growth,
phase diagram, morphology, blend characterisation techniques.
Module 2
Structure-property relationship, rubber plastic blends, phase morphology, properties of blends
prepared by dynamic vulcanization, technological application, thermoplastic styrene block
copolymers, polyester thermoplastic elastomers, thermoplastic polyurethane elastomers, basic
structure, manufacture, morphology, commercial grades, applications, thermoplasic 1,2-
polybutadiene, trans 1,4-polyisoprene, ionic thermoplastic elastomers, silicone based thermoplastic
elastomers, polyamide 1,2-elastomers.
Module 3
Introduction, particulate and fibre filled composites, matrices and fibres, polymer- fibre interface,
pull-out strength, critical fibre length, short fibre and continuous fibre composites, effect of coupling
and bonding agents, characterization of interfacial bond strength, applications, polymer concrete,
polymer impregnated concretes, polymeric binders for rocket propellants, analysis of long fibre
composites, analysis of short fibre composites, factors influencing the performance of composites,
rule of mixtures, physical and functional properties.
Module 4
Introduction, resins (polyester, epoxies, phenolics), reinforcements (glass, carbon, aramid, polyester,
nylon, cellulosics), moulding process, contact moulding, vacuum bag moulding, pressure bag
moulding, hand lay up, filament winding, spray up, compression moulding, injection moulding, co-
injection moulding, resin transfer moulding, pultrusion, RRIM, matched die moulding.
References
1. Hand book of Elastomers, New Developments and Technology (Eds), A.K. Bhowmic, and H.C.
Stephense, Markel Dekker, Inc., New york.
2. O.Olabisi, I.W. Robeson, and M.T. Shaw, Polymer-polymer Miscibility Academic Press, New York,
1979
3. Paul S. Newman (Ed) ‘Polymer Blends’” Academic Press, New York, 1978
4. G.Alliger, etal, Rubber world, 164930,51(1971)
5. Goettler inc, the role of the polymeric matrix in the processing and structural prpperties of
copmposite materials (J C Sferis and L.Nicolars, (Edn) Plenum, New York 1983.
394
POLYMER PROCESSING - II
P 606 3+1
Module 1
Injection moulding, terminology, process description, moulding cycle, classification of moulds, 2-
plate and 3-plate moulds, different types of gates, cavity lay-out, setting up of mould, types of
injection unit, elements of plasticating process, classification of screw, screw design, process control,
clamping unit, classification of machine hydraulics, ancillary equipment, computer operation,
trouble shooting of injection moulding, reaction injection moulding
Module 2
Extrusion, principle, types of extruders, single screw and twin-screw extruders, metering, screw
design, process control variables, types of dies, die design, elastic properties and die swell,
manufacturing of pipes, cables, wire coating, extrusion profiles, blown films, flat film, sheets,
filaments, lamination, extrusion of elastomers
Module 3
Blow moulding, terminology, basis, process variables, injection & stretch blow moulding, single and
multi layer, extrusion blow moulding, extrusion heads, process controls for blow moulding machine,
process and product controls. Thermoforming, definition, methods of forming, thermoforming
machinery, heating of sheet, heating cycle, stretching, concept, hot strength, blistering, sags, cooling
and trimming the parts, heat balance, shrinkage, trimming operations.
Module 4
Rotational moulding, types of machines, moulds, materials, part design, calendering, types of
calenders and strainer, embosser, winder, take off-systems, crowning, machinery powder coating,
manufacturing methods, application methods, types of powder coating, finishing and machining of
plastics, joining, welding and assembling of plastics.
References
1. Edited by Michael L. Berlin Plastics Engineering. Handbook. Society of the plastic Industries
Chapman & Hall NY 1991.
2. James L. Throne, Technology of Thermoforming. Hanser, Publisher Munmich 1996.
3. M.J. Stevens and J.A. Covas, Extruder principle and operation. Chapman & Hall UK, 2nd edtion
1995.
4. D.V. Rosato & D.V. Rosato, Blow moulding Hand book, Hanser Published 1998.
395
LATEX PRODUCTS LAB
P 607 0+3
1. Preparation of dispersion, slurry and emulsions

2. Creaming of NR latex.
3. Manufacture of rubber bands, balloons, finger caps, household gloves, surgeons’ gloves, latex thread
and articles by casting.
4. Heat sensitized dipping.
5. Latex impregnation in textiles
6. Preparation of SP, CV and LV rubber
7. Preparation of latex based adhesives
8. Work practice in the production of latex foam
9. Work practice in the production of bonded coir
PRODUCT MANUFACTURING LAB

P 608 0+3
1. Determination of Cure time.

2. Effect of mastication time on plasticity/ viscosity
3. Work practice in mastication, band formation, homogenisation and mixing using a laboratory
mill
4. Preparation of micro cellular sheet, V-strap, tea mat, teats, injection bottle cap, play ball, man
made hose, solvent based adhesives, solid tyre, sponge, eraser and oil seal.
5. Work Practice in calendaring, injection moulding, rotational moulding and extrusion
6. Compounding of PVC on two roll mill
7. Visit to factories manufacturing tyres and non tyre products.
8. Preparation and characterisation of thermoplastic elastomers from rubber-plastic blends.
a) Miscible binary system (solution and melt mixing)
b) Immiscible binary system (solution and melt mixing)
c) Compatibilised binary system (solution and melt mixing)
9. Preparation of miscible polymer blends, phase separation, LCST measurements.
10. Blending of NR with SBR, BR and EPDM.
11. Preparation of fibre filled composites.
12. Hand Lay up technique and Compression Moulding.
396
SEVENTH SEMESTER
397
PAINT TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - I)
P 701 - 1 2+1
Module 1
Reflection, refraction, diffraction, colour science, additive colour mixing, gloss, specular gloss,
bloom gloss, surface uniformity, hiding power, chromaticity diagrams for colour measurements,
components of paints, paint preparation, formulation, factors affecting pigment dispersion,
preparation of pigment dispersion, manufacture, pigments, pigment properties, different types,
selection, dispersion and colour matching of pigments, extenders, solvents, different types, solvent
properties, oil, driers, resins, dilutents, additives affecting viscosity, interfacial tension, chemical
reactions, living micro organisms.
Module 2
Classification based on polymeric resin, emulsion, oil and alkyd paints, acrylic paints, epoxy
coatings, polyurethanes, silicones, formaldehyde based resins, chlorinated rubbers, acrylics,
hydrocarbon resins. Classification based on application. Fluoropolymers, vinyl resins, appliance
finishes, automotive finishes, coil coatings, can coatings, marine coatings, aircraft finishes.
Module 3
Mechanism of film formation, physical drying, oxidative drying, chemical drying, factors affecting
coating properties, film thickness, film density, internal stresses, pigment volume concentration
(PVC), different methods used for film preparation, barrier properties. Mechanical properties and
optical properties of coatings, ageing properties, effect of rheological behaviour on paint
performance.
Module 4
Adhesion properties of coatings, factors affecting adhesive bond, thermodynamics of adhesion,
destructive methods, nondestructive methods, properties such as floating, silking, cratering, foaming,
skinning, flame retardance, slip resistance and storage stability, surface cleaning methods, chemical
conversion treatments, paint application, brushing, dip coating, flow coating, roller coating, spray
painting, electro deposition, chemiphoretic deposition.
References
1. Swaraj Paul, “ Surface coating: Science and Technology” Wiley- Interscience 1985
2. R. Lambourne. “ Paint and Surface Coatings-Theory and Practice” Ellis Horwood Chichester 1987
398
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - I)
P 701 - 2 2+1
Module 1
Data Structures, introduction, storage structures for arrays, stacks, application of stacks, queues,
pointers and linked allocations, linked linear list, operations, circularly and doubly linked list,
applications, sorting techniques, selection sort, bubble sort, exchange sort, searching techniques,
sequential searching, binary searching.
Module 2
Operating systems, generation and history of operating systems, multi programming and time
sharing concepts, process states, transition, PCB, interrupt processing, job and process scheduling,
disk scheduling, seek optimization, rotational optimization.
Module 3
Software engineering, planning and cost estimation, importance of software, defining the problem,
developing a solution strategy, planning, development process, organizational structure, software
cost estimation, introduction, software cost factors, cost estimation techniques, staffing level
estimation.
Module 4
Software design concepts, introduction, fundamental design concepts, modules and modularization
criteria, design notations and techniques, detailed design consideration, real time and distributed
system design, test plans, milestone, walkthroughs and inspections, design guidelines, computer
security, fundamental concepts of cryptosystems. Computer networks, introduction, uses of
computer networks, network hardware & software, reference models, network topologies, examples
of network, internet programming, HTML, DHTML, front page, introduction to dream weaver. E-
commerce, introduction, applications in business, E-commerce framework.
References
1. Jean-Paul Tremblay& Paul.G.Sorenson, An Introduction to Data Structures with Applications, Mc

Graw Hill, II edition, 1984.
2. Harvey.M.Detail, An Introduction to Operating Systems, Addison Wesley Publication Company,
1998.
3. James.L.Peterson, Abraham Silberschatz, Operating System Concepts, Addison Wesley Publication
Company, 1985.
4. Richard Fairley, Software Engineering Concepts, Mc Graw Hill, 1985.
5. Pressman R.S., Software Engineering, Mc Graw Hill, II edition, 1987.
399
ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT (ELECTIVE - I)
P701 - 3 2+1
Module 1
Nature and scope of engineering economics, definition and scope of study of the subject,
significance of economic analysis in business decisions, demand and supply analysis, determinants
of demand, law of demand, Elasticity of demand, Demand forecasting, Law of supply, Elasticity of
supply, Market price.
Module 2
Cost analysis, fixed cost, variable cost, marginal cost, cost output relationship in the short run and
the long run, equilibrium of the firm, pricing decisions, situations demand, pricing decisions, pricing
in practice, full cost pricing, marginal cost pricing, bid pricing, pricing for a rate of return, statutory
price fixation in India, break even analysis, break even point, basic assumptions, break even chart,
managerial uses of break even analysis.
Module 3
Capital budgeting, need for capital budgeting, method of appraising project Profitability, rate of
return, pay back period, present value comparison, cost benefit analysis, preparing of feasibility
report, appraisal process, economic and commercial feasibility, financial feasibility, technical
feasibility.
Module 4
Work study, production, productivity, factors affecting productivity, role of work study, human
factor, methods study, objectives and procedure, SIMO chart, principles of motion economy, work
measurement, stop watch time study, rating concept and systems, allowances, work sampling, plant
layout, factors governing plant location, objectives of a good plant layout, process layout, product
layout and combination layout.
References
1. O.P. Khanna- Industrial Engineeering and Management- Dhanpatrai Publications- New Delhi-1998
2. R. L. Varshney & K.L. Maheswari-Managerial Economics-S Chand and Co.
3. Samuelson P. A. & Nordhaus. W. D-Economics-Mc'Grawhill-1992
TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT & RELIABILITY ENGINEERING

(ELECTIVE - I)
P 701 - 4 2+1
Module 1
Basic concepts, evolution of total quality management, definitions of quality, deming, crosby, juran,
taguchi, ishikawa theories, inspection, quality control, TQM system, human component, service and
product quality, customer orientation.
Module 2
Quality planning & techniques, quality planning, goal setting, designing for quality, manufacturing
for quality, process control, CPK, 6σ , process capability, data based approach, statistical tools, 7QC
tools, bench marking, QFD, FMEA, 5S, continuous improvement techniques, POKAYOKE, deming
wheel.
400
Module 3
Human dimension & system development in TQM, TQM mind set, participation style, team work,
team development, quality circle, motivational aspect, change management, documentation,
structure, information system, ISO 9000, ISO 14000, QS 9000, certification, clauses, procedure,
TQM road map.
Module 4
Reliability, definition, probabilistic nature of failures, mean failure rate, meantime to failure,
meantime between failures, hazard rate, hazard models, weibull model, system reliability,
improvement, redundancy, series, parallel and mixed configurations, reliability in design, case
studies of aircraft engines, brake system in automobiles and aircraft, electronic equipollents.
Maintainability, introduction, choice of maintenance strategy, mean time to repair (MTTR), factors
contributing to mean down time (MDT), fault diagnosis, routine testing for unrevealed faults, factors
contributing to mean maintenance time, (MMT), on-condition maintenance, periodic condition
monitoring, continuous condition monitoring, economics of maintenance.
References
1. Joel E. Rose, Total Quality Management, 2nd edn., Kogan page Ltd., USA, 1993.
2. Srinath L.S., Reliability Engineering, Affiliated East West Press, New Delhi – 1975.
3. John Bentley, Introduction to Reliability and Quality Engineering, 2nd edn., Addison – Wesley, 1999.
4. Samuel K Ho, TQM – An integrated approach, 2nd edn., Kogan page Ltd., USA, 1996.
5. John Bank, TQM, Prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ly\td., New Delhi, 1993.
6. Patrick P.T. O’ Connor, Practical Reliability Engineering 2edn., John Wiley & Sons, 1985.
7. Balagurusamy E., Reliability Engineering, Tata McGrew Hill Pub. Co., New Delhi, 1984.
8. Bazovsky. I., Reliability Theory and Practice, Printice Hall, Inc. Englewood Cliffs, New Jersey,
1961.
401
INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING
P 702 2+1
Module 1
Introduction, evolution of modern concepts, functions of an industrial engineer, field of application,
entrepreneurship, concept of project, types of investment, capital budgeting, investment proposals,
project development cycle, preinvestment analysis, project environments, government regulations,
import-export status, foreign exchange regulations, technical collaborations, means of raising capital,
availability of resources, marketing survey and strategies.
Module 2
Product development and research, design function, objectives of design, manufacture Vs purchase,
development of design, experimentation, prototype production, testing, simplification,
standardization, product development, selection of materials and processes, human factors in design,
value engineering, selection of factory site, building design, construction, plant layout and material
handling, product and process, layout, comparison of flowchart, use of time study data, physical
facilities, constructional details, environmental control like lighting, temperature, humidity,
ventilation, noise, dust, industrial waste disposal-principles of material handling, types of material
handling equipment, selection and application.
Module 3
Maintenance and replacement, preventive and breakdown maintenance, economic aspect,
replacement of equipment, methods of providing for depreciation, determination of economic life,
criteria for selection of equipment.
Module 4
Methods Engineering, analysis of work methods using different types of process charts and flow
diagrams, critical examination, micro motion study and Therblings, SIMO chart, principles of
motion economy, determination of standard time and allowances, accounting and costing, element of
double entry book keeping, trial balance, trading profit and loss account, balance sheet, principles of
costing, methods of allocation of overhead costs, finance and capital requirements, price fixation,
cash flow statements, return of investment, source of finance.
References
1. Production System - J.L.Riggs

2. Production Control - Hiegel
3. Human Factors in Engg. Design - Mc Cornic, E.J.
4. Time and Motion Study - Barnes R.M.
5. Operations Management - Buffa E.S.
6. Value Engineering - Miles L.D.
7. Methods Engineering - Krick
8. System Analysis and Project Management - Cleand &king.
402
PRODUCTION ENGINEERING
P 703 3+1
Module 1
Lathe, types of lathe specification, parts of center lathe, operations, single point tool nomenclature
accessories and attachment, capstan and turret lathe, parts, difference, automatic lathe, single spindle
and multispindle types.
Module 2
Shaping, types, operations, parts of standard shaper, specifications, planning, types, parts of double
housing, planning machine, operations table drive mechanism only, specifications, milling, types,
specifications, operations only, drilling, types, specification, operations, twist drill nomenclature,
boring, types, specification, grinding, types, abrasives, girt, grade and structure of grinding wheel,
bonding process, fine finishing, honing, super finishing, buffing, metal spraying, electro plating.
Module 3
Special machining, electrical discharge machining, electro chemical machining, electron beam
machining, ultrasonic laser machining, plasma arc machining, abrasive jet machining, chemical
machining.
Module 4
Transfer machines, types, components, N.C. machines, open and closed loop control system, analogy
and digital control system, absolute and incremental position control, part programming, manual part
programming technique and computer aided part programming technique, measurement principles,
classification of measuring instruments, gauges, height gauge, slip gauges, sine bars, autocollimator,
go, no gauges, classification, surface roughness, terms, symbols, measurement.
References
1. S.K. Hajra Choudry, Elements of Workshop Technology Vol. I & II Media promoters and
Publishers, 1999, 9th Edition.
2. Workshop Technology, W.A.J. Chapman, Vol. I, II & III.3
3. Manufacturing Technology, M. Hastle Hurst.
403
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING - IV
P 704 3+1
Module 1
Process control-controllers, types, proportional derivative control, proportional integral controller,
proportional integral derivative controller, basic principles and transfer functions, pneumatic and
electronic controllers, open and closed loop systems, first order systems, mercury thermometer,
liquid level and mixing process
Module 2
Temperature measurement-different methods like electrical, contact and non-contact methods-
thermometers- liquid filled, bimetallic and resistance thermometers, thermocouple, optical
pyrometer. Pressure measurement, manometers, U-tube, well type and inclined types, barometer,
bourden tube, bellows, diaphragms.
Module 3
Chemical reaction engineering-classification of chemical reactions and reactors, variables affecting
the rate of reaction, reaction rate, molecularity and order of a reaction, Arrhenius law, collision
theory and transition state theory. integral and differential method of data analysis, ideal batch
reactor, semi batch reactor, mixed reactor
Module 4
Process calculations-methods of expressing composition of mixture of solids, liquids and gases.
concept of limiting and excess reactants. ideal gas law, Dalton’s law, Amagat’s law, material balance
problems involving mixing, leaching, evaporation, distillation and absorption.
References
1. Stochiometry, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi, Bhatt & Vora
2. Chemical reaction engineering, Levenspiel, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi
3. Process control, Patranabis, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi
4. Process instrumentation, Patranabis, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi
5. Process system analysis and control, Coughnour & Koppel, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited,
New Delhi
6. Chemical engineer’s Handbook, Perry, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited, New Delhi.
7. Introduction to chemical engineering, Anderson & Wenzel, Tata McGraw Hill Company limited,
New Delhi
404
TYRE TECHNOLOGY
P705 3+1
Module 1
History on the design and development of tyres, current status of tyre industry in India and its future
prospects, tyre sizing, different components of a tyre, its geometry, basic functions, functions of a
pneumatic tyre, load carrying, vibration and noise reduction, the tyre function as a spring,
contribution to road adhesion, tyre friction contribution to driving control, steering control and self
aligning torque. Solid tyres, concave tyres, winter tyres, OTR tyre, bicycle tyre, different types of
tyres, bias, bias belted, radial, relative merits and demerits, their components, tube and tubeless
tyres-basic features.
Module 2
Cord-rubber composites, failure mechanism of cord reinforced rubber, mechanics of tyre pavement
interaction, tyre forces on dry and wet road surface, traction forces on dry, wet, ice, snow and
irregular pavements, breaking and traction of tyres, tyre wear, rubber friction, sliding mechanism,
various factors affecting friction and sliding, tyre stresses and deformation, tyre noise, mechanism of
noise generation, effect of tread pattern, noise level, flatspotting, fatigue resistance, patographing,
pneumatic resilience effect.
Module 3
Manufacturing techniques of various tyres - two wheeler, car tyres, truck tyres, cycle tyres, cycle
tubes, OTR tyres, aircraft tyres, automotive tubes, manufacture of tyre treads, beads, sidewalls,
compounding techniques, principles of designing formulations for various rubber components, tyre
reinforcement materials (textile, steel, glass, aramid), criteria of selection, different styles and
construction, textile treatment (RFL dip), tyre mould design, green tyre design principles, methods
of building green tyres for bias, bias belted, radial and tubeless tyres, green tyre treatments, tyre
curing methods, curing bags, bladders, diaphragms, autoclave, airbag, bagomatic, autoform, post
cure inflation, different types of tyre building machines, bead winding machine, bias cutters, curing
presses.
Module 4
Measurement of tyre properties, dimension and size-static and loaded, tyre construction analysis,
endurance test, wheel and plunger tests, traction, noise measurements, force and moment
characteristics, cornering coefficient aligning torque coefficient, load sensitivity and load transfer
sensitivity, rolling resistance, non-uniformity dimensional variations, force variations, radial force
variation, lateral force variation concentricity and ply steer, type balance, mileage, evaluations, tyre
flaws and separations, X-ray holography, foot print pressure distribution, BIS standards for tyres,
tubes and flaps, quality control tests.
References
1. Samuel K. Clark, Mechanics of pneumatic Tires, National Bureau of standards, Monograph, US

Govt. printing office, 1971.
2. Tom French, Tyre Technology, Adam Hilger, New York, 1989.
3. F.J. Kovac, Tire Technology, 4th edition, Good year Tire and Rubber Company, Akron, 1978.
4. E. Robecchi, L. Amiki, Mechanics of Tire, 2 Vols, Pirelli, Milano, 197
POLYMER TESTING
405
P706 3+1
Module 1
Standards organizations, BIS, ASTM, BS, DIN, FDA, preparation and conditioning of test pieces,
short term testing, stress-strain behaviour in tension, compression and shear, tensile strength,
compressive strength, tear strength, flexural strength, impact, Izod, Charpy, long term testing, creep,
stress relaxation, hardness, abrasion resistance, resilience, heat build- up, ageing.
Module 2
Chemical analysis of polymers, functional group analysis, tacticity analysis, use of mass
spectrometry, gas chromatography, IR, C13, H1, ESR, NMR spectroscopy, optical microscopy, SEM,
TEM, X-ray diffraction, electron diffraction, neutron diffraction in polymer characterization.
Module 3
Principle and use of DTA, TGA, DSC, DMA and TMA, determination of Tg, Tm, heat of fusion,
thermal conductivity, flammability, vicat softening point, heat deflection temperature.
Module 4
Analysis of dielectric strength, dielectric constant, volume resistivity, surface resistivity, arc
resistance, corona resistance, power factor, dissipation factor, loss factor, transparency, refractive
index, haze, gloss.
References
1. R.P.Brown, Physical testing of Rubber, Academic Press, New York 1984

2. Vishu Shah, Testing of Plastics
3. ASTM Manual 35,36,37
4. BIS and TST Manual
POLYMER TESTING LAB

P707 0+3
Testing of mechanical properties of plastics and rubbers
1. Tensile strength
2. Compression strength
3. Flexural strength
4. Tear strength
406
5. Izod and Charpy impact strength
6. Falling dart impact strength
7. Shore Hardness
8. Abrasion resistance
9. Rebound resilience
10. Flex resistance
CHEMICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY

P 708 0+3
1. Fluid flow measurement using orificemeter

2. Fluid flow measurement using venturimeter
3. Verification of Bernoulli’s theorem
4. Single tank system
5. Simple distillation
6. Reynolds’s experiment
7. Dynamics of thermometer
8. Characteristic curves of a centrifugal pump
9. Characteristic curves of a reciprocating pump
10. Kinetics of hydrolysis of ethyl acetate.
407
EIGHTH SEMESTER
408
ADHESIVE TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - II)
P801 - 1 3+1
Module 1
Bond types, immiscible planar substrates, immiscible substrates with interphase formation via
chemical reaction, setting, adhesive joint strength, interface, thermodynamics of adhesive, contact
angle, work of adhesion, acid base consideration, surface treatment, measure of adhesion, test
methods, strength of adhesion, rheology of adhesion
Module 2
Low energy surface, high energy surface, solvent, solvent cleaning, mechanical abrasion, chemical
treatments, primers, plasma treatments, mechanism of adhesion, introduction, mechanical
interlocking, mechanically roughened substrates, chemically roughened substrates, role of localized
energy dissipation diffusion theory, welding of plastics, polymer/ metal interface, electronic theory,
adsorption theory, secondary force interactions, donor-acceptor interactions, primary force
interaction.
Module 3
Hardening by solvent or dispersing medium removal, hardening by cooling, hardening by chemical
reaction, non-hardening adhesives, adhesives from natural sources, rubber based adhesives, TPE
based adhesives, phenolic resins, tannin formaldehyde resin, lignin based resin, polyvinylacetates,
polyvinylalcohols, epoxides, di isocyanates, cyanoacrylate, anaerobic, acrylic, hot melt adhesives,
pressure sensitive adhesives, structural adhesives in aerospace, adhesives in automobile industry,
conductive, adhesives in building construction, adhesives in electrical industry.
Module 4
Stresses, types of joints, selection of joint detail, joint design criteria, standard test methods,
engineering properties of adhesives, non destructive testing, fracture mechanics of adhesive joints,
effect of joint geometry, effect of temperature, dynamic and static fatigue, environmental attack,
service life prediction.
References
1. Skiests (Ed). Handbook of Adhesives, III edition, Van Nostrand Reinhold, 1990
2. Shields, Handbook of Adhesives, Butterworths 1984
3. Pizzi (Ed) Wood Adhesives, Chemistry and Technology, Marcel Dekker 1983.
409
PLASTICS PACKAGING TECHNOLOGY (ELECTIVE - II)
P 801 - 2 3+1
Module 1
Introduction to plastics packaging, functions of packaging, advantages of plastic packaging,
distribution hazards, special requirements of food and medical packaging, packaging legislation and
regulation, packaging as a system, elements, approach, package, design, relation criteria for
packaging materials, packaging equipment checklist, case histories, major packaging plastics,
introduction, PE, PP, PS, PVC, polyesters, PVDC, vinylacetate, PVA, EVA, PV Alcohol, PA, PC
ionomers & fluoro polymers.
Module 2
Conversion process, compression & transfer moulding, injection moulding, blow moulding,
extrusion, rotary thermoforming, lamination, metallizing, decoration process, shrink wrapping, pallet
& stretch wrapping, sealing methods, plasma barrier coatings, energy requirement for conversion.
Module 3
Extrusion, film and flexible packaging, extrusion, cast film & sheet, blown film, multi layer film &
sheet coatings, laminations & co extrusions, stretch and shrink wrap, pouching, sealing, evaluation of
seals in flexible packages, advantages of flexible packaging, flexible packaging products, specialized
packaging for food products
Module 4
Thermoformed, moulded and rigid packages, thermoforming packages, position & thermoforming
& wrap forming, variations in thermoforming and solid phase pressure forming, scrabbles, twin
sheet & melt to mould thermoforming, skin packaging, thermoforming moulds, thermoforming fill
real, aseptic thermoforming, advantages & disadvantages of moulding foams, other cushioning
materials & distribution packaging, polystyrene & other foams systems cushioning, design of
molded cushioning systems, plastic pallets, drums & other shipping containers, testing plastic
packages, barrier, migration & compatibility, printing, labeling & pigmenting, sterilization systems
and health care products, packaging hazards and their controls, environmental considerations.
References
1. Susan E.M. Seleke, Understanding plastic packaging Technology, Hanser publications – Munich
2. A.S. Altalye, Plastics in packaging, Tata McGraw – Hill publishing Co. Ltd., New Delhi.
410
PROCESS ENGINEERING ECONOMICS AND MANAGEMENT
(ELECTIVE - II)
P 801 - 3 3+1
Module 1
Value of money, equivalence, equation for economic studies and equivalence, amoritation, capital
recovery, depreciation, depletion.
Module 2
Capital requirements for process plants, cost indices, equipment costs, service facilities, capital
requirements for completed plan, balance sheet, cost, earnings, profits and returns, variable costs,
fixed costs, income statement, economic production charts, capacity factors.
Module 3
Economics of selecting alternates, annual cost methods, present worth method, equivalent alternate,
rate of return and payment time, cash flow analysis, economic balance, economic balance in batch
operation, cyclic operations and multiple equipment units.
Module 4
Micro economics, elasticity of demand and supply, demand forecasting methods, economic analysis,
cost analysis, time element, Beep micro economics, Keynesian employment theory, multiplier and
accelerator, national income, accounting, business cycle. Concept of management, principles,
managerial functions, scientific management, advanced techniques in management, type of
organization, merits and demerits, concept of marking, need, reserach, sales forecasting, product
cycle, personnel management, concepts recruitment, selection and training and development,
maintenance, merit rating, job evaluation, fatigue, accidents, causes and prevention, labor
management of relations, concept of industrial relations.
References
1. Schwyer H.E., “Process Engineering Economics”, Mcgraw Hill Book Co., (N.Y)
2. Jelam, F.F., “Cost And Optimisation Engineering “.
3. Peter And Timmerhaus, “Plant Design And Economics For Chemical Engineers.
411
PROCESS CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION (ELECTIVE - II)
P 801 - 4 3+1
Module 1
Principles of measurement and classification of process control instruments, temperature pressure,
fluid flow, liquid level, volumetric and mass flow rate, fluid density and specific gravity, viscosity
and consistency, pH and concentration, electrical and thermal conductivity, humidity composition by
physical and thermal properties and spectroscopy.
Module 2
Transient response of open loop systems, first order systems, examples, response to step, impulse
and sinusoidal forcing functions, first order systems in series, interacting and non interacting types,
response of first order systems in series, second order system, transfer functions, examples, response
of second order systems to step, impulse and sinusoidal inputs transient response of chemical
reactor.
Module 3
Control system, development of block diagram for feed back control systems, servo and regulator
problems, transfer function for controllers and final control element, principles of pneumatic and
electronic controllers, transportation lag, feedback characteristics of control systems, block diagram,
signal flow graph techniques.
Module 4
Introduction to frequency response of closed loop systems, concept of stability ROUTH test for
stability, stability criterion, bode stability criterion, Niquist diagram, tuning of controller settings.
Process dynamics and applications, dynamics and control of chemical reactors, heat exchangers and
distillation columns, digital computer applications, microprocessors and computer control of
chemical processes, introduction to PLC programming and DCS.
References
1. Coughanowr D.R. and Koppel L.M., Process Systems Analysis and Control McGraw Hill, New
York.
2. P. Harriot, Process Control, Tata McGraw Hill, New Delhi 1977.
3. D.P. Eckman, Industrial Instrumentation, Wiley 1978.
412
COMPUTER AIDED DESIGN & MANUFACTURE
P 802 3+1
Module 1
Introduction, design process, application of computers for design, creating manufacture database,
benefits of CAD, input-output devices in CAD, design work station, graphic terminal, operator input
devices, plotters and other output devices, secondary storage. Functions of graphic package,
constructing the geometry, 2D transformations, 3D transformations, conceteration, data base
structure and content, wire-frame modeling, surface modeling, solid modeling finite element
modeling, digitizing, layering, groups, patterns, local coordinates, automate dimensioning, on line
calculation capabilities.
Module 2
Conventional memorial control (NC), basic components of NC system, NC procedure, NC co
ordinate system, NC motion control system, applications of NC, economics of NC, NC part
programming, punched tape in NC, tape coding and format, manual part programming, computer
assisted part programming, the ATP language, the macro statement in ATP, NC programming with
interactive graphics, voice NC programming, manual data input, computer controls in NC,
introduction, problems with conventional NC, NC controller technology, computer numerical
control, direct numerical control, combined DNC/CNC systems, adaptive control machining systems.
Module 3
Structural modes of manufacturing process, process control strategies, distributed control versus
central control, direct digital control, supervisory computer control, computer aided quality control,
technology in Q.C., computer in Q.C., contract inspection methods, non contract inspection methods,
optical and non optical, computer aided testing, integration of CAQC with CAD/ CAM
manufacturing systems, manufacturing systems, machine tools and related equipment, material
handling system, computer integrated manufacturing systems, human labour in the manufacturing
system, CIMS benefits.
Module 4
Group technology (G.T.), introduction, part families, part classification and coding, G.T. machine
cells benefits of G.T., computer aided process planning, planning function, retrieval type process
planning system, generative process planning system, benefits of CAPP, machinability data systems,
computer generated time standards.
References
1. M.P. Groover, E.M. Zimmers, Jr.”CAD/CAM”; Computer Aided Design and Manufacturing,
Prentice Hall of India, 1987
2. Besent C.B. “ Computer aided Design and Manufacturing” Ellis Horwood Ltd England 1980
413
FIBRE TECHNOLOGY
P 803 3+1
Module 1
Introduction, definition of fibre, fibre dimensions, units of measurements, tex, denier, conversion
from one system to another, use of fibres in the rubber and plastic industry, polymer products
containing fibres, fibre manufacturing industries in India, present status and future prospects.
Module 2
Fibres used in polymer industry- types and sources, chemical composition, properties, concept of
order in fibres and polymers, crystallinity and orientation, methods of investigating fibre structure,
detailed study of fibre properties such as mechanical properties, electrical properties, moisture
absorption, optical properties and fibre friction, relation between fibre properties and structure, uses
of vegetable fibres such as cotton, flax, linen, coir, sisal, pineapple, jute, silk, banana, use of animal
and mineral fibres.
Module 3
Man made fibres, physical structure of fibre forming polymers, production, chemical composition,
properties and testing of viscose rayon, cellulose acetate, nylon 66 and nylon 6, polyester, acrylic,
poly vinyl alcohol, spandex, carbon fibre, metallic fibres, saran, kevlar, nomex, steel wire, finishing
and dyeing.
Module 4
Yarn and textile production from fibres, definition of various textile terms, fibre spinning, drawing of
fibres, felting, knitting, lacing, bonding and weaving, properties of yarns, yarn numbering system,
brief idea about spinning of cotton yarns and blends, yarn properties such as count appearance,
evenness, strength, abrasion, fatigue, friction, twist, dynamic mechanical properties and their
importance, fabrics, brief idea about the construction, cover factor, geometry of weaves, fabric
properties such as strength, abrasion resistance, air permeability, bursting strength, thermal
properties.
References
1. Booths, “ Textile Testing”, Butterworths, Newness, U.K. 1980

2. Wake and D.B.Wooton, Textile reinforcement of Elastomers,” Applied Sciences” 1982
3. Evans,” House technology” Applied Science Publishes 1979
4. F.W.Billmeyer, “Text Book of Polymer Science”, Wiley – Interscience, 1971
5. Moncrief,” Man Made Fibres,
6. Sadov et al, “Chemical technology of fibres and Material” Mir Publishers, Moscow 1978
414
POLYMERS & ENVIRONMENT
P 804 3+1
Module 1
Introduction, resources of polymers, comparison of total energy costs for product manufacture based
on polymers, ceramics and metals, polymer production and consumption, comparison of the impact
on environment by polymers and other materials, environmental pollution, non- biodegradability of
polymers, drawbacks, burning of polymers, remedy for environmental problem by polymers,
awareness program.
Module 2
Bio-degradation of polymers, introduction, enzymes, enzyme nomenclature, enzyme specificity,
physical factors affecting the activity of enzymes, enzyme mechanism, chemical degradation
initiates biodegradation, hydrolysis of synthetic biodegradable polymers. Development of starch
based polymers, manufacture of master batch, biodegradation, assessment, soil burial test,
biopolyesters, synthesis, isolation, solvent extraction, enzymatic digestion, properties, degradation,
intracellular biodegradation, extra cellular biodegradation, thermal degradation, hydrolytic
degradation, environmental degradation
Module 3
Need for recycling of plastics from urban solid wastes, waste composition, sorting and segregation
of waste, plastics identification, SPI coding, primary recycling, equipments for primary recycling,
specific recycling techniques, PE films, PP battery case, crushing and separation, PET films
Module 4
Secondary recycling, plastics wastes containing paper, hydrolytic treatment, processing of mixed
plastics waste, household waste, industrial sector, TPO based materials, use of recyclable plastics in
motor vehicles, recoverable material, disposal of residuals, recycling of rubber, difficulty in recycling
of rubber products, reclaimator process, WTR, advantages of reclaimed rubber in cost, mixing and
processing
References
1. Recycling of plastic materials (Ed) Francesco Paolo La Mantia, Chem Tee Publishing.
2. Degradable polymers, recycling and plastics waste management, (eds) Ann
3. Christine Albertsson and Samuel J. Huang, Marcel Dekker, New York.
4. Plastics Waste Management (ed) Nabil Mustafa, Marcel Dekkar, New York.
415
POLYMER PRODUCT DESIGN
P 805 3+ 1
Module 1
Steps in product design, functional design, aesthetic design, effect of fillers on properties and
performance, safety factor, working stress, safe stress, fatigue factor, effects of cyclic loading, stress
concentration, endurance limit, structural design of products under static and dynamic loads, design
of beams and plates, design for stiffness, electrical use, optical use
Module 2
Design features of products, inside and outside corners, wall thickness, ribs, tapers, draft angles,
weld lines, gate size and location, tolerances, moulded-in-inserts, plastic threads, blind holes,
undercuts, hinges, functional surfaces and lettering, snap fitting, welding.
Module 3
Plastic gears, advantages and disadvantages, glossary of gearing terms, backlash and working
clearance, materials, lubricants, frictional properties, design, moulded and cut gears, plastic bearings,
rubber bearings, different types, designers checklist, pipes, dimensions and specifications, joints,
manholes, pump pressure, pressure rating calculation, external loading.
Module 4
Hysteresis, energy absorption, damping, principles of vibration, simple harmonic motion,
combination of simple harmonic motion, beats, periodic motion, system with single degree of
freedom, natural frequency, forced vibrations, undamped vibration, damped vibrations, octave rules,
coulomb and solid damping, frequency of damped vibrations, logarithmic decrements, critical
damping, two degrees of freedom, multi degrees of freedom, vibration isolation, dynamic isolation
and transmissibility, isolation of shock and transient vibrations, rubber mountings, rubber bridge
bearings , rubber seals, basic configurations, design of static and dynamic seals, design of rubber
products in automobiles, aviation, marine fields, hoses, beltings, couplings, cables, rubber- to- metal
components, footwear, sports goods.
References
1. Plastic Products Design Handbook - Edward Miller

2. Plastic Products Design Engg. Handbook - S Levy & J. H. DuBois
3. Product Design With Plastics J.B.Dym Freakly and Payne “Theory and Practice of engineering With
Rubber” Applied Science, London, 1978
416
SPECIALITY POLYMERS
P 806 3+1
Module 1
High temperature and fire resistant polymers, improving low performance polymers for high
temperature use, polymers for low fire hazards, polymers for high temperature resistance,
fluoropolymers, aromatic polymers, polyphenylene sulphide, polysulphones, polyesters, polyamides,
polyketones, heterocyclic polymers.
Module 2
Electrical and electronic properties of polymers, insulating properties of polymers, conducting
polymers, conducting mechanisms, polyacetylene, polyparaphenylene polypyrrole, organometallic
polymers, photo conducting polymers, polymers in non-linear optics, polymers with piezoelectric,
pyroelectric and ferromagnetic properties, photoresists for semi conductor fabrication, optical fibre
telecommunication cables.
Module 3
Ionic polymers, synthesis, physical properties and applications, ion exchange, hydrophilicity,
ionomers based on polyethylene, elastomeric ionomers, ionomers based on polystyrene, ionomers
based on PTFE, ionomers with polyaromatic backbones, polyelectrolytes for ion exchange,
polyelectrolytes based on carboxylates, polymers with integral ions, polyelectrolyte complexes,
inorganic ionic polymers.
Module 4
Liquid crystalline polymers, structure, types, applications, inorganic polymers, polymers containing
phosphorous, nitrogen and boron, organometallic polymers, polysiloxanes and metal chelate
polymers.
References
1. H.F.Mark, (Ed), Encyclopedia of polymer Science & Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, New York,
1989.
2. Matrin.T.Goosey, Plastics for Electronics, Elsevier, Applied Science, 1985.
3. R.W. Dyson, Specialty Polymers, Chapman & Hall, 2nd edition, 1998.
4. Manas Chanda, Salil.K.Roy, Plastics Technology Hand book, 2nd edition, Marcel
5. Dekker, New York, 1993
6. C.Ku & R.Liepins, Electrical Properties of Polymers, Hanser Publications, Munich 1987.
7. F. Bueche, Physical properties of polymers, Wiley, New York, 1962.
8. J.Mort & G.Pfister, eds. Electronic properties of polymers, Wiley Interscience,
417
CHEMICAL TECHNOLOGY LAB
P807 0+3
Determination of the following parameters
1. Acid value of oils

2. Iodine value of oils
3. Saponification value of oils
4. Sucrose content of sugar
5. Hardness of water
6. Dissolved oxygen in water
7. BOD and COD of water
8. Available chlorine content in bleaching powder
9. Preparation and analysis of soap
10. Flash point and fire point
PROJECT & SEMINAR

P 808 0+3
Each student has to undertake a short project under the supervision of a guide. A consolidated report
of the project work in the form of a dissertation has to be submitted after the completion of the work.
The assessment of the project work will be based on the day-to-day performance of the student,
knowledge, aptitude, sincerity, the quality & content of the project report and seminar & viva-voce.
VIVA VOCE
P 809
A viva-voce will be conducted as a part of the university examination to assess the student’s overall
ability and knowledge in the field of Polymer Engineering and allied subjects. The candidate has to
present the project report, seminar paper and educational tour report for this examination.
418
SYLLABUS
INFORMATION
TECHNOLOGY
ENGINEERING BRANCH
419
THIRD SEMESTER
420
RT301 3+1+0
Module 1
Mathematical Logic – Statements, connectives – Well formed formulas – Tautologies. Equivalence
of formulas - Duality law Tautological implications – Normal forms – the theory of inference for
the statement. Calculus – validity . Consistency, Theorem proving – the predicate calculus –
Inference Theory of the predicate calculus.
Module 2
Number Theory: Prime and relatively prime numbers – modular arithmetic – Fermat’s and Euler’s
theorems – testing for primability – Euclids algorithm – discrete logarithms.
Relations & Functions – Properties of binary relations – Equivalence relations and partitions –
Functions and pigeon hole principle.
Module 3
Algebraic systems – general properties – Lattices as a partially ordered set – some properties of
lattices – lattices as algebraic systems – sub lattices – direct product – homomorphism – some
special lattices.
Module 4
Discrete Numeric Functions & generating Functions, Recurrence relations – Manipulations of
Numeric functions – generating functions – Recurrence – relations – Linear recurrence relations with
constant coefficients – Homogenious solutions – Particular solutions – Total solutions – solutions by
the method of generating functions.
Module 5
Graph Theory: Basic concept of graphs, subgraphs, connected graphs, Paths, Cycles, Multigraph and
Weighted graph – Trees – spanning trees.
References
1. Elements of Discrete Mathematics - C.L.Lieu. McGraw Hill.

2. Discrete Mathematical Structures with Applications to Computer Science - J.P. Trembly, R.
Manohar. McGraw Hill.
3. Discrete Mathematics - Richard Johnsoubaugh (Pearson Education Asia)
4. Discrete Mathematical Structures - Bernard Kolman, Robert C. Bushy, Sharon Cutler Ross, Pearson
Education Asia.
5. A first look at Graph Theory - John Clark & Derek Allan Holton, Allied Publishers.
6. Cryptography and network security principles and practice - William Stallings.
ELECTRICAL CIRCUITS AND SYSTEMS

T 302 3+1+0
Module 1
421
Introduction: - The resistance, capacitance and inductance parameters. Active element conventions,
Dot convention for coupled circuits. Topological description of networks. The network equations-
Kirchoff’s laws – source transformations. Loop variable analysis. Duality State variable analysis.
Examples.
Module 2
First order differential equations – solutions. Time constants. The integrity factor – examples –
Initial conditions in elements Geometrical Interpretation of derivation. Evaluating initial conditions.
Initial State of a network.
Module 3
Second order equations – internal excitation. The Laplace Transformation – Basic theorems –
examples. Transform of signal waveforms – Shifted unit sep function – Ramp and Impulse function.
Waveform Synthesis – Initial and final value – Convolution as a summation
Module 4
Impedance function – Concept of Computer frequency. Transform Impedance and transform circuits,
series and parallel combinations of elements.
Theorem – Super position, reciprocity, Thevenins and Norton’s theorems – proof and examples.
Module 5
Network functions – Terminal pairs – one port and two port networks – Ladder networks – General
networks.
Poles and zeros. Pole – zero locations for transfer functions. Pole – zero plot – domain behavior,
stability. Two port parameters – two port variable – short circuit admittance parameters – open
circuit impedance parameters – transmission parameters – hybrid parameters – parallel connection of
two port networks.
Text Book
1. Network Analysis – M. E. Van Valkenburg – PHI
References
1. Introductory Circuit Theory – Errist A. Guillemin – John Wiley & Sons

2. Network Analysis and synthesis – Franklin F Kuo – John Wiley & Sons
3. Basic Network Theory – Paul M. Chirlian – Mc Graw Hill
4. Electric Circuit Analysis, 2nd Edition – S.N.Sivanadam, Vikas Publications
SOLID STATE ELECTRONICS

RT 303 2+1+0
Module 1
422
Transistor – Biasing – Stability – Thermal runaway. Transistor As an amplifier – RC coupled
amplifier, Frequency Response, Gain Bandwidth relation – Cascading of transistors – cascade
Darlington pair – emitter follower.
Module 2
FET, FET amplifier – MOSFET, depletion and enhancement type – source drain characteristics and
transfer characteristics.
Module 3
Oscillators – Concept of feed back – Transistorised phase shift oscillator – wein bridge Oscillator –
Hartley Oscillator – Colpits Oscillator (Operation and Expression for frequency)
Module 4
Clipping, Clamping, Integration, Differentiation – Astable, Bistable and Monostable Multivibrators
– Sweep generators, Simple Bootstrap sweep generators.
Module 5
Power supplies & Special semi conductor devices – Regulator power supplies – IC regulated Power
supplies, 7805, 7905, LM317 – LED, LCD, Photodiode, Photo transistor, opto coupler. Seven
segment display, SCR, UJT (basic concepts only), DIAC, TRIAC.
References
1. Integrated Electronics - Millman and Halkias, McGraw Hill.

2. Pulse Digital and Switching wave forms - Millman and Taub.
3. Electronics Devices & Circuits - Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Education.
PROBLEM SOLVING AND COMPUTER PROGRAMMING

RT 304 3+1+0
Module 1
Problem solving with digital Computer - Steps in Computer programming - Features of a good
program - Modular Programming - Structured - Object Oriented - Top down and bottom up
approaches - Algorithms - Flowchart - Pseudocode, examples
Module2
C fundamentals: - Identifiers, keywords, data types, operators, expressions, data Input and Output
statements, simple programming in C.
Module 3
Control statements & Functions: If - else, for, while, do - while, switch, break & continue
statements, nested loops. Functions - parameter passing - void functions Recursion – Macros.
Module4
Structured data types: Single dimensional arrays - multidimensional arrays, strings, structures &
unions - Program for bubble sort.
423
Module 5
Pointers & files - Declaration, passing pointers to a functions- Accessing array elements using
pointers - Operations on pointers - Opening & Closing a file - Creating & Processing a file,
Command line arguments.
Text
1. Programming with C - Byron S. Gottfried, Tata McGraw Hill
References
1. Computer Programming in C - Kerninghan & Ritchie, PHI

2. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C - Ashok N. Kamthan, Pearson Eduacation
3. Let us C - Yeaswanth Khanetkar, BPB
4. Programming in C - Stephen C. Kochan, CBS publishers
5. Using C in Program Design - Ronald Leach, Prism Books Pvt. Ltd, Bangalore
6. Mastering Turbo C - Bootle, BPB Publications
7. Programming and Problem Solving with PASCAL - Micheal Schneider, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
8. Pointers in C - Yeaswanth Khanetkar, PBP
9. C Programming - A Modern Approach - K.N. Iling W.W. Norton & Company
10. Newyork Structured and Object Oriented Problem Solving using C++ - Andrew C Staugaard Jr.,
PHI
HUMANITIES
RT 305 2+1+0
PART A: PRINCIPLES OF MANAGEMENT
Module 1
Scientific Management, Evolution of management theory, Contributions of Taylor, Gilbreth, Gantt,
Emerson, Definition and functions of management Authority, Responsibility, Delegation and Span
of control, Types of structures of Organisation – Types of Business firms, Job evaluation and merit
rating, Wages – Types of incentives.
Module 2
Procedure for ISO and ISI certification – Design, Development and implementation of re-
engineering - Inspection – SQC control charts – quality assurance – TQM – ZERO defects.
Module 3
The Indian financial system – Reserve bank of India, functions – commercial banking system,
profitability of public sector banks, development financial institutions – IDBI, ICICI, SIDBI, IRBI –
Investment institutions – UTI, Insurance companies – The stock market – functions – Recent trends.
Module 4
Indian Industries - Industrial pattern - structural transformation – industrial growth – inadequacies of
the programme of industrialization – large and small scale industries – industrial sickness and
Government policy – industrial labour – influence of trade unions.
Module 5
424
The tax frame work – Direct and indirect taxes – impact and incidence – progressive and regressive
– functions of the tax system – Black money – magnitude and consequences – Public debt – Debt
position of the Central and State Governments – Deficit financing – revenue deficit and fiscal deficit
– Problems associated with deficit financing.
References
1. Management - Stoner, Freeman and Gilbert.

2. Engineering Managemt - Mazda, Pearson Education.
3. Indian Economy - Ruddar Datt, S. Chand and Company Ltd.
4. A.N. Agarwal - Indian Economy Problems of Development and Planning, Wishwa Prakashan.
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS
T 306 3+1+0
Module 1
Review of number Systems – Binary, Octal, Hexadecimal – Conversion,
Binary codes – BCD, Self complementing, Excess – 3 and Gray code, Alphanumeric codes
Boolean Algebra – Postulates, Switching function, Sum of Product, Product of Sum, switching
circuits, simplification – rules, laws and theorems, Karnaugh map, Completely and incompletely
specified functions, Quine – Mc Clauskey method.
Logic gates, Realization using logic gates, Design with NAND and NOR gates.
Module 2
Combinational logic circuits – adder – half and full, subtractor – half and full, Serial & Parallel
adders, Carry save adder, Look ahead carry adder, BCD adder, Multiplexers, Encoders,
Demultiplexers, Decoders, Comparators, Implementation of logic functions using multiplexers and
decoders.
Module 3
Logic families – positive and negative logic, TTL NAND – analysis – characteristics, open collector
gate, tri-state gates, ECL & IIL logic (Brief explanation only), CMOS – Inverter, NAND, NOR,
Characteristics, properties, Comparison of logic families, Typical IC’s.
Module 4
Sequential logic Circuits – classification, flip flops – SR, JK, Master slave, D, T. applications, Truth
table and Excitation table, Conversion of one type of flip flop to another.
Memories – ROM- organization of a ROM, Programmable ROMs, EPROM, EEPROM, PLD –
PLA and PAL, RAM – basic structure, static and dynamic RAM.
Module 5
Shift registers – SISO, SIPO, PISO, PIPO, universal shift register, applications, Ring counter,
Johnson Counter.
Binary counters – Asynchronous and Synchronous – Design, decade, Up-Down counters, Typical
counter IC’s.
Text Book
1. Digital Electronics and Logic Design - B. Somanathan Nair - PHI 2002

2. Digital Fundamentals, 8th Edition - Floyd, Pearson Education.
425
References
1. Logic and Computer Design Fundamentals, 2nd Edn. - Morris Mano & Charles R. Kime, Pearson
Education.
2. Digital Integrated Electronics - Taub and Shilling, McGraw Hill.
3. Digital Logic – Applications and Design - John.M.Yarbrough- Vikas Thomson Learning
C PROGRAMMING LAB
T 307 0+0+4
1. Familiarization with computer system, Processor, Peripherals, Memory etc.

2. Familiarization of operating system-DOS, Windows etc. (use of files directories, internal commands,
external commands, compilers, file manager, program manager, control panel etc.)
3. Familiarization with word processing packages like MS Excel, MS Access, MS PowerPoint and MS
Word.
4. Programming experiments in C to cover control structures-functions-arrays-Structures-pointers and
files.
(Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT304 can be included.)

T308 0+0+4
1. Characteristics – Diode, Zener Diode, Transistor, FET, UJT, Determination of parameters.

2. Rectifiers with filters- Half Wave, Full wave& Bridge
3. Simple regulator circuits- series regulator.
4. Design of a single stage RC coupled amplifier. Determination of Bandwidth, Input & Output
Impedances.
5. Wave shaping. Design of clipping, clamping, RC differentiator and Integrator.
6. Design of Astable multivibrator for specified time period sharpening edges.
7. Simple sweep circuits.
8. RC Phase shift oscillator. Wein bridge oscillator.
426
FOURTH SEMESTER
427
CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0
Module 1
Ordinary Differential Equations: Linear Differential equations with constant coefficients - Finding
P.I. by the method of variation of parameters –Cauchy’s equations- Linear Simultaneous eqns-
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations - formation by eliminating arbitary constants and arbitary Functions -
equation.
Module 3
Module 4
Module 5
difference proportion, single mean and difference of mean (proof of theorems not expected)
References

2. Engineering Mathematics Vol.II -3rd year Part A & B - M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing
Company
3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations - Ian N.Sneddon.,McGrawhill International Edn.
Asia / PHI
6. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd. Probability and statistical
inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia
DATA STRUCTURES & ALGORITHMS
T402 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction, Data structures, Algorithms-Analysis of algorithms, Time & Space Complexity, Big O
notation, Complexity calculation of simple algorithms.
428
Basic data structures-Arrays, Records, Sparse matrix representation & addition using arrays,
Polynomial representation & addition using arrays, Stacks & Queues-Sequential Implementation,
Circular queue, Priority queue & D queue.
Module 2
Linked lists- Linked stacks and queues, Doubly linked list, applications, Circular linked list,
Polynomial representation using linked list
Module 3
Trees-basic terminology-binary tree-binary search tree-insertion, search, traversal, deletion, need for
balancing, Balanced trees-AVL Trees & B Trees (basic idea only)
Module 4
Graphs –representation, traversal, applications
Hashing- Hashing functions, Collision resolution
Dynamic memory management, Storage allocation and compaction.
Module 5
Selection sort, insertion sort, bubble sort, radix sort, tree sort, heap sort, quick sort & merge sort
Sequential search, binary search, Interpolation search
References
1. Introduction to Data Structures with Applications - Tremblay & Sorenson, TMH

2. Data Structures in C & C++ - Tanenbaum, et., al., Pearson Education
3. Classic Data Structures – Samanta, PHI
4. Data Structures and Algorithms – O.G.Kakde and U.A.Deshpande-ISTE Learning material
5. Data Structures and Algorithms in C++- Adam Drozdek, Vikas Thomson Learning.
6. Data Structures and Program design in C - Robert L Kruse, et.al., Pearson Education
7. Introduction to Algorithms – Thomas.H.Coreman-PHI
8. Fundementals of Data Structures in C++ - Horrowits and Sahni- Galgotia
9. Algorithms + Datastructures = Program- NiklausWirth, PHI
LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUITS & APPLICATIONS

T 403 2+1+0
Module 1
Operational Amplifiers – Block diagram, Equivalent circuit, Ideal Op Amp- characteristics, Non-
ideal Op Amp - finite open loop gain, offset voltage, bias current, drift, frequency response, band
width, CMRR, circuit stability and slew rate.
Inverting, Non Inverting Amplifier, Integrator. Differential Amplifiers, Instrumentation Amplifiers,
V to I and I to V converters, Precision rectifiers.
Module 2
429
Active Filters: Butterworth and Chebyshev filters- I & II order filters – low pass, high pass, band
pass, band reject, filter design.
Comparators, Oscillators, Multivibrators, Waveform generators.
Module 3
D/A converters- Weighted resistor, R-2R networks, Hybrid converters .
A/D converters- Successive approximation, Integrating ADC, Dual slope, Flash converters (parallel),
Analog multipliers.
Module 4
Voltage regulators- voltage references, block diagram of linear voltage regulators, voltage regulator
ICs and their design, three terminal voltage regulators, negative voltage regulators, dual tracking and
switching regulators.
Module 5
PLL: Operating principle, lock range and capture range, applications of PLL, building blocks of PLL,
LM 565 and its applications. Signal generators- monolithic waveform generators. IC power
amplifiers.
References
1. OP-AMPS and Linear Integrated Circuits, 4rd Edn. - Ramakant A.Gayakwad, Pearson Education
2. OP-AMPS and Linear Integrated Circuits, 6th Edn. - Coughlin and Driscoll, Pearson Education.
3. Microelectronics Circuits - Sedra & Smith, Oxford University Press
4. Integrated Circuits - K.R.Botkar, Khanna Publishers.
5. Microelectronics - Jacob Millman & Arvin Grabel, McGraw Hill.
6. Electronics Circuits - Donald L.Schlling and Charles Belove
COMPUTER SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

T 404 3+1+0
Organization & Architecture, Functional Units of a computer, CPU-Memory connection, Review of
basic operational concepts like CPU registers, Instruction formats, Addressing modes, Instruction
cycle, Interrupt, Operating system, Interconnection structures, Layered view of a computer system.
Internal architecture of a typical 8-bit Microprocessor (Intel 8085), Signals, Registers, Machine
cycles
Module 2 Instruction set

Instruction set of 8085, Addressing modes-Register, Direct, Immediate, Indirect and Implicit
addressing, examples
430
Instruction types – Arithmetic, Logic, Data transfer, Branch, Stack, I/O and Machine control
Instructions, examples (Assembly language programming not intended)
Module 3 CPU organization.

Processor Organization-Single bus and 2 bus organization, execution of a complete instruction,
Hardwired and micro programmed control units, Sequencing, Horizonal & vertical
microprogramming.
Arithmetic-Review of addition & subtraction techniques, Carry look ahead & Carry save addition,
Multiplication-array multiplier, Booth’s algorithm, Division-Restoring & non- Restoring division
Module 4 Memory Organization.

Memory Hierarchy, characteristics, Memory system considerations, High speed techniques-Cache
memory, Associative memory, Memory interleaving, Virtual memory-paging.
Module 5 I/O Organization.

I/O Module- Functions & Structure, I/O Processor, I/O techniques-Programmed I/O, Interrupt driven
I/O, DMA
Standard I/O interfaces: RS 232 C, GPIB, SCSI
References
1. Microprocessor Architecture, Programming & Applications – Ramesh S Gaonkar, Penram

International
2. Computer Organization & Architecture -William Stallings, Pearson Education.
3. Computer Organization-Hamacher, Vranesic & Zaky, Mc Graw Hill
4. Computer System Architecture-Morris Mano, Pearson Education.
5. Computer Organization & Design-Pal Chaudhari, PHI
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

LTA 405 2+1+0
Module 1
Dynamic Representation of Systems - Systems Attributes- Causality linearity- Stability- time-
functions).. Linear Time-Invariant Systems: Differential equation representation- convolution
Module 2
Module 3
431
Fourier Transform (including DFT) and properties. Frequency response of discrete time LTI
systems.
Module 4
LTI system (stability etc.) Significance of poles & zeros- Z-Transform - Z-Transform and its
inverse: Definition- existence- Region of convergence and properties- Application of Z-Transform
for the analysis of Discrete time LTI systems- Significance of poles and zeros.
Module 5
systems.
References

OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++

T 406 3+1+0
Module 1
Need for OOP- Characteristics of Object Oriented Language- Basic concepts and terminology-C++
and object oriented programming
C++ Programming basics, loops and decisions
Module 2
Structures- Structure specifier, accessing, nested structures, structures and classes.
Functions- Declarations, definition, argument passing.
Variables and storage classes
Module 3
Objects and classes –creation and usage, member functions, constructors and destructors Arrays-
Definition, accessing, Arrays as class members, arrays of objects
Module 4
432
Operator overloading, Function overloading, Inheritance, Classification of inheritance, virtual
functions, Polymorphism-Run time and compile time polymorphism.
Module 5
Advanced OO concepts- iterations and sequences, Virtual destructors, Virtual base classes,
Templates, exceptions and exceptions handling, standard library design.
References
1. Object Oriented Programming in C++: Robert Lafore, Galgotia Publications

2. C++ Programming language: Bjarne Stroustrup, Pearson Education
3. Object Oriented Programming in C++: Nabajyoti Barkakati, PHI
4. C++ Primer: Lippman and Zajoie, Pearson Education
5. C++ for You++: Maria Litwin & Garry Litwin, Vikas Publishing
6. Object Oriented Programming Using C++: Ira Pohl, Pearson Education.
7. Standard C++ with Object Oriented Programming: Paul.S.Wang, Vikas Publishing.
C++ & DATA STRUCTURES LAB

T 407 0+0+4
Using C++ Modern Compiler
1. Desk Calculator example.

2. Name spaces and Exceptions
3. Programming with Multiple files
4. Using classes, derived classes
5. Templates
6. Standard Library, standard containers, algorithms, Strings, Streams
7. Using a Debugger
(Any experiment based on the syllabus of T 402 can be substituted.)
Simple experiments based on the syllabus of T 402 - Arrays, Stack, Queues, Trees, Simple sorting and
searching techniques.
INTEGRATED CIRCUITS LAB
433
T 408 0+0+4
1. Characteristics of TTL and CMOS gates.

2. Realization of logic circuits using TTL and CMOS NAND/NOR gates.
3. Arithmetic Circuits- Half adder, Full adder, 4-bit adder/subtractor.
4. Realization of RS, T, D, JK and Master-Slave Flip-flops using gates and study of flip-flop ICs.
5. Shift Registers, Ring Counter and Johnson Counter.
6. Counters- synchronous and asynchronous, using flip-flops.
7. Operational amplifiers- Measurement of parameters.
8. Inverting and non-inverting amplifiers, Summing amplifiers.
9. Weinbridge Oscillator.
10. Triangular and square wave generators using OP-AMPs.
11. IC Voltage regulator, fold back protection.
12. IC power amplifier
13. VCO, PLL
14. Filters- LP, HP and BP, Notch Filter.
434
FIFTH SEMESTER
RT 501 3+1+0
Module 1 QUEUEING THEORY

General Concepts - Arrival pattern - service pattern - Queue disciplines - The Markovian model
M/M/1/$, M/M/1/N - steady state solutions – Little’s formula.
Module 2 NUMERICAL METHODS

Introduction - solution of algebraic and transcendental equations - Bisection method - Method of
false position - Newton’s method - Approximate solution of equations – Horner’s method solutions
of linear simultaneous equations - Iterative methods of solution-Jacobi’s method - Gauss Seidal
method.
Module 3 FINITE DIFFERENCES

Meaning of operators – Δ, , μ ,δ ,E - interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward formula -
Langrange’s and Newton’s divided difference interpolation formula - numerical differenciation -
first and second order derivatives using forward and backward formula - numerical integration -
trapizoidal rule - Simpson’s 1/3 and 3/8 rules.
Module 4 LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEM
435
Graphical solution of LPP- general problem - solution of LPP using simplex method - Big M
method – duality in LPP.
Module 5 TRANSPORTATION AND ASSIGNMENT PROBLEM

Balanced transportation problem - initial basic feasible solution -Vogel’s approximation method -
optimum solution by Modi method - Assignment problem - Hungerian techniques
References
1. Operations Research - P.K. Gupta & D.S. Hira, S.Chand & Co. Ltd
2. Advanced Engg Mathematics - Ervin Kreyszig, Wiley Eastern Ltd.
3. Higher Engg. Mathematics - Dr. B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers.
4. Operations research Schaum’s Outline Series - Richard Bronson,
5. Operations research - Panneer Selvam, PHI
6. Numerical Methods in Science & Engg. National Publishing Co.- M.K. Venkataraman,
OPERATING SYSTEM CONCEPTS

T 502 4+1+0
O.S. Objectives and functions, evolution of O.S, Basic concepts and terminology, O.S. hierarchy,
Different types of O.S – multiprogramming, time sharing, real time, microkernel, multithreading,
multiprocessing, distributed O.S etc. (basic idea only), Windows – 2000 overview, UNIX overview.
Module 2 Process Management

Process – states, model, description, process hierarchy, scheduling, scheduler organization,
scheduling strategies, Process synchronization – interacting processes, co-ordinating processes,
critical section, deadlock, semaphores.
Processes and Threads, Multithreading, Multiprocessing, Brief study of process management in
UNIX and Win 2000.

Memory management requirements, Techniques, Partitioning, Paging, Segmentation, Virtual
memory – hardware and software support, Brief study of memory management in UNIX, Linux,
Win 2000 and Solaris.
Module 4 I/O and File Management

Design issues, Model of I/O organization, Disk scheduling policies and algorithms – RSS, FIFO,
PRI, LIFO, SSTF, SCAN, C-SCAN, FSCAN etc. , Disk cache, File management systems, file
436
system architecture, file organization and access, Directory structure, File allocation, sharing and
security, Brief study of file management in Unix and Win 2000.
Module5 Distributed Systems

Advantages, Disadvantages, comparison of Network and distributed O.S, Client-Server architecture,
Distributed message passing – RPC, Distributed Process management, Distributed memory
management. Clustering – cluster computer architecture, win 2000 cluster server.
Text Books
1. Operating systems, 4th Edition - William Stallings, Pearson Edn.

2. Operating system Concepts - Silber Schatz, John Wiley.
References
1. Operating Systems - Nutt, Pearson Edn.

2. Modern Operating System - Tannenbaum, PHI
3. Understanding Operating System - Flynn, McHoes, Thomson Publications.
4. System Programming and Operating System - Dhamdhere, TMH.
5. Guide to Operating Systems- Michel Parmer & Michel Walters, Vikas Thomson Learning
DATA BASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS

RT503 3+1+0
Module 1
Basic Concepts - Purpose of database systems-Components of DBMS – DBMS Architecture and
Data Independence- Data modeling - Entity Relationship Model,
Relational – Network- Hierarchical and object oriented models-Data Modeling using the Entity
Relationship Model.
Module2
Structure of relational databases – relational databases – relational algebra- tuple relational calculus.
Data definition with SQL, insert, delete and update statements in SQL – views – data manipulation
with SQL
Module 3
Introduction to Transaction Processing- Transaction and System Concepts- Desirable properties of
Transactions- Schedules and Recoverability- Serializability of Schedules-Query processing and
Optimization- Concurrency Control- -assertions – triggers.
Oracle case study: The basic structure of the oracle system – database structure and its manipulation
in oracle- storage organization in oracle.- Programming in PL/SQL- Cursor in PL/SQL
Module 4
Database Design– Design guidelines– Relational database design – Integrity Constraints – Domain
Constraints- Referential integrity – Functional Dependency- Normalization using Functional
Dependencies, Normal forms based on primary keys- general definitions of Second and Third
Normal Forms. Boyce Codd Normal Form– Multivalued Dependencies and Forth Normal Form –
Join Dependencies and Fifth Normal Form – Pitfalls in Relational Database Design.
437
Module 5
Distributed databases: Distributed Database Concepts- Data Fragmentation, Replication and
Allocation Techniques- Different Types- Query Processing – semijoin -Concurrency Control and
Recovery.
Text Book
1. Fundamentals of Database System - Elmasri and Navathe (3rd Edition),Pearson Education Asia
References
1. Database System Concepts - Henry F Korth, Abraham Silbershatz , Mc Graw Hill 2nd edition.
2. An Introduction to Database Systems - C.J.Date (7th Edition) Pearson Education Asia
3. Database Principles, Programming and Performance – Patrick O’Neil, Elizabeth O’Neil
4. An Introduction to Database Systems - Bibin C. Desai
MICROPROCESSORS
T 504 3+1+0
Module 1
Evolution of 8086 family of microprocessors – 8088 to Itanium, Internal architecture of 8086, block
diagram, Registers, flags, Programming model, 8086 and 8088, 8086 memory organization,
segmented memory, Physical address calculation, Memory Addressing, Addressing modes.
Module 2
Instruction set, Classification of instructions – Data transfer, Arithmetic and Logic instructions,
Program control instructions, Simple programs in 8086 Assembly language.
IBM PC Assembly Language Programming, Program Development Tools – DEBUG, MASM,
TASM etc.
Module 3
8086 hardware design – bus buffering and latching, bus timing – read and write, timing diagram,
ready and wait states, Minimum mode and Maximum mode, 8086 Memory interface, address
decoding.
Module 4
Comparative study of the features of the 8086, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium Pro, Pentium
II, Pentium III and Pentium IV Processors.
Introduction to Micro controllers – architecture, applications.
Module 5
Study of Peripheral chips
8255 – Programmable peripheral interface
8251 - USART
8259 – Programmable interrupt controller.
8279 – Programmable keyboard and display interface.
8237 – DMA controller.
8254 – Programmable Interval Timer
Brief study of interfacing of Stepper motor, keyboard, 7-segment display and ADC with the
Microprocessors.
438
References
1. The Intel Microprocessors 8086/8088, 80186/80188, 80286, 80386, 80486, Pentium, Pentium II,
Pentium III and Pentium IV processors. Architecture, Programming and Interfacing, 6th Edn – Barry
B Bray, Pearson Education Asia
2. The 80X86 family, 3rd Edn - John Uffenbeck, Pearson Education.
3. Micro computer Systems - The 8086/8088 Family, Architecture, Programming & Design- Liu &
Gibson – PHI.
4. IBM PC Assembly Language Programming- Peter Abel, PHI
5. Microprocessors and Interfacing - Douglas V. Hall, TMH
6. Advanced Microprocessors & Peripherals- Roy & Bhurchandi, TMH
LANGUAGE PROCESSORS
RT 505 3+1+0
Module 1 Assembler
Overview of the assembly process- Design of two pass assembler- Single pass assembler- Macros –
Macro definition and usage- schematics for Macro expansion – Design of a Macro pre-processor -
Macro Assembler.
Module 2 Introduction to Compilers

Compilers and Translators – Structure of a compiler – lexical analysis – syntax analysis – context
free grammars – basic parsing techniques- top down and bottom up parsing (brief idea only)-
Recursive Decent parser – Shift reduce parser.
Module 3 Storage allocation

Data descriptors- Static and Dynamic storage allocation – Storage allocation and access in block
structured programming languages – Array allocation and access- Compilation of expressions –
Handling operator priorities – Intermediate code forms for expressions –code generator.
Module 4 Compilation of Control Structures

Control transfer- Conditional and Iterative constructs- Procedure calls – Code optimization –
Optimization transformations – Local optimization and global optimization – Compiler writing tools
– Incremental Compilers
Module 5 Loaders and Linkers

Loading – Program relocatability – linking – various loading schemes – linkage editing – Design of
linkage editor – dynamic loading – overlays – dynamic linking.
Text Books
1. System Programming and Operating Systems – Dhamdhere Mc Graw Hill

2. Principles of Compiler Design - Aho A.V., Ullman Narosa Publications.
References
1. Systems programming - Donovan, Mc. Graw Hill.

2. System Software – An Introduction to Systems Programming - Leland L. Beck, Addison Wesley.
439
3. Compilers – Principles Techniques And Tools – Aho, Sethi, Ullman, Pearson Education Asia
DATA COMMUNICATION
RT 506 2+1+0
Module 1
Communication concepts – Analog modulation – Various schemes – AM, PM, FM –Sampling
theorem - Analog pulse modulation – PAM, PWM, PPM – Generation of various modulated waves
(Block diagram only) –Digital Pulse modulation (PCM).
Module 2
Multiplexing - Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) – Time Division Multiplexing (TDM),
Synchronous Time Division Multiplexing –Statistical time Division multiplexing – Key Techniques
- ASK, FSK, PSK, DPSK - Channel capacity - Shannon`s Theorem.
Module 3
Digital data transmission – Serial, Parallel, Synchronous, Asynchronous and Isochronous
transmission. Transmission mode- Simplex - Half duplex – Full duplex, Noise- different types of
noise – Basic Principles of Switching (circuit, packet, message switching)
Module 4
Error detection and Correcting codes: Hamming code – Block codes and convolution codes – ARQ
techniques – Transmission codes – Baudot – EBCDIC and ASCII codes – Barcodes.
Module 5
Terminal handling – Point to point, Multidrop lines. Components of computer communication –
Concentrators - Front end Processor – Transmission media – Guided media – Twisted pair cable,
coaxial cable, fibre optic cable. GSM service and GSM system architecture.
References
1. Electronic communication system - Kennedy, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Principles of Communication System - Taub & Schilling Mc Graw Hill.
3. Introduction to Data Communications & Networking – Behurouz & Forozan Mc Graw Hill.
4. Data Communication, Computer Networks & Open Systems - Fred Halsall Pearson Education Asia
5. Principles & Application of GSM - Vijay K. Garg Pearson Education Asia
6. Modern Digital & Analog Communication Systems – B.P Lathi Prism Books Pvt. Ltd.
7. Computer Networks - A.S. Tanenbaum, PHI
8. Data and Computer Communication - William Stallings, Pearson Education Asia
9. Communication Engineering - A. Kumar, Umesh Publications
440
DBMS LAB
T 507 0+0+3
Experiments for performing the following:
1. Creation, Updating, Deletion of tables, indexes, views, reports, Queries, Relational Operations,
Trigger
2. Importing and Exporting Data.
3. Use of Link Libraries.
4. Natural Language Support
5. Administration.
6. ODBC Interface
7. Exposure to Data Base management packages (Preferably on 4 GLs like
ORACLE/INTEGRA/SYBASE, Foxpro or the latest packages)
8. Exercise in Pay Roll, Inventory Management, Library Management using the packages.
(Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT 503 can be substituted)
MICROPROCESSOR LAB
T 508 0+0+3
1. Study of 8 bit /16 bit microprocessor kit.

2. Assembly language programming with 8 bit /16 bit Microprocessor kit.
3. Interfacing experiments such as: -
a. Stepper motor control.
b. DAC/ADC interface.
c. Data Acquisition Board.
d. Keyboard interfacing.
e. Video display board.
f. LED moving graphic display board.
g. Serial communication.
4. IBM PC Assembly language programming using MASM/TASM.
441
SIXTH SEMESTER
442
PROJECT MANAGEMENT
T601 3+1+0
Module 1 PROJECT PLANNING

Overview – Capital expenditure - Phases of capital budgeting – Project development cycle – 7-s of
project management – Requirements of a project manager – Forms of project organization.
Module 2 PROJECT ANALYSIS

Market Analysis – Technical Analysis - Financial Analysis – Risk Analysis – Social cost Benefit
Analysis.
Module 3 CONTROL OF PROJECT

Control Systems – Control of major constraints – Project management software & information
systems.
REVIEW: Performance of Evaluation – Abaudonment Analysis – Behavioral issues in Project
Management
Module 4 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT

Quality systems – ISO 9000 series – ISI – Benchmarking – Quality Function development (QFD) –
Total Productive Maintenance (TPM) – ISO 14000.
Module 5 CONCEPTS IN SAMPLING

Sampling designs and schemes – Errors in sampling – Simple random sample – stratified random
sample – Cluster sample.
Sample size destination – Estimating population mean – Estimating population proportion.
References
1. Projects preparation, Apprisal, Budgeting & Implementation – Prasanna Chandra – Tata McGraw
Hill
2. PROJECTS – Planning, Analysis, Selection, Implementation & Review - Prasanna Chandra – Tata
McGraw Hill
3. Project Management - Harvey Maylor - Pearson Education
4. Total Quality Management – Dale H. Besterfield – Pearson Education
5. Quality control and Improvement – Amitava Mitra – Pearson Education
6. Quality assurance and TQM – Jain & Chitale – Khanna Publishers
SOFTWARE ENGINEERING
RT 602 2+1+ 0
443
Module 1 Introduction to Software engineering
Introduction – Software and software Engg.- Phases in software development-Software development
process models-Role of Management in software development –Role of Matrics and measurement
–Software requirement specification(SRS) - Problem Analysis - validation .
Module 2 Project Planning

Cost Estimation – Uncertainties – models – COCOMO model – Project scheduling – average
duration estimation – Project scheduling and milestones – staffing and personal plan – Rayleigh
curve – personnel plan – team structure – software configuration – management plans – quality
assurance plans – verification and validation – inspections and reviews - project monitoring plans -
time sheets – reviews – cost schedule – milestone graph – risk management.
Module 3 System Design

Design Principles – Problem partitioning and hierarchy – abstraction – modularity – top down and
bottom_up – strategies – module level concepts - coupling - cohesion – structured design
methodology - verification - matrics.
Module 4 Coding
Top-down and Bottom-up - Structured Programming - Information Hiding - Programming style -
Internal Documentation – Verification - Code Reading - Static Analysis - Symbolic execution -
Proving Correctness - Code inspections – Unit testing.
Module 5 Testing
Testing fundamentals - Functional and Structured Testing - Testing Process - Comparison of
Verification and Validation Techniques - Reliability assessment - Programmer Productivity - Error
removal efficiency.
Text Book
1. An integrated approach to Software Engineering - Pankaj Jalote, Narosa Publication
References
1. Software Engineering - Roger S. Pressman, Tata McGraw Hill

2. Software Engineering - Ian Sommervilla, Pearson Education
3. Software Engineering Theory and Practice- Shari Lawrence, Pearson Education Asia
4. Fundamentals of Software Engineering –Rajib Mall, PHI
5. Fundamentals of Software Engineering – Carlo Ghezzi, Mehdi Jazayeri, PHI

LTA 603 3+1+0
Module1
Review of signals and systems. Introduction - advantages and limitations of Digital Signal
444
Module 2
Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters: Linear phase FIR filters- Frequency response of linear phase
FIR filters - Location of the zeros of linear phase FIR filters. Realization of FIR- cascade - lattice
design-Fourier Series method- using windows-rectangular- triangular or barlett windows- hanning-
hamming- Blackman- Kaiser windows.
Module 3
Module 4
Module 5
general study.
References
1.Digital signal processing: Ifechor- Pearson edn.

2.Desecrate time signal processing Oppenhiem- Pearson edn.
3.Digital signal processing: Oppenhiem and Sheffer- PHI
4.Introduction to Digital signal processing: Johny R Johnson
5.Digital signal processing: Proakis and Manolakis.
6.Digital signal processing: P Ramesh Babu- Scitech Pub.
COMPUTER NETWORKS
RT 604 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: - ISO-OSI Reference Model – TCP/IP Reference Model – Comparison Network
hardware-Repeaters, Routers, Bridges, Gateways, Hub, Cable Modem.
Physical Layer: - Transmission Media– ISDN system Architecture – Communication Satellites –
geostationary satellites - Medium Earth Orbit Satellites- Low earth orbit satellites– Satellite v/s
Fiber
Module 2
445
Data Link Layer: - Design issues-Error Detection and correction – Elementary Data link protocols-
Sliding window protocols. .
LAN Protocols: - Static & Dynamic channel allocation in LAN’s and WAN’s, Multiple access
protocols – ALOHA – Pure ALOHA – Slotted ALOHA – Carrier Sense Multiple Access protocols –
persistent and non-persistent CSMA – CSMA with collision detection – IEEE 802.3 standards for
LAN
Module 3
Network layer: -Virtual Circuits, Datagrams, Routing Algorithm – Optimality principle - Flooding -
Flow Based Routing - Link state routing – Distance vector routing – Multicasting – Link state
multicasting – Distance vector multicasting - Congestion Control Algorithms – General principles –
Packet discarding – Choke packets - Congestion prevention policies – Traffic shaping – Leaky
bucket algorithm – Flow specifications – jitter control
Module 4
Transport Layer: - Transport Service - Elements of transport protocols – Internet Transfer Protocols
UDP and TCP – ATM – Principle characteristics.
Module 5
Application Layer: -Domain name system – DNS name space – Resource records – Name servers –
operation of DNS - Electronic Mail – MIME
Mobile networks: - Mobile telephone systems, Bluetooth - Components – Error correction –
Network topology – Piconet and scatternet – L2CAP layers – Communication in Bluetooth networks
References
1. Computer Networks (Fourth Edition): Andrew S.Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia/ PHI
2. An Introduction to computer networking: Kenneth C. Mansfield Jr., James L. Antonakos, Prentice-
Hall India
3. Communication Networks: Leon, Garcia, Widjaja Tata McGraw Hill.
4. Computer Networks (Second Edition): Larry L Peterson & Bruce S Davie, (Harcourt India)
5. Computer Networking: James F Kurose & Keith W Ross, Pearson Education
6. Introduction to Data Communications and Networking: Behrouz, Forouzan, McGraw Hill
NETWORK COMPUTING
RT 605 3+1+0
Module 1
HTML Documents
Basic Tags for Font & Paragraph Formatting Lists, Tables, Frames, image Maps
Cascading Style Sheets
Style Element, Inline style sheets, Embedded style sheets, External Style sheets, CLASS Attribute,
Absolute and relative positioning of elements, DIV & SPAN Tags.
Module 2
Dynamic HTML Pages
Client side scripting - Java Script – variables, Arithmetic operations – message boxes, Arrays,
control statements, functions, event handling, document object model.
Dynamic updating of pages with JAVA Script.
Embedding ActiveX controls - using the structured graphics – ActiveX Control.
446
Module 3
Java programming – Features of Java, Creating & using classes in Java – Static classes –
Inheritance – Final methods, variables and classes – Interfaces - Nested classes – Inner classes –
Anonymous Inner classes – Exception handling – Creating & using exceptions, Multithreaded
programs and thread synchronization, creating and using packages. Creating GUI with AWT and
Swing – -JDK1.1 event model
Module 4
Network Programming with Java - Features of Java – Applets & Application – Life cycle of
applets - Security features for applets - Inter applet communication – Threads & Thread
synchronization – TCP/IP Programming with Java – Iterative & Concurrent servers. Datagrams, IP
multicasting, RMI (Structure and Working of a simple RMI Program only)
Module 5
HTTP Protocol working – HTTP methods, GET, PUT, DELETE, POST, HEAD
Server side scripting – HTML Forms & CGI – GET & POST, Basic working of a CGI supported
web server – Simple CGI program in C to validate user name & Password.
Email: Working of SMTP and POP protocols (Overview only).
Text Books
Module 1,2,5
1. Internet and World Wide Web – How to program - Deitel, Deitel & Nieto, Pearson Education Asia
2. HTML, DHTML, Java Script, Perl, CGI - Evan Bayross, BPB
Module 3,4,5
1. Java 2 Complete reference - Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill
Asia
3. Using Java 2 Platform - Joseph Weber, PHI
4. Computer Networks - Tenanbaum, PHI/ Pearson Education Asia
References
1. Unix Network Programming - Stevens W Richard, PHI

2. TCP/IP Protocol suite, 2/e - Behrouz A. Forouzan, TMH
PERSONAL COMPUTER HARDWARE

T 606 4+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to PC
Hardware components – study of motherboards –Different types of ports, slots and connectors-Add-
on cards-Power supply– SMPS- function & operations.
Module 2 Storage Devices

Floppy – Floppy Disk Controller - Disk Physical specification & operations – Disk magnetic
properties – Cylinders – Clusters – Hard disks – Hard disk drive operation – Magnetic data storage -
447
Sectors – Disk formatting – partitioning - Hard disk features – Hard disk data transfer modes –
Programmed I/O – Direct memory access – Ultra DMA – Data addressing – Standard CHS
addressing – Extended CHS addressing – Logical Block Addressing.
Module 3 Optical Storage

CD ROM, CD Technology, Sector layout, CD-R, CD-RW, CDROM, drive specifications- data
transfer rate – Access time – Constant linear velocity – constant angular velocity - Buffers –
Interface – Magneto optical drives – WORM devices –DVD- RAID – Holographic storage.
Module 4 Memory Management in PC

Parity – ECC – Static & Dynamic RAM – Memory Addressing – Segmented addressing - 64 KB
Limits – 640 KB barrier – Logical, segmented, virtual, linear and physical memory addresses –
Extended and Expanded memory – Cache memory – Video memory – HMA - Flat memory model –
Advanced memory technologies.
Module 5 Bus Structures

ISA, PCI, PCMCIA, AGP, USB, Hard Disk Interfaces – IDE, EIDE, ATA – Communication ports –
Serial – Parallel port – Keyboard / Mouse Interface connectors.
References
1. PC Hardware Complete Reference - Craig Zacker & John Rourke, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Inside the PC (8th Edition) - Peter Norton, Techmedia Publications
3. The Indispensable PC Hardware Book - Messmer, Pearson Education
4. Troubleshooting and Repairing Your PC - Corey Candler, Wiley
5. Upgrading and repairing PC’s (4th edition) - Scott Mueller, Pearson Education
6. IBM PC Assembly Language Programming - Abel, PHI
7. PC Upgrading Maintenance & Trouble shooting guide - Dr. S. K. Chauhan, Kataria
SYSTEMS PROGRAMMING LAB

T607 0+0+3
1. Symbol table construction

2. Single pass and two pass assembler.
3. Macro processor module binder (with limited Instruction set)
4. Lexical analyzer.
5. Bottom Up and Top Down Parser.
6. Code generation.
7. Generation of code for linkers & loaders.
8. Study on UNIX: UNIX Shell Programming, Basic exercises in Processor Management –
concurrent processing – memory management – implementation of shared memory and
semaphores for process synchronization – device management – dead lock handling,
implementation of simple protocols
(Any experiment according to the syllabus of T 502 and RT 505 can be substituted.)
448
MINI PROJECT
T608 0+0+3
The aim of the mini project is to prepare the students for the final year project. The topic for the mini project
should be simple as compared to the main project, but should cover all the aspects of a complete project.
449
SEVENTH SEMESTER
450
OBJECT ORIENTED MODELING AND DESIGN
RT 701 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: object oriented development-modeling concepts – object oriented methodology –
models – object oriented themes-Object Modeling– links and associations – advanced links and
association concepts – generalization and inheritance - grouping constructs – a sample object model-
Advanced Object Modeling: aggregation – abstract classes – generalization as extension and
restriction – multiple inheritance – metadata – candidate keys – constraints
Module 2
Dynamic modeling: Events and states – Operations – Nested state diagrams – Concurrency –
Advanced dynamic modeling concepts – A sample dynamic model – Relationship of Object and
Dynamic models.
Functional modeling: Functional models – Data Flow Diagrams - Specifying operations –
Constraints – A sample functional model – Relation of functional to Object and Dynamic models.
Module 3
Analysis: Analysis in object modeling, dynamic modeling and functional modeling, Adding
operations- Iterating the analysis
System Design: Breaking system into subsystems - Identifying concurrency-allocating subsystems
to processors and tasks, managing of data stores. Handling of global resources- handling boundary
conditions-Common Architectural Frameworks
Module 4
Object Design: Overview of Object design – Combining the three models – Designing algorithms –
Design optimization – Implementation of control – Adjustment of inheritance - Design of
association – Object representation – Physical packaging – Documenting design decisions-
Comparison of methodologies
Module 5
Other Models: Booch’s Methodology- Notations, models, concepts. Jacobson Methodology-
architecture, actors and use-cases, requirement model, Analysis Model, Design model,
Implementation model and Test Model-Unified Modeling Language (UML).
Text Books
1. Object Oriented Modeling and Design -JamesRumbaugh, Prentice Hall India

2. Object Oriented Analysis and Design with Applications - Grady Booch, Pearson Education Asia
References
1. Object Oriented Software Engineering - Ivan Jacobson, Pearson Education Asia

2. Object Oriented Software Engineering - Berno Bruegge, Allen H. Dutoit, Pearson Education Asia
3. Object Oriented Analysis and Design using UML - H. Srimathi, H. Sriram, A. Krishnamoorthy
4. Succeeding with the Booch OMT Methods -A practical approach - Lockheed Martin, Addison
Wesley
5. UML and C++ practical guide to Object Oriented development - Richard C.Lee & William, Prentice
Hall India.
451
COMPUTER GRAPHICS
RT 702 3+1+0
Module1
Introduction to Computer Graphics: Basic concepts in Computer Graphics – Applications of
Computer Graphics, Interactive Graphics system – Raster scan and Random scan systems –
Generating a raster image, Application of raster scan graphics. Video Display Devices, Display
processors – Display files – graphical input & output devices.
Module 2
2D Graphics: Line drawing algorithms – DDA, Bresenham’s – Bresenham’s Circle drawing
algorithm - 2D Transformations, Clipping – Line clipping – Polygon Clipping, Windowing.
Module 3
3D Graphics: 3D display methods, 3D Object Representation – Polygon Surfaces – Quadratic
surfaces – Spline Representations – Bezier Curves and Surfaces – B-Spline Curves and Surfaces, 3D
Transformations.
Module 4
3D Rendering: Three-Dimensional Viewing-Projections, Clipping, Visible Surface Detection –
Classification of Visible surface detection algorithms – Back-face Detection, Depth- Buffer Method,
Scan-line Method.
Surface Rendering Methods-Basic illumination Models – Polygon–rendering Methods, Gouraud
Shading, Ray-Tracing Methods.
Module 5
Advanced Technologies: Fractals – Classification of Fractals – Self-Squaring Fractals, Animation-
Raster Animation, Morphing.
Text Book
1. Computer Graphics (C version) - Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Pearson Education Asia)
References
1. Computer Graphics- Donald Hearn & Pauline Baker (Prentice Hall of India)
2. Principles of Interactive Computer Graphics – William .N. Newman, Robert .F. Sproull (second
edition), McGraw Hill edition
3. Computer Graphics Principles & Practice - Foley, VanDam, Feiner, Hughes (second edition in C),
Addison Wesley
4. Fundamentals of Computer graphics & - D. P. Mukherjee, Prentice Hall of India multimedia
5. Java 2 complete reference - Herbert, Schildt, Tata McGraw Hill
6. Computer Graphics - Roy A Plastack & Gordon Kally (Schanmi Series McGraw Hill edition)
MODERN COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

T 703 3+1+0
452
Module 1 Optical Fibre communication
Advantages, Disadvantages, System block diagram, Fibre types, Cable configurations, Light
propagation through optical fibre, Fibre configurations, Acceptance angle and acceptance cone,
Cable losses, Light sources, Light detectors.
Module 2 Microwave communication

Advantages, Analog Vs Digital Microwave, Frequency modulated microwave radio system –
Transmitter, Repeater, Receiver (block diagram only) Microwave terminal station – transmitter and
receiver, path characteristics – fading.
Module 3 Satellite Communication

Satellite orbits, Geostationary satellites, Satellite classifications, Spacing, Frequency allocation,
Satellite uplink and down link models (block diagram only), Earth station, Multiple accessing –
FDMA, TDMA, CDMA, Satellite Radio Navigation, GPS (Basic idea only)
Module 4 Mobile Communication

Mobile communication services, Cellular telephone, Concepts – Cells, Frequency reuse,
Interference, Cell splitting, Segmentation and Dualisation, Call system layout, Call processing,
Analog and Digital Cellular Telephones, Block diagram of a typical transceiver, PCSS Mobile
telephone system.
Module 5 Advanced Concepts

Concepts of Wireless LAN, ISDN-Protocol, Architecture, B-ISDN, ATM
Blue tooth Technology
WAP and WWW- Architecture, Protocols and Applications.
Text Book
1. Electronic Communication Systems, Fundamentals Through Advanced, 4th Edn - Wayne Tomasi,
Pearson Education.
References
1. Electronic Communication Systems, TMH, 4th Edition. - Kennedy

2. Electronic Communications, PHI, 4th Edition. - Roddy & Coolen
3. Mobile Communications - Jochen Schiller, Pearson Education.
4. Electronic Communication systems, 3rd Edition - Frank R Dungan, VikasThomson Learning
MULTIMEDIA TECHNIQUES
T 704 2+1+0
Module 1 INTRODUCTION
Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and software environments, -
Module 2 BUILDING BLOCKS

453
Module 3 MULTIMEDIA ENVIRONMENTS
Module 4 MULTIMEDIA PROGRAMMING

Module 5 ADVANCED MULTIMEDIA

References
1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework.- Simon J. Gibbs, Dionysios C.

2. Multimedia: Computing, Communications andApplications- Ralf Steinmentz and Klara Nahrstedt,
Pearson Education.
3. Multimedia making it work - Tay Van Ghan – Osborne Tata Mcgraw Hill
7. Multimedia in Action - James E. Shuman, Vikas Publication
10. Integrated Multimedia Systems - Palikom, The communication Wall Overview
WEB TECHNOLOGIES
RT 705 2+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to SGML – features - XML, XML as a subset of SGML – XML Vs HTML – Views of
an XML document – simple XML documents – Starting & Ending of Tags – Attributes of Tags –
Entity References – Comments - CDATA section
Module 2
Document Type declarations – Creating XML DTDs – Element type declaration – Attribute List
Declaration – Attribute types – Attribute defaults – Displaying XML Data in HTML browser as
HTML tables – Storing XML data in HTML document – Converting XML to HTML with XSL
minimalist XSL style sheets – XML applications
Module 3
Java Beans: Features – Designing Java Beans – Creating and using properties – Induced - bound and
constrained properties - using and creating events – Introspection – creating & using Beanlnfo
clauses – customization – providing custom property editors and GUI interfaces.
Module 4
JSPs - Creating simple JSP Pages – templating – Request time expression – Request & Response
objects – Reading parameter values – Using Javabeans in JSPs - Reading & setting Properties of
JavaBeans – Connecting forms & bean properties – Serialized beans – declaring variables &
454
methods in pages – scriptlets – conditionals, loops & execution handling in JSPs with scriptlets –
Accessing beans via scriptlets.
Module 5
EJB – Basics of EJB – Types of Beans – Development of Session Beans – Steps – Creating &
Implementing Interfaces – Writing Deployment descriptors – Packaging and deploying bean - using
the bean from a client – Development of stateful session bean. Entity beans – Features (Basics of
developing and using entity beans)
References
Module1, 2
1. XML by Example: Building Ecommerce applications - Sean McGrath, Pearson Education
Asia
Module 3
1. Using JAVA 2 Platform Special Edition - Joseph L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India
2. Java 2, AWT, Swing, XML and JavaBeans Programming Black Book - Steven
Holzner, Wiley Dreamtech
Module 4
1. Java Server pages - Larne Pekowsky – Pearson Education Asia
2. JSP: Java server pages - Barry Burd, IDG Books India
Module 5
1. Mastering Enterprise Java Beans and the Java 2 Platforms, Enterprise Edition - EdRoman
(WILEY computer publishing)
2. EJB Design Patterns - Floyd Marinescu
Additional Reference
1. Internet & Web Technologies - Raj Kamal, TMH
ELECTIVE -I
T 706 3+1+0
LIST OF ELECTIVE SUBJECTS
1. CMELRPTA 706-01 Optimization Techniques

2. T 706-02 Digital Image Processing
3. RT 706-03 Principles of real time systems
4. RT 706-04 Windows Programming
5. RT 706-05 Mobile Computing
6. RT 706-06 Software Architecture
7. T 706-07 Optical Communication
Note
455
New Elective subjects related to the recent trends in Information Technology can be added to this
list. Institutions offering such courses should submit the detailed syllabus and get it approved from
the University before offering the course.

CMELRPTA 706-1 3+1+0

Multivariable saddle point – Optimization with equality constraints – Lagrange multiplier method –
Multivariable optimization with inequality constrains – Kuhn- Tucker conditions.
Module 2 Constrained multivariable optimization

Gradient of a function – Steepest descent method – Newton’s method – Powells method – Hook and
Jeeve’s method.

Module 5 Network Technique

Shortest path model – Dijkstra’s Algorithm – Floyd’s Algorithm – minimum spanning tree problem
References
5. Operation Research – R. Pannerselvam, PHI
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING

T 706-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Digital Image Processing, The Fourier and Z-Transform of Multi dimensional
Sequences, Digital image processing in practice, Digitalizing images, Characteristics of an image
digitiser, Types of Image Digitisers. Image processing software, Software organization, processing
sequence the gray level histogram, Introduction to histograms, Uses of histograms, Relations
between histogram and image.
456
Module 2
Point operations, Uses, Linear point operations, Point operations and the histogram, Applications of
point operations. Introduction to algebraic operations, Applications, Geometric operations, Grey
level interpolation, Spatial transformation, applications, geometric operations, linear filtering theory
– Harmonic signals and complex signal analysis.
Module 3
Convolution operation, Applications of digital filtering some useful functions, Convolution filtering
– Dimension sampling, Reconstruction of images from its samples, Nyquist rate, Aliasing and
foldover frequencies. Non rectangular grid sampling, Practical limitation in sampling and
construction. Display aperture and interpolation, Moire effect and flat field response.
Module 4
Processing sampled data, Computing data, Truncation, Optics and System analysis, Diffraction
limited optical systems, Abbreviation in an imaging system. Applications of Digital image
processing – Image restoration, Approaches and models, Super resolution, System identification,
DTF from degraded image spectrum, noise modeling.
Module 5
Image Segmentation by Thresholding, Optimal threshold selection, Gradient optical threshold
selection, Gradient based methods, Region growing techniques – Segmented image structure.
Measurement and classification size, shape, Measurements, Feature selection, Classification 3
dimensional image processing optical sectioning, CAT Stereo – Metric ranging, Stereoscopic image
display – shaded surface display.
References
1. Digital Image Processing- Kenneth R. Castleman, Prentice Hall.

2. Digital Image Processing – Rafael C Gonzalez & Richard E Woods, Pearson Education
3. Discrete Time Signal Processing- Oppenheim and Schafer, Prentice Hall of India.
4. Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing- Anil K. Jain, Prentice Hall of India.
5. Introducing Digital Image Processing- Jensen J.R, Prentice Hall.
6. Image Processing, Analysis & Machine Vision –Sonka, Hlavac & Boyle, Thomson Learning

RT706-3 3+1+0
Module 1
Module 2
systems, hybrid systems, task control block - task status, scheduling – uniprocessor scheduling –
457
Module 3
issues, protocols – contention – based, token - based, stop and go multiloop, polled bus, hierarchal,
Module 4
Module 5
Text Book
1. Real Time Systems - C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (M?C Graw Hill)
Reference
WINDOWS PROGRAMMING (ELECTIVE - I)

R706-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction -Concepts of Windows Programming- Event Driven Programming – Languages that
support Windows Programming – Visual Basic – Java – Visual C++
Visual Basic Programming: Basic Language features – Variables, data types, constants, control
statements – Forms – Creating and Using basic Controls – text boxes, labels, buttons - Event
handling procedures – Properties Window – Common properties for Controls. Message boxes
Module 2
Visual Basic Programming (Contd) Standard Controls – List boxes, Comboboxes, Image box,
picture box, Shape controls, Timer, Scrollbars, Frames, Checkboxes, Option Boxes – Frames - File,
Drive and Directory List boxes - MDI and SDI interfaces – Menus
Module 3
ActiveX controls - RichTextBox, Tree View Control, List view Control, Progessbar, Flexgrid
Control, Common dialog Controls – Font, File, Print Dialogs – Creating Custom activex controls –
Creating Events and properties for ActiveX controls.
458
Module 4
Graphics and Multimedia – Drawing Graphics in Windows - setting colors - Drawing text, lines,
ellipses, arcs, circles – plotting points –Filling figures with colors and patterns – Using clipboards to
transfer images between applications Printing graphics and text – Creating animations with Picture
clip control - applying image effects – stretching, flipping, embossing, egraving, blurring, sweeping
– Using the Multimedia Control – Handling multimedia Errors
Module 5
Database Access – Using DAO, RDO and ADO for accessing databases – Creating tables, inserting,
deleting and updating records – Using the Data Control – Using the ADO Data Control
Using Windows API: Using DLL Procedures in Visual Basic – Declare statement – Handling C++
and Windows Data types – Playing sound with API funtions – Capturing Images from the screen –
Handling mouse outside Applications window – Making an ‘always on top’ window.
References
1. Visual Basic 6 Programming Black Book - Steven Holzner (Dreamtech Press)

2. Programming Windows fifth Edition - Charles Petzlod (Microsoft Press)
3. Visual Basic - Ivan Petrosaus (BPB)
4. Visual Basic - Garry Cornell (BPB)
5. Using Visual Basic - Resselman (PHI)
MOBILE COMPUTING (ELECTIVE - I)

R706-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction - Short History, Mobile telephone systemsSimplified Reference model. Multi carrier
modulation. Cellular systems.
Module 2
Wireless Communication Systems -Telecommunication Systems-GSM & DECT-Architecture and
Protocols.Satellite Systems-GEO, LEO, MEO.
Broadcast Systems-Broadcast transmission, Digital Audio Broadcasting-Multimedia Object Transfer
Protocol. Digital Video Broadcasting.
Module 3
Wireless LAN and ATM - Infra red and Radio Transmission, Infrastructure and ad hoc networks,
802.11- Bluetooth- Architecture, Applications and Protocol, Layers, Frame structure. Comparison
between 802.11 and 802.16.
Wireless ATM- Services, Reference Model, Functions, Radio Access Layer. Handover- Reference
Model, Requirements, Types, handover scenarios.
Location Management, Addressing, Access Point Control Protocol (APCP).
Module 4
Mobile Network and Transport Layers - Mobile IP- Goals, Requirements, IP packet delivery,
Advertisement and discovery. Registration, Tunneling and Encapsulation, Optimization, Reverse
Tunneling, IPv6, Dynamic Host configuring protocol, Ad hoc networks – Routing, DSDV, Dynamic
source routing. Hierarchical Algorithms.
Traditional TCP, Indirect TCP, Snooping TCP, Mobile TCP, Transmission.
459
Module 5
Wireless Application Protocol & World Wide Web
WAP- Architecture, Protocols-Datagram, Transaction, Session.-Wireless Application Environment-
WML- Features, Script- Wireless Telephony Application.
WWW- HTTP, Usage of HTML, WWW system architecture.
Text Book
1. Mobile Communications – Jochen Schiller, Preason Education Asia
References
1. Computer Networks – Andrew S. Tanenbaum, PHI

2. Communication Networks -Fundamental Concepts and Key Architectures Leon-Garcia & Indra
Widjaja, Tata McGraw Hill
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE (ELECTIVE - I)

R706-6 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Software architecture – Architectural styles – pipes and filters –data abstract and
object oriented organization – Event based, implicit invocation, Layered systems – Repositories –
Interpreters – Process control – Heterogeneous Architectures.
Module 2
Shared Information Systems – Integration in software Development Environment – Integration in the
design of Buildings – Architectural structures for based information systems
Module 3
Guidance for user interface architecture Artificial design space – Formal models and specifications-
The value of architectural formalism – Formalizing the architecture of a specific system –
Formalizing the architectural style – Formalizing an architectural design space
Module 4
Linguistic issues - Requirements for architecture – Description languages – first class connectors –
Adding implicit invocation to factorial processing languages.
Module 5
Tools for architectural design – Unicon – Exploiting style in architectural design environments –
Architectural interconnection
Reference
1. Software Architecture – perspectives on an emerging discipline- Mary Shaw, David Garlan, PHI
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION
T 706-7 3+1+0
460
Module 1
Optical fibres: Graded index and step index fibres- refractive index profiles, numerical aperture
propagation of optical beams in fibres. Mode characteristics and cut off conditions (mathematical
derivations required). MCVD technique for fibre fabrication, losses in fibres- attenuation,
absorption, scattering and radiation losses.
Module 2
Signal distortion in fibres – Intra model and inter model distortion – group delay , material and wave
guide dispersion. Optical sources : Light Emitting diodes – LED structures – surface and edge
emitters, mono and hetero structures – internal – quantum efficiency , injection laser diode structures
– comparison of LED and ILD.
Module 3
Optical Detectors: PN junction photo diodes, PN Photo detectors, Avalanche photo diodes,
construction, characteristics and properties, Comparison of performance. Optical amplifiers (OAs):
Need for OAs, Principles of operations of various OAs – SLAs, fibre amplifiers (FRA, FBA,
EDFA). Comparison of performance.
Module 4
Optical communication systems: Direct detection and heterodyne receivers. SNR, advantage of
coherent optical communications. Optical digital communications, Transmission link analysis, point
to point links – system consideration – link power budget and rise time budget.
Module 5
Classification of light wave systems – linear systems: Intensity modulated Direct Detection (IMDD)
and coherent systems. Non linear systems. Introduction to solitons –Solitons communications using
lumped amplifiers, Bit error Rate performance.
References
1. Optical Fibre Communications- Gerd Keiser, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Fiber Optic Communications, 4th Edition. - Joseph C.Palais, Pearson Education.
3. Optical Fibre Communications- Senior, PHI.
4. Fibre Optic Communication – D C Agarwal, Wheeler Pub.
5. Optical Communication Components & Systems – Franz & Jain, Narosa Publishing.
6. Optical Communication Systems – Gowar, PHI
MULTIMEDIA LAB
T 707 0+0+3
1. Programs for
a. Point plotting
b. Line and circle drawing
c. Line and Polygon clipping
d. Transformations
461
e. Hidden line elimination
f. Curves
2. Web page design with HTML
3. Multimedia development using PowerPoint, 3D Studio, Adobe Photoshop.
4. Familiarization of latest multimedia development tools.
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS LAB

T 708 0+0+3
1. Analog optical communication experiments based on optical communication kits / benches

2. Digital optical communication experiments based on optical communication kits / benches
3. Digital communication experiments based on trainer kits.
4. Design of digital filters (software simulation using MATLAB/ SIMULINK)
5. FFT, DFT Implementation using software simulation (MATLAB/ SIMULINK)
6. Study of transmission media – coaxial cables – Types-Hubs-Bridges-Repeaters-Routers-Gateways –
Switches
7. Study of modems-NIC-Cable connectors and their usages
8. Study of Internet-accessing, services and applications
9. Simple network programming experiments in Java.
PROJECT & SEMINAR
T 709/ T 808 0+0+3
paper should, in general, reflect the state of the art technology. Report should be submitted to the
department.
In addition to the seminar, the students shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in
the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide (s). On completion of the project work in the 8th
semester, each student shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a
report of the project work to the department.
462
EIGHTH SEMESTER
463
SECURITY IN COMPUTING
RT 801 2+1+0
Module1
Introduction: Security basics – Aspects of network security – Attacks – Different types – Hackers –
Crackers – Common intrusion techniques –Trojan Horse, Virus, Worm – Security services and
mechanisms.
Module 2
OS Security – Protection Mechanisms –Authentication & Access control – Discretionary and
Mandatory access control – Authentication mechanisms – Official levels of computer security (DoD)
- Security breaches – Concept of a hole - Types of a holes – Study of the security features for
authentication, access control and remote execution in UNIX, WINDOWS 2000
Module 3
Cryptography: Basic Encryption & Decryption – Transposition & substitution ciphers – Caesar
substitution – Polyalphabetic substitutions – Crypt analysis – Symmetric key algorithms – Fiestel
Networks – Confusion – Diffusion – DES Algorithm – Strength of DES – Comparison & important
features of modern symmetric key algorithms – Public key cryptosystems – The RSA Algorithm –
Diffice Hellman key exchange – comparison of RSA & DES – Message Authentication & Hash
functions – Digital signature
Module 4
Network & Application Security: Kerberos – X509 Authentication service – IP security Architecture
– Secure socket layer – Electronic mail security – Pretty Good privacy – S/MIME – secure
Electronic Transactions – Firewalls - Security mechanisms in JAVA platform – Applet security –
Security policy and SecurityManager.
Module 5
Database Security: - Security issues – SQL security DAC based on granting & revoking privileges –
MAC 4 multilevel security – Statistical database security.
Text Books
Module1, 4
1. Network Security Essentials Applications & Standards - William S., Pearson Education Asia
Module2
1. Modern operating System - Andrew S. Tanenbaum, Pearson Education Asia
2. Using JAVA 2 platform - Joseph L. Weber, Prentice Hall of India
Module3
1. Cryptography and network security principles and practice - William Stallings, Pearson
Education Asia
Information theory coding and cryptography - Ranjan Bose, TMH
Module 4,5
1. Designing security Architecture Solutions - Jay Ramachandran, Wiley Dreamtech
Module 5
1. Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network - Sead Muftic, John wiles
464
References
1. Security in Computing - Charles P. Pfleeger IEEE Computer Science Press

2. Database Security Mechanisms for Computer Network - Sead Muftic, John wiles
3. Designing Security Architecture Solutions – Jay Ramachandran, Wiley dreamtech
4. Firewalls Complete - Marcus Gonsalvus, TMH
5. Networking Technologies - Jaisal, Galgotia Publication
6. Security in Computer Operating System - G.O.Shea, NCC Blackwell Manchester Oxford
7. Mastering JAVA security: Cryptography, Algorithms and Architecture - Rich Helton, Wiley
Dreamtech
8. Implementing IPv6 - Mark A. Miller P.E, IDG Books
INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND MANAGEMENT

T 802 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction, Management and Systems, Classical and systems approach to organization,
Organizational theory, Management and organizational behaviour, Factors affecting productivity,
Leadership Styles, Organizational Effectiveness, Managerial Grid, Tasks and functions of
Management, General management system. ERP & Related technologies, MIS, DSS, EIS.
Module 2
The management process and information needs, Data Bank concept, Information
systems for decision making, Automation of Decision making, Management science
and the Decision rule, Decision assisting Information systems – MIS, DSS, EIS, ERP.
Module 3
Management Information systems, Strategic and Project Planning for MIS, Conceptual system
design, detailed system design, Implementation and maintenance. (Brief study only)
Module 4
ERP, Introduction, ERP-modules, benefits, market. Implementation Life cycle, Vendors, Consultants
and Users, Future direction in ERP.
Module 5
Decision Support Systems – Managers and decision making, Decision Support Tools, Concept of
DSS, Components, Basic concepts of Data Mining, Data Warehousing and Knowledge Management.
Knowledge based decision support – Basic concepts only.
References
Module 1,2&3
1. Information Systems for Modern Management - Murdick, Ross & Claggett, PHI.
Module 4
2. Enterprise Resource Planning- Alexis Leon, TMH
Module 5
465
3. Decision Support Systems And Intelligent systems - Efraim Turban, Jay E. Aronson, Pearson
Education.
4. Managing Information Technology- Bhushan Dewan, Vikas Publishing
E-COMMERCE
T803 2+1+0
Module1 Introduction to Electronic Commerce

E-Commerce Framework, Anatomy of E-Commerce Applications, E-Commerce Consumer &
Organization Applications. E- Commerce and World Wide Web – Internet Service Providers,
Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce.
Module 2 Electronic Payment Systems

Types of Electronic Payment Systems, Digital Token Based Electronic Payment System, Smart
Cards, Credit Cards, Credit card based Payment system, Online payment process, Risk in Electronic
Payment Systems, Designing Electronic Payment Systems.
Module 3 Electronic Data Interchange

EDI – Architecture, Application in Business, EDI-Legal, Security and Privacy Issues, EDI
standardization, EDI Envelope for Message Transport, Internet based EDI, EDI and MIME, Value
added Network. EDI Gateways.
Module 4 Intra Organizational E-Commerce

Internal Information System, Work-flow Automation and Coordination, customization and internal
Commerce, Supply Chain Management, Document Library, Types of Digital Documents,
Technological Architecture for Internal Commerce, Corporate Data Warehouses, advantages of Data
Warehouses.
Module 5 Recent Trends in E-Commerce

Marketing on the Internet, Advertising on the Internet, Multimedia in E-Commerce, Video
Conferencing with Digital Videos, Broad Band Telecommunication, Frame & Cell Relays, Switched
Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS), Asynchronous Transfer Mode, Mobile Computing and
Wireless Computing.
Text Book
1. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce - Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston/Pearson Education

References
1. Global Electronic Commerce – J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark

2. E- Commerce The cutting edge of Business - Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag / Pearson Education
ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE
RT 804 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction – Definitions – AI application areas – Example problems- Problems and problem
spaces - Problem characteristics – Problem solving by searching, Searching strategies – Breadth first
466
search, Uniform cost search, DFS, Depth – Limited search, Bi-directional search – Constraint
satisfaction search.
Module 2
Informed search, A* algorithm, Heuristic functions – Inventing Heuristic functions - Heuristic for
constraint satisfaction problem – Iterative deepening – Hill climbing – Simulated Annealing.
Module 3
Game playing and knowledge structures – Games as search problem – Imperfect decisions –
Evaluation functions – Alpha – Beta pruning – state of art game programs, Introduction to frames
and semantic nets.
Module 4
Knowledge and Reasoning – Review of representation and reasoning with Logic – Inference in first
order logic, Inference rules involving quantifiers, modus ponens, Unification, forward and backward
chaining – Resolution.
Module 5
Introduction to Prolog – Representing facts – Recursive search – Abstract data types – Alternative
search strategies – Meta predicates, Matching and evaluation, meta interpreters – semantic nets &
frames in prolog.
Text Books
Module 1,2,3,4
1. Artificial Intelligence – A modern approach - Stuact Russell – Peter Narang, Pearson Education Asia
2. Artificial Intelligence - Rich E. - McGraw Hill Booq Company
Module 5
3. Artificial Intelligence - George F Luger, Pearson Education Asia
Reference
1. An Introduction to Artificial Intelligence – Eugene Charniak & Drew McDermot, Pearson

Education Asia
ELECTIVE - II
T 805 3+1+0
List of elective subjects
1. CMELRPTA 805-01 Advanced Mathematics

2. RT 805-02 Client Server Computing
3. T 805-03 High Performance Computing
4. RT 805-04 Analysis and Modeling of Digital Systems
5. RT 805-05 Distributed Computing
6. RT 805-06 User Interface Design
7. T 805-07 Satellite & Mobile Communication
8. T 805-08 Data Compression
467
Note:

CMELRTA 805-1 3+1+0


Green’s function – integral equation with separable Kernels – Integral equations of convolution type
– Neumann series solution.


Module 5 Numerical solution of partial differential equations
References
1. Linear Integral Equation - Ram P.Kanwal, Academic Press, New York

4. Advanced Engg. Mathematics - Michael D.Greenberge, Pearson Edn. Asia
5. Numrical methods in Engg. &Science - B.S.Grewal, Khanna Publishers
7. Principles and Techniques of Applied Mathematics - Bernard Friedman, John Wiley and sons
8. Principles of Applied Mathematics - James P.Keener, Addison Wesley.
9. Numerical methods - P.Kandasamy, K.Thilagavathy, K.Gunavathy, S.Chand & co
468
CLIENT SERVER COMPUTING (ELECTIVE - II)
RT 805-2 3+1+0
Module 1 INTRODUCTION
History - uses - Client Server Computing & Hetrogenous Computing - Cross Platform Computing
Distributed Computing - The costs of Client Server Computing - Advantages and Disadvantages -
Client Server Databases.
Module 2 DESIGNS
Fundamentals of client server design - Managing the interaction of client and server -
Communications Techniques protocols & Client server interaction protocols - Preparing applications
for client server - Optimizing applications for client server - Example client server implementations -
Request acceptance dispatching - Execution of requests - Client server interaction using message.
Module 3 MULTITASKING
Multi programming vs multitasking - Processor - Advantages and draw backs of multiple processor -
Child and parent processor - Case study Novell Netware and Windows NT - Developing server
applications - Threads - Server communication model.
Module 4 SYNCHRONIZATION
Scheduling implementations - processing queues - context switching pre emptive systems - critical
sections - mutual exclusion - semaphores - semaphore implementations in NT & Netware.
Module 5 COMMUNICATIONS
Network communication - Inter process communication - Building portable client server
applications.
References
1. Novell's Guide to Client-Server Application & Architecture - Jeffrey D.Schqnk, Novell Press.
2. Client Server Computing - Dawna Travis Dewire, McGraw Hill.
3. Developing Client Server Applications -W.H.Inman, BPB.
4. Guide to Client Server Databases - Joe Salemi, BPB.
5. Client Server Strategies - David Vaskevitch, Galgotia.
HIGH PERFORMANCE COMPUTING

T 805-3 3+1+0
Module1
Introduction to parallel processing - Trends towards parallel processing - Parallelism in uniprocessor
- Parallel computer structures-Architecture classification schemes - Indian contribution to parallel
processing.
Module 2
Principles of pipelining and vector processing - Linear pipelining - Classification of pipeline
processors - General pipelines - Instruction and Arithmetic pipelines –Design of Pipilined instruction
unit-Prinnciples of Designing Pipeline Processors- Instruction prefetch and branch handling-
Dynamic pipelines - Architecture of Cray-1.
469
Module 3
Array processors - SIMD array processors - Interconnection networks - Static vs dynamic networks -
mesh connected networks - Cube interconnection networks - Parallel algorithms for array processors
- SIMD matrix multiplication-Parallel sorting on array processors - Associative array processing -
Memory organization.
Module 4
Multiprocessor architectures and Programming - Loosely coupled and Tightly coupled
multiprocessors - Interconnection networks - Language features to exploit parallelism - Process
synchronisation mechanisms.
Module 5
Dataflow computers - Data driven computing and Languages - Data flow computers architectures -
Static data flow computer -Dynamic data flow computer -Data flow design alternatives.
Text Book
1. Computer Architecture & Parallel Processing - Kai Hwang & FayeA.Briggs, McGraw Hill
References
1. Elements of Parallel computing - V. Rajaraman - PHI

2. Super Computers - V. Rajaraman - Wiely arstern
3. Parellel Processing for Super Computers & AI - Kai Hwange & Douglas Degneot
4. Mc Graw Hill
5. Advanced computer Architecture - Sima, Fountain and Kacsuk, Pearson Edn
6. High Performance Computer Architecture - Harold S. Stone, Addison Wesley.
7. Advanced Computing - Vijay P.Bhatkar, Asok V.Joshi, Arirban Basu, Asok K.Sharma.
8. Parallel Computers, Architecture and Programming – Rajaraman & Murthy, PHI
ANALYSIS AND MODELING OF DIGITAL SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - II)

RT 805-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to VHDL: Digital system design - Role of hardware description language- Modeling
digital systems – events, propagation delays and concurrency – waveforms and timing – signal
values – shared signals – simulation model – synthesis model – Field Programmable Gate Arrays.
Module 2
Basic language concepts simulation: signals – Entity architecture – concurrent statements –
Constructing VHDL models using CSAs – delays.
Synthesis: Interface from declarations, simple CSA statements, conditional signal assignment
statements, and selected signal assignment statements.
Module 3
Modeling behavior Simulation: The process construct – programming constructs – the wait
statement – attributes – generating clocks and periodic waveforms – using signals – modeling state
machines – constructing VHDL models – programming errors.
470
Synthesis: language directed view – inference from within process – issues – signals vs. variables –
latch vs. flip flop – the wait statement – state machine.
Module 4
Modeling structure: Describing structure – structural VHDL model – hierarchy, abstraction and
accuracy – generics – component instantiation and synthesis – the generate statement
Subprograms: functions – procedures – sub program and operator overloading – packages and
libraries.
Module 5
Basic I/O operations – the package TEXTIO – ASSERT statement – terminology and directory
structure – simulation mechanics – synthesis mechanics – identifiers – data objects – data types –
operators.
Text Book
1. Introductory VHDL - Sudhakar Yalamanchili, Pearson Education Asia.
Reference s
1. VHDL primer - J Bhaskar, Pearson Education Asia

2. Analysis and modeling of digital systems - Zainalabedin Navabi, McGraw Hill.
DISTRIBUTED COMPUTING (ELECTIVE - II)

RT805-5 3+1+0
Module I Introduction
Introduction to Distributed Systems, evolution, characteristics, design issues, user requirements,
Network technologies and protocols – overview, MACH, AMOBEA- overview.
Module 2 Distributed file system

File service components, design issues, interfaces, implementation techniques, Sun Network File
System – architecture and implementation, other distributed file systems – AFS, CODA. Name
services – SNS name service model.
Module 3 Communication in distributed systems

Client server communication, Group communication, Message passing – features, synchronizations,
RPC – model, implementation, stub generation, messages, marshalling, Server management.
Distributed shared memory – Architecture, design issues, structure of shared memory space,
replacement strategy, thrashing. Synchronization – clock synchronization, event ordering, mutual
exclusion
Module 4 Resource and Process management

Features of scheduling algorithms, Task assignment approach, load balancing, load sharing, Process
migration mechanisms, Threads – scheduling.
Module 5 Consistency maintenance
471
Transaction recovery – methods- intention lists, Fault tolerance – failures, Byzantine failures.
Deadlocks in distributed systems – detection and prevention, centralized and distributed approaches.
References
1. Distributed Systems – Concepts and designing - George Coulouris, Jean Dellimore Tim Kindberg,
Pearson Education Asia
2. Distributed Operating Systems - Andrew S. Tenenbaum Pearson Education Asia
3. Distributed Operating Systems - Concepts and designing - Pradeep. K.Sinha, PHI
USER INTERFACE DESIGN (ELECTIVE - II)

RT 805-6 3+1+0
Importance of user interface – definition, importance of good design, brief history – Graphical User
Interface – Web User Interface – Principles of User interface design.
Module 2 Design Process
Human Interaction with computers, Importance of Human Characteristics, Human consideration,
Human Interaction speeds – Understanding Business function
Module 3 Screen Designing

Design goals - screen meaning and purpose, organizing screen elements- ordering of screen data and
content – screen navigation and flow – visually pleasing composition – amount of information –
focus and emphasis – presenting information simply and meaningfully – information retrieval on
web – Statistical graphics – Technological considerations in Interface Design.
Module 4 Windows and components

Menus and navigation schemes, selection of windows, Selection of device based and screen based
controls - text and messages – icons and images – Multimedia – colours- uses, problems, choosing
colours.
Module 5 Software tools

Specification methods, interface building tools
Interaction devices: keyboard and function keys - pointing devices- speech recognition, digitization
and generation – image and video displays – printers.
Text Books
1. The Essential Guide to User Interface Design – Wilbert O. Galitz, Wiley Dreamtech
2. Designing the User Interface – Ben Shneiderman, Pearson Education Asia
References
1. Human Computer Interaction – John M. Carroll, Pearson Education Asia

2. The Essentials of User Interface Design - Alan Cooper, Wiley Dreamtech
SATELLITE AND MOBILE COMMUNICATION
472
T 805-7 3+1+0
Module 1
Satellite Communication – review of basic concepts - emerging trends in communication satellites-
orbits – Geosynchronous and sun synchronous orbits – Kepler laws – power systems and eclipses –
station keeping – altitude control and stabilization, Frequency plan and reuse Transponders, relative
power levels- Transmission path and path loss – power and link budget calculations – S/N ratio-
saturation flux density and noise consideration – EIRP.
Module 2
Multiple access Techniques, Satellite earth station, special purpose communication satellite, satellite
launch vehicles.
Module 3
Spread spectrum Communication – Direct Sequence or Pseudo noise, Frequency hopping, Time
hopping, Hybrid and Chirp spread spectrum systems. Applications of spread Spectrum.
Module 4
Mobile cellular communications – introduction – basic cellular system- performance criteria –
uniqueness of mobile radio environment – operation of cellular systems – elements of cellular radio
system design – general description – Frequency reuse – co channel interference reduction factor –
desired C/I from a normal case in an omni directional antenna systems – hand off mechanism – cell
splitting – consideration of the components of cellular system.
Module 5
Digital cellular systems – multiple access schemes – Global Systems for Mobile (GSM)- TDMA-
CDMA-Miscellaneous Mobile systems. Intelligent cell concept, CDMA cellular radio network.
Advanced intelligent network (AIN), AIN for mobile communications.
References
1. Electronics Communication 4th ed - Dennis Roody & John Coolen, PHI

2. Mobile Cellular Telecommunication -William C.Y Lee, Mc Graw Hill
3. Satellite Communications - D C Agarwal, Khanna Publishers.
4. Mobile Communications Satellite (Theory and Applications) - Tom Lodgdon, Mc Graw Hill.
5. Mobile and Personal Communication System and Services – Raj Pandya, PHI
DATA COMPRESSION
T 805-8 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction – signal compression - fixed rate Vs variable rate – lossless Vs lossy compression –
sources, channels and codes – components of compression system – issues – quantization – optimal
and adaptive quantization.
Module 2
Predictive coding – DPCM – linear prediction – adaptive prediction – delta modulation – adaptive
delta modulation.
473
Module 3
Transform coding – orthogonal transformations – bit allocation – performance gain of transform
coding – sub band coding – coding based on models of human perception (human auditory system
and visual system)
Module 4
Vector quantization – introduction – memoryless vector quantizers – llyod algorithm – vector
quantization design – tree structured VQ – multistep VQ – product codes – grain/shape VQ – lattice
VQ – feedback vector quantization – vector predictive quantization – vector tree and trellis coders –
adaptive VQ – VQ for speech coding – VQ for image coding.
Module 5
Compression standards – CELP standard for speech – JPEG standard for still images – ISO/MPEG
standard for audio and video – introduction to fractal image compression – application of wavelet
analysis in signal compression – data compression – review of entropy coding – Huffman, runlength,
arithmetic and ziv – lempel coding.
References
1. Gersho A, Gray R.M, Vector Quantization and Signal Compression, Kluwer Academic Publishers.
2. Jayant N.S & Noll P., digital Coding of Waveforms – Principle and /applications to Speech and
Video. – Prentice Hall.
3. Nelson M. Jean & Loup Gailly, The Data compression book, BPB publications.
4. Solari S.J, Digital Video/Audio Compression, McGrawHill.
5. Kondoz A.M, Digital Speech, John Wiley.
6. Rao R.M & Bopadikar A.S, Wavelet Transforms – Introduction to Theory and Applications,
Addison Wesley & Longman Inc.
ELECTIVE - III
T 806 3+1+0
List of elective subjects
1. T 806-01 Information Theory and Coding

2. RT 806-02 Embedded Systems
3. RT 806-03 Neural Network
4. RT 806-04 Genetic Algorithm and Applications
5. RT 806-05 Advanced Networking Trends
6. RT 806-06 Data Processing and Analysis Techniques
7. RT 806-07 Bio metrics
8. T 806-08 Fuzzy Systems
Note
474
INFORMATION THEORY AND CODING
T 806-1 3+1+0
Module 1
Information Theory: Concept of amount of information, units – entropy, marginal, conditional and
joint entropies – relation among entropies – mutual information, information rate, channel capacity –
redundancy and efficiency of a channel, symmetric channels – binary symmetric channel (BSC),
binary erasure channel (BEC), deterministic and noiseless channels – capacity of band limited
Gaussian channels, Shannon – Hartley theorem – band width – SNR trade off – capacity of a channel
of infinite bandwidth , optimum modulation systems.
Module 2
Source coding: Instantaneous codes – construction of instantaneous codes – Kraft’s inequality,
coding efficiency and redundancy, noiseless, coding theorem – construction of basic source codes –
Shannon –Fano Algorithm, Huffman Coding. Cryptography: Secret key Cryptography, block and
stream ciphers, DES, public key cryptography, Diffie- Hellman Public key distribution – RSA
system, digital signatures.
Module 3
Codes for error detection and correction -parity check coding – linear block codes – error detecting
and correcting capabilities – generator and parity check matrices – standard array and syndrome
decoding – Hamming codes – encoding and decoding.
Module 4
Cyclic codes – description – generator and parity check matrices – encoding of cyclic codes –
syndrome computation and error detection, decoding of cyclic codes, BCH codes- description and
decoding, Reed Solomon codes, burst error correction –block and convolutional interleaving.
Module 5
Convolutional codes - encoding – time and frequency domain approaches, state, Tree and Trellis
diagrams – Transfer function and minimum free distance – maximum likelihood decoding of
convolutional codes – The Viterbi Algorithm, Sequential decoding – Stack Algorithm. ARQ
schemes – performance of ARQ – Probability of error and throughput.
References
1. Communication Systems - Simon Haykin, John Wiley & Sons Pvt. Ltd.
2. Principles of Communication Systems - Taub & Schilling, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi.
3. Principles of Digital Communication - Das, Mullick & Chatterjee. Wiley Eastern Ltd.
4. Information and Coding Theory - Dr. P. S. Sathya Narayana Probability Dynaram Publications,
Bangalore.
5. Error Control Coding Fundamental s and Application - Shu Lin & Daniel J.Costello Prentice Hall
Inc., Englewood Cliffs, NJ.
475
RT806-2 3+1+0

devices.
Module 2 Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment

Operating systems.



Text Book
1. Programming for Embedded Systems - Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech
Reference
NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE -III)

RT806-3 3+1+0
Module 1
476
Introduction - Principles - artificial neuron - activation functions - Single layer & multilayer
Module 2
Module 3
Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer - Training the cohenen layer - Pre initialising the
Module 4
Statistical methods - Boltzmann’s Training - Cauche training - Artificial specific heat methods -
Module 5
dynamic systems - Statistical Hopfield networks - Bidirectional associative memories - Continous
BAM - Adaptive resonance theory - Architecture classification - Implimentation.
Text Book
References

GENETIC ALGORITHMS AND APPLICATIONS (ELECTIVE - III)

RT806-4 3+1+0
Module 1 Architecture-Altering Operations

Introduction, Previous Methods of Determining the Architecture of a Multi-Part Program - On the
origin of new function- Architecture-Altering operations for Subroutines -Automatically Defined
Iterations, Loops, Recursion, Storage. Self-Organization of Hierarchies and Program Architecture -
Rotating the Tires on an Automobile – Boolean Parity Problem- Time-Optimal Robot Control
Problem -Multi-Agent Problem - Using Architecture Altering Operations for Subroutines.
Transmembrane Segment Identification Problem using Architecture-Altering Operations for
Iterations-Fibonacci Sequence- Cart Centering.
Module 2 Genetic Programming Problem Solver (GPPS)
Elements of GPPS 1.0-Problems Illustrating GPPS 1.0 - Elements of GPPS 2.0 - Problems
Illustrating GPPS 2.0 - Previous Work on Automated Analog Circuit Synthesis.
Module 3 Automated synthesis of analog electrical circuits

Synthesis of a Low-pass Filter and High-pass Filter The Role of Crossover in Genetic Programming.
477
Module 4 Evolvable Hardware
Evolvable Hardware and Rapidly Re-configurable Field-Programmable Gate Arrays
Discovery of cellular Automata Rules: Discovery of a Cellular Automata Rule for the Majority
Classification Problem.
Module 5 Programmatic Motifs for molecular Biology

Automatic Discovery of Protein Motifs –Programmatic Motifs and the Cellular Location Problem.
Parallelization and Implementation Issues: Computer Time- Parallelisation of Genetic
Programming –Implementation Issues.
Reference
1. Johin R. Koza, Forrest H Bennett III, David Andre, Martin A. Kean, “ Genetic Programming III:
Darwinian Invention and Problem Solving”, Morgan Kaufmann, 1999.
ADVANCED NETWORKING TRENDS (ELECTIVE – III)

RT806-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Ethernet Technology – Frame format – Interface Gap – CSMA/CD – 10 mbps Ethernet, Fast
Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet, Wireless Ethernet – SONET – Sonet multiplexing, Sonet frame structure
Module 2
ISDN - Definition - Protocol architecture - System architecture - Transmission channels - ISDN
interface, B-ISDN.
Module 3
ATM – ATM Principles – BISDN reference model – ATM layers – ATM adaption Layer – AAL1,
AAL2, AAL3/4, AAL5 – ATM addressing – UNI Signaling – PNNI Signalling
Module 4
SATELLITE COMMUNICATION: Satellite communication principles - Geo stationary satellites -
block schematic of satellite earth station - VSAT - VSAT networks - applications in personnel
communication. (basic ideas only)
Module 5
Wireless Lan – Infrared Vs Radio transmission – Infrastructure & ad hoc n/w – IEEE 802.11 – Hiper
Law – Bluetooth – Physical Layer – MAC layer – Networking - Security
References
Module 1
1. An introduction to Computer Networking - Kenneth C Mansfield, Jr., James L. Antonakos, PHI
Module 1,2,3
1. Communication Networks Fundamental Concepts & Key Architecture - Leon-Garcia – Widjaja, Tata
McGraw Hill
2. Mobile Communication - Jochen Schiller, Pearson Education Asia
478
DATA PROCESSING AND ANALYSIS TECHNIQUES (ELECTIVE - III)
RT806-6 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to COBOL programming -elements of COBOL divisions, sections and paragraphs
-Table writing - complete program in COBOL using various options verbs, statements-conditions
and conditional statements.
Module 2
Table Handling – Occur clause – PERFORM verb – SET verb, SEARCH verb – Occurs depending
clause – Sorting a Table.
Module 3
Processing of various file structures in COBOL Language – File description – Fixed Length Record
– Statements – Sequential File with variable length record – Sorting and merging of files – Direct
access files.
Module 4
Data warehousing – Definition – Multidimentional datamodel – OLAP operation – Data warehouse
architecture – Warehouse Server – Metadata – OLAP Engine.
Module 5
Data mining – Definitions, KDD Vs Data mining, DBMS Vs DM – DM Techniques, Issues and
Challenges in DM – DM application areas.
References
1. COBOL programming - M.K. Roy & D Ghosh Dastidar, Tata McGraw Hill
2. Data mining Techniques - Arun K Pujari (Universal Press)
3. Data mining Concepts and Techniques- Jawei Han & Micheline Kamber (Morgan Kunfmann Pub.)
4. Data Mining - Pieter Adriaans, Dolf Zantinge, Person Education Asia
5. Structured COBOL Programming- E. Rajasekar & S.Selvi (Anuradha Agencies)
6. Structured COBOL - A. S. Philippakis & Leonard, J. Kazmier (Tata McGraw Hill)
BIOMETRICS (ELECTIVE - III)

RT806-7 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction – Benefits of biometric security – verification and identification – basic working of
biometric matching – accuracy – false match rate – false nonmatch rate – failure to enroll rate –
derived metrics – layered biometric solutions
Module 2
Finger scan – features – components – operation (steps) – competing finger scan technologies –
Facial scan - features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies –
479
Module 3
Iris scan - features – components – operation (steps) – competing iris scan technologies – strength
and weakness
Voice scan - features – components – operation (steps) – competing facial scan technologies –
Module 4
Other physiological biometrics-Handscan-retina scan- AFIS (automatic fingerprint Identification
systems)-Behavieral Biometrics-Signature scan-Key stroke Scan.
Module 5
Biometrics Application – Biometric Solution Matrix-Bioprivacy-Comparison of privacy factor in
different biometrics technologies - Designing privacy sympathetie biometric systems-Biometric
standards - (BioAPI, BAPI) - Biometric middleware.
Reference
1. Biometrics -Identify Verification in a Networked World - Samir Nanavati, Michael Thieme, Raj
Nanavati- WILEY-dreamtech
FUZZY SYSTEMS
T 806-8 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Fuzzy sets and systems. Basics of fuzzy sets membership function, support of a fuzzy
set, height – normalized fuzzy set, α – cuts (decomposition of a fuzzy set), set theoretic definitions
on fuzzy sets, complement, intersection and union equality.
Module 2
Subsethood – basic definition based on membership functions. The law of the excluded middle and
law of contradiction on fuzzy sets. Properties of fuzzy sets operations (logical proof only). Extension
of fuzzy sets concepts – type –2 and level 2 fuzzy sets – examples.
Module 3
Operations on fuzzy sets – intersection, algebraic sum – product, bounded sum – product, drastic
sum product, t -norms and t -conorms (s-norms) on fuzzy sets, typical parameterized t – norms and
s-norms (with simplified proof). Extension principle and its applications.
Module 4
Fuzzy relation. Resolution form of a binary fuzzy relation. Operations on fuzzy relations –
projection, max. – min. and min. and max., compositions cylindric extension. Similarity relations –
reflexivity, symmetry, transitivity.
Module 5
Further operations on fuzzy sets and proposed by Zadeh – concentration dilation, contrast
Intensification, a linguistic hedges, computation of the meaning of values of a linguistic variable,
fuzzy algorithms, fuzzy engineering – applications of fuzzy controls, case studies.
References
480
1. Neural Fuzzy Systems - C.T Lin & C.S George Lee, Prentice Hall.
2. Fuzzy Systems Hand Book - Earl Cox, Associated Press.
3. Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic- Theory and Applications - Klir and Yuan, Prentice Hall of India.
4. IEEE Trans on Systems, Man & Cybernetics, vol. SMC – 3, No.1, January 1973, pp 28-44
5. Fuzzy Engineering - Bart Kosko, Prentice Hall.
6. Fuzzy Thinking, Bart Kosko - Hooper Collins Publications.
INTERNET LAB
T 807 0+0+4
1. Familiarization of Internet Accessing and Trouble shooting

2. Internet Programming with JAVA applets
3. Web development with XML, JAVA script, JAVA beans.
4. Implementation of Search Engine
5. Web Development with JSP and EJB
6. Familiarization to the latest web development tools
(Any experiment according to the syllabus of RT 605 and RT 705 can be substituted)
PROJECT & SEMINAR

T 709 / T808 0+0+4
paper should, in general, reflect the state of the art technology. Report should be submitted to the
department.
In addition to the seminar, the students shall undertake a project work (as a team or individually) in
the 7th semester itself in consultation with the guide (s). On completion of the project work in the 8th
semester, each student shall present the work done before a panel of staff members, and submit a
report of the project work to the department.
VIVA VOCE
T 809
A comprehensive viva voce examination will be conducted to assess the student’s overall knowledge
in the specified field of Engineering. At the time of viva voce, certified report of seminar, mini
project and project work are to be presented for evaluation.
481
SYLLABUS
APPLIED ELECTRONICS
AND INSTRUMENTATION
ENGINEERING
BRANCH
482
THIRD SEMESTER
CMELPA 301 3+1+0
483
Module 1
Vector differential calculus: Differentiation of vector functions- scalar and vector fields- gradient -
divergence and curl of a vector function - their physical meaning - directional derivative - scalar
potential- conservative field – identities - simple problems.
Module 2
Vector integral calculus: Line- surface and volume integrals- work done by a force along a path-
application of Green’s theorem- Stoke’s theorem and Gauss divergence theorem.
Module 3
Function of complex variable: Definition of analytic function and singular points- derivation of C.R.
equations in Cartesian co-ordinates- harmonic and orthogonal properties- construction of analytic
function given real or imaginary parts- complex potential- conformal transformation of functions
like Zn, ez, 1/z, Sin z, z + k2/z - bilinear transformation- cross ratio- invariant property- simple
problems.
Module 4
Finite differences: meaning of ∆, , E, μ, δ - interpolation using Newton’s forward and backward
formula- central differences- problems using Stirling’s formula- Lagrange’s formula and Newton’s
divided difference formula for unequal intervals.
Module 5
Difference Calculus: Numerical differentiation using forward and backward differences. Numerical
integration- Newton-Cote’s formula- trapezoidal rule- Simpson’s 1/3rd and 3/8th rule- simple
problems- difference equations - solutions of difference equations.
References
1. Advanced Engg. Mathematics: Erwin Kreyzing- Wiley Eastern. Pub.

2. Higher Engg. Mathematics: B. S. Grewal- Khanna publishers.
3. Numerical methods in Science and Engineering: M K Venkataraman- National Pub.
4. Numerical methods: S Balachandra Rao- University Press.
5. Advanced Engineering Mathematics: Michael D Greenberg- PHI.
6. Theory and Problems of Vector analysis: Murray Spiegel- Schaum’s- Mc Graw Hill.
NETWORK THEORY
LA 302 2+1+0
Module 1
Source transformation- Mesh and Node voltage Analysis – Coupled circuits – Dot conventions –
Analysis of coupled circuits.
Module 2
484
Network theorems-Super position theorem- Reciprocity theorem - Thevenin’s theorem- Norton's
theorem- Millman's theorem- Maximum power transfer theorem- Tellegen’s theorem- Graph of a
network -Trees- co-trees -Incident matrix- cut- set matrix-tie-set matrix- Analysis of networks-
equilibrium equations.
Module 3
Fourier Analysis and Laplace transform - Fourier analysis of periodic signals-Trignometric and
exponential forms- Non periodic signals and Fourier transforms- Frequency spectrum of periodic
waveforms - Laplace Transform- Review of theorems-Laplace transform of important signal
waveforms - Periodic functions- Initial value and final value Theorems- DC&AC transients-
Solution of network problems using Laplace transform.
Module 4
Two-port Networks and Filters - Voltage and Current ratios of two - port networks -Admittance-
impedance- hybrid and transmission parameters of two port networks. Passive filters as two port
networks- Characteristics of ideal filters-Image impedance- Constant K low pass- High pass and
Band pass filters-m-derived filters-Composite filters.
Module 5
Network Synthesis – Realizability concept – Hurwitz property – positive realness – properties of
positive real function – Synthesis of R, L, RC and LC driving point functions – Foster and Cauer
forms.
References
1. Network analysis -M.E Van Valkenburg, PHI

2. Circuits and Networks – analysis & synthesis – A. Sudhakar & S P ShyamMohan
3. Network and Systems -D Roy Chaudhary
4. Network analysis and synthesis -Franklin F Kuo – John Wiley & Sons
5. Engineering Circuit Analysis -W H Hayt & Jack Kennerly – Mc-Graw Hill
ELECTRICAL TECHNONOGY
LA 303 2+1+0
Module 1
D.C.Generator - O.C.C. – Condition for self excitation – field critical resistance – critical speed –
Load characteristics of generators – Losses – power flow diagram – efficiency – Condition for
maximum efficiency – Applications.
Module 2
D C motor - starter – 3 point and 4 point starters – torque equation – speed equation – speed torque –
characteristics of shunt, series and compound motors – Losses – efficiency – Brake test –
485
Swinburne’s test – speed control – field control – armature control – series parallel control –
applications.
Module 3
Transformers - transformer on no-load and load operation – phasor diagram – equivalent circuit –
regulation – losses and efficiency – o.c. and s.c. test – applications – Design of step down
transformers like 230/6-0-6V, – Basic principles of 3 phase tranformer – autotransformer –
applications.
Module 4
A.C Machines - 3 phase induction motors – rotating magnetic field – torque equation – slip – torque-
slip characteristics – operating characteristics – starting of 3 phase induction motors – starters –
single phase induction motors – constructional features – types – working and characteristics only
(no analysis) – constructional features of synchronous machines – principle of operation of alternator
– emf equation – regulation by emf and mmf method – principle of operation of synchronous motor
– starting of synchronous motor.
Module 5
Special Machines - A C and D C servo motors – synchros – constructional features – working of a
tachogenerator – stepper motors – construction, working, applications and specifications of stepper
motors – universal motors - constructional features – typical applications – criteria for selection of
motors – electromagnetic relays – contactors.
References
1. Electrical & Electronic Technology: Hughes, Pearson Education

2. Electrical Technology: H. Cotton
3. Electrical Machines: R.K.Rajput
4. Electrical Design Estimating & Costing: K.B.Raina & Bhattacharya
5. Electrical Machines & Power systems: Vincent Del Toro
SOLID STATE DEVICES

LA 304 3+1+0
Module 1
Energy bands and charge carriers in semiconductors: energy bands- metals- semiconductors and
insulators- direct and indirect semiconductors- charge carriers in semiconductors: electrons and
holes- intrinsic and extrinsic material- n-material and p-material- carrier concentration: fermi level-
EHPs- temperature dependance- conductivity and mobility- drift and resistance- effect of
temperature and doping on mobility- hall effect.
Module 2
Diffusion of carriers- derivation of diffusion constant D- Einstein relation- continuity equation- p-n
junctions: contact potential- equilibrium fermi levels- space charge at junctions- current components
486
at a junction: majority and minority carrier currents- zener and avalanche breakdown- capacitance of
p-n junctions.
Module 3
p-n junction diodes: volt-ampere characteristics- switching time- rectifier action- Zener diodes: volt-
ampere characteristics- Tunnel diodes: tunneling phenomena- volt-ampere characteristics- Varactor
diodes- Photo diodes: detection principle- light emitting diodes.
Module 4
Bipolar junction transistors: npn and pnp transistor action- open circuited transistor- biasing in active
region- majority and minority carrier distribution- terminal currents- amplification and switching- α
and β gain factors- emitter efficiency γ- schottky transistors- photo transistors.
Module 5
Field effect transistors: operation- pinch off and saturation- pinch off voltage- gate control- volt-
ampere characteristics- MOSFETS: n MOS and p MOS: comparison- enhancement and depletion
types- control of threshold voltage- MOS capacitance.
References
1. Solid state electronic devices - Ben G Streetman- Pearson Education

2. Microelectronic Devices - Nagchaudhari, Pearson Education
3. Integrated electronics – Millman and Halkias- Mc Graw Hill.
4. Physics of semiconductor devices - S M Sze- Mc Graw Hill.
5. Semiconductor devices – Nagchoudhary- Tata Mc Graw Hill.
6. Physics of semiconductor devices - Shur- PHI.
7. Theory of Semiconductor devices - Karl Hess- PHI.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - I
LA 305 3+1+0
Module 1
Rectifiers and Power supplies: Half wave- full wave and bridge rectifiers- working- analysis and
design- C filter analysis- regulated power supplies: series and shunt- design of regulated power
supplies for specified output conditions- current limiting- short circuit protection- IC regulated
power supplies.
Module 2
Transistor as an amplifier: Transistor at low frequencies- h parameter model analysis- expression of
voltage and current gain- input and output impedance- CE- CB and CC configurations- comparison-
transistor parameters from static characteristics- FET: operation- characteristics- small signal model.
Module 3
487
Transistor Biasing: operating point- DC and AC load lines- Q point selection- bias stability-
definition of stability factors- derivation of stability factor for ICO variation- fixed bias- collector to
base bias- self bias circuits- bias compensation- compensation for ICO and VBE.
Module 4
RC Coupled amplifier: working- analysis and design- phase and frequency response- FET amplifier:
biasing- analysis and design.
Module 5
Wave shaping circuits: clipping- clamping- RC integration - differentiation- transistor as a switch-
astable multivibrator- working and design - UJT- working and applications- simple sweep circuit.
References
1. Electronic devices and circuits: Boylsted & Nashelsky- Pearson Edn.

2. Integrated Electronics: Millman & Halkias- Mc Graw Hill.
3. Electronic Principles: Malvino- Tata Mc Graw Hill.
4. Electronic devices and circuits: Bogart- UBS.
5. Electronic devices and circuits: Allen Mottershed- PHI.
6. Electronic devices: Floyd- Pearson Edn.
7. Electronic devices and applications: B Somanathan Nair- PHI.
8. Electronic devices and circuits: J B Gupta- S K Kataria & Sons Pub.
LA 306 3+1+0
Module 1 Introduction to C
C fundamentals - The character set - identifiers and keywords - Data types - constants - variables and
arrays - declarations - expressions - statements - symbolic constants- arithmetic operators -
Relational and Logical operators - The conditional operator - Library functions - Data input and
output - getchar – putchar, scanf, printf - gets and puts functions - interactive programming.
Module 2 Control Statements

While - do while - for - nested loops -if else switch- break - continue - The comma operator - go to
statement, Functions - a brief overview - defining a function - accesing a function - passing
arguments to a function - specifying argument - data types - function prototypes - Recursion.
Module 3 Program Structure

Storage classes - Automatic variables - external variables - multi file programs. Arrays: defining an
array - processing an array - passing arrays in a function – multi dimensional arrays - array and
488
strings. Structures and unions: defining a structure - processing a structure - user defined data types -
passing structure to a function - self referential structures - unions.
Module 4 Pointers
Fundamentals - pointer declaration - passing pointers to a function - pointers and one dimensional
arrays - operations on pointers - pointers and multi dimensional arrays- passing functions to other
functions.
Module 5 Data Files

Opening and closing of a data file - creating a data file - processing a data file, low level
programming - register variables – bit wise operation - bit fields - enumeration - command line
parameters - macros - the C pre-processor.
Text Book
1. Programming with ANSI and Turbo C: Ashok N Kanthane, Pearson Edn.
References
1. Theory and problems of programming with C- Gottfried, Schaum's series.

2. The C programming language - Kernighan & Ritche, PHI.
3. Programming Techniqes through C - Venkateshmurthy, Pearson Edn.
4. Programming in C - Balaguruswamy, Tata Mc Graw Hill.
5. Programming Ansi C - Ram Kumar.
6. Computer Programming - Rajaraman, PHI.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING LAB

LA 307 0+0+4
1. Measurement of Electric power (single phase and three phase) and energy using wattmeter and
energy meter.
2. Study of star-delta connections.
3. O.C.C. and Load characteristics of D.C. generators.
4. Swinburne’s test.
5. Load characteristics of D.C. shunt, series and compound motors
6. O.C and S.C test on single-phase transformer.
7. Load test on step-up/step-down transformer; calculation of efficiency and regulation at different
power factors.
8. Study of starting of three phase induction motors and load test on squirrel cage induction motor.
9. Load test on slipring induction motor.
10. Study of stepper and servomotors.
11. Load test on single phase induction motor.
12. Pre-determination of regulation of the alternator by emf and mmf method.
489
BASIC ELECTRONICS LABORATORY
A 308 0+0+4
1. Familiarization of CRO, DVM, AF generator etc and Soldering practice.

2. Characteristics - Diode, Transistor, FET, UJT. Determination of parameters.
3. Design and testing of DC power supplies for specified output.
4. Design of Single stage RC coupled amplifier. Determination of Band width.
5. Design of FET amplifier. Determination of Band width.
6. Wave shaping. Design of clipping, clamping, RC differentiator & Integrator.
7. Design of Astable multi-vibrator for specified time period - sharpening of edges.
8. Simple sweep circuit.
9. Familiarization of data sheets of components – OA79, 1N4001, SZ6.8, BC107, BC547, BC557,
BFW10, 2N2646.
10. Simulation of simple circuits using Spice.
Note
Students may assemble the circuits of the experiments on a universal P.C.B. and verify the results in
order to get soldering practice
490
FOURTH SEMESTER
491
CMELRPTA 401 3+1+0
Module 1
P.I. by the method of variation of parameters –Cauchys equations- Linear Simultaneous eqns- simple
applications in engineering problems.
Module 2
Partial Differential Equations - formation by eliminating arbitrary constants and arbitary Functions -
equation.
Module 3
Module 4
Module 5
difference of proportion, single mean and difference of means (proof of theorems not expected).
References
1. Higher Engineering Mathematics - B.S. Grewal, Khanna Publishers.

2. Engineering Mathematics Vol.II -3rd year Part A & B - M.K. Venkataraman, National Publishing
Company
3. Elements of Partial Differential Equations - Ian N.Sneddon.,McGraw Hill.
Asia / PHI.
7. Probability and statistical inferences – Hogg and Tanis, Pearson Education Asia.
DIGITAL ELECTRONICS AND LOGIC DESIGN

LA 402 3+1+0
Module 1
Gates –Inverter - OR gates - AND gates - NOR Gates - De Morgan’s Theorems - NAND Gates –
EXCLUSIVE - OR Gates - Tristate Inverter - TTL Circuits - Digital Integrated Circuits - 7400
492
Devices - TTL Characteristics - TTL Overview - AND OR- NOT Gates - Open-Collector Gates –
CMOS gates.
Module 2
Boolean Algebra and Karnaugh Maps - Boolean Relations - Sum-of-Products method - Algebraic
Simplification - Karnaugh maps – Pairs – Quads - and Octets - Karnaugh Simplifications - Don’t-
Care Conditions. Multiplexers - de-multiplexers - decoder and encoder.
Module 3
Arithmetic-Logic Units - Binary Addition - Binary Subtraction - Half Adders - Full Adders - Binary
Adders - signed Binary Numbers - 2’s Complement - 2’s-Complement Adder-Subtractor.
Module 4
Flip Flops - RS Latches - Level Clocking - D Latches - Edge-Triggered D & T Flip-Flops - Edge-
Triggered JK Master-slave Flip-Flop.
Module 5
Registers and Counters - Buffer Registers - Shift Registers - Controlled Shift Registers - Ripple
Counters - Synchronous Counters - Ring counters - Modulo counters - Three-State Register. ROMs
– PROMs and EPROMs - RAMs. A small TTL Memory.
References
1. Digital Fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Edn.

2. Fundamentals of digital circuits: A Anand Kumar, PHI
3. Digital Integrated Electronics: Taub and Shilling, McGraw Hill,
4. Digital electronics: D C Green, Pearson Edn.
5. Digital Logic and state machine design: Comer, Oxford.
6. Digital electronic principles and applications: A K Maini, Khanna Pub.
7. Digital electronic principles: Malvino and Leach, Mc Graw Hill.
8. Logic and computer design fundamentals: M Morris Mano, Pearson Edn.
LA403 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: communication systems – Modulation - need for modulation- bandwidth- Amplitude
modulation - theory- mathematical representation- frequency spectrum - USB & LSB- power
relation- Frequency modulation - theory- mathematical representation- frequency spectrum- Phase
modulation- comparison of AM- FM- PM.
Module 2
Radio transmitters: AM transmitter - block diagram - Solid state modulators - circuit explanation-
FM transmitter - reactance modulator- varactor diode modulator- Amstrong modulator.
Module 3
Radio receivers: Tuned radio frequency receiver- superheterodyne receiver - block schematic-
selectivity- sensitivity- importance of IF - image frequency rejection - AM receivers - schematic
explanation - RF amplifiers - circuit explanation - Mixer circuits - IF amplifiers - circuit explanation-
493
simple diode detector - Automatic gain control circuit - simple and delayed AGC - FM receivers -
block schematic explanation - amplitude limiting - FM demodulators: slope detectors- phase
discriminator- ratio detectors.
Module 4
Side band communication: Single side band transmission - suppression of carrier - balanced
modulator - filtering of unwanted sideband - SSB receivers - block schematic explanation - pilot
carrier receiver - suppressed carrier receiver - Vestigial side band transmission - transmitter and
receiver responses - advantages of VSB in television.
Module 5
Telephone Systems - Telephone subscribers loop circuit - subscribers line interface circuit - Pulse
and tone signaling - Frequency assignments - Electronic telephone - block schematic of a telephone
set- block schematic of single line analog SLIC board - two wire repeaters - Electronic private
automatic branching exchange - basic block schematic- Power line communication: block schematic
explanation- Facsimile - FAX transmitter and receiver.
References
1. Electronic communication Systems: Wayne Tomasi- Pearson Edn.

2. Electronic communication: Roody and Coolen- PHI.
3. Electronic Communication systems: George Kennedy- Mc Graw Hill.
4. Electronic and radio engineering: A P Mathur.
5. Telephony and Carrier current engineering: P N Das.
6. Modern communication Systems: Couch- PHI.
ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS - II
LA 404 3+1+0
Module1
High frequency equivalent circuit of a transistor. Hybrid pi model- explanation of components -r
parameters in terms of h parameters -Tuned amplifiers -principle - single tuned and double tuned
amplifiers -frequency response -applications (no analysis) -multistage amplifiers -frequency
response.
Module2
Feedback -different types -positive, negative, voltage, current, series and shunt feedback -Feedback
in amplifiers -its effect on amplifier performance -typical feedback arrangements -emitter follower -
darlington emitter follower -cascade amplifier (principles only) -difference amplifier.
Module 3
Oscillators -conditions for oscillation -analysis and design of RC phase shift oscillator, general form
of oscillator circuit -working of Hartley, Colpitt's, Crystal, tuned collector and Wien Bridge
oscillators.
Module 4
Mono-stable multi vibrator -analysis - design - applications - triggering - Bistable multi-vibrator
-analysis and design -different methods of triggering -commutating capacitor -Schmitt trigger
-working -design.
494
Module 5
Large signal amplifier -harmonic distortion -analysis of class A, class B, class C and class D
amplifiers -complimentary and symmetry stage -sweep generators -voltage and current sweeps -time
base generators -linearisation -miller and bootstrap sweeps - applications.
References
1. Electronic devices and circuits -Boylsted & Neshelsky, Pearson Edn.

2. Integrated electronics -Millman & Halkias, Mc Graw Hill
3. Electronic principles -Malvino
4. Electronic devices and circuits -Bugart
5. Microelectronics Digital and Analogue -Botkar.
SIGNALS AND SYSTEMS

LTA 405 2+1+0
Module1
Dynamic Representation of Systems - Systems Attributes- Causality- linearity- Stability- time-
functions).. Linear Time-Invariant Systems: Differential equation representation- convolution
Module 2
Module 3
Fourier Transform (including DFT) and properties. Frequency response of discrete time LTI
systems.
Module 4
LTI system (stability etc.) Significance of poles & zeros- Z-Transform - Z-Transform and its
inverse: Definition- existence- Region of convergence and properties- Application of Z-Transform
for the analysis of Discrete time LTI systems- Significance of poles and zeros.
Module 5
systems.
495
References

RELIABILITY AND HUMANITIES

LA 406 2+1+0
Module 1
Concepts of reliability: Definition of reliability- failure- classification of failures- measures of
reliability- failure rate- mean time between failures (MTBF)- mean time to failure (MTTF).
Module 2
Failure pattern and fitting curves: Graphical plots- Bath tub curves- Hazard models- Constant hazard
models- Linearly increasing hazard model- Weibull model.
Module 3
Manufacture for Quality and reliability: The need for prototype tests- the quality standard- planning
to achieve required quality- basic concepts of sequencing.
Module 4
Control charts in statistical quality control: statistical quality control advantages- types of control
charts- X and R chart- P chart- C chart- Re-engineering- Zero defects.
Module 5
Human relations: Human Behavior- Scope of Industrial psychology-Theories of Motivation-
Handling of workers grievances-Workers participation in management-Industrial discipline-
Industrial disputes-Industrial fatigue-Wages and incentives.
References
1. Reliability Engineering: L S Sreenath.

2. Reliability Engineering: A K Govil.
3. Industrial Engineering & Management: Banga and Sharma.

LA 407 0+0+4
List of experiments
1. Power amplifiers: Design of class A and class AB push pull stage – verification of power output.
2. IC power amplifier.
496
3. Oscillators: Design of RC phase shift, Hartley & Colpitts oscillators.
4. Design of Mono-stable and bi-stable multi-vibrators.
5. Design of bootstrap sweep generator.
6. Schmitt trigger.
7. SCR, Triac firing circuits.
8. Feedback amplifier, design of two stage RC coupled amplifier.
9. Tuned amplifiers.
10. Design and testing of DC regulated power supplies (Fixed and variable).
11. Simulation of above circuits using PSPICE.
Note
New experiments may be added in accordance with subject LA 404
COMPUTER PRORAMMING LAB

LA 408 0+0+4
Part 1
1. Computer hardware familiarization.

2. Familiarization of MS-DOS commands, Microsoft Windows.
3. Familiarization of Microsoft Word, Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Part 2
Programming Experiments in C/C++: Programming experiments in C/C++ to cover control

structures, functions, arrays, structures, pointers and files, classes, operator & function overloading,
inheritance, polymorphism.
497
FIFTH SEMESTER
498
CMELPA501 3+1+0
Module 1
Module 2
Module 3
Modified Eulers method - Rungea – Kutta method (IV order)-Milne’s predictor corrector method.
Module 4
Module 5
only) – Big-M method, two phase method- Duality in L.P.P.- Balanced T.P. – Vogels
approximation method – Modi method.
References

3. Higher Engineering Mathematics - Dr. B.S.Grewal, Kanna Publishers.
4. Numerical methods in Science & Engineering - Dr. M.K.Venkitaraman, National Publishing
company.
5. Quantitative techniques Theory & Problems - P.C.Tulsian, Vishal Pandey, Pearson Education Asia.
6. Complex variables and applications - Churchill and Brown,McGraw-Hill.
7. Operations research - Panneer Selvam, PHI.
8. Engineering Mathematics Vol. III -S Arumugam, A.T.Isaac,A , Somasundaram, Scitech
publications
9. Advanced Mathematics for Engg.students Vol. III- S.Narayanan, T.K.M.Pillay, G.Ramanaigh,
POWER ELECTRONICS
LA 502 2+1+0
Module 1
499
Power semiconductor Devices - History of development of Power Electronic devices- Constructional
features- Characteristics- rating and specification- gate/base drive circuits-protection including
cooling and application consideration of diodes- SCRS, GTO, BJTS, MCT, MOSFET and IGBT.
Series and parallel operations of SCR- Electromagnetic interference.
Module 2
AC to DC Converters - Operation and analysis of Single phase and multi-phase uncontrolled and
controlled rectifiers with R, RL and back EMF load- effect of source inductance- free wheeling
effect- power factor improvement methods for phase Controlled rectifiers- filters. PWM chips:
SG3524 and TL 494- Block schematic.
Module 3
AC to AC Voltage Converter - Operation and analysis of single phase integral cycle and phase
controlled converters- Configuration of three phase controllers.
Module 4
DC to DC Converters - Chopper classification- Step down- step up and four quadrant converters
operation- analysis and control with R, RL and EMF load- current and voltage Commutation
circuits.
Module 5
DC to AC Converters - Single phase and three phase bridge inverters- VSI and CSI- voltage control
- PWM & Square wave operation- Harmonics and their reduction techniques.
References
1. Power Electronics: Rashid Muhammad, Pearson Edn.

2. Power Electronics: Harish C Ray, Galgotia Pub.
3. Thyristors and Applications: Ramamoorthy.
4. Power Electronics: Converter, Applications and Design, Mohan Ned, John Wiley,
5. Power Semiconductor Circuits: Dewan, S.B. and Satrughan A, John Wiley & Sons, 1975.
6. Thyristorised Power Controllers: Dubey, G.K., Doradlla, S. R., Wiley Eastern, 1987.
BASIC INSTRUMENTATION
A503 3+1+0
Module 1
Generalized configuration of Instrumentation system: Definition of measuring parameters -
Calibration, Static and dynamic, Standards of measurements, Measurements errors, Accuracy,
Precision, Sensitivity, Resolution, Significant figures.
Module 2
500
Measurement of resistance, inductance and capacitance using bridges - Wheatstone, Kelvin,
Maxwell, Hay, Schering bridges, Megger, Q meter, Electronic multimeter, vector voltmeter, vector
impedance meter.
Module 3
Signal generators - Audio generators, Function generators, Sweep frequency generators, Pulse
generators, RF generators, Frequency synthesizer.
Module 4
Digital instruments: Digital voltmeter - dual slop, successive approximation types, Digital
measurement of time interval, phase, period, frequency, ratio of two frequencies, Digital LCR meter,
Digital IC tester.
Module 5
The cathode ray tube, Deflection amplifier, Wave form display, Oscilloscope time - base, Dual trace
oscilloscope, Dual beam and split beam. Oscilloscope controls-measurements of voltage, frequency
and phase, pulse measurements, Lissajous figures, Z axis modulation, oscilloscope probes.
Special oscilloscopes - Delayed time base oscilloscope and controls Analog Storage oscilloscope,
Storage oscilloscope controls, Sampling oscilloscope, Digital storage oscilloscope - Operation,
Analog to digital conversion and storage, digital memory, digital - to- analog conversion, DSO
controls, DSO applications Spectrum analyzer, Distortion meter.
Text Books
1. A.D. Cooper and W.D.Cooper, Modern Electronic Instrumentation and Measurement Techniques,
Prentice - Hall of India Pvt.Ltd., New Delhi, 1995.
2. D.A.Bell, Electronic Instrumentation and Measurements, Englewood Cliffs, N.J., 1994
References
1. T.S.Rathore, Digital Measurements Techniques, Narosa Publishers, Bombay, 1997

2. Beckwith, Mechanical Measurement 5/e, Pearson Education.
3. Doeblin, Measurement Systems-Application and Design, Mc Graw Hill, N.Y.1990.
COMPUTER ORGANISATION AND ARCHITECTURE

LA504 2+1+0
Module 1
Basic structure of computer hardware and software- addressing methods and machine programming
sequencing- different addressing modes- instruction sets- computer arithmetic logic design- fast
adders- multiplication- Booth’s algorithm- fast multiplication- integer division- floating point
numbers.
Module 2
Control unit- instruction execution cycle- sequencing of control signals- hardwired control- PLAs-
micro programmed controls- control signals- micro instructions - Micro program sequencing- branch
address modification- pre fetching of micro instructions.
Module 3
501
Memory organization- semi conductor RAM memories- internal organization- bipolar and MOS
devices- dynamic memories- multiple memory modules and interleaving- cache memories -mapping
functions - replacement algorithms- virtual memories- address translation-page tables - memory
management units- secondary memories- disk drives- standards.
Module 4
Input-Output organization- accessing I/O devices- direct memory access (DMA)- interrupts and
interrupt handling- handling multiple devices- device identification- vectored interrupts- interrupt
nesting- daisy chaining- I/O interfaces- serial and parallel standards- buses-scheduling- bus
arbitrations- printers- plotters- VDUs.
Module 5
Introduction to parallel processing and architecture- classification- array processors- pipeline
architecture- interconnection- networks- multistage networks- message passing architecture.
References
1. Computer organization – Hamacher C V, Mc Graw Hill.

2. Computer Systems and Architecture – Vincent P Heuring, H F Jordan, Pearson Edn.
3. Computer organization and Design – Pal Choudhary
4. Computer organization and Architecture – Hayes J P
5. Computer Org. & Architecture- Stallings, Pearson Education.

LA 505 3+1+ 0
Module 1
Introduction to operational amplifiers – Basic differential amplifier - dual input balanced output and
unbalanced output- Internal block schematic of op amp - Pin identification- power supply
requirements - typical data sheet - Op-amp parameters - ideal op amp - transfer curve - equivalent
circuit- open loop configurations - frequency response of op amps - compensating networks - slew
rate and its effect.
Module 2
Op amp in closed loop configuration: Different feed back configurations- Voltage series feedback
and voltage shunt feedback - concept of virtual ground- voltage follower - V/I converters and its
applications - Differential amplifiers with one op amp and 3 op amps- Use of offset minimizing
resistor (ROM) and its design.
Module 3
Op amp applications- Summer- Subtractor- Log amplifier- Antilog amplifier- Comparators: zero
crossing- using voltage reference- regenerative (Schmitt trigger) comparators- Astable and
502
monostable multivibrators- Triangular and sawtooth wave generators- Integrator and differentiator-
RC phase shift and Wien bridge oscillators-Sample and hold circuit- Peak detector circuit.
Module 4
Filters and timers: LPF- HPF- BPF- Notch and all pass filters- I order and II order filters- Switched
capacitor filter- Switched capacitor integrator. 555 timers – Functional block diagram- Astable
multivibrator, monostable multivibrator and its applications.
Module 5
Specialized ICs and applications: Voltage regulator ICs – 78XX and 79XX series- 317 variable
regulators- 1723 switching regulators- 566 VCO chip- Phase locked loop(PLL) - capture and lock
range- 565 PLL - PLL applications: Frequency multiplication and division- AM demodulation- FM
detection- FSK demodulation - LM 380 power amplifier - intercom using LM 380- 8038 Function
generator chip - applications.
References
1. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ramakand Gaykwad- PHI publications.

2. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: R F Coughlin- Pearson Education.
3. Op amps and Linear Integrated circuits: Ravi Raj Dudeja- Umesh Publications.
4. Linear Integrated circuits: Roy Choudhary & Jain- Wiely Eastern Publications.
5. Integrated circuits: K R Botkar
TRANSDUCERS AND RECORDING SYSTEMS

A506 3+1+0
Module 1
Transducers - definition and classification, Electrical transducers, selecting a transducer
Temperature measurements: standards and calibration, thermal expansion methods - bimetalic
thermometers, liquid in glass thermometers, vapour pressure thermometers.
Module 2
Termocouple - principle, fundamental laws, reference junction considerations, types of
thermocouples, industrial thermocouples, thermopiles. Resistance temperature detectors - Principle
measurements using three wire and four wire bridge circuits, solid state sensors, quartz
thermometers, optical pyrometers, digital thermometers.
Module 3
Displacement transducers: variable resistance transducers, variable inductance transducers, LVDT -
construction, principle, characteristics, advantages, Variable capacitance transducers, piezo-electric
transducers, digital displacement transducers.
Module 4
Strain measurements: strain gauges - different types, resistive- semiconductor and optical strain
gauges, strain gauge circuits, temperature compensation, Practical Applications
503
Module 5
Recorders: Strip chart recorders, galvanometric recorders, servo recorders, oscillographic recorders,
magnetic recorders, direct recording, FM recording, digital recorders, electro mechanical recorders.
Display devices, Classification of displays, cathode ray tube, LEDs in direct and indirect bandgap
materials, typical uses of LEDs, Liquid crystal displays, theory of liquid crystal display operation,
typical use of LCDs.
Text Books
1. Beckwith: Mechanical Mesurements 5/e, Pearson Education

2. D V S Murthy, Transducers and Instrumentation, prentice Hall of India Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi
3. B S Sonde, Transducers and Display Systems, Tata Mc Graw Hill, New Delhi, 1979
References
1. E A Doeblin, Measurements Systems - Application and Design, Mc Graw Hill, N Y, 1990.

2. J W Dally, W.F Riley and K G McConnel, Instrumentation for Engineering Measurements, John
Wiley and sons Inc., N.Y, 1993.
DIGITAL IC LABORATORY
LA 507 0+0+4
List of experiments
1. TTL & CMOS characteristics (7400, CD4001)

2. Interfacing of TTL & electromagnetic relay using transistor, opto coupler (4N33) & Darlington
arrays (ULN2803).
3. Logic family interconnection (TTL to CMOS & CMOS to TTL)
4. Design of half adder & full adder using gates.
5. Design and testing of ripple & synchronous counters using JK flip flops(7473, 7476)
6. Counters using shift registers (Ring counter & Johnson counter).
7. Study of counter ICs (7490, 74190).
8. Design of astable & mono-stable multi-vibrators using gates.
9. Design of mono-shots using dedicated ICs (74123).
10. Logic design using multiplexers (74150).
11. Logic design using decoders (74138).
12. Adders, Subtractors, multipliers.
13. Design of 7 segment display circuits-static/dynamic (7447, FND542).
14. PRBS generator.
15. Digital circuit simulation using electronic work bench/ similar working tools.
Note
Any experiment related to LA402 may be added to the above list.
MEASUREMENTS LAB
A 508
1. Triggered linear sweeps circuits.
504
2. Op amp measurements: input offset voltage, input offset current, open loop gain, common mode
input resistance, slew rate, CMRR, full power band width comparison of different classes of opamps
(2 expts)
3. Op Amp basic circuits, Multivibrators and Oscillators
4. Dual trace generator.
5. ADC & DAC. (2expts).
6. Instrumentation amplifier & differential amplifiers measurements
7. Sample and hold circuits & measurements of rise time and fall time
8. Transducer measurements.
a. Diode thermometer
b. LVDT
c. strain gauge.
d. pressure transducer.
e. thermocouple (2 expts)
9. Voltage regulators, Ics - LM 723,78XX, 79XX family.
Study of Storage Oscilloscopes.
505
SIXTH SEMESTER
506
INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT & ECONOMICS
LA 601 3+2+0
PART A: Industrial Management
Module 1
Modern concept of Management: Scientific management-Functions of management-Planning -
Organising- Staffing – Directing – Motivating - Communicating- Co-ordinating- Controlling -
Organisational structures- Line, Line and staff and Functional relationships- Span of control-
Delegation- Management by Objectives.
Module 2
Personnel management: Objectives and functions of personnel management- Recruitment-Selection
and training of workers- Labour Welfare- Industrial Fatigue- Industrial disputes-Trade Unions-
Quality circles. Formation of companies: Proprietory-Partnership-Joint stock companies- Public
sector- Joint sector and Co-operative sector.
Module 3
Marketing Management: Pricing- Promotion- Channels of distribution- Market research-Advertising.
Production Management: Batch and mass production- Inventory control- EOQ-Project planning by
PERT/CPM- Construction of Network (Basic ideas only).
PART B: Economics
Module 4
Theory of demand and supply- Price mechanism- Factors of production- Land, labour, capital and
organization- National income- Difficulties in estimation- Taxation- Direct and indirect taxes-
Progressive and regressive- Black money- Inflation-Causes and consequences.
Module 5
Indian financial system- Reserve bank of India: Functions - Commercial banking system-
Development financial institutions - IDBI- ICICI- SIDBI- IRBI- NABARD- Investment institutions
– UTI - Insurance companies - Indian capital market- Stock market- Functions- Role of the public
sector - Privatisation- Multinational corporations and their impact on the Indian economy.
References
1. Industrial Management - O P Khanna, Dhanpat Rai Pub.

2. Industrial Management - K.K. Ahuja, Khanna Pub.
3. Marketing Management - Philip Kotler, PHI
4. Indian economy - A.N. Agarwal, Wishwa Prakashan
5. Modern economic theory - K.K Dewett, Shyam Lal charitable trust.
MICROPROCESSORS AND MICROCONTROLLERS

A602 3+1+0
Module 1
507
Introduction to microprocessors and microcomputers: Function of microprocessors- architecture of
8085- pin configuration and functions – tristate bus concept - generation of control signals - bus
timings – de-multiplexing AD0-AD7 – flags - memory decoding - interfacing of RAM and EPROM -
I/O addressing - I/O mapped I/O - and memory mapped I/O schemes - instruction execution -
fetch/execute cycle - instruction timings and operation status.
Module 2
Atmel AT89C51 microcontroller – features - pin configurations - internal block schematic - pin
descriptions - PORT0, PORT1, PORT2, PORT3, idle & power down mode - power control register -
program protection modes - flash programming & verification.
Module 3
Memory organization - program memory - data memory - direct & indirect addressing area -
Program status word - register banks - addressing modes - instruction set – arithmetic - logical and
data transfer instructions - Boolean instructions - program branching instructions - Programming
examples.
Module 4
Machine cycles – interrupts - interrupt sources - interrupt enable register - interrupt priority -
interrupt control system - interrupt handling - single step operation - port bit latches and buffers -
port structures and operation - accessing external memory – programming examples.
Module 5
Timer0 & Timer1 - TMOD SFR - mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3 - TCON SFR - serial interface -
SCON SFR - mode0, mode1, mode2, mode3- block schematics- baud rates- power on reset circuit-
ONCE mode- on chip oscillator- external program & data memory timing diagrams- I/O port timings
– programming examples.
References

2. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International
3. Microprocessors and Architecture: Ramesh S Goankar
4. Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI
5. Web site of Atmel - www.atmel.com

LTA 603 3+1+0
Module1
Review of signals and systems. Introduction - advantages and limitations of Digital Signal
508
Module 2
Finite Impulse Response (FIR) Filters: Linear phase FIR filters- Frequency response of linear phase
FIR filters - Location of the zeros of linear phase FIR filters. Realization of FIR- cascade - lattice
design-Fourier Series method- using windows-rectangular- triangular or Barlett windows – Hanning
– Hamming – Blackman - Kaiser windows.
Module 3
Module 4
Module 5
general study.
References
1. Digital signal processing: Ifechor- Pearson edn.

2. Desecrate time signal processing: Oppenhiem- Pearson edn.
3. Digital signal processing: Oppenhiem and Sheffer- PHI
4. Introduction to Digital signal processing: Johny R Johnson
5. Digital signal processing: Proakis and Manolakis.
6. Digital signal processing: P Ramesh Babu- Scitech Pub.
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION - I
A604 2+1+0
Module 1
Functional descriptions of measuring Instruments-Functional elements of an Instrument, active and
passive transducers, analog and digital modes of operation, null and deflection methods, static and
dynamic characteristics.
Module 2
Basic methods of force measurement- characteristics of elastic force transducers, resolution of vector
forces and moments in to rectangular components
509
Module 3
Torque measurement - torque measurement on rotating shafts, dynamometers, gyroscopic force and
torque measurement, vibrating - wire force tranducers, strain gauge, feedback and optical methods.
Module 4
Level measurement-float displacer, bubbler, capacitance, radioisotope and ultrasound type. Flow
meters: Area flow meters, mass flow meters, positive displacement type and electric type flow
meters.
Module 5
Pressure measurement - Manometers, elastic types, bell gauges, electrical types. Vacuum
measurement, differential pressure transmitters, sound pressure level measurement, accoustic
intensity.
References
1. Doebelin - Measurement systems - Application and Design-IVth ed.. MGL, 1990

2. Patranabis - Principles of Industrial Instrumentation - 2nd ed., TMH, 1996
3. James W.Dally - Instrumentation for Engineering Measurement - 2nd ed., 1993, Wiley International
DATA COMMUNICATION
A605 4+1+0
Module 1
Data transmission concepts and terminology - Analog and digital data transmission- transmission
impairments - transmission media
Data encoding - digital data, digital - signals - digital data, analog signals - analog data, digital
signals - analog data analog signals. Asynchronous and synchronous transmission - error detection
techniques interfacing.
Module 2
Multiplexing: Frequency division multiplexing - synchronous time division multiplexing - statistical
time division multiplexing.
Circuit Switching: Introduction - single node networks - digital switching concepts - digital private
& branch exchange - control signaling
Packet switching: principles - example systems, virtual circuits and data grams - routing traffic
control - X.25
Module 3
Local and metropolitan area networks: LAN/MAN technology - different topologies - optical fibre
bus - medium access control protocols - LAN/MAN standards
Module 4
Computer Communication Architecture protocols - the OSI model - the TCP/IP protocol - System
network architecture - principles of inter networking - the bridge - routing with bridges -
connectionless internetworking - connection oriented internetworking
Module 5
ISDN: overview of ISDN - transmission structure - user access - ISDN protocols -broad band ISDN.
510
References
1. William stallings - Data and Computer Communication (4th ed.)-PHI

2. Larry Haghes - Introduction to Data Communication - a practical approach - Jones and Bartiett
Publishers
CONTROL SYSTEM THEORY

A606 3+1+0
Module 1
Laplace transforms to linear systems, transfer function of linear systems-- simple mechanical and
electromechanical systems. Analogous Systems: force voltage and force current analogy. Block
diagram algebra, signal flow graphs - Mason’s gain formula.
Module 2
Standard test signals - Time response of first and second order systems - natural frequency and
damping ratio. Time response specifications. Steady state and dynamic error coefficients.
Module 3
Concept of stability, Routh’s stability criterion, root locus technique - stability analysis.
Frequency response analysis: frequency Open loop and closed loop control systems: examples,
applications of domain specification, Bode plots.
Module 4
Nyquist plots, gain margin and phase margin, Nyquist stability criterion. Closed loop frequency
response; Constant M and N circles, Nichols chart
Module 5
Introduction to control system design - preliminary considerations - lead, lag and lead - lag
compensation, Design of lead compensators and lag compensators. Elements of discrete control
systems - transfer functions of discrete data systems stability of closed loop discrete system - jury’s
test bilinear transformation method
Text Books
1. I J Nagarath and M.Gopal - Control Systems Engineering - New Age International Ltd. - New Delhi
2. B.C Kuo - Automatic Control Systems-Prentice Hall of India - New Delhi
Reference
1. K Ogata - Modern Control Engineering - Prentice hall of India - New Delhi
INSTRUMENTATION LAB
A607 0+0+3
1. Measurements using different types of transducers
511
a. Variable capacitance type
b. Variable inductance type
c. LVDT
d. Thermocouples and RTDs
e. Photocells
2. Measurement of level, distance, vibration
3. Calibration of pressure gauges, temperature transmitter, E to P Conveter, differential pressure
transmitter etc
4. PC based data acqusition system
5. Phase locked loops, frequency to voltage converter, voltage to frequency converter
6. GPIB/RS232C interfacing of function generator and universal counter with PC
7. Robotic trainer kit - PC based control of robotic actions
8. Programmable logic controllers - ladder disgrams
MINI PROJECT
A608 0+0+3
Each student should conceive, design, develop and realize an electronic product. The basic elements
of product design - the function ergonomics and aesthetics - should be considered while conceiving
and designing the product. The electronic part of the product should be an application of the analog
& digital system covered up to the 6th semester. The student should submit the report at the end of
the semester. The product should be demonstrated at the time of examination.
512
SEVENTH SEMESTER
513
MICRO-CONTROLLER BASED SYSTEM DESIGN
LA701 2+1+0
Module 1
Various logic families - features – comparison – PLA – PAL- GAL -comparison – combinational
PAL – PAL with flip-flops – study of 16L8, 22V10 GAL – dual port RAM – FIFO - FPGA - gate
arrays.
Module 2
Embedded C compiler – advantages – memory models – interrupt functions – code optimization -
89C2051 micro-controller- architecture-comparison with 89C51- design of a simple trainer circuit
using 89C51/89C2051 µC – interfacing of DIP switch, LED, 7 segment display, alphanumeric LCD
– relay interface – design of a traffic light control system - interfacing programs using C and
assembly language.
Module 3
Analog to digital converters- single slope, dual slope, successive approximation, sigma delta, flash –
comparison - typical ICs - A/D interface – digital to analog converters – different types – D/A
interface - optically isolated triac interface- design of a temperature control system- interfacing
programs using C and assembly language.
Module 4
Serial bus standards - I2C bus, SPI bus – operation – timing diagrams – 2 wire serial EEPROM –
24C04 – 3wire serial EEPROM – 93C46 - interfacing - serial communication standards - RS232,
RS422, RS485 – comparison – MAX232 line driver/ receiver - interfacing – interfacing programs
using C and assembly language - low voltage differential signaling – PC printer port – registers –
interfacing - universal serial bus – PCI bus.
Module 5
Matrix key board interface - AT keyboard – commands – keyboard response codes - watch dog
timers - DS1232 watch dog timer – real time clocks – DS1302 RTC – interfacing - measurement of
frequency - phase angle - power factor – stepper motor interface - dc motor speed control – L293
motor driver - design of a position control system - interfacing programs using C and assembly
language.
References

2. The 8051 Microcontroller: Kenneth J Ayala, Penram International.
3. Digital fundamentals: Floyd, Pearson Education.
4. Programming and customizing the 8051 µC: Myke Predko, TMH
5. Programming with ANSI C and turbo C: Kamthane, Pearson Education.
6. Microcomputers and Microprocessors: John Uffenbeck, PHI.
7. Web site of Atmel semiconductors - www.atmel.com
VLSI TECHNOLOGY
LA 702 3+1+0
514
Module 1
Process steps in IC fabrication: Crystal growth and wafer preparation- Czochralski process-
apparatus- silicon shaping, slicing and polishing- Diffusion of impurities- physical mechanism-
Fick’s I and II law of diffusion- Diffusion profiles- complementary (erfc) error function- Gaussian
profile- Ion implantation- Annealing process- Oxidation process- Lithography- Photolithography,
Fine line lithography, electron beam and x-ray lithography- Chemical vapour deposition (CVD)-
epitaxial growth- reactors- metallisation- patterning- wire bonding and packaging.
Module 2
Transistor fabrication- buried layer- impurity profile- parasitic effects- monolithic diodes- schottky
diodes and transistors- FET structures- JFET- MOSFET- PMOS and NMOS, control of threshold
voltage (Vth)- silicon gate technology- Monolithic resistors- sheet resistance and resistor design-
resistors in diffused regions- MOS resistors- monolithic capacitors- junction and MOS structures- IC
Module 3
Module 4
gates, CMOS logic systems – bus lines- arrangements- power dissipation- power supply rail
Module 5
References
1. VLSI technology: S M Sze, Mc Graw Hill pub.

2. Basic VLSI design: Douglas Pucknell, PHI.
INDUSTRIAL INSTRUMENTATION - II
A703 3+1+0
Module 1
Measurement viscosity of density, specific gravity scales used in petroleum industries-Different
methods of measuring consistency and viscosity –Methods for measuring moistures and humidity –
Electrical conductivity – Dielectric constant-Automatic electric psycho meter
Module 2
515
PH and conductivity meters- pH measurement – pH electrode station – various types of electrodes –
Installation and maintenances of pH meters – conductivity meters – Electrical conductivity of
solution – cell construction operating principles.
Module 3
Gas Analysis – Chemical absorption, thermal conductivity, magnetic type, Gas chromagraphy,
infrared and ultraviolet light, mass spectometer, propotional counters, Geigor Muller counter,
Scintillation counter.
Module 4
Measurement of speed- Mechanical- Electrical- Electronic methods- stroboscopic method –
Measurement of acceleration- various types- calibrations.
Module 5
Power plant instrumentation- Diesel electrical power plants, Gas turbine power plants, gas and steam
turbines combined cycles, nuclear reactors, fluctuating loads on power plants. Instrumentation and
control of power plants.
References
1. DOEBLIN: Measurement systems, applications and design, Mc Graw Hill. Pub.Co.

2. D.Patranabis: Principles of Industrial Instrumentation, Mc Graw Hills Pub.Co.
3. NAKRA, CHAUDBRY: Instrumentation Measurement and Analysis Mc Graw Hill. Pub.Co.
4. ECKMAN: Industrial Instrumentation- Wiley Eastern
PROCESS DYNAMICS AND CONTROL

A 704 2+1+0
Module 1
Process Dynamics – Process Variables – Degree of freedom – Characterization of physical systems –
Dynamics of liquid, gas and thermal process – Interacting and non interacting systems – Continuous
and batch process – Self regulation and servo regulation operation – Problems.
Module 2
Control actions and controllers – Basic control actions – Characteristics of two position, multi
position, floating, proportional I, D Control modes – Composite control modes – PI, PD, PID control
modes – pneumatic and electronic controllers to realize various control actions
Module 3
Optimum controller settings: Evaluation criteria, 1/4th decay ratio, IAE, ISE, ITAE – determination
of optimum settings for mathematically described process using time response and frequency
response – Tuning – Process reaction curve method, Continuous cycling metho, Damped oscillation
method.
Module 4
516
Final control element: I/P converter – Pneumatic, electric and hydraulic actuators – Valve positioner
– Control valves – Effective valve characteristics, Valve body – globe, butterfly, diaphragm, Ball
valves – Value seizing, cavitation, flouting.
Module 5
Complex control system: Cascade control – Feed forward control, Ratio control, Multivariable
control. Piping and Instrumentation diagram, Case study – Distillation column control – Combustion
control and drum level control in steam boiler.
References
1. Peter Harriot, Process control – Tata McGraw Hill

2. D. Patranabis, Principles of Process Control – Tata McGraw Hill
3. Curtis Johnson, Process Control Instrumentation Technology – Eastern economy Edition
4. D.P. Eckman, Automatic Process Control – Wiley Eastern
5. Bela G Liptak, Process Control, Instrument Engineers Handbook
6. Donald R Coughanowr, Process System Analysis and Control – McGraw Hill
BIOMEDICAL INSTRUMENTATION
A 705 3+1+0
Module 1
Human Anatomy & Physiology: Anatomy & Physiology of major systems of the body. Principles of
generation and propagation of bioelectric potentials. Electrical activity of heart, propagation of
action through nerves, conduction velocity and latency. EMG, EMC, ECG, ERG, EEG, EGG, MEG.
Electrical Safety - Physiological effects of electricity, Micro & macro shock hazards. Electrical
safety codes & Standards. Protection of patients, power distribution and equipment design
Module 2
Electrodes & Transducers: Bio potential electrodes - different types of electrodes, polarisable &
nonpolarisable electrodes. Theory of electrode - skin interface. Electrode behaviour & circuit
models. Electrodes for stimulation.
Transducers, Leads & electrodes: transducers for biological applications - transduction principles,
different types - active and passive transducers, implantable transducers, transducers for pressure,
flow, pulse, respiration. Chemical sensors.
Leads & Electrodes: Types, Materilas, properties, characteristics. Method of application and
selection - equivalent circuits of leads & electrodes.
Module 3
Biopotential amplifiers, recoders & monitors:
Amplifiers: for ECG, EMG & EEG - basic requirements, design considerations - frequency, gain etc.
ECG: Working principles, electrode systems and clinical applications
EEG: Working Principles, lead system and clinical applications
EMG: Working Principles and clinical applications. Evoked potential systems, determination of
conduction velocity and latency.
Phonocardiolography - principle and clinical applications
Biopotential recording - Noise, motion artfact and other considerations
Recorders: Potentiometre, galvanometre, electrostatic UV recorder and magnetic tape recorder
517
Module 4
Diagnosis and therapeutic Equipments:
Diagnosis Equipments - Electronic BP Monitors, pulse monitors, electrocardioscope, spirometer,
pulse oxi meter, ECG machine, EEG machine, EMG machine, EOG machine, ERG machine, PH
meter, auto analyser, gas analysers.
Module 5
Therapeutic Equipments - Pacemakers, Defibrillator, heart - lung machine, nerve and muscle
stimulators, dialysis machines, Surgical diathermy equipment, micro wave - short wave and
ultrasound diathermy equipments, Nebuliser, Inhalator, Aspirator, Humidifier and ventillators.
Electrical Safety - Physiological effects of electricity, Micro & macro shock hazards. Electrical
safety codes & Standards. Protection of patients, power distribution and equipment design.
Text Books
1. Leslie Cromwell, Fred J. Weibell and Erich A Pferffer - Biomedical Instrumentation and
Measurements - Prentice Hall of India, 1990
2. R.S Khandpur - Handbook of Biomedical Instrumentation - Tata Mc Graw – Hill
References
1. John G. Webster - Medical Instrumentation - Application and Design - Houghton mifflin company,
Boston
2. John C. Cobbold - Tranducers for Biomedical measurements - John wiley & Sons
3. Jacob Kline- Hand book of Biomedical Engineering - Academic Press INC

CMELRTA 706-1 3+1+0


Module 3 Unconstrained minimization


Module 5 Network Techniques

518
References
1. Optimization theory and application: S.S. Rao, New Age International P. Ltd.
2. Optimization Concepts and applications in Engineering: A. D. Belegundu, T.R. Chandrupatla,
3. Principles of Operations Research for Management: - F.S.Budnick, D. McLeavey, R. Mojena,
Richard D. Irwin, INC
4. Operation Research an introduction: H. A. Taha, Eastern Economy Edition.
5. Operations Research: R. Panneerselvam, PHI
OBJECT ORIENTED PROGRAMMING IN C++ (ELECTIVE - I)

LA706-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to loops: Evolution of object oriented languages - Support for experiments and structure
- process of language translation – Need of objects - Definition of Object - Oriented Language.
Module 2
Encapsulation & Inheritance: Building classes - Declaring objects Member functions - constructors
and destructors members access control.
Module 3
POLYMORPHISM - Virtual functions - Defining virtual functions – Usage of virtual functions -
Abstract classes - simulation using abstract classes.
Module 4
OVERLOADING: Overloading functions - Overloading operators to provide new meaning -
Selecting Friend or Member Functions for Operator Overloading.
Module 5
DYNAMIC OBJECTS: Dynamic object allocation - Using references with dynamic memory
allocation - Inline functions outside class definitions - Friend functions, Applications - Object
oriented databases case study – some language (Simula, Smalltalk, C++, Ada) features.
References
1. Data abstraction & OOP in C++: Gordenkeeth, Wiley Eastern.

2. Object oriented programming with C++: E. Balaguruswamy, TMH.
3. C++: Strostrout.
4. Object Oriented Programming in C++: Nabajyoti Bjarne.
FUZZY SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - I)

A 706-3 3+2+0
Module 1
519
Introduction to Fuzzy sets and systems. Basics of fuzzy sets membership function, support of a fuzzy
set, height - normalised fuzzy set, α - cuts (decomposition of a fuzzy set), set theoretic definitions
on fuzzy sets, complement, intersection and union equality, subsethood - basic definition based on
membership functions.
Module 2
The law of the excluded middle and law of contradiction on fuzzy sets. Properties of fuzzy sets
operations (logical proof only). Extension of fuzzy sets concepts - type-2 and level 2 fuzzy sets -
examples.
Module 3
Operations on fuzzy sets - intersection, algebraic sum - product, bounded sum - product, drastic sum
product, t-norms and t-conorms(s - norms) on fuzzy sets, typical parameterised t - norms and s-
norms (with simplified proof). Extension principle and its applications.
Module 4
Fuzzy relation. Resolution form of a binary fuzzy relation. Operations on fuzzy relations -
projection, max-min. and min and max, compositions cylindric extension. Similarity relations -
reflexivity, symmetry, transitivity.
Module 5
Further operations on fuzzy sets and proposed by Zadeh - concentration dilation, contrast
Intensification, a linguistic hedges, computation of the meaning of values of a linguistic variable,
fuzzy algorithms, fuzzy engineering - applications of fuzzy controls, case studies.
References
1. C.T lin & C S George Lee. Neural Fuzzy Systems, Prentice Hall.
2. Earl Cox. Fuzzy Systems Handbook, Associated Press
3. Klir and Yuan, Fuzzy Sets and Fuzzy Logic: Theory and Applications, Prentice Hall of India.
4. IEEE Trans on Systems, Man & Cybernetics, vol. SMC - 3, No.1, January 1973, pp 28-44
5. Bart Kosko. Fuzzy Engineering, Prentice Hall.
6. Bart Kosko. Fuzzy Thinking, Hooper Collins Publications.
ARTIFICAL INTELLIGENCE & EXPERT SYSTEMS (ELECTIVE - 1)

LA706-4 3+1+0
Definitions- AI applications- Data, information and knowledge problems and problem space,
problem characteristics, forward and backward reasoning means – ends – analysis – puzzle
problems, Tower of Hanoi problem, game playing.
Module 2 Search
Search strategies, AND OR graphs, Heuristic search methods A and AO* algorithms, MIN – MAX
strategies, Alpha – Beta cut offs.
Module 3 Knowledge representation

Propositional logic predicate logic, conversion of WFF to clause form, resolution, Unification,
resolution – refutation system, question answering – non monotinic reasoning, fuzzy logics.
520
Module 4 Knowledge Structure
Semantic nets, frames, scripts, conceptual dependency – learning knowledge acquisition, different
methods of learning.
Module 5 Knowledge engineering and Expert Systems

Structure of an expert system, distinctive features – case studies.
Text Books
1. Rich E., Artificial Intelligence, MGH
References
1. Nison N.J., Problem solving methods in Artificial Intelligence, MGH

2. Winston P.H., Artificial Intelligence, Academic Press, 1977

LA 706-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Module 2
systems, hybrid systems, task control block - task status, scheduling – uni-processor scheduling –
Module 3
issues, protocols – contention – based, token - based, stop and go multi-loop, polled bus, hierarchal,
Module 4
Module 5
521
Text Book
1. Real Time Systems - C.M Krishna, Kang G. Shini (McGraw Hill)
References

2. Real Time Systems - Krishna, Tata McGraw Hill
MICROPROCESSOR AND MICROCONTROLLER LAB

LA707 0+0+3
1. Familiarization of 8085 trainer kit, manual code entry, simple examples.

2. Design and construction of a simple flash programmer for 89C51/89C2051 µC.
3. Study of Intel Hex file format.
4. Computer aided assembly language program development for 89C51/89C2051.
5. Use of assembler, linker and simulator for 89C51/89C2051.
6. Programming examples. Sorting, arithmetic operations (Using assembler, simulator).
7. Programming examples using Embedded ‘C’ compiler for 89C51/89C2051.
8. Programming examples using timer, external interrupts.
9. Design and construction of the following interfacing modules.
a. A/D converter.
b. D/A converter.
c. Alphanumeric LCD display.
d. Matrix keyboard interface.
e. Seven segment display.
f. Extending I/O port using shift registers (74HC595, 74HC165).
g. Stepper motor.
h. Infra red transmission and reception.
i. Opto isolated I/P and O/P.
j. Serial EEPROM.
k. Real time clock.
l. Interfacing using RS 232 and printer port.
Note
Any other embedded processor with similar or better capability may be used instead of
89C51/89C2051.
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS LAB

A 708 0+0+3
522
List of Experiments
1. Linear Ramp Firing Circuit.

2. Study of PWMIC TL 494.
3. Battery Charger.
4. Step up DC – DC Converter.
5. Push pull DC – DC Converter.
6. Application of Opto coupler IC MCT2E.
7. AC Phase Control Circuit.
8. Study of DC Drive.
9. Regulation Characteristics of DC Drive.
10. Half bridge and Full bridge Converters
PROJECT DESIGN & SEMINAR

A 709 0+0+2
PROJECT DESIGN
The student is expected to complete the design of the project work and submit the design phase
report.
SEMINAR
The student is expected to present a seminar in one of the current topics in Electronics,
Instrumentation, Computers, Information Technology, Control Systems and related areas. The
student will undertake a detailed study on the chosen subject and submit seminar report at the end of
the semester.
523
EIGHTH SEMESTER
524
COMPUTER NETWORKS
LA 801 3+1+0
Module 1
Network goals -topologies- configurations-concept of internet- ISO-OSI 7 Layer Standard -peer
processes-Functions of each layer-TCP/IP reference model - Transmission media -description and
characteristics - base band and broad band transmission-synchronous and asynchronous -full duplex,
half duplex links- Concepts of WAP technology.
Module 2
MODEMS-serial communication standards - X-21 digital interface- Need for data link layer-stop
and wait and sliding window protocol-HDLC-terminal handling- polling-multiplexing-
concentration-virtual circuit and data-grams - routing -congestion control.
Module 3
LAN- base band and broad band Lan’s - carrier sense networks-CSMA/CD -ring network- shared
memory -IEEE802 standards-introduction to X-25. Transport layer- design issues- establishing and
releasing connection - flow control – buffering - crash recovery - a simple transport protocol on X-
25.
Module 4
Session layer- design issues -data exchange - dialogue management - synchronization- remote
procedure call-client server model - Presentation layer-data presentation-compression- network
security-privacy- cryptography- presentation layer in ARPANET.
Module 5
Application layer - virtual terminal - file transfer protocol-E-mail-introduction to distributed system -
ATM-protocol architecture -ATM logical connections -ATM cells -cell transmission- ATM
adaptation layer -AAL protocols -basic principles of SDH and SONET.
References
1. Computer Networks: Andrew S Tannenbaum, Pearson Education.

2. An Engineering Approach to Computer Networking: Keshav, Pearson Education.
3. Computer Networking: A Top Down Approach: Kurose Pearson Education.
4. Computer Network & Internet: Comer, Pearson Education.
5. Data communication: Hausly
6. Computer Networks, protocols standards & interfaces, Uyless Balack
7. Local Area Networks: William Stallings, Pearson Education.
8. Understanding Data Communication and networks- 2nd ed-William A Shay (Vikas Thomson
Learning)
MODERN CONTROL THEORY

A802 3+1+0
Module 1
525
Limitation of Conventional Control Theory. Concepts of state variable and state model - state model
for linear time invariant systems.
State space representation of dynamic systems: physical notion of system state, block diagram
representations. Lagrang’s equations – examples
Module 2
Transformation of state variables, solution of differential equations in state space form, interpretation
and properties of the state transition matrix, solution by the laplace transform, the resolvent, transfer
function from state model, state space representations of transfer functions.
Decomposition of Transfer functions: Direct, cascade and parallel decomposition technique.
Module 3
State space modelling of systems: Inverted pendulum on a cart, Temperature control - two
capacitance system, spring coupled masses, distillation column, instrument servo, missile guidance
dynamics. Controllability and Observability: Physical interpretation, Kalman’s and Gilbert’s tests,
Effect of pole - zero cancellation, detectability and stabilisability.
Module 4
Shaping the dynamic response - Design of regulators for single input single output systems, Bass-
gura pole placement formula, Multiple input systems, disturbances and tracking systems: exogenous
variables.
Linear observers: Need of observers, structure and properties of observers, pole placement for single
output systems.
Module 5
Introduction to MATLAB - MATLAB functions - m - files- analysis and design of control systems
using MATLAB, Simulink - construction and analysis of simple models - modelling of systems
given in module II
References
1. B.Friedland - Control System Design - An Introduction to state space methods - Mc Graw Hill, Inc.
NY
2. T. Kailath - Linear systems - Prentice Hall Inc., Englewood cliffs. N J
3. C. Chen - Analog and Digital Control System Design - Transfer function, State Space and
algebraic methods, Saunders College Publishing, N.Y
4. A Nagooe Kani – Advanced Control Theory
ADVANCED MICROPROCESSORS
LA 803 3+1+0
Module 1
Intel 8086 Microprocessor - Internal architecture – Block diagram – Minimum and maximum mode
operation – Interrupt and Interrupt applications – DMA data transfer – 8087 math coprocessor.
526
8086 memory organization – even and odd memory banks – segment registers – logical and physical
address – advantages and disadvantages of physical memory
Module 2
Addressing modes used in 80x86 family
Data addressing mode – register addressing, immediate addressing, direct addressing, register
indirect addressing, base plus index addressing, register relative addressing, base relative plus index
addressing, scaled addressing.
Program memory addressing modes - direct program memory addressing, relative program memory
addressing.
Stack memory addressing mode.
Module 3
Intel 80286 Microprocessor
80286 Architecture, system connection – Real address mode operation – Protected mode operation
Module 4
Intel 80386 Microprocessor
80386 Architecture and system connection – Real operating mode – 386 protected mode operation –
segmentation and virtual memory – segment privilege levels and protection – call gates – I/O
privilege levels – Interrupts and exception handling – task switching – paging mode – 80386 virtual
86 mode operation.
Module 5
Advanced Intel Microprocessors
80486 – Processor model – Reduced Instruction cycle – five stage instruction pipe line – Integrated
coprocessor – On board cache – Burst Bus mode.
Pentium – super scalar architecture – u-v pipe line – branch prediction logic – cache structure –
BIST (built in self test) – Introduction to MMX technology.
References
1. The Microprocessors, 6th Edition - Barry B. Brey Pearson Edu.

2. Microprocessor and Interfacing 2nd Edition - Douglous V. Hall TMH
3. The 80x86 family - John Uffenbeck
COMPUTERISED PROCESS CONTROL

A804 3+1+0
Module 1
Programmable Logic Devices:
Basic Concepts- Programming Technologies. Programmable Logic Array (PLA)- Programmable
Array Logic (PAL)- Design and Application
527
Module 2
Programmable Logic Controllers:
Combinational logic controllers, sequential logic controllers, logic controller design using
programmable logic devices, Introduction to programmable logic controllers - PLC programming
languages, Commercially available PLCs, Microprocessor based PLCs.
Module 3
Distributed Control Systems - Part 1
Basic packages, cost estimating, data highways – field buses, multiplexers and remote terminal units,
CRT displays, flow sheet symbols, I/O hardware and setpoint stations.
Module 4
Distributed Control Systems - Part II
Supervisory computer tasks and configurations, system integration with PLCs and computers, Fibre -
Optic local area networks: MAP and TOP, Fieldbuses, MAP, TOP.
Module 5
Network protocols:
Printers, Operator interfaces, workstations, wiring practices and signal conditioning, communication
systems, case study- Allen- Bradlley Protocol (AB. Protocol)
References
1. Enrique Mandado, Jorge Marcos, Serafin A Perrez, - Programmable Logic Devices and logic
Controllers - Prentice Hall- 1996
2. Dobrivoje Popovic and Vijay P. Bhatkar - Distributed Computer Control for Industrial Automation -
Marcel Dekker, INC, 1990.
3. B.G Liptak - Handbook of Process Control - 1996
ROBOTICS (ELECTIVE - II)

A805-1
Module1 Robot Organization

Coordinate transformation – Kinematics and inverse kinematics – trajectory planning and remote
manipulation.
Module 2 Robot hardware

Robot sensors – Proximity Sensors – Range Sensors – Tactile Sensors – Visual Sensors – Auditory
Sensors. Robot Manipulators – Manipulator Dynamics – Manipulator Control –wrists – End
effectors – Robot Grippers.
Module 3 Robot and Artificial Intelligence

Principles of all Basics of Learning – planning Movement – Basics of Knowledge Representation –
Robot programming languages.
Module 4 Robotic Vision Systems

Principles of edge detection – Determining of optical flow and shape – image segmentation – Pattern
recognition – model director sense analysis.
528
Module 5 Robot control and Application
Robot control using voice and infrared – overview of robot application – prosthetic devices – Robots
in material handling, processing, assembly and storage.
References
1. Koren, “Robtics for Engineers”, McGraw Hill Int. Co Tokyo 1985

2. Hall and Hall” Robotics – A User Friendly Introduction”, Saunders Publishing Company, 1985
3. Vokobravotic “Introduction to Robotics”, Springer 1988
4. Lee, Gonzalez aqnd Fu “ Robotics (11 Ed)”, IEEE Press, 1986
5. Charniakand, Mcdermott, “Roboty Technology ande Applications”, Springer 1985
6. Charniac & Mcdermott, “Introduction to Artificial Intelligence”, Mc Graw Hill, 1986
7. P Janaki Raman, “Robotics”, Tata Mcgraw Hill
VHDL (ELECTIVE - II)

LA805-2 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction: Hardware Abstraction- Basic Terminology- Entity Declaration- Architecture Body-
Configuration Declaration- Package Declaration- Package Body- Model Analysis- Simulation- Basic
Language Elements –Identifiers- Data Objects- Data Types- Operators.
Module 2
Behavioural Modelling: Entity Declaration- Architecture Body-Process Statement- Variable
Assignment Statement- Signal Assignment Statement- Wait Statement- If Statement - Case
Statement- Null Statement- Loop Statement- Exit Statement- Next Statement- Assertion Statement-
Report Statement- Other Sequential Statements- Multiple Processes- Postponed Processes -
Dataflow Modelling: Concurrent Signal Assignment Statement- Concurrent versus Sequential Signal
Assignment- Delta Delay Revisited- Multiple Drivers- Conditional Signal Assignment Statement-
Selected Signal Assignment Statement- the UNAFFECTED Value- Block Statement- Concurrent
Assertion Statement- Value of a Signal.
Module 3
Structural Modelling: Component Declaration- Component Instantiation- Resolving Signal Values -
Generics and Configurations: Generics- Configurations- Configuration Specification- Configuration
Declaration- Default Rules - Conversion Functions - Direct Instantiation- Incremental Binding.
Module 4
Subprograms and Overloading: Subprograms- Subprogram Overloading- Operator Overloading-
Signatures- Default Values for Parameters - Packages and Libraries: Package Declaration- Package
Body-Design File- Design Libraries-Order of Analysis- Implicit Visibility- Explicit Visibility.
Module 5
Advanced Features: Entity Statements- Generate Statements- Aliases- Qualified Expressions- Type
Conversions- Guarded Signals- Attributes- Aggregate Targets- Shared Variables- Groups - Model
Simulation: Simulation- Writing a Test Bench- Converting Real and Integer to Time- Dumping
Results into a Text Fi1e- Reading Vectors from a Text File- A Test Bench Example- Initialising a
Memory- Variable File Names- Hardware Modelling Examples: Modelling Entity interfaces-
529
Modelling Simple Elements- - Different Styles of Modelling- Modelling Regular Structures-
Modelling Delays- Modelling Conditional Operations- Modelling Synchronous Logic- State
Machine Modelling- Interacting State Machines- Modelling a Moore FSM- Modelling a Mealy
FSM- A Generic Priority Encoder- A Simplified Blackjack Program- A Clock Divider- A Generic
Binary Multiplier- A Pulse Counter- A Barrel Shifter- Hierarchy in Design.
Text Book
1. VHDL Primer Third editions: J. Bhasker, Pearson Education Asia.
Reference
1. Introducing VHDL from simulation to synthesis: Sudhakar Yakmandhiri, Pearson Education Asia
NEURAL NETWORKS (ELECTIVE - II)

A805-3 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction - Principles - artificial neuron - activation functions - Single layer & multi-layer
Module 2
Module 3
Counter Propagation networks: Kebenon layer - Training the cohenen layer - Pre initializing the
Module 4
Statistical methods- Boltzmann’s Training - Cauche training - Artificial specific heat methods -
Module 5
dynamic systems - Statistical Hopfield networks – Bi-directional associative memories - Continuous
BAM - Adaptive resonance theory - Architecture classification - Implementation.
Text Book
References

530
ADVANCED MICRO-CONTROLLERS (ELECTIVE – II)

LA805-4 3+1+0
Module 1
Low pin count controllers – Atmel AVR family – ATTiny15L controller - architecture – pin
descriptions – features – addressing modes – I/O space – reset and interrupt handling – reset sources
- Tunable internal oscillator.
Module 2
Timers – Watch dog timer – EEPROM – preventing data corruption – Analog comparator – A/D
converter – conversion timing – ADC noise reduction – PortB – alternate functions – memory
programming – fuse bits – high voltage serial programming – algorithm.
Module 3
National semiconductor COP8 family - COP8CBR9 processor – features – electrical characteristics
– pin descriptions – memory organization –EEPROM - security – brownout reset – in system
programming – boot ROM. Idle timer – Timer1, Timer2, Timer3 -operating modes – PWM mode –
event capture mode
Module 4
Power saving modes – Dual clock operation – Multi input wake up – USART – framing formats –
baud rate generation – A/D conversion – operating modes – prescaler – Interrupts – interrupt vector
table – Watch dog – service window – Micro-wire interface – waveforms.
Module 5
Microchip PIC16 family – PIC16F873 processor – features – architecture – memory organization -
register file map – I/O ports – PORTA - PORTB – PORTC – Data EEPROM and flash program
memory – Asynchronous serial port – SPI mode – I2C mode.
References
1. Design with PIC micro-controllers: John B Peatman, Pearson Education.

2. DS101374: National Semiconductor reference manual.
3. National semiconductor web site – www.national.com
4. 1187D: Atmel semiconductor reference manual.
5. Atmel semiconductor web site – www.atmel.com
6. DS30292B: Microchip reference manual.
7. Microchip semiconductor web site – www.microchip.com

LA 805-5 3-1-0
Module1
531
Introduction to Electronic Commerce - E-Commerce Framework- Anatomy of E-Commerce
Applications - E-Commerce Consumer & Organization Applications- E- Commerce and World
Wide Web - Internet Service Providers - Architectural Framework for Electronic Commerce -
WWW as the Architecture- Hypertext publishing.
Module 2
Network Security - Client-Server Network Security - CS Security Threats – Firewalls - Data &
Message Security - Encrypted Documents - Security on the Web.
Module 3
Electronic Payment Systems - Types of Electronic Payment Systems - Digital Token Based
Electronic Payment System - Smart Cards - Credit Cards - Risk in Electronic Payment Systems -
Designing Electronic Payment Systems.
Module 4
Electronic Data Interchange - EDI Application in Business- EDI-Legal - Security and Privacy Issues
- EDI standardization - EDI Envelope for Message Transport - Internet based EDI - Internal
Information System- Work-flow Automation and Coordination- Supply Chain Management-
Document Library- Types of Digital Documents- Corporate Data Warehouses.
Module 5
Recent Trends in E-Commerce - Multimedia in E-Commerce - Video Conferencing with Digital
Videos - Broad Band Telecommunication- Frame & Cell Relays - Switched Multimegabit Data
Service (SMDS) - Asynchronous Transfer Mode - Mobile Computing and Wireless Computing.
Text Book
1. Frontiers of Electronic Commerce: Ravi Kalakota & Andrew B Whinston.
References
1. Global Electronic Commerce: J Christopher Westland & Theodore H K Clark.

2. E- Commerce The cutting edge of Business: Kamlesh K Bajaj & Debjani Nag.
3. E-Commerce: Strategy Technologies and Applications, TMH
ADVANCED DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSING (ELECTIVE - III)

LA806-1 3+1+0
Module 1
Introduction to Multi-rate Digital Signal Processing – Sample rate reduction - decimation by integer
factors- sampling rate increase – interpolation by integer facto - Design of practical sampling rate
converters: Filter Specification- filter requirement for individual stages - Determining the number of
stages and decimation factors - Sampling rate conversion using poly-phase filter structure – poly-
phase implementation of interpolators.
Module 2
Adaptive Signal Processing – Adaptive filters – Concepts- Adaptive filter as a Noise Canceller -
Other configurations of the adaptive filter - Main components of the adaptive filter – Basic Wiener
532
filter theory – The basic LMS adaptive algorithm – Practical limitations of the basic LMS algorithm
- Recursive Least Square Algorithm – Limitations - Factorization Algorithm.
Module 3
Introduction to two dimensional signal and systems - 2D – DFT Transforms - Properties and
applications - Discrete Hilbert Transform and Discrete Cosine Transform – Properties and
Applications - Short term Fourier Transform - Gabor Transform - Properties and Applications.
Module 4
Wavelets – Wavelet Analysis – The Continuous Wavelet Transform - scaling - shifting - scale and
frequency - The Discrete Wavelet Transform - One Stage filtering - Approximation and Details -
Filter bank analysis – Multilevel Decomposition – Number of levels – Wavelet reconstruction –
Reconstruction filter- Reconstructing Approximations and details- Multilevel Reconstruction -
Wavelet packet synthesis- Typical Applications.
Module 5
General and special purpose DSP Processors - Computer Architecture for signal processing – Havard
Architecture - Pipelining - Hardware Multiply and Accumulate – Special Instructions - Replication -
On-chip Memory Cache - Extended Parallelism - SIMD – VLIW and static super-scalar Processing
- Brief study of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106 processors.
References
1. Digital Signal Processing: Emmanuel C Ifeachor, Barrie W Jrevis, Pearson Education.

2. Theory and Applications of DSP: L.R Rabiner and B gold
3. Electronic filter Desig Hand Book: A .B Williams and FT Taylor, McGraw Hill
4. Wavelets and Subband Coding: Valterli & Kovaceric, PHI.
5. Analog Devices & Texas Instruments Users Manuel of TMS320C4X and ADSP 2106x.

LA806-2 3+1+0
Definition of multimedia, multimedia, hardware, software applications and software environments, -
Module 2 Building Blocks

Module 3 Multimedia Environments

Module 4 Multimedia Programming
533
Module 5 Advanced Multimedia

References
1. Multimedia Programming Objects, Environments & Framework - (Addison-Wesley Publishing

Co.)
2. Multimedia- Making it work - Tay Van Ghan – Osborne Tata Mcgraw Hill
4. Optimizing your Multimedia PC- L.J. Skibbe, Susan Lafe Meister- Comdex
6. Multimedia Producers Bible- Ron Goldberg, Comdex
9. Integrated Multimedia Systems Overview- Palikom, The communication Wall
SYSTEM SOFTWARE (ELECTIVE - III)

LA806-3 3+1+0
Module1 Introduction
Concept of system software, classification of system s/w. Assemblers: over view of assembly
process, elementary ideas of macros & macro processors. Compilers: Overview of compilation
process, Parsing- top down & bottom-up parsing, storage allocation. Interpreters: basic ideas only.
Module 2 Operating Systems

Types of OS, batch processing, multiprogramming, timesharing, real time OS. OS services UNIX
OS –shells, Bourne Shell, C shell- visual editor.
Module 3 Information Management

File system- directory structure, basic file system calls, file protection, allocation methods disk
blocks and inodes in UNIX. Device management.
Module 4 Processor Management

CPU scheduling- scheduling algorithms, Multiprocessor scheduling, Process management in UNIX,
concurrent process- critical section, semaphores, synchronization, concurrent languages.

Swapping, partitions, paging, segmentation, virtual memory concepts, page replacement, dynamic
linking, caching of secondary storage, memory management in UNIX, Deadlocks: cause, detection,
prevention, avoidance, recovery, combined approach to deadlock handling.
References
534
1.System programming and Operating Systems – D M Dhamdhere
2.System Software – an introduction to system Programming – Leland L Beck, 3ed.
3.Operating System – Peterson & Silberschatz, Addison Wesley
4.Operating Systems – Dietal H M
5.Design of UNIX Operating System – Maurice J Bach
6.UNIX System Programming – Stevens.
LA806-4 3+1+0

devices.
Module2 Embedded Hardware & Software Development Environment

Operating systems.



Text Book
1. Programming for Embedded Systems- Dreamtech Software Team, Wiley Dreamtech
Reference
535
DIGITAL IMAGE PROCESSING (ELECTIVE - III)
LA806-5 3+1+0
Module 1
Image representation and modeling - Characteristics of a digital image - Elements of digital image
processing systems - Image digitizers & scanners - Elements of visual perception - Brightness &
contrast - Image sampling & Quantisation - Two dimensional Sampling theorem - Reconstruction of
image from its samples - Aliasing.
Module 2
Image Transforms - Two dimensional orthogonal & unitary transforms - Properties of unitary
transforms - Two dimensional DFT & its properties – Cosine – Hadamard – Haar – Sine - KL
Transforms & their properties.
Module 3
Image Enhancement - Point processing - Histogram modeling & Equalization - Spatial Filtering -
Filtering in the frequency domain - color Image processing.
Module 4
Image Restoration - Degradation model - Inverse filtering - Wiener Filter - Interactive restoration -
Image analysis & vision -basic principles only.
Module 5
Image Coding & Compression- basic principles - run length coding - variable length coding - bit
plane coding - loss-less predictive coding - lossy predictive coding - Transform coding - Image
compression standards.
References
1. Digital image Processing: I.Gonzalez Rafel C, Pearson Education.

2. Fundamentals of digital image processing: Jain Anil K, PHI.
3. Digital Image Processing: Pratt William K, John Wiley.
PROCESS CONTROL LAB (A)

A807 0+0+3
1. Familiarisation of programmable logic controller, development of ladder diagrams and

simulation
2. Comparative study of P, PI, PD and PID controllers
3. Level Control
4. Flow control
5. Temperature control
6. Pressure control
7. Cascade control
8. Stepper Motor Control
9. DC motor speed control
536
10. Binary distillation column control
PROJECT & SEMINAR
A808 0+0+3
Each student is expected to prepare a report on the project work done by him/her and present a paper
highlighting the work done by him/her in a seminar. The student is expected to complete the project
work assigned to him/her and submit the project report by the end of semester.
VIVA – VOCE
A809 0+0+0
The students should prepare for an oral examination on Basic Circuit theory, Digital systems,
Instrumentations, Computer Communication, Microprocessors, Industrial Electronics, Signal Processing etc.
(50 marks University exam)
Viva-Voce examination may be made based on Seminar, Projects, Industrial Visits, Industrial training and
overall performance.
BEST OF LUCK………
REGARDS CC, SNGCE
537

MGU BTech SYLLABUS

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

MGU BTech SYLLABUS

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MGU BTech SYLLABUS

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B.TECH.

SCHEME AND SYLLABI

MAHATMA GANDHI UNIVERSITY

Semesters Commencement Closing Examination

Theory Subjects Practical Subjects

13. Promotion to Higher semesters

e – I & II (Common to all branches)

Course Subject Teaching Period Duration Marks

Duration No. of periods per Marks

Duration No. of periods per Marks

Duration No. of periods per Marks

Duration No. of periods per Marks

Duration No. of periods per Marks

Duration No. of periods per Marks

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING

Teaching Hours Duration of Maximum Marks

Teaching Hours Duration of Maximum Marks

Teaching Hours Duration of Maximum Marks

Teaching Hours Duration of Maximum Marks

Teaching Hours Duration of Maximum Marks

ELECTRONICS & COMMUNICATION ENGINEERING

LA801 Computer Networks 3 1 0 3 50 100 - 150

COMPUTER SCIENCE & ENGINEERING

Teaching Uty. Marks

Teaching Uty. Marks

RT701 Object Oriented 2 1 - 3 50 100 - 150

R709 Project & Seminar 0 0 3 - - - - -

rse Course Teaching Uty. Marks

rse Course Teaching Uty. Marks

rse Course Teaching Uty. Marks

rse Course Teaching Uty. Marks

rse Course Teaching Uty. Marks

Total 16 6 8 - 400 600 200 1200

rse Course Teaching Uty. Marks

Total 18 6 6 - 450 600 150 1200

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

Teaching Periods Duration Marks

Teaching Periods Marks

Teaching Periods Marks

urse Course Subject Teaching Uty Exam

urse Course Subject Teaching Periods Uty Exam Marks

Module 2 Partial Differentiation

Modules 3 Multiple Integrals

Module 4 Laplace Transforms

Module 5 Fourier Series

1. Advanced Engg. Mathematics Erwin Kreyszig

Module 1 Optical Instruments and Applications

Module 4 Magnetic Materials

Module 5 Fibre Optics and its Application

1. Engg. Physics R.K.Gaur and S.L.Gupta

Module 1 Electro Chemistry

Module 2 Plastics and Elastomers

Module 3 Corrosion and protective coatings